A plain and easie calculation of the name, mark, and number of the name of the beast ... humbly presented to the studious observers of Scripture-prophecies, God's works, and the times / by Nathaniel Stephens ... ; whereunto is prefixed, a commendatory epistle, written by Mr. Edm. Calamy.
         Stephens, Nathaniel, 1606?-1678.
      
       
         
           1656
        
      
       Approx. 710 KB of XML-encoded text transcribed from 164 1-bit group-IV TIFF page images.
       
         Text Creation Partnership,
         Ann Arbor, MI ; Oxford (UK) :
         2004-05 (EEBO-TCP Phase 1).
         A61453
         Wing S5450
         ESTC R17480
         12166047
         ocm 12166047
         55320
         
           
            This keyboarded and encoded edition of the work described above is co-owned by the institutions providing financial support to the Early English Books Online Text Creation Partnership. This Phase I text is available for reuse, according to the terms of
             Creative Commons 0 1.0 Universal
            . The text can be copied, modified, distributed and performed, even for commercial purposes, all without asking permission.
          
        
      
       
         Early English books online.
      
       
         (EEBO-TCP ; phase 1, no. A61453)
         Transcribed from: (Early English Books Online ; image set 55320)
         Images scanned from microfilm: (Early English books, 1641-1700 ; 116:6)
      
       
         
           
             A plain and easie calculation of the name, mark, and number of the name of the beast ... humbly presented to the studious observers of Scripture-prophecies, God's works, and the times / by Nathaniel Stephens ... ; whereunto is prefixed, a commendatory epistle, written by Mr. Edm. Calamy.
             Stephens, Nathaniel, 1606?-1678.
             Calamy, Edmund, 1600-1666.
          
           [23], 305 p.
           
             Printed by Ja. Cottrel, for Matth. Keynson ... and Hen. Fletcher ...,
             London :
             1656.
          
           
             Errata: p. [23].
             Reproduction of original in Union Theological Seminary Library, New York.
          
        
      
    
     
       
         Created by converting TCP files to TEI P5 using tcp2tei.xsl, TEI @ Oxford.
         Re-processed by University of Nebraska-Lincoln and Northwestern, with changes to facilitate morpho-syntactic tagging. Gap elements of known extent have been transformed into placeholder characters or elements to simplify the filling in of gaps by user contributors.
      
       
         EEBO-TCP is a partnership between the Universities of Michigan and Oxford and the publisher ProQuest to create accurately transcribed and encoded texts based on the image sets published by ProQuest via their Early English Books Online (EEBO) database (http://eebo.chadwyck.com). The general aim of EEBO-TCP is to encode one copy (usually the first edition) of every monographic English-language title published between 1473 and 1700 available in EEBO.
         EEBO-TCP aimed to produce large quantities of textual data within the usual project restraints of time and funding, and therefore chose to create diplomatic transcriptions (as opposed to critical editions) with light-touch, mainly structural encoding based on the Text Encoding Initiative (http://www.tei-c.org).
         The EEBO-TCP project was divided into two phases. The 25,363 texts created during Phase 1 of the project have been released into the public domain as of 1 January 2015. Anyone can now take and use these texts for their own purposes, but we respectfully request that due credit and attribution is given to their original source.
         Users should be aware of the process of creating the TCP texts, and therefore of any assumptions that can be made about the data.
         Text selection was based on the New Cambridge Bibliography of English Literature (NCBEL). If an author (or for an anonymous work, the title) appears in NCBEL, then their works are eligible for inclusion. Selection was intended to range over a wide variety of subject areas, to reflect the true nature of the print record of the period. In general, first editions of a works in English were prioritized, although there are a number of works in other languages, notably Latin and Welsh, included and sometimes a second or later edition of a work was chosen if there was a compelling reason to do so.
         Image sets were sent to external keying companies for transcription and basic encoding. Quality assurance was then carried out by editorial teams in Oxford and Michigan. 5% (or 5 pages, whichever is the greater) of each text was proofread for accuracy and those which did not meet QA standards were returned to the keyers to be redone. After proofreading, the encoding was enhanced and/or corrected and characters marked as illegible were corrected where possible up to a limit of 100 instances per text. Any remaining illegibles were encoded as <gap>s. Understanding these processes should make clear that, while the overall quality of TCP data is very good, some errors will remain and some readable characters will be marked as illegible. Users should bear in mind that in all likelihood such instances will never have been looked at by a TCP editor.
         The texts were encoded and linked to page images in accordance with level 4 of the TEI in Libraries guidelines.
         Copies of the texts have been issued variously as SGML (TCP schema; ASCII text with mnemonic sdata character entities); displayable XML (TCP schema; characters represented either as UTF-8 Unicode or text strings within braces); or lossless XML (TEI P5, characters represented either as UTF-8 Unicode or TEI g elements).
         
          Keying and markup guidelines are available at the
           Text Creation Partnership web site
          .
        
      
       
         
         
      
    
     
       
         eng
      
       
         
           Bible. -- N.T. -- Revelation -- Commentaries.
        
      
    
     
        2003-11 TCP
        Assigned for keying and markup
      
        2004-01 Apex CoVantage
        Keyed and coded from ProQuest page images
      
        2004-02 Judith Siefring
        Sampled and proofread
      
        2004-02 Judith Siefring
        Text and markup reviewed and edited
      
        2004-04 pfs
        Batch review (QC) and XML conversion
      
    
  
   
     
       
         
         
         
           A
           Plain
           and
           Easie
           CALCULATION
           Of
           the
           NAME
           ,
           MARK
           ,
           and
           NUMBER
           of
           the
           Name
           Of
           the
           BEAST
           .
           Wherein
           these
           three
           Points
           are
           declared
           :
           
             First
             ,
             The
             Name
             (
             in
             the
             Apocalyptical
             style
             )
             is
             no
             other
             ,
             but
             the
             Universal
             Headship
             of
             the
             Beast
             ,
             opposed
             to
             the
             Name
             ,
             Power
             ,
             and
             Headship
             of
             the
             Lamb.
             Secondly
             ,
             The
             Number
             ,
             in
             the
             same
             style
             ,
             is
             the
             Number
             of
             Years
             to
             the
             setting
             up
             of
             this
             Name
             or
             Headship
             ;
             in
             which
             respect
             it
             is
             called
             ,
             The
             Number
             of
             the
             Name
             .
             Thirdly
             ,
             The
             Truth
             of
             the
             Exposition
             is
             cleared
             ,
             by
             agreement
             of
             all
             Particulars
             ,
             both
             in
             the
             Text
             ,
             and
             in
             the
             whole
             Prophecy
             ;
             and
             by
             the
             Event
             of
             things
             ,
             a
             sure
             Interpreter
             of
             Prophecy
             .
          
        
         
           Humbly
           Presented
           To
           the
           studious
           Observers
           of
           Scripture-Prophecies
           ,
           GOD'S
           Works
           ,
           and
           the
           Times
           ,
           By
           NATHANIEL
           STEPHENS
           ,
           Minister
           of
           Penny-Drayton
           in
           Leicestershire
           .
        
         
           Whereunto
           is
           prefixed
           ,
           A
           Commendatory
           EPISTLE
           ,
           written
           by
           Mr.
           
             Edm.
             Calamy
          
           .
        
         
           LONDON
           :
           Printed
           by
           
             Ia.
             Cottrel
          
           ,
           for
           
             Matth
             :
             Keynton
          
           ,
           at
           the
           Fountain
           ;
           
             Nath
             :
             Heathcoat
          
           ,
           at
           the
           gilded
           Acorn
           ,
           and
           
             Hen
             :
             Fletcher
          
           ,
           at
           the
           three
           gilt
           Cups
           in
           S.
           Pauls
           Church-yard
           ,
           1656.
           
        
      
       
         
         
         
           To
           the
           Reader
           .
        
         
           THat
           which
           one
           faith
           of
           the
           Book
           of
           Leviticus
           ,
           
           may
           be
           also
           truly
           said
           of
           the
           Book
           of
           the
           Revelation
           ,
           That
           it
           contains
           as
           many
           Mysteries
           as
           Words
           ,
           and
           as
           many
           Sacraments
           as
           Syllables
           .
           Hence
           it
           was
           ,
           that
           
             Calvin
             ,
             P.
             Martyr
             ,
             Bucer
             ,
             Melancthon
             ,
          
           and
           Luther
           ,
           profess
           ,
           That
           they
           durst
           not
           adventure
           upon
           the
           Interpretation
           of
           it
           ,
           because
           of
           the
           difficulty
           they
           found
           in
           it
           .
           Hence
           it
           is
           also
           ,
           that
           so
           many
           ,
           by
           adventuring
           into
           this
           Sea
           ,
           have
           made
           Shipwrack
           not
           onely
           of
           their
           own
           Credit
           ,
           but
           also
           of
           the
           Truth
           ;
           and
           have
           rather
           revealed
           their
           own
           weakness
           ,
           then
           the
           meaning
           of
           the
           Revelation
           .
           And
           yet
           notwithstanding
           ,
           I
           dare
           not
           but
           much
           commend
           and
           incourage
           those
           that
           soberly
           ,
           humbly
           ,
           diligently
           and
           devoutly
           endeavor
           to
           finde
           out
           the
           meaning
           of
           this
           Book
           ;
           especially
           when
           I
           consider
           that
           saying
           of
           the
           holy
           Ghost
           ,
           
             Blessed
             is
             he
             that
             readeth
             ,
             and
             
             they
             that
             hear
             the
             words
             of
             this
             Proph●…y
             ,
             and
             keep
             those
             things
             which
             are
             written
             therein
             .
          
        
         
         
           Onely
           I
           crave
           leave
           to
           suggest
           ,
           That
           whosoever
           will
           undertake
           to
           unfold
           these
           heavenly
           Mysteries
           ,
           must
           carefully
           avoid
           three
           Rocks
           .
        
         
           1.
           
           He
           must
           take
           heed
           of
           indulging
           too
           much
           to
           Fancy
           :
           For
           Fancy
           is
           not
           a
           sure
           Foundation
           to
           build
           
             Divine
             Interpretations
          
           upon
           .
           Many
           men
           have
           deceived
           themselves
           and
           others
           ,
           by
           trusting
           too
           much
           unto
           the
           Luxuriancy
           of
           their
           Fancy
           .
           There
           is
           a
           learned
           man
           ,
           that
           makes
           Eight
           Chapters
           (
           from
           the
           4th
           to
           the
           12th
           )
           to
           be
           Predictions
           of
           the
           Destruction
           of
           Jerusalem
           by
           Titus
           ,
           &c.
           
           And
           he
           pleaseth
           his
           Fancy
           ,
           making
           the
           Seals
           and
           the
           Trumpets
           to
           agree
           to
           this
           Conceit
           of
           his
           .
           But
           if
           those
           Visions
           were
           presented
           to
           Saint
           John
           in
           Domitians
           time
           ,
           when
           he
           was
           Banished
           into
           Patmos
           (
           which
           was
           after
           the
           Destruction
           of
           Jerusalem
           )
           then
           surely
           this
           Fancy
           of
           his
           will
           prove
           a
           meer
           Dream
           and
           Delusion
           .
           Now
           that
           John
           was
           banished
           in
           Domitians
           time
           ,
           and
           that
           he
           then
           had
           these
           
             Apocalyptical
             Visions
          
           made
           known
           to
           him
           ,
           is
           the
           Opinion
           of
           
             Irenaeus
             ,
             Tertullian
             ,
             Eusebius
             ,
             Hierome
             ,
          
           and
           divers
           
           others
           .
           Indeed
           Epiphanius
           saith
           twice
           ,
           That
           he
           was
           banished
           in
           the
           time
           of
           Claudius
           the
           Emperour
           :
           But
           Petavius
           ,
           that
           Comments
           upon
           him
           ,
           saith
           ,
           That
           he
           was
           herein
           greatly
           mistaken
           .
           Paraeus
           saith
           ,
           It
           was
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           Epiphanii
           ,
           in
           putting
           down
           Claudius
           for
           Domitianus
           .
           Now
           to
           build
           such
           No●…el
           Interpretations
           upon
           a
           Mistake
           of
           Epiphanius
           ,
           must
           needs
           it self
           be
           a
           great
           Mistake
           .
        
         
           2.
           
           He
           must
           take
           heed
           ,
           that
           he
           doth
           not
           appropriate
           what
           is
           spoken
           in
           general
           concerning
           the
           Churches
           of
           Christ
           in
           the
           world
           ,
           unto
           that
           particular
           Church
           and
           Nation
           in
           which
           he
           liveth
           .
           This
           hath
           been
           a
           common
           Error
           of
           many
           Interpreters
           .
           Hence
           it
           is
           ,
           that
           a
           learned
           man
           makes
           one
           of
           the
           Angels
           that
           poured
           out
           the
           Vials
           ,
           
           
           to
           be
           
             Queen
             Elizabeth
          
           ;
           another
           ,
           The
           
             Lord
             Cecil
             ,
             Lord
             Treasurer
             of
             England
             .
          
           Hence
           it
           is
           also
           ,
           that
           we
           have
           been
           so
           much
           deceived
           in
           Expounding
           of
           the
           meaning
           of
           the
           
             two
             Witnesses
             ,
             and
             of
             their
             eminent
             slaughter
             at
             the
             end
             of
             their
             prophesying
             in
             Sack-cloth
             :
          
           Every
           Nation
           ,
           according
           to
           the
           several
           Persecutions
           which
           it
           hath
           been
           under
           ,
           labouring
           to
           make
           the
           eminent
           slaughter
           of
           the
           Witnesses
           ,
           to
           Syncronize
           with
           its
           sad
           condition
           .
           Some
           say
           ,
           
             It
             is
             past
          
           :
           Others
           say
           ,
           
             It
             is
             yet
             to
             come
          
           .
           And
           if
           I
           may
           be
           so
           bold
           as
           to
           interpose
           my
           judgement
           ,
           I
           should
           conceive
           ,
           That
           the
           latter
           of
           these
           two
           Opinions
           is
           the
           truest
           .
           For
           if
           what
           this
           Author
           not
           onely
           saith
           ,
           but
           solidly
           proves
           ,
           be
           true
           ,
           That
           the
           
             Roman
             Antichrist
          
           did
           not
           arise
           till
           606
           years
           after
           Christ
           :
           And
           if
           Antichrist
           must
           reign
           1260
           years
           ;
           and
           if
           this
           eminent
           slaughter
           must
           not
           be
           till
           toward
           the
           end
           of
           the
           Prophecy
           of
           the
           Witnesses
           :
           then
           it
           will
           necessarily
           follow
           ,
           That
           it
           must
           be
           many
           years
           before
           this
           eminent
           slaughter
           will
           happen
           .
        
         
           3.
           
           He
           must
           take
           heed
           ,
           that
           he
           be
           not
           too
           peremptory
           in
           determining
           of
           Times
           and
           Seasons
           ;
           especially
           of
           such
           times
           which
           are
           yet
           to
           be
           fulfilled
           .
           Our
           Saviour
           Christ
           saith
           ,
           
           
             It
             is
             not
             for
             you
             to
             know
             the
             Times
             or
             the
             Seasons
             ,
             which
             the
             Father
             hath
             put
             in
             his
             own
             power
             .
          
           And
           we
           finde
           by
           sad
           Experience
           ,
           That
           they
           that
           have
           been
           most
           confident
           in
           defining
           the
           time
           when
           the
           Jews
           shall
           be
           converted
           ,
           and
           when
           Antichrist
           shall
           be
           destroyed
           ,
           have
           been
           wofully
           deceived
           .
           One
           learned
           man
           makes
           the
           
             Conversion
             of
             the
             Jews
          
           to
           be
           in
           the
           year
           1650
           :
           But
           we
           have
           lived
           to
           see
           this
           bold
           Assertion
           confuted
           .
           Another
           will
           have
           it
           to
           happen
           1655
           ;
           but
           this
           also
           we
           now
           know
           to
           be
           false
           .
           Another
           ,
           upon
           very
           weak
           grounds
           ,
           concludes
           ,
           That
           it
           will
           be
           in
           the
           year
           1656.
           
           Another
           in
           the
           year
           1665.
           
           Such
           peremptory
           Assertions
           and
           Conclusions
           ,
           argue
           great
           confidence
           ,
           but
           
           are
           built
           upon
           such
           weak
           Foundations
           ,
           that
           in
           the
           issue
           it
           will
           appear
           ,
           That
           they
           have
           deceived
           both
           themselves
           and
           others
           .
        
         
           The
           Reverend
           and
           
             Learned
             Author
          
           of
           this
           ensuing
           Tractate
           ,
           hath
           undertaken
           a
           great
           and
           difficult
           task
           ;
           that
           is
           ,
           To
           unriddle
           not
           onely
           the
           Name
           and
           Mark
           of
           the
           Beast
           ,
           but
           also
           the
           
             Number
             of
             his
             Name
          
           :
           which
           he
           hath
           performed
           with
           so
           much
           
             Modesty
             ,
             Humility
             ,
             Industry
          
           ,
           and
           
             Exquisite
             Care
          
           ,
           that
           I
           am
           much
           assured
           ,
           That
           whosoever
           will
           vouchsafe
           to
           read
           what
           he
           hath
           written
           ,
           though
           it
           may
           be
           he
           will
           not
           accord
           with
           him
           in
           all
           that
           he
           saith
           ;
           yet
           he
           will
           much
           commend
           his
           pains
           and
           learning
           ,
           and
           
             bless
             God
          
           for
           the
           good
           he
           receiveth
           by
           it
           .
           It
           cost
           the
           Author
           (
           no
           doubt
           )
           a
           great
           deal
           of
           time
           to
           compose
           it
           :
           And
           it
           is
           pity
           that
           so
           much
           pains
           and
           study
           should
           not
           be
           exposed
           to
           
             Publick
             view
          
           .
           If
           
             Renowned
             and
             Learned
             Mr.
             VINES
          
           (
           to
           whom
           this
           Author
           was
           well
           known
           ,
           and
           who
           had
           the
           perusal
           of
           this
           Work
           )
           were
           now
           alive
           ,
           it
           should
           have
           had
           his
           publick
           Approbation
           :
           But
           he
           is
           now
           with
           God.
           And
           therefore
           give
           me
           leave
           in
           his
           stead
           
             (
             Christian
             Reader
          
           )
           to
           commend
           it
           to
           thy
           diligent
           perusal
           ,
           and
           to
           accompany
           it
           with
           my
           Prayers
           to
           God
           ,
           That
           that
           
             Holy
             Spirit
          
           which
           at
           first
           made
           known
           the
           Revelation
           unto
           Saint
           John
           ,
           would
           reveal
           the
           meaning
           of
           it
           to
           thee
           ,
           and
           me
           ,
        
         
           
             Your
             Servant
             in
             the
             Work
             of
             the
             LORD
             ,
             Edm
             :
             Calamy
             .
          
        
      
       
         
         
           
             TO
             THE
             CONSCIENTIOUS
          
           READER
           ,
           Whosoever
           he
           be
           ,
           that
           hath
           a
           Minde
           given
           to
           him
           to
           calculate
           the
           Times
           ,
           and
           to
           search
           into
           the
           sense
           of
           the
           most
           admired
           Book
           of
           the
           Revelation
           .
        
         
           BEfore
           I
           come
           to
           the
           Body
           of
           the
           Treatise
           ,
           it
           shall
           not
           be
           impertinent
           to
           remove
           a
           few
           prejudices
           in
           the
           beginning
           ;
           and
           that
           I
           may
           the
           better
           be
           understood
           ,
           briefly
           to
           shew
           the
           whole
           Patern
           of
           the
           Work.
           When
           the
           Spirit
           doth
           speak
           of
           the
           Name
           of
           the
           Beast
           ,
           and
           the
           Number
           thereof
           ,
           he
           doth
           insinuate
           ,
           that
           every
           vulgar
           understanding
           is
           not
           fit
           for
           such
           a
           Computation
           :
           For
           ,
           saith
           
           he
           ,
           
             Here
             is
             wisdome
             ;
             let
             him
             that
             hath
             understanding
             count
             the
             Number
             of
             the
             Beast
             ,
             &c.
             
          
           Now
           I
           do
           not
           assume
           to
           my self
           such
           a
           peculiarity
           of
           wisdome
           above
           other
           men
           ;
           for
           none
           hath
           greater
           cause
           to
           have
           the
           consideration
           of
           his
           own
           unworthiness
           to
           be
           set
           before
           him
           .
           But
           because
           I
           have
           had
           a
           long
           time
           a
           great
           inclination
           to
           the
           study
           of
           the
           Prophecies
           ,
           to
           compare
           them
           with
           the
           stories
           of
           the
           Church
           ;
           and
           finding
           the
           Lords
           blessing
           upon
           mine
           endeavors
           ,
           I
           am
           the
           more
           willing
           to
           communicate
           that
           to
           others
           ,
           which
           I
           have
           found
           to
           befor
           my
           private
           satisfaction
           .
           I
           may
           speak
           it
           with
           modesty
           ,
           that
           I
           have
           spared
           no
           pains
           ,
           to
           compare
           the
           whole
           Body
           of
           the
           Prophecy
           ,
           Period
           with
           Period
           ,
           Time
           with
           Time
           ,
           Vision
           with
           Vision
           .
           I
           have
           perused
           many
           Commentaries
           ,
           both
           of
           the
           Modern
           and
           Ancient
           Times
           ;
           and
           used
           all
           means
           convenient
           for
           the
           discovery
           of
           Truth
           .
           And
           therefore
           ,
           though
           in
           this
           kinde
           of
           Learning
           ,
           I
           will
           not
           take
           it
           upon
           me
           to
           be
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           yet
           I
           may
           be
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ▪
           though
           I
           have
           not
           this
           wisedome
           ,
           I
           do
           profess
           my self
           to
           be
           the
           lover
           and
           admirer
           of
           them
           that
           have
           it
           .
        
         
           Now
           whereas
           it
           may
           be
           some
           prejudice
           ,
           that
           in
           this
           Treatise
           mention
           is
           made
           of
           a
           Fifth
           Monarchy
           ,
           and
           the
           Reign
           of
           Christ
           upon
           the
           Earth
           :
           I
           must
           needs
           acknowledge
           the
           truth
           of
           the
           Doctrine
           ,
           rightly
           stated
           ;
           but
           not
           as
           the
           Opinion
           of
           the
           Chiliasts
           ,
           which
           doth
           ordinarily
           congregate
           with
           it
           ,
           many
           Heterogeneal
           Falsities
           ,
           and
           Unsavoury
           Errors
           .
           For
           though
           there
           may
           be
           cause
           to
           maintain
           the
           Reign
           of
           Christ
           upon
           the
           Earth
           ;
           yet
           it
           is
           not
           necessary
           ,
           to
           maintain
           his
           Visible
           and
           Personal
           Reign
           :
           And
           though
           there
           may
           be
           cause
           to
           defend
           the
           Resurrection
           of
           the
           Martyrs
           slain
           in
           all
           the
           times
           of
           the
           Beasts
           Kingdom
           ;
           yet
           it
           is
           not
           necessary
           
           to
           defend
           their
           historical
           ,
           literal
           ,
           and
           corporal
           Resurrection
           at
           the
           beginning
           of
           the
           thousand
           years
           .
           And
           though
           with
           Mr.
           Brightman
           and
           Mr.
           Forbes
           ,
           we
           hold
           the
           
             New
             Ierusalem
          
           to
           be
           the
           glorious
           state
           of
           the
           Church
           upon
           Earth
           ;
           yet
           we
           are
           far
           from
           the
           riot
           of
           their
           Opinions
           ,
           who
           hold
           that
           men
           shall
           live
           without
           Ordinances
           ,
           without
           Sin
           and
           Misery
           ,
           in
           those
           times
           .
        
         
           But
           if
           it
           be
           further
           alledged
           ,
           That
           they
           that
           are
           for
           this
           way
           ,
           the
           very
           best
           of
           them
           have
           many
           absurdities
           :
           I
           answer
           ,
           That
           
             Piscator
             ,
             Alstedius
             ,
             Mede
          
           ,
           and
           some
           others
           ,
           have
           but
           generally
           spoken
           of
           the
           thing
           ,
           and
           have
           not
           descended
           to
           particulars
           .
           And
           as
           they
           have
           had
           great
           reason
           to
           depart
           from
           other
           interpreters
           :
           so
           have
           they
           used
           great
           moderation
           in
           managing
           the
           Point
           ;
           leaving
           many
           things
           for
           the
           discovery
           of
           future
           times
           .
           On
           the
           other
           side
           ,
           for
           the
           1000
           years
           ,
           I
           would
           gladly
           know
           of
           them
           that
           differ
           ,
           Where
           they
           will
           seat
           this
           period
           of
           time
           ?
           If
           they
           will
           say
           ,
           That
           it
           is
           the
           state
           of
           the
           Church
           in
           Heaven
           ;
           then
           let
           them
           shew
           ,
           what
           is
           the
           Battel
           of
           Gog
           and
           Magog
           ;
           and
           how
           the
           Camp
           of
           the
           Saints
           ,
           and
           the
           Beloved
           City
           ,
           may
           be
           besieged
           in
           Heaven
           .
           But
           if
           they
           take
           it
           for
           the
           Reign
           of
           Christ
           upon
           the
           Earth
           ;
           then
           they
           must
           necessarily
           come
           to
           admit
           one
           member
           in
           this
           disjunctive
           :
           They
           must
           say
           ,
           Either
           this
           period
           of
           time
           is
           already
           past
           ,
           or
           else
           it
           is
           to
           come
           :
           If
           it
           be
           already
           past
           ;
           VVhere
           hath
           the
           Church
           enjoyed
           these
           years
           of
           her
           Felicity
           ,
           and
           of
           her
           rest
           from
           Persecutions
           upon
           Earth
           ?
           Adde
           moreover
           to
           all
           this
           ,
           That
           the
           Reign
           of
           Christ
           for
           1000
           years
           ,
           is
           immediately
           opposed
           to
           the
           times
           of
           the
           Reign
           of
           the
           Beast
           ;
           and
           the
           Resurrection
           of
           the
           Martyrs
           ,
           to
           their
           death
           that
           hath
           been
           in
           all
           Antichristian
           times
           :
           Those
           Souls
           are
           onely
           represented
           
           in
           the
           figure
           to
           live
           again
           ,
           that
           were
           
             beheaded
             for
             the
             Word
             of
             God
             ,
             and
             for
             the
             testimony
             of
             Iesus
             ;
             that
             had
             not
             Worshipped
             the
             Beast
             ,
             nor
             received
             his
             Mark
             ,
             &c.
             
          
           If
           therefore
           we
           will
           rightly
           understand
           the
           meaning
           of
           these
           things
           ,
           here
           is
           no
           Visible
           or
           Personal
           Reign
           ,
           as
           some
           do
           imagine
           :
           But
           when
           the
           Gospel
           of
           Christ
           is
           set
           up
           as
           the
           Regent-Law
           among
           the
           Nations
           ;
           then
           the
           Lord
           Christ
           doth
           take
           the
           Kingdome
           ,
           and
           doth
           begin
           to
           Reign
           .
           And
           this
           (
           the
           Lords
           Name
           be
           praised
           )
           is
           begun
           already
           ,
           by
           the
           Preaching
           of
           the
           Eternal
           Gospel
           by
           Luther
           and
           others
           ,
           Rev.
           14.
           6
           ,
           7.
           
           For
           now
           whole
           Nations
           ,
           Kingdomes
           ,
           and
           Common-wealths
           ,
           have
           set
           up
           the
           Faith
           of
           Christ
           ,
           as
           the
           Religion
           of
           the
           State
           ;
           when
           it
           was
           persecuted
           and
           trodden
           down
           before
           ,
           by
           the
           Authority
           of
           the
           Bishop
           of
           Rome
           ,
           and
           by
           all
           States
           and
           Governments
           that
           did
           own
           and
           submit
           to
           him
           as
           Head
           of
           the
           Church
           .
           And
           for
           the
           Martyrs
           ,
           I
           conceive
           ,
           That
           here
           is
           no
           li●…eral
           and
           corporeal
           Resurrection
           of
           their
           Bodies
           :
           onely
           Iohn
           in
           the
           Vision
           and
           in
           the
           Figure
           ,
           saw
           the
           Souls
           of
           them
           that
           were
           Beheaded
           for
           the
           Testimony
           of
           Jesus
           :
           And
           the
           times
           of
           the
           Antichristian
           Tyranny
           being
           ended
           ,
           he
           saw
           their
           deliverance
           and
           emersion
           from
           under
           this
           kinde
           of
           death
           .
        
         
           These
           things
           I
           thought
           good
           more
           largely
           to
           note
           ,
           to
           take
           off
           the
           prejudice
           of
           the
           Millenarian
           Opinion
           .
           Meer
           necessity
           doth
           compel
           me
           to
           maintain
           ,
           that
           which
           I
           conceive
           to
           be
           a
           truth
           of
           God
           :
           And
           if
           the
           matter
           were
           rightly
           stated
           ,
           I
           believe
           here
           will
           be
           nothing
           found
           ,
           that
           will
           cross
           the
           Analogie
           of
           the
           Christian
           Faith
           ,
           the
           Authority
           of
           the
           Magistrate
           ,
           and
           the
           support
           of
           the
           Publick
           Ministery
           ;
           but
           rather
           it
           will
           establish
           all
           these
           things
           .
        
         
         
           But
           to
           come
           a
           little
           more
           near
           to
           the
           main
           scope
           of
           the
           present
           Discourse
           :
           Seeing
           I
           take
           666
           to
           be
           the
           Number
           of
           years
           to
           the
           setting
           up
           of
           the
           Name
           of
           Universal
           Headship
           ;
           in
           this
           ,
           perhaps
           ,
           they
           may
           be
           offended
           ,
           that
           are
           against
           all
           Calculation
           of
           Prophetical
           Numbers
           .
           But
           for
           such
           a
           way
           in
           general
           ,
           we
           have
           good
           ground
           from
           the
           Scriptures
           ,
           both
           of
           the
           Old
           and
           New
           Testament
           .
           If
           any
           have
           gone
           too
           far
           in
           other
           Points
           ,
           to
           determine
           to
           a
           particular
           year
           ,
           before
           the
           Prophecy
           hath
           been
           fulfilled
           ,
           and
           so
           have
           been
           mistaken
           ;
           in
           the
           present
           case
           there
           cannot
           be
           the
           same
           suspicion
           of
           Falshood
           .
           VVhen
           we
           say
           ,
           That
           666
           is
           the
           Number
           of
           years
           ,
           to
           the
           setting
           up
           of
           the
           Name
           or
           Universal
           Headship
           of
           the
           Beast
           (
           in
           which
           respect
           it
           is
           called
           the
           Number
           of
           the
           Name
           )
           in
           this
           we
           are
           on
           the
           surer
           side
           ;
           because
           the
           truth
           of
           the
           thing
           is
           already
           verified
           and
           made
           good
           ,
           in
           the
           experience
           of
           the
           Church
           .
           And
           whereas
           all
           the
           Reformed
           Churches
           ,
           and
           our
           late
           Assembly
           of
           Divines
           in
           their
           Confession
           of
           Faith
           ,
           Chap.
           25.
           
           Sect.
           6.
           do
           place
           the
           formality
           of
           Antichristianism
           ,
           in
           this
           ,
           as
           the
           Bishop
           of
           Rome
           doth
           make
           himself
           Head
           of
           the
           Church
           ,
           in
           the
           place
           of
           Christ
           ,
           the
           true
           Head
           of
           the
           Church
           ;
           and
           so
           consequently
           ,
           is
           no
           other
           but
           a
           counter-Christ
           :
           In
           this
           we
           agree
           wi●…h
           them
           ;
           and
           it
           is
           the
           substance
           of
           the
           ensuing
           Discourse
           .
           And
           for
           a
           particular
           accommodation
           of
           the
           Text
           ,
           we
           will
           proceed
           in
           brief
           ,
           to
           shew
           what
           understanding
           we
           have
           of
           those
           passages
           that
           have
           layen
           in
           the
           dark
           so
           long
           .
           The
           Reader
           ,
           perhaps
           ,
           will
           be
           the
           better
           prepared
           to
           understand
           ,
           when
           he
           shall
           have
           a
           short
           Description
           of
           the
           things
           that
           shall
           more
           largely
           be
           delivered
           afterwards
           .
        
         
           First
           ,
           for
           the
           Name
           of
           the
           Beast
           ,
           the
           subject
           of
           
           the
           Number
           ,
           I
           do
           not
           take
           it
           in
           the
           ordinary
           way
           ,
           for
           Lateinos
           ,
           or
           any
           such
           Grammatical
           Name
           :
           But
           the
           Name
           ,
           in
           the
           sense
           of
           the
           Prophecy
           ,
           is
           the
           Power
           ,
           Headship
           ,
           and
           Dominion
           of
           the
           Beast
           .
           If
           there
           had
           been
           a
           true
           discovery
           of
           the
           Name
           in
           this
           sense
           ,
           I
           may
           confidently
           believe
           ,
           That
           the
           Mysterie
           of
           the
           Number
           had
           not
           layen
           in
           obscurity
           all
           this
           while
           .
        
         
           Secondly
           ,
           for
           the
           time
           of
           the
           manifestation
           of
           this
           Name
           or
           Headship
           ,
           the
           greater
           part
           of
           Protestant
           Writers
           ,
           and
           in
           a
           manner
           all
           that
           have
           spoken
           of
           these
           things
           with
           any
           solidity
           ,
           affirm
           ,
           That
           it
           began
           solemnly
           ,
           publickly
           ,
           and
           by
           Authority
           ,
           to
           be
           set
           up
           in
           the
           Decree
           ,
           under
           the
           Emperour
           Phocas
           .
           This
           was
           the
           remarkable
           time
           of
           the
           rising
           of
           the
           two-horned
           Beast
           out
           of
           the
           Earth
           ;
           and
           this
           we
           say
           is
           exactly
           666
           years
           ,
           from
           the
           beginning
           of
           the
           Roman
           as
           the
           fourth
           Metal-Kingdome
           .
           In
           which
           respect
           ,
           the
           Number
           is
           called
           ,
           
             The
             Number
             of
             the
             Name
          
           ;
           that
           is
           ,
           the
           Number
           that
           doth
           decypher
           ,
           specifie
           and
           characterize
           the
           Name
           or
           Headship
           ,
           in
           the
           most
           remarkable
           beginning
           and
           edition
           thereof
           .
        
         
           But
           seeing
           the
           great
           Question
           will
           be
           ,
           concerning
           the
           beginning
           of
           the
           Roman
           as
           the
           fourth
           Metal-Kingdome
           ;
           Let
           us
           consider
           the
           whole
           Systeme
           and
           Body
           of
           these
           Kingdomes
           ,
           and
           so
           proceed
           by
           Analogie
           .
        
         
           The
           first
           is
           the
           Babylonian
           .
           Now
           if
           we
           enquire
           where
           this
           Kingdome
           did
           begin
           ;
           Not
           from
           Nabonasser
           ,
           not
           from
           any
           Babylonian
           King
           immediately
           ensuing
           ,
           but
           from
           Nebuchadnezzar
           :
           For
           of
           him
           it
           is
           particularly
           said
           ,
           
             Thou
             art
             this
             Head
             of
             Gold
             ,
          
           Dan.
           2.
           
           He
           first
           brought
           the
           Church
           of
           the
           Iews
           under
           the
           obedience
           
           of
           the
           People
           of
           Babel
           ;
           and
           in
           him
           therefore
           we
           are
           to
           settle
           the
           beginning
           of
           the
           Babylonian
           ,
           as
           the
           first
           Metal-Kingdome
           .
        
         
           The
           second
           is
           the
           Persian
           .
           And
           here
           also
           if
           we
           examine
           when
           this
           Metal-Kingdome
           did
           begin
           ;
           not
           simply
           from
           that
           time
           ,
           when
           that
           people
           began
           to
           have
           a
           Form
           of
           Government
           ;
           but
           from
           that
           time
           ,
           as
           they
           began
           to
           exercise
           Monarchical
           Dominion
           in
           and
           over
           the
           Continent
           of
           the
           Church
           .
           This
           came
           to
           pass
           in
           the
           times
           of
           Cyrus
           ;
           in
           him
           therefore
           the
           Persian
           doth
           commence
           ,
           as
           the
           second
           Metal-Kingdome
           .
        
         
           The
           third
           is
           the
           Grecian
           .
           And
           if
           we
           proceed
           in
           the
           same
           method
           ,
           we
           must
           not
           generally
           and
           indefinitely
           look
           to
           the
           times
           when
           the
           people
           of
           Greece
           began
           to
           have
           Rule
           and
           Government
           among
           them
           ;
           but
           when
           they
           began
           their
           Soveraign
           Dominion
           over
           the
           People
           of
           the
           Iews
           .
           Now
           this
           came
           to
           pas●…
           〈◊〉
           〈◊〉
           times
           of
           Alexander
           the
           Great
           ,
           who
           is
           〈◊〉
           〈◊〉
           in
           〈◊〉
           particular
           sense
           ,
           expresly
           called
           
             The
             first
             King
          
           ,
           Da●…
           .
           8.
           21.
           
           In
           him
           then
           we
           are
           to
           fix
           the
           true
           〈◊〉
           and
           beginning
           of
           the
           Grecian
           ,
           as
           the
           third
           Metal-Kingdome
           .
        
         
           The
           fourth
           is
           the
           Roman
           .
           And
           if
           we
           proceed
           by
           the
           same
           Analogie
           ,
           it
           will
           be
           easie
           to
           finde
           when
           that
           Nation
           did
           begin
           ,
           as
           the
           fourth
           Metal-Kingdome
           :
           and
           here
           we
           must
           not
           reckon
           from
           the
           time
           of
           Iulius
           or
           
             Augustus
             Caesar
          
           ,
           but
           from
           that
           time
           when
           the
           Roman
           Legions
           first
           entred
           Ierusalem
           ;
           when
           they
           brought
           the
           Land
           of
           Iudea
           in
           subjection
           ;
           when
           they
           erected
           their
           Government
           in
           those
           Countreys
           ,
           which
           formerly
           did
           belong
           to
           the
           House
           of
           David
           ;
           and
           when
           in
           their
           particular
           time
           ,
           they
           did
           begin
           to
           exercise
           the
           
           same
           cruelty
           and
           hardness
           against
           the
           people
           of
           the
           Iews
           ,
           as
           the
           
             Babylonians
             ,
             Persians
          
           ,
           and
           Grecians
           had
           done
           before
           ,
           under
           each
           of
           their
           Empires
           respectively
           .
           Here
           we
           are
           to
           set
           the
           beginning
           of
           the
           Roman
           ,
           as
           the
           fourth
           Metal-Kingdome
           .
           Now
           this
           came
           to
           pass
           60
           years
           before
           the
           Birth
           of
           the
           Lord
           ,
           and
           666
           before
           the
           going
           forth
           of
           the
           Decree
           ,
           That
           the
           Bishop
           of
           Rome
           should
           be
           Head
           over
           all
           Churches
           .
           And
           so
           we
           have
           the
           clear
           meaning
           of
           the
           Text
           ,
           
             Let
             him
             that
             hath
             wisdome
             ,
             count
             the
             Number
             of
             the
             Beast
          
           ;
           and
           he
           shall
           finde
           ,
           That
           the
           Number
           of
           his
           Name
           ,
           Government
           ,
           and
           Universal
           Headship
           ,
           in
           the
           first
           Institution
           thereof
           ,
           is
           666
           years
           from
           the
           beginning
           of
           the
           Roman
           as
           the
           fourth
           Metal-Kingdome
           .
           And
           therefore
           666
           is
           rightly
           and
           Apocalyptically
           called
           ,
           The
           Number
           of
           the
           Name
           .
           By
           this
           Character
           ,
           the
           Church
           in
           the
           days
           of
           Iohn
           ,
           and
           so
           downward
           ,
           had
           they
           given
           themselves
           to
           subtilty
           of
           observation
           ,
           in
           the
           discovery
           of
           the
           Prophetical
           times
           ;
           by
           wisdome
           some
           of
           them
           ,
           perhaps
           ,
           might
           have
           found
           out
           the
           particular
           time
           of
           the
           rising
           of
           the
           two-horned
           Beast
           out
           of
           the
           Earth
           ;
           and
           the
           time
           of
           the
           first
           visible
           appearing
           of
           this
           Name
           or
           Headship
           ,
           set
           up
           in
           the
           greatest
           derogation
           to
           his
           Soveraignty
           and
           Dominion
           ,
           that
           is
           onely
           Lord
           and
           Head
           of
           the
           Church
           .
        
         
           There
           is
           one
           thing
           in
           the
           Text
           ,
           which
           if
           it
           be
           attentively
           considered
           ,
           will
           abundantly
           confirm
           the
           truth
           of
           the
           Interpretation
           .
           It
           is
           expresly
           said
           ,
           
             Let
             him
             that
             hath
             wisdome
             ,
             count
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             the
             Number
             of
             the
             Beast
             ;
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             for
             it
             is
             the
             Number
             of
             a
             Man.
          
           Though
           there
           may
           seem
           to
           be
           great
           difference
           between
           these
           two
           ;
           yet
           in
           the
           case
           we
           now
           speak
           of
           ,
           they
           are
           but
           one
           and
           the
           same
           .
           For
           as
           Daniel
           numbreth
           the
           four
           great
           Empires
           and
           Revolutions
           of
           Time
           ,
           by
           so
           
           many
           Regions
           ,
           Parts
           and
           Divisions
           of
           the
           Body
           of
           Man
           :
           In
           which
           regard
           ,
           it
           is
           called
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           
             The
             Number
             of
             a
             Man
          
           ,
           Dan.
           2.
           
           So
           he
           doth
           decypher
           the
           same
           Tyrannical
           Empires
           ,
           and
           the
           same
           Revolutions
           of
           Time
           ,
           by
           four
           great
           Beasts
           ;
           in
           which
           respect
           it
           is
           called
           ,
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           
             The
             Number
             of
             the
             Beast
          
           .
        
         
           To
           my
           understanding
           ,
           the
           Spirit
           doth
           as
           good
           as
           point
           with
           the
           finger
           to
           this
           way
           of
           Interpretation
           .
           For
           if
           it
           be
           a
           duty
           for
           
             him
             that
             hath
             wisdome
             ,
             to
             count
             the
             Number
             of
             the
             Beast
          
           ;
           the
           Question
           will
           be
           ,
           What
           Rule
           shall
           he
           number
           by
           ,
           that
           so
           he
           may
           finde
           out
           the
           Account
           ?
           The
           Answer
           is
           plain
           ,
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           
             It
             is
             the
             Number
             of
             a
             Man.
          
           Let
           him
           count
           by
           the
           changes
           of
           Empire
           ,
           and
           by
           the
           Revolutions
           of
           Time
           in
           Daniels
           Image
           ;
           And
           so
           the
           event
           doth
           fully
           answer
           the
           Prediction
           :
           for
           from
           the
           beginning
           of
           the
           Roman
           as
           the
           fourth
           Metal-Kingdome
           ,
           there
           are
           exactly
           666
           years
           ,
           to
           the
           setting
           up
           of
           the
           Name
           or
           Universal
           Headship
           of
           the
           Bishop
           of
           Rome
           .
        
         
           Onely
           the
           followers
           of
           Iunius
           ,
           such
           as
           
             Piscator
             ,
             Polanus
             ,
             Willet
             ,
             Rolloc
             ,
             Deodate
             ,
          
           and
           others
           ,
           will
           say
           ,
           How
           can
           the
           Number
           take
           date
           from
           the
           beginning
           of
           the
           Roman
           as
           the
           fourth
           Metal-Kingdome
           ,
           when
           the
           Roman
           is
           no
           Metal-Kingdome
           ,
           but
           doth
           begin
           at
           the
           end
           of
           all
           those
           Kingdomes
           ?
           To
           satisfie
           my
           own
           understanding
           ,
           and
           the
           understanding
           of
           others
           ,
           I
           have
           bestowed
           the
           more
           pains
           ,
           to
           try
           the
           force
           of
           their
           Arguments
           :
           for
           either
           we
           or
           they
           must
           greatly
           mistake
           in
           the
           Point
           .
           However
           ,
           let
           it
           be
           true
           as
           they
           affirm
           ,
           that
           not
           the
           Roman
           ,
           but
           the
           Seleucian
           ,
           is
           the
           fourth
           &
           last
           Metal-Kingdome
           ;
           then
           all
           the
           Metal-Kingdomes
           must
           necessarily
           determine
           and
           expireat
           the
           destruction
           of
           
           the
           Seleucian
           .
           And
           so
           ,
           according
           to
           the
           tenor
           of
           this
           Doctrine
           ,
           we
           shall
           have
           that
           which
           will
           singularly
           agree
           with
           our
           way
           of
           Calculation
           .
           For
           if
           the
           account
           be
           made
           from
           the
           end
           of
           all
           four
           Metal-Kingdomes
           ,
           from
           the
           
             terminus
             ad
             quem
          
           ;
           in
           the
           same
           series
           and
           method
           of
           Computation
           ,
           there
           will
           be
           666
           years
           to
           the
           setting
           up
           of
           the
           Name
           or
           Headship
           of
           the
           Bishop
           of
           Rome
           .
           And
           so
           we
           shall
           concord
           with
           the
           Principles
           of
           Iunius
           ;
           and
           as
           to
           the
           Point
           in
           hand
           ,
           he
           and
           we
           shall
           
             facere
             paria
          
           .
        
         
           This
           is
           in
           brief
           the
           understanding
           which
           I
           have
           ,
           both
           of
           the
           Name
           of
           the
           Beast
           ,
           and
           the
           Number
           thereof
           .
           Now
           if
           any
           shall
           ask
           ,
           What
           proof
           ,
           or
           what
           evidence
           I
           have
           to
           hold
           forth
           the
           truth
           of
           the
           thing
           ?
           I
           answer
           ,
           The
           process
           of
           the
           Demonstration
           ,
           is
           by
           Conglobation
           ,
           and
           by
           a
           full
           Induction
           of
           Singulars
           ;
           and
           it
           is
           this
           in
           effect
           :
           Where
           there
           is
           a
           true
           correspondence
           with
           all
           the
           Circumstances
           of
           the
           Text
           ,
           the
           most
           remarkable
           Passages
           of
           the
           Prophesie
           ,
           and
           the
           Event
           of
           things
           ;
           that
           is
           a
           true
           Interpretation
           .
           But
           the
           present
           is
           such
           :
           
             Ergo
             ,
             &c.
          
           
           All
           the
           burthen
           of
           proof
           will
           rest
           upon
           the
           Assumption
           .
           I
           have
           to
           this
           purpose
           applied
           it
           then
           to
           all
           the
           Circumstances
           of
           the
           Text
           ,
           Chap.
           13.
           
           I
           have
           compared
           it
           with
           the
           main
           drift
           and
           scope
           of
           the
           Spirit
           ,
           Chap.
           17.
           
           I
           have
           examined
           it
           by
           the
           tenor
           of
           the
           Apostles
           Doctrine
           ,
           2
           Thess.
           2.
           
           And
           last
           of
           all
           ,
           I
           have
           shewed
           how
           it
           doth
           agree
           with
           the
           several
           passages
           in
           the
           body
           of
           the
           Prophesie
           ,
           and
           with
           the
           event
           of
           things
           .
        
         
           And
           now
           ,
           Reader
           ,
           whosoever
           thou
           art
           ,
           that
           hast
           a
           minde
           given
           thee
           ,
           rightly
           to
           calculate
           the
           Number
           of
           the
           Beast
           ,
           I
           leave
           it
           to
           thee
           to
           reade
           ,
           to
           meditate
           ,
           to
           examine
           ,
           and
           to
           judge
           of
           the
           things
           that
           I
           have
           written
           .
           
           If
           I
           have
           anywhere
           deviated
           from
           the
           Truth
           ,
           I
           desire
           thy
           brotherly
           Admonition
           :
           And
           if
           anywhere
           it
           shall
           please
           the
           Lord
           ,
           to
           make
           this
           Treatise
           an
           Instrument
           of
           light
           to
           thy
           understanding
           ,
           know
           ,
           That
           thou
           hast
           this
           Treasure
           brought
           to
           thee
           in
           an
           earthen
           Vessel
           ,
           that
           the
           praise
           may
           be
           of
           God
           alone
           .
           And
           so
           I
           rest
           ,
        
         
           
             Thine
             in
             the
             LORD
             ,
             N.
             S.
             
          
        
      
       
         
         
           THE
           CONTENTS
           of
           the
           CHAPTERS
           Of
           the
           ensuing
           TREATISE
           .
        
         
           
             CHAP.
             I.
             
          
           
             COncerning
             the
             Profitableness
             ,
             and
             the
             Use
             of
             the
             Discovery
             ,
             
               Pag.
               1
            
          
           
             CHAP.
             II.
             
          
           
             Concerning
             the
             Possibility
             of
             the
             Discovery
             ;
             and
             how
             that
             there
             are
             certain
             demonstrative
             Principles
             to
             bring
             the
             Truth
             to
             light
             ,
             
               pag.
               12
            
          
           
             CHAP.
             III.
             
          
           
             That
             the
             Name
             of
             the
             Beast
             is
             not
             the
             word
             Lateinos
             ,
             or
             any
             other
             Grammatical
             word
             ;
             but
             the
             Name
             is
             ,
             The
             Universal
             Power
             and
             Headship
             of
             the
             Beast
             ,
             immediately
             opposed
             
             to
             the
             Power
             ,
             Dominion
             ,
             and
             Headship
             of
             the
             Lamb
             ,
             
               pag.
               18
            
          
           
             CHAP.
             IV.
             
          
           
             Concerning
             the
             Number
             of
             the
             Name
             of
             the
             Beast
             ;
             where
             it
             is
             shewed
             ,
             That
             the
             Name
             or
             Universal
             Headship
             began
             publickly
             to
             he
             Established
             under
             the
             Emperor
             Phocas
             ,
             666
             years
             from
             the
             beginning
             of
             the
             Roman
             ,
             as
             the
             Fourth
             Metal-Kingdome
             ,
             
               pag.
               36
            
          
           
             CHAP.
             V.
             
          
           
             That
             the
             Roman
             is
             the
             Fourth
             and
             Last
             Metal-Kingdome
             in
             Daniels
             Image
             ;
             and
             the
             truth
             of
             this
             is
             proved
             against
             the
             Positions
             of
             
               Junius
               ,
               Broughton
               ,
               Piscator
            
             ,
             Dr.
             Willet
             ,
             and
             others
             ,
             
               pag.
               46
            
          
           
             CHAP.
             VI.
             
          
           
             That
             the
             Beginning
             of
             the
             Roman
             ,
             as
             the
             Fourth
             Metal-Kingdome
             ,
             is
             not
             from
             the
             time
             of
             Julius
             ,
             or
             
               Augustus
               Caesar
            
             ,
             or
             from
             any
             other
             ●…ulgar
             〈◊〉
             ;
             but
             precisely
             from
             that
             instant
             ,
             when
             the
             〈◊〉
             o●…
             God
             came
             under
             the
             Dominion
             of
             the
             Romans
             ,
             60
             years
             before
             the
             Birth
             of
             the
             Lord
             ,
             and
             666
             before
             the
             going
             ●…orth
             of
             the
             Dec●…ee
             ,
             That
             the
             Bishop
             of
             Rome
             should
             be
             Head
             o●…r
             all
             the
             Churches
             ,
             
               pag.
               116
            
          
           
             CHAP.
             VII
             .
          
           
             The
             whole
             process
             of
             the
             Discourse
             is
             repeated
             :
             That
             there
             are
             666
             years
             from
             the
             Beginning
             of
             the
             Roman
             as
             the
             Fourth
             Metal-Kingdome
             ,
             to
             the
             setting
             up
             of
             the
             Name
             or
             Universal
             Headship
             of
             the
             Bishop
             of
             Rome
             ;
             And
             that
             this
             is
             the
             meaning
             of
             the
             Spirit
             in
             the
             Revelation
             ,
             when
             
             he
             speaketh
             of
             the
             Name
             of
             the
             Beast
             ,
             and
             of
             the
             Number
             of
             the
             Name
             ,
             
               pag.
               158
            
          
           
             CHAP.
             VIII
             .
          
           
             The
             Truth
             of
             the
             Interpretation
             is
             proved
             ,
             from
             the
             remarkable
             Circumstances
             of
             the
             Text
             it self
             ,
             
               Revel
               .
               13.
               16
               ,
               17
               ,
               18.
               pag.
               165
            
          
           
             CHAP.
             IX
             .
          
           
             The
             Truth
             of
             the
             Interpretation
             is
             further
             Confirmed
             ,
             from
             the
             scope
             of
             the
             Seventeenth
             Chapter
             of
             the
             
               Revelation
               ,
               pag.
               212
            
          
           
             CHAP.
             X.
             
          
           
             A
             List
             of
             Fifteen
             Principles
             drawn
             from
             the
             main
             sense
             of
             the
             Prophecy
             ,
             concerning
             the
             Beast
             ,
             his
             Name
             ,
             Mark
             ,
             and
             Number
             ;
             by
             the
             Position
             of
             which
             ,
             the
             present
             Interpretation
             is
             established
             .
             Also
             ,
             the
             several
             Expositions
             of
             Mr.
             Potter
             and
             other
             Writers
             ,
             are
             brought
             to
             Tryal
             ,
             
               pag.
               219
            
          
           
             CHAP.
             XI
             .
          
           
             A
             brief
             Description
             of
             the
             Doctrine
             of
             S.
             Paul
             ,
             2
             Thess.
             2.
             
             And
             how
             he
             doth
             fully
             agree
             with
             the
             present
             Interpretation
             ,
             
               pag.
               238
            
          
           
             CHAP.
             XII
             .
          
           
             The
             Application
             of
             the
             whole
             :
             Where
             mention
             is
             made
             first
             ,
             of
             those
             things
             that
             are
             directly
             Antichristian
             ,
             
               pag.
               247
            
          
           
             CHAP.
             XIII
             .
          
           
             Concerning
             that
             which
             is
             Antichristian
             by
             Analogie
             and
             Reduction
             ,
             
               pag.
               251
            
          
           
             
             CHAP.
             XIV
             .
          
           
             What
             these
             things
             are
             which
             are
             Antichristian
             onely
             by
             the
             Position
             of
             some
             Circumstances
             ,
             as
             they
             are
             truly
             Christian
             by
             the
             Position
             of
             others
             .
             The
             Conclusion
             of
             the
             whole
             ,
             
               pag.
               277
            
          
           
             CHAP.
             XV.
             
          
           
             Concerning
             those
             things
             which
             are
             not
             Antichristian
             ,
             but
             are
             onely
             falsly
             so
             called
             by
             the
             Separation
             ,
             
               pag.
               291
            
          
        
      
       
         
         
           There
           are
           divers
           faults
           to
           be
           amended
           :
           some
           are
           lesser
           ,
           which
           we
           leave
           to
           the
           courtesie
           of
           the
           Reader
           to
           pass
           by
           ;
           others
           there
           are
           that
           do
           more
           notably
           mar
           and
           deface
           the
           sense
           :
           which
           we
           do
           desire
           that
           he
           will
           amend
           .
        
         
           
             
               
                 Page
              
               
                 Line
              
               
                 For
              
               
                 Reade
              
            
             
               
                 94
              
               
                 3
              
               
                 briefly
              
               
                 fully
              
            
             
               
                 135
              
               
                 23
              
               
                 be
                 brought
              
               
                 be
                 there
                 brought
              
            
             
               
                 142
              
               
                 11
              
               
                 in
                 the
                 fourth
              
               
                 is
                 the
                 fourth
              
            
             
               
                 ibid.
                 
              
               
                 27
              
               
                 secret
              
               
                 sacred
              
            
             
               
                 185
              
               
                 29
              
               
                 seventh
                 Angel
              
               
                 seven
                 Angels
              
            
             
               
                 193
              
               
                 20
              
               
                 typical
                 proof
              
               
                 topical
                 proof
              
            
             
               
                 216
              
               
                 21
              
               
                 Augustus
              
               
                 Angulus
              
            
             
               
                 229
              
               
                 12
              
               
                 to
                 that
                 Government
              
               
                 in
                 that
                 Government
              
            
          
        
         
           Some
           Hebrew
           words
           are
           not
           right
           printed
           ,
           
             pag.
             51
             ,
             101
             ,
             118
             ,
             153.
             
          
           The
           terms
           in
           the
           Conclusion
           of
           the
           first
           Argument
           ,
           
             pag.
             117.
          
           are
           misplaced
           .
           And
           so
           are
           the
           words
           in
           another
           expression
           ,
           
             pag.
             57.
             lin
             .
             17
             ,
             18.
             
          
        
      
    
     
       
         
         
           A
           plain
           EXPOSITION
           OF
           THE
           Number
           of
           the
           Name
           of
           the
           Beast
           ,
           Revel
           .
           13.
           vers
           .
           18.
           
        
         
           
             CHAP.
             I.
          
           Concerning
           the
           Profitableness
           ,
           and
           the
           Use
           of
           the
           Discovery
           .
        
         
           BEfore
           I
           come
           positively
           to
           set
           down
           the
           meaning
           of
           the
           Number
           ,
           and
           what
           the
           Holy
           Spirit
           doth
           hereby
           particularly
           intend
           ,
           it
           shall
           be
           profitable
           to
           speak
           Two
           things
           :
           First
           ,
           Concerning
           the
           Use
           of
           the
           Discovery
           :
           Secondly
           ,
           Concerning
           the
           Possibility
           thereof
           .
        
         
           For
           the
           Use
           :
           It
           is
           a
           matter
           of
           some
           Concernment
           ,
           that
           I
           should
           treat
           of
           this
           in
           the
           beginning
           ;
           first
           ,
           out
           of
           respect
           to
           that
           Common
           Maxime
           ,
           
             Let
             all
             things
             be
          
           
           
             done
             to
             Edification
          
           .
           I
           shall
           therefore
           endeavour
           to
           let
           it
           appear
           to
           the
           Christian
           Reader
           ,
           how
           he
           may
           be
           builded
           up
           in
           the
           Faith
           ,
           and
           how
           in
           this
           Argument
           he
           may
           have
           matter
           of
           Correction
           ,
           Reproof
           ,
           and
           Instruction
           in
           Righteousness
           .
           I
           shall
           do
           it
           the
           rather
           ,
           because
           many
           ,
           in
           these
           times
           ,
           are
           preoccupated
           with
           prejudice
           .
           Paraeus
           in
           his
           Commentary
           upon
           the
           Revelation
           ,
           and
           in
           the
           Preface
           of
           the
           Work
           ,
           hath
           these
           words
           :
           
             Apocalypsin
             interpretari
             non
             est
             nodos
             aenigmatum
             omnium
             solvere
             ,
             apices
             omnes
             a●…u
             fodere
             ,
             nihil
             omnino
             ignorare
             ,
             vel
             quid
             Imago
             ,
             quid
             Character
             ,
             quid
             Numerus
             Nominis
             Bestiae
             ,
             quid
             Bestia
             ipsa
             ,
          
           &c.
           
           By
           this
           it
           is
           evident
           ,
           what
           the
           forenamed
           Interpreter
           doth
           judge
           concerning
           these
           Points
           ;
           to
           wit
           ,
           The
           Beast
           ,
           the
           Name
           ,
           the
           Mark
           ,
           &
           the
           Number
           of
           the
           Name
           .
           He
           taketh
           them
           to
           be
           but
           Punctilio's
           and
           Niceties
           in
           this
           kind
           of
           Learning
           .
           But
           saving
           the
           great
           worth
           of
           so
           judicious
           an
           Author
           ,
           I
           shall
           now
           endeavour
           to
           make
           good
           the
           Contradictory
           to
           his
           Assertion
           ,
           and
           shall
           prove
           these
           to
           be
           Points
           very
           Momentous
           ,
           and
           much
           conducing
           to
           the
           knowledge
           of
           the
           whole
           Prophecie
           .
        
         
           First
           ,
           If
           you
           take
           the
           Book
           of
           the
           Revelation
           in
           the
           main
           Scope
           ,
           it
           is
           for
           the
           most
           part
           carried
           on
           in
           the
           Description
           of
           the
           Kingdom
           of
           the
           Beast
           ,
           in
           the
           time
           of
           the
           beginning
           and
           continuance
           of
           that
           Kingdom
           as
           it
           standeth
           in
           Diametral
           opposition
           to
           the
           Kingdom
           of
           the
           Lamb
           ,
           and
           of
           his
           Saints
           .
           The
           Lord
           Jesus
           Christ
           ,
           that
           sent
           his
           Angel
           of
           ●…et
           purpose
           ,
           to
           sig●…e
           to
           the
           Churches
           things
           that
           must
           shortly
           come
           to
           pass
           ,
           ●…endeth
           a
           great
           part
           of
           the
           Prophetical
           Narration
           in
           the
           description
           of
           the
           Beasts
           Kingdom
           ,
           and
           in
           the
           delineation
           of
           the
           Name
           ,
           Mark
           ,
           and
           Number
           ;
           the
           essential
           Badges
           and
           Characters
           of
           the
           Kingdom
           .
           Therefore
           it
           must
           needs
           be
           a
           matter
           very
           behooveful
           to
           the
           right
           understanding
           of
           other
           parts
           of
           the
           Prophecie
           ,
           to
           define
           in
           the
           beginning
           what
           is
           signified
           under
           these
           Em●…ems
           ,
           or
           typical
           Expressions
           .
        
         
           Secondly
           ,
           The
           holy
           Spirit
           speaking
           of
           the
           Image
           of
           the
           Beast
           ,
           〈◊〉
           Name
           ,
           Mark
           ,
           and
           the
           Number
           of
           his
           Name
           ,
           〈◊〉
           〈◊〉
           ,
           That
           i●…
           giving
           worship
           to
           the
           Image
           ,
           and
           in
           〈◊〉
           〈◊〉
           〈◊〉
           Mark
           ,
           the
           great
           sin
           of
           the
           world
           hath
           consisted
           
           in
           these
           latter
           times
           ,
           chap.
           13.
           vers
           .
           11
           ,
           12
           ,
           13
           ,
           14
           ,
           15
           ,
           16.
           
           Now
           then
           if
           the
           great
           sin
           of
           the
           world
           hath
           primarily
           and
           chiefly
           consisted
           in
           these
           things
           ,
           it
           is
           a
           most
           material
           Point
           to
           finde
           out
           what
           the
           holy
           Spirit
           doth
           mean
           by
           these
           symbolical
           and
           figurative
           expressions
           .
           I
           cannot
           mourn
           for
           a
           sin
           privately
           in
           heart
           ,
           neither
           can
           I
           publickly
           reprove
           it
           in
           others
           ,
           but
           I
           must
           first
           know
           what
           the
           sin
           is
           .
           But
           that
           this
           Idolatry
           may
           more
           fully
           appear
           ,
           let
           us
           amplifie
           it
           by
           two
           Circumstances
           .
        
         
           First
           ,
           By
           the
           Circumstance
           of
           Place
           ,
           where
           ,
           and
           how
           far
           it
           hath
           been
           used
           .
           And
           here
           it
           is
           plain
           ,
           in
           all
           the
           parts
           of
           the
           Dominion
           of
           the
           Beast
           ,
           none
           may
           buy
           nor
           sell
           ,
           but
           he
           that
           worshipeth
           the
           Image
           ,
           and
           receiveth
           the
           Mark.
           He
           causeth
           all
           ,
           both
           small
           and
           great
           ,
           rich
           and
           poor
           ,
           free
           and
           bond
           ,
           to
           be
           subject
           to
           his
           Laws
           .
           If
           you
           look
           to
           the
           Latitude
           of
           the
           Dominion
           ,
           the
           Scripture
           speaketh
           of
           a
           very
           large
           and
           ample
           Dominion
           that
           the
           Beast
           hath
           .
           For
           the
           Nations
           were
           deceived
           ,
           chap.
           20.
           vers
           .
           3.
           
           All
           the
           world
           worshiped
           the
           Beast
           ,
           chap.
           13.
           vers
           .
           8.
           
           The
           Kings
           of
           the
           Earth
           did
           also
           agree
           to
           give
           their
           power
           to
           the
           Beast
           ,
           chap.
           17.
           vers
           .
           17.
           
           Therefore
           the
           Dominion
           of
           the
           Beast
           must
           be
           very
           great
           :
           and
           by
           consequent
           ,
           the
           sin
           must
           be
           an
           Oecumenical
           sin
           ,
           practised
           in
           all
           the
           parts
           and
           precincts
           of
           so
           large
           a
           Dominion
           .
           Seeing
           also
           it
           is
           not
           the
           sin
           of
           one
           particular
           Nation
           ,
           City
           ,
           or
           Church
           ,
           but
           in
           a
           manner
           the
           general
           and
           the
           common
           Apostacy
           of
           the
           times
           ;
           therefore
           it
           is
           of
           great
           moment
           to
           be
           considered
           .
           The
           sin
           of
           Ieroboam
           is
           much
           spoken
           of
           in
           the
           Scripture
           ,
           that
           it
           was
           a
           sin
           of
           departure
           from
           the
           true
           God
           ,
           and
           that
           it
           continued
           long
           after
           his
           death
           :
           yet
           for
           all
           this
           ,
           it
           was
           only
           practised
           within
           the
           compass
           of
           the
           Ten
           Tri●…es
           ,
           so
           long
           as
           they
           continued
           a
           Kingdom
           .
           But
           now
           the
           worship
           of
           the
           Beast
           ,
           and
           the
           receiving
           of
           his
           Mark
           ,
           have
           overspread
           all
           Nations
           in
           the
           Christian
           world
           ;
           only
           there
           have
           been
           some
           faithful
           Witnesses
           which
           have
           stood
           for
           the
           Truth
           ,
           and
           have
           been
           slain
           for
           the
           testimonies
           sake
           .
        
         
           Secondly
           ,
           For
           the
           Circumstance
           of
           time
           ,
           how
           long
           shall
           it
           be
           that
           men
           must
           worship
           the
           Beast
           and
           receive
           his
           Mark
           ?
           This
           must
           be
           in
           all
           the
           times
           of
           the
           Kingdom
           of
           the
           second
           
           Beast
           .
           For
           though
           I
           do
           not
           fully
           agree
           with
           Mr
           Mede
           (
           as
           may
           appear
           by
           that
           which
           I
           shall
           afterwards
           deliver
           )
           That
           the
           ten-horn'd
           &
           the
           two-horn'd
           Beast
           are
           exact
           contemporaries
           in
           all
           their
           times
           ;
           yet
           in
           substance
           ,
           and
           in
           the
           main
           ,
           they
           are
           said
           to
           be
           of
           equal
           continuance
           .
           The
           time
           of
           the
           ten-horn'd
           Beast
           is
           42
           months
           ,
           or
           1260
           prophetical
           dayes
           ,
           or
           ordinary
           years
           .
           So
           then
           ,
           some
           small
           proportion
           being
           deducted
           ,
           this
           period
           will
           be
           the
           time
           also
           of
           the
           two-horned
           Beast
           ,
           and
           of
           the
           worlds
           receiving
           the
           Mark
           and
           the
           Image
           which
           he
           made
           .
           Therefore
           seeing
           this
           sin
           shall
           continue
           many
           ages
           together
           ,
           it
           behoveth
           us
           to
           make
           the
           more
           diligent
           search
           into
           the
           matter
           .
           Nebuchadnezzar
           set
           up
           a
           great
           Image
           ,
           as
           the
           type
           of
           the
           Babylonian
           Majesty
           ;
           he
           caused
           all
           the
           States
           of
           that
           Empire
           to
           come
           together
           to
           the
           Dedication
           of
           the
           Image
           ;
           he
           commanded
           them
           all
           under
           pain
           of
           death
           to
           fall
           down
           before
           it
           :
           He
           had
           a
           note
           of
           distinction
           also
           ,
           to
           discern
           between
           the
           worshipers
           of
           the
           Image
           ,
           and
           those
           that
           refused
           that
           worship
           .
           Yet
           all
           this
           was
           done
           as
           it
           were
           in
           an
           instant
           of
           time
           .
           But
           for
           the
           Image
           of
           the
           Beast
           ,
           set
           up
           in
           honour
           of
           the
           Roman
           Majesty
           ;
           this
           hath
           continued
           many
           ages
           .
           Here
           all
           Nations
           ,
           Languages
           ,
           and
           People
           are
           required
           to
           worship
           :
           here
           is
           a
           penalty
           laid
           upon
           all
           that
           shall
           refuse
           to
           yield
           Obedience
           to
           the
           Command
           ;
           and
           here
           is
           a
           mark
           to
           distinguish
           between
           those
           that
           are
           the
           Beast's
           ,
           and
           those
           that
           are
           none
           of
           his
           .
           These
           Tyrannical
           and
           Idolatrous
           practises
           have
           continued
           ,
           by
           the
           fore-appointment
           and
           counsel
           of
           God
           ,
           for
           many
           generations
           .
           Therefore
           considering
           the
           largeness
           of
           the
           place
           ,
           and
           the
           long
           continuance
           of
           the
           time
           that
           the
           world
           hath
           sinned
           ,
           and
           doth
           yet
           continue
           sinning
           against
           Christ
           in
           these
           very
           things
           ;
           we
           may
           conclude
           ,
           That
           it
           is
           no
           nice
           curiosity
           to
           finde
           what
           is
           meant
           by
           the
           Beast
           ,
           his
           Name
           ,
           Mark
           ,
           and
           the
           Number
           of
           the
           Name
           .
        
         
           Thirdly
           ,
           If
           we
           consider
           the
           grievous
           Judgements
           of
           God
           denounced
           against
           all
           those
           that
           worship
           the
           Beast
           ,
           his
           Image
           ,
           and
           receive
           his
           Mark
           in
           their
           Forehead
           and
           their
           Right
           hand
           ,
           that
           they
           shall
           drink
           of
           the
           Wine
           of
           the
           wrath
           of
           God
           ,
           which
           is
           poured
           out
           without
           mixture
           in
           the
           Cup
           of
           his
           Indignation
           :
           
           Also
           ,
           that
           they
           shall
           be
           tormented
           with
           fire
           and
           brimstone
           ,
           in
           the
           presence
           of
           the
           holy
           Angels
           and
           of
           the
           Lamb
           ;
           and
           the
           smoak
           of
           their
           burning
           shall
           ascend
           for
           ever
           and
           ever
           ,
           chap.
           14.
           vers
           .
           9
           ,
           10
           ,
           11.
           
           The
           learned
           Grasserus
           rightly
           observeth
           ,
           That
           in
           the
           whole
           Canon
           of
           Scripture
           there
           is
           nowhere
           a
           more
           terrible
           judgement
           threatned
           ,
           than
           that
           which
           is
           here
           denounced
           against
           the
           men
           that
           worship
           the
           Beast
           ,
           and
           receive
           his
           Mark.
           And
           shall
           we
           account
           it
           but
           a
           curiosity
           ,
           to
           finde
           out
           the
           meaning
           of
           Christ
           in
           these
           things
           ,
           in
           which
           also
           the
           precious
           Souls
           of
           many
           thousands
           are
           so
           deeply
           hazarded
           ,
           and
           that
           for
           ever
           ,
           to
           their
           eternal
           perdition
           ,
           if
           they
           repent
           not
           ?
           Our
           Saviour
           fore-seeing
           the
           great
           Calamities
           that
           should
           befal
           the
           Church
           and
           People
           of
           the
           Iews
           at
           the
           Destruction
           of
           Ierusalem
           ,
           had
           great
           tenderness
           of
           heart
           toward
           them
           .
           At
           the
           instant
           of
           his
           Suffering
           ,
           he
           said
           ,
           
             Daughters
             of
             Ierusalem
             ,
             weep
             not
             for
             me
             ,
             but
             weep
             for
             your selves
             ,
             and
             for
             your
             Children
             :
             For
             the
             dayes
             are
             coming
             in
             which
             they
             shall
             say
             ,
             Blessed
             are
             the
             barren
             that
             do
             not
             bear
             ,
             and
             the
             Papps
             that
             never
             gave
             suck
             :
          
           Luk.
           23.
           28
           ,
           29
           ,
           30.
           
           Even
           so
           at
           this
           present
           day
           ,
           though
           the
           friends
           and
           followers
           of
           the
           Church
           of
           Rome
           are
           the
           greatest
           Enemies
           that
           we
           have
           ;
           yet
           nevertheless
           had
           we
           the
           heart
           of
           Christ
           ,
           and
           did
           we
           see
           the
           greatness
           of
           their
           sin
           ,
           and
           the
           grievousness
           of
           the
           wrath
           to
           come
           ,
           we
           would
           have
           tender
           Affections
           towards
           them
           ,
           we
           would
           mourn
           over
           them
           with
           many
           tears
           .
           But
           how
           shall
           we
           do
           this
           ,
           if
           we
           our selves
           do
           not
           understand
           what
           this
           sin
           is
           ,
           and
           what
           judgment
           the
           Lord
           will
           bring
           upon
           them
           for
           these
           things
           ?
           Therefore
           it
           is
           no
           idle
           Speculation
           to
           meditate
           on
           this
           subject
           ,
           which
           concerneth
           the
           sin
           of
           the
           world
           ,
           and
           the
           great
           judgment
           of
           God
           because
           of
           the
           sin
           .
        
         
           Fourthly
           ,
           If
           we
           consider
           the
           special
           Cause
           of
           the
           Martyrdom
           and
           the
           Sufferings
           of
           the
           Saints
           ,
           it
           was
           specially
           for
           these
           things
           .
           And
           therefore
           in
           the
           beginning
           of
           the
           Beasts
           Kingdom
           ,
           and
           Edict
           was
           made
           ,
           That
           all
           who
           would
           not
           worship
           the
           Image
           should
           be
           put
           to
           death
           ,
           chap.
           13.
           vers
           .
           15.
           
           The
           Victory
           of
           the
           Saints
           also
           that
           stood
           upon
           the
           glassie
           Sea
           ,
           mingled
           with
           fire
           ,
           was
           of
           them
           that
           had
           overcome
           the
           Beast
           ,
           
           his
           Image
           ,
           Mark
           ,
           Name
           ,
           and
           the
           Number
           of
           his
           Name
           ,
           chap.
           15.
           v.
           2
           ,
           3.
           
           At
           the
           beginning
           of
           the
           thousand
           years
           also
           ,
           those
           Souls
           sa●…e
           upon
           Thrones
           ,
           and
           judgment
           was
           given
           to
           them
           that
           were
           beheaded
           for
           the
           witness
           of
           Jesus
           ,
           and
           for
           the
           Word
           of
           God
           ,
           that
           had
           not
           worshiped
           the
           Beast
           ,
           nor
           received
           his
           Mark.
           We
           may
           conclude
           then
           ,
           That
           these
           were
           the
           special
           Causes
           of
           the
           Martyrs
           Sufferings
           in
           all
           the
           times
           of
           the
           Beasts
           Kingdom
           ,
           and
           were
           the
           eminent
           object
           of
           their
           Victory
           and
           Crown
           in
           the
           end
           of
           the
           Kingdom
           .
           Now
           shall
           we
           think
           the
           knowledge
           of
           these
           things
           to
           be
           a
           nice
           Speculation
           ?
           I
           think
           that
           there
           is
           nothing
           more
           seriously
           to
           be
           thought
           of
           ;
           and
           I
           believe
           also
           that
           it
           is
           the
           minde
           of
           Christ
           ,
           that
           we
           should
           so
           judge
           of
           the
           matter
           .
        
         
           Fifthly
           ,
           If
           we
           consider
           the
           object
           of
           the
           Vials
           ,
           upon
           what
           kind
           of
           persons
           they
           are
           poured
           out
           .
           They
           are
           poured
           out
           upon
           a
           People
           that
           are
           distinguished
           by
           such
           Badges
           and
           Cognizances
           as
           these
           ,
           
             That
             had
             the
             Mark
             of
             the
             Beast
             ,
             and
             worshipped
             his
             Image
             ,
          
           chap.
           16.
           vers
           .
           1
           ,
           2
           ,
           10
           ,
           13.
           
           Now
           then
           ,
           if
           we
           would
           know
           what
           the
           Vials
           are
           ,
           and
           wherein
           the
           justice
           of
           God
           doth
           appear
           in
           his
           pouring
           forth
           of
           them
           in
           these
           times
           (
           for
           these
           are
           the
           times
           of
           the
           Vials
           )
           it
           would
           be
           a
           Point
           very
           necessary
           and
           material
           to
           the
           opening
           of
           this
           Doctrine
           ,
           to
           shew
           what
           is
           meant
           by
           the
           Image
           of
           the
           Beast
           ,
           and
           the
           Mark
           of
           his
           Name
           :
           for
           the
           Vials
           ,
           full
           of
           the
           wrath
           of
           God
           ,
           have
           their
           several
           and
           respective
           operations
           upon
           these
           kind
           of
           men
           .
           Therefore
           it
           is
           no
           matter
           of
           light
           curiosity
           ,
           to
           discover
           what
           these
           things
           are
           ,
           and
           what
           kind
           of
           persons
           are
           deciphered
           and
           set
           forth
           under
           these
           Characters
           .
        
         
           Sixthly
           ,
           Considering
           the
           Promises
           that
           are
           made
           to
           the
           Church
           ,
           That
           after
           the
           time
           of
           the
           Beasts
           Kingdom
           ,
           then
           the
           Dragon
           shall
           deceive
           the
           Nations
           no
           more
           ,
           chap.
           20.
           v.
           3.
           
           That
           wherein
           the
           Nations
           have
           been
           deceived
           ,
           in
           all
           the
           times
           of
           the
           Beasts
           Kingdom
           ,
           is
           in
           the
           matter
           of
           worshipping
           the
           Beast
           ,
           in
           adoring
           his
           Image
           ,
           and
           in
           receiving
           his
           Mark
           ;
           as
           may
           appear
           ,
           chap.
           13.
           v.
           13
           ,
           14.
           chap.
           20.
           v.
           3.
           
           Further
           ,
           whereas
           it
           is
           said
           that
           the
           two-horned
           Beast
           did
           deceive
           them
           that
           dwell
           on
           the
           Earth
           ,
           by
           the
           means
           of
           those
           
           Miracles
           he
           had
           power
           to
           do
           ;
           Here
           we
           must
           not
           think
           that
           this
           deceiving
           of
           the
           Nations
           was
           only
           at
           that
           instant
           ;
           but
           he
           hath
           deceived
           them
           ,
           and
           doth
           deceive
           them
           ,
           and
           will
           deceive
           them
           in
           all
           the
           times
           of
           his
           Kingdom
           .
           And
           it
           is
           particularly
           said
           of
           the
           Kings
           of
           the
           Earth
           ,
           to
           wit
           ,
           The
           deluded
           Kings
           ,
           that
           they
           shall
           agree
           to
           give
           their
           Kingdoms
           to
           the
           Beast
           ,
           till
           the
           words
           of
           God
           shall
           be
           fulfilled
           .
           When
           those
           times
           are
           once
           fulfilled
           ,
           the
           Dragon
           shall
           deceive
           the
           Nations
           no
           more
           .
           For
           though
           he
           and
           the
           Beast
           are
           two
           ,
           yet
           in
           this
           business
           they
           are
           but
           one
           .
           The
           Dragon
           deceiveth
           the
           Nations
           by
           the
           Beast
           ,
           the
           Beast
           is
           the
           Dragons
           Vice-gerent
           in
           deceiving
           the
           Nations
           .
           When
           the
           Beast
           is
           destroyed
           ,
           the
           Dragon
           also
           shall
           be
           bound
           up
           ,
           that
           he
           shall
           deceive
           the
           Nations
           no
           more
           .
           If
           we
           descend
           to
           particulars
           ,
           and
           enquire
           wherein
           the
           Nations
           have
           been
           deceived
           ,
           the
           whole
           Scope
           of
           the
           Prophecie
           doth
           direct
           us
           to
           the
           worship
           of
           the
           Beast
           ,
           and
           to
           the
           receiving
           of
           his
           Mark.
           It
           is
           no
           frivolous
           study
           then
           ,
           to
           dive
           into
           the
           Sense
           ,
           and
           to
           search
           into
           the
           Meaning
           of
           these
           things
           ,
           seeing
           they
           are
           the
           subject-matter
           of
           such
           an
           universal
           Delusion
           .
           And
           who
           can
           tell
           when
           these
           things
           shall
           come
           to
           be
           more
           clearly
           known
           to
           the
           Consciences
           of
           them
           which
           have
           been
           formerly
           seduced
           ?
           When
           they
           shall
           come
           also
           more
           perfectly
           and
           fully
           to
           know
           what
           the
           Spirit
           meaneth
           by
           the
           Name
           of
           the
           Beast
           ,
           his
           Mark
           ,
           and
           Image
           ,
           and
           how
           they
           have
           greatly
           sinned
           against
           Christ
           in
           yielding
           to
           these
           things
           .
           Who
           can
           tell
           what
           a
           mean
           this
           may
           be
           of
           their
           undeceiving
           ?
           We
           may
           probably
           suppose
           that
           the
           States
           and
           Governments
           of
           this
           world
           may
           more
           easily
           be
           brought
           off
           from
           their
           subjection
           to
           the
           Beast
           ,
           when
           we
           shall
           define
           the
           true
           natural
           meaning
           of
           the
           Spirit
           ,
           and
           lay
           the
           definition
           before
           the
           Conscience
           .
           In
           the
           great
           Controversies
           betwixt
           the
           See
           of
           Rome
           and
           other
           States
           ,
           it
           is
           remarkable
           what
           the
           Champions
           of
           that
           Church
           do
           usually
           propound
           ;
           they
           speak
           much
           of
           the
           stability
           of
           that
           Seat
           ,
           grounded
           upon
           the
           Promise
           ,
           
             Tues
             Petrus
          
           ,
           &c.
           
           And
           in
           very
           deed
           ,
           if
           we
           look
           to
           experience
           ,
           how
           many
           Kingdoms
           ,
           how
           many
           Churches
           in
           the
           East
           and
           in
           the
           West
           have
           totally
           perished
           ,
           and
           have
           come
           to
           
           nothing
           ,
           when
           that
           Church
           and
           See
           hath
           continued
           in
           the
           greatest
           Glory
           ,
           and
           that
           for
           many
           Ages
           ?
           Now
           this
           being
           laid
           as
           a
           Foundation
           ,
           is
           not
           here
           great
           reason
           alledged
           to
           the
           Conscience
           ,
           that
           the
           States
           of
           Christendom
           should
           yet
           continue
           their
           Obedience
           to
           the
           Catholick
           ,
           Apostolick
           ,
           Romane
           See
           ,
           as
           they
           call
           it
           ?
           None
           can
           deny
           but
           That
           Authority
           hath
           been
           wonderously
           and
           miraculosly
           preserved
           in
           all
           times
           ,
           and
           in
           all
           changes
           of
           time
           .
           And
           for
           mine
           own
           part
           ,
           I
           do
           openly
           confess
           ,
           That
           to
           me
           it
           is
           a
           great
           wonder
           to
           see
           a
           State
           o●…
           Government
           to
           continue
           so
           many
           Ages
           ,
           and
           yet
           to
           abide
           one
           and
           the
           same
           still
           .
           But
           when
           I
           read
           the
           Scriptures
           ,
           I
           find
           that
           the
           Roman
           Dominion
           ,
           in
           the
           last
           and
           Antichristian
           Edition
           ,
           must
           continue
           a
           long
           time
           ,
           ●…o
           the
           admiration
           of
           the
           world
           .
           The
           Caesarean
           Majesty
           was
           to
           continue
           some
           good
           space
           of
           time
           ;
           and
           that
           being
           cut
           off
           ,
           the
           Antichristian
           is
           to
           be
           restored
           ,
           as
           the
           wonder
           of
           the
           world
           .
           And
           therefore
           it
           is
           said
           ,
           That
           all
           they
           whose
           Names
           are
           not
           written
           in
           the
           Book
           of
           Life
           from
           the
           foundation
           of
           the
           world
           ,
           shall
           admire
           
             when
             they
             behold
             the
             Beast
             ,
             that
             was
             ,
             and
             is
             not
             ,
             and
             yet
             is
             ,
          
           chap.
           17.
           vers
           .
           8.
           
           Now
           then
           ,
           if
           we
           can
           make
           it
           appear
           what
           is
           the
           meaning
           of
           the
           Spirit
           in
           these
           things
           ,
           when
           the
           Antichristian
           Kingdom
           began
           and
           how
           long
           it
           must
           continue
           ;
           if
           we
           can
           shew
           what
           is
           meant
           by
           the
           Name
           ,
           Mark
           ,
           and
           the
           Number
           of
           the
           Name
           ,
           and
           how
           all
           these
           are
           applicable
           to
           the
           universal
           headship
           of
           the
           See
           of
           Rome
           ,
           and
           to
           the
           worlds
           living
           in
           subjection
           to
           that
           headship
           ;
           if
           these
           things
           can
           be
           cleared
           (
           as
           by
           the
           Lords
           assistance
           I
           shall
           endeavour
           to
           clear
           them
           in
           the
           process
           of
           this
           Treatise
           )
           I
           hope
           that
           this
           will
           not
           any
           longer
           be
           accounted
           a
           fruitless
           inquiry
           ,
           which
           may
           be
           the
           mean
           (
           under
           the
           grace
           of
           God
           )
           to
           redeem
           the
           Souls
           of
           men
           from
           such
           a
           thraldom
           .
           For
           ,
           put
           case
           you
           have
           to
           do
           with
           such
           a
           one
           who
           placeth
           a
           great
           part
           of
           his
           Religion
           in
           yielding
           subjection
           to
           the
           universal
           headship
           of
           the
           Bishop
           of
           Rome
           ;
           You
           shall
           do
           much
           toward
           his
           Conviction
           ,
           when
           out
           of
           the
           Scriptures
           in
           general
           you
           shall
           be
           able
           to
           prove
           such
           an
           Obligation
           to
           be
           contrary
           to
           Faith
           in
           Christ.
           And
           this
           many
           worthy
           Writers
           have
           done
           already
           .
           Yet
           you
           shall
           do
           
           more
           ,
           when
           out
           of
           this
           particular
           Scripture
           you
           shall
           be
           able
           solidly
           to
           prove
           the
           Profession
           of
           such
           an
           Allegiance
           to
           be
           the
           Mark
           of
           the
           Beast
           .
           If
           they
           that
           separate
           from
           our
           Church
           ,
           and
           cite
           that
           Scripture
           ,
           
             Come
             out
             of
             Babylon
             my
             People
             ,
          
           would
           first
           define
           what
           Babylon
           is
           ,
           and
           that
           the
           Church
           of
           England
           is
           the
           Babylon
           that
           St.
           Iohn
           speaks
           of
           ,
           they
           would
           carry
           on
           their
           business
           more
           demonstratively
           and
           Apocalyptically
           .
           Till
           this
           be
           done
           ,
           they
           do
           but
           beat
           the
           Air.
           The
           same
           Law
           may
           be
           given
           to
           us
           ,
           when
           we
           charge
           the
           Roman
           Catholicks
           that
           they
           are
           such
           that
           receive
           the
           Mark
           of
           the
           Beast
           .
           To
           justifie
           the
           charge
           ,
           we
           should
           define
           in
           the
           first
           place
           what
           the
           Beast
           ,
           his
           Name
           ,
           Mark
           ,
           Image
           ,
           and
           the
           Number
           of
           his
           Name
           do
           signifie
           ;
           and
           when
           this
           is
           done
           ,
           we
           should
           shew
           how
           these
           things
           do
           agree
           to
           the
           head-ship
           of
           the
           Roman
           Bishop
           .
           If
           there
           be
           no
           performance
           of
           this
           ,
           how
           can
           we
           accuse
           them
           of
           a
           sin
           ,
           and
           we
           our selves
           be
           altogether
           ignorant
           what
           that
           sin
           is
           ?
           Therefore
           the
           right
           determination
           of
           these
           things
           is
           no
           trivial
           matter
           ,
           as
           some
           imagine
           .
        
         
           Seventhly
           ,
           If
           we
           consider
           the
           Reign
           of
           Christ
           upon
           the
           Earth
           for
           1000
           years
           ,
           to
           the
           better
           understanding
           of
           this
           ,
           it
           is
           behoveful
           for
           us
           ,
           first
           of
           all
           to
           know
           what
           is
           the
           Reign
           of
           the
           Beast
           over
           those
           that
           have
           the
           Mark
           ,
           and
           worship
           the
           Image
           .
           For
           it
           is
           the
           Scope
           of
           the
           Spirit
           to
           set
           the
           Reign
           of
           Christ
           in
           immediate
           opposition
           to
           the
           Reign
           of
           the
           Beast
           .
           If
           therefore
           we
           can
           well
           understand
           the
           nature
           and
           manner
           of
           the
           Beast's
           Reigning
           over
           those
           that
           have
           his
           Mark
           ,
           and
           worship
           his
           Image
           ,
           we
           shall
           be
           the
           more
           able
           to
           see
           the
           nature
           of
           the
           Reign
           of
           Christ.
           For
           the
           knowledge
           of
           one
           contrary
           doth
           exceedingly
           conduce
           to
           the
           knowledge
           of
           the
           other
           ,
           specially
           in
           that
           Point
           wherein
           the
           contrariety
           doth
           stand
           ;
           and
           the
           contrariety
           between
           the
           Lamb
           and
           the
           Beast
           doth
           lie
           in
           the
           Soveraignty
           .
           Now
           for
           the
           clearing
           of
           this
           Truth
           ,
           we
           can
           prove
           it
           from
           the
           Scope
           of
           the
           Prophecie
           ,
           and
           from
           the
           coherence
           of
           the
           Visions
           .
           For
           in
           the
           former
           part
           of
           the
           Prophecie
           ,
           from
           the
           beginning
           of
           the
           13
           chapt
           .
           to
           the
           end
           of
           the
           19
           ,
           it
           is
           the
           Plot
           of
           the
           Spirit
           to
           describe
           the
           Kingdom
           of
           the
           Beast
           in
           its
           first
           Institution
           ,
           in
           the
           greatness
           of
           its
           
           power
           ,
           in
           its
           cruelty
           against
           the
           Saints
           ,
           in
           the
           time
           of
           its
           continuance
           ,
           and
           in
           other
           Adjuncts
           of
           that
           Dominion
           .
           At
           the
           end
           of
           the
           19
           chap.
           he
           sheweth
           how
           the
           Beast
           is
           cast
           into
           the
           Lake
           of
           Fire
           ;
           and
           when
           this
           is
           done
           ,
           he
           beginneth
           to
           ●…peak
           of
           the
           Reign
           of
           Christ
           ,
           and
           of
           the
           Resurrection
           of
           the
           Martyrs
           .
           From
           the
           whole
           Scope
           of
           the
           Prophecie
           it
           is
           evident
           ,
           That
           the
           Reign
           of
           the
           Beast
           is
           opposed
           to
           the
           Reign
           of
           Christ
           for
           1000
           years
           :
           where
           the
           Beast
           doth
           make
           an
           end
           ,
           at
           that
           instant
           of
           time
           the
           Reign
           of
           Christ
           doth
           begin
           ;
           And
           where
           the
           death
           of
           the
           Martyrs
           is
           fully
           complete
           ,
           there
           the
           Resurrection
           and
           emersion
           out
           of
           the
           Antichristian
           Death
           doth
           immediately
           ensue
           .
        
         
           Now
           for
           the
           Consequents
           that
           follow
           the
           destruction
           of
           the
           Beast's
           Kingdom
           ,
           Iohn
           tells
           us
           ,
           
             I
             saw
             an
             Angel
             come
             down
             from
             Heaven
             ,
             having
             the
             Key
             of
             the
             bottomless
             P●…t
             ,
             and
             a
             great
             chain
             in
             his
             hand
             ;
             and
             he
             laid
             hold
             on
             the
             Dragon
             ,
             and
             bound
             him
          
           1000
           years
           .
           Further
           ,
           
             he
             did
             cast
             him
             into
             the
             bottomless
             pit
             ,
             and
             set
             a
             Seal
             upon
             him
             ,
             that
             he
             should
             deceive
             the
             Nations
             no
             more
             ,
          
           chap.
           20.
           vers
           .
           1
           ,
           2.
           
           Now
           if
           the
           question
           be
           put
           ,
           How
           ,
           and
           wherein
           were
           the
           Nations
           deceived
           ?
           I
           Answer
           ,
           It
           was
           in
           the
           worship
           of
           the
           Beast
           ,
           and
           in
           receiving
           his
           Mark
           :
           for
           it
           is
           mentioned
           in
           the
           two
           last
           verses
           of
           the
           former
           Chapter
           ,
           
             That
             the
             false
             Prophet
             deceived
             them
             that
             received
             the
             Mark
             of
             the
             Beast
             ,
             and
             worshipped
             his
             Image
             .
          
           When
           the
           Beast
           was
           destroyed
           ,
           then
           the
           Dragon
           was
           bound
           up
           ,
           and
           so
           an
           end
           was
           put
           to
           the
           deceiving
           of
           the
           Nations
           .
        
         
           By
           all
           that
           hath
           been
           spoken
           ,
           it
           is
           evident
           ,
           That
           the
           Reign
           of
           the
           Beast
           in
           all
           his
           times
           ,
           is
           immediately
           opposed
           to
           the
           thousand
           years
           of
           the
           Reign
           of
           Christ.
           Therefore
           ,
           if
           we
           would
           know
           the
           nature
           of
           the
           Reign
           of
           Christ
           ,
           in
           what
           manner
           he
           shall
           Reign
           upon
           the
           Earth
           ,
           and
           how
           his
           Martyrs
           shall
           Reign
           with
           him
           ;
           it
           is
           needful
           that
           we
           should
           understand
           what
           is
           the
           Reign
           of
           the
           Beast
           over
           those
           that
           receive
           his
           Mark
           ,
           and
           worship
           his
           Image
           .
           It
           is
           needful
           also
           ,
           that
           we
           should
           understand
           the
           whole
           Antichrisian
           time
           ,
           to
           be
           the
           season
           of
           the
           Death
           ,
           Sufferings
           ,
           and
           Beheading
           of
           the
           Mar●…yrs
           for
           the
           testimonies
           sake
           .
           When
           this
           time
           is
           ended
           ,
           
           then
           there
           shall
           be
           a
           rising
           ,
           or
           a
           standing
           up
           from
           this
           Death
           .
           The
           right
           stating
           of
           these
           things
           ,
           will
           prepare
           the
           way
           for
           the
           discovery
           of
           the
           1000
           years
           .
           And
           for
           ought
           as
           I
           can
           discern
           ,
           one
           chief
           reason
           wherefore
           we
           are
           so
           dark
           in
           the
           Apprehension
           ,
           and
           confused
           in
           the
           Notion
           of
           the
           Reign
           of
           Christ
           ,
           is
           this
           ,
           Because
           we
           do
           not
           first
           Expound
           ,
           and
           make
           cleer
           the
           Reign
           of
           the
           Beast
           ,
           what
           it
           is
           ,
           what
           his
           Name
           ,
           Mark
           ,
           or
           Image
           are
           ,
           nor
           what
           is
           the
           Number
           of
           his
           Name
           .
        
         
           These
           ,
           and
           many
           other
           Reasons
           ,
           might
           be
           brought
           to
           prove
           the
           Use
           and
           Profit
           of
           the
           Discovery
           .
           But
           to
           gather
           up
           all
           into
           one
           Sum
           :
           If
           any
           think
           these
           things
           to
           be
           a
           Nicety
           ,
           ●…et
           them
           consider
           ,
           First
           ,
           That
           these
           are
           the
           distinctive
           Badges
           of
           the
           Beast's
           Kingdom
           .
           Secondly
           ,
           That
           the
           great
           Sin
           of
           the
           Christian
           world
           for
           many
           Ages
           ,
           hath
           been
           in
           worshipping
           the
           Image
           ,
           and
           receiving
           the
           Mark.
           Thirdly
           ,
           The
           grievous
           Judgements
           of
           God
           denounced
           against
           men
           for
           these
           things
           .
           Fourthly
           ,
           The
           Cause
           of
           the
           Martyrs
           Sufferings
           ,
           because
           they
           would
           not
           worship
           the
           Beast
           ,
           nor
           receive
           his
           Mark.
           Fifthly
           ,
           The
           object
           of
           the
           Vials
           ;
           they
           are
           poured
           out
           upon
           a
           People
           distinguished
           by
           these
           Characters
           .
           Sixthly
           ,
           The
           deceiving
           of
           the
           Nations
           in
           the
           matter
           of
           the
           Mark
           of
           the
           Beast
           ,
           and
           the
           worship
           of
           his
           Image
           .
           Seventhly
           ,
           The
           Reign
           of
           Christ
           upon
           the
           Earth
           ;
           which
           will
           be
           the
           more
           demonstratively
           understood
           ,
           by
           the
           right
           Stating
           of
           the
           Reign
           of
           the
           Beast
           ●…ver
           those
           that
           worship
           the
           Image
           ,
           and
           receive
           the
           Mark.
           All
           these
           Considerations
           laid
           together
           ,
           plainly
           shew
           the
           Use
           and
           Profitableness
           of
           the
           Discovery
           .
        
         
           Now
           let
           us
           proceed
           to
           the
           second
           Point
           ,
           to
           the
           Possibility
           thereof
           .
        
      
       
         
         
           
             CHAP.
             II.
          
           Concerning
           the
           Possibility
           of
           the
           Discovery
           ,
           and
           how
           that
           there
           are
           certain
           Demonstrative
           Principles
           to
           bring
           the
           Truth
           to
           light
           .
        
         
           THere
           are
           now
           living
           in
           these
           times
           many
           who
           think
           that
           there
           is
           no
           medling
           with
           this
           Prophecie
           ,
           especially
           in
           the
           matter
           of
           the
           Beast
           ,
           and
           the
           Number
           of
           his
           Name
           .
           But
           I
           would
           entreat
           all
           such
           ,
           seriously
           to
           ponder
           in
           their
           own
           hearts
           ,
           Whether
           by
           this
           Opinion
           of
           theirs
           ,
           they
           do
           not
           secretly
           accuse
           the
           Lord
           Christ
           ,
           either
           for
           want
           of
           Truth
           ,
           or
           want
           of
           Wisdom
           .
           For
           what
           man
           of
           Truth
           will
           call
           that
           a
           Revelation
           ,
           which
           is
           no
           Revelation
           at
           all
           ?
           And
           what
           man
           of
           Wisdom
           will
           say
           ,
           
             Blessed
             is
             he
             that
             readeth
             ,
             and
             keepeth
             the
             words
             of
             the
             Prophecie
             ,
          
           when
           there
           is
           no
           possibility
           to
           reade
           it
           so
           ,
           as
           to
           understand
           ?
           And
           particularly
           ,
           Shall
           the
           Lord
           Jesus
           give
           serious
           warning
           to
           his
           Church
           and
           People
           ?
           shall
           he
           shew
           them
           so
           long
           before-hand
           the
           great
           sin
           of
           the
           world
           ,
           which
           shall
           consist
           in
           the
           worship
           of
           the
           Beast
           ,
           and
           in
           receiving
           of
           his
           Mark
           ;
           and
           when
           all
           comes
           to
           all
           ,
           shall
           it
           be
           presumption
           to
           shew
           what
           is
           the
           meaning
           of
           Christ
           in
           these
           things
           ?
           To
           what
           end
           were
           they
           Revealed
           ,
           if
           there
           be
           no
           use
           of
           the
           Revelation
           at
           all
           ?
           and
           there
           is
           no
           use
           ,
           if
           it
           be
           so
           difficult
           that
           it
           cannot
           possibly
           be
           understood
           .
           It
           was
           a
           special
           part
           of
           Love
           in
           Christ
           ,
           to
           send
           and
           signifie
           to
           his
           Servants
           ,
           things
           that
           must
           come
           shortly
           to
           pass
           .
           But
           what
           part
           of
           Love
           is
           it
           ,
           to
           signifie
           it
           in
           that
           manner
           ,
           that
           they
           cannot
           possibly
           understand
           what
           he
           meaneth
           ?
        
         
           You
           will
           say
           ,
           It
           was
           revealed
           to
           some
           Select
           ones
           .
           I
           grant
           that
           some
           of
           the
           Servants
           of
           Christ
           have
           a
           peculiar
           Gift
           to
           understand
           the
           Typical
           Expressions
           in
           this
           Prophecie
           (
           as
           every
           Member
           in
           the
           Church
           hath
           his
           peculiar
           Gift
           dispensed
           ,
           
           to
           the
           edification
           of
           the
           whole
           Body
           )
           and
           therefore
           they
           are
           bound
           to
           lay
           out
           their
           Talent
           this
           way
           ,
           for
           the
           common
           good
           .
           But
           what
           shall
           we
           say
           of
           them
           that
           account
           it
           curiosity
           in
           any
           whosoever
           ,
           to
           meddle
           with
           these
           studies
           ;
           and
           are
           absolutely
           for
           the
           concealing
           of
           these
           things
           from
           the
           People
           ?
        
         
           But
           if
           it
           be
           alledged
           ,
           That
           Experience
           sheweth
           how
           they
           have
           been
           deceived
           ,
           who
           have
           bestowed
           their
           pains
           in
           this
           kind
           of
           study
           :
        
         
           I
           Answer
           ;
           The
           same
           Experience
           plainly
           sheweth
           ,
           That
           they
           who
           have
           come
           with
           a
           sincere
           mind
           to
           finde
           out
           the
           Truth
           ,
           to
           study
           the
           whole
           Body
           of
           the
           Prophecie
           ,
           to
           compare
           Time
           with
           Time
           ,
           Vision
           with
           Vision
           ,
           and
           the
           Prophecies
           with
           the
           Stories
           ,
           have
           had
           a
           good
           return
           of
           their
           Labours
           .
           I
           may
           say
           ,
           without
           prejudice
           to
           those
           that
           went
           before
           ,
           That
           Bullinger
           in
           his
           time
           ,
           Brightman
           in
           his
           time
           ,
           Grasserus
           in
           his
           time
           ,
           Mede
           in
           his
           time
           ;
           each
           of
           these
           have
           made
           their
           several
           and
           respective
           Additions
           to
           the
           clearing
           of
           the
           Prophecie
           .
           If
           we
           endeavour
           to
           carry
           on
           the
           Work
           where
           they
           left
           it
           ,
           at
           least
           with
           the
           same
           Industry
           and
           Fidelity
           ,
           we
           may
           (
           by
           the
           blessing
           of
           God
           )
           be
           the
           instruments
           of
           bringing
           those
           Mysteries
           to
           light
           that
           were
           not
           discerned
           in
           former
           Ages
           .
           And
           for
           my
           part
           ,
           I
           do
           firmly
           believe
           ,
           That
           God
           will
           not
           cease
           to
           raise
           up
           such
           ,
           in
           the
           times
           following
           ,
           as
           shall
           clear
           the
           things
           that
           have
           layen
           dark
           in
           the
           Prophecies
           ,
           and
           do
           yet
           remain
           hid
           to
           us
           .
           But
           for
           the
           present
           ,
           because
           many
           think
           that
           the
           Name
           of
           the
           Beast
           ,
           and
           the
           Number
           of
           the
           Name
           are
           unsearchable
           Mysteries
           ;
           let
           me
           lay
           down
           some
           Reasons
           to
           prove
           the
           Possibility
           and
           the
           Evidence
           of
           the
           Discovery
           .
        
         
           First
           ,
           The
           Name
           of
           the
           Beast
           ,
           and
           the
           Number
           of
           his
           Name
           ,
           are
           the
           Essential
           Characters
           of
           a
           State
           or
           Government
           obvious
           to
           the
           view
           of
           men
           .
           It
           is
           said
           of
           the
           Writings
           of
           S.
           Paul
           ,
           that
           there
           are
           many
           things
           in
           them
           hard
           to
           be
           understood
           ,
           2
           Pet.
           3.
           16.
           
           There
           may
           be
           good
           Reason
           given
           for
           this
           ,
           to
           wit
           ,
           The
           sublimity
           ,
           and
           the
           spiritualness
           of
           the
           matter
           :
           for
           a
           Natural
           man
           ,
           that
           hath
           no
           Experience
           in
           his
           own
           
           heart
           ,
           how
           can
           he
           judge
           of
           the
           meaning
           of
           the
           Apostle
           ,
           when
           he
           speaketh
           of
           the
           Life
           of
           the
           Spirit
           ,
           of
           the
           leading
           of
           the
           Spirit
           ,
           of
           the
           Comfort
           of
           the
           Spirit
           ,
           of
           the
           putting
           off
           of
           the
           Old
           man
           ,
           and
           the
           putting
           on
           of
           the
           New
           ?
           When
           a
           man
           hath
           no
           experience
           ,
           how
           can
           he
           understand
           these
           things
           that
           are
           so
           largely
           spoken
           of
           in
           the
           Epistle
           to
           the
           Romans
           ?
           Now
           it
           is
           not
           so
           with
           the
           Name
           of
           the
           Beast
           and
           his
           Mark
           ;
           these
           are
           the
           Badges
           of
           a
           Government
           obvious
           to
           the
           Senses
           of
           all
           men
           .
           If
           there
           be
           any
           difficulty
           ,
           it
           lieth
           only
           in
           the
           typical
           and
           figurative
           way
           of
           expression
           .
        
         
           Secondly
           ,
           The
           Name
           of
           the
           Beast
           ,
           and
           the
           Number
           of
           the
           Name
           are
           the
           essential
           Characters
           of
           a
           State
           or
           Government
           which
           the
           Church
           hath
           had
           long
           experience
           of
           for
           many
           Ages
           .
           For
           the
           Monarchical
           Kingdom
           of
           Christ
           that
           shall
           be
           over
           Jews
           and
           Gentiles
           in
           the
           latter
           times
           ,
           though
           there
           are
           many
           things
           spoken
           in
           the
           Scriptures
           concerning
           this
           Dominion
           ,
           yet
           there
           are
           sundry
           passages
           hard
           to
           be
           determined
           ,
           because
           the
           event
           hath
           not
           yet
           shewed
           the
           meaning
           of
           the
           Prophecie
           .
           Now
           there
           is
           nothing
           wanting
           ,
           so
           far
           as
           it
           concerneth
           the
           event
           ,
           to
           make
           known
           to
           the
           Church
           what
           is
           meant
           by
           the
           Name
           of
           the
           Beast
           ,
           and
           the
           Number
           of
           the
           Name
           .
        
         
           Thirdly
           ,
           The
           Name
           of
           the
           Beast
           ,
           and
           the
           Number
           of
           the
           Name
           ,
           are
           such
           Characters
           ,
           that
           the
           Church
           in
           Being
           hath
           the
           present
           Experience
           of
           .
           Many
           things
           are
           dark
           in
           the
           Old
           Prophets
           ,
           because
           the
           Stories
           of
           those
           times
           are
           lost
           to
           us
           .
           The
           Jews
           could
           better
           understand
           the
           meaning
           of
           some
           Prophecies
           than
           we
           can
           .
           And
           I
           believe
           ,
           the
           greatest
           Knot
           in
           Expounding
           the
           70
           weeks
           of
           Daniel
           ,
           lieth
           principally
           in
           this
           ,
           To
           shew
           precisely
           ,
           and
           determinately
           ,
           where
           that
           Number
           of
           Time
           doth
           begin
           .
           There
           is
           an
           excellent
           agreement
           between
           the
           Greek
           Historians
           about
           the
           respective
           times
           of
           the
           Kings
           of
           Persia
           :
           But
           the
           Knot
           lyeth
           in
           this
           ,
           Rightly
           to
           determine
           who
           that
           Darius
           was
           in
           whose
           times
           the
           Temple
           was
           built
           ,
           and
           the
           City
           repaired
           .
           This
           thing
           was
           better
           known
           to
           the
           ancient
           Jews
           than
           it
           is
           to
           us
           .
           But
           now
           for
           the
           Name
           of
           the
           Beast
           ,
           the
           Mark
           ,
           and
           the
           Number
           of
           the
           Name
           ,
           there
           is
           
           not
           the
           like
           Reason
           of
           darkness
           in
           these
           ,
           because
           they
           are
           in
           the
           present
           experience
           of
           men
           ,
           and
           the
           Stories
           concerning
           these
           things
           are
           in
           recent
           memory
           .
        
         
           Fourthly
           ,
           The
           Name
           of
           the
           Beast
           ,
           and
           the
           Number
           of
           his
           Name
           are
           again
           and
           again
           repeated
           in
           several
           parts
           of
           the
           Prophecie
           upon
           sundry
           occasions
           .
           And
           therefore
           though
           one
           text
           be
           dark
           and
           obscure
           ,
           it
           may
           be
           made
           more
           clear
           by
           comparing
           it
           with
           parallel
           places
           .
           In
           the
           Description
           of
           the
           Vintage
           ,
           we
           reade
           that
           
             blood
             came
             unto
             the
             horse
             bridles
             a
             thousand
             and
             six
             hundred
             furlongs
             ,
          
           Rev.
           14
           20.
           
           Now
           ,
           so
           far
           as
           I
           apprehend
           ,
           it
           is
           hard
           to
           shew
           what
           is
           the
           Number
           of
           Furlongs
           ,
           seeing
           no
           other
           text
           doth
           speak
           of
           the
           Number
           .
           But
           for
           the
           Name
           of
           the
           Beast
           ,
           and
           the
           Number
           of
           his
           Name
           ,
           these
           are
           spoken
           of
           in
           divers
           texts
           ,
           and
           therefore
           we
           have
           greater
           helps
           to
           understand
           the
           meaning
           of
           them
           :
           And
           therefore
           if
           this
           text
           by
           it self
           be
           hard
           to
           be
           understood
           ,
           yet
           it
           may
           be
           made
           easie
           ,
           being
           compared
           with
           many
           other
           places
           .
        
         
           Fifthly
           ,
           The
           Name
           of
           the
           Beast
           ,
           his
           Mark
           ,
           Image
           ,
           and
           the
           Number
           of
           his
           Name
           are
           so
           repeated
           ,
           that
           their
           Repetition
           is
           in
           another
           place
           ,
           and
           another
           manner
           ;
           and
           this
           conduceth
           very
           much
           to
           the
           cleering
           of
           that
           which
           is
           obscure
           .
           The
           Four
           Monarchical
           Kingdoms
           are
           somthing
           darkly
           set
           forth
           under
           the
           Type
           of
           the
           Four
           Metals
           .
           To
           help
           this
           matter
           ,
           the
           holy
           Ghost
           repeateth
           them
           again
           under
           the
           Similitude
           of
           Four
           Beasts
           ,
           chap.
           7.
           
           Even
           so
           ,
           the
           two-horned
           Beast
           that
           came
           out
           of
           the
           Earth
           ,
           which
           exercised
           all
           the
           power
           of
           the
           ten-horned
           Beast
           in
           his
           presence
           ,
           is
           somthing
           obscurely
           delivered
           ,
           chap.
           13.
           
           Now
           ,
           to
           remedy
           the
           Obscurity
           ,
           the
           Holy
           Spirit
           delivereth
           the
           same
           matter
           in
           another
           manner
           ,
           chap.
           17.
           
           There
           is
           the
           same
           delineation
           for
           the
           substance
           of
           the
           matter
           ;
           but
           there
           a
           Woman
           is
           said
           to
           ride
           a
           Scarlet-coloured
           Beast
           ,
           full
           of
           the
           Names
           of
           Blasphemy
           .
           Therefore
           by
           the
           Name
           of
           the
           Woman
           ,
           or
           the
           whorish
           Church
           ,
           we
           may
           finde
           out
           the
           Name
           of
           the
           Beast
           :
           Seeing
           these
           are
           so
           many
           several
           forms
           of
           Expression
           of
           one
           and
           the
           same
           matter
           .
        
         
           Sixthly
           ,
           The
           Name
           of
           the
           Beast
           ,
           and
           the
           Number
           of
           his
           
           Name
           ,
           are
           directly
           opposed
           to
           the
           Name
           of
           the
           Lamb.
           It
           is
           well
           observed
           by
           Modern
           Expositors
           ,
           That
           in
           the
           whole
           Body
           of
           the
           Prophecie
           there
           is
           a
           direct
           Antithesis
           and
           Contraposition
           betwen
           the
           Lamb
           and
           the
           Beast
           ;
           the
           Kingdom
           of
           the
           Lamb
           and
           the
           Kingdom
           of
           the
           Beast
           ;
           the
           followers
           of
           the
           Lamb
           ,
           and
           the
           followers
           of
           the
           Beast
           :
           those
           that
           have
           the
           Name
           of
           the
           Father
           written
           in
           the
           forehead
           ,
           and
           those
           that
           have
           the
           Mark
           of
           the
           Beast
           .
           Therefore
           ,
           if
           we
           can
           understand
           what
           is
           meant
           by
           the
           Lamb
           ,
           and
           those
           that
           have
           his
           Fathers
           Name
           written
           in
           their
           foreheads
           ;
           we
           may
           by
           these
           be
           guided
           to
           the
           knowledge
           of
           the
           Beast
           ,
           his
           Name
           ,
           Mark
           ,
           and
           those
           that
           have
           the
           Number
           of
           the
           Name
           .
        
         
           Seventhly
           ,
           It
           is
           expresly
           said
           in
           the
           Text
           ,
           
             Let
             him
             that
             hath
             Understanding
             ,
             count
             the
             Number
             of
             the
             Beast
             ,
          
           &c.
           
           These
           words
           imply
           that
           the
           matter
           is
           not
           so
           unsearchable
           ,
           but
           by
           diligent
           and
           narrow
           enquiry
           ,
           he
           that
           hath
           wisdom
           may
           finde
           out
           what
           these
           things
           are
           ,
           and
           what
           they
           signifie
           .
           We
           read
           of
           the
           Number
           of
           the
           144000
           that
           were
           sealed
           in
           their
           forehead
           ,
           chap.
           7.
           
           But
           there
           is
           no
           mention
           made
           of
           any
           such
           thing
           ,
           that
           he
           that
           hath
           Wisdom
           should
           count
           the
           Number
           of
           the
           sealed
           ones
           .
           The
           Elect
           of
           God
           ,
           that
           stand
           out
           for
           his
           truth
           in
           all
           the
           times
           of
           Antichrists
           Kingdom
           ,
           are
           peculiarly
           known
           to
           himself
           who
           they
           are
           ,
           and
           what
           they
           be
           :
           and
           therefore
           he
           doth
           not
           require
           of
           any
           man
           to
           finde
           out
           the
           meaning
           of
           this
           Number
           .
           But
           when
           he
           speaketh
           of
           the
           Beast
           ,
           his
           Name
           ,
           Number
           ,
           and
           the
           Mark
           of
           his
           Name
           ,
           the
           will
           of
           the
           Lord
           Jesus
           is
           ,
           That
           every
           man
           is
           so
           concerned
           ,
           that
           he
           should
           endeavour
           to
           find
           out
           the
           natural
           and
           genuine
           sense
           of
           these
           Typical
           Expressions
           .
           And
           whereas
           it
           is
           said
           ,
           
             Let
             him
             that
             hath
             Wisdom
             ,
             count
             the
             Number
             of
             the
             Beast
          
           ;
           the
           meaning
           is
           this
           ,
           That
           they
           that
           have
           a
           peculiar
           dexterity
           given
           them
           of
           God
           ,
           to
           compare
           the
           Prophecies
           and
           the
           Stories
           together
           ,
           should
           do
           their
           endeavor
           to
           bring
           the
           truth
           to
           light
           for
           the
           publick
           good
           .
           If
           any
           be
           of
           that
           judgement
           ,
           That
           this
           is
           a
           Secret
           that
           is
           impenetrable
           ,
           let
           him
           shew
           the
           meaning
           of
           that
           Phrase
           ,
           chap.
           17.
           vers
           .
           9.
           
           There
           the
           same
           Expression
           is
           used
           ,
           
             Here
             is
             the
             Minde
             that
             hath
             Wisdom
             :
             the
          
           
           
             seven
             Heads
             are
             seven
             Mountains
             on
             which
             the
             Woman
             sitteth
             .
          
           Now
           all
           the
           world
           knew
           ,
           or
           might
           know
           ,
           that
           this
           is
           the
           City
           of
           Rome
           :
           but
           because
           the
           seven
           Hills
           are
           Parabolically
           set
           forth
           by
           seven
           Heads
           ;
           there
           is
           some
           kinde
           of
           wisdom
           to
           be
           used
           to
           shew
           the
           meaning
           of
           the
           Expression
           .
           And
           so
           in
           the
           present
           case
           ,
           when
           the
           Spirit
           speaketh
           of
           a
           Beast
           ,
           his
           Name
           ,
           Mark
           ,
           and
           Number
           ,
           all
           the
           wisdom
           here
           required
           ,
           is
           ,
           to
           render
           these
           things
           plainly
           and
           nakedly
           ,
           which
           the
           Spirit
           doth
           decypher
           Mystically
           and
           Figuratively
           .
           Now
           then
           ,
           to
           Collect
           all
           together
           into
           o●…e
           Sum
           :
           1.
           
           Seeing
           the
           Name
           of
           the
           Beast
           ,
           and
           the
           Number
           ,
           are
           the
           Characters
           of
           a
           Government
           obvious
           to
           the
           senses
           of
           men
           .
           2.
           
           Seeing
           also
           that
           the
           Church
           hath
           had
           long
           Experience
           of
           these
           things
           .
           3.
           
           Seeing
           the
           Churches
           Experience
           is
           in
           fresh
           and
           recent
           Memory
           .
           4.
           
           Seeing
           that
           these
           Characters
           are
           again
           and
           again
           repeated
           in
           several
           places
           of
           the
           Prophecie
           .
           5.
           
           Seeing
           they
           are
           repeated
           in
           a
           various
           and
           different
           manner
           .
           6.
           
           Because
           there
           is
           an
           immediate
           contrariety
           between
           the
           Beast
           and
           the
           Lamb
           ;
           the
           Name
           of
           the
           Beast
           ,
           and
           the
           Name
           of
           the
           Lamb.
           7.
           
           Because
           the
           Word
           it self
           saith
           ,
           That
           it
           is
           the
           duty
           of
           him
           that
           hath
           wisdom
           to
           calculate
           the
           Number
           .
           All
           the
           forementioned
           Reasons
           do
           plainly
           shew
           ,
           That
           these
           Matters
           do
           carry
           Demonstration
           in
           them
           ;
           and
           that
           there
           is
           a
           possibility
           to
           finde
           out
           the
           Name
           of
           the
           Beast
           ,
           and
           the
           Number
           thereof
           .
           And
           though
           many
           ,
           both
           in
           these
           ,
           and
           in
           former
           times
           ,
           speak
           of
           such
           things
           ,
           as
           the
           ancient
           Geographers
           did
           of
           the
           Unhabitableness
           of
           the
           Torrid
           Zone
           ;
           yet
           as
           Experience
           hath
           shewed
           ,
           that
           these
           Regions
           are
           well
           Inhabited
           ;
           and
           though
           the
           Heat
           of
           the
           Sun
           be
           very
           great
           ,
           yet
           there
           are
           many
           Helps
           for
           Habitation
           :
           So
           in
           like
           manner
           ,
           though
           in
           the
           present
           case
           the
           Holy
           Spirit
           useth
           a
           dark
           and
           a
           figurative
           way
           of
           Expression
           ,
           yet
           we
           should
           not
           despair
           of
           a
           true
           Discovery
           of
           these
           Mysteries
           .
           Rather
           ,
           we
           should
           consider
           the
           many
           Helps
           which
           the
           Lord
           hath
           afforded
           us
           to
           finde
           out
           the
           certainty
           of
           his
           meaning
           ,
           when
           he
           speaketh
           so
           seriously
           to
           the
           Churches
           .
        
         
           There
           is
           a
           wide
           Difference
           to
           be
           made
           between
           that
           
           Knowledge
           which
           is
           built
           upon
           Opinion
           and
           Tradition
           ,
           and
           that
           true
           Scientifical
           Knowledge
           founded
           upon
           the
           cleerness
           of
           Demonstration
           .
           This
           in
           the
           General
           all
           will
           confess
           ;
           but
           when
           we
           come
           to
           Singulars
           ,
           we
           are
           not
           so
           prompt
           to
           make
           the
           Distinction
           as
           we
           should
           .
           For
           it
           cometh
           to
           pass
           ,
           that
           in
           some
           Subjects
           ,
           which
           might
           be
           Demonstratively
           handled
           ,
           many
           times
           we
           Converse
           but
           Probably
           ,
           and
           Topically
           :
           And
           that
           which
           is
           more
           to
           be
           considered
           ,
           in
           Demonstrative
           matter
           ,
           we
           many
           times
           content
           our selves
           with
           a
           bare
           conjectural
           Knowledge
           ,
           and
           go
           no
           further
           .
           So
           in
           the
           present
           case
           ,
           touching
           the
           Beast
           ,
           his
           Name
           ,
           Mark
           ,
           and
           Number
           ,
           men
           do
           only
           take
           up
           with
           a
           Topical
           Knowledge
           :
           yet
           I
           am
           perswaded
           ,
           if
           they
           would
           look
           to
           the
           Principles
           laid
           down
           in
           the
           whole
           Bodie
           of
           the
           Prophecie
           ,
           they
           would
           finde
           that
           here
           is
           a
           certain
           Demonstration
           to
           be
           had
           ,
           and
           that
           they
           need
           not
           go
           to
           literal
           Names
           ,
           to
           numeral
           Letters
           ,
           to
           Anagrammatisms
           ,
           and
           to
           such-like
           uncertainties
           .
        
         
           Thus
           I
           have
           passed
           through
           the
           two
           Prooemial
           Points
           :
           The
           First
           ,
           Concerning
           the
           Profit
           and
           Use
           of
           the
           Discovery
           :
           The
           Second
           ,
           Concerning
           the
           Possibility
           thereof
           ;
           and
           that
           there
           are
           true
           Principles
           of
           Demonstration
           to
           Discover
           the
           meaning
           of
           the
           Spirit
           .
           Now
           I
           will
           come
           to
           the
           Body
           of
           the
           Treatise
           .
        
      
       
         
           
             CHAP.
             III.
          
           That
           the
           Name
           of
           the
           Beast
           is
           not
           the
           word
           Lateinos
           ,
           or
           any
           other
           Grammatical
           word
           ;
           but
           the
           name
           is
           ,
           The
           Universal
           Power
           and
           Headship
           of
           the
           Beast
           ,
           immediately
           opposed
           to
           the
           Power
           ,
           Dominion
           ,
           and
           Headship
           of
           the
           Lamb.
           
        
         
           FOr
           the
           carrying
           on
           of
           the
           whole
           Work
           ,
           we
           will
           divide
           the
           Matter
           into
           Two
           Parts
           ;
           into
           that
           which
           is
           Doctrinal
           ,
           
           which
           concerns
           the
           Truth
           of
           the
           thing
           ;
           and
           into
           that
           which
           is
           Practical
           ,
           which
           is
           for
           Use.
           
        
         
           For
           the
           Doctrinal
           Part
           ,
           We
           will
           First
           handle
           the
           Substance
           of
           the
           Interpretation
           .
           Secondly
           ,
           We
           will
           prove
           it
           by
           sundry
           places
           of
           Scripture
           ,
           and
           by
           the
           Harmony
           of
           the
           Prophecie
           .
        
         
           For
           the
           Truth
           of
           the
           Interpretation
           ,
           We
           will
           First
           shew
           what
           is
           meant
           by
           the
           Name
           :
           Secondly
           ,
           What
           is
           meant
           by
           the
           Number
           of
           the
           Name
           .
        
         
           For
           the
           Name
           ,
           It
           is
           most
           necessary
           that
           we
           should
           begin
           with
           the
           Exposition
           ,
           what
           it
           signifieth
           :
           For
           the
           right
           Stating
           of
           the
           Name
           doth
           much
           conduce
           to
           the
           Knowledge
           of
           the
           Number
           .
           It
           is
           the
           Number
           of
           the
           Name
           ;
           and
           therefore
           unless
           we
           shew
           what
           the
           Name
           is
           ,
           we
           cannot
           finde
           out
           the
           Number
           .
           All
           true
           Learning
           sheweth
           ,
           That
           in
           every
           Demonstration
           we
           are
           to
           begin
           with
           a
           right
           Exposition
           of
           the
           Subject
           .
        
         
           And
           whereas
           ,
           in
           a
           manner
           ,
           all
           the
           Learned
           ,
           down
           from
           the
           times
           of
           Irenaeus
           ,
           have
           taken
           Lateinos
           for
           the
           Name
           ,
           and
           the
           Numeral
           Letters
           for
           the
           Number
           of
           the
           Name
           ;
           Herein
           they
           have
           been
           greatly
           deceived
           ,
           as
           we
           can
           prove
           by
           many
           solid
           Reasons
           .
           And
           some
           of
           our
           own
           Interpreters
           also
           have
           suspected
           the
           vanity
           of
           this
           way
           .
           These
           are
           the
           words
           of
           Iunius
           ,
           in
           his
           Notes
           upon
           the
           
             Revelation
             ,
             Chap.
          
           13.
           vers
           .
           18.
           
        
         
           
             I
             am
             not
             ignorant
          
           (
           saith
           he
           )
           
             that
             men
             bring
             other
             Interpretations
             of
             the
             place
             ;
             but
             by
             their
             leave
             ,
             I
             also
             have
             brought
             my
             Interpretation
             to
             be
             compared
             ,
             and
             that
             for
             this
             reason
             ,
             specially
             because
             to
             me
             it
             seemeth
             not
             probable
             ,
             nor
             like
             ,
             That
             the
             Number
             of
             the
             Beast
             ,
             or
             the
             Name
             of
             the
             Beast
             ought
             so
             to
             be
             taken
             as
             the
             common
             strain
             of
             Interpretors
             will
             have
             it
             .
             For
          
           (
           saith
           he
           )
           
             this
             Number
             of
             the
             Beast
             ,
             he
          
           (
           
             scil
             .
             the
             Beast
          
           )
           
             teacheth
             ,
             giveth
             ,
             and
             imprinteth
             ,
             as
             the
             publick
             Note
             of
             his
             own
             ;
             which
             Note
             he
             highly
             rateth
             above
             others
             ,
             as
             the
             Note
             of
             his
             beloved
             Ones
             .
             Now
             these
             Interpretations
             seem
             to
             be
             so
             far
             wide
             from
             the
             Propriety
             and
             Condition
             of
             this
             Number
             ,
             whether
             we
             respect
             the
             Name
          
           Latinus
           ,
           or
           Titan
           ,
           
             or
             any
             such
             like
             .
             For
             these
             the
             Beast
             doth
             not
             teach
             ,
             give
             ,
             nor
             imprint
             ;
             but
             with
             the
             greatest
             care
             forbiddeth
             them
             to
             be
          
           
           
             taught
             ,
             and
             boldly
             denieth
             them
             .
             He
             doth
             not
             allow
             ,
             but
             disallow
             them
             ;
             and
             those
             which
             do
             so
             esteem
             of
             this
             Number
             ,
             he
             doth
             persecute
             with
             a
             direful
             hatred
             .
          
           So
           far
           Iunius
           .
           Let
           us
           now
           adde
           the
           words
           of
           Chamier
           ,
           in
           his
           
             Panstratia
             ,
             Tom.
          
           2.
           lib.
           17.
           cap.
           8.
           sect
           .
           5
           ,
           6.
           
           Truly
           (
           saith
           he
           )
           
             this
             way
             of
             Interpretation
          
           (
           
             that
             I
             may
             speak
             freely
             what
             I
             think
          
           )
           
             seemeth
             to
             be
             far
             wide
             from
             the
             manner
             of
             the
             Spirit
             ,
             and
             to
             come
             too
             neer
             to
             the
             dreams
             of
             the
             Cabalists
             .
             Whereas
             we
             read
             in
             the
             Sybils
             Verses
             ,
             That
             Iesus
             is
             described
             by
          
           888
           ,
           
             this
             is
             a
             bable
             ,
             and
             not
             from
             the
             Spirit
             of
             God.
             Secondly
             ,
             This
             cannot
             be
             the
             proper
             Name
             of
             one
             Man
             ,
             seeing
             we
             have
             formerly
             shewed
             the
             Error
             of
             them
             who
             will
             have
             Antichrist
             to
             be
             one
             Individual
             Person
             .
             Therefore
             of
             necessity
             it
             must
             be
             either
             a
             Name
             common
             ,
             or
             a
             Name
             proper
             to
             some
             State
             :
             But
             by
             what
             right
             may
             the
             Name
             of
             the
             Beast
             be
             called
             common
             ?
             and
             for
             a
             Name
             proper
             to
             some
             particular
             State
             ,
             no
             man
             hath
             brought
             that
             to
             Light.
             Thirdly
             ,
             It
             is
             not
             said
             that
             it
             is
             the
             Number
             of
             the
             Name
             only
             ,
             but
             here
             is
             a
             prohibition
             to
             men
             ,
             That
             they
             shall
             not
             buy
             nor
             sell
             ,
             that
             have
             not
             the
             Number
             of
             the
             Name
             .
             How
             this
             may
             be
             understood
             of
             that
             Cabalistical
             supputation
             of
             the
             Letters
             ,
             I
             cannot
             discern
             :
             Neither
             can
             I
             discern
             how
             other
             men
             may
             have
             the
             Number
             of
             the
             Name
             .
             Farther
             ,
             What
             is
             the
             way
             of
             Computing
             ?
             Is
             it
             Hebrew
             ,
             Greek
             ,
             or
             Latin
             ?
             But
             it
             is
             not
             the
             manner
             of
             the
             Latines
             to
             count
             by
             Letters
             ;
             therefore
             it
             must
             be
             a
             Greek
             or
             an
             Hebrew
             Name
             .
             But
             how
             can
             Antichrist
             assume
             such
             a
             Name
             to
             himself
             ,
             that
             is
             only
             peculiarly
             known
             in
             the
             Schools
             ?
          
           So
           far
           Chamier
           .
           I
           might
           here
           recite
           the
           words
           of
           Danaeus
           ,
           Mr
           Forbes
           ,
           and
           others
           ;
           but
           these
           Testimonies
           shall
           suffice
           to
           take
           away
           prejudice
           from
           me
           ,
           because
           I
           do
           forsake
           the
           ordinary
           stream
           of
           Interpreters
           ,
           and
           do
           look
           after
           such
           a
           Name
           of
           the
           Beast
           which
           is
           more
           true
           .
           The
           Work
           which
           I
           have
           more
           specially
           to
           perform
           ,
           is
           positively
           to
           prove
           ,
           That
           the
           Name
           of
           the
           Beast
           is
           the
           Universal
           Headship
           of
           the
           Bishop
           of
           Rome
           ;
           and
           by
           the
           same
           Reasons
           ,
           by
           ,
           and
           through
           which
           I
           will
           disprove
           Lateinos
           ,
           I
           will
           prove
           the
           Universal
           Headship
           to
           be
           the
           Name
           of
           the
           Beast
           .
           And
           the
           Reasons
           are
           as
           followeth
           :
        
         
           First
           ,
           I
           argue
           from
           the
           main
           Scope
           of
           the
           Text
           concerning
           
           the
           Beast
           as
           he
           is
           a
           Monarchical
           King
           :
           and
           here
           I
           say
           ,
           his
           Name
           must
           necessarily
           be
           his
           Sovereign
           Power
           and
           Headship
           .
           The
           Rabbins
           have
           a
           good
           Observation
           ,
           
             What
             God
             himself
             is
             ,
             that
             his
             Name
             is
             .
          
           So
           I
           may
           say
           ,
           What
           the
           Beast
           himself
           is
           ,
           that
           his
           Name
           is
           .
           The
           Beast
           ,
           not
           only
           in
           this
           Text
           ,
           but
           all
           the
           Prophecie
           throughout
           ,
           is
           described
           as
           a
           Monarchical
           King
           ;
           therefore
           the
           Name
           of
           the
           Beast
           must
           be
           his
           Universal
           Power
           and
           Headship
           .
        
         
           Object
           .
           
             Seeing
             the
             Name
             of
             a
             thing
             ,
             person
             ,
             or
             State
             ,
             is
             of
             so
             doubtful
             a
             meaning
             ;
             what
             warrant
             is
             there
             to
             take
             the
             Name
             of
             the
             Beast
             for
             his
             Sovereign
             Power
             and
             Headship
             ?
          
        
         
           Answ.
           I
           confess
           ,
           That
           the
           Name
           of
           a
           thing
           ,
           person
           ,
           or
           State
           ,
           is
           ambiguously
           taken
           .
           But
           yet
           for
           all
           this
           ,
           it
           is
           not
           so
           Obscure
           ,
           if
           we
           will
           take
           the
           right
           course
           to
           understand
           the
           Scripture
           .
        
         
           Inst.
           You
           will
           say
           ,
           The
           great
           Question
           lieth
           in
           finding
           the
           right
           course
           .
        
         
           Rep.
           The
           right
           course
           lieth
           in
           this
           ,
           By
           looking
           to
           the
           main
           sense
           in
           each
           text
           respectively
           ;
           and
           the
           main
           sense
           will
           guide
           the
           Interpretation
           .
        
         
           Let
           us
           come
           to
           give
           some
           Instances
           out
           of
           the
           Scripture
           ,
           but
           more
           specially
           out
           of
           the
           Book
           of
           the
           Revelation
           .
        
         
           For
           Instances
           out
           of
           the
           Scripture
           ;
           VVe
           often
           read
           of
           calling
           upon
           the
           
             Name
             of
             the
             Lord
          
           ;
           of
           trusting
           in
           
             the
             Name
             of
             the
             Lord.
          
           Now
           is
           not
           the
           calling
           upon
           the
           Name
           of
           the
           Lord
           ,
           the
           calling
           upon
           God
           himself
           ?
           the
           trusting
           in
           the
           Name
           of
           the
           Lord
           ,
           the
           trusting
           upon
           the
           Lord
           himself
           ?
           This
           doth
           make
           good
           that
           former
           rule
           ,
           
             What
             the
             Name
             of
             God
             is
             ,
             that
             God
             himself
             is
             .
          
           And
           so
           by
           way
           of
           Opposition
           ,
           what
           the
           Name
           of
           the
           Beast
           is
           ,
           that
           is
           the
           Beast
           himself
           .
           If
           he
           be
           described
           as
           a
           Mighty
           King
           ,
           we
           have
           cause
           to
           take
           his
           Name
           for
           his
           Monarchical
           Power
           and
           sovereignty
           .
        
         
           Secondly
           ,
           We
           often
           reade
           in
           the
           New
           Testament
           of
           
             believing
             in
             the
             Name
             of
             the
             Son
             of
             God
             ,
          
           &c.
           we
           do
           not
           then
           look
           to
           the
           Name
           Jesus
           ,
           or
           the
           Name
           Christ
           ,
           as
           though
           there
           were
           any
           Vertue
           or
           Efficacy
           in
           the
           Letters
           and
           Syllables
           of
           these
           Names
           ;
           but
           in
           this
           case
           ,
           the
           sense
           of
           each
           Scripture
           must
           
           govern
           .
           And
           therefore
           when
           the
           Apostles
           do
           Exhort
           us
           to
           believe
           on
           the
           Name
           of
           the
           Son
           of
           God
           ,
           in
           their
           sense
           we
           are
           exhorted
           to
           believe
           on
           the
           Lord
           Christ
           ,
           for
           pardon
           of
           sin
           ,
           for
           help
           in
           temptation
           ,
           and
           for
           supply
           in
           all
           our
           wants
           .
           We
           must
           not
           look
           to
           Letters
           and
           syllables
           ,
           but
           to
           the
           main
           sense
           of
           each
           Scripture
           .
           In
           like
           manner
           ,
           when
           we
           reade
           of
           the
           Name
           of
           the
           Beast
           ,
           and
           the
           Saints
           overcoming
           his
           Name
           ,
           Mark
           ,
           and
           the
           Number
           of
           the
           Name
           ,
           we
           are
           not
           here
           to
           look
           to
           the
           word
           Lateinos
           ,
           or
           any
           such
           Grammatical
           Name
           ;
           but
           ,
           according
           to
           the
           sense
           of
           the
           Prophecie
           ,
           the
           Name
           must
           be
           taken
           for
           the
           Potency
           of
           the
           Beast
           ,
           as
           he
           is
           Opposed
           to
           the
           Lamb.
           
        
         
           But
           let
           us
           come
           more
           largely
           to
           shew
           some
           particular
           Instances
           out
           of
           the
           Book
           of
           the
           Revelation
           ,
           where
           the
           Name
           of
           a
           thing
           ,
           person
           ,
           or
           state
           is
           to
           be
           expounded
           ,
           according
           to
           the
           Analogie
           of
           the
           text
           .
        
         
           We
           read
           that
           there
           were
           with
           the
           Lamb
           144000
           ,
           and
           that
           
             they
             had
             their
             Fathers
             Name
             written
             in
             their
             Forehead
             ,
             chap.
          
           14.
           vers
           .
           1.
           
           Now
           these
           144000
           are
           set
           in
           direct
           Opposition
           to
           the
           followers
           of
           the
           Beast
           ;
           and
           their
           Father's
           Name
           written
           in
           their
           forehead
           ,
           is
           contradistinct
           to
           the
           Mark
           of
           the
           Beast
           in
           the
           forehead
           ,
           and
           the
           right
           Hand
           .
           Now
           here
           ,
           s●…th
           there
           is
           mention
           made
           of
           the
           Name
           of
           the
           Father
           ,
           and
           of
           his
           Name
           written
           in
           the
           forehead
           of
           all
           the
           followers
           of
           the
           Lamb
           ,
           shall
           we
           think
           therefore
           that
           it
           is
           made
           out
           of
           the
           Alphabet
           ,
           or
           that
           it
           is
           a
           literal
           Name
           ?
           Not
           so
           :
           we
           must
           look
           here
           to
           the
           main
           scope
           of
           the
           text
           ,
           and
           accordingly
           we
           must
           render
           the
           meaning
           of
           the
           words
           .
           They
           that
           have
           their
           Father's
           Name
           written
           in
           their
           forehead
           ,
           are
           such
           who
           in
           all
           the
           times
           of
           Antichrist
           had
           consecrated
           ,
           dedicated
           ,
           and
           given
           themselves
           up
           to
           God
           the
           Father
           ,
           to
           live
           in
           subjection
           to
           his
           Commandements
           ,
           and
           to
           take
           him
           as
           their
           sovereign
           Lord
           ;
           this
           was
           the
           Badge
           of
           their
           outward
           Profession
           .
           By
           the
           rule
           of
           Opposition
           ,
           they
           that
           had
           the
           Name
           of
           the
           Beast
           were
           such
           as
           did
           resign
           their
           Obedience
           to
           him
           ,
           as
           to
           their
           sovereign
           Lord
           :
           And
           the
           submission
           to
           this
           Lordship
           ,
           was
           the
           Badge
           and
           Livery
           of
           their
           outward
           Profession
           :
           this
           is
           clear
           from
           the
           scope
           of
           the
           text
           .
        
         
         
           Further
           ,
           We
           read
           
             chap.
             2.
             vers
             .
             17.
             
             To
             him
             that
             overcometh
             will
             I
             give
             a
             white
             Stone
             ,
             and
             in
             the
             Stone
             a
             new
             Name
             written
             ,
             that
             none
             can
             read
             but
             he
             that
             hath
             it
             .
          
           Now
           what
           is
           here
           meant
           by
           the
           Name
           written
           ?
           shall
           we
           say
           that
           it
           is
           a
           Name
           consisting
           of
           Letters
           and
           syllables
           ?
           If
           we
           so
           affirm
           ,
           we
           shall
           have
           as
           good
           foundation
           for
           such
           a
           Position
           as
           they
           who
           take
           Lateinos
           to
           be
           the
           Name
           of
           the
           Beast
           .
           But
           this
           is
           to
           trifle
           in
           a
           serious
           matter
           .
           Therefore
           we
           must
           have
           recourse
           to
           the
           forementioned
           Principle
           ,
           to
           wit
           ,
           The
           scope
           of
           the
           text
           .
           When
           the
           Lord
           Christ
           promiseth
           to
           give
           to
           him
           that
           overcometh
           a
           white
           stone
           ,
           and
           in
           the
           stone
           a
           Name
           written
           ;
           this
           is
           nothing
           else
           but
           the
           inward
           testimony
           of
           the
           Spirit
           ,
           by
           ,
           and
           through
           which
           he
           sealeth
           extraordinary
           Consolations
           to
           his
           Martyrs
           and
           Witnesses
           ,
           in
           the
           middest
           of
           their
           sufferings
           ,
           under
           the
           tyrannical
           States
           and
           Governments
           of
           the
           world
           .
           Many
           worthy
           Expositors
           take
           this
           for
           the
           seal
           of
           the
           Spirit
           that
           followeth
           Justification
           ,
           as
           may
           be
           seen
           in
           several
           late
           Treatises
           .
           But
           I
           take
           it
           ,
           That
           the
           Promise
           in
           the
           text
           ,
           and
           so
           commonly
           through
           the
           whole
           Prophecie
           ,
           is
           immediately
           made
           to
           him
           that
           overcometh
           in
           the
           times
           of
           Persecution
           :
           And
           therefore
           these
           things
           do
           more
           immediately
           concern
           the
           Martyrs
           ;
           the
           in-coming
           of
           Christ
           into
           their
           hearts
           ,
           and
           the
           divine
           Consolations
           which
           they
           feel
           in
           the
           Name
           written
           ,
           which
           none
           can
           read
           but
           they
           that
           have
           it
           .
        
         
           Let
           us
           go
           to
           the
           meaning
           of
           that
           Promise
           ,
           Rev.
           3.
           12.
           
           
             He
             that
             overcometh
             will
             I
             make
             a
             Pillar
             in
             the
             Temple
             of
             my
             God
             ,
             and
             he
             shall
             go
             no
             more
             out
             :
             and
             I
             will
             write
             upon
             him
             the
             Name
             of
             my
             God
             ,
             and
             the
             Name
             of
             the
             City
             of
             my
             God
             ,
             which
             is
             the
             new
             Ierusalem
             ,
             which
             cometh
             down
             from
             Heaven
             ;
             and
             I
             will
             write
             upon
             him
             my
             new
             Name
             .
          
           In
           these
           words
           ,
           when
           the
           Lord
           Christ
           promiseth
           to
           him
           that
           overcometh
           ,
           That
           he
           will
           write
           upon
           him
           the
           Name
           of
           his
           God
           ;
           doth
           he
           intend
           here
           a
           writing
           by
           Letters
           and
           syllables
           ?
           This
           cannot
           be
           .
           But
           ,
           according
           to
           the
           scope
           of
           the
           place
           ,
           this
           is
           the
           meaning
           of
           Christ
           ,
           That
           they
           that
           overcome
           ,
           shall
           have
           this
           peculiar
           testimony
           given
           into
           their
           hearts
           ,
           That
           the
           Lord
           is
           theirs
           ,
           and
           that
           they
           are
           his
           .
        
         
         
           Further
           ,
           Whereas
           it
           is
           said
           ,
           
             I
             will
             write
             upon
             them
             the
             Name
             of
             the
             City
             of
             my
             God
             :
          
           By
           this
           he
           doth
           mean
           The
           true
           Catholick
           Church
           ,
           represented
           
             Rev.
             chap.
          
           21.
           
           The
           scope
           of
           the
           words
           is
           this
           ,
           That
           he
           will
           inroll
           them
           into
           the
           Number
           of
           Citizens
           ,
           and
           count
           them
           as
           Members
           of
           the
           true
           Church
           ,
           his
           Mystical
           Body
           .
           And
           for
           the
           truth
           of
           the
           Interpretation
           ,
           we
           do
           chiefly
           build
           upon
           the
           scope
           of
           the
           text
           .
        
         
           But
           now
           let
           us
           go
           to
           other
           Scriptures
           ,
           where
           usually
           the
           Name
           of
           a
           thing
           is
           taken
           according
           to
           the
           Analogie
           of
           the
           text
           .
           It
           is
           said
           concerning
           the
           Church
           of
           
             Sardis
             ,
             Thou
             hast
             a
             few
             Names
             which
             have
             not
             defiled
             their
             Garments
             ,
             and
             they
             shall
             walk
             with
             me
             in
             white
             ,
             for
             they
             are
             worthy
             ,
          
           Rev.
           3.
           4.
           
           Here
           then
           ,
           when
           it
           is
           said
           ,
           
             Thou
             hast
             a
             few
             Names
          
           ;
           shall
           we
           understand
           this
           to
           be
           meant
           of
           Grammatical
           Names
           ?
           This
           cannot
           be
           .
           The
           drift
           of
           the
           text
           is
           concerning
           the
           persons
           of
           men
           and
           women
           which
           did
           not
           defile
           themselves
           in
           the
           times
           of
           general
           Pollution
           .
           And
           so
           at
           the
           destruction
           of
           Rome
           Antichristian
           ,
           
             there
             was
             a
             great
             Earthquake
             ,
             and
             there
             were
             slain
             of
             the
             Names
             of
             men
          
           7000
           ,
           chap.
           11.
           vers
           .
           13.
           
           Now
           for
           the
           Names
           of
           men
           ,
           shall
           we
           understand
           Names
           consisting
           of
           Letters
           and
           syllables
           ?
           What
           a
           kind
           of
           slaughter
           would
           this
           be
           ?
           According
           to
           the
           scope
           of
           the
           text
           ,
           and
           the
           manner
           of
           the
           Hebrew
           expression
           ,
           we
           may
           say
           ,
           That
           such
           a
           Number
           of
           persons
           were
           slain
           in
           the
           Earthquake
           .
           Adde
           moreover
           to
           this
           ,
           That
           the
           Beast
           which
           did
           carry
           the
           Whore
           
             was
             full
             of
             the
             Names
             of
             Blasphemy
             ,
             chap.
          
           17.
           
           There
           is
           none
           so
           void
           of
           understanding
           to
           imagine
           ,
           That
           the
           Spirit
           speaketh
           of
           such
           Names
           that
           do
           consist
           of
           Letters
           and
           syllables
           .
           We
           must
           here
           go
           to
           the
           sense
           of
           the
           text
           which
           speaketh
           of
           his
           Blasphemy
           against
           God.
           And
           so
           the
           matter
           is
           expounded
           ,
           Rev.
           13.
           
           
             He
             opened
             his
             mouth
             in
             Blasphemies
             against
             God
             ,
             to
             Blaspheme
             his
             Name
             ,
             his
             Tabernacle
             ,
             and
             them
             that
             dwell
             in
             Heaven
             .
          
           These
           ,
           and
           the
           like
           places
           laid
           together
           ,
           do
           plainly
           shew
           ,
           that
           the
           scope
           of
           the
           text
           must
           circumscribe
           and
           limit
           the
           signification
           of
           the
           phrase
           so
           often
           used
           in
           this
           Prophecie
           .
           Now
           if
           it
           be
           so
           ,
           according
           to
           this
           tenor
           ,
           we
           may
           say
           ,
           That
           the
           Name
           of
           the
           Beast
           must
           be
           expounded
           according
           to
           the
           Analogie
           of
           
           the
           text
           .
           His
           Name
           then
           can
           be
           no
           other
           but
           his
           Universal
           Headship
           ,
           as
           a
           Counter-Christ
           ,
           emulous
           of
           the
           Dignity
           of
           Christ.
           
        
         
           But
           to
           go
           to
           further
           Instances
           ,
           we
           do
           reade
           that
           the
           deluded
           Kings
           were
           all
           gathered
           together
           into
           a
           place
           called
           in
           the
           Hebrew
           Harmageddon
           ,
           Rev.
           16.
           16.
           
           Much
           ado
           is
           made
           by
           Expositors
           about
           the
           meaning
           of
           the
           word
           .
           Some
           take
           it
           for
           the
           Mountain
           of
           Delights
           .
           Some
           ,
           for
           the
           Hill
           of
           the
           Gospel
           .
           Some
           think
           there
           is
           an
           Allusion
           to
           the
           slaughter
           of
           Iosiah
           in
           the
           valley
           of
           Megiddo
           .
           And
           there
           is
           a
           great
           Difference
           among
           them
           .
           But
           for
           my
           part
           ,
           I
           do
           believe
           there
           can
           be
           no
           other
           meaning
           but
           this
           ,
           to
           wit
           ,
           The
           destruction
           of
           a
           Troope
           ,
           or
           Company
           :
           and
           my
           Reasons
           are
           these
           ;
           First
           ,
           It
           is
           expresly
           said
           ,
           That
           the
           Name
           of
           the
           place
           in
           the
           Hebrew
           is
           called
           Harmageddon
           ;
           that
           is
           ,
           The
           destruction
           of
           a
           Troope
           :
           and
           this
           Exposition
           is
           given
           by
           Grasserus
           ,
           and
           others
           .
           Secondly
           ,
           That
           which
           moveth
           me
           so
           to
           think
           ,
           is
           the
           subject
           matter
           of
           the
           text
           ;
           
             For
             the
             unclean
             Spirits
             like
             Frogs
             did
             gather
             the
             deluded
             Kings
             to
             Battel
             ,
             and
             they
             brought
             them
             into
             a
             place
             called
             Harmageddon
             ,
             which
             in
             the
             event
             proved
             the
             place
             of
             their
             destruction
             .
          
           It
           is
           well
           known
           ,
           That
           it
           is
           the
           manner
           of
           the
           Hebrews
           to
           give
           Names
           to
           several
           places
           ,
           in
           testimony
           of
           some
           famous
           Actions
           that
           have
           been
           done
           in
           them
           .
           And
           it
           is
           as
           evident
           ,
           that
           
             the
             Spirit
             in
             this
             Prophecie
             doth
             perpetually
             follow
             the
             Hebrew
             stile
             .
          
           As
           in
           the
           times
           of
           the
           fifth
           Trumpet
           ,
           when
           the
           Locusts
           came
           out
           of
           the
           bottomless
           pit
           ,
           they
           had
           a
           King
           over
           them
           ,
           
             whose
             Name
             in
             the
             Hebrew
             tongue
             is
             Abaddon
             ;
             and
             in
             the
             Greek
             is
             Apollyon
             ,
          
           chap.
           9.
           
           Now
           this
           Trumper
           ,
           Mr
           Brightman
           ,
           and
           Mr
           Mede
           ,
           do
           rightly
           apply
           to
           the
           times
           of
           the
           Sarazens
           .
           And
           because
           they
           did
           in
           great
           multitudes
           everywhere
           overspread
           the
           Territories
           of
           the
           Church
           ,
           they
           are
           therefore
           compared
           to
           Locusts
           .
           Now
           for
           the
           Name
           of
           their
           King
           in
           the
           Greek
           or
           Hebrew
           tongues
           ,
           we
           are
           not
           here
           so
           much
           to
           look
           to
           Letters
           and
           syllables
           ,
           as
           to
           the
           sense
           of
           the
           figurative
           expression
           .
           Mr
           Mede
           then
           ,
           in
           his
           Commentary
           upon
           the
           Revelation
           ,
           doth
           seem
           to
           me
           to
           be
           too
           Cabalistical
           ,
           when
           he
           doth
           descant
           upon
           the
           Names
           of
           some
           
           Kings
           formerly
           amongst
           the
           Arabians
           .
           We
           are
           not
           to
           trouble
           our selves
           with
           Letters
           and
           syllables
           .
           Mahomet
           is
           the
           Head
           ,
           or
           King
           of
           these
           Locusts
           ,
           or
           rather
           the
           Devil
           acting
           in
           ,
           and
           by
           him
           .
           And
           too
           sad
           experience
           doth
           shew
           that
           his
           Name
           is
           called
           in
           the
           Hebrew
           Abaddon
           ,
           and
           in
           the
           Greek
           Apollyox
           .
           For
           what
           is
           Mahometism
           ,
           but
           the
           waster
           and
           destroyer
           of
           the
           Christian
           Faith
           ?
           The
           Name
           doth
           answer
           the
           nature
           .
           In
           the
           times
           of
           the
           third
           Trumpet
           ,
           we
           reade
           ,
           That
           a
           great
           star
           fell
           into
           the
           third
           part
           of
           the
           Rivers
           ,
           
             and
             the
             Name
             of
             the
             star
             is
             called
             Wormwood
             .
          
           Interpreters
           upon
           the
           place
           do
           not
           look
           so
           much
           to
           a
           literal
           star
           ,
           but
           it
           is
           so
           called
           Effectivè
           ,
           from
           the
           Effect
           ,
           or
           Operation
           .
           By
           these
           ,
           and
           many
           other
           places
           ,
           it
           is
           evident
           ,
           when
           the
           Spirit
           speaketh
           of
           a
           Name
           ,
           Thing
           ,
           Person
           ,
           or
           State
           ,
           he
           doth
           not
           aim
           so
           much
           at
           the
           bare
           formality
           of
           Letters
           and
           syllables
           ,
           as
           at
           the
           scope
           of
           the
           text
           .
           Upon
           these
           grounds
           ,
           if
           the
           Beast
           be
           a
           King
           ,
           or
           Potentate
           ,
           his
           Name
           is
           not
           a
           Grammatical
           Name
           ;
           but
           ,
           according
           to
           the
           scope
           of
           the
           place
           ,
           it
           must
           necessarily
           denote
           his
           Kingly
           Power
           ,
           and
           Headship
           .
        
         
           Let
           us
           come
           to
           a
           place
           mentioned
           in
           the
           Old
           Testament
           ,
           which
           hath
           been
           greatly
           mistaken
           by
           the
           Jewish
           Rabbins
           ,
           and
           by
           some
           others
           ;
           the
           words
           are
           these
           :
           
             The
             Lord
             said
             to
             Moses
             ,
             I
             appeared
             to
             Abraham
             ,
             Isaac
             ,
             and
             Iacob
             ,
             by
             the
             Name
             of
             God
             Almighty
             ;
             but
             by
             the
             Name
             Iehovah
             I
             was
             not
             known
             unto
             them
             .
             Exod.
          
           6.
           3.
           
           Here
           great
           ado
           is
           made
           by
           the
           Rabbins
           aforementioned
           :
           they
           speak
           much
           of
           
             nomen
             Tetragrammatum
          
           ,
           of
           the
           word
           of
           four
           Letters
           ,
           of
           the
           difficulty
           to
           pronounce
           that
           Name
           ,
           and
           of
           bables
           more
           than
           too
           many
           .
           And
           what
           is
           the
           reason
           of
           all
           this
           ?
           they
           look
           superficially
           upon
           the
           outward
           Letter
           ,
           and
           neglect
           the
           main
           sense
           and
           scope
           of
           the
           place
           .
           The
           main
           sense
           is
           this
           ,
           That
           God
           appeared
           to
           Moses
           ,
           by
           the
           Name
           Iehovah
           ,
           by
           ,
           and
           through
           which
           ,
           he
           did
           give
           Existence
           and
           Being
           to
           his
           Promises
           .
           And
           yet
           we
           are
           not
           to
           take
           it
           absolutely
           ,
           as
           though
           the
           Lord
           did
           no
           way
           appear
           to
           
             Abraham
             ,
             Isaac
          
           ,
           and
           Iacob
           by
           that
           Name
           .
           This
           cannot
           be
           .
           We
           are
           therefore
           to
           take
           the
           words
           in
           a
           restrictive
           meaning
           ,
           in
           respect
           to
           that
           particular
           Promise
           ,
           that
           he
           would
           
           give
           the
           Land
           of
           Canaan
           to
           Abraham
           and
           his
           seed
           for
           a
           Possession
           ,
           G●…n
           .
           15.
           13
           ,
           14.
           
           Now
           in
           this
           particular
           sense
           ,
           God
           did
           not
           appear
           to
           
             Abraham
             ,
             Isaac
          
           ,
           and
           Iacob
           ,
           by
           the
           Name
           Iehovah
           ;
           they
           never
           lived
           so
           long
           to
           see
           the
           performance
           of
           this
           promise
           .
           They
           did
           not
           see
           the
           end
           of
           the
           400
           years
           Bondage
           ,
           not
           the
           Deliverance
           out
           of
           Egypt
           ,
           as
           Moses
           did
           .
           The
           Lord
           only
           did
           appear
           to
           them
           by
           the
           Name
           of
           God
           Alsufficient
           ;
           they
           might
           believe
           that
           he
           was
           able
           to
           perform
           what
           he
           promised
           .
           In
           special
           relation
           then
           to
           this
           particular
           Promise
           ,
           the
           Lord
           saith
           to
           Moses
           ,
           By
           my
           Name
           Iehovah
           was
           I
           not
           made
           known
           to
           them
           .
           If
           this
           be
           so
           ,
           what
           a
           wild
           race
           have
           they
           run
           ,
           who
           have
           looked
           only
           after
           a
           Name
           consisting
           of
           Letters
           and
           syllables
           ,
           and
           have
           not
           observed
           the
           Truth
           of
           God
           in
           the
           performance
           of
           his
           Word
           ?
           What
           is
           this
           ,
           but
           to
           make
           a
           Fable
           of
           the
           most
           important
           and
           comfortable
           Promises
           that
           be
           ;
           to
           neglect
           the
           substance
           ,
           and
           to
           catch
           at
           a
           shadow
           ?
           And
           the
           ground
           of
           all
           this
           is
           chiefly
           from
           hence
           ;
           they
           look
           to
           the
           out-side
           and
           shell
           of
           a
           figurative
           expression
           ,
           and
           neglect
           the
           natural
           sense
           of
           the
           text
           ,
           which
           in
           this
           case
           should
           principally
           rule
           .
           In
           like
           manner
           ,
           they
           who
           are
           for
           the
           word
           Lateinos
           ,
           or
           for
           any
           such
           like
           Name
           ,
           must
           needs
           digress
           as
           much
           from
           the
           Truth
           .
           For
           it
           is
           not
           to
           be
           imagined
           ,
           that
           the
           Name
           of
           the
           Beast
           is
           meerly
           a
           Name
           consisting
           of
           Letters
           and
           syllables
           ;
           neither
           can
           the
           Mark
           of
           the
           Beast
           be
           the
           Mark
           of
           such
           a
           Name
           ,
           according
           to
           the
           sense
           of
           the
           text
           ,
           and
           the
           Analogie
           of
           the
           Prophecie
           .
           The
           Name
           of
           the
           Beast
           therefore
           ,
           must
           be
           his
           Universal
           Power
           and
           Headship
           ;
           and
           the
           Mark
           of
           the
           Name
           ,
           must
           be
           the
           publick
           Profession
           of
           subjection
           ,
           allegeance
           ,
           and
           devotion
           to
           that
           Name
           ,
           or
           Headship
           .
           And
           this
           is
           clear
           from
           the
           several
           Instances
           fore-alledged
           ,
           where
           the
           Name
           of
           a
           person
           ,
           of
           a
           state
           ,
           of
           a
           thing
           ,
           is
           alwayes
           taken
           with
           correspondence
           to
           the
           text
           .
           But
           if
           it
           be
           alledged
           ,
           That
           it
           may
           be
           so
           taken
           in
           this
           place
           for
           Power
           and
           Headship
           ,
           but
           it
           is
           not
           absolutely
           necessary
           that
           we
           should
           build
           upon
           such
           a
           sense
           :
           I
           Answer
           ;
           The
           Name
           of
           the
           Beast
           must
           necessarily
           be
           construed
           and
           taken
           for
           his
           Power
           and
           Headship
           ;
           because
           ,
           as
           a
           Potentate
           ,
           he
           doth
           confront
           the
           Lord
           
           Jesus
           Christ
           ,
           the
           true
           Head
           of
           the
           Church
           :
           this
           is
           the
           scope
           of
           the
           Prophecie
           ,
           and
           therefore
           the
           Name
           of
           the
           Beast
           cannot
           rationally
           and
           fairly
           be
           taken
           in
           any
           other
           sense
           .
           Paraeus
           ,
           in
           his
           Commentary
           upon
           the
           Romans
           ,
           doth
           open
           the
           meaning
           of
           these
           words
           ;
           
             As
             I
             live
             ,
             saith
             the
             Lord
             ,
             every
             knee
             shall
             bow
             to
             me
             ,
             and
             every
             tongue
             shall
             confess
             to
             God
             ,
          
           Rom.
           14.
           11.
           
           From
           the
           misunderstanding
           of
           this
           place
           ,
           he
           telleth
           us
           ,
           That
           the
           superstitious
           bowing
           at
           the
           Name
           of
           Jesus
           had
           its
           first
           original
           .
           And
           he
           doth
           shew
           the
           irrationality
           of
           that
           practice
           :
           
             For
             why
          
           (
           saith
           he
           )
           
             should
             men
             be
             uncovered
             ?
             and
             why
             should
             they
             bow
             their
             knee
             at
             the
             Name
             of
             Iesus
             ,
             rather
             than
             at
             the
             Name
             of
             Christ
             ,
             or
             at
             the
             Name
             of
             God
             the
             Father
             ,
             Son
             ,
             and
             Holy
             Ghost
             ?
          
           Further
           ,
           He
           doth
           insist
           upon
           the
           greatness
           of
           their
           superstition
           ,
           when
           men
           give
           worship
           to
           Letters
           and
           syllables
           ,
           rather
           than
           to
           the
           Person
           himself
           .
           And
           therefore
           he
           cometh
           positively
           to
           define
           what
           is
           meant
           by
           the
           Name
           of
           Jesus
           .
           And
           so
           he
           saith
           ,
           
             Nomen
             Iesu
             non
             est
             vox
             d●…ssyllaba
             ,
             scripta
             ,
             picta
             ,
             aut
             pronunciata
             ;
             sed
             persona
             ,
             Majestas
             ,
             &
             imperium
             Serv●…toris
             ,
             cui
             omnes
             subjectionem
             debent
             .
             The
             Name
             of
             Iesus
             is
             not
             a
             word
             of
             two
             Syllables
             ,
             written
             ,
             painted
             ,
             or
             pronounced
             ;
             but
             it
             is
             the
             Person
             ,
             Majesty
             ,
             and
             Dominion
             of
             our
             Saviour
             ,
             to
             which
             all
             do
             owe
             Subjection
             .
          
           So
           I
           may
           say
           in
           the
           present
           case
           ,
           That
           the
           Name
           of
           the
           Beast
           ,
           and
           the
           Number
           thereof
           ,
           is
           his
           sovereign
           Power
           and
           Authority
           ,
           to
           which
           all
           his
           V●…stals
           do
           yield
           their
           subjection
           ;
           and
           they
           have
           departed
           from
           the
           true
           meaning
           of
           the
           Spirit
           ,
           who
           have
           looked
           to
           the
           Name
           Lateinos
           ,
           and
           the
           Numeral
           Letters
           of
           that
           Name
           :
           For
           the
           Name
           is
           not
           a
           word
           of
           one
           ,
           two
           ,
           three
           ,
           or
           four
           syllables
           ,
           written
           ,
           painted
           ,
           or
           pronounced
           ;
           but
           the
           Name
           of
           the
           B●…ast
           is
           his
           Power
           and
           Headship
           ,
           standing
           in
           immediate
           Opposition
           to
           the
           Name
           or
           Headship
           of
           the
           Lamb.
           But
           if
           you
           ask
           ,
           What
           certainty
           there
           is
           of
           this
           Interpretation
           ?
           The
           ground
           I
           build
           upon
           is
           the
           rule
           of
           Opposition
           ,
           and
           the
           whole
           scope
           of
           the
           Prophecie
           .
           If
           we
           take
           the
           Name
           for
           a
           Grammatical
           Name
           ,
           what
           certainty
           can
           there
           be
           ,
           and
           who
           can
           particularly
           define
           what
           the
           Name
           is
           ?
           Doctor
           Mayer
           upon
           the
           place
           ,
           having
           rejected
           several
           Names
           ,
           and
           their
           Calculation
           by
           
           Numeral
           Letters
           ,
           doth
           thus
           determine
           ;
           
             As
             long
          
           (
           saith
           he
           )
           
             as
             we
             go
             this
             way
             to
             work
             ,
             we
             shall
             never
             be
             able
             to
             Convince
             the
             Adversary
             ,
             there
             being
             so
             many
             Names
             that
             do
             contain
             the
             Number
             .
          
           And
           for
           my
           part
           ,
           I
           do
           believe
           ,
           That
           if
           men
           will
           peruse
           the
           Greek
           and
           Hebrew
           Lexicons
           ,
           they
           shall
           find
           many
           words
           ,
           which
           either
           severally
           ,
           or
           joyntly
           ,
           will
           make
           666
           ,
           by
           the
           calculation
           of
           the
           Numeral
           Letters
           .
           Now
           ,
           what
           certainty
           is
           in
           all
           this
           ?
           On
           the
           contrary
           ,
           If
           we
           take
           the
           Name
           of
           the
           Beast
           for
           his
           Universal
           Power
           ,
           this
           doth
           agree
           with
           the
           Circumstances
           of
           the
           text
           ,
           with
           the
           Analogie
           of
           the
           Prophecie
           ;
           and
           there
           can
           be
           no
           good
           exception
           to
           the
           contrary
           .
        
         
           Now
           to
           gather
           up
           all
           into
           one
           Sum
           :
           Though
           the
           Name
           of
           a
           Thing
           ,
           the
           Name
           of
           a
           Person
           ,
           the
           Name
           of
           a
           Place
           ,
           the
           Name
           of
           a
           State
           ,
           or
           any
           such-like
           ,
           may
           be
           ambiguors
           ;
           yet
           we
           may
           finde
           out
           from
           the
           scope
           of
           the
           text
           ,
           that
           which
           will
           determine
           the
           ambiguity
           .
           If
           any
           shall
           say
           ,
           That
           the
           Name
           of
           the
           Beast
           may
           be
           taken
           for
           any
           thing
           else
           as
           well
           as
           for
           his
           sovereign
           power
           ;
           I
           yield
           that
           it
           may
           be
           so
           :
           but
           if
           we
           look
           to
           Analogie
           in
           the
           Scripture
           ,
           it
           must
           needs
           be
           taken
           for
           his
           sovereignty
           .
           As
           therefore
           in
           the
           like
           cases
           ,
           when
           the
           Scriptures
           speak
           of
           believing
           in
           the
           Name
           of
           the
           Lord
           ,
           of
           the
           writing
           of
           the
           Name
           of
           the
           new
           Ierusalem
           ,
           of
           the
           Name
           of
           the
           Lamb
           ,
           of
           the
           Name
           
             Abaddon
             ,
             Apollyon
             ,
             Harmageddon
          
           ;
           of
           the
           Name
           of
           the
           Father
           in
           the
           foreheads
           of
           the
           144000
           ;
           of
           the
           Lords
           making
           himself
           known
           to
           Moses
           by
           the
           Name
           Iehovah
           ;
           of
           the
           Fathers
           giving
           to
           the
           Son
           a
           Name
           above
           every
           Name
           ,
           that
           at
           the
           Name
           of
           Jesus
           every
           knee
           should
           bow
           :
           As
           in
           these
           several
           Scriptures
           we
           are
           not
           to
           look
           after
           Names
           consisting
           of
           Letters
           and
           syllables
           ,
           but
           to
           judge
           of
           the
           Truth
           according
           to
           the
           scope
           of
           the
           text
           ;
           So
           ,
           in
           the
           present
           case
           ,
           we
           are
           not
           to
           look
           after
           such
           a
           Name
           of
           the
           Beast
           that
           is
           meerly
           literal
           ,
           but
           after
           such
           a
           Name
           that
           will
           hold
           correspondency
           with
           the
           subject
           matter
           of
           the
           text
           ,
           and
           with
           the
           nature
           of
           the
           thing
           it self
           .
           If
           this
           be
           so
           ,
           it
           is
           easie
           to
           conclude
           ,
           That
           the
           Name
           of
           the
           Beast
           is
           no
           other
           but
           his
           Potency
           or
           Headship
           .
        
         
           Secondly
           ,
           We
           argue
           from
           the
           Condition
           and
           Quality
           of
           
           the
           Mark.
           For
           as
           
             à
             priori
          
           we
           may
           come
           to
           the
           knowledge
           of
           the
           Mark
           by
           the
           right
           stating
           and
           defining
           of
           the
           Name
           :
           So
           
             à
             posteriori
          
           ,
           by
           the
           knowledge
           of
           the
           Mark
           we
           may
           come
           to
           understand
           what
           is
           meant
           by
           the
           Name
           ;
           seeing
           that
           it
           is
           called
           
             the
             Mark
             of
             the
             Name
             :
             They
             shall
             be
             tormented
             day
             and
             night
             that
             receive
          
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           
             the
             Mark
             of
             the
             Name
             ,
             Rev.
          
           14.
           11.
           
           I
           finde
           that
           many
           approved
           Commentators
           ,
           who
           do
           much
           differ
           from
           the
           Truth
           of
           our
           interpretation
           ,
           do
           willingly
           agree
           ,
           That
           the
           profession
           of
           a
           Roman
           Catholick
           is
           the
           Mark
           of
           the
           Name
           .
           Now
           ,
           upon
           their
           own
           grounds
           ,
           do
           they
           not
           affirm
           also
           in
           sense
           and
           substance
           ,
           That
           the
           Universal
           Headship
           of
           the
           Bishop
           of
           Rome
           is
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           that
           Name
           of
           the
           Beast
           ?
           For
           what
           is
           the
           profession
           of
           a
           Roman
           Catholick
           ?
           Is
           he
           not
           such
           a
           one
           that
           doth
           believe
           ,
           receive
           ,
           and
           profess
           the
           Universal
           Headship
           of
           the
           Bishop
           of
           Rome
           ?
           Take
           away
           the
           Catholicism
           of
           the
           Roman
           Bishop
           ,
           the
           Faith
           and
           Profession
           of
           a
           Roman
           Catholick
           will
           be
           a
           meer
           non-ens
           ,
           or
           nullity
           .
           So
           then
           ,
           if
           this
           Profession
           be
           the
           Mark
           of
           the
           Name
           ,
           (
           as
           
             Grasserus
             ,
             Brightman
             ,
             Piscator
          
           ,
           and
           other
           Expositors
           will
           have
           it
           )
           I
           say
           ,
           upon
           their
           own
           grounds
           ,
           the
           Universal
           Headship
           must
           be
           the
           Name
           it self
           ,
           seeing
           the
           profession
           of
           a
           Roman
           Catholick
           is
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           the
           Mark
           of
           the
           Name
           .
           And
           so
           our
           Conclusion
           is
           proved
           
             à
             posteriori
          
           .
           From
           the
           Condition
           and
           Quality
           of
           the
           Mark
           ,
           we
           may
           know
           the
           nature
           of
           the
           Name
           .
        
         
           The
           third
           Argument
           is
           drawn
           from
           the
           Image
           ,
           which
           is
           Homogeneal
           and
           answerable
           to
           the
           Name
           ,
           in
           the
           nature
           and
           essence
           thereof
           .
           For
           the
           Image
           of
           the
           Beast
           ,
           I
           might
           take
           it
           as
           a
           thing
           already
           sufficiently
           declared
           in
           the
           Commentaries
           of
           the
           Protestant
           Writers
           .
           In
           them
           ,
           it
           is
           nothing
           else
           but
           that
           Expression
           of
           the
           ancient
           Splendor
           and
           Glory
           of
           the
           Roman
           Majesty
           ,
           anciently
           decayed
           in
           Rome
           Imperial
           ,
           and
           in
           the
           latter
           times
           repaired
           and
           revived
           in
           Rome
           Papal
           .
           The
           scope
           of
           the
           text
           sheweth
           that
           this
           is
           the
           meaning
           ,
           and
           that
           the
           Image
           was
           made
           to
           the
           Beast
           which
           was
           wounded
           in
           one
           of
           its
           Heads
           ,
           &c.
           
           Now
           then
           let
           us
           say
           ,
           That
           the
           Roman
           Majesty
           revived
           again
           from
           the
           dead
           ,
           that
           this
           is
           the
           Image
           ,
           
           how
           shall
           the
           Name
           Lateinos
           ,
           or
           any
           other
           such
           like
           Name
           consisting
           meerly
           of
           Letters
           and
           syllables
           ,
           be
           answerable
           to
           such
           an
           Image
           as
           this
           ?
           What
           Equipage
           or
           Correspondence
           can
           there
           be
           between
           
             quid
             nominis
             ,
             &
             quid
             rei
             ?
          
           Shall
           we
           once
           imagine
           that
           the
           repair
           of
           the
           Roman
           Majesty
           in
           these
           latter
           times
           is
           only
           of
           a
           Name
           that
           consisteth
           of
           Letters
           and
           syllables
           ,
           and
           such
           like
           elements
           of
           the
           Greek
           and
           Hebrew
           Alphabet
           ?
           Away
           with
           such
           a
           conceit
           .
           But
           if
           you
           take
           the
           Name
           for
           the
           Universal
           Headship
           ,
           you
           shall
           have
           a
           Name
           truly
           correspondent
           to
           the
           Image
           and
           to
           the
           Mark.
           For
           when
           the
           Decree
           went
           forth
           ,
           that
           the
           Bishop
           of
           Rome
           should
           be
           Universal
           Head
           of
           the
           Church
           ,
           then
           was
           the
           ancient
           Roman
           Sovereignty
           repaired
           in
           the
           Popes
           ,
           which
           was
           formerly
           lost
           in
           the
           Caesars
           .
           Here
           both
           the
           Name
           and
           the
           Image
           are
           equivalent
           each
           to
           other
           ,
           and
           do
           differ
           only
           in
           a
           certain
           consideration
           .
           And
           the
           Mark
           also
           agreeth
           with
           both
           the
           former
           ,
           seeing
           it
           is
           but
           the
           publick
           profession
           of
           subjection
           to
           that
           Name
           or
           Power
           .
        
         
           The
           Fourth
           Argument
           is
           drawn
           from
           the
           Antithesis
           or
           Contraposition
           of
           the
           Name
           of
           the
           Lamb
           to
           the
           Name
           of
           the
           Beast
           .
           By
           the
           description
           of
           one
           Opposite
           ,
           we
           may
           finde
           out
           the
           Nature
           of
           the
           other
           .
           For
           the
           Name
           of
           the
           Lamb
           ,
           it
           is
           described
           ,
           
             Revelation
             ,
             chap.
          
           19.
           vers
           .
           16.
           
           
             He
             hath
             on
             his
             vesture
             ,
             and
             on
             his
             thigh
             ,
             a
             Name
             written
             ;
             King
             of
             Kings
             ,
             and
             Lord
             of
             Lords
             .
          
           Here
           then
           ,
           in
           this
           Scripture
           ,
           we
           do
           not
           look
           after
           a
           literal
           Name
           ,
           but
           after
           his
           Power
           or
           Sovereignty
           ,
           as
           he
           is
           Lord
           or
           Head
           of
           the
           Church
           .
           We
           reade
           also
           ,
           Phil.
           2.
           9.
           
           
             Because
             he
             humbled
             himself
             to
             the
             Death
             of
             the
             Cross
             ,
             God
             highly
             exalted
             him
             ,
             and
             gave
             him
             a
             Name
             above
             every
             Name
             ,
             that
             at
             the
             Name
             of
             Iesus
             every
             k●…ee
             should
             bow
             ,
          
           &c.
           
           Here
           many
           in
           darker
           times
           have
           taken
           this
           for
           a
           literal
           Name
           ;
           and
           therefore
           it
           hath
           been
           a
           great
           use
           to
           bow
           the
           knee
           when
           the
           Name
           of
           Jesus
           was
           mentioned
           .
           But
           the
           ground
           of
           the
           mistake
           is
           this
           ;
           They
           have
           not
           looked
           to
           the
           main
           scope
           of
           the
           text
           ,
           and
           the
           Nature
           of
           the
           Expression
           .
           For
           the
           Name
           in
           the
           text
           is
           not
           the
           word
           Jesus
           ,
           consisting
           of
           Letters
           and
           syllables
           ;
           but
           the
           sublime
           Power
           ,
           Authority
           ,
           Headship
           ,
           Dominion
           ,
           and
           
           Sovereign
           rule
           ,
           that
           God
           the
           Father
           did
           give
           to
           his
           Son
           after
           the
           suffering
           of
           Death
           .
           And
           this
           is
           so
           expounded
           by
           the
           Apostle
           himself
           in
           another
           place
           ;
           
             Which
             he
             wrought
             in
             Christ
             when
             he
             raised
             him
             from
             the
             dead
             ,
             and
             set
             him
             at
             his
             own
             right
             hand
             in
             heavenly
             places
             ;
             far
             above
             all
             Principalities
             ,
             and
             Powers
             ,
             and
             Might
             ,
             and
             Dominion
             ,
             and
             every
             Name
             that
             is
             named
             ,
             not
             only
             in
             this
             world
             ,
             but
             in
             that
             which
             is
             to
             come
             .
             And
             hath
             put
             all
             things
             under
             his
             feet
             ,
             and
             gave
             him
             to
             be
             head
             over
             all
             things
             to
             the
             Church
             ,
          
           Eph.
           1.
           20
           ,
           21
           ,
           22.
           
           Therefore
           the
           Name
           is
           no
           other
           but
           the
           Sovereign
           Power
           that
           God
           the
           Father
           did
           give
           to
           his
           Son
           the
           Lord
           Jesus
           ,
           as
           Head
           of
           the
           Church
           .
           By
           the
           rule
           of
           contraries
           then
           ,
           the
           Name
           of
           the
           Beast
           must
           needs
           be
           his
           Universal
           Power
           and
           Headship
           ,
           seeing
           in
           all
           respects
           he
           is
           emulous
           of
           the
           Dignity
           of
           the
           Lamb.
           By
           the
           Nature
           of
           the
           one
           ,
           we
           may
           understand
           the
           Nature
           of
           the
           other
           contrary
           .
           If
           the
           Name
           of
           the
           Lamb
           be
           his
           Sovereign
           Dominion
           ,
           King
           of
           Kings
           ,
           and
           Lord
           of
           Lords
           ;
           the
           Name
           of
           the
           Beast
           ,
           
             ex
             adverso
          
           ,
           on
           the
           other
           part
           ,
           must
           be
           his
           Universal
           Headship
           over
           all
           Lords
           ,
           and
           Kings
           ,
           and
           earthly
           Dominions
           .
        
         
           The
           Fifth
           Argument
           is
           drawn
           from
           the
           parallel
           and
           resemblance
           with
           the
           Name
           of
           the
           Whore.
           It
           is
           a
           good
           Observation
           of
           some
           Modern
           Interpreters
           ,
           That
           the
           State
           or
           Government
           described
           chap.
           13.
           under
           the
           Type
           and
           Similitude
           of
           a
           Beast
           with
           two
           Horns
           ,
           is
           again
           more
           largely
           repeated
           under
           the
           resemblance
           of
           a
           Woman
           ,
           riding
           upon
           a
           Scarlet-coloured
           Beast
           ,
           R●…v
           .
           17.
           
           Now
           seeing
           there
           is
           such
           a
           parallel
           between
           the
           descriptions
           in
           both
           Chapters
           ,
           as
           to
           the
           substance
           of
           the
           matter
           ,
           let
           us
           then
           more
           diligently
           consider
           what
           is
           meant
           by
           the
           Name
           of
           the
           Woman
           :
           
             Upon
             her
             Forehead
             was
             a
             Name
             written
             ,
             Mysterie
             ,
             Babylon
             the
             Great
             ,
             the
             Mother
             of
             Harlots
             ,
             and
             the
             Abominations
             of
             the
             Earth
             ,
          
           vers
           .
           5.
           
           Here
           ,
           I
           think
           ,
           none
           will
           be
           so
           void
           of
           Judgement
           as
           to
           look
           after
           a
           literal
           Name
           ,
           and
           a
           literal
           Inscription
           in
           the
           forehead
           of
           the
           Woman
           .
           The
           Name
           is
           no
           other
           but
           that
           Universal
           Maternity
           ,
           or
           Motherhood
           (
           as
           I
           may
           so
           say
           )
           of
           her
           that
           professeth
           herself
           the
           Head
           ,
           or
           Mother-Church
           of
           all
           the
           Christian
           world
           ,
           but
           is
           indeed
           ,
           and
           in
           truth
           ,
           the
           Mother
           of
           all
           the
           Abominations
           
           and
           Idolatries
           of
           the
           Earth
           .
           In
           like
           manner
           ,
           when
           we
           reade
           of
           the
           Name
           of
           the
           Beast
           ,
           we
           are
           not
           to
           look
           after
           a
           literal
           Name
           ,
           (
           as
           Lateinos
           ,
           and
           the
           like
           )
           but
           his
           Nam●…
           must
           be
           his
           Universal
           Paternity
           ,
           Fatherhood
           ,
           Power
           ,
           and
           Dominion
           .
           By
           the
           Analogie
           of
           one
           Expression
           ,
           we
           may
           ●…e
           out
           the
           meaning
           of
           the
           other
           .
           If
           the
           Name
           of
           the
           Great
           Whore
           be
           not
           a
           literal
           and
           syllabical
           Name
           ,
           but
           in
           the
           figure
           doth
           only
           denote
           her
           general
           Motherhood
           ;
           so
           proportionably
           ,
           the
           N●…
           o●…
           the
           Beast
           is
           not
           a
           literal
           Name
           ,
           but
           in
           the
           Trope
           i●…●…oth
           only
           signifie
           his
           Universal
           Dominion
           ,
           and
           Authority
           .
        
         
           If
           we
           transfer
           Matters
           to
           Experience
           ,
           we
           shall
           finde
           the
           eve●…
           of
           things
           doth
           fully
           Answer
           these
           Characters
           of
           the
           Prop●…ecie
           .
           It
           hath
           been
           a
           general
           received
           Maxime
           ,
           in
           many
           Ages
           together
           ,
           That
           out
           of
           our
           Holy
           Mother
           ,
           the
           Church
           of
           Rome
           (
           as
           they
           call
           it
           )
           there
           is
           no
           Salvation
           to
           be
           had
           ;
           she
           is
           the
           Mother
           of
           all
           true
           Catholicks
           ,
           with
           them
           that
           are
           her
           Admirers
           .
           But
           in
           the
           Scripture-language
           she
           is
           called
           
             Babylon
             the
             Great
             ,
             the
             Mother
             of
             Harlots
             ,
             and
             the
             Abominations
             of
             the
             Earth
             .
          
           So
           it
           hath
           been
           as
           generally
           received
           ,
           That
           all
           are
           bound
           to
           submit
           to
           the
           Authority
           of
           our
           Holy
           Father
           the
           Pope
           .
           But
           this
           in
           the
           Scripture-language
           is
           the
           Name
           of
           the
           Beast
           ,
           and
           the
           Mark
           of
           the
           Name
           .
           I
           think
           it
           is
           not
           done
           without
           the
           special
           Wisdom
           and
           fore-knowledge
           of
           God
           ,
           that
           these
           two
           things
           (
           in
           which
           the
           Christian
           world
           should
           erre
           so
           greatly
           )
           should
           be
           set
           forth
           with
           such
           remarkable
           Characters
           ,
           to
           draw
           the
           admiration
           of
           all
           that
           read
           .
           But
           leaving
           these
           things
           for
           a
           deeper
           enquire
           ,
           it
           is
           sufficient
           for
           my
           present
           purpose
           ,
           to
           note
           ,
           that
           the
           Name
           of
           
             Mystical
             Babylon
          
           is
           not
           a
           literal
           Name
           ,
           but
           the
           general
           Motherhood
           of
           that
           City
           and
           Church
           .
           So
           the
           Name
           of
           the
           Beast
           ,
           by
           way
           of
           parallel
           ,
           is
           not
           a
           literal
           Name
           ,
           but
           it
           is
           the
           Universal
           Headship
           of
           the
           Beast
           ,
           as
           Lord
           and
           Potenta●…e
           .
        
         
           The
           Sixth
           Argument
           is
           drawn
           from
           the
           Ground
           and
           Reason
           of
           the
           Imperial
           Edict
           ,
           chap.
           13.
           vers
           .
           16
           ,
           17.
           
           
             He
             causeth
             all
             both
             small
             and
             great
             ,
             bond
             and
             free
             ,
             to
             receive
             a
             Mark
             in
             their
             Forehead
             and
             their
             right
             hand
             ;
             and
             that
             none
             might
             buy
             nor
             sell
             ,
          
           
           
             but
             he
             that
             hath
             the
             Mark
             of
             the
             Name
             .
          
           Now
           then
           ,
           if
           the
           Name
           be
           a
           Title
           or
           Appellation
           ,
           that
           consisteth
           only
           of
           Letters
           and
           syllables
           ,
           how
           will
           this
           redound
           to
           the
           benefit
           or
           perfection
           of
           the
           Beasts
           Kingdom
           ;
           if
           men
           of
           all
           Degrees
           and
           Orders
           shall
           receive
           a
           Name
           ,
           meerly
           consisting
           of
           Numeral
           Letters
           and
           such-like
           trifles
           ?
           But
           if
           you
           take
           the
           Name
           for
           the
           sovereign
           Power
           and
           Headship
           ,
           there
           is
           nothing
           more
           rational
           and
           common
           ,
           than
           for
           the
           Kingdoms
           of
           this
           world
           to
           make
           Laws
           that
           all
           should
           live
           in
           subjection
           to
           their
           Power
           and
           Authority
           .
           And
           Experience
           plainly
           sheweth
           ,
           That
           in
           all
           the
           Kingdoms
           of
           the
           Christian
           world
           ,
           stricter
           Laws
           have
           been
           made
           for
           the
           Preservation
           of
           the
           Dignity
           of
           the
           Catholick
           ,
           Apostolick
           ,
           Roman
           See
           ,
           (
           as
           they
           call
           it
           ,
           )
           and
           for
           the
           maintenance
           of
           the
           Decrees
           made
           by
           that
           Authority
           ;
           than
           there
           have
           been
           for
           the
           support
           and
           Defence
           of
           their
           own
           Communities
           .
           Among
           many
           ,
           take
           this
           one
           Instance
           ,
           of
           the
           Statute
           
             Ex
             Officio
          
           ,
           made
           here
           in
           England
           in
           the
           times
           of
           Hen.
           4.
           
           In
           which
           Statute
           it
           was
           provided
           ,
           That
           all
           they
           should
           be
           Burned
           publickly
           in
           the
           sight
           of
           the
           People
           ,
           that
           did
           maintain
           ,
           teach
           ,
           inform
           ,
           openly
           or
           in
           secret
           ,
           any
           thing
           contrary
           to
           the
           Catholick
           Faith
           ,
           and
           the
           determination
           of
           the
           Holy
           Church
           .
           And
           so
           in
           the
           times
           following
           ,
           by
           vertue
           of
           this
           Law
           ,
           the
           faithful
           Martyrs
           ,
           under
           the
           Title
           of
           Lollards
           ,
           have
           been
           publickly
           burned
           for
           speaking
           ,
           preaching
           ,
           writing
           ,
           and
           declaring
           against
           the
           Decrees
           and
           Superstitions
           established
           by
           the
           Authority
           of
           the
           Church
           of
           Rome
           .
           And
           it
           is
           as
           plain
           ,
           That
           neither
           the
           Scripture
           ,
           nor
           any
           Article
           of
           the
           Creed
           ,
           nor
           any
           other
           Point
           of
           the
           Christian
           Faith
           is
           received
           among
           them
           ,
           but
           that
           which
           is
           warranted
           by
           this
           Authority
           .
           From
           whence
           we
           may
           easily
           collect
           ,
           what
           is
           meant
           by
           the
           Law
           and
           Injunction
           of
           the
           Beast
           ,
           
             That
             none
             might
             buy
             nor
             sell
             ,
             but
             such
             only
             that
             had
             the
             Mark
             ,
             and
             the
             Number
             of
             the
             Name
             .
          
           We
           are
           not
           to
           take
           the
           Name
           Alphabetically
           ;
           For
           ,
           to
           what
           end
           should
           he
           command
           men
           to
           receive
           such
           a
           Name
           as
           this
           ?
           But
           if
           you
           take
           the
           Name
           for
           the
           Universal
           Headship
           ,
           and
           the
           Mark
           for
           the
           publick
           owning
           of
           subjection
           to
           this
           Headship
           ,
           there
           is
           great
           Reason
           given
           for
           the
           making
           of
           such
           
           a
           Statute
           ;
           and
           it
           is
           fully
           proved
           by
           the
           event
           .
        
         
           The
           Seventh
           Argument
           is
           taken
           from
           the
           Essence
           of
           the
           great
           Antichrist
           ,
           as
           he
           is
           set
           forth
           2
           Thess.
           2.
           
           For
           the
           Pith
           and
           Marrow
           of
           the
           Apostle
           ,
           in
           this
           description
           ,
           is
           to
           express
           the
           great
           sublimity
           of
           Power
           that
           the
           man
           of
           sin
           should
           assume
           to
           himself
           ,
           in
           and
           over
           the
           Church
           of
           God.
           These
           are
           the
           words
           of
           the
           Text
           ;
           
             He
             as
             God
             ,
             sitteth
             in
             the
             Temple
             of
             God
             ,
             shewing
             himself
             that
             he
             is
             God
             ,
          
           vers
           .
           4.
           
           From
           these
           words
           we
           may
           gather
           ,
           the
           Essence
           of
           the
           Antichristian
           Kingdom
           lieth
           in
           the
           affectation
           of
           a
           kind
           of
           godlike
           Dominion
           and
           Headship
           ,
           in
           and
           over
           the
           Church
           of
           God.
           Now
           then
           ,
           as
           the
           ●…on
           of
           God
           hath
           merited
           of
           his
           Father
           to
           be
           only
           Head
           ,
           and
           only
           Lord
           :
           So
           must
           our
           subjection
           be
           rendered
           to
           him
           without
           communicability
           of
           such
           a
           prerogative
           to
           any
           other
           ▪
           For
           though
           there
           be
           gods
           many
           ,
           and
           lords
           many
           ,
           there
           is
           but
           one
           Universal
           Head
           ,
           on
           whom
           the
           whole
           Body
           of
           the
           Church
           doth
           depend
           .
           In
           this
           sense
           ,
           as
           the
           Son
           hath
           merited
           of
           the
           Father
           to
           be
           the
           Supreme
           Lord
           ,
           and
           Head
           ;
           there
           is
           none
           
             de
             jure
          
           can
           be
           ,
           but
           himself
           only
           .
           Now
           then
           ,
           when
           Paul
           in
           the
           Thessalonians
           doth
           describe
           the
           Essence
           of
           the
           Beast's
           Kingdom
           ,
           he
           doth
           shew
           that
           it
           doth
           chiefly
           confist
           in
           the
           Headship
           and
           Dominion
           over
           the
           Church
           .
           And
           this
           is
           that
           which
           Iohn
           in
           the
           Revelation
           calls
           the
           Name
           of
           the
           Beast
           .
        
         
           And
           so
           far
           we
           have
           gone
           in
           the
           Discovery
           of
           the
           Subject
           of
           the
           Number
           :
           We
           have
           shewed
           by
           many
           Reasons
           ,
           That
           the
           Name
           is
           The
           Headship
           of
           the
           Beast
           .
        
         
           Now
           we
           shall
           in
           the
           next
           Chapter
           endeavour
           to
           Calculate
           and
           Compute
           the
           Number
           .
        
      
       
         
         
           
             CHAP.
             IV.
          
           Concerning
           the
           Number
           of
           the
           Name
           of
           the
           Beast
           ;
           where
           it
           is
           shewed
           ,
           That
           the
           Name
           or
           Universal
           Headship
           began
           publickly
           to
           be
           Established
           under
           the
           Emperor
           Phocas
           ,
           666
           years
           from
           the
           beginning
           of
           the
           Roman
           ,
           as
           the
           F●…th
           Metal
           Kingdome
           .
        
         
           FOr
           the
           carrying
           on
           of
           this
           Complicate
           Proposition
           ,
           we
           are
           to
           make
           Two
           things
           clear
           :
           First
           ,
           That
           the
           Name
           ,
           or
           Sovereign
           Dominion
           of
           the
           Beast
           ,
           began
           precisely
           at
           that
           time
           of
           the
           Universal
           Headship
           under
           the
           Emperor
           Phocas
           .
           Secondly
           ,
           That
           there
           is
           a
           C●…in
           of
           666
           years
           from
           the
           begining
           of
           the
           Roman
           ,
           as
           the
           Fourth
           Metal
           Kingdom
           ,
           to
           the
           Name
           ,
           or
           Universal
           Headship
           afcre●…aid
           .
        
         
           First
           ,
           Concerning
           the
           E●…sion
           of
           the
           two-horned
           Beast
           out
           of
           the
           Earth
           ,
           I
           find
           a
           great
           consent
           in
           the
           Commentaries
           ,
           Controversies
           ,
           and
           Stories
           of
           the
           Church
           ,
           That
           the
           Two-Horned
           Beast
           began
           in
           the
           Universal
           Headship
           under
           the
           Emperor
           
             Phocas
             .
             Crackan●…orp
          
           ,
           in
           his
           Treatise
           against
           Spala●…
           ,
           calleth
           it
           the
           C●…
           one
           of
           the
           Building
           .
           And
           in
           very
           deed
           ,
           though
           many
           Authors
           do
           stiffly
           maintain
           ,
           That
           the
           Name
           is
           the
           word
           Lateinos
           ,
           and
           that
           the
           Number
           is
           made
           out
           of
           the
           Numeral
           Letters
           of
           that
           Name
           :
           yet
           if
           you
           put
           them
           upon
           it
           to
           state
           the
           Original
           of
           the
           Beast's
           Kingdom
           ,
           they
           do
           generally
           in
           a
           manner
           pitch
           upon
           the
           year
           aforesaid
           .
           But
           we
           will
           not
           depend
           upon
           Authority
           .
           Therefore
           to
           the
           right
           computing
           of
           ●…he
           true
           Apocalyptical
           time
           ,
           we
           will
           Observe
           these
           ensuing
           Principles
           .
        
         
           Principle
           1.
           
           There
           must
           be
           some
           particular
           instant
           of
           time
           when
           the
           Antichristian
           state
           ,
           Typed
           by
           the
           Beast
           with
           Two
           Horns
           ,
           had
           its
           first
           visible
           rising
           out
           of
           the
           Earth
           .
           This
           is
           proved
           from
           the
           words
           of
           the
           Text
           :
           
             And
             I
             beheld
             another
          
           
           
             Beast
             coming
             out
             of
             the
             Earth
             ,
             and
             he
             had
             Two
             Horns
             like
             the
             Lamb
             ,
             and
             he
             spake
             as
             the
             Dragon
             ,
          
           Rev.
           13.
           11.
           
           And
           therefore
           ,
           as
           there
           was
           a
           certain
           and
           determinate
           time
           ,
           when
           the
           Babylonian
           Lyon
           ,
           and
           the
           Persian
           Bear
           came
           up
           out
           of
           the
           Sea
           ;
           that
           is
           ,
           As
           there
           was
           a
           certain
           time
           when
           the
           Babylolonian
           and
           Persian
           Monarchies
           began
           :
           so
           there
           must
           be
           a
           particular
           and
           certain
           term
           of
           time
           ,
           when
           the
           Antichristian
           Monarchy
           must
           come
           up
           out
           of
           the
           Earth
           also
           .
           If
           this
           be
           well
           observed
           ,
           it
           will
           cut
           off
           a
           multitude
           of
           super●…luous
           Di●…putes
           concerning
           the
           Infancy
           ,
           Childhood
           ,
           Middle
           age
           ,
           and
           other
           degrees
           of
           the
           Antichristian
           state
           .
           In
           these
           points
           every
           man
           may
           abound
           in
           his
           own
           Fancy
           ;
           but
           sure
           I
           am
           ,
           according
           to
           the
           true
           Apocalyptical
           process
           ,
           there
           is
           mention
           made
           but
           of
           one
           visible
           and
           remarkable
           beginning
           of
           the
           Two-Horned
           Beast
           :
           And
           this
           is
           at
           the
           time
           of
           his
           rising
           ou●…
           of
           the
           Earth
           .
        
         
           Princ.
           2.
           
           Secondly
           ,
           The
           time
           of
           the
           rising
           of
           this
           Beast
           must
           be
           after
           the
           dissipation
           of
           the
           old
           Empire
           ,
           and
           the
           beginning
           of
           the
           Ten
           Kings
           ,
           Typed
           and
           Figured
           by
           the
           rising
           of
           the
           Ten-Horned
           Beast
           out
           of
           the
           Sea.
           
        
         
           There
           are
           Two
           Branches
           in
           this
           Principle
           .
        
         
           The
           First
           is
           this
           ,
           That
           the
           time
           of
           the
           beginning
           of
           the
           Two-Horned
           Beast
           must
           needs
           be
           placed
           after
           the
           Fall
           of
           the
           Empire
           .
           This
           is
           clearly
           proved
           from
           the
           Scope
           of
           the
           13
           and
           17
           Chapters
           of
           the
           Revelation
           .
           Both
           these
           Scriptures
           do
           pitch
           upon
           this
           ,
           that
           there
           must
           be
           a
           taking
           away
           of
           the
           Imperial
           Majesty
           ,
           and
           a
           kinde
           of
           Chasm
           ,
           or
           Intercision
           of
           that
           sovereignty
           ,
           before
           the
           Roman
           Dominion
           in
           the
           last
           ,
           the
           re●…aired
           and
           Antichristian
           state
           thereof
           .
           In
           the
           13
           Chapter
           it
           is
           said
           ,
           That
           the
           Ten-Horned
           Beast
           had
           a
           wound
           in
           one
           of
           his
           heads
           ,
           vers
           .
           3.
           
           What
           is
           this
           wound
           ,
           but
           an
           intercision
           or
           cessation
           of
           all
           Roman
           Majesty
           in
           the
           world
           ,
           at
           the
           rising
           of
           the
           Ten
           Kings
           ?
           The
           Two-Horned
           beast
           by
           his
           De●…es
           did
           cure
           the
           wound
           ,
           vers
           .
           14
           ,
           15.
           
           What
           is
           this
           cure
           ,
           but
           the
           renovation
           of
           the
           same
           Sovereignty
           in
           the
           Popes
           ,
           which
           was
           formerly
           lost
           in
           the
           Caesars
           ?
           So
           in
           the
           17
           Chapter
           it
           is
           said
           ,
           That
           all
           the
           world
           worshipped
           the
           Beast
           ;
           
             When
             they
             beheld
             the
          
           
           
             Beast
             that
             was
             ,
             is
             not
             ,
             and
             yet
             is
             ,
          
           v.
           8.
           
           What
           is
           meant
           here
           ,
           by
           
             the
             Beast
             that
             is
             not
          
           ?
           This
           noteth
           the
           total
           cessation
           &
           abrogation
           of
           the
           Roman
           Majesty
           at
           the
           Fall
           of
           the
           Empire
           .
           And
           ,
           by
           
             the
             Beast
             that
             is
          
           ;
           This
           ●…eth
           the
           re●…ing
           of
           the
           Roman
           Majesty
           from
           the
           Dead
           ,
           when
           it
           was
           formerly
           lost
           in
           the
           Caesars
           .
           Both
           Scriptures
           then
           do
           plainly
           shew
           ,
           and
           so
           doth
           S.
           Paul
           in
           the
           Thessalonians
           ,
           That
           the
           Empire
           must
           first
           Fall
           ,
           before
           the
           Antichristian
           times
           can
           begin
           .
           They
           therefore
           that
           set
           the
           beginning
           of
           the
           Beast's
           Kingdom
           at
           the
           time
           of
           Victor
           ,
           or
           at
           Constantines
           removing
           the
           seat
           of
           the
           Empire
           to
           Constantinople
           ;
           or
           at
           the
           Reign
           of
           the
           Emperor
           Iul●…an
           ,
           or
           at
           any
           other
           time
           before
           the
           Fall
           of
           the
           Empire
           :
           To
           my
           understanding
           they
           do
           anticipate
           the
           true
           beginning
           of
           the
           Beast's
           Kingdom
           ,
           and
           do
           go
           against
           the
           Grounds
           and
           Foundations
           of
           all
           true
           Apocalyptical
           learning
           .
        
         
           The
           Second
           Branch
           of
           this
           Principle
           is
           this
           also
           ,
           That
           the
           time
           of
           the
           beginning
           of
           the
           Beast
           with
           Two
           Horns
           ,
           must
           be
           after
           the
           rising
           of
           the
           Ten
           Kings
           ,
           or
           the
           Ten-Horned
           Beast
           out
           of
           the
           Sea
           ,
           chap.
           13.
           vers
           .
           1.
           
           For
           ,
           though
           the
           antient
           Commentators
           take
           the
           first
           Beast
           to
           be
           the
           Old
           Empire
           ,
           yet
           the
           latter
           Interpreters
           ,
           (
           such
           as
           
             Brightman
             ,
             Peraeus
             ,
             Mede
          
           ,
           and
           others
           )
           do
           more
           rightly
           understand
           this
           to
           be
           the
           rising
           of
           the
           Ten
           Kings
           out
           of
           the
           ruines
           of
           the
           Empire
           .
           And
           in
           very
           deed
           ,
           if
           we
           consider
           the
           time
           of
           the
           Beginning
           of
           this
           Beast
           ,
           it
           was
           presently
           and
           immediately
           after
           the
           Dragons
           Flood
           ,
           scil
           .
           after
           the
           Inundation
           of
           the
           Barbarous
           Nations
           .
           Secondly
           ,
           The
           Manner
           of
           the
           Rising
           .
           The
           Beast
           had
           Ten
           Crowns
           upon
           his
           Horns
           at
           the
           time
           of
           his
           Rising
           out
           of
           the
           Sea
           ,
           which
           noteth
           the
           Division
           of
           the
           Roman
           into
           Ten
           inferiour
           Kingdoms
           ,
           in
           that
           notable
           change
           of
           State.
           Thirdly
           ,
           The
           time
           of
           his
           Continuance
           .
           He
           was
           to
           continue
           42
           Months
           ;
           and
           this
           is
           the
           exact
           time
           of
           the
           Sufferings
           of
           the
           Church
           under
           the
           Antichristian
           Persecution
           .
           These
           ,
           and
           many
           such-like
           Reasons
           ,
           do
           strongly
           prove
           ,
           That
           the
           Beast
           with
           Ten
           Horns
           ,
           and
           his
           rising
           out
           of
           the
           Sea
           ,
           doth
           Note
           and
           decypher
           ,
           The
           standing
           up
           of
           the
           Ten
           Kings
           out
           of
           the
           Ruines
           of
           the
           Empire
           .
           And
           here
           then
           ,
           The
           beginning
           of
           the
           
           42
           Months
           ,
           the
           time
           of
           the
           Reign
           of
           this
           Beast
           ,
           is
           set
           forth
           by
           a
           true
           Demonstrative
           Character
           ;
           and
           we
           may
           not
           doubt
           of
           the
           certainty
           thereof
           .
        
         
           Further
           then
           ,
           If
           we
           look
           to
           the
           scope
           of
           the
           Text
           ,
           the
           rising
           of
           the
           Beast
           with
           Two
           Horns
           must
           needs
           be
           after
           the
           rising
           of
           the
           Ten-Horned
           Beast
           ;
           and
           so
           consequently
           after
           the
           standing
           up
           of
           the
           Ten
           Kings
           out
           of
           the
           Ruines
           of
           the
           Empire
           .
           And
           so
           the
           Visions
           will
           be
           rightly
           applyed
           to
           their
           true
           times
           .
           I
           know
           nothing
           of
           moment
           which
           doth
           contradict
           this
           Assertion
           ,
           but
           only
           that
           which
           is
           spoken
           by
           Mr
           Mede
           in
           his
           
             Apocalyptical
             Key
             ,
             Synchronism
             the
             second
             :
          
           Where
           he
           endeavoureth
           to
           shew
           ,
           That
           the
           Ten-horned
           Beast
           ,
           and
           the
           Beast
           with
           Two
           Horns
           ,
           are
           exact
           Contemporaries
           in
           all
           their
           times
           .
           These
           are
           his
           words
           ;
           
             A
             se
             invic●…nt
             neque
             ortu
             suo
             ,
             neque
             interitu
             separantur
             :
             quinetiam
             altera
             alterius
             potestatem
          
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           
             hoc
             est
             in
             praesentia
             ipsius
             administrat
             .
          
           And
           then
           he
           concludes
           ,
           
             Quis
             non
             vidit
             illas
             omni
             aevo
             suo
             necessariò
             contemporare
             ?
          
           But
           saving
           the
           great
           respect
           I
           bear
           to
           this
           Author
           ,
           I
           cannot
           see
           ,
           first
           ,
           how
           this
           can
           agree
           with
           the
           scope
           of
           the
           Scripture
           :
           Secondly
           ,
           With
           the
           event
           of
           things
           :
           Thirdly
           ,
           With
           the
           Tenor
           of
           his
           own
           Doctrine
           ,
           as
           he
           delivereth
           it
           elsewhere
           :
           Fourthly
           ,
           With
           the
           Body
           of
           the
           best
           Protestant
           Expositors
           ,
           who
           have
           spoken
           most
           Pro●…atively
           concerning
           the
           beginning
           of
           the
           Beast's
           Kingdom
           .
        
         
           First
           ,
           I
           cannot
           see
           how
           he
           agreeth
           with
           the
           Scripture
           .
           For
           Iohn
           saw
           first
           a
           Beast
           come
           out
           of
           the
           Sea
           with
           seven
           Heads
           and
           ten
           Horns
           ,
           and
           ten
           Crowns
           upon
           his
           Horns
           ;
           and
           after
           that
           he
           saw
           another
           second
           Beast
           which
           came
           out
           of
           the
           Earth
           with
           Two
           Horns
           .
           From
           whence
           we
           may
           easily
           collect
           ,
           That
           the
           rising
           of
           the
           one
           ,
           is
           in
           order
           of
           time
           before
           the
           rising
           of
           the
           other
           :
           and
           therefore
           they
           no
           not
           
             ad
             amussim
             contemporare
             ortu
             suo
          
           ,
           they
           do
           not
           exactly
           agree
           in
           the
           time
           of
           their
           Original
           .
        
         
           Secondly
           ,
           I
           cannot
           see
           how
           he
           agrees
           with
           the
           event
           of
           things
           .
           For
           at
           that
           time
           ,
           when
           the
           Ten
           Kings
           arose
           out
           of
           the
           ruines
           of
           the
           Empire
           ,
           there
           was
           no
           Roman
           Sovereignty
           
           in
           the
           whole
           world
           .
           For
           ,
           as
           we
           have
           formerly
           mentioned
           ,
           The
           Beast
           had
           a
           wound
           in
           one
           of
           his
           Heads
           ;
           and
           therefore
           there
           was
           an
           intercision
           and
           a
           cessation
           of
           that
           Potency
           for
           a
           time
           .
           We
           yield
           that
           the
           Two-Horned
           Beast
           is
           the
           Restorer
           of
           the
           Ten-Horned
           Beast
           ;
           he
           cured
           the
           wound
           ,
           and
           made
           the
           Image
           to
           speak
           ,
           and
           live
           .
           It
           is
           true
           ,
           that
           he
           revived
           the
           Roman
           Sovereignty
           from
           Death
           to
           Life
           :
           but
           this
           reviving
           was
           not
           assoon
           as
           the
           Ten
           Kings
           rose
           out
           of
           the
           Ruines
           of
           the
           Empire
           .
        
         
           Thirdly
           ,
           I
           cannot
           see
           how
           this
           agreeth
           with
           Mr
           Mede's
           own
           Doctrine
           :
           For
           he
           saith
           ,
           Apost
           .
           pag.
           83.
           
           That
           the
           Fourth
           Beast
           is
           the
           Roman
           Kingdom
           ;
           the
           Ten
           Horns
           are
           the
           Ten
           Kings
           that
           arise
           out
           of
           the
           dissipation
           of
           the
           Empire
           ;
           and
           the
           little
           Horn
           he
           saith
           expresly
           that
           it
           must
           arise
           after
           them
           ,
           pag.
           74.
           
           For
           so
           he
           will
           have
           the
           Chaldee
           word
           to
           be
           all
           one
           with
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           of
           the
           70
           ;
           to
           wit
           ,
           That
           the
           little
           Horn
           must
           arise
           behind
           the
           Ten
           Horns
           .
           Now
           then
           ,
           if
           the
           Papacie
           must
           arise
           after
           ,
           and
           behind
           the
           Ten
           Kings
           ,
           it
           is
           plain
           ,
           That
           he
           doth
           contemporate
           with
           them
           
             ortu
             suo
          
           ,
           in
           his
           beginning
           ;
           and
           that
           according
           to
           Mr
           Mede's
           own
           Principles
           .
        
         
           Fourthly
           ,
           I
           cannot
           see
           how
           he
           can
           agree
           with
           the
           Body
           of
           the
           best
           Protestant
           Expositors
           ,
           who
           have
           demonstratively
           written
           of
           the
           beginning
           of
           the
           Beast's
           Kingdom
           .
           For
           ,
           as
           many
           almost
           who
           have
           spoken
           of
           the
           rising
           of
           the
           Two-Horned
           Beast
           out
           of
           the
           Earth
           ,
           have
           applied
           this
           beginning
           to
           the
           Bishop
           of
           Rome
           ,
           in
           the
           times
           after
           the
           Fall
           of
           the
           Empire
           ,
           when
           the
           Decree
           went
           forth
           ,
           That
           he
           should
           be
           Head
           over
           all
           the
           Churches
           .
        
         
           All
           the
           Circumstances
           of
           the
           Text
           laid
           together
           ,
           prove
           the
           truth
           of
           this
           Interpetation
           .
           We
           come
           now
           to
           the
           Third
           Principle
           .
        
         
           Princ.
           3.
           
           The
           time
           of
           the
           rising
           of
           the
           second
           Beast
           must
           be
           so
           stated
           ,
           That
           all
           the
           circumstances
           of
           the
           Text
           may
           agree
           to
           such
           a
           beginning
           .
           We
           must
           not
           leave
           the
           times
           of
           the
           Fall
           of
           the
           Old
           Empire
           behind
           ,
           and
           so
           going
           forward
           ,
           apply
           the
           rising
           of
           the
           Two-Horned
           Beast
           to
           what
           times
           we
           please
           .
           No
           :
           There
           is
           some
           particular
           instant
           of
           time
           when
           the
           Beast
           
           rose
           up
           out
           of
           the
           Earth
           ,
           when
           his
           Name
           or
           Universal
           Headship
           began
           .
           And
           thi●…
           must
           needs
           be
           at
           the
           Decree
           under
           the
           Emperor
           Phocas
           ,
           when
           it
           was
           determined
           ,
           That
           the
           Bishop
           of
           Rome
           should
           be
           Head
           over
           all
           Churches
           .
        
         
           So
           then
           ,
           if
           we
           lay
           these
           Three
           Principles
           together
           ;
           First
           ,
           That
           the
           Beast
           had
           a
           determinate
           Beginning
           of
           his
           Kingdom
           .
           Secondly
           ,
           That
           this
           determinate
           Beginning
           was
           after
           the
           Fall
           of
           the
           Empire
           .
           Thirdly
           ,
           That
           it
           was
           after
           the
           Fall
           of
           the
           Empire
           in
           such
           times
           when
           the
           Name
           or
           Universal
           Headship
           of
           the
           Bishop
           of
           Rome
           began
           first
           publickly
           and
           solemnly
           to
           be
           established
           .
           If
           we
           put
           all
           these
           Three
           together
           ,
           we
           shall
           inevitably
           pi●…ch
           upon
           that
           time
           when
           the
           Decree
           went
           forth
           ,
           That
           the
           Bishop
           of
           Rome
           should
           be
           the
           Head
           over
           all
           Churches
           .
           For
           if
           we
           look
           to
           the
           Stories
           ,
           we
           shall
           find
           ,
           that
           presently
           after
           the
           Fall
           of
           the
           Empire
           ,
           the
           Bishop
           of
           Constantinople
           was
           to
           have
           equal
           Priviledges
           with
           the
           Bishop
           of
           Rome
           ,
           by
           the
           Decree
           of
           the
           Council
           of
           Calcedon
           .
           Nay
           further
           ,
           The
           Bishop
           of
           Constantinople
           was
           in
           a
           fairer
           possibility
           for
           the
           Universal
           Headship
           than
           was
           he
           of
           Rome
           .
           Only
           then
           in
           the
           time
           under
           the
           Emperor
           Phocas
           the
           Decree
           was
           Enacted
           ,
           That
           the
           Bishop
           of
           Rome
           should
           be
           the
           Head
           of
           all
           Churches
           .
           And
           from
           that
           time
           downward
           ,
           this
           hath
           been
           a
           Priviledge
           perpetually
           annexed
           to
           that
           Chair
           .
           And
           so
           then
           we
           have
           the
           true
           beginning
           of
           the
           rising
           of
           the
           Two-Horned
           Beast
           out
           of
           the
           Earth
           .
           And
           it
           is
           rightly
           and
           Apocalyptically
           applied
           ●…o
           the
           times
           ,
           by
           the
           Position
           of
           the
           Three
           Principles
           aforenamed
           .
        
         
           But
           here
           Bellarmine
           and
           Baronius
           deny
           ,
           That
           the
           Universal
           Headship
           began
           in
           the
           time
           of
           the
           Emperor
           Phocas
           .
           For
           ,
           saith
           
             Bellarmine
             ,
             Phocas
             did
             not
             Ordain
             this
             by
             way
             of
             a
             new
             Institution
             ,
             but
             only
             by
             way
             of
             Declaration
             of
             a
             thing
             ever
             before
             Acknowledged
             in
             the
             Church
             .
          
           In
           Answer
           to
           this
           ,
           Mornay
           in
           his
           History
           of
           the
           Papacie
           telleth
           us
           ,
           That
           all
           Historians
           down
           from
           that
           time
           ,
           as
           
             Paulus
             Diaconus
             ,
             Freculphus
             ,
             Rhegino
             ,
             Anastasius
             ,
             Sabelli●…us
             ,
             Blondus
             ,
             Pomponius
             Laetus
             ,
          
           and
           others
           ,
           agree
           in
           this
           beginning
           .
           Progress
           .
           22.
           pag.
           118.
           
           And
           for
           Baronius
           ,
           he
           saith
           ,
           An.
           606.
           
           
             Therefore
             what
             did
          
           Phocas
           
           
             bestow
             upon
             the
             Roman
             Church
             ?
             Nothing
             truly
             :
             Only
             he
             did
             Declare
             by
             his
             Sentence
             ,
             That
             the
             Name
             of
             the
             Oecumenical
             Bishop
             was
             unlawfully
             Usurped
             by
             the
             Bishop
             of
             Constantinople
             ,
             when
             it
             was
             due
             ,
             Romanae
             tantum
             Ecclesiae
             ,
             only
             to
             the
             Roman
             Church
             .
          
           I
           cannot
           but
           admire
           at
           the
           boldness
           of
           this
           great
           Annalist
           ,
           that
           he
           should
           go
           so
           palpably
           against
           the
           Stories
           of
           the
           Church
           ,
           and
           against
           some
           chief
           Records
           of
           their
           own
           .
           For
           if
           we
           look
           a
           little
           before
           ,
           in
           the
           times
           of
           Gregory
           the
           Great
           ,
           we
           shall
           finde
           that
           there
           was
           a
           sharp
           contest
           betwixt
           him
           and
           the
           Bishop
           of
           Constantinople
           about
           the
           Primacy
           .
           For
           Iohn
           the
           Fourth
           ,
           sirnamed
           the
           Easter
           ,
           Bishop
           of
           Constantinople
           ,
           did
           begin
           to
           assume
           the
           Title
           of
           Universal
           Bishop
           about
           the
           year
           of
           the
           Lord
           580
           ,
           26
           years
           before
           the
           matter
           was
           determined
           for
           the
           Bishop
           of
           Rome
           .
           He
           was
           the
           more
           imboldened
           to
           do
           this
           ,
           because
           he
           saw
           the
           Seat
           of
           the
           Empire
           established
           at
           Constantinople
           ,
           and
           the
           City
           of
           Rome
           besieged
           by
           the
           Lombards
           :
           And
           consequently
           the
           Bishop
           of
           that
           City
           brought
           to
           a
           low
           ebb
           .
           Now
           these
           attempts
           of
           the
           Bishops
           of
           Constantinople
           ,
           they
           of
           Rome
           did
           most
           strongly
           oppose
           ,
           but
           none
           more
           than
           Gregory
           the
           Great
           ,
           as
           may
           appear
           by
           sundry
           passages
           in
           his
           Epistles
           at
           this
           very
           day
           .
           In
           them
           we
           find
           every-where
           ,
           that
           he
           doth
           strongly
           Dispute
           against
           the
           Name
           and
           Title
           of
           Universal
           Bishop
           ;
           and
           doth
           say
           in
           effect
           ,
           That
           it
           is
           the
           Name
           of
           the
           Beast
           .
           He
           doth
           again
           and
           again
           inculcate
           ,
           That
           the
           Title
           is
           new
           ,
           prophane
           ,
           contrary
           to
           the
           scope
           of
           the
           Gospel
           ,
           and
           the
           Use
           of
           the
           Church
           .
           And
           whereas
           Bellarmine
           and
           Baronius
           have
           this
           creep-hole
           ,
           that
           he
           did
           only
           inveigh
           against
           the
           encroachments
           of
           the
           Bishop
           of
           Constantinople
           ;
           he
           doth
           again
           and
           again
           repeat
           ,
           
             That
             none
             of
             his
             Predecessours
             did
             ever
             use
             such
             a
             prophane
             Title
             :
             Nullus
             decessorum
             meorum
             hoc
             tam
             profano
             vocabulo
             uti
             consuevit
             ,
          
           lib.
           4.
           
           Epist.
           80.
           
           But
           that
           which
           is
           most
           to
           our
           purpo●…e
           ,
           he
           doth
           everywhere
           place
           the
           formality
           of
           Antichristianism
           in
           the
           Universal
           Headship
           .
           And
           they
           that
           affect
           so
           to
           be
           called
           ,
           he
           doth
           expresly
           term
           them
           the
           praecursors
           and
           fore-runners
           of
           Antichrist
           .
           To
           let
           pass
           all
           others
           ,
           we
           will
           recite
           those
           words
           of
           his
           ,
           as
           they
           are
           in
           his
           sixth
           Book
           and
           thirtieth
           Epistle
           to
           
           the
           Emperor
           
             Mauritius
             ;
             Consider
          
           (
           saith
           he
           )
           
             that
             when
             Antichrist
             shall
             call
             himself
             God
             ,
             the
             matter
             it self
             is
             but
             small
             and
             frivolous
             ,
             yet
             most
             pernitious
             :
             If
             you
             look
             to
             the
             quality
             of
             the
             word
             ,
             it
             consisteth
             only
             of
             two
             Syllables
             ;
             but
             if
             you
             regard
             the
             weight
             of
             iniquity
             ,
             the
             matter
             is
             very
             great
             .
             For
             I
             may
             boldly
             say
             ,
             That
             whosoever
             calleth
             himself
             ,
             or
             desireth
             to
             be
             called
             by
             others
             ,
             The
             Universal
             Priest
             ,
             or
             Bishop
             ,
             is
             in
             his
             elation
             of
             minde
             ,
             the
             forerunner
             of
             Antichrist
             .
             In
             elatione
             suâ
             Antichristum
             praecurrit
             .
             Because
             in
             like
             pride
             he
             preferreth
             himself
             before
             others
             .
          
           And
           in
           his
           Fourth
           Book
           ,
           Epist.
           34.
           he
           writeth
           to
           
             Constantia
             the
             Empress
             :
             Be
             it
             far
          
           (
           saith
           he
           )
           
             that
             your
             times
             should
             thus
             be
             defiled
             with
             the
             Exaltation
             of
             one
             man
             :
          
           and
           then
           addeth
           ,
           
             In
             hâc
             ejus
             superbiâ
             quid
             aliud
             nisi
             propinqua
             ja●…
             Antichristi
             esse
             tempora
             designatur
             ?
             By
             this
             Arrogancy
             what
             else
             is
             portended
             ,
             but
             that
             the
             time
             of
             Antichrist
             is
             now
             at
             hand
             ?
          
           And
           more
           fully
           to
           Iohn
           himself
           ,
           he
           useth
           these
           words
           ,
           lib.
           4.
           
           Epist.
           38.
           
           
             Tu
             quid
             Christo
             ,
             Universalis
             scilicet
             Ecclesiae
             capiti
             ,
             in
             extremi
             judicii
             dicturus
             es
             examine
             ,
             qui
             cuncta
             ejus
             membra
             tibimet
             conaris
             Universalis
             appellatione
             supponere
             ?
             What
             wilt
             thou
             answer
             to
             Christ
             ,
             the
             Head
             of
             the
             Universal
             Church
             ,
             in
             the
             tryal
             of
             the
             Day
             of
             Iudgement
             ,
             seeing
             that
             by
             this
             Name
          
           Universal
           
             thou
             seekest
             to
             inthral
             the
             Members
             of
             his
             Bodie
             to
             thy self
             ?
          
           And
           that
           which
           maketh
           more
           to
           our
           purpose
           ;
           he
           telleth
           him
           ,
           
             That
             the
             times
             concerning
             the
             coming
             of
             Antichrist
             begin
             to
             be
             fulfilled
             ,
             and
             that
             there
             is
             ●…ow
             a
             performance
             of
             the
             Prophecies
             .
             Omnia
             enim
             quae
             praedicta
             sunt
             fiunt
             :
             Rex
             superbiae
             prope
             est
             ,
             &
             (
             quod
             dici
             nefas
             est
             )
             sacerdotum
             est
             praeparatus
             exercitus
             .
             All
             Prophecies
             begin
             now
             to
             be
             fulfilled
             ,
             and
             (
             that
             which
             I
             dread
             to
             speak
             )
             the
             King
             of
             Pride
             is
             at
             hand
             ,
             and
             an
             Army
             of
             Priests
             do
             attend
             him
             .
          
        
         
           Now
           for
           these
           ,
           and
           such-like
           passages
           between
           Gregory
           and
           
             Iohn
             of
             Constantinople
          
           ,
           I
           cannot
           think
           otherwise
           of
           them
           ,
           but
           that
           they
           did
           happen
           by
           the
           singular
           Providence
           of
           God
           ,
           to
           excite
           the
           world
           to
           look
           after
           the
           Revelation
           of
           the
           man
           of
           sin
           .
           For
           ,
           as
           when
           our
           Lord
           Christ
           was
           born
           at
           Bethlehem
           ,
           there
           was
           a
           hurly-burly
           in
           Iudaea
           ;
           the
           star
           appeared
           ,
           the
           wise
           men
           came
           to
           Ierusalem
           ,
           and
           the
           whole
           City
           was
           troubled
           ;
           
           What
           was
           the
           end
           of
           God
           in
           all
           this
           ,
           but
           to
           stir
           them
           up
           to
           attention
           ,
           to
           look
           after
           the
           Messiah
           ,
           of
           whom
           so
           much
           was
           sooken
           in
           the
           Prophecies
           ?
           So
           in
           the
           like
           case
           ,
           many
           things
           being
           foretold
           in
           the
           writings
           of
           the
           Apostles
           concerning
           the
           coming
           of
           Antichrist
           ,
           when
           that
           time
           should
           begin
           to
           draw
           near
           ,
           the
           Lord
           was
           pleased
           to
           suffer
           such
           a
           dust
           to
           be
           raised
           between
           Constantinople
           and
           Rome
           ,
           to
           rouze
           up
           the
           spirits
           of
           men
           to
           examine
           those
           things
           which
           were
           foretold
           in
           the
           Scriptures
           .
        
         
           In
           the
           Book
           of
           the
           Revelation
           ,
           there
           is
           much
           spoken
           concerning
           the
           Name
           of
           the
           Beast
           ,
           and
           the
           Mark
           of
           the
           Name
           :
           Now
           when
           this
           Name
           or
           Headship
           was
           come
           to
           the
           beginning
           thereof
           ,
           Gregory
           did
           plainly
           declare
           ,
           That
           the
           formality
           of
           Antichristianism
           did
           consist
           in
           this
           Title
           ,
           and
           that
           the
           Man
           of
           sin
           was
           then
           at
           the
           doors
           .
           And
           I
           wish
           one
           day
           his
           sayings
           do
           not
           strongly
           witness
           against
           all
           his
           Successors
           ,
           who
           with
           one
           joynt
           consent
           ,
           down
           from
           the
           year
           of
           our
           Lord
           606
           ,
           have
           appropriated
           this
           Title
           to
           themselves
           ,
           to
           the
           great
           dishonour
           of
           Christ
           ,
           the
           true
           Head
           of
           the
           Church
           .
        
         
           But
           if
           they
           alledge
           ,
           
             That
             the
             Bishop
             of
             Rome
             is
             only
             a
             Ministerial
             head
             ,
             as
             Christ's
             Vicar
          
           ;
        
         
           To
           this
           I
           Answer
           ,
           However
           they
           may
           evade
           by
           subtilty
           of
           words
           ,
           indeed
           and
           in
           truth
           ,
           they
           have
           taken
           for
           many
           Ages
           together
           the
           Dignity
           of
           Christ
           ,
           and
           have
           made
           him
           only
           the
           titular
           Head
           of
           the
           Church
           .
           For
           is
           it
           not
           clear
           by
           the
           Stories
           ,
           That
           all
           doth
           depend
           upon
           the
           Authority
           of
           the
           Romane
           See
           ?
           The
           credit
           of
           Scripture
           ,
           the
           interpretation
           of
           Scripture
           ,
           the
           making
           of
           Laws
           ,
           the
           abrogation
           of
           divine
           Laws
           ,
           and
           all
           things
           in
           a
           manner
           have
           depended
           upon
           the
           Authority
           of
           the
           Roman
           Bishop
           .
           What
           he
           would
           ,
           he
           hath
           set
           up
           ;
           what
           he
           would
           ,
           he
           hath
           plucked
           down
           :
           And
           when
           all
           this
           is
           done
           ,
           is
           he
           only
           a
           titular
           Head
           ?
           Indeed
           and
           in
           ●…uth
           ,
           the
           Headship
           of
           Christ
           hath
           been
           made
           but
           a
           cypher
           :
           and
           the
           words
           of
           Gregory
           have
           been
           found
           too
           true
           in
           the
           event
           .
           But
           for
           the
           passages
           out
           of
           him
           ,
           two
           things
           are
           briefly
           to
           be
           observed
           :
        
         
           First
           ,
           If
           we
           go
           to
           the
           600
           years
           immediately
           after
           the
           
           birth
           of
           Christ
           ,
           there
           was
           then
           no
           Oecumenical
           Bishop
           .
           For
           though
           the
           Man
           of
           sin
           had
           gone
           very
           far
           ,
           and
           had
           made
           many
           progressions
           in
           the
           Mysterie
           of
           Iniquity
           ;
           yet
           the
           Authority
           it self
           was
           not
           publickly
           established
           in
           all
           that
           time
           :
           If
           it
           were
           so
           ,
           we
           may
           believe
           that
           Gregory
           would
           not
           have
           inveighed
           against
           that
           Headship
           ,
           as
           he
           did
           .
        
         
           Secondly
           ,
           In
           the
           year
           of
           the
           Lord
           606
           ,
           the
           Decree
           was
           Enacted
           ,
           That
           the
           Bishop
           of
           Rome
           should
           be
           Head
           over
           all
           Churches
           ;
           which
           Dignity
           the
           whole
           Succession
           have
           enjoyed
           now
           above
           this
           1000
           years
           .
           And
           that
           which
           Gregory
           did
           call
           Antichristian
           in
           others
           ,
           that
           all
           his
           followers
           have
           assumed
           to
           this
           very
           day
           .
           Therefore
           Thuanus
           ,
           in
           his
           67
           Book
           ,
           doth
           speak
           very
           pithily
           ;
           
             Phocas
             Bonifacio
             tertio
             insignes
             Episcopi
             Universalis
             titulos
             ,
             quos
             nuper
             Gregorius
             in
             Iohanne
             Constantinopolitano
             improbaverat
             ,
             prolixè
             attribuit
             .
             Phocas
             did
             largely
             ascribe
             to
             Boniface
             the
             third
             ,
             those
             eminent
             titles
             of
             Universal
             Bishop
             ,
             which
             Gregory
             did
             lately
             inveigh
             against
             in
             Iohn
             of
             Constantinople
             .
          
        
         
           Now
           then
           ,
           to
           gather
           all
           into
           one
           sum
           ,
           we
           may
           see
           how
           the
           Prophecies
           and
           the
           Stories
           of
           the
           Church
           do
           agree
           :
           First
           ,
           That
           the
           two-horned
           Beast
           had
           a
           determinate
           time
           when
           he
           rose
           up
           out
           of
           the
           Earth
           .
           Secondly
           ,
           That
           this
           time
           is
           after
           the
           rising
           of
           the
           ten-horned
           Beast
           ,
           or
           the
           ten
           Kings
           ,
           out
           of
           the
           ruines
           of
           the
           Empire
           .
           Thirdly
           ,
           It
           is
           to
           be
           applied
           to
           such
           a
           time
           only
           when
           the
           Name
           and
           the
           Universal
           Headship
           of
           the
           Bishop
           of
           Rome
           began
           publickly
           to
           be
           set
           up
           .
           All
           these
           three
           laid
           together
           ,
           do
           necessarily
           bring
           us
           to
           the
           Decree
           of
           the
           Headship
           under
           the
           Emperor
           Phocas
           .
           And
           so
           we
           do
           Conclude
           ,
           that
           this
           is
           the
           Number
           of
           the
           Name
           of
           the
           Beast
           ,
           as
           it
           is
           mentioned
           in
           the
           Prophecie
           .
        
         
           Now
           by
           what
           Accompt
           the
           Number
           is
           666
           ,
           we
           will
           shew
           in
           the
           Two
           Chapters
           following
           .
        
      
       
         
         
           
             CHAP.
             V.
          
           That
           the
           Roman
           is
           the
           Fourth
           and
           Last
           Metal-Kingdom
           in
           Daniels
           Image
           ;
           and
           the
           truth
           of
           this
           is
           proved
           against
           the
           Positions
           of
           
             Junius
             ,
             Broughton
             ,
             Piscator
          
           ,
           Dr.
           Willet
           ,
           and
           others
           .
        
         
           FOr
           the
           carrying
           on
           of
           our
           matter
           ,
           we
           need
           not
           imbark
           in
           that
           great
           Question
           ,
           
             Whether
             the
             Roman
             be
             the
             Fourth
             Metal-Kingdom
             ?
             Or
             ,
             Whether
             the
             Opinion
             of
          
           Junius
           
             and
             his
             followers
             be
             received
          
           ?
           We
           are
           sure
           both
           wayes
           to
           make
           the
           Accompt
           good
           ,
           That
           the
           Name
           ,
           or
           Universal
           Headship
           of
           the
           Bishop
           of
           Rome
           ,
           is
           666.
           
           The
           matter
           is
           so
           firmly
           grounded
           upon
           the
           event
           .
        
         
           Let
           us
           then
           proceed
           according
           to
           Iunius
           his
           Method
           :
           let
           us
           say
           ,
           that
           the
           Babylonian
           is
           the
           first
           Metal-Kingdom
           ,
           that
           the
           Mede-Persian
           is
           the
           second
           ,
           that
           the
           Macedonian
           in
           Alexander
           is
           the
           third
           ,
           that
           the
           Seleucian
           is
           the
           fourth
           .
           Here
           according
           to
           this
           Analogie
           there
           must
           be
           an
           end
           of
           all
           the
           four
           Metal-Kingdoms
           at
           the
           destruction
           of
           the
           Seleucian
           ;
           when
           
             Syria
             ,
             Iudaea
          
           ,
           and
           all
           that
           Oriental
           tract
           came
           under
           the
           Obedience
           of
           the
           People
           of
           Rome
           .
           Now
           then
           ,
           if
           you
           reckon
           from
           the
           final
           Conclusion
           of
           all
           the
           four
           persecuting
           Empires
           ,
           and
           from
           the
           beginning
           of
           the
           Roman
           ,
           as
           that
           Nation
           did
           succeed
           in
           the
           Rule
           over
           the
           Church
           ,
           there
           will
           be
           an
           exact
           period
           of
           666
           years
           to
           the
           setting
           up
           of
           the
           Name
           or
           Universal
           Headship
           of
           the
           Bishop
           of
           Rome
           :
           And
           so
           we
           do
           concord
           with
           the
           Principles
           of
           Iunius
           .
        
         
           But
           we
           do
           not
           say
           ,
           That
           there
           was
           a
           dissolution
           of
           all
           four
           Metal-Kingdoms
           ,
           but
           only
           a
           dissolution
           of
           the
           third
           ,
           and
           a
           beginning
           of
           the
           fourth
           .
           Now
           ,
           from
           the
           beginning
           of
           the
           Roman
           ,
           or
           the
           fourth
           Kingdom
           ,
           we
           make
           the
           accompt
           .
        
         
           And
           for
           the
           clearer
           manifestation
           of
           the
           truth
           ,
           we
           will
           Debate
           this
           Point
           more
           fully
           :
           for
           it
           is
           a
           ruled
           case
           in
           Daniel
           
           and
           the
           
             Revelation
             ,
             That
             one
             and
             the
             same
             thing
             is
             variously
             repeated
             ,
             for
             clearer
             explication
             .
          
           As
           for
           ensample
           :
           The
           Antichristian
           Kingdom
           is
           more
           obscurely
           delivered
           ,
           Revel
           .
           11.
           
           Now
           ,
           if
           we
           compare
           it
           with
           the
           description
           chap.
           13
           ,
           and
           chap.
           17.
           all
           three
           Scriptures
           will
           exceedingly
           illustrate
           one
           and
           the
           same
           truth
           .
           And
           so
           in
           the
           present
           case
           ,
           if
           it
           can
           be
           solidly
           proved
           that
           the
           fourth
           Beast
           in
           Daniel
           is
           the
           Roman
           Kingdom
           ,
           we
           may
           safely
           conclude
           that
           the
           same
           matter
           is
           repeated
           more
           largely
           in
           the
           Book
           of
           the
           Revelation
           .
           Mr
           Med●…
           speaketh
           to
           very
           good
           purpose
           concerning
           the
           description
           of
           the
           ten-horn'd
           Beast
           ,
           Rev.
           13.
           
           These
           are
           his
           words
           ;
           
             To●…a
             autem
             haec
             descriptio
             petita
             est
             ex
             Prophe●…iâ
             Danielis
             ,
          
           cap.
           7.
           
             ubi
             de
             eâdem
             agitur
             quâ
             hic
             ,
             Bestiâ
             Romanâ
             status
             novissimi
             :
             sed
             quae
             ibi
             Danieli
             ab
             Angelo
             succinctius
             narrantur
             ,
             ea
             hîc
             Iohanni
             ,
             (
             interjectâ
             quasi
             explicatione
             )
             fusius
             deducuntur
             .
             Comment
             .
             Apocal.
             pag.
          
           190.
           
           From
           which
           words
           of
           his
           it
           is
           clear
           ,
           that
           one
           and
           the
           same
           Roman
           Dominion
           ,
           in
           the
           last
           and
           Antichristian
           State
           thereof
           ,
           is
           the
           subject
           matter
           of
           both
           Scriptures
           .
           And
           so
           we
           have
           a
           certain
           and
           a
           demonstrative
           Principle
           to
           build
           upon
           .
           For
           ,
           not
           only
           the
           Book
           of
           the
           Revelation
           it self
           will
           be
           cleared
           by
           comparing
           one
           part
           with
           another
           ,
           that
           which
           is
           more
           dark
           with
           that
           which
           is
           more
           clear
           ;
           but
           the
           times
           in
           the
           7
           of
           Daniel
           also
           will
           be
           much
           illustrated
           ,
           if
           we
           parallel
           them
           with
           the
           times
           of
           the
           Revelation
           .
           Only
           here
           will
           lie
           the
           weight
           of
           the
           business
           ,
           Whether
           the
           matter
           is
           one
           and
           the
           same
           in
           both
           Prophecies
           ?
           And
           it
           must
           necessarily
           be
           one
           and
           the
           same
           ,
           if
           we
           can
           solidly
           prove
           the
           ten-horned
           Beast
           in
           Daniel
           to
           be
           the
           Roman
           Kingdom
           .
           All
           do
           agree
           that
           the
           ten-horned
           Beast
           in
           the
           Revelation
           is
           the
           Roman
           Kingdom
           ;
           and
           if
           we
           can
           make
           it
           appear
           that
           one
           and
           the
           same
           Kingdom
           is
           described
           in
           the
           seventh
           of
           Daniel
           ,
           this
           will
           be
           as
           it
           were
           a
           band
           ,
           or
           ligament
           ,
           to
           couple
           both
           Prophecies
           together
           ,
           and
           a
           mean
           to
           expound
           the
           one
           by
           that
           conformity
           which
           it
           hath
           to
           the
           other
           .
        
         
           But
           because
           Iunius
           ,
           and
           his
           followers
           ,
           and
           by
           Name
           Dr
           Willet
           do
           so
           strongly
           insist
           upon
           the
           Point
           ,
           That
           the
           ten-horned
           Beast
           in
           both
           Prophecies
           is
           not
           one
           and
           the
           same
           Roman
           
           Kingdom
           ,
           but
           one
           and
           the
           same
           only
           in
           Analogie
           ,
           and
           similitude
           of
           expression
           :
           If
           they
           can
           make
           their
           words
           good
           ,
           I
           confess
           that
           we
           shall
           be
           liable
           to
           a
           great
           mistake
           ,
           when
           we
           shall
           take
           that
           for
           really
           the
           same
           ,
           which
           is
           only
           the
           same
           in
           some
           similitude
           .
           Interpreters
           have
           gone
           too
           far
           this
           way
           ,
           as
           it
           is
           clear
           by
           experience
           .
           For
           Parae●…
           ,
           in
           the
           beginning
           of
           his
           Commentary
           ,
           treating
           of
           the
           Method
           of
           the
           Revelation
           ,
           doth
           draw
           three
           Observations
           out
           of
           Augustine's
           20
           Book
           of
           the
           City
           of
           God
           ,
           cap.
           17.
           
           First
           ,
           saith
           he
           ,
           There
           are
           many
           things
           darkly
           delivered
           in
           the
           Prophecie
           ,
           to
           exercise
           the
           mind
           of
           the
           Reader
           .
           Secondly
           ,
           There
           are
           some
           things
           delivered
           more
           clearly
           ,
           by
           the
           understanding
           of
           which
           ,
           we
           may
           discover
           the
           other
           that
           are
           more
           dark
           ,
           if
           diligence
           be
           used
           .
           Thirdly
           ,
           It
           doth
           exceedingly
           conduce
           to
           the
           unfolding
           of
           the
           Mysteries
           of
           this
           Book
           ,
           that
           the
           same
           things
           are
           repeated
           in
           a
           different
           way
           of
           expression
           .
           We
           do
           acknowledge
           that
           these
           Observations
           are
           of
           good
           use
           ;
           but
           that
           some
           Interpreters
           ,
           as
           Paraeus
           himself
           in
           his
           Commentary
           ,
           and
           Lampadius
           in
           his
           〈◊〉
           upon
           
             Sle●…d
             in
             de
          
           4
           Imperiis
           ,
           and
           some
           others
           ,
           have
           gone
           too
           far
           this
           way
           .
           There
           is
           some
           similitude
           between
           the
           seven
           Trumpets
           ,
           and
           the
           seven
           Vials
           ;
           but
           the
           Authors
           aforenamed
           have
           much
           disturbed
           the
           true
           course
           of
           the
           Apocalyptical
           times
           ,
           when
           they
           take
           the
           Trumpets
           and
           the
           Seals
           for
           the
           same
           in
           matter
           ,
           though
           they
           differ
           in
           manner
           .
           To
           avoid
           th●…
           Rock
           ,
           we
           will
           first
           prove
           the
           Identity
           of
           two
           Scriptures
           ,
           and
           then
           expound
           them
           by
           way
           of
           Parallel
           .
        
         
           Upon
           this
           Consideration
           we
           do
           now
           fall
           upon
           the
           Work
           ,
           to
           prove
           the
           Roman
           to
           be
           the
           Fourth
           Kingdom
           :
           And
           if
           this
           can
           be
           made
           good
           ,
           then
           it
           will
           be
           one
           and
           the
           same
           Kingdom
           with
           that
           which
           is
           mentioned
           in
           the
           Revelation
           .
           And
           so
           we
           shall
           parallel
           the
           one
           by
           the
           times
           of
           the
           other
           Prophecie
           .
        
         
           Now
           let
           us
           hear
           what
           
             Iunius
             ,
             Broughton
             ,
             Piscator
          
           ,
           and
           other
           Learned
           men
           can
           alledge
           to
           the
           contrary
           .
        
         
           
             Junius
             .
          
           
             There
             is
             none
             that
             is
             ignorant
             how
             variously
             the
             Fourth
             Kingdom
             
             is
             interpreted
             :
             For
             some
             think
             this
             place
             to
             appertain
             to
             the
             four
             Monarchies
             ,
             to
             continue
             to
             the
             consummation
             of
             the
             world
             .
             Others
             will
             have
             the
             Monarchies
             here
             meant
             to
             continue
             to
             the
             Kingdom
             of
             Christ
             only
             ;
             in
             which
             Number
             they
             have
             placed
             the
             Roman
             ,
             their
             Free-state
             and
             their
             Empire
             being
             united
             in
             one
             .
             And
             truly
             the
             former
             Opinion
             all
             the
             Fathers
             have
             followed
             ,
             being
             moved
             ,
             as
             it
             is
             probable
             ,
             with
             this
             expression
             ,
             
               There
               is
               a
               God
               in
               Heaven
               that
               maketh
               known
               to
               the
               King
               what
               shall
               be
               in
               the
               latter
               daies
               ,
            
             chap.
             2.
             28.
             
             But
             they
             have
             not
             well
             observed
             the
             meaning
             of
             the
             text
             :
             for
             the
             Hebrew
             word
             doth
             not
             signifie
             that
             which
             is
             last
             ,
             but
             that
             which
             is
             latter
             ;
             or
             that
             which
             cometh
             after
             ,
             though
             it
             be
             not
             simply
             the
             last
             of
             all
             .
          
        
         
           
             Answer
             .
          
           
             If
             we
             observe
             the
             Rules
             laid
             down
             by
             Dr
             Willet
             ,
             1.
             
             That
             the
             Kingdoms
             here
             described
             ,
             are
             Monarchical
             Kingdoms
             .
             2.
             
             Monarchical
             Kingdoms
             about
             the
             Borders
             of
             the
             Church
             .
             3.
             
             Such
             Monarchical
             Kingdoms
             where
             the
             latter
             do
             build
             themselves
             upon
             the
             ruine
             of
             the
             former
             .
             If
             we
             observe
             these
             Rules
             ,
             it
             will
             be
             no
             difficult
             matter
             to
             define
             the
             Monarchies
             what
             they
             are
             ,
             where
             they
             begin
             ,
             and
             where
             they
             make
             an
             end
             .
             There
             need
             be
             no
             variety
             of
             Opinion
             in
             a
             matter
             of
             such
             common
             Experience
             .
             And
             in
             particular
             ,
             the
             same
             Experience
             sheweth
             ,
             That
             the
             Roman
             must
             be
             the
             fourth
             particular
             Kingdom
             .
             As
             for
             those
             Interpreters
             who
             will
             have
             this
             Kingdom
             to
             expire
             at
             the
             coming
             of
             Christ
             ,
             they
             do
             not
             erre
             in
             taking
             the
             Roman
             for
             the
             Fourth
             Kingdom
             ,
             nor
             in
             joyning
             the
             Free-State
             and
             the
             Empire
             in
             one
             :
             but
             they
             erre
             in
             this
             ,
             That
             they
             end
             that
             Monarchy
             at
             the
             Coming
             of
             Christ.
             For
             this
             is
             contrary
             to
             Experience
             ,
             and
             the
             Testimony
             of
             the
             Scriptures
             .
             For
             ,
             what
             shall
             be
             the
             Ten
             Horns
             ,
             or
             the
             Ten
             Kings
             ?
             What
             shall
             be
             the
             little
             Horn
             ?
             What
             shall
             be
             all
             the
             other
             Properties
             of
             the
             Fourth
             Beast
             ,
             chap.
             7.
             
             ▪
             How
             shall
             all
             these
             be
             attributed
             to
             the
             Roman
             Kingdom
             ,
             if
             it
             End
             at
             the
             Coming
             of
             Christ
             ?
          
           
             For
             the
             former
             Expositors
             ,
             it
             is
             true
             that
             all
             Antiquity
             in
             a
             manner
             have
             followed
             this
             way
             ,
             To
             take
             the
             Roman
             for
             the
             
             Fourth
             Kingdom
             .
             To
             which
             I
             may
             adde
             ,
             Many
             of
             the
             Interpreters
             of
             these
             times
             ,
             and
             some
             eminent
             in
             the
             Knowledge
             of
             the
             Prophetical
             Scriptures
             ;
             as
             
               Brightman
               ,
               Grasserus
               ,
               Mede
            
             ,
             and
             others
             .
             But
             that
             this
             should
             be
             the
             principal
             Ground
             that
             moved
             them
             to
             take
             the
             Roman
             for
             the
             Fourth
             Kingdom
             ,
             
               because
               the
               Lord
               shewed
               to
               Nebuchadnezzar
               what
               should
               come
               to
               pass
               in
               the
               last
               times
            
             ;
             this
             I
             cannot
             take
             to
             be
             the
             prime
             foundation
             on
             which
             those
             Expositors
             do
             build
             :
             To
             my
             understanding
             ,
             this
             phrase
             
               in
               the
               latter
               dayes
            
             ,
             or
             as
             it
             is
             in
             the
             Original
             ,
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             in
             the
             extremity
             of
             dayes
             ;
             or
             as
             
               Piscator
               ,
               Polanus
            
             ,
             and
             others
             will
             have
             it
             ,
             
               temporibus
               consequentibus
               ,
               in
               the
               times
               following
               :
            
             This
             expression
             nakedly
             considered
             ,
             inforceth
             nothing
             at
             all
             .
             Whereas
             Iacob
             assembled
             his
             Sons
             together
             to
             tell
             them
             
               what
               should
               happen
               to
               them
               in
               the
               latter
               dayes
               :
            
             I
             do
             in
             this
             matter
             agree
             with
             Dr
             Willet
             ,
             That
             he
             did
             not
             assemble
             them
             together
             to
             tell
             what
             should
             befall
             them
             in
             the
             end
             of
             the
             world
             ,
             but
             in
             the
             times
             immediately
             following
             .
             Yet
             this
             Expression
             is
             sometimes
             used
             to
             foretel
             what
             shall
             be
             done
             in
             the
             end
             of
             the
             world
             .
             And
             therefore
             the
             Prophet
             Hosea
             saith
             ,
             
               That
               the
               Children
               of
               Israel
               shall
               return
               and
               seek
               the
               Lord
               their
               God
               ,
               and
               David
               their
               King
               ;
               and
               shall
               fear
               the
               Lord
               and
               his
               goodness
               in
               the
               latter
               dayes
               :
            
             or
             ,
             as
             it
             is
             in
             the
             Original
             ,
             
               in
               the
               extremity
               of
               dayes
            
             .
             There
             is
             no
             doubt
             to
             be
             made
             but
             that
             the
             Prophet
             speaketh
             of
             the
             future
             Call
             of
             the
             Iews
             that
             shall
             be
             ,
             and
             of
             their
             living
             under
             the
             Reign
             of
             Christ
             ;
             which
             things
             are
             to
             be
             finished
             in
             ●…e
             end
             of
             the
             world
             .
             And
             I
             see
             no
             reason
             but
             that
             the
             Lord
             might
             reveal
             the
             same
             things
             to
             Daniel
             ,
             at
             least
             the
             whole
             order
             of
             them
             ,
             he
             living
             after
             the
             times
             of
             Hosea
             ,
             being
             also
             a
             man
             specially
             chosen
             of
             God
             to
             be
             acquainted
             with
             the
             greatest
             Mysteries
             concerning
             the
             times
             of
             the
             Church
             .
             To
             let
             pass
             the
             ambiguity
             of
             the
             phrase
             ,
             let
             us
             seriously
             ponder
             the
             circumstances
             of
             the
             text
             .
             
               The
               Lord
               did
               reveal
               to
               Nebuchadnezzar
               things
               that
               should
               come
               to
               pass
               in
               the
               latter
               times
               .
            
             But
             the
             great
             Question
             is
             
               in
               specie
               ,
               What
               latter
               times
               are
               here
               intended
               ?
            
             It
             is
             confessed
             by
             all
             ,
             That
             the
             Monarchical
             Kingdoms
             were
             to
             continue
             to
             the
             Coming
             of
             Christ
             ;
             and
             the
             words
             of
             the
             
             text
             are
             clear
             ,
             that
             the
             Kingdom
             of
             Christ
             shall
             begin
             in
             the
             times
             of
             these
             Kingdoms
             .
             Now
             our
             Saviour
             was
             born
             ,
             his
             Gospel
             was
             preached
             ,
             and
             his
             Kingdom
             began
             ,
             when
             the
             Earth
             ,
             and
             particularly
             that
             part
             of
             the
             Earth
             ,
             was
             under
             the
             Sovereign
             Dominion
             of
             the
             Romans
             .
             To
             me
             therefore
             it
             is
             an
             infallible
             Reason
             ,
             That
             the
             Roman
             must
             be
             one
             of
             the
             Monarchical
             Kingdoms
             ,
             and
             the
             Fourth
             in
             particular
             ,
             because
             the
             Kingdom
             of
             Christ
             did
             then
             begin
             ,
             when
             the
             Earth
             was
             under
             the
             Authority
             and
             Dominion
             of
             that
             People
             .
             But
             let
             us
             go
             on
             .
          
        
         
           
             Junius
             .
          
           
             They
             which
             follow
             the
             latter
             Opinion
             ,
             do
             well
             to
             end
             Daniel's
             Prophecie
             at
             Christ.
             But
             this
             they
             ought
             to
             consider
             ,
             that
             the
             Lord
             doth
             not
             declare
             the
             State
             of
             the
             world
             universally
             ,
             but
             only
             so
             far
             as
             it
             concerneth
             the
             Iewes
             and
             the
             People
             of
             God.
             And
             therefore
             in
             our
             judgement
             we
             cannot
             approve
             it
             ,
             that
             the
             Roman
             is
             the
             Fourth
             Kingdom
             .
          
        
         
           
             Answer
             .
          
           
             For
             the
             Maxime
             ,
             
               That
               the
               Four
               Monarchies
               are
               described
               only
               in
               relation
               to
               the
               Iewes
            
             ;
             I
             do
             yield
             it
             to
             be
             a
             truth
             ,
             so
             far
             as
             the
             Jewes
             were
             the
             only
             people
             of
             God.
             But
             when
             the
             Gentiles
             also
             became
             his
             people
             ,
             the
             Monarchies
             are
             described
             in
             relation
             to
             them
             .
             So
             then
             the
             Metal-Kingdoms
             are
             not
             related
             to
             the
             Jewes
             only
             ,
             nor
             to
             the
             Gentiles
             only
             ,
             but
             to
             the
             People
             of
             God
             both
             of
             Jewes
             and
             Gentiles
             .
             Among
             many
             ,
             this
             one
             Argument
             may
             be
             sufficient
             to
             clear
             the
             Truth
             of
             that
             which
             we
             affirm
             .
             At
             the
             end
             of
             these
             Kingdoms
             it
             is
             mentioned
             ,
             
               That
               the
               Kingdom
               ,
               and
               the
               Dominion
               ,
               and
               the
               greatness
               of
               the
               Kingdom
               under
               the
               whole
               Heaven
               ,
               shall
               be
               given
               to
               the
               people
               of
               the
               Saints
               of
               the
               most
               High
               ,
            
             chap.
             7.
             vers
             .
             27.
             
             Who
             are
             they
             that
             are
             the
             People
             of
             the
             Saints
             of
             the
             most
             High
             ?
             Shall
             we
             say
             ,
             That
             they
             are
             only
             the
             People
             of
             the
             Jewes
             ?
             Then
             it
             will
             follow
             ,
             That
             the
             People
             of
             the
             Jewes
             only
             shall
             Constitute
             and
             make
             up
             the
             Kingdom
             of
             Christ
             and
             his
             Saints
             .
             And
             how
             contrary
             is
             this
             to
             all
             colour
             and
             shew
             of
             truth
             ?
          
           
           
             Secondly
             ,
             Admit
             it
             should
             be
             granted
             that
             in
             the
             description
             of
             the
             Metal-Kingdoms
             ,
             the
             Lord
             should
             only
             have
             respect
             to
             the
             People
             of
             the
             Jewes
             ;
             this
             doth
             not
             exclude
             the
             Roman
             from
             being
             one
             of
             the
             Four
             Kingdoms
             .
             For
             as
             the
             Jewes
             were
             somtimes
             under
             the
             Babylonians
             ,
             somtimes
             under
             the
             Persians
             ,
             somtimes
             under
             the
             Graecians
             ;
             so
             sixty
             years
             before
             the
             Birth
             of
             our
             Lord
             ,
             they
             came
             under
             the
             Dominion
             of
             the
             People
             of
             Rome
             ,
             who
             were
             the
             particular
             Nation
             and
             State
             of
             whom
             the
             Prophet
             speaketh
             :
             
               The
               people
               of
               the
               Prince
               that
               shall
               come
               ,
               shall
               destroy
               the
               City
               and
               Sanctuary
               ,
            
             Dan.
             9.
             26.
             
             If
             you
             Number
             the
             times
             from
             that
             instant
             when
             the
             Dominion
             of
             the
             Romans
             began
             ,
             you
             shall
             finde
             that
             there
             were
             130
             years
             to
             the
             destruction
             of
             Ierusalem
             by
             Titus
             and
             Vespasian
             .
             So
             long
             the
             Jewish
             Church
             and
             Nation
             were
             under
             the
             Roman
             Obedience
             .
             So
             then
             we
             Conclude
             ,
             If
             the
             Monarchies
             be
             Numbred
             only
             in
             relation
             to
             the
             Jewes
             ,
             the
             Roman
             may
             be
             one
             of
             the
             Four
             ,
             as
             well
             as
             the
             
               Babylonian
               ,
               Persian
            
             ,
             o●…
             Graecian
             :
             what
             should
             hinder
             ?
          
        
         
           
             Junius
             .
          
           
             They
             that
             so
             Number
             ,
             must
             of
             necessity
             confound
             the
             popular
             State
             ,
             with
             the
             Sovereign
             Command
             of
             one
             ,
             which
             is
             here
             only
             mentioned
             .
             Neither
             did
             the
             Romans
             any
             wayes
             afflict
             the
             Iewes
             till
             the
             times
             of
             Cleopatra
             ,
             or
             Herod
             .
          
        
         
           
             Answer
             .
          
           
             This
             is
             most
             true
             ,
             That
             the
             Jewes
             came
             under
             the
             Dominion
             of
             the
             Romans
             in
             the
             times
             of
             their
             Free-State
             :
             And
             therefore
             in
             these
             times
             we
             begin
             the
             Roman
             as
             the
             Fourth
             Kingdom
             .
             Now
             whereas
             it
             is
             alledged
             ,
             that
             in
             so
             doing
             we
             do
             confound
             the
             Popular
             State
             and
             the
             Government
             by
             One
             :
             To
             this
             I
             Answer
             ,
             We
             are
             not
             here
             so
             much
             to
             look
             after
             the
             several
             forms
             of
             Roman
             Dominion
             ,
             as
             upon
             one
             whole
             Roman
             Kingdom
             opposed
             to
             one
             Babylonian
             ,
             to
             one
             Persian
             ,
             to
             one
             Graecian
             going
             before
             .
             The
             Scripture
             looketh
             to
             Four
             kinds
             of
             People
             ,
             who
             in
             their
             respective
             Seasons
             and
             Successions
             ,
             should
             have
             absolute
             Dominion
             over
             the
             Earth
             ,
             and
             specially
             
             about
             the
             Confines
             of
             the
             Church
             :
             according
             to
             this
             Difference
             we
             ought
             to
             distinguish
             each
             Monarchy
             as
             the
             Dominion
             pass'd
             from
             one
             people
             to
             another
             ,
             and
             not
             by
             the
             particular
             forms
             of
             Government
             observed
             by
             one
             people
             .
             Therefore
             it
             doth
             fully
             Answer
             our
             purpose
             ,
             That
             the
             Church
             of
             the
             Jewes
             came
             under
             the
             Dominion
             and
             Lordship
             of
             the
             people
             of
             Rome
             60
             years
             before
             the
             Birth
             of
             the
             Lord.
             Now
             ,
             what
             Form
             of
             Dominion
             the
             Romans
             then
             had
             ,
             is
             not
             to
             our
             purpose
             .
          
           
             Further
             ,
             Whereas
             it
             is
             said
             ,
             That
             the
             Romans
             did
             not
             afflict
             the
             Church
             of
             the
             Jewes
             till
             the
             times
             of
             Herod
             ;
             Give
             me
             leave
             to
             Argue
             after
             the
             same
             manner
             .
             Cyrus
             did
             not
             afflict
             the
             People
             of
             the
             Jewes
             ;
             Therefore
             the
             Persian
             tyranny
             did
             not
             then
             begin
             :
             Alexander
             the
             Great
             did
             not
             persecute
             the
             Jewes
             ;
             Therefore
             the
             Graecian
             Monarchy
             did
             not
             begin
             in
             his
             times
             .
             This
             way
             of
             Reasoning
             is
             contrary
             to
             Scripture
             and
             Experience
             .
             For
             ,
             to
             speak
             positively
             ,
             Though
             Cyrus
             did
             not
             afflict
             the
             Church
             of
             the
             Jewes
             ,
             yet
             he
             brought
             that
             Church
             and
             People
             within
             the
             Verge
             of
             the
             Persian
             Dominion
             ,
             which
             in
             all
             its
             times
             was
             a
             Tyrannical
             State.
             So
             Alexander
             the
             Great
             did
             not
             persecute
             the
             Church
             ,
             yet
             he
             was
             the
             Founder
             of
             the
             Graecian
             Empire
             ,
             which
             in
             the
             whole
             time
             thereof
             did
             more
             or
             less
             afflict
             the
             Saints
             of
             the
             Jewish
             Church
             .
             The
             like
             may
             be
             said
             of
             the
             Romans
             :
             though
             there
             was
             no
             eminent
             Persecution
             in
             the
             time
             of
             their
             Free-State
             ,
             yet
             then
             the
             Church
             was
             brought
             within
             the
             compass
             of
             that
             Kingdom
             ▪
             in
             which
             ,
             under
             which
             ,
             and
             by
             which
             there
             were
             the
             sorest
             Persecutions
             that
             ever
             were
             ;
             as
             appeareth
             by
             the
             Stories
             of
             the
             Evangel●…sts
             ,
             the
             Acts
             of
             the
             Apostles
             ,
             and
             the
             whole
             Book
             of
             the
             Revelation
             .
             Now
             let
             us
             Consider
             what
             is
             spoken
             by
             Mr
             Broughton
             .
          
        
         
           
             Mr
             Broughton
             .
          
           
             The
             Book
             of
             Daniel
             handleth
             principal
             points
             of
             the
             Iewes
             thraldom
             in
             Babylon
             for
             70
             years
             ,
             and
             seven
             times
             that
             space
             unto
             Christ's
             Ascention
             ,
             and
             the
             destruction
             of
             the
             City
             and
             Temple
             :
             So
             that
             Ierusalem
             surprized
             by
             the
             Chald●…an
             ,
             and
             razed
             by
             the
             Roman
             ,
             is
             the
             limit
             of
             the
             Story
             .
          
        
         
           
           
             Answer
             .
          
           
             If
             it
             could
             be
             proved
             ,
             That
             Ierusalem
             seized
             by
             the
             Chaldaean
             ,
             and
             razed
             by
             the
             Roman
             ,
             that
             this
             is
             the
             limit
             of
             some
             of
             Daniel's
             Visions
             ,
             and
             namely
             of
             the
             70
             weeks
             ,
             it
             doth
             not
             follow
             that
             this
             is
             the
             boundary
             of
             all
             his
             Visions
             ,
             and
             particularly
             of
             all
             the
             Four
             Kingdoms
             typed
             in
             the
             Metals
             of
             the
             Image
             .
             I
             shall
             endeavour
             in
             the
             process
             of
             this
             Discourse
             to
             make
             it
             appear
             that
             these
             Kingdoms
             do
             continue
             to
             the
             time
             of
             the
             glorious
             Kingdom
             of
             the
             Saints
             ,
             Rev.
             20.
             
             But
             let
             us
             go
             on
             .
          
        
         
           
             Mr
             Broughton
             .
          
           
             The
             Kingdom
             of
             Babel
             is
             figured
             by
             a
             Tree
             ,
             touching
             in
             height
             the
             Heavens
             ,
             and
             in
             breadth
             the
             corners
             of
             the
             Earth
             .
             Likewise
             the
             other
             Kingdoms
             a●…e
             semblanced
             to
             a
             Ram
             ,
             and
             to
             a
             Goat
             ,
             Buck
             ,
             and
             both
             in
             sundry
             Horns
             .
             And
             now
             all
             the
             Nations
             be
             named
             that
             be
             therein
             contained
             .
          
        
         
           
             Answer
             .
          
           
             First
             ,
             For
             the
             great
             Tree
             ,
             it
             is
             not
             so
             much
             a
             figure
             of
             the
             Babylonian
             Kingdom
             ,
             as
             of
             the
             King
             Nebuchadnezzar
             in
             his
             own
             personal
             greatness
             .
             For
             when
             the
             Tree
             was
             cut
             down
             ,
             and
             Nebuchadnezzar
             fell
             ,
             the
             Babylonian
             Empire
             stood
             .
             Fo●…
             the
             Kingdoms
             of
             Persia
             and
             Greece
             ,
             it
             is
             not
             needful
             that
             these
             two
             should
             be
             all
             the
             Nations
             which
             Daniel
             doth
             Number
             after
             the
             Babylonians
             .
             First
             ,
             How
             doth
             this
             distinguish
             the
             Monarchies
             after
             the
             Scripture-difference
             ?
             The
             Scripture
             distinguisheth
             them
             according
             to
             the
             change
             from
             People
             to
             People
             ,
             chap.
             2.
             vers
             .
             44.
             chap.
             7.
             vers
             .
             27.
             
             If
             therefore
             the
             
               Babylonians
               ,
               Persians
               ,
               Graecians
            
             ,
             be
             all
             the
             People
             ,
             how
             shall
             we
             make
             Four
             Monarchies
             of
             Three
             People
             ?
             Secondly
             ,
             That
             of
             Persia
             and
             Greece
             are
             again
             repeated
             ,
             chap.
             8.
             because
             they
             were
             more
             summarily
             described
             in
             the
             former
             Chapter
             .
             For
             if
             we
             look
             narrowly
             to
             the
             matter
             ,
             the
             Seventh
             Chapter
             is
             for
             the
             most
             part
             taken
             up
             in
             the
             descrption
             of
             the
             Fourth
             Kingdom
             .
          
        
         
           
           
             Mr
             Broughton
             .
          
           
             The
             Legs
             of
             the
             Image
             ,
             are
             the
             Successors
             of
             Alexander
             in
             the
             mightiest
             Kingdoms
             ,
             Syria
             and
             Egypt
             .
          
        
         
           
             Answer
             .
          
           
             Piscator
             doth
             build
             much
             upon
             this
             Reason
             ;
             and
             therefore
             to
             avoid
             repetition
             ,
             we
             will
             defer
             the
             Examination
             thereof
             till
             we
             come
             to
             him
             .
          
        
         
           
             Mr
             Broughton
             .
          
           
             Daniel
             ,
             chap.
             7.
             vers
             .
             13.
             
             One
             like
             to
             the
             Son
             of
             man
             ,
             &c.
             
             The
             Iewes
             grant
             Christ
             here
             to
             be
             meant
             :
             and
             if
             we
             had
             not
             deceived
             them
             by
             forging
             a
             general
             Fourth
             Monarchy
             ,
             by
             refusing
             the
             plainness
             of
             Daniel
             ,
             they
             would
             have
             come
             to
             the
             Faith
             long
             ago
             .
          
        
         
           
             Answer
             .
          
           
             This
             is
             a
             good
             Caution
             in
             the
             general
             ,
             and
             Christian
             men
             ought
             to
             take
             heed
             how
             they
             turn
             all
             into
             nice
             Disputes
             :
             Atheistical
             and
             gainsaying
             people
             will
             soon
             take
             Advantage
             :
             Yet
             for
             all
             this
             ,
             we
             have
             sufficient
             matter
             to
             convince
             the
             Jew
             that
             their
             Messiah
             is
             come
             ,
             that
             he
             is
             cut
             off
             ,
             that
             the
             ●…0
             weeks
             of
             Daniel
             are
             at
             an
             end
             ,
             because
             Ierusalem
             hath
             been
             destroyed
             long
             ago
             ;
             and
             the
             70
             weeks
             do
             lead
             us
             to
             that
             fatal
             destruction
             .
          
           
             For
             our
             Interpretation
             that
             the
             
               Roman
               is
               the
               Fourth
               Monarchy
            
             ,
             it
             is
             not
             this
             that
             keepeth
             the
             Jew
             in
             his
             blindness
             and
             unbelief
             ;
             but
             rather
             ,
             it
             would
             be
             a
             greater
             stumbling-block
             in
             his
             way
             ,
             to
             take
             the
             Seleucian
             for
             the
             Fourth
             Monarchy
             .
             Mr
             Broughton
             who
             affirmeth
             this
             to
             be
             a
             Fourth
             Monarchy
             ,
             how
             can
             he
             make
             it
             good
             ,
             That
             the
             Kingdom
             of
             Christ
             was
             set
             up
             in
             the
             times
             of
             the
             Seleucian
             ?
             Suppose
             a
             Jew
             should
             read
             in
             the
             Gospel
             written
             by
             Saint
             Matthew
             ,
             that
             our
             Saviour
             was
             Born
             in
             Bethlem
             in
             the
             times
             of
             the
             Romans
             ;
             and
             as
             the
             other
             Evangelists
             do
             expresly
             say
             ,
             in
             the
             times
             of
             
               Augustus
               Caesar
            
             ,
             who
             caused
             all
             the
             world
             to
             be
             taxed
             ,
             &c.
             
             
             Here
             then
             ,
             if
             a
             Jew
             should
             be
             of
             the
             judgement
             of
             these
             Learned
             men
             That
             the
             Roman
             is
             none
             of
             the
             Four
             Monarchies
             ,
             and
             that
             there
             was
             a
             total
             dissolution
             of
             the
             Four
             Metal-Kingdoms
             before
             the
             coming
             of
             Christ
             ,
             and
             the
             beginning
             of
             the
             Roman
             :
             In
             this
             method
             and
             way
             of
             Interpretation
             ,
             how
             can
             they
             possibly
             make
             good
             that
             Scripture
             forementioned
             ?
             
               In
               the
               dayes
               of
               these
               Kingdoms
               shall
               the
               God
               of
               Heaven
               raise
               up
               a
               Kingdom
               that
               shall
               never
               be
               destroyed
               ,
            
             Dan.
             2.
             44.
             
             If
             the
             Lord
             will
             raise
             up
             the
             Kingdom
             of
             Christ
             in
             the
             dayes
             of
             the
             Four
             Metal-Kingdoms
             ,
             and
             the
             Evangelists
             all
             with
             one
             mouth
             do
             say
             ,
             That
             the
             Kingdom
             was
             raised
             up
             in
             that
             time
             when
             all
             was
             under
             the
             power
             of
             the
             Romans
             ,
             we
             may
             safely
             Conclude
             ,
             That
             the
             Roman
             must
             needs
             be
             one
             of
             the
             Four
             Kingdoms
             ;
             and
             in
             particular
             ,
             the
             Fourth
             and
             the
             last
             Kingdom
             .
          
           
             And
             whereas
             it
             is
             alledged
             ,
             
               One
               like
               the
               Son
               of
               Man
               came
               in
               the
               clouds
               of
               Heaven
               ,
            
             vers
             .
             13.
             
             We
             do
             willingly
             yield
             ,
             when
             the
             Roman
             Kingdom
             ,
             in
             the
             last
             and
             Antichristian
             state
             thereof
             ,
             shall
             be
             brought
             to
             a
             final
             destruction
             ,
             then
             in
             those
             times
             the
             Kingdom
             of
             the
             Saints
             shall
             be
             set
             up
             upon
             the
             Earth
             in
             the
             last
             dayes
             ;
             and
             there
             shall
             be
             a
             Union
             betwixt
             Jewes
             and
             Gentiles
             under
             Christ
             their
             King
             ,
             according
             to
             the
             Scriptures
             .
             And
             though
             we
             do
             not
             press
             the
             strictness
             of
             the
             Letter
             for
             a
             Personal
             and
             visible
             Reign
             of
             Christ
             (
             as
             many
             have
             done
             ,
             and
             many
             now
             do
             )
             yet
             I
             trust
             that
             the
             Jew
             and
             the
             Gentile
             shall
             find
             it
             true
             ,
             That
             both
             People
             shall
             come
             under
             the
             Reign
             of
             Christ
             ,
             when
             his
             Gospel
             shall
             be
             the
             regent
             Law
             in
             the
             latter
             dayes
             .
             But
             of
             this
             matter
             somthing
             more
             largely
             afterwards
             .
          
        
         
           
             Mr
             Broughton
             .
          
           
             I
             will
             shew
             thee
             what
             shall
             be
             in
             the
             latter
             end
             of
             wrath
             ,
             
               chap.
               8.
               vers
               .
               21.
            
             
             This
             place
             strongly
             overthroweth
             their
             Error
             ,
             that
             seign
             the
             Roman
             to
             be
             the
             Fourth
             Kingdom
             ,
             meant
             by
             the
             Legs
             of
             the
             Image
             ,
             seeing
             the
             Greeks
             are
             the
             Dealers
             in
             the
             latter
             end
             of
             wrath
             .
             And
             it
             had
             been
             a
             strange
             thing
             that
             this
             last
             vision
             repeating
             the
             former
             ,
             should
             neglect
             the
             Romans
             ,
             if
             they
             had
             been
             spoken
             of
             before
             .
          
        
         
           
           
             Answer
             .
          
           
             We
             have
             shewed
             how
             the
             former
             Kingdoms
             〈◊〉
             repeated
             in
             the
             latter
             Vision
             :
             we
             yield
             that
             there
             is
             a
             repetiti●…n
             of
             the
             Monarchical
             Kingdoms
             ,
             but
             not
             a
             repetition
             of
             them
             in
             the
             full
             Number
             .
             For
             what
             a
             way
             of
             Reasoning
             were
             this
             ▪
             The
             Babylonian
             is
             not
             reckoned
             chap.
             8.
             therefore
             he
             is
             none
             of
             the
             Four
             great
             Empires
             mentioned
             in
             the
             Chapter
             going
             ●…efore
             ?
             Let
             us
             come
             to
             the
             main
             Reason
             which
             Mr
             Brought●…
             saith
             ,
             
               strongly
               overthroweth
               their
               Error
               who
               feign
               the
               Roman
               to
               be
               the
               Fourth
               Kingdom
               .
            
             His
             Argument
             is
             drawn
             from
             that
             Expression
             ,
             
               I
               will
               shew
               thee
               what
               shall
               be
               in
               the
               last
               end
               of
               indignation
               .
            
             ●…ll
             that
             may
             be
             gathered
             from
             hence
             ,
             is
             this
             ,
             That
             the
             Greeks
             may
             be
             Dealers
             in
             the
             latter
             end
             of
             wrath
             ,
             if
             we
             compare
             them
             with
             the
             times
             of
             Daniel
             :
             yet
             according
             to
             this
             sense
             ,
             the
             Romans
             may
             be
             latter
             than
             they
             .
             Secondly
             ,
             If
             we
             look
             to
             the
             true
             translation
             of
             the
             word
             (
             as
             Iunius
             and
             Piscator
             have
             it
             )
             the
             Interpretation
             must
             run
             thus
             :
             I
             will
             make
             known
             to
             thee
             what
             shall
             be
             in
             the
             extremity
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             of
             that
             indignation
             ,
             when
             Antiochus
             shall
             afflict
             the
             Church
             .
             And
             therefore
             the
             Angel
             doth
             expound
             what
             is
             meant
             by
             these
             words
             ,
             
               In
               the
               latter
               end
               of
               their
               Kingdom
               ,
               when
               transgressors
               are
               come
               to
               a
               full
               end
               ,
               a
               King
               of
               fierce
               countenance
               shall
               stand
               up
               ,
            
             vers
             .
             23.
             
             So
             then
             ,
             according
             to
             the
             true
             sense
             ,
             the
             Greeks
             are
             not
             so
             much
             the
             Dealers
             in
             the
             latter
             end
             of
             wrath
             ,
             as
             Antiochus
             in
             particular
             is
             a
             Dealer
             against
             the
             Saints
             in
             the
             latter
             end
             of
             the
             Graecian
             tyranny
             .
             Here
             then
             is
             a
             plain
             fallacy
             ,
             
               à
               dicto
               secundum
               quid
               ,
               ad
               dictum
               simplicitur
               .
            
          
        
         
           
             Mr
             Broughton
             .
          
           
             Chap.
             12.
             vers
             .
             1.
             
             And
             at
             that
             time
             shall
             Michael
             stand
             up
             that
             standeth
             for
             the
             Children
             of
             thy
             people
             .
             When
             Antiochus
             ,
             going
             to
             War
             against
             Parthia
             ,
             left
             Lysias
             behind
             him
             to
             have
             rooted
             out
             the
             Iews
             ;
             then
             Michael
             stood
             up
             .
             Here
             the
             terms
             of
             Daniel's
             People
             must
             needs
             mean
             the
             Iewes
             ,
             and
             not
             the
             troubles
             of
             the
             Christian
             Church
             .
             Now
             it
             is
             evident
             ,
             That
             the
             Holy
             Iewish
             Nation
             was
             never
             troubled
             in
             their
             whole
             State
             ,
             but
             in
             the
             times
             
             of
             Antiochus
             Epiphanes
             :
             And
             therefore
             it
             is
             clear
             that
             the
             Angel
             speaketh
             of
             those
             dayes
             .
             And
             this
             one
             speech
             might
             have
             kept
             Daniel
             in
             his
             true
             meaning
             ,
             that
             we
             should
             not
             draw
             him
             beyond
             Christ.
             
          
        
         
           
             Answer
             .
          
           
             If
             ●…
             may
             speak
             what
             I
             find
             by
             Experience
             ,
             there
             is
             not
             any
             one
             place
             either
             in
             Daniel
             or
             the
             Revelation
             ,
             that
             seemeth
             to
             me
             to
             be
             more
             intricate
             than
             the
             Number
             of
             time
             mentioned
             in
             this
             Chapter
             .
             It
             may
             be
             the
             Lord
             will
             have
             the
             time
             to
             lie
             doubtful
             ,
             and
             to
             be
             sealed
             to
             the
             time
             of
             the
             end
             ,
             vers
             .
             4
             ,
             9.
             
          
           
             However
             it
             be
             ,
             though
             I
             cannot
             positively
             prove
             the
             meaning
             of
             the
             text
             ,
             yet
             we
             may
             firmly
             conclude
             ,
             That
             the
             periods
             of
             time
             do
             lead
             us
             to
             the
             end
             of
             the
             world
             ;
             and
             that
             they
             cannot
             possibly
             be
             restrained
             to
             the
             Persecution
             of
             
               Antiochus
               Epiphanes
            
             ,
             and
             to
             the
             times
             of
             the
             suffering
             of
             the
             Jews
             under
             that
             tyranny
             .
          
           
             But
             let
             us
             look
             to
             the
             Text
             :
             
               By
               the
               Children
               of
               thy
               people
               ,
            
             we
             do
             willingly
             acknowledge
             ,
             That
             the
             People
             of
             the
             Jewes
             are
             here
             meant
             .
             But
             we
             do
             not
             yield
             that
             Mr
             Broughton
             doth
             make
             a
             true
             Deduction
             from
             the
             meaning
             of
             these
             words
             .
             He
             doth
             infer
             ,
             
               That
               in
               the
               time
               of
               Antiochus
               Epiphanes
               his
               persecuting
               the
               Church
               ,
               Michael
               may
               stand
               up
               ,
               because
               the
               whole
               Nation
               of
               the
               Iewes
               suffered
               more
               eminently
               for
               Religion
               in
               those
               times
               .
            
             Now
             here
             I
             say
             ,
             This
             cannot
             be
             the
             time
             of
             the
             great
             Tribulation
             of
             the
             Jews
             ,
             nor
             the
             time
             of
             the
             standing
             up
             of
             Michael
             ,
             seeing
             the
             Tribulation
             here
             spoken
             of
             is
             after
             the
             destruction
             of
             the
             Seleucian
             Kingdom
             .
             For
             I
             would
             gladly
             know
             what
             the
             Angel
             doth
             mean
             by
             these
             words
             ,
             
               He
               shall
               come
               to
               his
               end
               ,
               and
               none
               shall
               help
               him
               ,
            
             vers
             .
             45.
             
             Is
             it
             not
             clear
             ,
             by
             the
             whole
             tenor
             and
             scope
             of
             the
             text
             ,
             That
             he
             speaketh
             of
             the
             King
             of
             the
             North
             ,
             or
             the
             Seleucian
             Kingdom
             ?
             That
             this
             Tyranny
             shall
             come
             to
             its
             end
             without
             help
             or
             remedy
             .
             And
             then
             afterward
             ,
             (
             the
             Seleucian
             Kingdom
             being
             destroyed
             )
             the
             great
             Calamity
             shall
             fall
             upon
             the
             Nation
             of
             the
             Jews
             in
             the
             following
             times
             .
             Secondly
             ,
             Our
             
             Saviour
             himself
             ,
             that
             best
             knew
             the
             meaning
             of
             Daniel's
             Prophecie
             ,
             doth
             expresly
             speak
             of
             the
             standing
             up
             of
             
               the
               Abomination
               of
               Desolation
               mentioned
               by
               Daniel
               the
               Prophet
            
             ;
             he
             doth
             speak
             of
             the
             greatest
             wrath
             that
             ever
             was
             from
             the
             foundation
             of
             the
             world
             ,
             that
             it
             should
             fall
             upon
             the
             Nation
             of
             the
             Jewes
             ;
             and
             that
             for
             the
             Elects
             sake
             only
             those
             dayes
             should
             be
             shortened
             .
             Now
             then
             ,
             how
             doth
             he
             apply
             these
             Predictions
             ?
             not
             to
             the
             times
             of
             
               Antiochus
               Epiphanes
            
             ,
             which
             Mr
             Broughton
             here
             speaks
             of
             ;
             but
             (
             as
             all
             the
             Evangelists
             do
             agree
             )
             to
             the
             last
             and
             fatal
             destruction
             of
             Ierusalem
             by
             the
             
               Romans
               ;
               Matth.
            
             24.
             21
             ,
             22.
             
             Mar.
             13.
             14
             ,
             15
             ,
             
               &c.
               Luk.
            
             21.
             20
             ,
             21
             ,
             &c.
             
          
           
             Now
             ,
             whereas
             Daniel
             did
             put
             the
             Question
             partly
             out
             of
             a
             desire
             to
             pry
             into
             these
             Mysteries
             ,
             and
             partly
             to
             give
             information
             to
             the
             Church
             ;
             he
             received
             an
             Answer
             sutable
             to
             the
             Question
             which
             he
             did
             propound
             .
             The
             Question
             is
             this
             :
             
               Then
               said
               I
               ,
               O
               my
               Lord
               ,
               what
               shall
               be
               the
               end
               of
               these
               things
               ?
               vers
               .
            
             8.
             
             And
             the
             Answer
             of
             the
             Angel
             is
             this
             :
             
               From
               the
               time
               that
               the
               daily
               Sacrifice
               shall
               be
               taken
               away
               ,
               and
               the
               Abomination
               that
               maketh
               Desolate
               shall
               be
               set
               up
               ,
               there
               shall
               be
            
             1290
             
               daies
               .
               Blessed
               is
               he
               that
               waiteth
               ,
               and
               cometh
               to
               the
            
             1335
             
               dayes
               .
               But
               go
               thy
               way
               till
               the
               end
               be
               ,
               for
               thou
               shalt
               rest
               ,
               and
               stand
               in
               the
               lot
               at
               the
               end
               of
               the
               daies
               ,
            
             vers
             .
             11
             ,
             12
             ,
             13.
             
             From
             the
             scope
             of
             these
             words
             ,
             if
             we
             take
             it
             for
             granted
             ,
             That
             the
             setting
             up
             of
             the
             Abomination
             of
             Desolation
             was
             at
             the
             last
             and
             fatal
             destruction
             of
             Ierusalem
             ;
             (
             for
             so
             our
             Saviour
             doth
             expound
             the
             words
             of
             Daniel
             )
             then
             we
             do
             infer
             ,
             from
             the
             destruction
             of
             that
             City
             there
             will
             be
             1290
             dayes
             ,
             and
             then
             again
             1335
             dayes
             to
             the
             time
             of
             the
             end
             :
             And
             so
             we
             may
             conclude
             ,
             That
             this
             period
             of
             time
             will
             not
             extend
             only
             to
             the
             times
             of
             Christ
             ,
             but
             very
             far
             beyond
             his
             times
             toward
             the
             end
             of
             the
             world
             .
          
           
             But
             it
             may
             be
             alledged
             ,
             seeing
             that
             I
             undertake
             to
             shew
             the
             length
             of
             the
             period
             ,
             How
             long
             it
             shall
             continue
             ,
             and
             the
             beginning
             from
             whence
             it
             shall
             commence
             ;
             why
             do
             not
             I
             speak
             Determinately
             concerning
             the
             time
             where
             it
             shall
             end
             ?
          
           
           
             I
             do
             only
             so
             far
             undertake
             to
             speak
             of
             the
             length
             of
             this
             period
             ,
             to
             shew
             that
             Daniel's
             Prophecie
             containeth
             a
             great
             Number
             of
             years
             beyond
             the
             destruction
             of
             Ierusalem
             .
             And
             this
             is
             enough
             to
             Confute
             Mr
             Broughton
             ,
             and
             other
             Interpreters
             of
             this
             way
             ;
             though
             for
             my
             part
             I
             am
             not
             able
             to
             determine
             the
             Question
             why
             it
             is
             said
             1290
             dayes
             ,
             and
             then
             after
             that
             ,
             1335
             dayes
             .
             There
             is
             a
             special
             reason
             of
             doubling
             the
             Number
             ;
             but
             yet
             for
             the
             accommodation
             of
             the
             time
             ,
             I
             must
             confess
             my
             ignorance
             .
             Only
             for
             the
             present
             purpose
             ,
             it
             is
             enough
             to
             say
             in
             the
             general
             ,
             That
             there
             is
             a
             great
             Chain
             of
             years
             to
             begin
             after
             the
             destruction
             of
             Ierusalem
             ;
             and
             that
             the
             times
             of
             Daniel
             ,
             and
             the
             times
             of
             the
             Revelation
             ,
             do
             both
             run
             parallel
             together
             ,
             to
             the
             glorious
             Kingdom
             of
             the
             Saints
             .
             But
             for
             the
             true
             concord
             of
             the
             times
             ,
             I
             do
             profess
             that
             I
             lie
             in
             the
             mire
             .
          
           
             Whereas
             the
             holy
             Prophet
             is
             commanded
             to
             seal
             and
             to
             shut
             up
             the
             Vision
             ,
             we
             are
             not
             to
             take
             this
             simply
             ,
             as
             though
             there
             shall
             be
             a
             perpetual
             inclosure
             ,
             and
             an
             absolute
             concealment
             of
             the
             sense
             for
             ever
             ;
             but
             only
             ,
             that
             the
             disclosing
             is
             referred
             to
             the
             time
             of
             the
             end
             .
             They
             that
             shall
             live
             neer
             upon
             the
             accomplishment
             of
             the
             Prophecie
             ,
             upon
             the
             borders
             of
             the
             glorious
             Church
             ,
             at
             the
             times
             of
             the
             Calling
             of
             the
             Jewes
             ,
             perhaps
             they
             shall
             see
             that
             which
             hath
             lain
             hid
             in
             the
             Scriptures
             for
             many
             Ages
             .
             Though
             Daniel
             was
             to
             seal
             up
             the
             Vision
             for
             the
             time
             present
             ,
             yet
             in
             the
             latter
             dayes
             
               many
               shall
               run
               to
               and
               fro
               ,
               and
               knowledge
               shall
               be
               encreased
               ,
            
             vers
             .
             4.
             
          
           
             Object
             .
             
               But
               if
               it
               shall
               be
               said
               ,
               That
               the
               great
               Question
               doth
               lie
               in
               this
               ,
               From
               what
               beginning
               are
               we
               to
               fetch
               this
               period
               of
               time
               ,
               or
               where
               is
               the
               date
               thereof
               ?
               Some
               place
               the
               beginning
               of
               these
               years
               in
               Antiochus
               Epiphanes
               ;
               some
               ,
               in
               the
               Abomination
               of
               the
               Desolation
               set
               up
               by
               Iulian
               the
               Apostate
               .
            
          
           
             Sol.
             For
             the
             setting
             up
             of
             the
             Abomination
             of
             Desolation
             ,
             there
             is
             no
             question
             but
             that
             this
             is
             meant
             of
             the
             Calamity
             under
             the
             Romans
             ;
             for
             so
             our
             Saviour
             doth
             expound
             the
             meaning
             of
             the
             Prophecie
             :
             And
             there
             is
             good
             reason
             wherefore
             we
             should
             rest
             in
             the
             Authority
             of
             such
             an
             interpreter
             .
             As
             for
             the
             setting
             up
             of
             the
             Abomination
             of
             Desolation
             by
             
             Iulian
             the
             Apostate
             ;
             I
             marvel
             that
             such
             a
             judicious
             Interpreter
             as
             Mr
             Brightman
             ,
             should
             rest
             upon
             so
             groundless
             a
             conceit
             .
             But
             as
             groundless
             as
             it
             is
             ,
             I
             find
             that
             many
             men
             are
             carried
             away
             with
             his
             Authority
             .
             But
             first
             of
             all
             ,
             how
             was
             Iulian
             a
             taker
             away
             of
             the
             daily
             Sacrifice
             ?
             He
             rather
             countenanced
             the
             Jewes
             against
             the
             Christians
             ,
             
               Socrat.
               lib.
            
             3.
             
             Secondly
             ,
             how
             can
             we
             apply
             the
             taking
             away
             of
             the
             daily
             Sacrifice
             to
             the
             times
             of
             Iulian
             ?
             and
             how
             can
             we
             make
             the
             accompt
             by
             the
             Abomination
             of
             Desolation
             set
             up
             by
             Iulian
             ,
             when
             our
             Saviour
             doth
             speak
             so
             plainly
             of
             the
             des●…ruction
             of
             Ierusalem
             by
             the
             Romans
             ?
             He
             speaketh
             in
             this
             wise
             :
             
               These
               be
               the
               dayes
               of
               Vengeance
               ,
               that
               all
               things
               that
               are
               written
               ,
               may
               be
               fulfilled
               .
               And
               there
               shall
               be
               great
               distress
               upon
               this
               People
               ,
               and
               they
               shall
               fall
               by
               the
               edge
               of
               the
               Sword
               ,
               and
               shall
               be
               led
               away
               Captive
               into
               all
               Nations
               ;
               and
               Ierusalem
               shall
               be
               troden
               down
               of
               the
               Gentiles
               ,
               till
               the
               times
               of
               the
               Gentiles
               be
               fulfilled
               ,
            
             Luk.
             21.
             22
             ,
             23
             ,
             &c.
             
             Here
             observe
             ,
             First
             ,
             our
             Saviour
             speaketh
             of
             the
             destruction
             of
             Ierusalem
             ,
             and
             of
             the
             scattering
             of
             the
             Jewes
             ,
             and
             of
             the
             time
             of
             their
             dispersion
             .
             He
             doth
             speak
             of
             these
             things
             as
             they
             were
             foretold
             in
             the
             writings
             of
             the
             old
             Prophets
             ,
             
               That
               all
               that
               is
               written
               might
               be
               fulfilled
               .
            
             Now
             where
             may
             we
             conceive
             these
             things
             are
             written
             ,
             but
             in
             the
             Prophecie
             of
             Daniel
             ?
             more
             briefly
             ,
             chap.
             9
             ;
             and
             more
             largely
             ,
             chap.
             12.
             
             St.
             Matthew
             therefore
             ,
             when
             he
             speaketh
             of
             the
             destruction
             of
             Ierusalem
             by
             the
             Romans
             ,
             doth
             plainly
             shew
             that
             this
             is
             but
             the
             fulfilling
             of
             that
             which
             was
             formerly
             mentioned
             in
             the
             Prophecie
             of
             
               Daniel
               ,
               Mat.
            
             24.
             vers
             .
             14
             ,
             15.
             
             If
             this
             be
             so
             ,
             why
             then
             should
             we
             look
             after
             the
             setting
             up
             of
             the
             Abomination
             of
             Desolation
             in
             the
             times
             of
             the
             Emperor
             Iulian
             ,
             when
             in
             the
             Evangelist
             it
             is
             so
             strictly
             limited
             to
             the
             destruction
             of
             Ierusalem
             ?
             But
             let
             us
             come
             to
             the
             things
             themselves
             ;
             and
             here
             in
             the
             first
             place
             ,
             concerning
             the
             wrath
             that
             shall
             be
             upon
             the
             people
             of
             the
             Jewes
             :
             it
             is
             expresly
             said
             ,
             That
             they
             shall
             fall
             by
             the
             edge
             of
             the
             Sword
             ,
             and
             that
             they
             shall
             be
             carried
             Captive
             into
             all
             Nations
             .
             This
             is
             the
             scope
             of
             our
             Saviours
             words
             ,
             as
             we
             may
             see
             in
             the
             Story
             .
             Now
             then
             ,
             doth
             not
             Daniel
             speak
             of
             the
             same
             things
             ?
             of
             a
             time
             of
             trouble
             for
             
             the
             Children
             of
             his
             People
             ,
             such
             as
             never
             was
             since
             it
             was
             a
             Nation
             ,
             vers
             .
             1.
             
             And
             doth
             he
             not
             speak
             of
             the
             scattering
             of
             the
             Holy
             People
             ,
             and
             of
             the
             continuance
             of
             their
             dispersion
             to
             the
             time
             of
             the
             end
             ?
             Secondly
             ,
             for
             the
             time
             ,
             how
             long
             the
             dispersion
             shall
             continue
             ;
             our
             Saviour
             saith
             ,
             That
             the
             Jewes
             shall
             be
             carried
             Captive
             into
             all
             Nations
             ,
             and
             Ierusalem
             shall
             be
             troden
             under
             foot
             till
             the
             time
             of
             the
             Gentiles
             be
             fulfilled
             .
             It
             is
             plain
             then
             ,
             That
             the
             dispersion
             of
             the
             Jews
             ,
             and
             the
             conculcation
             of
             the
             literal
             Ierusalem
             ,
             shall
             last
             to
             the
             fulfilling
             of
             the
             times
             of
             the
             Gentiles
             .
             Now
             then
             ,
             If
             we
             apply
             this
             to
             the
             Prophecie
             of
             Daniel
             ,
             doth
             he
             not
             speak
             of
             the
             destruction
             of
             Ierusalem
             ,
             and
             the
             dispersion
             of
             the
             Holy
             People
             ,
             and
             of
             the
             time
             of
             the
             dispersion
             ,
             
               how
               long
               shall
               it
               be
               to
               the
               end
               of
               these
               things
               ?
            
             vers
             .
             6.
             
             Thirdly
             ,
             The
             Evangelist
             doth
             begin
             the
             time
             of
             the
             dispersion
             from
             the
             destruction
             of
             Ierusalem
             ,
             as
             from
             the
             Epocha
             and
             term
             thereof
             .
             And
             doth
             not
             Daniel
             do
             the
             same
             ?
             Doth
             he
             not
             Number
             1290
             dayes
             ,
             the
             time
             of
             the
             dispersion
             ,
             from
             the
             destruction
             of
             Ierusalem
             ?
             Fourthly
             ,
             The
             Evangelist
             saith
             ,
             That
             Ierusalem
             shall
             be
             troden
             under
             foot
             till
             the
             times
             of
             the
             Gentiles
             be
             fulfilled
             .
             In
             which
             words
             he
             doth
             secretly
             imply
             ,
             That
             after
             the
             compleating
             of
             those
             times
             ,
             there
             shall
             be
             a
             glorious
             Restoring
             of
             that
             Church
             and
             Nation
             .
             The
             words
             of
             St.
             Paul
             are
             much
             to
             the
             same
             effect
             ;
             
               When
               the
               Fulness
               of
               the
               Gentiles
               shall
               come
               in
               ,
               all
               Israel
               shall
               be
               saved
               ,
            
             Rom.
             11.
             25.
             
             He
             speaketh
             of
             the
             Church
             of
             the
             Jewes
             that
             shall
             be
             in
             the
             latter
             times
             .
             And
             for
             the
             particular
             time
             ,
             he
             doth
             restrain
             it
             in
             this
             wise
             ,
             
               When
               the
               Fulness
               of
               the
               Gentiles
               shall
               come
               in
               :
            
             that
             is
             ,
             When
             the
             Fulness
             of
             the
             Nations
             shall
             be
             brought
             in
             to
             own
             Christ
             the
             Head
             of
             the
             Church
             ,
             then
             the
             Nation
             of
             the
             Jews
             shall
             be
             Called
             ;
             And
             so
             Jewes
             and
             Gentiles
             shall
             make
             one
             People
             under
             Christ
             their
             Head
             in
             the
             latter
             dayes
             .
             And
             are
             not
             the
             words
             of
             Daniel
             much
             to
             the
             same
             purpose
             ?
             Doth
             he
             not
             say
             ,
             
               Blessed
               is
               he
               that
               waiteth
               ,
               and
               cometh
               to
               the
            
             1335
             dayes
             ,
             to
             the
             glorious
             Restauration
             of
             that
             Church
             and
             Nation
             ?
          
           
             But
             yet
             for
             a
             further
             amplification
             ,
             let
             us
             consider
             what
             is
             spoken
             Dan.
             9.
             27.
             
             And
             here
             we
             shall
             find
             that
             this
             doth
             
             parallel
             the
             two
             former
             Scriptures
             ,
             and
             that
             all
             three
             together
             do
             speak
             of
             the
             destruction
             of
             Ierusalem
             by
             the
             Romans
             ,
             and
             the
             continuance
             of
             the
             dispersion
             of
             that
             People
             after
             the
             destruction
             .
             These
             are
             the
             words
             ;
             
               He
               shall
               cause
               the
               Sacrifice
               and
               the
               Oblation
               to
               cease
               ;
               and
               for
               the
               overspreading
               of
               Abomination
               ,
               (
               or
               as
               it
               is
               in
               the
               Margine
               ,
               with
               Abominable
               Armies
               )
               he
               shall
               make
               it
               desolate
               ,
               even
               until
               the
               consummation
               ,
               and
               that
               determined
               shall
               be
               poured
               upon
               the
               desolate
               .
            
             In
             these
             words
             ,
             Note
             ,
             First
             the
             Agent
             ,
             who
             it
             is
             that
             shall
             make
             desolate
             ;
             The
             People
             of
             Rome
             ,
             or
             the
             Prince
             of
             that
             People
             who
             shall
             come
             .
             Secondly
             ,
             The
             Action
             it self
             ;
             he
             shall
             cause
             the
             Sacrifice
             and
             the
             Oblation
             to
             cease
             ,
             and
             shall
             bring
             in
             the
             Abomination
             that
             maketh
             Desolate
             .
             Thirdly
             ,
             The
             time
             when
             this
             Action
             shall
             begin
             ;
             to
             wit
             ,
             After
             the
             cutting
             off
             of
             the
             
               Messiah
               :
               Then
               the
               People
               of
               the
               Prince
               that
               shall
               come
               ,
               shall
               destroy
               the
               City
               and
               the
               Sanctuary
               .
            
             And
             so
             they
             did
             ,
             as
             appeareth
             by
             the
             event
             .
             ●…ourthly
             ,
             For
             the
             time
             of
             the
             continuance
             of
             the
             Desolation
             ;
             it
             is
             said
             ,
             
               He
               shall
               make
               it
               desolate
               even
               until
               the
               consummation
               ,
               and
               that
               determined
               shall
               be
               poured
               upon
               the
               desolate
               .
            
             He
             doth
             not
             speak
             of
             the
             desolation
             of
             Ierusalem
             only
             at
             that
             〈◊〉
             ●…nstant
             ,
             but
             of
             the
             continuance
             thereof
             ,
             as
             the
             Lord
             had
             determined
             and
             Decreed
             it
             upon
             that
             City
             and
             People
             .
             I●…
             is
             said
             to
             be
             determined
             ,
             because
             〈◊〉
             is
             precisely
             cut
             out
             ,
             de●…ned
             ,
             limited
             ,
             and
             circumscribed
             ,
             as
             was
             the
             period
             of
             the
             70
             weeks
             ,
             vers
             .
             24.
             
             Further
             ,
             The
             Prophet
             Isaiah
             〈◊〉
             of
             the
             casting
             away
             of
             the
             Jewes
             ,
             useth
             the
             same
             expression
             ,
             as
             is
             her●…
             used
             in
             the
             text
             of
             Daniel
             .
             For
             ,
             (
             saith
             he
             )
             
               though
               thy
               Peo●…le
               of
               Israel
               be
               as
               the
               sand
               of
               the
               Sea
               ,
               yet
               a
               〈◊〉
               of
               〈◊〉
               shall
               return
               ▪
            
             For
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             the
             consumption
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             the
             p●…ecise
             consummation
             shall
             overflow
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             ,
             chap.
             10.
             vers
             .
             22
             ,
             23.
             
             This
             is
             spoken
             of
             the
             〈◊〉
             fata●…●…cattering
             of
             the
             Jewish
             Nation
             ,
             and
             the
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             of
             that
             dispersion
             ,
             as
             the
             Apostle
             him●…elf
             〈◊〉
             ex●…ound
             ,
             Rom.
             9.
             27
             ,
             28.
             
             So
             then
             ,
             the
             text
             doth
             not
             only
             speak
             of
             the
             destruction
             of
             Ierusalem
             by
             the
             Romans
             ,
             but
             of
             a
             certain
             determinated
             time
             of
             the
             desolation
             of
             that
             People
             ,
             how
             long
             it
             shall
             continue
             .
             
             Now
             let
             us
             apply
             all
             these
             things
             to
             the
             controverted
             place
             ,
             Dan.
             12.
             11
             ,
             
               From
               t●…e
               t●…me
               that
               the
               daily
               Sacrifice
               shall
               be
               taken
               away
               ,
               and
               the
               Ab●…nation
               that
               maketh
               Des●…late
               be
               set
               up
               ,
               there
               shall
               be
            
             1290
             
               〈◊〉
               ▪
            
             What
             is
             more
             natural
             and
             consonant
             to
             the
             text
             ,
             an●…
             〈◊〉
             is
             more
             congruous
             to
             other
             Scriptures
             ,
             than
             to
             take
             the
             〈◊〉
             up
             of
             the
             Abomination
             of
             Desolation
             for
             the
             destruction
             of
             Ierusalem
             by
             the
             Romans
             ?
             And
             that
             the
             1290
             dayes
             ,
             the
             time
             of
             the
             dispersion
             ,
             doth
             run
             from
             that
             begi●…
             〈◊〉
             ▪
             We
             ha●…e
             good
             reason
             to
             take
             this
             for
             an
             authentick
             〈◊〉
             ▪
             because
             Dan●…el
             in
             the
             12
             Chapter
             doth
             more
             largely
             repe●…
             〈◊〉
             Desolation
             by
             the
             Romans
             ,
             which
             he
             had
             more
             briefly
             〈◊〉
             chap.
             9.
             
             We
             cannot
             be
             perswaded
             ,
             but
             that
             the
             Prop●…
             〈◊〉
             last
             Vision
             ,
             went
             farther
             into
             the
             times
             ,
             than
             he
             did
             i●…
             〈◊〉
             going
             before
             ;
             at
             least
             ,
             he
             went
             as
             far
             .
             For
             〈◊〉
             is
             expresly
             said
             concerning
             this
             last
             Vision
             ,
             
               that
               the
               time
               was
               long
               ,
               and
               for
               many
               dayes
               .
            
             The
             word
             in
             the
             Original
             is
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             or
             as
             Mr
             Broughton
             doth
             well
             render
             it
             ,
             
               the
               Army-like-ordered
               time
               was
               great
               .
               Piscator
            
             upon
             the
             place
             also
             ,
             doth
             well
             observe
             the
             same
             propriety
             of
             the
             phrase
             ;
             
               Vide
               ●…r
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               ess●…
               Metaphora
               ,
               quod
               in
               tempore
               determina●…o
               partes
               convenienti
               ordine
               à
               Deo
               sunt
               dispositae
               sicut
               Milites
               in
               exercitis
               .
               T●…e
               s●…emeth
               here
               to
               be
               a
               〈◊〉
               ;
               the
               parts
               in
               this
               determin●…te
               time
               are
               so
               disposed
               of
               G●…
               Souldiers
               in
               an
               Army
               .
            
             We
             may
             then
             safely
             conclude
             ,
             〈◊〉
             in
             this
             last
             Vision
             Daniel
             doth
             go
             many
             〈◊〉
             -
             deep
             into
             the
             times
             ,
             and
             much
             deeper
             than
             he
             did
             in
             the
             former
             Visions
             .
             And
             therefore
             we
             may
             necessarily
             affirm
             ,
             That
             he
             doth
             lead
             us
             far
             beyond
             the
             times
             of
             Christ.
             On
             the
             contrary
             ,
             If
             these
             times
             end
             with
             the
             Persecution●…
             under
             
               Antiochus
               Epiphanes
            
             ,
             (
             for
             so
             Mr
             Broughton
             and
             others
             will
             have
             it
             )
             how
             is
             the
             time
             long
             ?
             and
             how
             doth
             the
             Lord
             speak
             of
             such
             notable
             events
             that
             should
             befal
             Da●…iel's
             People
             in
             the
             last
             and
             utmost
             Rere-ward
             of
             time
             ?
             The
             destruction
             of
             Ierusalem
             by
             the
             Romans
             ,
             was
             230
             years
             after
             the
             death
             of
             
               Antiochus
               Epiphanes
            
             :
             And
             therefore
             the
             Vision
             of
             the
             70
             weeks
             (
             if
             Mr
             Broughtons
             interpretation
             be
             good
             )
             must
             go
             farther
             than
             this
             last
             Vision
             ,
             by
             such
             a
             Proportion
             and
             Number
             of
             years
             .
             Now
             ,
             who
             can
             possibly
             
             believe
             this
             to
             be
             true
             ,
             that
             readeth
             the
             three
             last
             Chapters
             of
             the
             Prophecie
             ?
             Must
             the
             whole
             Narration
             of
             all
             the
             things
             there
             declared
             end
             at
             Antiochus
             his
             death
             ?
          
           
             Now
             then
             ,
             to
             gather
             all
             into
             one
             sum
             ,
             we
             may
             safely
             collect
             ,
             That
             Daniel
             in
             this
             Vision
             doth
             not
             only
             lead
             us
             to
             the
             destruction
             of
             Ierusalem
             by
             the
             Romans
             ,
             but
             he
             doth
             speak
             also
             how
             long
             the
             Jewes
             shall
             remain
             under
             that
             fatal
             Dispersion
             .
             These
             things
             our
             Saviour
             ,
             the
             Apostle
             St.
             
               Paul
               ,
               Isaiah
            
             ,
             and
             Daniel
             ,
             all
             of
             them
             do
             speak
             :
             First
             ,
             of
             the
             scattering
             of
             the
             Nation
             after
             the
             destruction
             of
             Ierusalem
             ,
             and
             of
             the
             time
             of
             their
             Dispersion
             till
             their
             Calling
             again
             .
          
           
             If
             any
             shall
             then
             require
             me
             to
             make
             good
             the
             Chronologie
             of
             1290
             dayes
             ,
             and
             of
             1335
             dayes
             ,
             I
             must
             confess
             that
             I
             am
             here
             at
             a
             loss
             ;
             and
             it
             may
             be
             that
             they
             who
             shall
             come
             in
             the
             Rere-ward
             of
             the
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             or
             the
             
               Army-like-ordered
               time
            
             ,
             shall
             see
             more
             .
             
               Then
               perhaps
               many
               shall
               run
               to
               and
               fro
               ,
               and
               knowledge
               shall
               be
               encreased
               .
            
             If
             I
             may
             (
             to
             use
             the
             words
             of
             Mr
             Fox
             )
             vent
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             my
             Conjectures
             ,
             I
             should
             be
             willing
             to
             proceed
             in
             this
             manner
             :
             First
             ,
             To
             speak
             of
             the
             time
             in
             a
             Latitude
             .
             Secondly
             ,
             To
             speak
             of
             it
             more
             particularly
             .
             If
             we
             speak
             of
             it
             in
             some
             Latitude
             ,
             and
             begin
             the
             1290
             daies
             at
             the
             destruction
             of
             Ierusalem
             ,
             this
             period
             of
             time
             will
             bring
             us
             precisely
             to
             the
             year
             of
             the
             Lord
             1359
             :
             And
             here
             ,
             (
             as
             Alstedius
             well
             observeth
             in
             his
             Chronologie
             ,
             cap.
             6.
             )
             the
             Saints
             did
             begin
             more
             vigorously
             to
             testifie
             against
             the
             Antichristian
             Idolatries
             .
             And
             in
             very
             deed
             ,
             if
             we
             diligently
             observe
             the
             times
             ,
             with
             some
             subtilty
             of
             consideration
             ,
             we
             shall
             find
             ,
             That
             from
             the
             taking
             of
             Constantinople
             ,
             and
             the
             destruction
             of
             the
             Greek
             Empire
             ,
             in
             the
             East
             ,
             the
             Languages
             have
             been
             revived
             ,
             and
             the
             Witnesses
             of
             Truth
             have
             been
             more
             effectually
             raised
             up
             in
             the
             West
             ;
             and
             the
             light
             of
             the
             Gospel
             doth
             more
             and
             more
             encrease
             .
             And
             it
             is
             very
             probable
             that
             these
             things
             will
             go
             on
             ,
             and
             never
             cease
             till
             the
             Kingdom
             of
             Christ
             be
             set
             up
             in
             its
             full
             glory
             and
             Monarchical
             power
             over
             Jews
             and
             Gentiles
             .
          
           
             This
             I
             take
             to
             be
             the
             meaning
             of
             the
             Prophecie
             ,
             in
             the
             general
             accommodation
             thereof
             .
             But
             for
             the
             more
             distinct
             and
             
             particular
             Application
             of
             the
             times
             ,
             this
             (
             as
             I
             have
             said
             before
             )
             I
             must
             leave
             to
             them
             that
             come
             after
             .
             Now
             let
             us
             proceed
             to
             the
             words
             of
             Piscator
             in
             his
             Preface
             upon
             the
             Prophecie
             of
             Daniel
             .
          
        
         
           
             Piscator
             .
          
           
             The
             third
             Kingdom
             is
             not
             here
             rightly
             extended
             to
             the
             Successors
             of
             Alexander
             the
             Great
             ,
             so
             far
             at
             least
             as
             he
             is
             stated
             the
             first
             King
             of
             that
             Kingdom
             .
             For
             though
             this
             is
             done
             ,
             
               chap.
               8.
               vers
               .
               21.
            
             yet
             nevertheless
             ,
             that
             Prophecie
             differeth
             much
             from
             this
             .
             For
             the
             Kingdom
             of
             the
             Greeks
             figured
             by
             the
             He-goat
             is
             there
             expresly
             Named
             ,
             and
             is
             divided
             into
             the
             Kingdom
             of
             Alexander
             ,
             (
             who
             is
             resembled
             by
             the
             notable
             Horn
             which
             the
             He-goat
             had
             between
             his
             eyes
             )
             and
             the
             Kingdom
             of
             his
             Successors
             .
             So
             that
             this
             of
             Alexander
             is
             clearly
             to
             be
             distinguished
             ,
             as
             different
             from
             that
             of
             the
             Successors
             .
             For
             it
             is
             said
             ,
             When
             that
             Horn
             was
             br●…ken
             ,
             four
             stood
             up
             for
             it
             ,
             or
             in
             the
             place
             of
             it
             ;
             and
             afterward
             those
             four
             are
             expresly
             called
             one
             Kingdom
             ,
             
               vers
               .
               23.
            
             
             Likewise
             it
             is
             spoken
             concerning
             the
             Kingdom
             of
             Alexander
             ,
             That
             it
             should
             be
             plucked
             up
             ,
             and
             that
             it
             should
             come
             to
             others
             ,
             and
             not
             to
             his
             Posterity
             ,
             
               Dan.
               11.
               4.
            
             
          
        
         
           
             Answer
             .
          
           
             I
             do
             not
             deny
             but
             in
             some
             sense
             the
             Kingdom
             of
             Alexander
             may
             be
             distinct
             from
             that
             of
             his
             Successors
             :
             But
             〈◊〉
             ,
             Whether
             in
             the
             present
             case
             it
             ou●…ht
             to
             be
             〈◊〉
             distinguished
             .
             The
             Kingdoms
             of
             Media
             and
             Persia
             ,
             are
             two
             distinct
             Realms
             ,
             Dan.
             8.
             yet
             both
             these
             make
             but
             one
             silver-Metal
             .
             So
             the
             Kingdoms
             of
             Alexander
             and
             his
             Successors
             ,
             though
             they
             be
             distinguished
             ,
             yet
             in
             the
             Notion
             ,
             Relation
             ,
             and
             Distribution
             of
             the
             Kingdoms
             in
             the
             Image
             ,
             they
             make
             but
             one
             Brass-metal
             ,
             or
             one
             Empire
             ,
             typed
             by
             the
             third
             Beast
             with
             four
             Heads
             .
             In
             this
             case
             every
             Metal
             signifieth
             a
             distinct
             Kingdom
             in
             the
             fulness
             thereof
             .
             And
             therefore
             ,
             as
             the
             Golden-Head
             doth
             signifie
             the
             Babylonian-Kin●…dom
             ;
             and
             the
             Silver-Breast
             ,
             the
             Mede-Persian
             :
             So
             the
             Brazen-Belly
             and
             Thighs
             ,
             do
             signifie
             the
             whole
             Graecian
             Empire
             .
             And
             as
             in
             
             this
             Acception
             the
             distinct
             Kingdoms
             of
             Media
             and
             Persia
             do
             not
             make
             two
             ,
             but
             one
             Silver-metal
             :
             So
             the
             Distinct
             Kingdoms
             of
             Alexander
             and
             his
             Successors
             ,
             do
             not
             make
             divers
             ,
             but
             one
             third
             Kingdom
             of
             Brass
             .
             But
             yet
             further
             ,
             If
             we
             should
             ask
             how
             every
             Metal-Kingdom
             comes
             to
             be
             divided
             ,
             it
             must
             be
             in
             relation
             as
             each
             People
             cometh
             to
             have
             the
             sovereign
             Dominion
             over
             the
             Earth
             ;
             and
             therefore
             it
             is
             expresly
             said
             concerning
             the
             Kingdom
             of
             Christ
             ,
             
               That
               it
               shall
               not
               be
               left
               to
               other
               People
               ,
            
             chap.
             2.
             44.
             
             And
             in
             the
             end
             of
             the
             seventh
             Chapter
             ,
             v.
             27.
             these
             words
             are
             recited
             ,
             
               The
               Kingdom
               ,
               and
               Dominion
               ,
               and
               the
               greatness
               of
               the
               Kingdom
               shall
               be
               given
               to
               the
               People
               of
               the
               Saints
               of
               the
               most
               High
               :
            
             From
             whence
             we
             collect
             ,
             That
             the
             Monarchies
             are
             to
             be
             distinguished
             ,
             as
             the
             Dominion
             doth
             devolve
             and
             descend
             from
             one
             People
             to
             another
             ,
             till
             at
             last
             it
             cometh
             to
             the
             turn
             of
             the
             Saints
             of
             the
             most
             High
             ,
             to
             be
             the
             Monarchical
             people
             .
             This
             being
             laid
             as
             a
             ground
             ,
             we
             may
             say
             in
             the
             particu●…ar
             case
             alledged
             by
             Piscator
             ,
             That
             though
             the
             Kingdom
             of
             Alexander
             was
             plucked
             up
             by
             the
             Roots
             ,
             and
             the
             Kingdoms
             of
             his
             Successors
             were
             set
             up
             upon
             his
             ruines
             ;
             yet
             for
             all
             this
             ,
             there
             was
             no
             change
             of
             Dominion
             from
             People
             to
             People
             .
             There
             was
             only
             a
             change
             from
             Alexander
             to
             his
             Successors
             ;
             still
             one
             Graecian
             People
             had
             the
             Empire
             over
             the
             Earth
             .
             And
             to
             put
             all
             out
             of
             questi●…n
             ,
             That
             the
             Spirit
             doth
             principally
             point
             to
             the
             Flux
             and
             Passage
             of
             the
             Sovereignty
             from
             one
             People
             to
             another
             ,
             and
             tha●…
             in
             this
             case
             he
             doth
             not
             distinguish
             the
             Kingdom
             of
             Alexander
             from
             that
             of
             his
             Successors
             ;
             the
             ground
             which
             we
             have
             to
             bui●…d
             upon
             ,
             i●…
             ,
             The
             resemblance
             of
             the
             
               He-goat
               ▪
               chap.
            
             8.
             
             Now
             under
             this
             similitude
             ,
             the
             whole
             Graecian
             Empire
             ,
             both
             of
             Alexander
             ,
             and
             of
             his
             four
             Successors
             ,
             they
             are
             all
             comprehended
             together
             ,
             as
             they
             were
             formerly
             set
             forth
             under
             the
             Type
             of
             the
             Third
             Beast
             with
             four
             Heads
             .
             Now
             whereas
             〈◊〉
             alledgeth
             ,
             That
             the
             He-goat
             is
             different
             from
             the
             Third
             Beast
             ;
             and
             that
             the
             Prophecie
             ,
             chap.
             8.
             
             
               Habet
               rationem
               diversam
            
             ,
             a
             different
             way
             of
             Interpretation
             :
             I
             Answer
             ,
             The
             
               He
               goat
            
             and
             the
             Third
             Beast
             are
             all
             one
             ,
             so
             farforth
             as
             both
             are
             Types
             of
             the
             same
             Empire
             ,
             under
             one
             and
             the
             
             same
             People
             .
             And
             for
             the
             Partition
             of
             the
             Greek
             Kingdom
             ,
             between
             Alexander
             and
             his
             Successors
             ;
             this
             doth
             no
             more
             hinder
             the
             Type
             of
             that
             Kingdom
             by
             one
             Third
             Beast
             ,
             then
             it
             doth
             hinder
             the
             delineation
             by
             one
             He-goat
             .
          
           
             But
             now
             to
             produce
             some
             Reasons
             that
             Alexander
             divided
             from
             his
             Successors
             cannot
             be
             the
             Third
             Kingdom
             Typed
             by
             the
             Brass-Metal
             ,
             or
             the
             Third
             Beast
             .
             First
             ,
             All
             the
             Kingdoms
             were
             persecuting
             States
             ,
             such
             that
             did
             afflict
             the
             People
             of
             God.
             But
             Alexander
             ,
             if
             you
             divide
             him
             from
             his
             Successors
             ,
             did
             not
             afflict
             the
             Church
             of
             the
             Jews
             ,
             neither
             were
             they
             Persecuted
             in
             all
             the
             times
             of
             his
             Empire
             .
             Secondly
             ,
             The
             Metal-Kingdoms
             are
             so
             constituted
             ,
             that
             the
             latter
             are
             of
             a
             more
             hard
             and
             Tyrannical
             disposition
             against
             the
             Saints
             .
             Now
             take
             
               Alexander
               ,
               in
               sensu
               diviso
            
             ,
             take
             him
             several
             from
             his
             Successors
             ,
             how
             was
             his
             Kingdom
             of
             more
             hard
             disposition
             against
             the
             Saints
             ,
             than
             was
             either
             Babylon
             or
             Persia
             going
             before
             ?
             His
             Monarchy
             was
             but
             for
             a
             few
             years
             ,
             and
             there
             was
             no
             Persecution
             of
             the
             People
             of
             the
             Jews
             in
             all
             his
             time
             .
             Thirdly
             ,
             The
             Beast
             that
             came
             up
             our
             of
             the
             Sea
             after
             the
             Persian
             Bear
             ,
             is
             expresly
             said
             to
             have
             four
             Heads
             ,
             vers
             .
             6.
             
             Now
             take
             Alexander
             severally
             from
             his
             Successors
             ,
             what
             four
             Heads
             ,
             or
             what
             four
             Divisions
             were
             there
             in
             his
             Kingdom
             ?
             For
             in
             his
             time
             the
             Beast
             was
             so
             far
             from
             having
             four
             Heads
             ,
             that
             it
             had
             no
             Heads
             or
             Divisions
             at
             all
             :
             Therefore
             we
             must
             necessarily
             conclude
             ,
             That
             the
             Third
             Beast
             doth
             represent
             and
             fig●…re
             the
             Graecian
             Kingdom
             ,
             which
             in
             a
             famous
             revolution
             of
             State
             ,
             became
             divided
             into
             four
             Parts
             .
             Now
             ,
             whereas
             the
             learned
             Interpreter
             doth
             distinguish
             the
             Kingdom
             of
             Alexander
             from
             the
             Dominion
             of
             his
             Successors
             ,
             I
             do
             yield
             this
             to
             be
             true
             :
             For
             Alexander
             being
             broken
             off
             ▪
             four
             Kingdoms
             did
             stand
             up
             out
             of
             that
             Nation
             .
             But
             this
             is
             nothing
             to
             the
             purpose
             .
             For
             these
             several
             Fractions
             and
             Divisions
             do
             not
             hinder
             the
             Unity
             of
             the
             Greek
             Monarchy
             .
             If
             it
             had
             been
             the
             plot
             of
             the
             Spirit
             to
             make
             a
             Third
             Monarchy
             of
             Alexander
             ,
             and
             a
             Fourth
             of
             his
             Successors
             ;
             why
             doth
             he
             use
             the
             similitude
             of
             one
             He-goat
             for
             the
             representation
             of
             two
             Monarchies
             ?
             Why
             are
             two
             Empires
             set
             forth
             under
             one
             figure
             ?
             And
             whereas
             he
             strongly
             
             bindeth
             upon
             this
             ,
             That
             all
             Four
             Successors
             are
             expresly
             called
             ,
             
               One
               Kingdom
            
             ,
             vers
             .
             23.
             
             Saving
             the
             great
             Worth
             and
             Learning
             of
             the
             Author
             ,
             he
             is
             deceived
             in
             this
             Point
             :
             For
             when
             it
             is
             said
             ,
             
               In
               the
               latter
               end
               of
               their
               Kingdom
               ,
               when
               transgressors
               are
               come
               to
               the
               full
               ;
               a
               King
               ,
               of
               fierce
               countenance
               ,
               shall
               stand
               up
               :
            
             Now
             in
             these
             words
             ,
             
               In
               the
               latter
               end
               of
               their
               Kingdom
            
             ;
             this
             is
             not
             only
             meant
             of
             the
             Kingdom
             of
             the
             Four
             Successors
             ,
             contradistinct
             to
             the
             Kingdom
             of
             Alexander
             ;
             but
             the
             expression
             is
             concerning
             the
             whole
             Kingdom
             of
             the
             Greeks
             ,
             opposed
             to
             that
             of
             the
             Persians
             .
             In
             the
             description
             of
             the
             He-goat
             ,
             Four
             Kingdoms
             are
             said
             to
             rise
             up
             out
             of
             that
             Nation
             ;
             and
             in
             the
             latter
             end
             of
             their
             Kingdom
             (
             meaning
             the
             Greeks
             ,
             when
             that
             People
             shall
             have
             the
             Sovereignty
             over
             the
             Earth
             )
             a
             King
             of
             fierce
             countenance
             shall
             arise
             .
             Therefore
             we
             conclude
             ,
             That
             Alexander
             ,
             and
             his
             Successors
             together
             ,
             make
             but
             one
             Greek
             Empire
             ,
             under
             the
             similitude
             of
             one
             He-goat
             .
             Now
             let
             us
             proceed
             .
          
        
         
           
             Piscator
             .
          
           
             By
             the
             Fourth
             Kingdom
             (
             which
             was
             prefigured
             by
             the
             Ironthighs
             of
             the
             Image
             )
             we
             must
             understand
             the
             Kingdom
             of
             the
             Successors
             of
             Alexander
             the
             Great
             .
             This
             I
             have
             already
             cleared
             ,
             by
             comparing
             it
             with
             the
             Fourth
             Beast
             ,
             
               chap.
               7.
            
             
             To
             which
             I
             now
             adde
             another
             evident
             collation
             of
             
               chap.
               2.
               vers
               .
               43.
            
             with
             
               chap.
               11.
               vers
               .
               6.
            
             concerning
             the
             Feet
             of
             the
             Image
             (
             which
             pertain
             to
             the
             Fourth
             Kingdom
             )
             Daniel
             speaking
             to
             Nebuchadnezzar
             ,
             thus
             saith
             ,
             Whereas
             thou
             s●…west
             the
             Iron
             mixed
             with
             miry
             Clay
             ,
             they
             shall
             mingle
             themselves
             with
             the
             seed
             of
             men
             ,
             but
             they
             shall
             not
             cleave
             one
             to
             the
             other
             ,
             even
             as
             Iron
             is
             not
             mixed
             with
             Clay
             .
             Now
             this
             very
             same
             thing
             the
             Angel
             Gabriel
             doth
             declare
             concerning
             the
             Successors
             of
             Alexander
             ;
             to
             wit
             ,
             The
             Seleucidae
             and
             the
             Lagidae
             ,
             
               chap.
               11.
            
             
             And
             in
             the
             end
             of
             the
             years
             they
             shall
             joyn
             themselves
             together
             ;
             for
             the
             King's
             Daughter
             of
             the
             South
             shall
             come
             to
             the
             King
             of
             the
             North
             ,
             to
             make
             an
             Agreement
             ;
             but
             she
             shall
             not
             retain
             the
             power
             of
             the
             Arm
             ,
             neither
             shall
             he
             stand
             ,
             nor
             his
             Arm.
             From
             hence
             it
             is
             manifest
             ,
             by
             the
             Fourth
             Kingdom
             ,
             Represented
             by
             the
             Feet
             of
             the
             Image
             ,
             this
             cannot
             be
             understood
             of
             the
             
             Roman
             Empire
             ,
             seeing
             it
             was
             diverse
             from
             that
             of
             the
             Graecians
             .
          
        
         
           
             Answer
             .
          
           
             The
             Character
             of
             the
             mixture
             of
             Marriages
             drawn
             from
             that
             collation
             between
             chap.
             2.
             vers
             .
             43.
             and
             chap.
             11.
             vers
             6.
             
             This
             ,
             of
             all
             others
             ,
             seemeth
             to
             be
             the
             grand
             Argument
             .
             But
             to
             say
             the
             truth
             ,
             and
             that
             upon
             tryal
             ,
             I
             here
             find
             that
             Interpreters
             do
             usually
             build
             upon
             Three
             notable
             False
             Principles
             .
          
           
             First
             ,
             They
             take
             the
             Fourth
             Kingdom
             as
             divided
             in
             all
             time
             ;
             and
             therefore
             they
             look
             after
             the
             interchangable
             marriages
             of
             the
             Seleucidae
             and
             Lagidae
             to
             make
             up
             the
             Union
             .
             But
             in
             this
             they
             erre
             :
             For
             the
             Fourth
             Kingdom
             ,
             as
             long
             as
             it
             is
             in
             the
             Iron-Legs
             ,
             it
             is
             not
             di●…ided
             at
             all
             :
             It
             is
             one
             intire
             Dominion
             ,
             and
             therefore
             needeth
             no
             Uniting
             by
             mixture
             of
             marriages
             .
             The
             Division
             beginneth
             not
             till
             you
             come
             to
             the
             Feet
             ,
             part
             of
             Iron
             ,
             and
             part
             of
             Clay
             .
             But
             let
             us
             hear
             the
             words
             themselves
             ▪
             
               A●…d
               the
               Fourth
               Kingdom
               shall
               be
               strong
               as
               Iron
               ,
               forasmuch
               as
               Iron
               breaket●…
               in
               p●…eces
               ,
               and
               subdueth
               all
               things
               ;
               and
               as
               Iron
               that
               breaketh
               all
               these
               ,
               shall
               it
               break
               in
               pieces
               and
               bruise
               .
            
             So
             then
             ,
             the
             Fourth
             Kingdom
             ,
             so
             long
             as
             it
             is
             in
             the
             Iron-Legs
             ,
             is
             more
             strong
             than
             any
             going
             before
             .
             There
             arose
             first
             a
             Kingdom
             of
             Gold
             ,
             in
             all
             fulness
             of
             power●…
             an●…
             then
             afterwords
             ,
             a
             Kingdom
             of
             Silver
             :
             and
             a
             third
             〈◊〉
             Brass
             ,
             that
             should
             rule
             over
             all
             :
             and
             then
             last
             of
             all
             ,
             a
             Kingdom
             of
             Iron
             ,
             which
             should
             break
             in
             pieces
             and
             su●…due
             all
             the
             former
             Metals
             .
             But
             how
             is
             this
             verified
             in
             the
             Fourth
             Kingdom
             ?
             The
             strength
             and
             power
             of
             the
             Kingdom
             was
             chiefly
             in
             the
             Iron-Legs
             :
             when
             it
             came
             to
             the
             Feet
             and
             Toes
             ,
             it
             then
             became
             divided
             ;
             and
             was
             partly
             strong
             ,
             and
             〈◊〉
             broken
             .
             If
             we
             look
             narrowly
             to
             the
             words
             ,
             there
             is
             a
             description
             of
             the
             Fourth
             Kingdom
             in
             the
             〈◊〉
             ●…ate
             thereof
             .
             First
             ,
             It
             i●…
             described
             as
             one
             intire
             Kingdom
             ru●…ing
             over
             all
             the
             Earth
             ;
             and
             so
             it
             was
             in
             the
             first
             times
             when
             it
             was
             in
             the
             Iron
             ▪
             Legs
             .
             Secondly
             ,
             It
             is
             described
             as
             a
             divided
             Kingdom
             into
             many
             parts
             ;
             and
             so
             it
             was
             in
             its
             last
             times
             in
             the
             Feet
             ,
             part
             of
             Iron
             ,
             
             and
             part
             of
             Clay
             :
             If
             this
             be
             so
             ,
             How
             far
             doth
             Piscator
             ,
             and
             other
             Interpreters
             of
             his
             way
             ,
             depart
             from
             the
             Truth
             ?
          
           
             First
             ,
             They
             make
             the
             Fourth
             ,
             the
             mightiest
             Kingdom
             ,
             to
             consist
             meerly
             of
             the
             Fragments
             and
             broken
             pieces
             of
             Alexander's
             Dominion
             .
             Secondly
             ,
             That
             which
             is
             more
             ,
             They
             make
             it
             a
             Kingdom
             broken
             and
             divided
             in
             all
             its
             times
             ;
             when
             it
             became
             divided
             in
             its
             last
             times
             only
             .
             Thirdly
             ,
             They
             plead
             the
             mixture
             of
             Marriages
             between
             the
             Seleuc●…dae
             and
             the
             Lagidae
             ,
             in
             the
             Iron-Legs
             of
             the
             Image
             :
             and
             yet
             it
             standeth
             them
             upon
             to
             prove
             ,
             That
             the
             Fourth
             Kingdom
             was
             divided
             ,
             when
             it
             was
             in
             the
             Iron-Legs
             .
             The
             Scripture
             saith
             no
             such
             thing
             ,
             but
             rather
             the
             contrary
             :
             as
             long
             as
             it
             was
             in
             the
             Iron-Legs
             ,
             it
             was
             an
             absolute
             ,
             intire
             ,
             and
             undivided
             Kingdom
             .
             And
             therefore
             where
             there
             is
             no
             division
             into
             pieces
             ,
             what
             need
             is
             there
             of
             mingling
             to
             make
             an
             Union
             ?
          
           
             Secondly
             ,
             They
             usually
             take
             it
             for
             granted
             ,
             That
             the
             Fourth
             Kingdom
             is
             divided
             into
             two
             parts
             ;
             and
             therefore
             they
             mainly
             insist
             upon
             the
             division
             between
             the
             Seleucidae
             and
             the
             Lagidae
             .
             We
             yield
             that
             there
             is
             a
             division
             in
             the
             Feet
             and
             Toes
             of
             the
             Image
             :
             but
             how
             is
             it
             proved
             ,
             That
             this
             is
             a
             division
             into
             Two
             parts
             only
             ,
             and
             no
             more
             ?
             The
             words
             of
             the
             text
             are
             these
             :
             
               The
               Legs
               were
               of
               Iron
               ,
               and
               the
               Feet
               part
               of
               Iron
               ,
               and
               part
               of
               Clay
               .
            
             The
             Chaldee
             hath
             it
             ,
             
               Out
               of
               those
               parts
               that
               w●…e
               of
               Iron
               ,
               and
               those
               parts
               that
               were
               of
               Clay
               .
            
             The
             materials
             of
             the
             Feet
             were
             Iron
             and
             Clay
             ;
             of
             these
             the
             several
             parts
             of
             the
             Fourth
             Kingdom
             were
             tempered
             .
             But
             how
             is
             it
             proved
             ,
             That
             the
             Kingdom
             was
             divided
             into
             Two
             parts
             only
             ,
             and
             no
             more
             ?
             They
             that
             build
             upon
             this
             ,
             as
             upon
             an
             undoubted
             Principle
             ,
             should
             first
             make
             it
             appear
             ,
             That
             it
             is
             so
             .
             For
             ,
             where
             doth
             Daniel
             in
             his
             Exposition
             make
             mention
             of
             any
             such
             bipartite
             State
             ?
             How
             can
             this
             be
             proved
             from
             his
             words
             ?
             For
             thus
             it
             is
             in
             the
             text
             ;
             
               Whereas
               thou
               sawest
               the
               Feet
               and
               Toes
               ,
               part
               of
               Potters
               Clay
               ,
               and
               part
               of
               Iron
               ;
               the
               Kingdom
               shall
               be
               divided
               :
            
             or
             ,
             (
             as
             Iunius
             rendreth
             it
             )
             
               R●…gna
               erunt
               divers●…
            
             ,
             There
             shall
             be
             diverse
             Kingdoms
             .
             But
             how
             is
             it
             proved
             ,
             That
             the
             Kingdom
             is
             divided
             only
             into
             Two
             parts
             ,
             and
             
             that
             the
             diverse
             Kingdoms
             are
             only
             two
             and
             no
             more
             ?
             Let
             us
             refer
             that
             matter
             to
             that
             other
             description
             ,
             chap.
             7.
             
             And
             is
             there
             any
             thing
             there
             spoken
             ,
             to
             prove
             the
             bipartite
             State
             of
             the
             Fourth
             Kingdom
             ?
             For
             if
             we
             must
             suppose
             ,
             That
             the
             Seleucidae
             and
             the
             Lagidae
             ,
             are
             the
             Two
             Iron-Legs
             ,
             or
             divisions
             of
             the
             Fourth
             Empire
             ,
             why
             is
             not
             this
             repeated
             again
             ,
             or
             somthing
             to
             this
             purpose
             ,
             in
             the
             seventh
             Chapter
             ?
             All
             agree
             in
             it
             ,
             That
             there
             is
             a
             description
             of
             one
             and
             the
             same
             Kingdom
             in
             both
             texts
             .
             Now
             then
             ,
             in
             the
             seventh
             Chapter
             there
             is
             no
             mention
             made
             of
             this
             division
             ,
             only
             there
             it
             is
             said
             ,
             That
             Ten
             Kings
             or
             Kingdoms
             shall
             arise
             ,
             and
             another
             shall
             arise
             up
             after
             them
             .
             Here
             it
             is
             plainly
             said
             ,
             what
             that
             Number
             of
             Kingdoms
             is
             ,
             into
             which
             the
             Fourth
             Empire
             shall
             be
             divided
             ,
             scil
             .
             into
             Ten
             inferiour
             Realms
             .
             These
             then
             are
             the
             parts
             of
             the
             Fourth
             Empire
             that
             shall
             mingle
             themselves
             with
             the
             seed
             of
             men
             in
             the
             latter
             times
             of
             that
             Dominion
             .
             There
             is
             nothing
             spoken
             in
             the
             text
             con●…erning
             the
             bipartite
             State
             ,
             nothing
             concerning
             the
             Seleucidae
             and
             the
             Lagidae
             ;
             but
             that
             multiplicity
             of
             lesser
             States
             in
             the
             Feet
             and
             Toes
             of
             the
             Image
             ,
             are
             here
             defined
             and
             declared
             to
             be
             Ten
             in
             Number
             ,
             the
             proper
             Character
             and
             print-mark
             of
             the
             Roman
             Dominion
             ,
             Rev.
             17.
             
          
           
             Object
             .
             
               You
               will
               say
               ,
               That
               the
               two
               Legs
               of
               the
               Image
               do
               signifie
               the
               double
               state
               of
               the
               Fourth
               Kingdom
               ;
               and
               these
               are
               the
               Seleucidae
               and
               the
               Lagidae
               .
            
          
           
             Sol
             :
             This
             is
             but
             a
             Fancy
             ,
             as
             I
             have
             formerly
             proved
             ;
             for
             if
             you
             look
             to
             the
             Exposition
             of
             the
             text
             in
             Daniel's
             own
             words
             ,
             The
             Fourth
             Kingdom
             was
             so
             far
             from
             being
             bipartite
             ,
             that
             it
             was
             not
             at
             all
             partite
             or
             divided
             ,
             as
             long
             as
             it
             was
             in
             the
             Legs
             ;
             the
             division
             beginning
             only
             in
             the
             Feet
             and
             Toes
             .
             But
             if
             any
             stand
             upon
             the
             Analogie
             and
             similitude
             ,
             That
             therefore
             the
             Kingdom
             must
             be
             divided
             into
             Two
             parts
             ,
             because
             there
             are
             two
             Legs
             in
             the
             Body
             of
             man
             ;
             I
             would
             here
             know
             also
             ,
             by
             the
             same
             method
             of
             Interpretation
             ,
             what
             is
             meant
             by
             the
             Knees
             ,
             the
             Ancles
             ,
             and
             other
             parts
             of
             the
             Legs
             ?
             Must
             we
             finde
             out
             a
             signification
             for
             all
             these
             ?
             The
             Kingdom
             of
             Babel
             is
             compared
             to
             an
             Head
             of
             Gold
             ;
             must
             
             we
             look
             then
             what
             is
             signified
             by
             the
             Eyes
             ,
             the
             Nose
             ,
             the
             Mouth
             ,
             the
             Beard
             ,
             the
             Lips
             ,
             and
             other
             parts
             of
             the
             Head
             ;
             and
             so
             apply
             several
             significations
             to
             the
             Babylonian
             Kingdom
             ?
             This
             were
             to
             trifle
             in
             a
             serious
             matter
             .
             It
             is
             a
             good
             observation
             of
             Dr
             Willets
             ,
             That
             the
             Image
             is
             no
             Natural
             ,
             but
             a
             voluntary
             sign
             ;
             and
             therefore
             we
             are
             not
             to
             seek
             for
             a
             signification
             beyond
             the
             intent
             of
             the
             Type
             .
             The
             intent
             of
             the
             Type
             ,
             by
             the
             Legs
             of
             the
             Image
             ,
             as
             by
             the
             lowest
             region
             and
             part
             of
             the
             Body
             of
             Man
             ,
             is
             to
             set
             forth
             the
             Fourth
             and
             last
             Monarchical
             Kingdom
             ,
             and
             the
             Fourth
             and
             last
             period
             of
             time
             .
             We
             can
             prove
             no
             more
             by
             the
             simili●…ude
             ,
             than
             it
             will
             signifie
             :
             and
             here
             it
             is
             plain
             ,
             That
             the
             Two
             Legs
             do
             signifie
             no
             more
             than
             the
             Two
             Thighs
             ,
             the
             Two
             Sides
             ;
             and
             these
             do
             not
             signifie
             the
             bipartite
             State
             of
             the
             Third
             Kingdom
             .
          
           
             Thirdly
             ,
             They
             take
             it
             for
             a
             granted
             Truth
             ,
             That
             the
             twodivided
             State
             is
             the
             proper
             Character
             of
             the
             Graecian
             Kingdom
             ;
             and
             therefore
             they
             look
             to
             the
             Seleucidae
             ,
             or
             Lagidae
             ,
             as
             the
             immediate
             parts
             and
             divisions
             of
             that
             Empire
             .
             But
             herein
             also
             they
             are
             greatly
             deceived
             :
             For
             it
             is
             plain
             from
             chap.
             8.
             
             That
             the
             Graecian
             is
             quadri-partite
             .
             In
             a
             famous
             change
             of
             State
             ,
             that
             Empire
             became
             divided
             into
             Four
             Kingdoms
             .
             
               The
               Goat
               is
               the
               Kingdom
               of
               Graecia
               ;
               the
               Four
               Horns
               are
               Four
               Kingdoms
               that
               shall
               arise
               
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
              
               out
               of
               that
               Nation
               ,
            
             vers
             .
             22.
             
             And
             this
             is
             the
             reason
             wherefore
             the
             Third
             Beast
             is
             said
             to
             have
             Four
             Heads
             ,
             because
             of
             the
             quadri-partite
             Estate
             of
             that
             Empire
             .
             From
             whence
             we
             collect
             ,
             That
             Piscator
             ,
             and
             other
             Interpreters
             that
             follow
             his
             judgement
             ,
             do
             erre
             from
             the
             Truth
             ,
             when
             they
             would
             have
             the
             Seleucidae
             and
             the
             Lag●…dae
             to
             be
             the
             two
             parts
             of
             the
             Greek
             Empire
             .
             To
             speak
             properly
             ,
             Neither
             the
             Graecian
             ,
             nor
             the
             Roman
             ,
             can
             be
             set
             forth
             by
             this
             Character
             ,
             sith
             the
             Graecian
             is
             described
             in
             the
             Scripture
             in
             the
             nature
             of
             a
             Tetrarchy
             ,
             or
             a
             Kingdom
             divided
             into
             Four
             parts
             ;
             and
             the
             Roman
             in
             the
             nature
             of
             a
             Decarchy
             ,
             or
             a
             Kingdom
             divided
             into
             ten
             inferiour
             Realms
             .
             These
             are
             the
             Three
             False
             Principles
             on
             which
             Interpreters
             do
             usually
             build
             ,
             and
             therefore
             the
             interpretation
             cannot
             be
             good
             that
             standeth
             upon
             such
             a
             sandy
             foundation
             .
          
           
           
             For
             the
             mixture
             of
             Marriages
             ,
             which
             Piscator
             calleth
             
               Evidentem
               collationem
            
             ,
             an
             evident
             collation
             ;
             I
             do
             acknowledge
             that
             the
             mixture
             of
             Marriages
             mentioned
             chap.
             2.
             is
             again
             repeated
             chap.
             11.
             
             In
             the
             one
             text
             it
             is
             said
             ,
             That
             they
             shall
             
               mingle
               themselves
               with
               the
               seed
               of
               men
               :
            
             And
             in
             the
             other
             ,
             
               That
               there
               is
               an
               interchangeable
               Marriage
               ,
               one
               or
               two
               ,
               betwixt
               the
               Seleucidae
               and
               the
               Lagidae
               .
            
             But
             what
             of
             all
             this
             ?
             They
             that
             are
             like
             in
             some
             things
             ,
             are
             not
             altogether
             the
             same
             .
             If
             that
             general
             rule
             ,
             
               Omne
               simile
               non
               est
               idem
            
             ,
             were
             observed
             in
             the
             Exposition
             of
             Daniel
             and
             the
             Revelation
             ,
             we
             should
             have
             a
             cleerer
             sense
             of
             some
             Visions
             then
             now
             we
             have
             .
             But
             this
             great
             Fallacy
             hath
             imposed
             upon
             Interpreters
             ;
             they
             have
             taken
             that
             for
             the
             same
             ,
             which
             is
             parallel
             in
             some
             things
             only
             .
             There
             are
             some
             that
             have
             gone
             so
             far
             in
             these
             times
             ,
             as
             that
             they
             have
             taken
             
               the
               little
               Horn
            
             for
             some
             late
             Princes
             ;
             some
             ,
             for
             Mahomet
             ,
             and
             some
             for
             this
             ,
             and
             some
             for
             that
             .
             Here
             I
             confess
             there
             may
             be
             a
             similitude
             in
             some
             particulars
             ,
             and
             the
             Allusion
             may
             hold
             in
             some
             few
             Circumstances
             :
             But
             if
             you
             go
             to
             the
             whole
             Body
             of
             the
             notes
             of
             the
             little
             Horn
             ,
             and
             to
             the
             scope
             of
             the
             text
             ,
             here
             it
             will
             be
             very
             hard
             to
             make
             good
             the
             Assertion
             .
             There
             is
             a
             resemblance
             only
             between
             the
             Marriages
             ,
             mentioned
             chap.
             2.
             and
             chap.
             11.
             
             But
             if
             we
             go
             to
             the
             main
             scope
             ,
             the
             whole
             carriage
             of
             the
             text
             doth
             plainly
             shew
             That
             the
             Roman
             is
             the
             Fourth
             Kingdom
             ;
             and
             so
             conseque●…ly
             ,
             the
             mixture
             of
             Marriages
             ,
             and
             the
             mingling
             〈◊〉
             the
             seed
             of
             men
             ,
             must
             necessarily
             be
             in
             the
             Roman
             Kingdom
             .
          
           
             And
             yet
             further
             ,
             To
             satisfie
             the
             doubt
             ,
             They
             who
             do
             look
             more
             diligently
             into
             the
             sense
             of
             the
             Prophecie
             ,
             they
             find
             many
             things
             in
             the
             Graecian
             ,
             which
             are
             but
             as
             Types
             and
             Figures
             of
             some
             notable
             events
             in
             the
             Roman
             Kingdom
             .
             Let
             us
             take
             for
             Instance
             ,
             
               the
               little
               Horn
            
             mentioned
             in
             the
             Eighth
             of
             Daniel
             .
             Now
             here
             all
             do
             agree
             ,
             That
             
               Antiochus
               Epiphanes
            
             is
             
               the
               little
               Horn
            
             meant
             in
             this
             Chapter
             :
             yet
             whosoever
             he
             is
             that
             diligently
             readeth
             the
             words
             of
             St.
             Paul
             ,
             in
             2
             Thess.
             2.
             he
             shall
             find
             that
             the
             Apostle
             doth
             apply
             many
             things
             to
             the
             Roman
             Antichrist
             ,
             and
             so
             doth
             Iohn
             in
             the
             Revelation
             ,
             that
             are
             here
             
             ascribed
             to
             
               Antiochus
               Epiphanes
            
             .
             To
             salve
             the
             matter
             ,
             Interpreters
             tell
             us
             ,
             That
             Antiochus
             is
             the
             Figure
             of
             the
             Antichrist
             to
             come
             .
             We
             may
             proceed
             in
             the
             same
             Method
             ,
             and
             so
             we
             may
             say
             ,
             That
             the
             interchangeable
             Marriages
             between
             the
             Seleuc●…dae
             and
             the
             Lagidae
             ,
             are
             but
             Figures
             of
             the
             future
             mingling
             with
             the
             seed
             of
             men
             ,
             and
             of
             all
             other
             means
             that
             shall
             be
             used
             to
             the
             keeping
             up
             of
             the
             Roman
             Kingdom
             in
             the
             last
             and
             Antichristian
             State
             thereof
             .
             But
             ,
             let
             us
             proceed
             .
          
        
         
           
             Piscator
             .
          
           
             The
             same
             thing
             also
             may
             be
             cleerly
             demonstrated
             from
             the
             words
             ,
             
               vers
               .
               34
               ,
               35.
            
             where
             Daniel
             ,
             among
             many
             other
             things
             ,
             doth
             speak
             unto
             the
             King
             ;
             Thou
             sawest
             till
             that
             a
             stone
             was
             cut
             out
             without
             hands
             ,
             which
             smote
             the
             Image
             upon
             the
             Feet
             that
             were
             part
             of
             Iron
             ,
             and
             part
             of
             Clay
             ,
             and
             brake
             them
             to
             pieces
             :
             And
             the
             stone
             which
             smote
             the
             Image
             ,
             became
             a
             great
             Mountain
             ,
             and
             filled
             the
             whole
             Earth
             .
             This
             Stone
             Daniel
             doth
             expound
             ,
             
               vers
               .
               44.
            
             to
             be
             the
             Kingdom
             that
             never
             shall
             be
             destroyed
             ,
             and
             is
             the
             Kingdom
             of
             Christ
             :
             for
             the
             Kingdom
             of
             Christ
             began
             then
             to
             fill
             the
             whole
             Earth
             by
             the
             preaching
             of
             the
             Gospel
             ,
             after
             the
             overthrow
             of
             those
             Four
             Kingdoms
             ,
             as
             it
             is
             evident
             from
             the
             text
             .
             And
             truly
             ,
             about
             the
             beginning
             of
             the
             Roman
             Empire
             ,
             Christ
             was
             Born
             ,
             when
             Augustus
             did
             bear
             Rule
             ,
             &c.
             
             In
             the
             35
             year
             from
             his
             Birth
             ,
             he
             sent
             the
             holy
             Spirit
             from
             Heaven
             into
             the
             Apostles
             ,
             with
             whose
             Power
             they
             being
             endued
             ,
             did
             Preach
             the
             Gospel
             first
             at
             Ierusalem
             to
             the
             Iews
             ,
             and
             then
             afterward
             everywhere
             in
             the
             whole
             world
             to
             the
             Gentiles
             ,
             as
             the
             Book
             of
             the
             Acts
             doth
             testifie
             .
             Therefore
             ,
             sith
             at
             the
             Rising
             of
             the
             Kingdom
             of
             Christ
             ,
             and
             at
             his
             filling
             the
             whole
             Earth
             ,
             the
             Fourth
             Kingdom
             ,
             prefigured
             by
             this
             Image
             ,
             was
             already
             destroyed
             :
             and
             seeing
             also
             that
             the
             Roman
             Empire
             did
             continue
             at
             that
             time
             ;
             it
             doth
             necessarily
             follow
             ,
             That
             that
             Fourth
             Kingdom
             cannot
             any
             way
             be
             understood
             of
             the
             Empire
             of
             the
             Romans
             .
          
        
         
           
           
             Answer
             .
          
           
             That
             the
             Stone
             cut
             out
             of
             the
             Mountain
             ,
             is
             the
             Kingdom
             of
             Christ
             ;
             to
             this
             we
             freely
             Assent
             .
             But
             whereas
             Piscator
             doth
             alledge
             ,
             That
             all
             the
             Four
             Metal-Kingdoms
             did
             expire
             at
             the
             beginning
             of
             Christ's
             Kingdom
             ;
             this
             we
             Deny
             .
             Let
             us
             consider
             the
             words
             of
             the
             text
             ,
             for
             they
             must
             govern
             in
             this
             case
             .
          
           
             First
             ,
             It
             is
             said
             ,
             concerning
             the
             Kingdom
             represented
             by
             the
             Stone
             cut
             out
             of
             the
             Mountain
             ,
             
               That
               in
               the
               dayes
               of
               these
               Kingdoms
               ,
               will
               the
               God
               of
               Heaven
               raise
               up
               a
               Kingdom
               that
               never
               shall
               be
               destroyed
               .
            
             If
             this
             be
             so
             ,
             it
             will
             necessarily
             follow
             ,
             That
             the
             Roman
             must
             be
             one
             of
             the
             Four
             Metal-Kingdoms
             ;
             because
             our
             Saviour
             was
             Born
             ,
             his
             Gospel
             was
             Preached
             ,
             the
             Gentiles
             were
             brought
             to
             the
             Faith
             ,
             in
             those
             times
             when
             the
             Romans
             had
             the
             Sovereign
             Dominion
             over
             the
             Earth
             ;
             and
             particularly
             over
             those
             parts
             where
             the
             Church
             was
             seated
             .
             The
             Seleucian
             Kingdom
             was
             destroyed
             ,
             and
             all
             that
             tract
             of
             Land
             from
             Euphrates
             to
             the
             Border
             of
             Egypt
             ,
             was
             wholly
             brought
             under
             the
             power
             of
             the
             Romans
             .
             Therefore
             ,
             sith
             the
             Kingdom
             of
             Christ
             began
             in
             the
             times
             of
             the
             Roman
             ,
             the
             Roman
             must
             necessarily
             be
             the
             Fourth
             ,
             and
             the
             last
             Kingdom
             .
          
           
             Secondl●…
             ,
             It
             is
             said
             ,
             
               That
               the
               Stone
               became
               a
               great
               M●…untain
               ,
               and
               filled
               the
               whole
               Earth
               .
            
             Now
             ,
             when
             did
             thi●…
             come
             to
             pass
             ?
             The
             Kingdom
             of
             Christ
             was
             weak
             and
             small
             at
             his
             In●…arnation
             ,
             and
             in
             the
             times
             immediately
             following
             .
             But
             after
             that
             the
             Stone
             smote
             the
             Image
             upon
             the
             Feet
             and
             Toes
             ,
             after
             that
             he
             had
             broken
             the
             Roman
             Kingdom
             ,
             in
             the
             last
             and
             Antichristian
             state
             thereof
             ;
             then
             ,
             and
             not
             till
             then
             ,
             it
             became
             a
             Mountain
             ,
             and
             filled
             the
             whole
             Earth
             .
             Now
             this
             was
             not
             at
             the
             Incarnatio●…
             ,
             but
             we
             look
             for
             the
             performance
             thereof
             at
             the
             setting
             up
             of
             the
             Majestical
             Kingdom
             of
             Christ
             ;
             as
             it
             is
             plainly
             discovered
             in
             the
             whole
             Book
             of
             the
             Revelation
             .
          
           
             Thirdly
             ,
             It
             is
             said
             ,
             
               That
               the
               Stone
               smote
               the
               Image
               upon
               the
               Feet
               and
               Toes
               ,
               that
               were
               part
               of
               Iron
               ,
               and
               part
               of
               Clay
               .
            
             This
             
             sheweth
             plainly
             ,
             That
             the
             Seleucidae
             and
             the
             Lagidae
             cannot
             be
             the
             Fourth
             and
             the
             last
             Metal-Kingdom
             For
             the
             Kingdom
             of
             Christ
             did
             never
             so
             much
             as
             touch
             these
             Kingdoms
             .
             They
             were
             all
             utterly
             destroyed
             by
             the
             power
             of
             the
             Romans
             before
             the
             Coming
             of
             Christ
             in
             the
             Flesh.
             
          
           
             Now
             ,
             if
             you
             apply
             this
             to
             the
             Roman
             ,
             as
             to
             the
             last
             of
             the
             Four
             Persecuting
             Empires
             ,
             the
             Kingdom
             of
             Christ
             in
             these
             last
             times
             must
             consume
             the
             Roman
             Kingdom
             ,
             in
             the
             Antichristian
             state
             thereof
             ,
             as
             it
             is
             cleer
             by
             the
             whole
             Book
             of
             the
             Revelation
             .
          
           
             Object
             .
             
               But
               whereas
            
             Piscator
             
               doth
               alledge
               ,
               That
               the
               Kingdom
               of
               Christ
               did
               begin
               to
               fill
               the
               whole
               Earth
               ,
               when
               the
               Gentiles
               far
               and
               neer
               ,
               were
               brought
               to
               the
               Faith
               ,
               by
               the
               Preachi●…g
               of
               the
               Apostles
               .
            
          
           
             Sol.
             I
             do
             not
             Deny
             ,
             but
             that
             the
             Kingdom
             of
             Christ
             in
             the
             Apostles
             time
             did
             then
             begin
             to
             fill
             the
             Earth
             .
             For
             the
             bounds
             of
             his
             Spiritual
             Kingdom
             were
             much
             enlarged
             by
             their
             travel
             ▪
             But
             what
             is
             this
             to
             the
             purpose
             ?
             The
             text
             speaketh
             plainly
             of
             a
             Monarchical
             Kingdom
             ;
             of
             such
             a
             Kingdom
             (
             opposed
             to
             the
             Four
             Monarchies
             )
             that
             shall
             subdue
             ,
             and
             fill
             the
             whole
             Earth
             .
             The
             Apostles
             Preached
             the
             Gospel
             among
             all
             Nations
             ;
             and
             by
             name
             ,
             Saint
             Paul
             filled
             all
             places
             from
             Ierusalem
             to
             Illyricum
             ,
             with
             the
             Gospel
             of
             Christ.
             Yet
             nevertheless
             ,
             for
             all
             this
             large
             spreading
             of
             the
             Gospel
             ,
             there
             was
             no
             destruction
             of
             the
             Roman
             Kingdom
             .
             In
             those
             times
             ,
             the
             Romans
             continued
             their
             Power
             and
             Tyranny
             ,
             though
             the
             Gospel
             of
             Christ
             was
             Preached
             everywhere
             .
             But
             when
             the
             stone
             shall
             become
             a
             Mountain
             ,
             and
             fill
             the
             whole
             Earth
             ;
             before
             this
             can
             be
             done
             ,
             the
             Stone
             must
             strike
             the
             Image
             upon
             the
             Feet
             and
             Toes
             thereof
             .
             The
             Tyranny
             of
             the
             Roman
             Kingdom
             must
             be
             broken
             by
             the
             Power
             of
             the
             Gospel
             ,
             before
             the
             Kingdom
             of
             Christ
             can
             be
             set
             up
             in
             the
             Throne
             .
             Now
             ,
             if
             we
             apply
             these
             things
             to
             the
             times
             ,
             we
             shall
             find
             that
             the
             Church
             was
             in
             perpetual
             conflict
             with
             the
             Empire
             of
             the
             Romans
             for
             300
             year●…
             together
             ,
             in
             all
             the
             times
             of
             the
             Ten
             first
             Persecutions
             .
             Now
             it
             is
             said
             of
             the
             Primitive
             Mareyrs
             ,
             That
             they
             overcame
             him
             ;
             to
             wit
             ,
             The
             Persecuting
             Empire
             ,
             
             
               by
               the
               Blood
               of
               the
               Lamb
               ,
               and
               by
               the
               Word
               of
               their
               Testimony
               ;
               and
               they
               loved
               not
               their
               lives
               unto
               the
               death
               ,
            
             Rev.
             12.
             11.
             
             By
             the
             scope
             of
             the
             place
             it
             is
             clear
             ,
             That
             the
             Lord
             Christ
             by
             his
             Power
             ,
             and
             his
             Martyrs
             by
             their
             Sufferings
             ,
             both
             together
             ,
             did
             break
             the
             Tyranny
             of
             that
             Persecuting
             Empire
             .
             It
             is
             said
             of
             them
             ,
             
               That
               they
               overcame
               him
            
             ,
             to
             wit
             ,
             
               the
               Dragon
               with
               Seven
               Heads
               and
               Ten
               Horns
               .
            
             The
             Saints
             by
             their
             Sufferings
             did
             overcome
             him
             ;
             and
             so
             the
             Gospel
             was
             set
             up
             as
             the
             regent
             Law.
             
               The
               Woman
               brought
               forth
               a
               Man-Child
               that
               should
               Rule
               all
               Nations
               with
               a
               Rod
               of
               Iron
               .
            
             This
             is
             meant
             of
             the
             Reign
             of
             Christ
             upon
             the
             Earth
             ;
             and
             there
             were
             some
             beginnings
             thereof
             in
             the
             times
             of
             
               Constantine
               the
               Great
            
             ,
             as
             appears
             by
             the
             scope
             of
             the
             text
             ,
             vers
             .
             9
             ,
             10
             ,
             11.
             
          
           
             Now
             ,
             whereas
             it
             came
             to
             pass
             afterwards
             ,
             That
             the
             Christian
             Empire
             was
             broken
             to
             pieces
             by
             the
             coming
             down
             of
             the
             barbarous
             Nations
             out
             of
             the
             North
             ,
             and
             Ten
             Kings
             rose
             out
             of
             the
             Ruines
             of
             the
             Empire
             aforesaid
             ;
             Then
             also
             ,
             according
             to
             the
             Prophecies
             ,
             a
             New
             Persecuting
             Empire
             was
             Erected
             ,
             to
             try
             the
             Faith
             and
             Patience
             of
             the
             Saints
             .
             This
             in
             the
             whole
             Prophecie
             is
             called
             ,
             The
             Antichristian
             Empire
             ,
             or
             ,
             The
             Roman
             Kingdom
             in
             the
             last
             Edition
             thereof
             .
             Now
             ,
             this
             Kingdom
             also
             shall
             be
             broken
             in
             pieces
             by
             the
             Preaching
             of
             the
             eternal
             Gospel
             ;
             the
             Nations
             shall
             be
             undeceived
             ,
             and
             the
             Gospel
             shall
             be
             set
             up
             as
             the
             regent
             Law
             ,
             as
             it
             began
             to
             be
             set
             up
             in
             the
             times
             of
             
               Constantine
               the
               Great
            
             ,
             but
             was
             hi●…dered
             afterward
             .
             But
             now
             it
             shall
             be
             far
             otherwise
             :
             The
             Kingdom
             of
             Christ
             shall
             be
             so
             set
             up
             ,
             after
             the
             breaking
             in
             pieces
             of
             the
             Toes
             and
             Feet
             of
             the
             Image
             ,
             after
             the
             wearing
             out
             of
             the
             Antichristian
             Tyranny
             ,
             that
             he
             shall
             Reign
             1000
             years
             .
             From
             all
             that
             hath
             been
             said
             ,
             it
             is
             clear
             ,
             That
             we
             must
             look
             after
             the
             Monarchical
             beginning
             of
             the
             Kingdom
             of
             Christ
             according
             to
             the
             Prophecies
             .
             Of
             this
             we
             shall
             have
             some
             occasion
             to
             speak
             more
             largely
             afterward
             .
          
           
             Now
             let
             us
             consider
             what
             is
             Alledged
             by
             Polanus
             .
          
        
         
           
           
             Polanus
             .
          
           
             The
             Scope
             of
             Daniel
             ,
             is
             ,
             To
             speak
             of
             those
             great
             Empires
             only
             that
             should
             stand
             up
             one
             after
             another
             till
             Christ
             ,
             in
             those
             Territories
             where
             the
             Babylonian
             began
             .
             Now
             the
             Roman
             had
             nothing
             that
             the
             Babylonian
             had
             ,
             but
             only
             Syria
             and
             Egypt
             :
             He
             had
             nothing
             that
             the
             Persian
             had
             ,
             more
             than
             the
             Babylonian
             ,
             but
             Asia
             the
             Less
             .
             Therefore
             the
             Roman
             is
             not
             to
             be
             accounted
             one
             of
             the
             Four
             Empires
             .
          
        
         
           
             Answer
             .
          
           
             It
             is
             true
             that
             the
             Roman
             went
             no
             further
             Eastward
             than
             the
             River
             Euphrates
             ,
             neither
             did
             he
             possess
             many
             of
             those
             Eastern
             Countries
             which
             were
             formerly
             under
             the
             Babylonian
             and
             Persian
             Monarchies
             .
             But
             what
             of
             all
             this
             ?
             It
             is
             enough
             for
             our
             purpose
             ,
             That
             he
             possessed
             all
             those
             Countries
             on
             this
             side
             Euphrates
             ,
             which
             were
             the
             Continent
             of
             the
             Church
             .
             In
             the
             Churches
             Continent
             the
             Roman
             was
             the
             Successor
             of
             the
             
               Babylonian
               ,
               Persian
            
             ,
             and
             Graecian
             Empires
             .
             For
             look
             what
             Monarchy
             the
             Babylonian
             began
             over
             the
             People
             of
             the
             Jews
             ,
             the
             same
             was
             continued
             by
             the
             Romans
             ,
             when
             their
             time
             came
             to
             have
             the
             Monarchy
             over
             the
             Church
             .
             If
             this
             be
             a
             truth
             ,
             we
             may
             quickly
             Answer
             the
             Objection
             of
             Dr
             Willet
             ,
             which
             is
             much
             to
             the
             same
             effect
             .
             These
             are
             his
             words
             :
             
               This
               Vision
               of
               an
               humane
               Image
               ,
               signified
               one
               united
               Body
               ,
               consisting
               of
               divers
               Kingdoms
               ,
               one
               succeeding
               another
               ,
               as
               the
               parts
               of
               the
               Body
               do
               joyn
               one
               to
               another
               ,
               the
               Beginning
               and
               Head
               of
               which
               was
               Babylon
               .
            
             And
             then
             he
             addeth
             ,
             
               The
               Roman
               Monarchy
               being
               distant
               at
               least
            
             1200
             
               miles
               ,
               could
               not
               make
               one
               united
               Body
               with
               it
               .
               Therefore
               that
               Monarchy
               cannot
               here
               fitly
               be
               understood
               .
            
             By
             the
             same
             Reason
             he
             might
             Argue
             ,
             The
             Graecian
             Kingdom
             being
             distant
             many
             miles
             from
             the
             Babylonian
             and
             Persian
             ,
             therefore
             it
             cannot
             be
             compacted
             into
             the
             same
             Image
             of
             Persecuting
             Empires
             .
             But
             this
             is
             not
             the
             Point
             which
             we
             are
             on
             .
             For
             we
             are
             not
             to
             measure
             the
             Monarchies
             by
             the
             Longitude
             ,
             Latitude
             ,
             and
             Distance
             of
             place
             ▪
             but
             by
             the
             same
             Succession
             of
             Monarchical
             Dominion
             over
             the
             Churches
             Territories
             ▪
             
             In
             this
             sense
             ,
             the
             Roman
             may
             be
             placed
             in
             the
             same
             Image
             of
             Monarchical
             Empires
             ,
             as
             long
             as
             he
             did
             continue
             the
             same
             Sovereignty
             over
             the
             Church
             which
             the
             Babylonian
             began
             .
             And
             therefore
             when
             the
             Scriptures
             do
             call
             the
             City
             of
             
               Rome
               by
               the
               Name
               of
               Babylon
               ,
            
             it
             is
             a
             very
             proper
             Expression
             ;
             for
             she
             did
             continue
             the
             same
             Tyranny
             over
             the
             Saints
             which
             the
             Babylonians
             began
             .
             And
             it
             is
             clear
             also
             ,
             That
             the
             same
             Empire
             did
             Devolve
             and
             Descend
             upon
             the
             Romans
             in
             the
             Fourth
             Alteration
             and
             Change
             of
             State.
             But
             let
             us
             proceed
             .
          
        
         
           
             Polanus
             .
          
           
             At
             the
             Coming
             of
             Christ
             ,
             the
             Kingdom
             represented
             by
             the
             Feet
             and
             Toes
             ,
             was
             ruined
             ;
             but
             so
             was
             not
             the
             Kingdom
             of
             the
             Romans
             ,
             which
             was
             not
             compleat
             till
             the
             time
             of
             Trajan
             .
             Therefore
             the
             Roman
             is
             not
             the
             Fourth
             Kingdom
             .
          
        
         
           
             Answer
             .
          
           
             I
             have
             already
             touched
             this
             Point
             in
             my
             Answer
             to
             Piscator
             ;
             but
             because
             I
             see
             many
             Excellent
             Expositors
             build
             upon
             this
             Principle
             ,
             That
             the
             Kingdom
             of
             Christ
             Beginneth
             at
             the
             Dissolution
             of
             all
             Four
             Metal-Kingdoms
             ,
             and
             that
             this
             Dissolution
             was
             at
             his
             Incarnation
             :
             Because
             they
             build
             strongly
             upon
             this
             ,
             we
             will
             bestow
             the
             more
             pains
             to
             enquire
             into
             the
             matter
             .
             To
             the
             clearing
             of
             this
             ,
             let
             us
             look
             to
             that
             which
             the
             text
             naturally
             affordeth
             ,
             and
             then
             let
             us
             make
             Application
             .
             From
             the
             Second
             Chapter
             of
             Daniel
             ,
             we
             gather
             these
             Four
             Observations
             .
          
           
             First
             ,
             Concerning
             the
             time
             of
             the
             Beginning
             of
             the
             Kingdom
             of
             Christ
             ,
             it
             must
             be
             in
             the
             latter
             times
             .
             For
             though
             it
             is
             only
             said
             ,
             
               That
               in
               the
               dayes
               of
               these
               Kingdoms
            
             (
             speaking
             indefinitely
             )
             
               shall
               the
               God
               of
               Heaven
               raise
               up
               a
               Kingdom
               ,
               that
               never
               shall
               be
               destroyed
               :
            
             yet
             in
             the
             scope
             of
             the
             Vision
             ,
             it
             is
             implyed
             to
             be
             in
             the
             times
             of
             the
             last
             Metal-Kingdom
             .
             For
             ,
             according
             to
             the
             Order
             of
             the
             Vision
             ,
             Nebuchadnezzar
             first
             saw
             the
             Head
             of
             Gold
             ,
             then
             the
             Breast
             of
             Silver
             ,
             the
             Belly
             and
             Thighs
             of
             Brass
             ,
             the
             Legs
             of
             Iron
             ,
             the
             Feet
             and
             Toes
             ,
             part
             of
             Iron
             ,
             and
             part
             of
             Clay
             .
             And
             then
             after
             some
             consideration
             ,
             
             he
             saw
             a
             Stone
             cut
             out
             of
             the
             Mountain
             ,
             that
             smote
             the
             Image
             upon
             his
             Feet
             .
             Therefore
             the
             Beginnings
             of
             the
             Kingdom
             of
             Christ
             were
             in
             the
             latter
             times
             ,
             when
             the
             Image
             was
             in
             its
             last
             and
             lowest
             Region
             .
             At
             leastwise
             ,
             the
             eminent
             operation
             of
             Christ's
             Kingdom
             was
             upon
             the
             Feet
             and
             Toes
             of
             the
             Image
             .
          
           
             Secondly
             ,
             We
             are
             to
             observe
             ,
             That
             the
             Kingdom
             of
             Christ
             was
             small
             in
             the
             beginning
             :
             it
             was
             a
             little
             Stone
             cut
             out
             of
             the
             Mountain
             :
             For
             look
             what
             difference
             there
             is
             betwixt
             a
             little
             Stone
             and
             a
             great
             Mountain
             ;
             so
             the
             same
             difference
             is
             betwixt
             the
             Kingdom
             of
             Christ
             when
             it
             began
             ,
             and
             that
             Kingdom
             when
             it self
             became
             a
             Mountain
             and
             filled
             the
             Earth
             .
             Calvin
             upon
             the
             place
             speaketh
             very
             well
             :
             
               Propheta
               admonet
               exordia
               Regni
               Christi
               fore
               contempta
               .
               The
               Prophet
               doth
               well
               admonish
               us
               ,
               the
               beginnings
               of
               the
               Kingdom
               of
               Christ
               to
               be
               weak
               and
               contemptible
               .
            
          
           
             Thirdly
             ,
             We
             are
             to
             Note
             also
             ,
             That
             the
             progress
             of
             this
             Kingdom
             was
             from
             small
             beginnings
             :
             First
             ,
             it
             was
             a
             Stone
             cut
             out
             of
             the
             Mountain
             ,
             and
             then
             by
             degrees
             in
             time
             (
             though
             the
             space
             of
             time
             is
             not
             expressed
             in
             the
             text
             )
             it
             became
             a
             Mountain
             ,
             and
             filled
             the
             Earth
             .
          
           
             Fourthly
             ,
             Concerning
             the
             means
             of
             the
             encrease
             ,
             how
             it
             came
             to
             that
             plentitude
             ,
             or
             fulness
             of
             Power
             .
             
               It
               smote
               upon
               the
               Feet
               and
               Toes
               of
               the
               Image
               ,
               and
               so
               the
               Iron
               ,
               the
               Clay
               ,
               ●…he
               Brass
               ,
               the
               Silver
               ,
               the
               Gold
               ,
               were
               broken
               all
               together
               ,
               and
               the
               Stone
               became
               a
               Mountain
               and
               filled
               the
               Earth
               ,
            
             vers
             .
             34
             ,
             35.
             
          
           
             These
             are
             the
             Four
             Observations
             drawn
             from
             the
             Second
             Chapter
             :
             Now
             let
             us
             apply
             our selves
             to
             Polanus
             ,
             and
             other
             Interpreters
             of
             that
             way
             .
             And
             here
             we
             agree
             ,
             That
             the
             Kingdom
             of
             Christ
             did
             in
             some
             sense
             begin
             at
             his
             Incarnation
             .
             And
             this
             is
             one
             chief
             Argument
             to
             prove
             the
             Roman
             to
             be
             the
             Fourth
             Kingdom
             ;
             because
             the
             Lord
             Christ
             came
             in
             the
             Flesh
             ,
             and
             his
             Gospel
             was
             Preached
             ,
             and
             many
             Churches
             were
             gathered
             ,
             when
             the
             Romans
             did
             bear
             rule
             .
             But
             our
             Question
             is
             ,
             
               Whether
               did
               the
               Kingdom
               of
               Christ
               begin
               as
               the
               Fifth
               Monarchy
               ,
               as
               a
               Mountain
               that
               did
               fill
               the
               Earth
               ?
            
             In
             this
             sense
             he
             
             cannot
             be
             said
             to
             begin
             in
             that
             fulness
             and
             amplitude
             of
             power
             at
             the
             Incarnation
             .
             For
             ,
             from
             the
             scope
             of
             the
             text
             it
             is
             plain
             ,
             That
             the
             Kingdom
             of
             Christ
             was
             small
             in
             the
             beginning
             :
             Secondly
             ,
             That
             it
             grew
             by
             degrees
             :
             Thirdly
             ,
             That
             the
             means
             of
             the
             encrease
             was
             by
             wearing
             out
             the
             Fourth
             Kingdom
             .
             
               The
               Stone
               smote
               the
               Image
               upon
               the
               Feet
               and
               Toes
               ,
               and
               so
               became
               a
               Mountain
               ,
               and
               filled
               the
               Earth
               .
            
             If
             we
             apply
             this
             to
             the
             event
             ,
             The
             Kingdom
             of
             Christ
             began
             when
             the
             Romans
             did
             bear
             rule
             .
             His
             Kingdom
             was
             small
             in
             the
             beginning
             ;
             but
             by
             degrees
             ,
             first
             by
             wearing
             out
             Rome
             Imperial
             ,
             and
             after
             that
             ,
             by
             wearing
             out
             Rome
             Papal
             ,
             this
             Kingdom
             of
             Christ
             shall
             come
             to
             the
             fulness
             of
             all
             Monarchical
             power
             over
             the
             whole
             Earth
             .
          
           
             Now
             on
             the
             contrary
             ;
             Let
             us
             suppose
             ,
             That
             the
             Seleucidae
             and
             the
             Lagidae
             joyntly
             ,
             or
             the
             Seleucidae
             alone
             ,
             do
             make
             the
             Fourth
             Metal-Kingdom
             .
             For
             so
             
               Iunius
               ,
               Broughton
               ,
               Piscator
               ,
               Polanus
               ,
               Hayne
               ,
               Willet
               ,
            
             and
             others
             ,
             will
             have
             it
             .
             Upon
             their
             Grounds
             ,
             I
             Demand
             ,
             First
             ,
             How
             did
             the
             Kingdom
             of
             Christ
             begin
             in
             the
             times
             of
             the
             Four
             Metal-Kingdoms
             ,
             if
             the
             Seleucidae
             and
             the
             Lagidae
             do
             make
             the
             Fourth
             Metal-Kingdom
             ?
             Secondly
             ,
             Seeing
             the
             Kingdom
             of
             Christ
             did
             begin
             as
             a
             little
             Stone
             cut
             out
             of
             the
             Mountain
             ,
             How
             do
             they
             prove
             that
             this
             Kingdom
             did
             come
             to
             that
             small
             beginning
             in
             the
             times
             of
             the
             Seleucidae
             and
             the
             Lagidae
             ?
             Thirdly
             ,
             Seeing
             the
             Kingdom
             of
             Christ
             did
             encrease
             by
             decrees
             in
             the
             duration
             of
             the
             Metal-Kingdoms
             ,
             How
             did
             it
             encrease
             in
             the
             duration
             of
             the
             times
             of
             the
             Seleucidae
             and
             the
             Lagidae
             ?
             Fourthly
             ,
             Seeing
             the
             means
             of
             the
             encrease
             was
             by
             the
             wearing
             out
             of
             the
             Fourth
             Metal-Kingdom
             ,
             (
             
               the
               Stone
               smote
               the
               Image
               upon
               the
               Feet
               ,
            
             )
             How
             did
             the
             Kingdom
             of
             Christ
             wear
             out
             the
             Dominions
             of
             the
             Seleucidae
             and
             Lagidae
             ?
             Were
             they
             not
             totally
             destroyed
             some
             years
             before
             the
             Coming
             of
             Christ
             in
             the
             Flesh
             ,
             by
             the
             means
             of
             the
             Romans
             ?
          
           
             All
             these
             things
             put
             together
             ,
             do
             weaken
             that
             Principle
             of
             the
             Dissolution
             of
             all
             the
             Four
             Metal-Kingdoms
             at
             the
             Coming
             of
             Christ
             in
             the
             Flesh
             ;
             and
             that
             the
             Kingdom
             of
             Christ
             did
             begin
             at
             the
             Incarnation
             ,
             in
             the
             fulness
             of
             Monarchical
             
             Power
             .
             Now
             ,
             because
             Mr
             Hayne
             *
             hath
             laboured
             very
             much
             in
             this
             Point
             ,
             we
             will
             take
             his
             Arguments
             into
             Consideration
             .
          
        
         
           
             Mr
             Hayne
             .
          
           
             When
             Herod
             ,
             Pilate
             ,
             and
             the
             Iewish
             Rulers
             rose
             up
             against
             Iesus
             Christ
             ,
             God
             set
             him
             to
             be
             his
             King
             on
             Mount
             Sion
             ,
             and
             gave
             him
             so
             Eminent
             a
             Kingdom
             ,
             that
             to
             it
             all
             Kings
             ,
             Iudges
             ,
             and
             People
             must
             submit
             ,
             or
             else
             be
             crushed
             with
             an
             Iron-Scepter
             .
             But
             Herod
             ,
             Pilate
             ,
             and
             the
             Rulers
             of
             the
             Iews
             ,
             rose
             up
             against
             Iesus
             Christ
             1500
             years
             ago
             ,
             and
             more
             .
             Therefore
             God
             set
             up
             Christ
             his
             Ki●…g
             on
             Mount
             Sion
             ,
             and
             gave
             him
             a
             Kingdom
             so
             Eminent
             1500
             years
             ago
             ,
             and
             more
             .
          
        
         
           
             Answer
             .
          
           
             For
             the
             beginning
             of
             the
             Kingdom
             of
             Christ
             1500
             years
             ago
             ,
             I
             yield
             that
             this
             is
             true
             according
             to
             the
             right
             meaning
             of
             the
             Scriptures
             .
             But
             the
             great
             Question
             is
             ,
             Whether
             the
             Monarchical
             Kingdom
             of
             Christ
             ,
             when
             the
             Saints
             of
             the
             most
             High
             shall
             become
             the
             Monarchical
             People
             ,
             whether
             did
             that
             Kingdom
             begin
             1500
             years
             ago
             ,
             yea
             or
             no
             ?
             I
             do
             call
             that
             the
             Monarchical
             Kingdom
             of
             Christ
             (
             to
             speak
             cleerly
             in
             the
             Point
             )
             not
             when
             he
             hath
             a
             power
             in
             himself
             greater
             than
             any
             Earthly
             Dominion
             ;
             not
             when
             by
             the
             merit
             of
             his
             death
             ,
             and
             donation
             of
             his
             Father
             ,
             he
             beginneth
             to
             have
             right
             to
             all
             Earthly
             Kingdoms
             ,
             for
             this
             was
             given
             to
             him
             at
             his
             Ascension
             :
             But
             by
             the
             Monarchical
             Kingdom
             I
             understand
             ,
             when
             the
             Lord
             Christ
             ,
             after
             the
             several
             and
             respective
             times
             of
             the
             Tyrannical
             Kingdoms
             of
             this
             world
             ,
             according
             to
             the
             free
             Dispensation
             of
             his
             Father
             ,
             doth
             actually
             take
             into
             his
             Possession
             the
             Sovereignty
             over
             the
             Earth
             ,
             and
             that
             his
             Gospel
             cometh
             to
             be
             the
             regent
             Law
             over
             the
             Nations
             .
             Now
             ,
             this
             Monarchical
             Kingdom
             I
             deny
             that
             it
             began
             1500
             years
             ago
             .
             It
             is
             not
             fully
             begun
             as
             yet
             ,
             though
             we
             have
             some
             beginnings
             thereof
             by
             the
             Preaching
             of
             the
             eternal
             Gospel
             by
             Luther
             and
             those
             that
             follow
             .
             The
             scope
             of
             the
             Spirit
             in
             the
             Revelation
             is
             to
             shew
             that
             this
             Kingdom
             must
             begin
             at
             the
             end
             of
             the
             
             Dominion
             of
             the
             Beast
             ,
             or
             the
             Roman
             Kingdom
             of
             the
             latest
             Edition
             .
             But
             to
             come
             to
             particulars
             :
             It
             is
             mentioned
             ,
             Rev.
             19.
             vers
             .
             1
             ,
             2
             ,
             3
             ,
             4
             ,
             5.
             
             That
             when
             the
             Saints
             did
             sing
             their
             Halelujah
             at
             the
             Judgement
             upon
             the
             great
             Whore
             ,
             then
             a
             voyce
             was
             heard
             ,
             
               The
               Lord
               God
               Omnipotent
               Reigneth
            
             ,
             vers
             .
             6.
             
             Here
             I
             demand
             ,
             Did
             not
             the
             Lord
             God
             Omnipotent
             Reign
             before
             ?
             He
             did
             not
             Reign
             before
             ,
             in
             the
             sense
             of
             that
             text
             ▪
             For
             the
             great
             Who●…e
             had
             Ruled
             all
             the
             world
             ,
             and
             had
             corrupted
             the
             Earth
             by
             her
             Fornications
             :
             all
             was
             under
             her
             Power
             ,
             and
             she
             spilt
             the
             Blood
             of
             the
             Martyrs
             at
             her
             own
             pleasure
             .
             But
             at
             her
             destruction
             the
             Lord
             Christ
             did
             begin
             to
             Reign
             ,
             and
             that
             was
             the
             time
             of
             the
             marriage
             of
             the
             Lamb
             ,
             of
             the
             glory
             of
             the
             Gospel-Church
             ,
             when
             the
             Lamb's
             Wife
             had
             made
             her self
             ready
             ,
             vers
             .
             7.
             
             So
             it
             is
             said
             ,
             Rev.
             11.
             15.
             
             
               The
               Kingdoms
               of
               this
               world
               are
               become
               the
               Kingdoms
               of
               our
               Lord
               ,
               and
               of
               his
               Christ
               ;
               and
               he
               shall
               Reign
               for
               ever
               and
               ever
               .
            
             Here
             I
             demand
             ,
             Were
             not
             the
             Kingdoms
             of
             this
             world
             the
             Kingdoms
             of
             Christ
             before
             the
             sound
             of
             the
             Seventh
             Trumpet
             ,
             before
             the
             fall
             of
             the
             great
             City
             ,
             before
             that
             time
             when
             the
             Kingdom
             of
             the
             Beast
             began
             to
             be
             destroyed
             ?
             I
             Answer
             ,
             They
             were
             his
             Kingdoms
             jure
             by
             Right
             ,
             they
             were
             his
             by
             vertue
             of
             Purchase
             1500
             years
             ago
             ,
             and
             more
             ;
             but
             he
             entered
             not
             into
             the
             actual
             Possession
             till
             the
             destruction
             of
             the
             Tyrannical
             Kingdoms
             of
             this
             world
             .
             He
             received
             Institution
             ▪
             
               &
               jus
               ad
               rem
            
             ,
             above
             1500
             years
             ago
             ;
             but
             he
             had
             not
             In●…uction
             
               &
               jus
               in
               re
            
             ,
             till
             the
             destruction
             of
             the
             Beast's
             Kingdom
             .
             And
             therefore
             these
             words
             are
             specially
             and
             Emphatically
             added
             ,
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             
               Thou
               hast
               taken
               to
               thy self
               thy
               great
               Power
               ,
               and
               hast
               Reigned
               .
            
             In
             which
             words
             the
             holy
             Spirit
             doth
             insinuate
             ,
             That
             before
             the
             sound
             of
             the
             Seventh
             Trumpet
             ,
             the
             Lord
             Christ
             by
             his
             own
             free
             and
             voluntary
             permission
             did
             suffer
             the
             Beast
             ,
             and
             other
             Monarchical
             States
             to
             encroach
             upon
             him
             ,
             and
             to
             detain
             his
             Power
             for
             1260
             years
             .
             At
             the
             end
             of
             this
             time
             he
             doth
             resume
             and
             take
             the
             Power
             to
             himself
             alone
             .
             This
             is
             the
             scope
             of
             the
             Prophecie
             .
             And
             for
             the
             Argument
             of
             Mr
             Hayne
             ,
             That
             Christ
             was
             an
             established
             King
             upon
             Mount
             Sion
             ,
             when
             Herod
             and
             
             
               Pontius
               Pilate
            
             conspired
             against
             him
             ;
             I
             will
             further
             adde
             ,
             That
             in
             those
             times
             when
             the
             Beast
             ruled
             over
             all
             ,
             and
             when
             all
             worshipped
             his
             Image
             ,
             and
             received
             his
             Mark
             ,
             in
             those
             very
             times
             
               the
               Lamb
               stood
               upon
               Mount
               Sion
               ,
               and
               with
               him
            
             144000
             ,
             
               having
               their
               Fathers
               Name
               written
               in
               their
               forehead
               ,
            
             chap.
             14.
             vers
             .
             1.
             
             Now
             ,
             I
             believe
             ,
             none
             that
             understand
             the
             scope
             of
             the
             Prophecie
             will
             affirm
             ,
             That
             Christ
             was
             stated
             in
             his
             Monarchical
             Kingdom
             in
             all
             the
             times
             of
             the
             Reign
             of
             Antichrist
             upon
             the
             Earth
             .
             To
             speak
             properly
             ,
             These
             were
             rather
             the
             times
             of
             the
             Patience
             of
             the
             Saints
             ,
             and
             of
             the
             Exinanition
             and
             concealment
             of
             the
             Glory
             of
             Christ's
             Kingdom
             .
             The
             Kings
             did
             agree
             to
             give
             their
             Power
             to
             the
             Beast
             ,
             and
             must
             do
             so
             till
             the
             Word
             of
             God
             be
             fulfilled
             .
             When
             this
             is
             done
             ,
             the
             Beast
             shall
             be
             destroyed
             ,
             his
             Body
             shall
             be
             given
             to
             the
             burning
             Fire
             ;
             and
             then
             the
             Lord
             Christ
             shall
             begin
             to
             Reign
             .
          
        
         
           
             Mr
             Hayne
             .
          
           
             It
             must
             be
             granted
             ,
             That
             Christ's
             Kingdom
             when
             it
             was
             set
             up
             ,
             was
             more
             powerful
             than
             Romes
             ,
             which
             to
             this
             day
             never
             could
             (
             though
             assisted
             by
             the
             Gates
             of
             Hell
             )
             either
             by
             Might
             or
             Policy
             ,
             prevail
             against
             Christ's
             Kingdom
             .
          
        
         
           
             Answer
             .
          
           
             It
             is
             true
             ,
             That
             the
             Kingdom
             of
             Christ
             is
             in
             it self
             stronger
             than
             any
             Monarchical
             Kingdom
             whatsoever
             .
             But
             
               the
               great
               Question
               is
            
             ,
             Whether
             it
             be
             his
             mind
             at
             all
             times
             to
             e●…ert
             and
             put
             forth
             his
             Power
             ?
             If
             this
             had
             been
             his
             mind
             ,
             why
             did
             he
             not
             dash
             in
             pieces
             the
             Babylonian
             ,
             the
             Persian
             ,
             the
             Graecian
             ,
             and
             the
             Roman
             Powers
             as
             soon
             as
             they
             had
             any
             Being
             ?
             Why
             had
             they
             any
             liberty
             given
             ▪
             them
             to
             Afflict
             the
             Saints
             ?
             In
             these
             Variations
             and
             Changes
             of
             Empire
             ,
             the
             Lord
             Christ
             would
             not
             put
             out
             his
             Power
             till
             the
             times
             of
             his
             Reign
             upon
             the
             Earth
             should
             begin
             .
             Again
             ,
             We
             do
             not
             absolutely
             and
             simply
             affirm
             ,
             That
             the
             Lord
             Christ
             did
             not
             exert
             and
             put
             out
             his
             Power
             in
             the
             times
             of
             the
             Metal-Kingdoms
             :
             For
             ,
             he
             armed
             his
             Saints
             with
             Faith
             and
             Patience
             ,
             and
             made
             them
             
             able
             to
             Suffer
             .
             But
             this
             we
             affirm
             ,
             He
             did
             not
             put
             forth
             his
             Power
             to
             the
             destruction
             of
             these
             Kingdoms
             in
             their
             Tyranny
             and
             Rage
             against
             the
             Church
             .
             When
             the
             Babylonian
             stood
             in
             all
             greatness
             of
             Power
             ,
             it
             could
             not
             overcome
             the
             Spirit
             of
             Christ
             in
             the
             Three
             Children
             .
             And
             when
             the
             Ten
             Horns
             did
             agree
             together
             to
             give
             their
             Power
             to
             the
             Beast
             ,
             
               The
               Lamb
               did
               overcome
               them
               ,
               for
               he
               is
               Lord
               of
               Lords
               ,
               and
               King
               of
               Kings
               ;
               and
               they
               that
               are
               with
               him
               ,
               are
               called
               ,
               and
               chosen
               ,
               and
               faithful
               ,
               chap.
            
             17.
             vers
             .
             14.
             
             It
             is
             manifest
             then
             ,
             That
             the
             Lord
             Christ
             did
             put
             out
             his
             Power
             to
             hold
             up
             the
             Faith
             of
             the
             Saints
             ,
             and
             to
             make
             them
             able
             to
             Suffer
             .
             But
             for
             the
             present
             he
             did
             not
             break
             those
             Tyrannical
             Empires
             in
             pieces
             ,
             to
             make
             them
             submit
             to
             the
             Laws
             of
             the
             Gospel
             .
             He
             did
             not
             ,
             nor
             will
             not
             exert
             and
             send
             forth
             that
             part
             of
             Power
             ,
             till
             the
             time
             and
             season
             doth
             come
             when
             his
             Monarchical
             Kingdom
             shall
             begin
             .
             The
             Apostle
             saith
             ,
             1
             
               Tim.
               cap.
               6.
               vers
               .
               15.
               
               In
               his
               times
               he
               will
               shew
               who
               is
               the
               
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
              
               ,
               the
               only
               Potentate
               ,
               the
               King
               of
               Kings
               ,
               and
               the
               Lord
               of
               Lords
               .
            
             He
             will
             set
             forth
             his
             Monarchical
             Sovereignty
             and
             Potency
             ;
             but
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             
               in
               his
               own
               times
            
             ,
             in
             that
             season
             which
             the
             Father
             hath
             appointed
             for
             his
             Sovereignty
             and
             Dominion
             .
             Now
             that
             time
             ,
             according
             to
             the
             Scriptures
             ,
             is
             at
             the
             end
             of
             the
             Metal-Kingdoms
             ,
             and
             more
             particularly
             at
             the
             end
             of
             the
             Antichristian
             Kingdom
             .
             But
             let
             us
             proceed
             .
          
        
         
           
             Mr
             Hayne
             .
          
           
             Christ
             in
             S.
             Iohn's
             time
             was
             the
             Prince
             of
             the
             Kings
             of
             the
             Earth
             ,
             
               Rev.
               1.
               5.
            
             
             Had
             all
             things
             given
             him
             by
             his
             Father
             ,
             
               Luk.
               10.
               22.
            
             
             All
             Power
             in
             Heaven
             and
             Earth
             was
             given
             him
             before
             his
             Ascension
             ,
             
               Matth.
               28.
               18.
            
             
             So
             that
             he
             was
             the
             Head
             of
             the
             Church
             his
             Body
             ,
             and
             in
             Place
             far
             above
             all
             Principalitie
             ,
             and
             Power
             ,
             and
             Domination
             ,
             and
             every
             Title
             and
             Name
             that
             is
             Named
             ,
             not
             in
             this
             world
             only
             ,
             but
             in
             the
             world
             to
             come
             ,
             
               Eph.
               1.
               21
               ,
               22.
            
             
             Therefore
             at
             Christ's
             being
             here
             on
             Earth
             ,
             or
             near
             unto
             that
             time
             ,
             he
             had
             an
             absolute
             and
             boundless
             Sovereignty
             far
             above
             all
             Monarchs
             that
             here●…ofore
             lived
             ,
             or
             shall
             ever
             live
             hereafter
             .
          
        
         
           
           
             Answer
             .
          
           
             To
             this
             matter
             I
             have
             spoken
             before
             ,
             scil
             That
             the
             Kingdom
             given
             to
             the
             Son
             at
             his
             Ascension
             ,
             was
             far
             greater
             than
             any
             Earthly
             Kingdoms
             whatsoever
             .
             But
             the
             Question
             here
             is
             ,
             
               Whether
               did
               he
               enter
               into
               the
               Possession
               of
               that
               Kingdom
               ,
               yea
               or
               no
               ?
            
             There
             was
             a
             Power
             given
             to
             Christ
             at
             his
             Ascension
             ,
             by
             vertue
             of
             which
             he
             was
             able
             to
             destroy
             the
             Beast
             ,
             the
             false
             Prophet
             ,
             the
             Dragon
             ,
             Gog
             and
             Magog
             ,
             Death
             and
             Hell
             ,
             and
             all
             other
             Enemies
             :
             yet
             we
             see
             that
             he
             doth
             not
             ,
             nor
             will
             not
             execute
             and
             put
             forth
             his
             Power
             in
             their
             destruction
             ,
             till
             the
             time
             appointed
             of
             the
             Father
             ,
             till
             the
             Saints
             have
             passed
             the
             time
             of
             their
             Patience
             and
             Sufferings
             under
             these
             Tyrants
             .
             But
             in
             this
             matter
             ,
             
               let
               us
               Answer
               Mr
            
             Hayne
             
               with
               Mr
            
             Hayne
             .
             In
             the
             first
             Page
             of
             his
             Book
             he
             speaketh
             of
             the
             Eternity
             of
             Christ's
             Kingdom
             ,
             and
             of
             its
             extent
             to
             the
             end
             of
             the
             world
             .
             And
             afterward
             in
             the
             second
             Page
             he
             speaketh
             as
             followeth
             :
             
               Of
               this
               Extent
            
             (
             saith
             he
             )
             
               is
               Christ's
               Kingdom
               :
               yet
               in
               regard
               that
               God
               hath
               so●…etimes
               permitted
               Satan
               and
               wicked
               men
               in
               extraordnary
               manner
               to
               domineer
               ,
               and
               to
               exercise
               their
               worldly
               and
               ungodly
               Power
               ;
               and
               that
               at
               other
               times
               he
               hath
               made
               his
               own
               Sovereignty
               by
               remarkable
               Mercies
               and
               Iudgements
               to
               appear
               ;
               God
               and
               Christ
               ,
               upon
               this
               more
               glorious
               expression
               of
               their
               more
               Over-ruling
               Might
               ,
               are
               then
               especially
               said
               to
               have
               a
               Kingdom
               and
               to
               Reign
               ,
               Because
               in
               such
               times
               their
               Glory
               and
               Majesty
               doth
               more
               manifestly
               shew
               it self
               ,
            
             Exod.
             15.
             18.
             1
             
             Sam.
             12.
             12.
             
             Obad.
             vers
             .
             21.
             
             Rev.
             12.
             10.
             
             In
             like
             manner
             I
             may
             say
             ,
             Though
             at
             the
             Ascension
             of
             Christ
             there
             was
             given
             to
             him
             a
             Kingdom
             ,
             far
             greater
             than
             all
             the
             Kingdoms
             of
             the
             world
             ;
             yet
             in
             regard
             that
             it
             hath
             pleased
             God
             the
             Father
             ,
             for
             many
             Ages
             together
             ,
             to
             permit
             Rome
             Imperial
             ,
             and
             afterwards
             Rome
             Papal
             ,
             in
             an
             extraordinary
             manner
             to
             exercise
             their
             worldly
             Power
             :
             And
             seeing
             also
             it
             is
             his
             pleasure
             ,
             after
             some
             Ages
             ,
             to
             make
             his
             Sovereignty
             known
             ,
             in
             the
             destruction
             of
             the
             Tyranny
             of
             these
             States
             ,
             and
             in
             setting
             up
             the
             Gospel
             as
             the
             regent
             Law
             ;
             
               in
               this
               respect
               the
               Reign
               of
               Christ
               may
               be
               said
               to
               begin
               at
               the
               Dissolution
               of
               the
               Fourth
               Kingdom
               ,
               in
               the
               last
               and
               Antichristian
               State
               thereof
               .
            
             
             But
             a
             little
             further
             to
             open
             the
             meaning
             of
             the
             Scriptures
             .
             When
             Michael
             and
             his
             Angels
             ,
             
               i.
               e.
            
             Christ
             and
             his
             Primitive
             Martyrs
             ,
             had
             conquered
             the
             Dragon
             ,
             presently
             and
             immediately
             upon
             the
             Conquest
             this
             Acclamation
             was
             heard
             :
             
               I
               heard
               a
               loud
               voice
               saying
               in
               Heaven
               ,
               Now
               is
               come
               Salvation
               ,
               and
               Strength
               ,
               and
               the
               Kingdom
               of
               our
               God
               ,
               and
               the
               Power
               of
               his
               Christ
               :
               for
               the
               Accuser
               of
               our
               Brethren
               is
               cast
               down
               ,
            
             Rev.
             12.
             10.
             
             Here
             I
             demand
             ,
             what
             is
             meant
             by
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             by
             
               that
               Kingdom
               of
               God
               ,
               and
               Power
               of
               Christ
               ?
            
             You
             are
             to
             Note
             ,
             That
             the
             scope
             of
             the
             place
             is
             concerning
             the
             Fight
             between
             the
             Lord
             Christ
             and
             his
             Primitive
             Martyrs
             on
             the
             one
             side
             ,
             and
             the
             Powers
             of
             the
             Persecuting
             Empire
             of
             the
             Romans
             on
             the
             otherside
             .
             After
             a
             long
             and
             terrible
             Fight
             ,
             the
             Dragon
             was
             overcome
             by
             the
             Faith
             and
             Patience
             of
             the
             Martyrs
             ,
             by
             the
             Prayer
             of
             Faith
             grounded
             upon
             the
             Promise
             of
             God.
             And
             in
             the
             times
             of
             
               Constantine
               the
               Great
            
             ,
             when
             the
             Christian
             Faith
             (
             as
             the
             best
             Expositors
             will
             have
             it
             )
             became
             
               Religio
               Imperii
               ,
               the
               Religion
               of
               the
               Empire
            
             ;
             then
             at
             that
             time
             the
             Kingdom
             of
             God
             ,
             and
             the
             Power
             of
             his
             Christ
             was
             revealed
             to
             the
             world
             .
             The
             Deliverance
             and
             Salvation
             of
             the
             Church
             from
             under
             the
             Ten
             first
             Persecutions
             was
             much
             desired
             before
             ,
             but
             it
             was
             not
             effected
             till
             the
             dayes
             of
             
               Constantine
               the
               Great
            
             .
             To
             his
             times
             then
             that
             notable
             expression
             ,
             (
             
               the
               Kingdom
               of
               our
               God
               ,
               and
               the
               Power
               of
               his
               Christ
               is
               come
            
             )
             is
             more
             immediately
             ●…o
             be
             applyed
             .
             By
             that
             which
             the
             Church
             hath
             had
             Experience
             of
             already
             ,
             we
             may
             learn
             what
             is
             the
             meaning
             of
             the
             Spirit
             ,
             when
             he
             speaketh
             of
             her
             Deliverance
             from
             under
             Antichristian
             sufferings
             ,
             and
             of
             the
             future
             Reign
             of
             Christ
             upon
             the
             Earth
             for
             1000
             years
             .
             And
             though
             there
             was
             some
             beginning
             of
             his
             Monarchical
             Reign
             in
             the
             dayes
             of
             Constantine
             ,
             yet
             that
             was
             but
             
               radiatura
               vel
               specimen
               Regni
               Christi
            
             ,
             a
             glympse
             ,
             or
             a
             hand●…el
             as
             it
             were
             of
             the
             Kingdom
             of
             Christ
             ,
             and
             of
             the
             future
             liberty
             of
             the
             Church
             that
             shall
             be
             .
             For
             that
             glory
             was
             Eclipsed
             ,
             and
             the
             Church
             fell
             under
             Persecution
             in
             all
             Antichristian
             times
             .
             When
             those
             times
             shall
             be
             fulfilled
             ,
             
               the
               Kingdoms
               of
               this
               world
               shall
               become
               the
               Kingdoms
               of
               our
               Lord
               ,
               and
               of
               his
               Christ.
            
             And
             so
             they
             shall
             continue
             and
             remain
             for
             many
             years
             ,
             
             when
             Jews
             and
             Gentiles
             ,
             both
             together
             ,
             shall
             make
             a
             glorious
             Church
             under
             Christ
             their
             Head
             and
             King
             ,
             in
             the
             latter
             dayes
             .
             After
             the
             destruction
             of
             the
             Fourth
             Beast
             ,
             it
             is
             expresly
             said
             ,
             
               The
               Dominion
               under
               the
               whole
               Heaven
               shall
               be
               given
               to
               the
               Saints
               of
               the
               most
               High
               ;
               and
               that
               this
               Dominion
               is
               to
               continue
               for
               ever
               ,
               Dan.
            
             7.
             27.
             
             Now
             then
             ,
             If
             the
             Monarchical
             Kingdom
             of
             Christ
             did
             begin
             at
             the
             Incarnation
             ,
             and
             so
             forward
             to
             continue
             for
             ever
             ,
             what
             shall
             we
             make
             of
             the
             Reign
             of
             Antichrist
             for
             so
             many
             Ages
             together
             ?
             Christ
             hath
             Reigned
             but
             a
             little
             ,
             if
             we
             look
             to
             an
             exteriour
             Reign
             .
          
        
         
           
             Mr
             Hayne
             .
          
           
             The
             Reign
             of
             Antichrist
             ,
             and
             of
             other
             Tyrants
             ,
             is
             no
             impeachment
             to
             Christ's
             absolute
             Sovereignty
             .
             The
             wickedness
             of
             Sons
             ,
             taketh
             not
             away
             the
             Fatherhood
             and
             Authority
             of
             Parents
             ;
             Nor
             a
             Debauched
             Servant's
             ill
             carriage
             ,
             argue
             his
             exemption
             from
             the
             Master
             he
             is
             subject
             to
             .
             David
             was
             ,
             and
             continued
             a
             King
             ,
             though
             Ishbosheth
             ,
             and
             Saul's
             House
             ,
             though
             Absolon
             his
             own
             Son
             ,
             though
             Sheba
             a
             Benjamite
             ,
             and
             many
             of
             Israel
             rose
             up
             against
             him
             ,
             and
             submitted
             not
             to
             his
             Scepter
             .
          
        
         
           
             Answer
             .
          
           
             We
             agree
             ,
             That
             the
             Tyrannical
             States
             ,
             and
             by
             Name
             the
             ●…ntichristian
             ,
             cannot
             be
             such
             impeachments
             to
             Christ's
             Kingdom
             ,
             so
             as
             absolutely
             and
             finally
             to
             obstruct
             it
             in
             every
             part
             and
             point
             of
             Power
             .
             We
             yield
             also
             ,
             That
             the
             Right
             belongeth
             to
             Christ
             ,
             to
             be
             Universal
             Head
             of
             the
             Church
             ,
             though
             Antichrist
             hath
             Usurped
             his
             Right
             for
             many
             Ages
             together
             .
             And
             further
             ,
             Though
             his
             Jurisdiction
             hath
             been
             detained
             by
             others
             a
             long
             time
             ,
             yet
             he
             hath
             Power
             enough
             in
             himself
             to
             recover
             it
             again
             ,
             when
             the
             time
             appointed
             for
             the
             Dominion
             of
             the
             Tyrannical
             States
             is
             once
             fulfilled
             .
             But
             to
             say
             for
             the
             present
             ,
             That
             the
             Antichristian
             State
             is
             no
             impeachment
             to
             the
             Kingdom
             of
             Christ
             ,
             this
             is
             a
             marvelous
             thing
             .
             When
             a
             Usurpet
             is
             in
             the
             place
             of
             Government
             ,
             is
             this
             no
             impeachment
             to
             the
             lawful
             power
             ?
             All
             the
             world
             did
             agree
             together
             to
             worship
             the
             Beast
             ,
             and
             to
             receive
             his
             Mark
             ;
             and
             was
             this
             
             no
             impeachment
             to
             the
             Kingdom
             of
             Christ
             ?
             The
             great
             Whore
             corrupted
             the
             Earth
             with
             her
             Fornications
             ,
             and
             the
             Kings
             of
             the
             Earth
             agreed
             together
             to
             give
             their
             Power
             to
             the
             Beast
             :
             and
             was
             this
             no
             impeachment
             to
             the
             Kingdom
             of
             Christ
             ?
             Though
             David
             was
             anointed
             King
             over
             Israel
             ,
             and
             though
             by
             vertue
             of
             his
             Unction
             he
             had
             true
             Title
             to
             the
             Kingdom
             ;
             yet
             so
             long
             as
             Saul
             and
             Ishbosheth
             did
             bear
             Rule
             ,
             the
             Kingdom
             was
             not
             his
             .
             In
             like
             manner
             ,
             Though
             the
             Lord
             Christ
             by
             suffering
             Death
             ,
             and
             by
             his
             Unction
             ,
             had
             Title
             to
             all
             the
             Kingdoms
             of
             the
             Earth
             ;
             yet
             as
             long
             as
             the
             Tyrannical
             States
             of
             this
             world
             ,
             and
             particularly
             the
             Antichristian
             Kingdom
             do
             continue
             ,
             the
             Kingdoms
             of
             this
             world
             (
             in
             that
             form
             and
             manner
             as
             they
             shall
             be
             )
             are
             not
             his
             .
             And
             therefore
             at
             the
             Fall
             of
             the
             Great
             City
             ,
             this
             expression
             is
             used
             ,
             
               The
               Kingdoms
               of
               this
               world
               are
               become
               the
               Kingdoms
               of
               our
               Lord
               ,
               and
               of
               his
               Christ.
            
             Here
             is
             a
             tacite
             implication
             ,
             That
             they
             were
             none
             of
             his
             Kingdoms
             before
             ,
             in
             that
             sense
             which
             the
             text
             intendeth
             .
          
        
         
           
             Mr
             Hayne
             .
          
           
             You
             much
             debase
             and
             vilifie
             Christ
             and
             his
             Kingdom
             ,
             in
             comparing
             it
             ,
             and
             counting
             it
             Inferiour
             to
             Earthly
             Monarchies
             and
             Kingdoms
             .
          
        
         
           
             Answer
             .
          
           
             For
             the
             Kingdom
             of
             Christ
             ,
             I
             acknowledge
             that
             it
             is
             far
             above
             Earthly
             Monarchies
             in
             largeness
             of
             Dominion
             ,
             in
             greatness
             of
             Power
             ,
             in
             time
             of
             continuance
             :
             Yet
             we
             do
             not
             vilifie
             and
             debase
             it
             ,
             by
             compa●…ing
             it
             with
             the
             Kingdoms
             of
             this
             world
             .
             We
             see
             both
             in
             Daniel
             and
             in
             the
             Revelation
             ,
             That
             the
             Kingdom
             of
             Christ
             ,
             and
             the
             Monarchies
             ,
             are
             all
             Numbered
             together
             ,
             and
             are
             set
             one
             in
             Opposition
             against
             the
             other
             ;
             the
             Kingdom
             of
             Christ
             against
             the
             Governments
             of
             this
             world
             .
          
           
             Further
             ,
             We
             have
             good
             Reason
             to
             Affirm
             ,
             That
             this
             Kingdom
             is
             not
             begun
             in
             that
             fulness
             and
             amplitude
             of
             Power
             as
             it
             shall
             have
             ;
             because
             the
             Lord
             Christ
             hath
             not
             yet
             Ruled
             
             Universally
             over
             the
             known
             parts
             of
             the
             Earth
             ,
             as
             Earthly
             Monarchs
             have
             done
             .
          
        
         
           
             Mr
             Hayne
             .
          
           
             That
             Christ
             hath
             not
             so
             Ruled
             ,
             the
             Reason
             is
             easily
             given
             .
             Soloman
             ,
             who
             excelled
             in
             Abundance
             of
             all
             outward
             and
             royal
             Accoutrements
             ,
             found
             all
             to
             be
             vanity
             of
             vanities
             ,
             and
             vexation
             of
             Spirit
             .
          
        
         
           
             Answer
             .
          
           
             That
             Christ
             hath
             not
             so
             Ruled
             ,
             is
             because
             the
             time
             of
             such
             a
             manner
             of
             Ruling
             is
             not
             yet
             come
             to
             that
             fulness
             of
             Perfection
             as
             it
             shall
             have
             .
             The
             Scriptures
             do
             everywhere
             speak
             of
             his
             Kingdom
             over
             Jews
             and
             Gentiles
             in
             the
             latter
             dayes
             :
             and
             shall
             any
             imagine
             that
             there
             shall
             be
             no
             such
             Kingdom
             ?
             And
             though
             that
             of
             Solomon
             be
             rightly
             applied
             to
             the
             Kingdoms
             of
             this
             world
             ,
             
               that
               they
               be
               all
               vanity
               of
               vanities
            
             ;
             yet
             we
             must
             take
             heed
             that
             the
             same
             things
             be
             not
             spoken
             of
             the
             Kingdom
             of
             Christ.
             For
             the
             Nature
             of
             this
             Kingdom
             ,
             we
             desire
             that
             we
             may
             not
             be
             mistaken
             .
             
               We
               do
               not
               plead
               for
               a
               Personal
            
             
             
               Reign
               ,
               nor
               a
               literal
               Resurrection
               of
               the
               Martyrs
               ,
               nor
               a
               confluence
               of
               all
               Sensual
               Delights
               ,
               as
               many
               have
               done
               .
               That
               which
               we
               principally
               stand
               for
               ,
               is
               ,
            
             The
             Universal
             Subjection
             of
             the
             Nations
             to
             the
             Laws
             of
             the
             Gospel
             ,
             and
             the
             rest
             of
             the
             Church
             from
             such
             Persecutions
             as
             have
             been
             in
             all
             Antichristian
             times
             ,
             when
             the
             Governments
             of
             this
             world
             have
             been
             engaged
             to
             Afflict
             the
             Church
             .
             For
             as
             formerly
             ,
             The
             Kings
             of
             the
             Earth
             being
             deceived
             ,
             did
             yield
             a
             Universal
             subjection
             to
             the
             Bishop
             of
             Rome
             ,
             and
             to
             the
             Laws
             made
             by
             his
             Authority
             :
             So
             the
             times
             shall
             be
             ,
             when
             the
             spiritual
             Excellencies
             of
             the
             Gospel
             shall
             be
             discovered
             to
             the
             world
             ;
             then
             the
             Dominations
             ,
             Dignities
             ,
             States
             ,
             and
             Governments
             of
             the
             Earth
             ,
             shall
             willingly
             submit
             to
             the
             Laws
             of
             Christ
             :
             
               Whole
               Nations
               shall
               come
               in
               ,
               in
               the
               time
               of
               the
               Gospel
               .
            
             They
             that
             will
             
             call
             such
             a
             Kingdom
             vanity
             of
             vanities
             ,
             must
             needs
             call
             many
             Promises
             of
             the
             Scriptures
             ,
             Vanity
             of
             Vanities
             .
             For
             many
             Promises
             are
             concerning
             the
             bringing
             in
             of
             the
             
             fulness
             of
             the
             Gentiles
             ,
             when
             that
             Nation
             of
             the
             Jews
             shall
             be
             called
             .
          
           
             Secondly
             ,
             The
             Hall●…lujah
             that
             was
             sung
             to
             the
             Lord
             Christ
             at
             the
             burning
             of
             the
             Great
             Whore
             ,
             was
             in
             reference
             to
             this
             ,
             
               The
               Lord
               God
               Omnipotent
               Reigneth
            
             ,
             chap.
             19.
             vers
             .
             6.
             
             For
             ,
             as
             the
             Great
             Whore
             somtimes
             Reigned
             over
             the
             Nations
             ,
             when
             their
             Laws
             ,
             Statutes
             ,
             Customs
             ,
             Priviledges
             ,
             and
             all
             other
             things
             were
             made
             subject
             to
             the
             Authority
             of
             that
             Church
             :
             So
             the
             Lord
             Christ
             shall
             Reign
             ,
             when
             the
             Nations
             shall
             willingly
             yield
             themselves
             up
             to
             be
             governed
             by
             his
             Scepter
             ,
             and
             shall
             live
             in
             subordination
             to
             the
             Laws
             of
             the
             Gospel
             .
             Be
             it
             far
             therefore
             from
             any
             to
             think
             ,
             That
             the
             Hallelujah
             was
             sung
             to
             Christ
             in
             reference
             to
             his
             Monarchical
             Reign
             ,
             and
             such
             a
             Reign
             ,
             when
             all
             comes
             to
             all
             ,
             be
             but
             vanity
             of
             vanities
             .
             But
             leaving
             this
             Point
             ,
             let
             us
             come
             to
             that
             which
             is
             more
             pertinent
             to
             our
             purpose
             ;
             to
             the
             Discourse
             concerning
             the
             Four
             Metal-Kingdoms
             ,
             and
             to
             the
             Parallel
             between
             the
             Ten-Horned
             Beast
             in
             Dan.
             7
             ,
             and
             the
             Ten-Horned
             Beast
             in
             the
             Book
             of
             the
             Revelation
             .
          
        
         
           
             Mr
             Hayne
             .
          
           
             The
             Beast
             ,
             
               Rev.
               13.
            
             expresseth
             not
             the
             very
             same
             ,
             but
             a
             like
             Kingdom
             to
             the
             Fourth
             Kingdom
             ,
             
               Dan.
               7.
            
             
             Therefore
             it
             is
             not
             one
             and
             the
             same
             Roman
             Kingdom
             .
             That
             the
             Beast
             ,
             
               Rev.
               1●…
            
             .
             expresseth
             not
             the
             very
             same
             ,
             but
             a
             like
             Kingdom
             ,
             I
             thus
             prove
             :
             The
             Chief
             Mystical
             and
             Figurative
             terms
             in
             the
             Revelation
             ,
             having
             reference
             to
             some
             thing
             in
             the
             Old
             Testament
             ,
             express
             some
             New
             matter
             like
             the
             Old
             ,
             yet
             not
             the
             same
             with
             the
             Old.
             But
             the
             Beast
             in
             the
             Revelation
             hath
             in
             the
             Figurative
             and
             Mystical
             terms
             thereof
             reference
             to
             the
             Old
             Testament
             ;
             namely
             ,
             to
             the
             Fourth
             Beast
             in
             the
             Prophe●…ie
             of
             Daniel
             .
             Therefore
             the
             Beast
             in
             the
             Revelation
             expresseth
             not
             the
             same
             ,
             but
             a
             like
             Kingdom
             to
             that
             in
             Daniel's
             Prophecie
             .
             What
             I
             Affirm
             of
             the
             chief
             Mystical
             and
             Figurative
             terms
             in
             the
             Revelation
             ,
             is
             evident
             .
             For
             Egypt
             ,
             Babylon
             ,
             the
             New
             Ierusalem
             the
             Wilderness
             ,
             Paradise
             ,
             Manna
             ,
             express
             new
             terms
             like
             〈…〉
             same
             .
          
        
         
           
           
             Answer
             .
          
           
             I
             can
             see
             no
             Reason
             but
             the
             Fourth
             Beast
             with
             Ten
             〈◊〉
             in
             the
             Prophecie
             of
             Daniel
             ,
             is
             one
             and
             the
             same
             in
             substance
             with
             the
             Ten-Horned
             Beast
             in
             the
             Revelation
             .
             They
             are
             ●…et
             out
             by
             one
             and
             the
             same
             Character
             ,
             with
             the
             same
             circumstances
             ,
             and
             both
             Prophecies
             do
             pitch
             upon
             one
             and
             the
             same
             Roman
             Kingdom
             .
             And
             what
             Mr
             Hayne
             doth
             Alledge
             to
             〈◊〉
             contrary
             ,
             in
             my
             Apprehension
             is
             not
             of
             such
             great
             moment
             .
             For
             ,
             what
             if
             it
             happeneth
             many
             times
             ,
             That
             the
             〈◊〉
             mystical
             terms
             in
             the
             Revelation
             ,
             having
             reference
             to
             〈◊〉
             in
             the
             Old
             Testament
             ,
             express
             some
             New
             matter
             〈◊〉
             the
             Old
             ,
             yet
             not
             the
             same
             with
             the
             Old
             ?
             What
             if
             this
             be
             true
             in
             many
             particulars
             ,
             as
             in
             those
             aforenamed
             ?
             yet
             it
             d●…th
             not
             follow
             ,
             That
             it
             is
             true
             in
             every
             particular
             .
             
               We
               can
               shew
               many
               Instances
               to
               the
               contrary
               ,
               That
               the
               same
               truth
               is
               literally
               and
               historically
               mentioned
               in
               both
               Prophecies
               .
            
             First
             ,
             The
             Kingdom
             of
             Christ
             is
             described
             to
             be
             an
             everlasting
             Kingdom
             that
             shall
             not
             pass
             away
             ,
             Dan.
             2.
             
             And
             is
             not
             this
             one
             and
             the
             same
             Numerical
             Kingdom
             with
             that
             which
             is
             mentioned
             in
             the
             Book
             of
             the
             Revelation
             ,
             concerning
             the
             Dominion
             of
             Christ
             ,
             
               that
               he
               is
               Alpha
               and
               Omega
               ,
               the
               first
               and
               the
               last
               ,
               which
               is
               ,
               and
               which
               was
               ,
               and
               which
               is
               to
               come
               ,
               the
               Lord
               Almighty
               ?
            
             Secondly
             ,
             Mu●…h
             is
             spoken
             i●…
             the
             Old
             Prophets
             concerning
             the
             future
             Glory
             of
             the
             Church
             of
             the
             Jews
             ,
             that
             shall
             be
             at
             the
             Call
             of
             
               that
               Nation
            
             ;
             and
             are
             not
             the
             same
             things
             Numerically
             and
             in
             terms
             repeated
             by
             Paul
             in
             Romans
             11
             ,
             and
             by
             Iohn
             in
             the
             Revelation
             ?
          
           
             But
             now
             let
             us
             come
             more
             particularly
             to
             enquire
             concerning
             the
             Ten-Horned
             Beast
             ,
             whether
             he
             be
             one
             and
             the
             same
             in
             both
             Prophecies
             :
             for
             if
             Mr
             Hayne
             ,
             or
             other
             Interpreters
             of
             his
             way
             ,
             can
             make
             it
             appear
             ,
             That
             this
             Beast
             is
             the
             Seleucian
             Kingdom
             ,
             and
             the
             Ten
             Horns
             are
             the
             Ten
             Kings
             in
             a
             lineal
             Succession
             ,
             we
             will
             willingly
             yield
             the
             truth
             of
             that
             which
             he
             Affirms
             .
             But
             on
             the
             contrary
             ,
             if
             we
             can
             make
             it
             appear
             ,
             and
             that
             by
             true
             Demonstration
             ,
             That
             the
             Roman
             is
             the
             Fourth
             Kingdom
             ;
             then
             we
             may
             conclude
             ,
             That
             one
             Kingdom
             is
             
             Identically
             ,
             Literally
             ,
             and
             Historically
             spoken
             of
             in
             both
             prophecies
             ▪
             and
             that
             Iohn
             doth
             but
             more
             fully
             declare
             those
             things
             which
             were
             more
             fully
             decyphered
             in
             the
             prophecie
             of
             Daniel
             .
             This
             is
             that
             which
             we
             shoot
             at
             ,
             to
             make
             it
             appear
             that
             both
             Daniel
             and
             Iohn
             do
             describe
             one
             and
             the
             same
             time
             of
             the
             Roman
             Kingdom
             ,
             under
             the
             Type
             of
             a
             Beast
             with
             Ten
             Horns
             .
             This
             being
             once
             explained
             ,
             the
             Doctrine
             of
             the
             Number
             666
             ,
             and
             other
             Apocalyptical
             Mysteries
             ,
             will
             begin
             to
             be
             made
             clear
             .
             But
             seeing
             that
             Dr
             Willet
             in
             his
             Commentary
             upon
             Daniel
             ,
             and
             in
             his
             Appendix
             against
             Grasserus
             ,
             is
             somthing
             more
             copious
             in
             this
             matter
             ,
             we
             will
             therefore
             more
             diligently
             enquire
             ,
             Whether
             the
             Fourth
             Beast
             in
             Daniel
             be
             the
             Seleucian
             or
             the
             Roman
             Kingdom
             ?
             The
             Queries
             are
             of
             Three
             sorts
             :
             The
             First
             ,
             From
             the
             Nature
             of
             the
             Fourth
             Beast
             ;
             The
             Second
             ,
             From
             the
             Ten
             Horns
             ;
             The
             Third
             ,
             From
             the
             description
             of
             the
             little
             Horn.
             
          
           
             The
             Queries
             ,
             from
             the
             Nature
             of
             the
             Fourth
             Beast
             ,
             are
             these
             :
          
           
             Querie
             1.
             
             How
             can
             the
             Seleucidae
             be
             the
             Fourth
             Kingdom
             upon
             the
             Earth
             under
             the
             Type
             of
             the
             Fourth
             Beast
             ,
             seeing
             they
             are
             one
             of
             the
             Four
             Heads
             of
             the
             Third
             Beast
             going
             before
             ?
             chap.
             7.
             vers
             .
             6.
             chap.
             8.
             vers
             .
             8
             ,
             22.
             
             If
             they
             make
             one
             of
             the
             Four
             Heads
             with
             the
             rest
             of
             the
             Successors
             of
             Alexander
             ,
             they
             cannot
             be
             the
             Fourth
             Kingdom
             .
             The
             Fourth
             Beast
             must
             necessarily
             be
             the
             Roman
             ,
             seeing
             the
             Third
             with
             Four
             Heads
             is
             the
             Graecian
             going
             before
             .
             But
             Dr
             Willet
             thus
             replieth
             :
          
           
             Alexander's
             
               Four
               Captains
               were
               at
               the
               first
               Regents
               under
               him
               ,
               and
               his
               Successor
            
             Aridaeus
             ;
             
               but
               they
               became
               the
               Fourth
               Beast
               ,
               when
               they
               erected
               the
               Kingdom
               to
               themselves
               .
            
          
           
             If
             we
             put
             Alexander
             and
             his
             Successors
             together
             ,
             we
             can
             give
             a
             cleer
             Reason
             why
             the
             Third
             Beast
             may
             be
             said
             to
             have
             Four
             Heads
             ,
             because
             in
             the
             times
             of
             the
             Monarchy
             of
             the
             People
             of
             Greece
             ,
             that
             Nation
             became
             divided
             into
             Four
             Kingdoms
             ;
             as
             appeareth
             Dan.
             8.
             8
             ,
             22.
             
             But
             if
             we
             take
             Alexander
             and
             his
             Successor
             Aridaeus
             asunder
             from
             the
             Four
             Successors
             ,
             I
             cannot
             see
             possibly
             how
             the
             Kingdom
             of
             Alexander
             
             in
             that
             abstract
             consideration
             may
             be
             said
             to
             have
             Four
             Heads
             ,
             or
             that
             it
             may
             be
             decyphered
             properly
             by
             such
             a
             character
             .
             The
             Four
             Heads
             do
             signifie
             the
             Four
             Divisions
             of
             the
             Greek
             Monarchy
             ;
             and
             can
             this
             be
             a
             Character
             of
             Alexander's
             Kingdom
             ,
             which
             in
             it self
             considered
             had
             no
             Heads
             ,
             Parts
             ,
             or
             Divisions
             at
             all
             ?
             The
             Scriptures
             speak
             plainly
             ,
             That
             the
             Graecian
             was
             one
             intire
             Kingdom
             in
             him
             ;
             and
             after
             his
             eradication
             ,
             the
             Dominion
             began
             to
             be
             divided
             into
             Four
             parts
             .
             Therefore
             his
             Successors
             ,
             quatenus
             Heads
             ,
             had
             no
             being
             at
             all
             in
             all
             the
             times
             of
             his
             Dominion
             :
             Much
             less
             could
             they
             be
             the
             Characters
             of
             his
             Kingdom
             ,
             at
             whose
             only
             extirpation
             they
             were
             to
             begin
             as
             Heads
             of
             the
             Graecian
             State.
             Besides
             ,
             it
             would
             be
             a
             great
             work
             ,
             to
             prove
             out
             of
             the
             Stories
             ,
             That
             the
             Kingdom
             of
             Alexander
             was
             Governed
             by
             Four
             principal
             Regents
             in
             his
             time
             .
             And
             further
             ,
             If
             it
             could
             be
             made
             appear
             ,
             still
             this
             would
             be
             a
             great
             Question
             ,
             
               Whether
               in
               the
               Description
               of
               the
               Monarchies
               ,
               the
               Scripture
               would
               look
               to
               such
               inferiour
               Administrations
               ?
               Darius
            
             the
             King
             set
             over
             the
             Mede-Persian
             Kingdom
             120
             Princes
             ,
             Dan.
             6.
             1
             ,
             2
             ,
             3.
             and
             yet
             we
             do
             not
             reade
             that
             this
             Number
             of
             Regents
             is
             set
             forth
             as
             the
             special
             Character
             of
             that
             Monarchy
             .
             We
             have
             a
             clear
             Reason
             in
             the
             Scriptures
             wherefore
             the
             Graecian
             State
             is
             figured
             by
             the
             Type
             of
             Four
             Heads
             ,
             scil
             .
             in
             relation
             to
             the
             quadri-partite
             Division
             of
             Alexander's
             Kingdom●…
             after
             his
             death
             .
             Therefore
             the
             Notion
             of
             the
             Four
             Regents
             of
             Alexander
             ,
             during
             his
             life
             time
             ,
             I
             take
             rather
             to
             be
             an
             evasion
             ,
             than
             a
             just
             Truth
             grounded
             upon
             the
             Prophecie
             ,
             or
             the
             civil
             Stories
             .
          
           
             Querie
             2.
             
             How
             can
             the
             Kingdom
             of
             the
             Seleucidae
             be
             the
             Fourth
             Kingdom
             upon
             the
             Earth
             ,
             that
             shall
             be
             different
             from
             the
             former
             ,
             and
             shall
             devour
             the
             whole
             Earth
             ,
             and
             tread
             it
             down
             ,
             and
             break
             it
             in
             pieces
             ?
             chap.
             7.
             vers
             .
             23.
             
             How
             can
             this
             be
             applied
             to
             them
             ?
             The
             Seleucidae
             were
             far
             inferiour
             to
             the
             Kingdom
             of
             
               Alexander
               .
               Four
               Kings
               or
               Kingdoms
               did
               arise
               out
               of
               him
               ,
            
             but
             not
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             —
             
               in
               his
               Strength
               ,
               chap.
            
             8.
             vers
             .
             22.
             
             Further
             ,
             The
             Seleucians
             were
             far
             inferiour
             to
             the
             former
             Monarchies
             of
             Babel
             and
             Persia
             ,
             in
             greatness
             of
             Power
             ,
             and
             largeness
             of
             Dominion
             .
             On
             the
             contrary
             ,
             If
             we
             apply
             the
             Fourth
             
             Beast
             to
             the
             Roman
             ,
             all
             the
             properties
             of
             that
             Beast
             will
             be
             verified
             i●…
             him
             .
             First
             ,
             The
             admirable
             condition
             of
             the
             Fourth
             Beast
             above
             the
             former
             .
             Secondly
             ,
             His
             multi-form
             ,
             and
             various
             shape
             .
             Thirdly
             ,
             The
             greatness
             of
             terrour
             .
             Fourthly
             ,
             The
             highest
             degree
             of
             strength
             .
             Fifthly
             ,
             His
             Iron-Teeth
             and
             Brazen-Nayles
             .
             Sixthly
             ,
             His
             Actions
             to
             devour
             ,
             and
             to
             break
             in
             pieces
             .
             Seventhly
             ,
             The
             object
             of
             his
             Victory
             ,
             to
             subdue
             the
             whole
             Earth
             .
             Eighthly
             ,
             The
             time
             of
             the
             continuance
             .
             And
             so
             the
             Earth
             hath
             longer
             continued
             under
             the
             Dominion
             of
             the
             Romans
             ,
             than
             under
             any
             ,
             nay
             ,
             under
             a●…l
             the
             Metal-Kingdoms
             .
             All
             these
             properties
             agree
             to
             the
             Roman
             ;
             and
             I
             cannot
             possibly
             see
             how
             they
             may
             be
             applicable
             to
             the
             Seleucian
             Kingdom
             .
          
           
             But
             Dr
             Willet
             replieth
             ,
             
               That
               the
               Kingdom
               of
               the
               Seleucidae
               make
               the
               Fourth
               Beast
               ,
               not
               so
               much
               in
               respect
               of
               greater
               strength
               ,
               as
               in
               respect
               of
               greater
               cruelty
               and
               hardness
               of
               disposition
               against
               the
               People
               of
               God
               ,
               the
               Iews
               .
               And
               therefore
               when
               it
               is
               said
               of
               this
               Kingdom
               ,
               That
               it
               did
               devour
               the
               whole
               Earth
               ;
               this
               is
               not
               simply
               the
               whole
               Earth
               ,
               but
               the
               whole
               Earth
               about
               the
               Confines
               of
               the
               Iewish
               Church
               .
            
          
           
             If
             we
             should
             grant
             this
             Principle
             of
             cruel
             Disposition
             against
             the
             People
             of
             the
             Jews
             ,
             this
             would
             strongly
             prove
             the
             Roman
             to
             be
             the
             Fourth
             Kingdom
             .
             For
             the
             Jews
             suffered
             much
             from
             the
             Babylonians
             ,
             much
             from
             the
             Persians
             ,
             more
             from
             the
             Graecians
             ,
             yet
             most
             of
             all
             from
             the
             Romans
             :
             They
             were
             under
             the
             Roman
             Tyranny
             for
             the
             space
             of
             130
             years
             together
             ;
             and
             then
             last
             of
             all
             ,
             the
             Nation
             and
             Church
             was
             destroyed
             by
             their
             means
             .
             The
             Sufferings
             of
             the
             Jews
             under
             Antiochus
             were
             great
             ,
             but
             they
             were
             not
             to
             be
             compared
             with
             the
             last
             and
             fatal
             destruction
             of
             Ierusalem
             .
             Our
             Saviour
             himself
             doth
             testifie
             as
             much
             ,
             when
             he
             speaketh
             concerning
             the
             great
             calamity
             that
             should
             come
             by
             the
             
               Romans
               ,
               Luk.
            
             21.
             vers
             .
             20
             ,
             21
             ,
             22
             ,
             23.
             
             And
             this
             also
             is
             well
             observed
             by
             a
             certain
             nameless
             Writer
             ,
             in
             a
             Tract
             concerning
             Antichrist
             and
             the
             Four
             Monarchies
             .
             For
             ,
             (
             saith
             he
             )
             
               Quamvis
               Antiochus
               graviter
               afflixit
               Iu●…aeos
               ,
               tamen
               ea
               afflictio
               ad
               tempus
               tantum
               duravit
               ,
               &
               cum
               illa
               〈◊〉
               quae
               a
               Romanis
               facta
               est
               nequaquam
               conferenda
               .
            
             
             Therefore
             ,
             if
             the
             greatest
             degree
             of
             Cruelty
             against
             the
             People
             of
             the
             Jews
             doth
             give
             denomination
             to
             the
             Fourth
             Beast
             ,
             the
             greatest
             Sufferings
             of
             the
             Jews
             have
             been
             under
             the
             Romans
             .
          
           
             Secondly
             ,
             In
             the
             case
             of
             the
             Monarchies
             ,
             in
             the
             Chaldee
             Visions
             I
             see
             no
             reason
             why
             the
             Jews
             should
             be
             called
             ,
             The
             only
             People
             of
             God.
             In
             Dan.
             2.
             there
             is
             mention
             made
             of
             the
             beginning
             of
             the
             Kingdom
             of
             Christ
             ,
             and
             how
             that
             Kingdom
             should
             break
             the
             Metal-Kingdoms
             .
             Now
             is
             this
             verified
             in
             the
             Nation
             of
             the
             Jews
             ?
             Do
             they
             only
             make
             the
             Kingdom
             of
             Christ
             ?
             Or
             have
             they
             been
             only
             used
             as
             Instruments
             to
             the
             Dissolution
             of
             the
             Fourth
             Kingdom
             ?
             Again
             ,
             It
             is
             mentioned
             ,
             That
             the
             little
             Horn
             did
             wear
             out
             the
             Saints
             of
             the
             most
             High
             ,
             till
             the
             Saints
             took
             the
             Kingdom
             :
             Now
             ,
             what
             warrant
             is
             there
             to
             take
             them
             only
             for
             the
             Saints
             of
             the
             Jewish
             Church
             ?
             True
             indeed
             ,
             in
             the
             Hebrew
             Visions
             there
             is
             some
             mention
             made
             of
             the
             People
             of
             God
             :
             but
             then
             commonly
             you
             shall
             see
             some
             circumstances
             in
             the
             text
             ,
             to
             decypher
             the
             People
             of
             the
             Jews
             only
             .
             As
             for
             ensample
             :
             You
             shall
             read
             somthing
             spoken
             of
             the
             Tsebi
             ,
             or
             the
             pleasant
             Land
             ;
             of
             the
             daily
             Sacrifice
             ;
             of
             the
             Sanctuary
             ;
             of
             Daniel's
             People
             ,
             and
             the
             like
             :
             But
             in
             the
             Chaldee
             Visions
             there
             is
             no
             such
             thing
             mentioned
             ;
             which
             maketh
             me
             to
             think
             ,
             That
             the
             Saints
             there
             mentioned
             ,
             are
             of
             a
             more
             general
             Nature
             ,
             and
             concern
             the
             People
             of
             God
             both
             Jews
             and
             Gentiles
             .
             Indeed
             it
             is
             often
             spoken
             concerning
             the
             Saints
             of
             the
             most
             High
             ,
             That
             the
             little
             Horn
             did
             wear
             them
             out
             and
             consume
             them
             ;
             and
             that
             at
             the
             time
             appointed
             they
             shall
             take
             the
             Kingdom
             .
             But
             yet
             it
             is
             not
             specified
             in
             Daniel
             ,
             what
             these
             Saints
             are
             ,
             Whether
             they
             be
             the
             Saints
             of
             the
             Jews
             ,
             or
             the
             Gentiles
             ,
             or
             both
             .
             Dr
             Willet
             seemeth
             to
             me
             to
             give
             a
             good
             Reason
             why
             they
             should
             be
             called
             ,
             The
             Saints
             of
             the
             most
             High
             ,
             scil
             .
             in
             reference
             to
             their
             most
             High
             Prince
             ,
             the
             Lord
             Christ.
             The
             words
             of
             the
             text
             are
             fair
             for
             this
             Interpretation
             :
             
               And
               the
               Kingdom
               and
               Dominion
               under
               the
               whole
               Heaven
               ,
               shall
               be
               given
               to
               the
               People
               of
               the
               Saints
               .
            
             And
             then
             in
             the
             words
             immediately
             following
             ,
             
               His
               Kingdom
               
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
              
               is
               an
               everlasting
               Kingdom
               ,
               and
               all
               Dominions
            
             
             
               shall
               obey
               him
            
             ,
             vers
             .
             27.
             
             The
             Kingdom
             is
             given
             to
             the
             Son
             of
             man
             ,
             as
             to
             the
             Head
             ;
             and
             by
             him
             it
             is
             communicated
             to
             his
             People
             and
             Subjects
             after
             their
             Sufferings
             .
             By
             all
             that
             hath
             been
             spoken
             ,
             we
             may
             conclude
             ,
             That
             the
             Subjects
             of
             the
             Kingdom
             of
             Christ
             ,
             the
             Members
             of
             his
             Mystical
             Body
             ,
             are
             the
             Objects
             of
             the
             Tyranny
             of
             the
             Fourth
             Beast
             .
          
           
             Thirdly
             ,
             The
             great
             Power
             and
             Cruelty
             of
             this
             Beast
             is
             not
             only
             against
             the
             Saints
             ,
             but
             against
             all
             the
             former
             Metal-Kingdoms
             ;
             for
             ,
             as
             Iron
             it
             shall
             break
             them
             all
             in
             pieces
             ,
             vers
             .
             40.
             
             Therefore
             this
             Kingdom
             is
             said
             to
             be
             more
             Mighty
             than
             any
             going
             before
             ,
             in
             respect
             of
             the
             exercise
             and
             imployment
             of
             strength
             upon
             the
             former
             Kingdoms
             ,
             and
             not
             only
             in
             respect
             of
             the
             particular
             exercise
             of
             cruelty
             against
             the
             People
             of
             the
             Jews
             .
             If
             this
             be
             so
             ,
             we
             cannot
             say
             ,
             That
             the
             Seleucian
             was
             such
             :
             but
             to
             the
             Roman
             all
             things
             agree
             .
          
           
             Fourthly
             ,
             I
             do
             yield
             also
             ,
             that
             this
             Expression
             is
             used
             specially
             for
             that
             part
             of
             the
             earth
             about
             the
             Confines
             of
             the
             Church
             of
             the
             Jews
             ;
             yet
             it
             is
             not
             the
             whole
             meaning
             of
             the
             text
             .
             When
             the
             Lord
             gave
             Nebuchadnezzar
             (
             the
             Head
             of
             the
             Image
             )
             a
             Kingdom
             ,
             Power
             ,
             Strength
             ,
             and
             Glory
             ;
             And
             wheresoever
             the
             Children
             of
             men
             dwelt
             ,
             he
             gave
             them
             all
             into
             his
             hands
             ;
             we
             cannot
             say
             ,
             That
             he
             made
             him
             Ruler
             over
             all
             in
             Iudea
             only
             ,
             but
             he
             made
             him
             Ruler
             over
             all
             the
             Eastern
             Countries
             ,
             far
             and
             near
             ,
             round
             about
             the
             Confines
             of
             that
             Church
             and
             Nation
             .
             In
             like
             manner
             ,
             when
             the
             Fourth
             Kingdom
             arose
             and
             brought
             the
             Earth
             into
             a
             more
             absolute
             subjection
             ,
             we
             must
             not
             only
             confine
             this
             to
             the
             Countries
             of
             Iudea
             ,
             but
             we
             must
             also
             expound
             the
             whole
             Earth
             by
             some
             Analogie
             to
             the
             former
             Metal-Kingdoms
             .
             According
             to
             this
             sense
             ,
             when
             the
             Fourth
             Kingdom
             cometh
             to
             the
             times
             of
             its
             Monarchical
             Dominion
             ,
             it
             will
             be
             the
             most
             potent
             Kingdom
             that
             ever
             was
             about
             the
             Confines
             of
             the
             Church
             ,
             and
             it
             will
             bring
             the
             former
             Kingdoms
             into
             the
             greatest
             subjection
             .
             If
             you
             apply
             this
             to
             the
             Kingdom
             of
             the
             Seleucidae
             ,
             there
             will
             be
             no
             correspondence
             at
             all
             ;
             but
             to
             the
             Roman
             all
             things
             do
             agree
             .
             For
             that
             Kingdom
             was
             absolutely
             the
             most
             mighty
             ,
             and
             the
             most
             powerful
             that
             ever
             was
             about
             the
             Church
             of
             the
             
             Jews
             .
             And
             ,
             as
             the
             People
             of
             Rome
             had
             Iudea
             under
             their
             Obedience
             ;
             so
             they
             had
             the
             greatest
             Empire
             about
             Iudea
             ,
             from
             East
             to
             West
             ,
             that
             ever
             was
             .
          
           
             All
             these
             Reasons
             laid
             together
             ,
             shew
             plainly
             ,
             That
             the
             Fourth
             Beast
             is
             the
             Roman
             Kingdom
             ;
             and
             so
             consequently
             the
             Ten-Horned
             Beast
             in
             Daniel
             and
             the
             Revelation
             is
             all
             one
             .
             It
             is
             not
             only
             one
             and
             the
             same
             in
             Analogie
             and
             similitude
             of
             Expression
             ,
             but
             it
             is
             Literally
             and
             Historically
             one
             and
             the
             same
             .
             The
             Roman
             Kingdom
             is
             described
             in
             both
             Prophecies
             by
             the
             same
             Emblems
             and
             similitudes
             .
          
           
             And
             thus
             much
             concerning
             the
             Queries
             of
             the
             Fourth
             Beast
             in
             the
             more
             general
             Nature
             thereof
             .
             We
             will
             now
             descend
             more
             particularly
             to
             the
             Ten
             Horns
             .
             And
             here
             we
             will
             shew
             that
             they
             cannot
             be
             the
             Ten
             Kings
             lineally
             succeeding
             in
             the
             Seleucian
             race
             ;
             but
             they
             are
             so
             many
             inferiour
             Realms
             of
             the
             Roman
             Empire
             .
          
           
             Querie
             1.
             
             If
             the
             Ten
             Horns
             be
             Ten
             Seleucian
             Kings
             ,
             there
             will
             be
             Eleven
             Horns
             in
             all
             :
             and
             how
             can
             Ten
             Horns
             be
             the
             Character
             of
             the
             Beast
             ?
             If
             in
             the
             whole
             succession
             the
             Number
             of
             Kings
             be
             Eleven
             in
             all
             ,
             the
             Beast
             is
             more
             properly
             called
             ,
             
               Unde●…em
               Cornupeta
            
             ,
             the
             Beast
             with
             Eleven
             Horns
             .
             The
             words
             are
             plain
             :
             
               The
               ten
               Horns
               are
               ten
               Kings
               that
               shall
               arise
               ,
               and
               another
               shall
               arise
               up
               after
               them
               ,
               that
               shall
               be
               diverse
               from
               the
               first
               ,
            
             vers
             .
             24.
             
             Therefore
             if
             in
             the
             whole
             succession
             there
             be
             Eleven
             Kings
             ;
             first
             Ten
             ,
             and
             then
             another
             that
             came
             up
             after
             them
             ;
             why
             is
             the
             Beast
             set
             forth
             by
             the
             special
             Character
             of
             Ten
             Horns
             ?
             The
             little
             Horn
             must
             needs
             be
             the
             more
             cruel
             ,
             and
             more
             eminent
             ,
             according
             to
             the
             text
             :
             And
             yet
             by
             this
             rule
             ,
             that
             which
             is
             more
             principal
             ,
             shall
             be
             excluded
             from
             the
             denomination
             .
             But
             Doctor
             Willet
             hath
             this
             evasion
             ;
             to
             wit
             ,
             
               That
               the
               little
               Horn
               did
               not
               come
               up
               after
               the
               ten
               ,
               but
               it
               came
               up
               as
               the
               last
               of
               them
               .
            
             And
             so
             Piscator
             rendreth
             the
             words
             :
             
               Et
               Cornua
               decem
               ex
               illo
               Regno
               ,
               nempe
               decem
               Reges
               exsurgent
               ,
               &
               postremus
               resurget
               post
               illos
               ,
               &
               is
               diversus
               erit
               à
               prioribus
               .
            
             And
             in
             his
             Scholia
             upon
             the
             8
             verse
             ,
             he
             thus
             speaketh
             :
             
               Vox
               Chaldaica
            
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             —
             
               quae
               versu
               sexto
               &
               septimo
               significat
               alium
               ,
               hic
               valet
               ultimum
               seu
               postremum
               .
               Nam
               Antiochus
               Epiphanes
               ,
               qui
            
             
             
               per
               Cornu
               illud
               figurabatur
               ,
               fuit
               ultimus
               inter
               decem
               illos
               Reges
               qui
               hîc
               per
               decem
               Cornua
               figurantur
               .
            
             But
             let
             it
             be
             supposed
             that
             the
             Chaldee
             word
             may
             indefinitely
             be
             taken
             ,
             yet
             it
             is
             to
             our
             purpose
             to
             consider
             what
             the
             scope
             of
             the
             text
             will
             admit
             .
             In
             the
             former
             verses
             ,
             when
             the
             description
             of
             the
             Babylonian-Lyon
             was
             ended
             ,
             it
             is
             there
             mentioned
             ,
             
               I
               beheld
            
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             —
             
               another
               Beast
               like
               a
               Bear
               ,
               not
               a
               latter
               Beast
               that
               came
               up
               out
               of
               the
               Sea.
            
             For
             the
             scope
             of
             the
             Spirit
             is
             to
             shew
             the
             rising
             of
             Four
             several
             Monarchies
             ,
             each
             one
             diverse
             from
             other
             .
             So
             in
             the
             present
             case
             ,
             after
             the
             description
             of
             the
             Ten
             Horns
             ,
             
               the
               little
               Horn
               is
               said
               to
               be
               another
               that
               came
               up
               after
               them
               ,
            
             to
             shew
             the
             notable
             diversity
             between
             it
             and
             the
             Horns
             that
             came
             up
             before
             .
             And
             so
             this
             is
             the
             meaning
             of
             the
             text
             ,
             That
             another
             Horn
             ,
             much
             differing
             from
             the
             former
             Ten
             in
             Nature
             and
             Condition
             ,
             came
             up
             after
             them
             in
             order
             of
             time
             .
             Secondly
             ,
             Suppose
             we
             should
             let
             this
             Translation
             pass
             ,
             
               Postremum
               exsurget
               post
               illa
            
             ,
             a
             latter
             shall
             arise
             after
             them
             :
             Here
             I
             ask
             ,
             What
             ,
             and
             who
             are
             they
             after
             whom
             the
             little
             Horn
             shall
             arise
             ?
             Are
             they
             not
             the
             Ten
             Kings
             ,
             signified
             by
             the
             Ten
             Horns
             ?
             and
             is
             not
             then
             the
             litle
             Horn
             the
             Eleventh
             in
             the
             same
             succession
             ?
             Mr
             Mede
             in
             his
             
               Apost
               .
               pag.
            
             74.
             thinketh
             that
             the
             words
             do
             best
             run
             in
             this
             sense
             ,
             
               Out
               of
               this
               Kingdom
               ten
               Kings
               shall
               arise
               ,
               and
               another
               shall
               arise
            
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             
               behind
               them
            
             ,
             as
             the
             70
             translate
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             This
             plainly
             sheweth
             the
             rising
             of
             Ten
             Horns
             ,
             and
             the
             little
             Horn
             rose
             behind
             them
             in
             the
             order
             of
             time
             .
             Thirdly
             ,
             Let
             us
             go
             to
             the
             scope
             of
             the
             words
             going
             before
             ;
             For
             Daniel
             would
             know
             the
             truth
             of
             the
             Fourth
             Beast
             ,
             and
             of
             the
             Ten
             Horns
             ,
             and
             of
             the
             little
             Horn
             that
             came
             up
             after
             them
             :
             And
             the
             Angel's
             Answer
             is
             sutable
             to
             the
             Question
             :
             
               The
               ten
               Horns
               are
               ten
               Kings
               that
               shall
               arise
               ,
               and
               another
               shall
               arise
               up
               after
               them
               ,
               and
               shall
               be
               diverse
               from
               the
               first
               ,
            
             vers
             .
             24.
             
             Now
             is
             not
             here
             a
             plain
             Antithesis
             ,
             or
             Opposition
             betwixt
             the
             Ten
             Horns
             and
             the
             little
             Horn
             that
             came
             up
             after
             ?
             Upon
             these
             grounds
             we
             may
             conclude
             ,
             That
             there
             are
             Eleven
             Horns
             mentioned
             in
             the
             text
             .
             Now
             if
             these
             be
             Eleven
             Kings
             lineally
             succeeding
             ,
             why
             is
             the
             Beast
             called
             and
             set
             forth
             by
             the
             Character
             of
             Ten
             Horns
             ?
             Why
             is
             the
             
             most
             Tyrannical
             Prince
             left
             out
             of
             the
             Number
             ?
             But
             on
             the
             contrary
             ,
             If
             you
             take
             the
             Fourth
             Beast
             for
             the
             Roman
             Kingdom
             ,
             and
             the
             Ten
             Horns
             for
             the
             Ten
             Kings
             that
             shall
             arise
             in
             a
             famous
             change
             of
             State
             ,
             all
             things
             will
             agree
             :
             For
             though
             the
             little
             Horn
             be
             more
             Tyrannical
             than
             any
             of
             the
             Ten
             ,
             yet
             it
             is
             not
             of
             that
             Edition
             of
             Horns
             from
             whence
             the
             Beast
             fetcheth
             his
             proper
             denomination
             .
             In
             the
             Goat
             of
             
               Graeciae
               ,
               chap.
            
             8.
             there
             are
             Six
             Horns
             in
             all
             .
             First
             ,
             Alexander
             ,
             the
             great
             Horn
             :
             Secondly
             ,
             His
             Successors
             ,
             Four
             notable
             Horns
             :
             And
             then
             Thirdly
             ,
             Out
             of
             one
             of
             them
             
               Antiochus
               Epiphanes
            
             ,
             a
             little
             Horn.
             Yet
             we
             do
             not
             say
             ,
             That
             Six
             Horns
             ,
             but
             Four
             Heads
             and
             Four
             Horns
             are
             the
             proper
             Characters
             of
             the
             Graecian
             Kingdom
             .
             For
             in
             a
             famous
             mutation
             of
             State
             ,
             that
             Monarchy
             became
             Divided
             into
             Four
             Realms
             .
             So
             likewise
             ,
             though
             the
             little
             Horn
             ,
             scil
             .
             the
             Papacie
             ,
             was
             more
             terrible
             than
             any
             of
             the
             Ten
             going
             before
             ;
             yet
             the
             Ten
             Horns
             give
             the
             denomination
             to
             the
             Beast
             ,
             because
             the
             Roman
             in
             a
             famous
             alteration
             of
             Government
             was
             par●…ed
             into
             Ten
             inferiour
             Dominions
             .
             There
             is
             a
             delineation
             of
             the
             Roman
             by
             the
             same
             Character
             ,
             in
             the
             Book
             of
             the
             
               Revelation
               ,
               chap.
            
             17.
             vers
             .
             12.
             
             Now
             whereas
             Dr
             Willet
             maketh
             the
             Question
             ,
             
               How
               ten
               Kings
               may
               arise
               out
               of
               one
               Kingdom
               at
               one
               time
               ?
            
             I
             Answer
             ,
             As
             well
             as
             Four
             Kings
             or
             Realms
             may
             arise
             out
             of
             one
             Graecian
             Kingdom
             at
             one
             time
             .
             The
             Four
             Horns
             are
             Four
             Kings
             or
             Kingdoms
             which
             shall
             stand
             up
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             out
             of
             that
             Nation
             ,
             chap.
             8.
             vers
             .
             22.
             
             So
             the
             Ten
             Horns
             are
             Ten
             Kings
             that
             shall
             arise
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             —
             
               ex
               Regno
            
             ,
             out
             of
             that
             Fourth
             or
             Roman
             Kingdom
             ,
             chap.
             7.
             vers
             .
             24.
             
          
           
             Querie
             2.
             
             If
             the
             Ten
             Horns
             be
             Ten
             Kings
             in
             a
             lineal
             succession
             ,
             and
             the
             little
             Horn
             is
             one
             in
             the
             same
             row
             or
             order
             ,
             why
             doth
             the
             Spirit
             put
             such
             a
             difference
             between
             the
             one
             and
             the
             other
             ?
             According
             to
             the
             text
             ,
             there
             is
             a
             great
             distance
             between
             them
             :
             they
             were
             of
             a
             former
             Edition
             ,
             this
             of
             a
             latter
             :
             They
             came
             up
             together
             ,
             and
             were
             of
             the
             same
             kind
             ;
             this
             after
             some
             pause
             or
             interval
             of
             time
             came
             up
             after
             them
             ,
             was
             diverse
             from
             them
             ,
             before
             whom
             Three
             of
             the
             former
             were
             plucked
             up
             by
             the
             roots
             .
             If
             you
             apply
             this
             to
             the
             row
             
             of
             Seleucian
             Kings
             ,
             I
             cannot
             see
             how
             this
             can
             be
             true
             ,
             either
             in
             the
             general
             ,
             or
             in
             the
             particular
             accommodation
             .
             In
             the
             general
             it
             is
             not
             true
             ;
             for
             the
             Seleucian
             Kings
             Reigning
             one
             after
             another
             ,
             make
             but
             one
             Dynastie
             .
             For
             though
             some
             of
             the
             Kings
             were
             more
             mighty
             than
             others
             ,
             and
             some
             more
             cruel
             against
             the
             Saints
             of
             the
             Jewish
             Church
             ;
             yet
             all
             make
             but
             one
             succession
             of
             Kings
             in
             the
             same
             Kingdom
             .
             Now
             ,
             if
             you
             look
             to
             the
             text
             ,
             there
             is
             mention
             made
             of
             a
             double
             change
             or
             form
             of
             State
             :
             the
             first
             is
             when
             the
             Ten
             Kings
             arose
             ;
             the
             second
             ,
             when
             the
             little
             Horn
             arose
             up
             after
             them
             ,
             which
             was
             diverse
             from
             them
             ,
             and
             subdued
             three
             of
             the
             former
             Kings
             ,
             and
             so
             became
             Great
             .
             The
             scope
             of
             this
             Scripture
             is
             concerning
             the
             Division
             of
             the
             Fourth
             Kingdom
             into
             Ten
             Regencies
             or
             Divisions
             at
             one
             time
             :
             and
             after
             some
             space
             of
             time
             ,
             it
             sheweth
             how
             the
             little
             Horn
             arose
             and
             subdued
             three
             of
             the
             former
             Realms
             .
             We
             cannot
             see
             how
             this
             can
             be
             spoken
             so
             properly
             of
             Kings
             Reigning
             one
             after
             another
             in
             the
             same
             Policie
             or
             Government
             .
             Neither
             is
             it
             true
             in
             the
             particular
             Accommodation
             :
             for
             they
             that
             will
             have
             
               Antiochus
               Epiphanes
            
             to
             be
             the
             little
             Horn
             ,
             they
             have
             not
             yet
             cleared
             the
             Point
             ,
             First
             ,
             How
             
               Antiochus
               Epiphanes
            
             was
             the
             tenth
             Seleucian
             King
             :
             Secondly
             ,
             How
             he
             was
             more
             Potent
             than
             his
             Father
             
               Antiochus
               Magnus
            
             ,
             or
             
               Seleuc●…
               Nicanor
            
             :
             Thirdly
             ,
             How
             he
             did
             pluck
             up
             three
             of
             the
             former
             Seleucian
             Kings
             by
             the
             roots
             :
             Fourthly
             ,
             How
             he
             did
             wear
             out
             the
             Saints
             of
             the
             most
             High
             ,
             till
             the
             Saints
             did
             take
             the
             Kingdom
             which
             should
             be
             for
             ever
             and
             ever
             .
             Fifthly
             ,
             How
             he
             did
             continue
             his
             Dominion
             and
             Persecution
             so
             long
             till
             the
             Beast
             was
             destroyed
             ,
             and
             his
             Body
             given
             to
             the
             burning
             fire
             .
             All
             these
             Particulars
             have
             not
             yet
             ▪
             been
             cleared
             in
             
               Antiochus
               Epiphanes
            
             .
             Somthing
             hath
             been
             spoken
             in
             the
             Commentaries
             ,
             which
             I
             take
             rather
             to
             be
             Evasions
             ,
             than
             just
             Answers
             .
             On
             the
             contrary
             ,
             if
             you
             take
             the
             Roman
             for
             the
             Fourth
             Kingdom
             ,
             all
             things
             will
             agree
             .
             For
             in
             a
             famous
             Revolution
             of
             Empire
             ,
             that
             Monarchy
             became
             divided
             into
             ten
             inferiour
             Realms
             ,
             as
             it
             is
             set
             forth
             by
             the
             rising
             of
             the
             Ten
             ▪
             Horned
             Beast
             our
             of
             the
             Sea
             ,
             Rev.
             13.
             1.
             
             After
             this
             ,
             another
             rose
             out
             of
             the
             Earth
             .
             This
             in
             Daniel
             is
             called
             
             the
             little
             Horn
             ,
             which
             is
             the
             Emblem
             and
             Type
             of
             the
             Papal
             Government
             .
             Now
             to
             this
             last
             Edition
             of
             Roman
             State
             ,
             all
             the
             aforementioned
             particulars
             do
             agree
             .
             First
             ,
             it
             is
             evident
             ,
             That
             this
             was
             more
             dreadful
             than
             any
             of
             the
             Horns
             going
             before
             .
             Secondly
             ,
             That
             it
             did
             eradicate
             some
             of
             the
             former
             ,
             to
             have
             elbow-room
             in
             Italy
             .
             Thirdly
             ,
             That
             it
             did
             wear
             out
             the
             Saints
             a
             time
             ,
             and
             times
             ,
             and
             half
             a
             time
             .
             Fourthly
             ,
             That
             the
             wearing
             out
             of
             the
             Saints
             was
             till
             the
             Body
             of
             the
             Beast
             was
             cast
             into
             the
             burning
             fire
             ,
             and
             the
             Saints
             of
             the
             most
             High
             did
             begin
             to
             Reign
             with
             Christ
             ,
             chap.
             19.
             vers
             .
             20.
             and
             chap.
             20.
             vers
             .
             4.
             
          
           
             Querie
             3.
             
             If
             the
             Ten
             Horns
             be
             Ten
             Kings
             ,
             and
             the
             little
             Horn
             the
             last
             King
             ,
             why
             is
             it
             said
             ,
             
               I
               considered
               the
               Horns
               ,
               and
               behold
               there
               came
               up
               amongst
               them
               another
               little
               Horn
               ?
            
             vers
             .
             8.
             
             If
             these
             be
             so
             many
             Kings
             in
             a
             lineal
             succession
             ,
             how
             could
             the
             little
             Horn
             that
             came
             last
             of
             all
             ,
             be
             said
             to
             come
             up
             ,
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             —
             
               inter
               ea
               ,
               among
               them
            
             ,
             to
             have
             Being
             and
             Existence
             with
             them
             ?
             We
             do
             willingly
             yield
             ,
             That
             
               Antiochus
               Epiphanes
            
             was
             one
             of
             the
             Seleucian
             Kings
             ,
             and
             reigned
             in
             the
             same
             row
             with
             
               Antiochus
               Magnus
            
             ,
             and
             
               Antiochus
               Theos
            
             .
             Yet
             we
             cannot
             say
             that
             he
             came
             to
             reign
             with
             them
             ;
             for
             when
             he
             began
             ,
             they
             had
             no
             Being
             at
             all
             .
             This
             is
             true
             in
             all
             successions
             ;
             when
             he
             that
             cometh
             after
             beginneth
             to
             Reign
             ,
             then
             they
             that
             go
             before
             cease
             to
             be
             .
             But
             it
             is
             otherwise
             spoken
             of
             the
             little
             Horn
             ,
             
               he
               came
               up
               among
               them
            
             ,
             to
             wit
             ,
             among
             the
             Ten
             Horns
             ;
             he
             broke
             three
             of
             them
             in
             pieces
             ;
             and
             for
             the
             residue
             ,
             they
             had
             their
             Existence
             and
             Being
             together
             at
             one
             and
             the
             same
             time
             .
             You
             will
             say
             ,
             That
             this
             is
             but
             a
             similitude
             ,
             and
             similitudes
             are
             not
             to
             be
             pressed
             in
             every
             particular
             .
             I
             Answer
             ,
             That
             Types
             and
             Similitudes
             used
             by
             the
             Holy
             Ghost
             ,
             ought
             to
             be
             pressed
             so
             far
             as
             he
             intendeth
             .
             If
             therefore
             by
             ten
             Horns
             he
             did
             intend
             a
             lineal
             succession
             of
             Kings
             ,
             why
             did
             he
             not
             keep
             the
             same
             method
             which
             he
             used
             to
             do
             in
             the
             description
             of
             such
             Successions
             ?
             In
             the
             former
             verses
             he
             speaketh
             of
             the
             rising
             of
             Four
             Beasts
             out
             of
             the
             Sea
             ;
             the
             first
             like
             a
             Lyon
             ,
             the
             second
             like
             a
             Bear
             ,
             the
             third
             like
             a
             Leopard
             ,
             the
             fourth
             was
             diverse
             from
             the
             former
             .
             All
             these
             are
             said
             to
             come
             up
             
             out
             of
             the
             Sea
             one
             after
             another
             :
             by
             which
             it
             is
             clear
             ,
             That
             there
             are
             so
             many
             successions
             of
             Monarchy
             .
             But
             when
             he
             cometh
             to
             describe
             the
             Ten
             Horns
             ,
             there
             is
             nothing
             to
             prove
             such
             a
             subalternation
             ,
             or
             succession
             of
             one
             Horn
             after
             another
             ,
             but
             rather
             the
             contrary
             .
             The
             Ten
             Horns
             are
             Ten
             Kings
             that
             shall
             arise
             ,
             and
             after
             them
             a
             little
             Horn
             shall
             arise
             ;
             and
             so
             all
             shall
             exist
             together
             :
             But
             when
             the
             Babylonian-Lyon
             rose
             up
             out
             of
             the
             Sea
             ,
             and
             after
             that
             the
             Persian-Bear
             ,
             and
             Graecian-Pard
             ;
             it
             is
             no
             where
             said
             ,
             That
             these
             Beasts
             did
             arise
             up
             
               inter
               se
               invicem
            
             ,
             and
             that
             they
             had
             an
             existence
             at
             one
             and
             the
             same
             time
             .
             For
             ,
             this
             were
             to
             confound
             that
             order
             ,
             succession
             ,
             and
             subalternation
             of
             the
             Four
             Monarchies
             ,
             which
             the
             holy
             Spirit
             intendeth
             .
          
           
             But
             Dr
             Willet
             doth
             make
             this
             Reply
             :
             
               The
               Beast
               in
               the
            
             Revelation
             
               is
               called
               a
               Beast
               with
               seven
               Heads
               ,
               which
               signifie
               so
               many
               forms
               of
               Government
               in
               a
               lineal
               Succession
               .
               So
               the
               Beast
               may
               be
               called
               a
               Beast
               with
               ten
               Horns
               ,
               to
               wit
               ,
               so
               many
               Kings
               succeeding
               one
               another
               .
            
          
           
             Answer
             .
             If
             he
             could
             shew
             as
             good
             Reason
             wherefore
             the
             ten
             Horns
             are
             ten
             Kings
             in
             a
             lineal
             succession
             ,
             as
             the
             seven
             Heads
             of
             the
             Beast
             are
             so
             many
             successive
             forms
             of
             Roman
             Government
             ,
             we
             would
             yield
             up
             the
             Cause
             .
             For
             it
             is
             expresly
             said
             ,
             
               There
               are
               Seven
               Kings
               ,
               five
               are
               fallen
               ,
               one
               is
               ,
               and
               the
               other
               is
               not
               yet
               come
               ,
            
             chap.
             17.
             vers
             .
             10.
             
             Now
             there
             is
             not
             the
             least
             iota
             ,
             word
             ,
             or
             apex
             in
             Dan.
             7.
             to
             prove
             such
             a
             succession
             ,
             but
             rather
             the
             contrary
             .
             To
             me
             therefore
             it
             is
             very
             strange
             ,
             That
             the
             holy
             Spirit
             should
             depart
             from
             his
             usual
             method
             in
             Typical
             and
             Periodical
             Prophecies
             ;
             that
             he
             should
             speak
             of
             ten
             Kings
             lineally
             succeeding
             ,
             and
             yet
             leave
             no
             Character
             or
             Mark
             in
             the
             text
             to
             know
             the
             succession
             .
             I
             may
             say
             ,
             It
             is
             not
             ordinary
             with
             him
             so
             to
             do
             .
             Now
             ,
             take
             the
             ten
             Horns
             for
             the
             ten
             Kings
             of
             the
             Roman
             Empire
             ,
             it
             is
             clear
             ,
             That
             these
             had
             Existence
             with
             the
             Papacie
             ,
             or
             little
             Horn.
             The
             Angel
             thus
             speaketh
             concerning
             the
             ten
             Horns
             ,
             
               These
               have
               no
               Kingdom
               as
               yet
               ,
               but
               receive
               a
               Kingdom
               one
               hour
               with
               the
               Beast
               ,
            
             vers
             .
             12.
             
             Both
             Scriptures
             plainly
             shew
             ,
             That
             the
             ten
             Kings
             are
             of
             one
             and
             the
             same
             time
             ,
             though
             in
             order
             of
             succession
             the
             little
             Horn
             came
             up
             after
             the
             ten
             .
          
           
           
             Querie
             4.
             
             If
             the
             ten
             Horns
             be
             ten
             Kings
             ,
             and
             the
             little
             Horn
             be
             the
             tenth
             ,
             why
             is
             it
             said
             ,
             That
             only
             three
             of
             the
             former
             were
             plucked
             up
             by
             the
             roots
             ?
             This
             implyeth
             ,
             That
             there
             was
             no
             eradication
             of
             the
             residue
             of
             Horns
             ,
             but
             they
             had
             some
             being
             with
             the
             little
             Horn.
             You
             will
             say
             ,
             That
             only
             three
             were
             plucked
             up
             by
             the
             roots
             ,
             because
             the
             little
             Horn
             did
             actually
             subdue
             and
             humble
             three
             ,
             as
             the
             word
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             doth
             signifie
             .
             Well
             ,
             be
             it
             so
             ,
             still
             the
             Question
             is
             ,
             which
             three
             of
             the
             former
             ten
             were
             they
             that
             the
             little
             Horn
             did
             eradicate
             ?
             Dr
             Willet
             ,
             and
             other
             Interpreters
             of
             his
             way
             ,
             take
             it
             for
             a
             granted
             truth
             ,
             That
             he
             did
             pluck
             up
             Three
             Kings
             that
             Reigned
             immediately
             before
             .
             But
             now
             do
             they
             prove
             this
             from
             the
             text
             ?
             The
             words
             are
             without
             any
             restriction
             or
             limitation
             ,
             
               He
               shall
               subdue
               three
               Kings
            
             ,
             vers
             .
             24.
             
             
               Before
               whom
               three
               of
               the
               first
               Horns
               were
               plucked
               up
               by
               the
               roots
               ,
            
             ver
             .
             8.
             
             Therefore
             to
             my
             understanding
             ,
             when
             the
             Scripture
             saith
             ,
             That
             the
             little
             Horn
             came
             up
             among
             the
             Ten
             ,
             and
             did
             subdue
             Three
             only
             ,
             this
             is
             to
             me
             an
             Argument
             ,
             That
             the
             residue
             of
             Horns
             were
             not
             brought
             in
             subjection
             ,
             but
             had
             an
             existence
             as
             Kings
             in
             the
             times
             of
             the
             little
             Horn.
             Secondly
             ,
             It
             is
             said
             of
             the
             little
             Horn
             ,
             
               that
               he
               shall
               be
               diverse
               from
               the
               first
               ,
               and
               shall
               subdue
               three
               Kings
               .
            
             If
             you
             take
             the
             Three
             Kings
             for
             Three
             lineally
             Reigning
             ,
             how
             could
             the
             taking
             away
             of
             such
             a
             Number
             of
             Kings
             make
             the
             little
             Horn
             more
             powerful
             than
             the
             former
             ?
             In
             the
             corrupted
             State
             of
             the
             Ten
             Tribes
             ,
             we
             read
             somtimes
             ,
             That
             he
             that
             came
             after
             did
             take
             away
             the
             life
             of
             the
             Prince
             that
             went
             before
             ;
             yet
             this
             was
             never
             judged
             as
             a
             cause
             of
             greater
             power
             and
             strength
             to
             come
             to
             the
             Kingdom
             by
             such
             Usurpation
             ,
             2
             King.
             9.
             3.
             
             Hos.
             1.
             4.
             
             On
             the
             contrary
             ,
             If
             you
             take
             the
             Ten
             Horns
             for
             Ten
             States
             or
             Realms
             into
             which
             the
             Fourth
             Monarchy
             became
             divided
             ,
             here
             will
             be
             a
             clear
             Reason
             why
             the
             little
             Horn
             became
             unlike
             to
             any
             of
             the
             former
             ,
             because
             he
             brought
             Three
             Kingdoms
             under
             his
             Dominion
             .
             We
             read
             that
             Alexander's
             Dominion
             was
             plucked
             up
             by
             the
             roots
             ;
             and
             this
             was
             the
             cause
             of
             the
             greatness
             of
             the
             King
             of
             the
             South
             ,
             and
             the
             King
             of
             the
             North
             ,
             Dan.
             11.
             4
             ,
             5
             ,
             6.
             
             So
             in
             the
             present
             case
             ,
             the
             eradication
             of
             Three
             States
             or
             
             Dynasties
             before
             the
             little
             Horn
             ,
             is
             the
             cause
             of
             the
             greatness
             of
             his
             Dominion
             .
             Thirdly
             ,
             Let
             us
             come
             to
             particulars
             :
             what
             Three
             Kings
             were
             they
             whom
             Antiochus
             did
             subdue
             ?
             They
             say
             ,
             
               Ptolomaeus
               Philopater
            
             the
             King
             of
             
               Egypt
               ,
               Seleucus
            
             the
             Brother
             of
             Antiochus
             ,
             and
             Demetrius
             .
             But
             it
             is
             mentioned
             D●…n
             .
             11.
             21.
             
               that
               he
               shall
               come
               peaceably
               into
               the
               Province
               .
            
             Now
             what
             peaceable
             coming
             is
             this
             ,
             when
             he
             shall
             begin
             with
             the
             extirpation
             of
             Three
             Kings
             ?
             Again
             ,
             how
             can
             
               Ptolomaeus
               Philopater
            
             be
             one
             of
             the
             Ten
             Kings
             of
             the
             Seleucian
             line
             ?
             No
             Historian
             did
             ever
             reckon
             
               Ptolomaeus
               Philopater
            
             among
             the
             Seleucians
             .
             And
             for
             his
             over-running
             of
             Syria
             ,
             this
             doth
             no
             more
             make
             him
             one
             of
             that
             Succession
             ,
             than
             Tamerlains
             over-running
             the
             Turkish
             Empire
             doth
             make
             him
             one
             of
             the
             Ottoman
             line
             .
             Now
             on
             the
             contrary
             ,
             let
             us
             take
             the
             little
             Horn
             in
             that
             sense
             as
             the
             text
             naturally
             requireth
             ,
             all
             these
             difficulties
             will
             be
             avoided
             .
             The
             Beast
             with
             Ten
             Horns
             is
             the
             Roman
             ,
             as
             divided
             into
             Ten
             lesser
             Kingdoms
             .
             
               The
               little
               Horn
            
             is
             the
             Papacie
             .
             Now
             to
             give
             elbow-room
             to
             this
             in
             Italy
             ,
             Three
             of
             the
             Ten
             Kings
             ,
             lately
             raised
             out
             of
             the
             Ruines
             of
             the
             Empire
             ,
             were
             all
             plucked
             up
             by
             the
             roots
             .
             By
             the
             conquering
             of
             which
             Three
             ,
             and
             by
             the
             voluntary
             resignation
             of
             the
             rest
             ,
             the
             little
             Horn
             became
             more
             stout
             than
             his
             fellows
             ,
             being
             made
             greater
             than
             they
             in
             a
             triple
             proportion
             .
          
           
             Object
             .
             
               But
               you
               will
               say
               ,
               Which
               are
               the
               three
               Kingdoms
               that
               the
               little
               Horn
               did
               subdue
               ?
               and
               how
               do
               you
               prove
               the
               truth
               of
               this
               out
               of
               the
               Stories
               ?
            
          
           
             Sol.
             The
             First
             is
             ,
             
               The
               Kingdom
               of
               the
               Goths
               in
               Italy
               .
            
             For
             the
             Bishops
             of
             Rome
             were
             under
             the
             Dominion
             of
             these
             Kings
             ,
             they
             were
             sent
             as
             their
             Ambassadors
             ,
             and
             lived
             under
             the
             fear
             of
             continual
             Persecution
             ;
             and
             there
             was
             nothing
             in
             the
             Old
             Empire
             to
             keep
             back
             the
             Papal
             power
             in
             the
             growth
             and
             the
             increase
             thereof
             ,
             but
             there
             was
             the
             same
             impediment
             from
             these
             Gothish
             Kings
             .
             Now
             it
             is
             clear
             in
             the
             Stories
             ,
             That
             this
             Government
             was
             wholly
             extinguished
             by
             the
             valiant
             Narses
             ,
             in
             the
             time
             of
             the
             Emperor
             Iustinian
             .
             And
             for
             the
             means
             to
             procure
             it
             ,
             we
             may
             easily
             believe
             ,
             That
             the
             Bishop
             of
             Rome
             had
             some
             hand
             in
             the
             extirpation
             of
             these
             Kings
             ,
             that
             he
             might
             be
             freed
             from
             fear
             .
          
           
           
             Secondly
             ,
             After
             the
             Ruine
             of
             the
             Gothish
             Kings
             ,
             
               the
               Exarchs
               of
               Ravenna
            
             had
             some
             Dominion
             in
             Italy
             .
             Now
             when
             the
             Controversie
             grew
             hot
             ,
             between
             the
             Bishops
             of
             Rome
             and
             the
             Emperors
             of
             Constantinople
             ,
             about
             the
             matter
             of
             Images
             (
             as
             Mornay
             well
             obser●…eth
             in
             his
             History
             of
             the
             Papacie
             ,
             Progress
             .
             27.
             )
             the
             Popes
             then
             called
             in
             the
             Lombards
             against
             the
             Exarchs
             ,
             to
             the
             ruine
             of
             both
             Estates
             .
             And
             for
             the
             Dukedom
             of
             Rome
             (
             for
             so
             we
             must
             now
             call
             it
             )
             the
             People
             of
             that
             City
             upon
             the
             Difference
             concerning
             Images
             in
             Churches
             ,
             being
             engaged
             with
             the
             Popes
             in
             Rebellion
             ,
             wholly
             shook
             off
             the
             yoke
             of
             the
             Emperor
             ,
             and
             took
             an
             Oath
             to
             be
             subject
             to
             the
             Pope
             in
             all
             Points
             .
             And
             here
             (
             saith
             Baronius
             ,
             An.
             726
             )
             
               was
               an
               end
               of
               those
               Dukes
               and
               Governors
               which
               the
               Emperors
               were
               wont
               to
               send
               to
               Command
               in
               Rome
               ,
               and
               the
               Places
               adjoyning
               .
               Sigonius
            
             also
             speaketh
             much
             to
             the
             same
             purpose
             ,
             
               That
               the
               Dukedom
               of
               Rome
               was
               translated
               from
               the
               Graecians
               to
               the
               Pope
               of
               Rome
               ,
               by
               reason
               of
               their
               wicked
               Heresie
               and
               Impiety
               .
            
             But
             that
             which
             he
             calls
             Heresie
             ,
             is
             no
             other
             but
             Iconomachia
             ,
             or
             a
             standing
             against
             Image-worship
             .
          
           
             Thirdly
             ,
             The
             Kingdom
             of
             the
             Lombards
             growing
             very
             Mi●…hty
             ,
             by
             the
             Conquests
             over
             the
             Exarchs
             ;
             these
             also
             the
             Bishop
             of
             Rome
             did
             subdue
             ,
             humble
             ,
             and
             eradicate
             by
             a
             Forreign
             power
             :
             For
             ,
             he
             brought
             in
             the
             French
             into
             Italy
             ,
             which
             did
             willingly
             hearken
             to
             the
             Motion
             .
             By
             these
             several
             passages
             it
             is
             clear
             ,
             That
             the
             Papacy
             did
             destroy
             Three
             new-Erected
             States
             ;
             by
             means
             whereof
             ,
             the
             Temporal
             Dominion
             of
             that
             Church
             in
             Italy
             was
             much
             established
             .
             And
             so
             ,
             according
             to
             the
             Story
             ,
             it
             is
             made
             clear
             ,
             That
             the
             little
             Horn
             did
             humble
             and
             subdue
             Three
             of
             the
             former
             Horns
             ,
             and
             did
             pluck
             them
             up
             by
             the
             roots
             .
          
           
             Querie
             5.
             
             If
             the
             Ten
             Horns
             signifie
             Ten
             Kings
             in
             a
             lineal
             Succession
             ,
             Why
             is
             it
             that
             in
             Daniel
             and
             the
             Revelation
             ,
             the
             Beasts
             ,
             their
             Heads
             ,
             and
             Horns
             ,
             usually
             signifie
             Realms
             and
             Dominions
             ,
             and
             not
             Persons
             individually
             Reigning
             ?
             The
             Mede-Persian
             Monarchy
             is
             Typed
             by
             a
             Ram
             ,
             and
             the
             two
             Horns
             are
             not
             two
             particular
             Kings
             ,
             but
             the
             two
             Kingdoms
             of
             Media
             and
             
               Persia
               ,
               Dan.
            
             8.
             vers
             .
             24.
             
             So
             the
             Goat
             is
             the
             
             Graecian
             Monarchy
             ,
             and
             the
             Four
             Horns
             are
             Four
             Kingdoms
             that
             shall
             arise
             out
             of
             that
             Nation
             ,
             vers
             .
             22.
             
             Also
             ,
             the
             Ten
             Horns
             of
             the
             Beast
             in
             the
             Revelation
             do
             not
             signifie
             Ten
             particular
             Kings
             ,
             but
             so
             many
             Realms
             and
             Dominions
             of
             the
             Roman
             Kingdom
             .
             Further
             ,
             The
             Beast
             which
             came
             out
             of
             the
             Earth
             with
             Two
             Horns
             ,
             Rev.
             13.
             11
             ,
             signifieth
             the
             Papacie
             ;
             and
             the
             Two
             Horns
             his
             bi-partite
             Jurisdiction
             ;
             to
             wit
             ,
             His
             Spiritual
             and
             his
             Temporal
             Dominion
             .
             There
             is
             good
             Reason
             to
             be
             rendred
             for
             this
             ,
             because
             Persons
             do
             change
             ,
             Governments
             do
             abide
             .
             And
             it
             is
             the
             manner
             of
             the
             Spirit
             ,
             when
             he
             doth
             describe
             the
             Tyrannical
             Kingdoms
             of
             this
             world
             by
             Beasts
             ,
             to
             decypher
             them
             by
             that
             which
             is
             Permanent
             and
             Characteristical
             ,
             and
             not
             by
             that
             which
             is
             fluent
             and
             changable
             at
             every
             turn
             .
             To
             me
             therefore
             this
             is
             a
             good
             Reason
             (
             considering
             the
             Analogie
             of
             both
             Prophecies
             )
             that
             the
             Fourth
             Beast
             should
             be
             set
             forth
             by
             the
             Character
             of
             Ten
             Horns
             ,
             and
             that
             these
             Horns
             should
             signifie
             so
             many
             Realms
             and
             Dominions
             of
             the
             Fourth
             Kingdom
             .
          
           
             Object
             .
             
               But
               it
               will
               be
               objected
               ,
               in
               the
               description
               of
               the
               Graecian
               State
               under
               the
               similitude
               of
               an
               He-goat
               ,
               That
               Alexander
               is
               the
               Great
               Horn
               that
               came
               up
               ,
               and
               Antiochus
               Epiphanes
               is
               the
               little
               Horn.
               Therefore
               the
               Beasts
               and
               their
               Horns
               in
            
             Daniel
             
               and
               the
            
             Revelation
             ,
             
               do
               not
               alwayes
               signifie
               Tyrannical
               Empires
               ,
               Dynasties
               ,
               and
               Governments
               ;
               but
               somtimes
               denote
               particular
               Persons
               that
               Reign
               .
            
          
           
             Sol.
             One
             Exception
             must
             not
             prejudice
             a
             general
             Rule
             .
             He
             that
             can
             ,
             let
             him
             give
             another
             Example
             .
             Our
             Position
             is
             built
             upon
             the
             general
             use
             of
             both
             Prophecies
             .
             But
             Dr
             Willet
             ,
             and
             the
             Interpreter●…
             of
             that
             way
             ,
             do
             build
             only
             upon
             one
             particular
             Instance
             ,
             exempt
             from
             the
             ordinary
             Method
             .
             Secondly
             ,
             We
             grant
             ,
             That
             in
             the
             description
             of
             the
             He-goat
             ,
             the
             first
             Horn
             is
             
               Alexander
               the
               Great
            
             ,
             and
             the
             little
             Horn
             is
             
               Antiochus
               Epiphanes
            
             ;
             yet
             in
             the
             Case
             we
             speak
             ,
             neither
             of
             these
             are
             any
             way
             to
             be
             ranked
             in
             the
             Number
             of
             Horns
             ,
             that
             do
             Characteristically
             and
             specifically
             distinguish
             the
             Graecian
             from
             the
             other
             Three
             Monarchies
             .
             It
             is
             expresly
             said
             ,
             
               That
               a
               Third
               Beast
               c●…me
               out
               of
               the
               Earth
               with
               Four
               Heads
               .
            
             Now
             these
             are
             not
             
             such
             a
             Number
             of
             particular
             Kings
             ,
             but
             they
             are
             so
             many
             Realms
             ,
             States
             ,
             and
             Dominions
             that
             shall
             stand
             up
             ●…ut
             of
             that
             Nation
             ,
             as
             we
             have
             above
             proved
             ,
             and
             are
             the
             special
             Notes
             of
             that
             Kingdom
             .
             If
             therefore
             the
             Ten
             Horns
             be
             the
             Characters
             and
             Badges
             of
             the
             Fourth
             Beast
             ,
             they
             are
             so
             many
             Realms
             ,
             Divisions
             ,
             and
             Regencies
             of
             the
             Fourth
             Empire
             .
             
               The
               course
               of
               the
               Spirit
            
             ,
             is
             to
             set
             forth
             different
             Empires
             under
             different
             Types
             ,
             and
             to
             distinguish
             Kings
             or
             Kingdoms
             of
             one
             and
             the
             same
             time
             ,
             from
             those
             that
             come
             after
             one
             another
             in
             a
             lineal
             Descent
             .
             Now
             they
             that
             hold
             the
             Ten
             Horns
             to
             be
             so
             many
             Kings
             in
             the
             Seleucian
             line
             ,
             what
             Letter
             or
             Syllable
             is
             in
             the
             text
             to
             prove
             such
             a
             succession
             ?
          
           
             Querie
             6.
             
             Sixthly
             ,
             If
             the
             Ten
             Horns
             of
             the
             Fourth
             Beast
             be
             Ten
             Kings
             succeeding
             one
             another
             ,
             rather
             than
             one
             and
             the
             same
             Empire
             divided
             into
             Ten
             inferiour
             Realms
             ;
             why
             should
             the
             holy
             Spirit
             in
             the
             Iron-Metal
             ,
             chap.
             2.
             speak
             so
             much
             of
             the
             Division
             of
             this
             Kingdom
             ,
             That
             in
             the
             Feet
             and
             Toes
             of
             the
             Image
             it
             should
             be
             divided
             into
             a
             plurality
             of
             States
             ,
             that
             these
             should
             mingle
             themselves
             with
             the
             seed
             of
             men
             ,
             to
             preserve
             an
             Union
             ?
             All
             this
             sheweth
             ,
             That
             the
             Fourth
             Kingdom
             toward
             the
             latter
             times
             should
             be
             divided
             into
             many
             lesser
             Dominions
             .
             And
             if
             we
             may
             interpret
             one
             Scripture
             by
             another
             ,
             both
             speaking
             of
             one
             and
             the
             same
             matter
             ,
             the
             particular
             Number
             of
             Realms
             is
             represented
             by
             the
             Ten
             Horns
             .
             Now
             ,
             they
             that
             will
             have
             Ten
             Horns
             to
             be
             Ten
             Kings
             lineally
             Reigning
             ,
             cannot
             infer
             from
             hence
             any
             Division
             of
             the
             Fourth
             Kingdom
             ;
             nor
             consequently
             the
             need
             of
             any
             mixture
             of
             State.
             Kings
             Successively
             Reigning
             ,
             need
             no
             mingling
             one
             with
             another
             to
             preserve
             the
             Union
             of
             a
             Kingdom
             .
             On
             the
             contrary
             ,
             if
             we
             take
             the
             Ten
             Horns
             for
             Ten
             Kings
             or
             Kingdoms
             at
             one
             and
             the
             same
             time
             ,
             there
             is
             nothing
             more
             ordinary
             than
             to
             establish
             Leagues
             and
             Confederacies
             betwixt
             Kingdoms
             and
             States
             that
             are
             contemporary
             each
             with
             other
             .
             For
             that
             which
             they
             Alledge
             concerning
             the
             Division
             betwixt
             the
             Seleucidae
             and
             the
             Lagidae
             ,
             we
             have
             spoken
             thereof
             already
             ,
             and
             therefore
             we
             will
             not
             repeate
             the
             same
             things
             again
             .
          
           
           
             Let
             us
             now
             in
             the
             last
             place
             come
             to
             those
             Queries
             concerning
             the
             Collation
             of
             the
             little
             Horn
             mentioned
             Dan.
             7.
             and
             that
             little
             Horn
             spoken
             of
             chap.
             8.
             
             For
             they
             that
             differ
             from
             us
             ,
             stand
             much
             upon
             this
             ,
             That
             
               Antiochus
               Epiphanes
            
             is
             signified
             in
             both
             Scriptures
             under
             the
             same
             Emblem
             .
          
           
             Here
             we
             agree
             with
             them
             in
             Two
             Points
             :
             First
             ,
             That
             the
             Prophecie
             of
             Daniel
             doth
             repeat
             one
             and
             the
             same
             thing
             ,
             for
             the
             better
             understanding
             of
             the
             Visions
             .
             But
             then
             there
             must
             be
             some
             good
             evidence
             from
             the
             text
             ,
             to
             prove
             the
             things
             repeated
             to
             be
             the
             same
             ,
             though
             the
             Expression
             is
             divers
             .
             Now
             what
             good
             proof
             is
             there
             to
             make
             it
             appear
             that
             the
             little
             Horn
             ,
             chap.
             7.
             and
             that
             little
             Horn
             ,
             chap.
             8.
             are
             one
             and
             the
             same
             ?
             Secondly
             ,
             We
             agree
             ,
             That
             
               Antiochus
               Epiphanes
            
             ,
             the
             Graecian
             Antichrist
             ,
             doth
             resemble
             the
             Roman
             Antichrist
             in
             many
             things
             ;
             and
             that
             the
             one
             is
             the
             express
             Image
             and
             Type
             of
             the
             other
             .
             In
             these
             particulars
             then
             they
             do
             agree
             ,
             and
             are
             parallel
             .
          
           
             
               
                 
                   Antiochus
                   ,
                   
                     the
                     little
                     Horn
                  
                   ,
                   Dan.
                   8.
                   
                
                 
                   The
                   Papacie
                   ,
                   
                     the
                     little
                     Horn
                  
                   ,
                   Dan.
                   7.
                   
                
              
               
                 
                   1.
                   
                   
                     Out
                     of
                     the
                     Graecian
                     Kingdom
                     there
                     came
                     forth
                     a
                     little
                     Horn
                     ,
                     vers
                     .
                  
                   9.
                   
                
                 
                   1.
                   
                   
                     After
                     the
                     Ten
                     Kings
                     a
                     little
                     Horn
                     did
                     arise
                     out
                     of
                     the
                     Fourth
                     Kingdom
                     ,
                     vers
                     .
                  
                   8.
                   
                
              
               
                 
                   2.
                   
                   
                     He
                     did
                     destroy
                     the
                     Mighty
                     ,
                     &
                     the
                     Holy
                     People
                     ,
                     vers
                     .
                  
                   24.
                   
                
                 
                   2.
                   
                   
                     He
                     shall
                     wear
                     out
                     the
                     Saints
                     of
                     the
                     Most
                     High
                     ,
                     vers
                     .
                  
                   21
                   ,
                   23.
                   
                
              
               
                 
                   3.
                   
                   
                     He
                     shall
                     magnifie
                     himself
                     in
                     his
                     heart
                     against
                     the
                     God
                     of
                     gods
                     ,
                     vers
                     .
                  
                   25.
                   
                
                 
                   3.
                   
                   
                     He
                     shall
                     speak
                     great
                     things
                     against
                     the
                     Most
                     High
                     ,
                     vers
                     .
                  
                   25.
                   
                
              
               
                 
                   4.
                   
                   
                     By
                     him
                     the
                     daily
                     Sacrifice
                     shall
                     be
                     taken
                     away
                     ,
                     vers
                     .
                  
                   11.
                   
                
                 
                   4.
                   
                   
                     He
                     shall
                     think
                     to
                     change
                     Times
                     and
                     Laws
                     ,
                     and
                     they
                     shall
                     be
                     given
                     into
                     his
                     hand
                     ,
                     vers
                     .
                  
                   25.
                   
                
              
            
          
           
             In
             these
             several
             Particulars
             it
             is
             manifest
             ,
             That
             the
             little
             Horn
             mentioned
             chap.
             7.
             and
             chap.
             8.
             do
             both
             agree
             .
             But
             yet
             whosoever
             he
             is
             that
             diligently
             considers
             the
             Scriptures
             ,
             he
             shall
             finde
             them
             to
             differ
             in
             the
             most
             remarkable
             circumstances
             .
          
           
           
             First
             ,
             They
             differ
             in
             the
             State
             or
             Government
             where
             they
             arose
             ;
             the
             little
             Horn
             ,
             chap.
             8.
             rose
             out
             of
             one
             of
             the
             Four
             Divisions
             of
             the
             Graecian
             State
             ;
             but
             the
             little
             Horn
             ,
             chap.
             7.
             arose
             out
             of
             the
             Kingdom
             Typed
             by
             the
             Fourth
             Beast
             ,
             which
             all
             our
             Arguments
             asorementioned
             ,
             prove
             to
             be
             the
             Roman
             Kingdom
             .
          
           
             Secondly
             ,
             They
             differ
             in
             the
             preparation
             and
             moulding
             of
             the
             State
             before
             the
             rising
             of
             either
             of
             them
             .
             For
             the
             little
             Horn
             ,
             chap.
             8.
             arose
             out
             of
             one
             of
             the
             Four
             Divisions
             of
             the
             Greek
             Empire
             :
             But
             the
             little
             Horn
             ,
             chap.
             7.
             arose
             after
             the
             Division
             of
             the
             Roman
             Empire
             into
             Ten
             inferiour
             Realms
             .
          
           
             Thirdly
             ,
             They
             differ
             in
             their
             Actions
             .
             For
             the
             little
             Horn
             ,
             chap.
             8.
             is
             only
             said
             to
             rise
             out
             of
             one
             of
             the
             Four
             Kingdoms
             of
             the
             Graecian
             Empire
             ;
             but
             the
             little
             Horn
             ,
             chap.
             7.
             is
             said
             to
             arise
             after
             the
             Ten
             Kingdoms
             of
             the
             Roman
             Empire
             :
             And
             that
             he
             did
             pluck
             up
             Three
             of
             the
             former
             Kingdoms
             by
             the
             roots
             .
             This
             is
             cleer
             from
             the
             scope
             of
             the
             text
             .
          
           
             Fourthly
             ,
             They
             differ
             in
             the
             object
             of
             their
             Tyranny
             .
             For
             though
             the
             little
             Horn
             ,
             chap.
             8.
             is
             said
             to
             destroy
             the
             Holy
             People
             ,
             vers
             .
             24.
             yet
             the
             whole
             scope
             of
             the
             text
             sheweth
             that
             only
             the
             People
             of
             the
             Jews
             are
             here
             intended
             .
             Now
             for
             the
             little
             Horn
             ,
             chap.
             7.
             he
             is
             said
             to
             wear
             out
             the
             Saints
             of
             the
             Most
             High
             ,
             but
             there
             is
             no
             circumstance
             in
             the
             text
             to
             prove
             that
             these
             are
             the
             People
             of
             the
             Jews
             .
             There
             is
             not
             one
             word
             of
             taking
             away
             the
             daily
             Sacrifice
             ,
             or
             of
             the
             setting
             up
             of
             the
             Abomination
             of
             Desolation
             ,
             or
             of
             Daniel's
             People
             ,
             or
             the
             pleasant
             Land
             ,
             or
             any
             such
             passages
             which
             the
             Prophet
             useth
             when
             he
             speaketh
             of
             the
             Jews
             .
             All
             that
             can
             be
             said
             ,
             is
             this
             ,
             
               That
               he
               shall
               change
               Laws
               and
               times
               :
            
             But
             from
             hence
             we
             cannot
             infer
             ,
             That
             these
             must
             be
             the
             Laws
             and
             Times
             of
             the
             Jewish
             Church
             .
             For
             the
             Apostle
             ,
             when
             he
             speaketh
             of
             the
             Great
             Antichrist
             ,
             doth
             use
             such
             an
             expression
             ,
             
               He
               shall
               sit
               in
               the
               Temple
               of
               God
               ,
               shewing
               himself
               that
               he
               is
               God
               ,
            
             2
             Thess.
             2.
             
             And
             yet
             he
             doth
             not
             mean
             the
             literal
             Temple
             in
             Ierusalem
             .
          
           
             Fifthly
             ,
             They
             differ
             in
             the
             time
             of
             the
             Continuance
             of
             
             their
             Tyranny
             .
             The
             little
             Horn
             ,
             chap.
             8.
             shall
             prevail
             ,
             and
             the
             Sanctuary
             shall
             be
             troden
             down
             
               unto
               Evenings
               ,
               Mornings
            
             2300
             ,
             vers
             .
             14.
             
             Now
             for
             the
             little
             Horn
             ,
             chap.
             7.
             he
             shall
             
               wear
               out
               the
               Saints
               a
               time
               ,
               and
               times
               ,
               and
               half
               a
               time
               ,
               till
               the
               Saints
               themselves
               take
               the
               Kingdom
               .
            
             How
             this
             time
             ,
             and
             times
             ,
             and
             half
             a
             time
             ,
             should
             be
             all
             one
             with
             the
             2300
             Evenings
             ,
             Mornings
             ,
             I
             cannot
             discern
             .
             If
             you
             apply
             this
             to
             the
             Roman
             Antichrist
             ,
             a
             time
             ,
             and
             times
             ,
             and
             half
             a
             time
             ,
             is
             the
             full
             sum
             of
             the
             Antichristian
             Tyranny
             ,
             Rev.
             12.
             14.
             
          
           
             Sixthly
             ,
             They
             differ
             in
             the
             Event
             .
             For
             after
             the
             2300
             Evenings
             Mornings
             ,
             the
             Temple
             was
             cleansed
             ,
             vers
             .
             14.
             and
             after
             that
             the
             little
             Horn
             had
             finished
             his
             times
             ,
             he
             was
             broken
             without
             hand
             ,
             vers
             .
             25.
             
             All
             these
             things
             were
             truly
             fulfilled
             in
             
               Antiochus
               Epiphanes
            
             .
             But
             if
             you
             apply
             the
             little
             Horn
             ,
             chap.
             7.
             to
             Antiochus
             ,
             there
             can
             be
             no
             right
             accommodation
             .
             First
             ,
             That
             little
             Horn
             did
             wear
             out
             the
             Saints
             till
             the
             Son
             of
             Man
             came
             in
             the
             clouds
             of
             Heaven
             :
             but
             so
             did
             not
             
               Antiochus
               Epiphanes
            
             .
             Secondly
             ,
             The
             little
             Horn
             did
             wear
             out
             the
             Saints
             a
             time
             ,
             and
             times
             ,
             and
             half
             a
             time
             ,
             till
             the
             Dominion
             under
             the
             whole
             Heaven
             was
             given
             to
             the
             Saints
             :
             but
             so
             did
             not
             
               Antiochus
               Epiphanes
            
             .
             Thirdly
             ,
             The
             little
             Horn
             shall
             continue
             till
             the
             time
             of
             the
             Destruction
             of
             the
             Fourth
             Beast
             .
             But
             the
             Kingdom
             of
             the
             Seleucians
             ended
             not
             at
             Antiochus
             ;
             many
             of
             that
             line
             succeeded
             afterwards
             in
             the
             Kingdom
             .
             And
             there
             was
             a
             good
             space
             of
             time
             from
             the
             death
             of
             Antiochus
             to
             the
             destruction
             of
             the
             Seleucian
             State
             by
             Pompey
             the
             Great
             .
             But
             Dr
             Willet
             replieth
             ,
             
               Though
               the
               Kingdom
               was
               not
               utterly
               ruined
               ,
               yet
               the
               Glory
               of
               it
               was
               much
               abated
               at
               Antiochus
               his
               death
               .
            
             By
             the
             like
             Reason
             I
             might
             argue
             ,
             That
             there
             was
             an
             end
             of
             the
             Babylonian
             Kingdom
             at
             the
             death
             of
             Nebuchadnezzar
             ,
             because
             the
             Glory
             of
             that
             Kingdom
             did
             afterwards
             abate
             in
             Evilmerodach
             .
             I
             might
             argue
             also
             ,
             That
             the
             Graecian
             Kingdom
             ended
             in
             Alexander
             ,
             because
             the
             Kings
             that
             arose
             after
             him
             did
             not
             arise
             in
             his
             strength
             .
             Others
             there
             are
             that
             do
             Alledge
             the
             words
             of
             the
             Eleventh
             Verse
             :
             
               I
               beheld
               then
               ,
               because
               of
               the
               voyce
               of
               the
               great
               words
               which
               the
               little
               Horn
               spake
               .
               I
               beheld
               even
               till
               the
               Beast
               was
               slain
               ,
               and
               his
               Body
               given
               to
               the
            
             
             
               burning
               fire
               .
               From
               hence
               they
               gather
               ,
               That
               the
               little
               Horn
               was
               first
               broken
               off
               ;
               and
               when
               the
               Beast
               was
               Hornless
               and
               harmless
               ,
               then
               he
               was
               destroyed
               .
            
             Such
             a
             sense
             may
             be
             admitted
             .
             For
             we
             read
             in
             the
             Scripture
             ,
             That
             the
             Davidical
             Kingdom
             should
             be
             destroyed
             for
             the
             sins
             of
             Manasseth
             King
             of
             Iudah
             ,
             2
             King.
             23.
             26.
             yet
             the
             destruction
             was
             many
             years
             after
             his
             death
             .
             Though
             such
             a
             sense
             may
             be
             admitted
             ,
             yet
             it
             will
             not
             stand
             in
             the
             present
             case
             ;
             for
             in
             this
             Chapter
             the
             little
             Horn
             is
             said
             to
             continue
             till
             the
             destruction
             of
             the
             Fourth
             Kingdom
             .
             It
             is
             said
             in
             express
             terms
             in
             the
             26
             Verse
             ,
             
               That
               the
               Iudgement
               shall
               sit
               ,
               and
               they
               shall
               take
               away
               his
               Dominion
               ,
               to
               consume
               and
               to
               destroy
               it
               to
               the
               time
               of
               the
               end
               .
            
             Here
             I
             demand
             ,
             Whose
             Dominion
             is
             it
             that
             they
             shall
             take
             away
             ?
             Is
             it
             the
             Dominion
             of
             the
             Fourth
             Beast
             ,
             Hornless
             and
             harmless
             ?
             No
             :
             This
             is
             immediately
             spoken
             of
             the
             little
             Horn
             that
             should
             wear
             out
             the
             Saints
             of
             the
             most
             High
             ,
             and
             should
             change
             Laws
             and
             Times
             ,
             a
             time
             ,
             and
             times
             ,
             and
             half
             a
             time
             .
             Touching
             this
             little
             Horn
             it
             's
             said
             ,
             That
             the
             Judgement
             shall
             sit
             ,
             and
             they
             shall
             take
             away
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             his
             Kingdom
             .
             They
             shall
             bereave
             him
             of
             his
             Dominion
             .
             Therefore
             it
             is
             clear
             ,
             That
             the
             times
             of
             the
             little
             Horn
             shall
             continue
             to
             the
             end
             of
             the
             Beast's
             Kingdom
             ,
             and
             to
             the
             beginning
             of
             the
             Kingdom
             of
             the
             Saints
             .
             And
             yet
             further
             ,
             Daniel
             did
             desire
             to
             know
             the
             truth
             of
             the
             Fourth
             Beast
             ,
             and
             of
             the
             Ten
             Horns
             ,
             &
             of
             the
             little
             Horn
             that
             came
             up
             after
             them
             .
             
               I
               beheld
            
             ,
             (
             saith
             he
             )
             
               and
               the
               same
               Horn
               made
               War
               with
               the
               Saints
               ,
               and
               prevailed
               against
               them
               ,
               until
               the
               ancient
               of
               dayes
               came
               ;
               and
               judgement
               was
               given
               to
               the
               Saints
               of
               the
               most
               High
               ,
               &
               the
               time
               came
               that
               the
               Saints
               possessed
               the
               Kingdom
               ,
            
             vers
             .
             22.
             
             From
             these
             words
             also
             it
             is
             manifest
             ,
             That
             the
             times
             of
             the
             little
             Horn
             do
             extend
             to
             the
             beginning
             of
             the
             Kingdom
             of
             the
             Saints
             .
             Now
             how
             this
             should
             be
             verified
             in
             
               Antiochus
               Epiphanes
            
             ,
             it
             is
             not
             as
             yet
             made
             so
             clear
             to
             me
             .
             But
             if
             you
             apply
             this
             to
             the
             Papacy
             ,
             all
             things
             will
             agree
             :
             for
             it
             is
             manifest
             ,
             That
             the
             Two-Horned
             Beast
             in
             the
             Revelation
             must
             wear
             out
             the
             Saints
             a
             time
             ,
             and
             times
             ,
             and
             half
             a
             time
             ,
             Rev.
             12.
             14.
             
             Rev.
             11.
             7
             ,
             8
             ,
             9.
             
             Now
             when
             this
             time
             is
             once
             fulfilled
             ,
             the
             Beast
             and
             the
             false
             Prophet
             shall
             both
             of
             them
             be
             cast
             into
             the
             Lake
             of
             fire
             ;
             and
             
             the
             Reign
             of
             Christ
             and
             of
             his
             Saints
             shall
             begin
             upon
             the
             Earth
             ,
             Rev.
             19.
             20.
             
             Rev.
             20.
             1
             ,
             2
             ,
             3
             ,
             4.
             
          
           
             But
             by
             the
             way
             ,
             because
             some
             stand
             for
             a
             Personal
             Reign
             of
             Christ
             at
             the
             end
             of
             the
             Fourth
             Kingdom
             ,
             because
             then
             the
             
             Son
             of
             Man
             is
             said
             to
             come
             in
             the
             clouds
             of
             Heaven
             ;
             I
             Answer
             ,
             That
             they
             have
             no
             Reason
             to
             take
             that
             strictly
             ,
             which
             we
             can
             prove
             from
             the
             Harmony
             of
             Scripture
             ,
             ought
             to
             be
             construed
             with
             some
             kind
             of
             Latitude
             .
             These
             things
             are
             shewed
             to
             Daniel
             (
             who
             saw
             afar
             off
             )
             as
             joyned
             together
             ;
             and
             yet
             in
             experience
             they
             do
             not
             meet
             in
             the
             same
             juncture
             of
             time
             .
             As
             for
             example
             ,
             A
             man
             that
             traveleth
             in
             Wales
             ,
             or
             some
             such-like
             hilly
             Country
             ,
             while
             he
             is
             yet
             at
             a
             long
             distance
             ,
             he
             may
             see
             the
             tops
             of
             two
             great
             Mountains
             as
             though
             they
             were
             near
             together
             :
             yet
             when
             he
             cometh
             to
             look
             upon
             them
             with
             a
             more
             distinct
             view
             ,
             the
             one
             may
             be
             ten
             or
             twelve
             Miles
             beyond
             the
             other
             in
             the
             distance
             of
             place
             .
             It
             is
             well
             known
             also
             ,
             That
             when
             the
             Apostles
             made
             mention
             of
             the
             coming
             of
             Antichrist
             ,
             they
             also
             spake
             of
             the
             end
             of
             the
             world
             ,
             2
             Thess.
             2.
             
             What
             then
             ?
             shall
             we
             argue
             ,
             as
             many
             do
             ,
             That
             the
             Discovery
             of
             Antichrist
             will
             not
             be
             till
             the
             end
             of
             the
             world
             ?
             This
             cannot
             be
             .
             We
             that
             live
             in
             these
             times
             ,
             may
             see
             more
             clearly
             ,
             That
             Antichrist
             hath
             been
             revealed
             many
             hundred
             years
             ago
             ;
             and
             the
             end
             of
             the
             world
             is
             not
             yet
             come
             .
             If
             therefore
             a
             Reason
             be
             demanded
             ,
             why
             these
             two
             ,
             The
             Revelation
             of
             Antichrist
             ,
             and
             the
             End
             of
             the
             World
             ,
             are
             coupled
             together
             ;
             we
             may
             say
             ,
             That
             the
             Apostles
             ,
             who
             saw
             afar
             off
             ,
             spake
             of
             these
             things
             ,
             because
             they
             should
             happen
             in
             the
             last
             times
             ;
             though
             in
             the
             particularity
             of
             time
             the
             one
             might
             be
             before
             the
             other
             .
             In
             like
             manner
             ,
             the
             Prophet
             Daniel
             ,
             who
             lived
             very
             remote
             from
             the
             Dissolution
             of
             the
             Fourth
             Kingdom
             ,
             from
             the
             glorious
             Kingdom
             of
             the
             Saints
             ,
             and
             from
             the
             coming
             of
             the
             Son
             of
             Man
             in
             the
             clouds
             of
             Heaven
             ;
             to
             him
             all
             these
             things
             in
             the
             general
             ,
             and
             in
             the
             lump
             may
             be
             represented
             together
             ,
             when
             in
             a
             more
             distinct
             and
             particular
             consideration
             ,
             the
             one
             may
             be
             before
             the
             other
             .
             The
             consuming
             of
             the
             Kingdom
             of
             Antichrist
             with
             the
             word
             of
             his
             mouth
             ,
             and
             the
             establishment
             of
             the
             Kingdom
             of
             the
             Saints
             ,
             may
             be
             before
             the
             
             Personal
             appearing
             of
             the
             Son
             of
             Man
             in
             the
             Clouds
             of
             Heaven
             .
          
           
             But
             now
             it
             is
             not
             to
             our
             present
             purpose
             to
             meddle
             with
             this
             Difficulty
             .
             That
             which
             we
             have
             to
             say
             ,
             is
             only
             concerning
             the
             Fourth
             Beast
             ,
             That
             either
             he
             must
             signifie
             the
             Seleucian
             or
             the
             Roman
             Kingdom
             .
             But
             ,
             we
             have
             proved
             by
             many
             Arguments
             ,
             against
             Dr
             Willet
             ,
             and
             others
             ,
             That
             the
             Seleucian
             cannot
             here
             be
             meant
             .
             Therefore
             we
             may
             safely
             conclude
             ,
             That
             the
             Fourth
             Beast
             with
             Ten
             Horns
             ,
             is
             the
             proper
             Embleme
             
             and
             Type
             of
             the
             Roman
             Kingdom
             .
             From
             whence
             also
             we
             gather
             ,
             That
             Daniel
             in
             his
             Prophecie
             ,
             and
             Iohn
             in
             the
             Revelation
             (
             so
             far
             as
             this
             Point
             is
             concerned
             )
             do
             speak
             of
             one
             and
             the
             same
             matter
             .
             And
             by
             the
             Interpretation
             of
             the
             one
             ,
             we
             may
             finde
             out
             the
             sense
             of
             the
             other
             Prophecie
             .
             There
             is
             no
             Principle
             that
             can
             be
             more
             useful
             and
             demonstrative
             than
             this
             ,
             To
             discover
             the
             Truth
             by
             the
             Harmony
             of
             the
             Prophecies
             .
          
           
             Now
             ,
             let
             us
             go
             to
             the
             beginning
             of
             the
             Roman
             ,
             as
             the
             Fourth
             Metal-Kingdom
             ,
             and
             so
             let
             us
             see
             how
             there
             is
             a
             Chain
             of
             666
             years
             from
             that
             beginning
             ,
             to
             the
             Universal
             Headship
             of
             the
             Beast
             ,
             This
             shall
             be
             the
             Subject
             of
             the
             Chapter
             following
             .
          
        
      
       
         
         
           
             CHAP.
             VI.
          
           That
           the
           Beginning
           of
           the
           Roman
           ,
           as
           the
           Fourth
           Metal-Kingdom
           ,
           is
           not
           from
           the
           time
           of
           Julius
           ,
           or
           
             Augustus
             Caesar
          
           ,
           or
           from
           any
           other
           vulgar
           Beginning
           ;
           but
           precisely
           from
           that
           instant
           ,
           when
           the
           Church
           of
           God
           came
           under
           the
           Dominion
           of
           the
           Romans
           ,
           60
           years
           before
           the
           Birth
           of
           the
           Lord
           ,
           and
           666
           before
           the
           going
           forth
           of
           the
           Decree
           ,
           That
           the
           Bishop
           of
           Rome
           should
           be
           Head
           over
           all
           the
           Churches
           .
        
         
           THere
           are
           in
           this
           Proposition
           Two
           Parts
           that
           need
           special
           Confirmation
           :
           First
           ,
           That
           the
           Roman
           did
           begin
           as
           the
           Fourth
           Metal-Kingdom
           ,
           when
           the
           Church
           came
           under
           the
           Dominion
           of
           that
           People
           .
           Secondly
           ,
           That
           from
           this
           beginning
           there
           is
           the
           space
           of
           666
           years
           ,
           to
           the
           Universal
           Headship
           .
        
         
           For
           the
           Beginning
           of
           the
           Dominion
           of
           the
           Romans
           ,
           according
           to
           different
           Relations
           ,
           men
           may
           differently
           state
           the
           Epocha
           thereof
           .
           But
           laying
           aside
           all
           other
           considerations
           ,
           we
           are
           to
           note
           in
           what
           sense
           Daniel
           doth
           begin
           it
           as
           the
           Fourth
           Metal-Kingdom
           .
           And
           here
           I
           stand
           upon
           it
           ,
           That
           we
           are
           principally
           to
           look
           to
           the
           state
           of
           the
           Church
           ;
           How
           the
           Church
           ,
           and
           the
           Continent
           adjoyning
           ,
           came
           under
           the
           Dominion
           of
           that
           People
           .
        
         
           For
           the
           clearing
           of
           this
           ,
           we
           will
           also
           demonstrate
           two
           things
           :
           First
           ,
           That
           the
           Beginning
           of
           this
           Fourth
           Monarchy
           is
           to
           be
           stated
           according
           to
           Church-relations
           .
           Secondly
           ,
           We
           will
           shew
           ,
           out
           of
           the
           Stories
           ,
           in
           whose
           times
           ,
           and
           by
           whose
           means
           ,
           the
           Church
           came
           first
           under
           the
           Dominion
           of
           that
           People
           .
        
         
           Now
           ,
           That
           the
           Roman
           doth
           begin
           ,
           as
           the
           Fourth
           of
           Daniel's
           Kingdoms
           ,
           when
           the
           Church
           came
           under
           the
           Obedience
           of
           that
           People
           ,
           may
           be
           proved
           by
           these
           Arguments
           .
        
         
           
           
             ARGUMENT
             I.
             
          
           
             
               Where
               the
               former
               Three
               Kingdoms
               in
               Daniel's
               Image
               did
               begin
               ,
               by
               the
               same
               Analogie
               we
               are
               to
               proceed
               in
               stating
               the
               Beginning
               of
               the
               Fourth
               Kingdom
               .
            
             
               But
               the
               former
               Three
               Kingdoms
               in
               Daniel's
               Image
               ,
               did
               begin
               ,
               each
               of
               them
               in
               their
               several
               times
               ,
               when
               the
               Church
               and
               the
               Confines
               adjoyning
               came
               under
               their
               Dominion
               :
            
             
               Therefore
               ,
               the
               Roman
               ,
               as
               the
               Fourth
               Kingdom
               in
               Daniel's
               Image
               ,
               began
               when
               the
               Church
               and
               the
               Confines
               about
               the
               Church
               came
               under
               the
               Obedience
               of
               that
               People
               .
            
          
           
             The
             Major
             is
             clear
             :
             For
             none
             will
             Deny
             but
             that
             the
             Roman
             doth
             hold
             Analogie
             with
             the
             three
             former
             Empires
             in
             their
             beginning
             .
             And
             for
             the
             Minor
             ,
             we
             prove
             it
             by
             Induction
             of
             Singulars
             .
             As
             for
             Ensample
             .
          
           
             Example
             1.
             
             First
             ,
             In
             the
             Babylonian
             Kingdom
             (
             the
             first
             of
             Daniel's
             Four
             )
             there
             were
             many
             Potent
             Kings
             that
             did
             Reign
             in
             that
             Succession
             ,
             before
             the
             times
             of
             Nebuchadnezzar
             ;
             for
             he
             began
             to
             Reign
             in
             the
             144
             year
             of
             the
             
               Aera
               of
               Nabonazzar
            
             .
             Now
             the
             several
             Names
             of
             the
             Kings
             ,
             the
             times
             of
             their
             Reign
             ,
             and
             the
             order
             of
             their
             Succession
             ,
             are
             all
             set
             down
             in
             the
             famous
             Canon
             of
             Ptolomy
             ,
             as
             we
             shall
             shew
             afterwards
             .
             But
             not
             to
             go
             far
             for
             an
             Example
             ;
             There
             is
             mention
             made
             of
             one
             Merodach-Baladan
             ,
             (
             in
             the
             Canon
             aforesaid
             ,
             called
             by
             the
             Name
             of
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             )
             that
             he
             sent
             Ambassadors
             to
             Hezekiah
             King
             of
             Iudah
             ,
             2
             King.
             20.
             12.
             
             There
             was
             then
             a
             Succession
             of
             Babylonian
             Kings
             before
             Nebuchadnezzar
             .
             You
             will
             say
             ,
             Why
             is
             he
             then
             called
             ,
             
               the
               Head
               of
               Gold
               ,
               as
               much
               in
               sense
               as
               the
               first
               Babylonian
               King
               ?
            
             I
             Answer
             :
             Though
             he
             was
             not
             simply
             the
             first
             Babylonian
             King
             ,
             (
             others
             Reigning
             before
             him
             )
             yet
             he
             was
             the
             first
             Prince
             of
             the
             Babylonians
             that
             brought
             the
             Jewish
             Church
             ,
             and
             the
             Confines
             about
             that
             Church
             ,
             within
             the
             Babylonian
             Empire
             .
          
           
             Example
             2.
             
             Secondly
             ,
             That
             Kingdom
             of
             the
             Medes
             and
             Persians
             ,
             whereof
             Darius
             and
             Cyrus
             were
             the
             Founders
             ;
             if
             we
             go
             strictly
             to
             work
             ,
             the
             Foundation
             of
             these
             was
             laid
             before
             .
             For
             it
             is
             manifestly
             plain
             by
             the
             testimony
             of
             the
             Greek
             Historians
             ,
             and
             by
             the
             Chronographical
             Tables
             now
             in
             the
             
             hands
             of
             all
             men
             ,
             That
             there
             was
             a
             Potent
             Race
             of
             the
             Kings
             of
             Media
             ,
             down
             from
             Arbaces
             the
             Mede
             .
             Yet
             for
             all
             this
             ,
             Darius
             and
             Cyrus
             are
             the
             true
             Founders
             of
             the
             Mede-Persian
             Kingdom
             ,
             because
             they
             first
             brought
             the
             Jewish
             Church
             under
             the
             power
             of
             the
             Medes
             and
             Persians
             .
             And
             that
             which
             is
             very
             remarkable
             to
             our
             present
             purpose
             ,
             though
             it
             be
             a
             thing
             famously
             known
             among
             Historians
             ,
             That
             Cyrus
             began
             to
             Reign
             in
             the
             55
             Olympiad
             ;
             though
             he
             subdued
             many
             Nations
             ,
             &
             Propagated
             the
             Persian
             Empire
             very
             far
             :
             yet
             the
             Scripture
             taketh
             no
             notice
             of
             that
             beginning
             ,
             but
             then
             only
             when
             the
             Church
             came
             within
             the
             limits
             of
             the
             Persian
             Dominion
             .
             And
             therefore
             it
             is
             well
             Observed
             by
             Piscator
             ,
             in
             his
             Scholia
             upon
             
               Ezra
               ,
               chap.
            
             1.
             vers
             .
             2.
             
             
               That
               the
               Edict
               came
               forth
               in
               the
               first
               of
            
             Cyrus
             
               King
               of
            
             Persia.
             This
             (
             saith
             he
             )
             is
             the
             first
             year
             of
             his
             Reign
             in
             Babylon
             .
          
           
             Example
             3.
             
             The
             Third
             Kingdom
             in
             Daniel's
             Image
             ,
             is
             that
             of
             the
             Graecians
             ,
             of
             which
             Alexander
             became
             the
             Head
             at
             the
             overthrow
             of
             Darius
             .
             The
             rough
             Goat
             is
             said
             to
             be
             the
             Monarchy
             of
             the
             Graecians
             ;
             and
             the
             Great
             Horn
             ,
             to
             wit
             ,
             Alexander
             ,
             is
             expresly
             called
             the
             first
             King
             ,
             Dan.
             8.
             21.
             
             Now
             ,
             How
             can
             he
             be
             said
             to
             be
             the
             first
             King
             of
             the
             Graecians
             ,
             seeing
             there
             were
             many
             Mighty
             Kings
             before
             him
             ,
             in
             ,
             and
             over
             that
             Nation
             ?
             To
             let
             pass
             all
             the
             other
             States
             of
             Greece
             ,
             in
             Macedonia
             it self
             ,
             Philip
             ,
             the
             Father
             of
             Alexander
             ,
             was
             a
             Potent
             Prince
             .
             But
             the
             Answer
             is
             ,
             as
             before
             ,
             He
             was
             the
             first
             Monarchical
             King
             that
             subdued
             the
             Territories
             of
             the
             Church
             .
             There
             was
             never
             any
             Graecian
             Prince
             that
             extended
             the
             Sovereign
             Rule
             of
             that
             People
             so
             far
             Eastward
             ,
             to
             the
             Confines
             of
             the
             Church
             ,
             as
             he
             .
             And
             therefore
             he
             is
             expresly
             called
             ,
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             
               the
               first
               King
               of
               the
               Graecians
               .
            
          
           
             From
             all
             the
             forementioned
             particulars
             ,
             it
             is
             clear
             ,
             That
             the
             former
             Three
             Kingdoms
             in
             Daniel's
             Image
             began
             ,
             each
             of
             them
             in
             their
             several
             times
             ,
             when
             the
             Church
             came
             under
             their
             respective
             Dominions
             .
             And
             so
             the
             Assumption
             is
             proved
             .
             If
             then
             we
             proceed
             in
             the
             same
             Analogie
             ,
             we
             must
             necessarily
             say
             ,
             That
             the
             Roman
             began
             as
             the
             Fourth
             Metal-Kingdom
             ,
             when
             the
             Jewish
             Church
             ,
             and
             the
             Continent
             adjoyning
             ,
             
             came
             first
             under
             the
             Sovereign
             Lordship
             and
             Command
             of
             the
             People
             of
             Rome
             .
          
           
             But
             yet
             for
             further
             confirmation
             of
             this
             truth
             ,
             we
             will
             produce
             some
             new
             Arguments
             ,
             to
             prove
             ,
             That
             the
             Metal-Kingdoms
             are
             Numbred
             in
             relation
             to
             the
             Church
             .
          
           
             First
             ,
             The
             Revelation
             of
             these
             Metal-Kingdoms
             was
             specially
             for
             the
             Saints
             and
             People
             of
             God.
             For
             though
             one
             end
             was
             ,
             to
             Discover
             to
             Nebuchadnezzar
             what
             Successions
             of
             Tyranny
             there
             should
             be
             after
             him
             ;
             yet
             this
             was
             principally
             for
             the
             Churches
             sake
             ,
             and
             the
             Churches
             use
             .
             And
             therefore
             it
             is
             mentioned
             ,
             
               This
               Secret
               is
               not
               revealed
               unto
               me
               for
               any
               wisdom
               that
               I
               have
               above
               all
               living
               ,
               but
               for
               their
               sakes
               that
               shall
               make
               known
               the
               Interpretation
               to
               the
               King
               ,
            
             vers
             .
             30.
             
             Therefore
             in
             the
             delineation
             of
             these
             Tyrannical
             Empires
             ,
             the
             Lord
             doth
             specially
             intend
             to
             Reveal
             to
             the
             Church
             those
             Changes
             and
             Vicissitudes
             of
             times
             that
             she
             should
             meet
             withal
             .
             In
             Relation
             to
             her
             then
             ,
             There
             is
             primarily
             a
             Discovery
             of
             these
             things
             .
          
           
             Secondly
             ,
             These
             Metal-Kingdoms
             are
             also
             Discovered
             ,
             to
             shew
             in
             what
             Region
             ,
             or
             Part
             of
             Time
             ,
             the
             Kingdom
             of
             Christ
             should
             begin
             .
             All
             the
             Scriptures
             in
             the
             Old
             Testament
             ,
             point
             mainly
             to
             Christ
             ;
             some
             ,
             point
             to
             his
             Parentage
             ;
             others
             ,
             to
             the
             place
             of
             his
             Birth
             ;
             others
             ,
             to
             the
             Tribe
             that
             he
             should
             come
             of
             :
             So
             this
             in
             special
             ,
             pointeth
             to
             that
             period
             of
             time
             when
             his
             Kingdom
             should
             begin
             .
             These
             are
             the
             words
             of
             the
             text
             :
             
               In
               the
               dayes
               of
               these
               Kingdoms
               shall
               the
               God
               of
               Heaven
               raise
               up
               a
               Kingdom
               that
               never
               shall
               be
               destroyed
               .
            
             From
             whence
             it
             is
             manifest
             ,
             That
             the
             Monarchies
             are
             reckoned
             according
             to
             the
             alterations
             which
             shall
             be
             in
             and
             about
             the
             Borders
             of
             the
             Jewish
             Church
             .
             For
             ,
             Where
             should
             Christ
             be
             Born
             ,
             but
             in
             Iudea
             ?
             And
             hereupon
             he
             is
             called
             ,
             The
             King
             of
             the
             Jews
             .
          
           
             Thirdly
             ,
             If
             we
             go
             to
             that
             Expression
             so
             often
             mentioned
             ,
             Dan.
             11.
             where
             the
             Seleucian
             is
             called
             ,
             The
             King
             of
             the
             North
             ;
             and
             the
             Dominion
             of
             the
             Lagidae
             ,
             The
             King
             of
             the
             South
             :
             Here
             we
             must
             necessarily
             Affirm
             ,
             That
             these
             Empires
             are
             said
             to
             be
             North
             and
             South
             in
             some
             special
             relation
             .
             And
             
             the
             Reason
             is
             clear
             ,
             Because
             Iudea
             did
             lie
             in
             the
             middest
             betwixt
             them
             ,
             as
             a
             Lamb
             betwixt
             Two
             Wolves
             ;
             having
             the
             Seleucidae
             on
             the
             North
             ,
             and
             the
             Lagidae
             on
             the
             South
             .
             Now
             ,
             that
             the
             People
             of
             the
             Jews
             are
             herein
             principally
             respected
             ,
             the
             words
             of
             the
             Angel
             are
             clear
             :
             
               I
               am
               come
               to
               make
               Thee
               Understand
               what
               shall
               befal
               Thy
               People
               in
               the
               latter
               dayes
               ,
            
             Dan.
             10.
             14.
             
          
           
             From
             all
             which
             we
             gather
             ,
             That
             the
             Monarchies
             are
             specially
             Numbred
             according
             to
             Church-relations
             .
             And
             therefore
             the
             Roman
             began
             as
             the
             Fourth
             Metal-Kingdom
             ,
             when
             the
             Church
             came
             first
             under
             the
             Obedience
             of
             that
             People
             .
             Let
             us
             now
             proceed
             to
             the
             Second
             Argument
             .
          
        
         
           
             ARGUMENT
             II.
             
          
           
             
               Where
               the
               Graecian
               Kingdom
               ,
               Typed
               by
               the
               Brass-Metal
               ,
               and
               the
               Third
               Beast
               ,
               made
               an
               end
               ;
               there
               did
               the
               Roman
               ,
               typed
               by
               the
               Iron-Metal
               ,
               and
               the
               Fourth
               Beast
               ,
               begin
               .
            
             
               But
               at
               the
               overthrow
               of
               the
               Seleucian
               Kingdom
               in
               Asia
               ,
               and
               at
               the
               Conquest
               of
               Judea
               ,
               the
               Graecian
               Kingdom
               ,
               typed
               by
               the
               Brass-Metal
               ,
               and
               the
               Third
               Beast
               ,
               did
               make
               an
               end
               :
            
             
               Therefore
               ,
               at
               the
               Overthrow
               of
               the
               Seleucian
               Kingdom
               ,
               and
               at
               the
               Conquest
               of
               Judea
               ,
               the
               Roman
               ,
               typed
               by
               the
               Iron-Metal
               ,
               and
               the
               Fourth
               Beast
               ,
               began
               .
            
          
           
             The
             Major
             is
             evident
             ;
             it
             being
             a
             ruled
             case
             in
             the
             Body
             of
             the
             Metal-Kingdoms
             ,
             That
             
               where
               the
               former
               ceaseth
               ,
               the
               latter
               doth
               begin
               .
            
             All
             the
             Question
             is
             concerning
             the
             Assumption
             ,
             
               Whether
               the
            
             Graecian
             
               ended
               as
               the
               Third
               Metal-Kingdom
               at
               the
               destruction
               of
               the
            
             Seleucian
             ?
             Here
             I
             finde
             that
             Interpreters
             are
             greatly
             divided
             .
             They
             agree
             in
             it
             ,
             That
             the
             Graecian
             is
             the
             Third
             Kingdom
             ;
             but
             they
             are
             divided
             about
             the
             particular
             time
             when
             that
             Empire
             ended
             .
             For
             ,
             all
             the
             Successors
             of
             Alexander
             came
             not
             under
             the
             power
             of
             the
             Romans
             at
             one
             and
             the
             same
             time
             .
             His
             Successors
             in
             Greece
             ended
             ,
             when
             Macedonia
             was
             made
             a
             Roman
             Province
             by
             Aemilius
             the
             Consul
             ,
             166
             years
             before
             the
             Birth
             of
             our
             Lord.
             His
             Successors
             the
             Seleucidae
             in
             Syria
             and
             Iudea
             ,
             ended
             ,
             when
             all
             that
             tract
             of
             
             Land
             was
             brought
             under
             the
             power
             of
             the
             Romans
             by
             the
             means
             of
             Pompey
             the
             Great
             ;
             &
             this
             was
             done
             about
             60
             years
             before
             the
             Birth
             of
             our
             Lord.
             His
             Successors
             ,
             the
             Lagidae
             in
             Egypt
             ,
             were
             made
             a
             Roman
             Province
             by
             
               Augustus
               Caesar
            
             ;
             &
             this
             was
             done
             28
             years
             before
             the
             Birth
             of
             the
             Lord.
             So
             then
             it
             is
             plain
             ,
             That
             all
             Alexander's
             Successors
             fell
             into
             the
             hands
             of
             the
             Romans
             ;
             yet
             all
             fell
             not
             under
             the
             Roman
             Obedience
             at
             one
             time
             .
             
               The
               great
               Question
               is
            
             ,
             Where
             we
             shall
             set
             the
             Ending
             of
             the
             Graecian
             Kingdom
             ,
             as
             typed
             by
             the
             Third
             Beast
             ,
             and
             the
             Brass-Metal
             ?
             And
             this
             ,
             I
             say
             ,
             must
             needs
             be
             at
             the
             overthrow
             of
             the
             Seleucian
             ,
             60
             years
             before
             the
             Birth
             of
             the
             Lord.
             
          
           
             First
             ,
             In
             the
             Original
             distribution
             of
             Alexander's
             Kingdom
             ,
             Iudea
             is
             pleaded
             to
             belong
             to
             the
             
               Seleucian
               ,
               Polyb.
            
             lib.
             5.
             
             And
             therefore
             the
             Seleucian
             is
             that
             Successor
             to
             whom
             the
             Title
             of
             the
             Monarchy
             doth
             principally
             appertain
             .
             I
             do
             not
             Deny
             but
             the
             Lagidae
             somtimes
             made
             their
             Incursions
             into
             Iudea
             ,
             as
             may
             be
             seen
             ,
             Dan.
             11.
             
             But
             in
             the
             Original
             Constitution
             of
             the
             Kingdom
             ,
             Iudea
             was
             allotted
             to
             the
             Seleucian
             .
             And
             that
             which
             may
             strengthen
             our
             Argument
             ,
             if
             you
             reade
             Iosephus
             ,
             the
             Book
             of
             the
             Macchabees
             ,
             and
             such-like
             Stories
             ,
             you
             shall
             find
             ,
             That
             the
             Sufferings
             of
             the
             People
             of
             the
             Jews
             have
             been
             wholly
             in
             a
             manner
             from
             those
             Successors
             of
             Alexander
             ,
             that
             were
             of
             the
             Seleucian
             line
             .
             And
             this
             to
             me
             is
             a
             great
             Reason
             ,
             wherefore
             the
             Graecian
             Kingdom
             ,
             typed
             by
             the
             Brass-Metal
             ,
             is
             rather
             to
             end
             at
             the
             destruction
             of
             the
             Seleucian
             Kingdom
             .
          
           
             Secondly
             ,
             At
             the
             Overthrow
             of
             the
             Successors
             of
             Alexander
             at
             several
             times
             ,
             the
             Fall
             of
             the
             Seleucian
             was
             only
             at
             that
             time
             ,
             when
             
               Iudea
               ,
               Ierusalem
            
             ,
             and
             all
             that
             Continent
             of
             Land
             fell
             under
             the
             Power
             of
             the
             Romans
             .
             Mr
             Mede
             ,
             and
             some
             Historians
             ,
             do
             look
             principally
             when
             Greece
             ,
             the
             Head-Province
             ,
             was
             brought
             into
             subjection
             to
             the
             Romans
             by
             Aemilius
             the
             Consul
             :
             they
             look
             here
             more
             specially
             to
             the
             ending
             of
             the
             Greek
             ,
             and
             beginning
             of
             the
             Roman
             Empire
             .
             But
             at
             this
             very
             time
             ,
             Iudea
             was
             under
             the
             Tyranny
             of
             
               Antiochus
               Epiphanes
            
             ;
             and
             the
             true
             Graecian
             Kingdom
             ,
             typed
             by
             the
             Brass-Metal
             ,
             
             and
             the
             Third
             Beast
             ,
             in
             great
             vigor
             and
             sulness
             of
             strength
             .
             For
             ,
             though
             in
             those
             times
             Greece
             ,
             their
             Native
             Country
             ,
             was
             taken
             away
             from
             the
             Graecians
             ;
             yet
             nevertheless
             ,
             that
             People
             had
             still
             the
             sovereign
             Dominion
             in
             and
             about
             the
             Borders
             of
             the
             Church
             .
             And
             this
             continued
             for
             the
             space
             of
             106
             years
             ,
             till
             the
             time
             of
             Pompey
             the
             Great
             ;
             then
             the
             Selcucian
             Kingdom
             ,
             and
             together
             with
             it
             ,
             all
             the
             Lands
             of
             the
             Jewish
             Church
             ,
             fell
             under
             the
             Dominion
             of
             the
             State
             of
             Rome
             .
          
           
             And
             ,
             that
             which
             may
             adde
             to
             the
             force
             of
             this
             Reason
             ,
             let
             us
             Consider
             ,
             First
             ,
             The
             limits
             of
             the
             Land
             of
             Promise
             .
             Secondly
             ,
             The
             Governments
             that
             there
             should
             be
             erected
             .
             For
             the
             limits
             of
             the
             Land
             of
             Promise
             ,
             (
             the
             Seat
             of
             the
             Church
             for
             2000
             years
             )
             these
             are
             the
             words
             of
             the
             Charter
             to
             
               Abraham
               :
               Unto
               thy
               Seed
               have
               I
               given
               this
               Land
               ,
               from
               the
               River
               of
               Egypt
               to
               the
               great
               River
               Euphrates
               ,
            
             Gen.
             15.
             18
             ,
             19
             ,
             20.
             
             This
             was
             performed
             in
             the
             dayes
             of
             Ioshua
             ,
             who
             brought
             Israel
             into
             the
             Possession
             thereof
             .
             Secondly
             ,
             For
             the
             Governments
             here
             erected
             ;
             The
             Scriptures
             do
             take
             notice
             that
             these
             Countries
             were
             under
             the
             Government
             of
             the
             Judges
             ;
             and
             then
             after
             that
             ,
             under
             the
             Kings
             of
             the
             Line
             of
             David
             ,
             to
             the
             times
             of
             the
             Captivity
             .
             And
             then
             it
             was
             revealed
             to
             Nibuchadn●…zzar
             ,
             in
             the
             Image
             of
             Persecuting
             Empires
             ,
             what
             Succession
             of
             Tyrannies
             should
             be
             in
             and
             over
             those
             Countries
             .
             For
             as
             somtimes
             the
             Kings
             of
             the
             Line
             of
             David
             did
             bear
             Rule
             in
             the
             Land
             of
             Promise
             :
             so
             they
             continued
             the
             Government
             till
             the
             People
             of
             Babel
             got
             the
             Dominion
             .
             So
             the
             People
             of
             Babel
             carried
             on
             the
             times
             of
             the
             Golden-Metal
             ,
             till
             the
             People
             of
             Media
             and
             Persia
             did
             take
             the
             Kingdom
             .
             And
             after
             that
             ,
             the
             People
             of
             Media
             and
             Persia
             did
             continue
             the
             times
             of
             the
             Silver-Metal
             ,
             till
             they
             were
             subdued
             by
             the
             People
             of
             Greece
             ,
             under
             the
             Conduct
             of
             Alexander
             the
             Great
             .
             And
             after
             the
             Victories
             of
             Alexander
             ,
             the
             People
             of
             Greece
             went
             on
             with
             the
             sovereign
             Dominion
             over
             all
             the
             Territories
             of
             the
             Church
             ,
             from
             the
             River
             of
             Egypt
             ,
             to
             the
             great
             River
             Euphrates
             ,
             till
             the
             destruction
             of
             the
             Seleucian
             Kingdom
             by
             Pompey
             the
             Great
             .
             And
             then
             all
             that
             tract
             of
             Land
             came
             under
             the
             
             Dominion
             of
             the
             People
             of
             Rome
             .
             So
             then
             ,
             we
             may
             conclude
             ,
             As
             the
             Seleucian
             is
             the
             immediate
             Successor
             of
             Alexander
             in
             and
             over
             the
             Continent
             of
             the
             Church
             :
             So
             where
             he
             ended
             ,
             as
             the
             Third
             Metal-Kingdom
             over
             the
             Church
             ,
             there
             the
             Roman
             did
             begin
             as
             the
             Fourth
             .
          
           
             Object
             .
             
               But
               some
               ,
               perhaps
               ,
               may
               Reason
               ,
               That
               the
            
             Lagidae
             ,
             
               the
               Successors
               of
            
             Alexander
             in
             Egypt
             ,
             
               were
               not
               made
               Subject
               to
               the
            
             Romans
             ,
             
               till
               the
               times
               of
            
             Augustus
             .
          
           
             Sol.
             Grant
             this
             to
             be
             true
             ,
             That
             Augustus
             did
             extinguish
             the
             last
             Successor
             ;
             yet
             the
             Monarchy
             was
             taken
             from
             the
             People
             of
             Greece
             before
             ,
             when
             the
             Romans
             came
             into
             Asia
             ,
             and
             brought
             all
             those
             Eastern
             Countries
             about
             Iudea
             within
             the
             compass
             of
             their
             great
             Empire
             .
             It
             is
             one
             thing
             for
             the
             People
             of
             Greece
             to
             have
             a
             Fragment
             of
             the
             Kingdom
             of
             Alexander
             remaining
             ;
             and
             another
             thing
             for
             that
             People
             to
             have
             the
             sovereign
             Dominion
             over
             the
             Continent
             of
             the
             Land
             of
             Promise
             .
             And
             this
             they
             had
             ,
             till
             the
             Overthrow
             of
             the
             Seleucian
             Kingdom
             by
             the
             Roman
             State.
             
          
           
             But
             Helvicus
             ,
             in
             a
             little
             Treatise
             intituled
             ,
             
               Chronologia
               Universalis
            
             ,
             doth
             stiffly
             argue
             the
             Point
             ,
             That
             the
             Graecian
             Kingdom
             did
             not
             end
             as
             long
             as
             the
             Lagidae
             ,
             one
             of
             the
             Successors
             of
             Alexander
             ,
             did
             remain
             .
             These
             are
             his
             words
             :
             
               Quatuor
               Reg●…aunam
               Monarchiam
               constituunt
               ,
               non
               per
               se
               separat●…m
               considerata
               ,
               sed
               conjunctim
               hoc
               axioma
               mereri
               ,
               haud
               secus
               ac
               de
               mortuo
               Principe
               omnes
               Praefecti
               Conjunctim
               repraesentant
               Principem
               :
               Adeo
               si
               pars
               Ditionis
               ab
               extero
               quodam
               avellatur
               ,
               illa
               non
               Praefecto
               sed
               toto
               Principatui
               decedat
               .
               Ita
               Romani
               ,
               ereptâ
               Asiâ
               ,
               Occupatá
               Macedoniâ
               ,
               diminuêre
               quidem
               Monarchiam
               ,
               extinxisse
               vero
               &
               ad
               se
               transtulisse
               dici
               non
               potuerant
               antequam
               ultimam
               partem
               ,
               Aegyptum
               subegerunt
               ,
            
             pag.
             50.
             
             From
             which
             words
             of
             his
             it
             is
             clear
             ,
             That
             the
             Graecian
             Empire
             was
             diminished
             only
             at
             the
             Overthrow
             of
             the
             Seleucian
             Kingdom
             ;
             and
             it
             was
             extinguished
             at
             that
             time
             only
             when
             the
             Lagidae
             were
             brought
             under
             the
             Power
             of
             the
             Romans
             .
             But
             herein
             he
             is
             greatly
             deceived
             :
             for
             if
             we
             must
             Affirm
             ,
             That
             each
             Metal-Kingdom
             doth
             continue
             as
             long
             as
             any
             Fragment
             thereof
             doth
             remain
             ,
             what
             shall
             we
             say
             by
             the
             meaning
             of
             this
             Scripture
             ,
             
             
               As
               for
               the
               rest
               of
               the
               Beasts
               ,
               their
               Dominion
               was
               taken
               away
               ;
               but
               their
               Lives
               were
               prolonged
               for
               a
               time
               ?
            
             Dan.
             11.
             12.
             
             This
             plainly
             sheweth
             ,
             That
             after
             the
             Imperial
             Dominion
             was
             taken
             away
             ,
             there
             might
             be
             some
             prolongation
             of
             life
             ;
             some
             inferiour
             Dominion
             ,
             as
             long
             as
             any
             Relique
             remaineth
             .
             This
             is
             true
             in
             some
             sense
             after
             the
             death
             of
             Alexander
             the
             Great
             :
             when
             his
             Kingdom
             was
             divided
             among
             his
             Successors
             ,
             there
             was
             some
             diminution
             of
             the
             Monarchy
             ,
             because
             these
             Successors
             did
             not
             stand
             up
             in
             his
             strength
             ;
             And
             yet
             for
             all
             this
             ,
             the
             Empire
             of
             that
             Nation
             did
             still
             abide
             .
             And
             further
             ,
             when
             Aemilius
             the
             Consul
             subdued
             Perseus
             ,
             there
             was
             a
             greater
             defalcation
             ;
             yet
             nevertheless
             ,
             The
             Graecian
             Monarchy
             continued
             the
             most
             prevailing
             about
             the
             Borders
             of
             the
             Church
             .
             But
             afterwards
             in
             the
             times
             of
             Pompey
             ,
             when
             those
             Eastern
             Countries
             were
             brought
             under
             the
             People
             of
             Rome
             ,
             then
             there
             was
             not
             only
             a
             diminishing
             ,
             but
             a
             plain
             abrogation
             of
             the
             Empire
             of
             the
             Graecians
             .
             For
             then
             the
             Graecian
             did
             not
             only
             lose
             the
             Imperiality
             ,
             in
             a
             more
             general
             sense
             ,
             but
             the
             Imperiality
             (
             here
             principally
             intended
             )
             about
             the
             Borders
             of
             the
             Church
             .
             And
             therefore
             ,
             where
             the
             Seleucian
             made
             an
             end
             ,
             there
             the
             Roman
             began
             .
          
           
             Thirdly
             ,
             The
             Seleucian
             ,
             of
             the
             Four
             Successors
             of
             Alexander
             ,
             was
             the
             most
             prevailing
             ,
             and
             the
             most
             eminent
             Pri●…ce
             :
             Therefore
             ,
             at
             the
             Ruine
             of
             the
             Seleucian
             ,
             we
             do
             rather
             place
             the
             end
             of
             the
             Graecian
             Kingdom
             ,
             typed
             by
             the
             Brass-Metal
             ,
             and
             the
             Third
             Beast
             .
          
           
             That
             the
             Sele●…cian
             was
             the
             most
             notable
             of
             all
             Alexander's
             Successors
             ,
             we
             prove
             ,
          
           
             First
             ,
             From
             the
             Testimony
             of
             the
             Scriptures
             .
             For
             it
             is
             expresly
             said
             ,
             
               That
               a
               Mighty
               King
            
             (
             scil
             .
             Alexander
             the
             Great
             )
             
               shall
               stand
               up
               ;
               but
               when
               he
               shall
               stand
               up
               ,
               his
               Kingdom
               shall
               be
               broken
               ,
            
             Dan.
             11.
             3
             ,
             4
             ,
             5.
             
             Now
             ,
             this
             came
             to
             pass
             after
             his
             death
             ;
             his
             Kingdom
             was
             divided
             to
             Four
             Successors
             ,
             the
             Kings
             of
             
               Syria
               ,
               Egypt
               ,
               Asia
               ,
               Greece
               .
            
             For
             the
             Kingdom
             of
             Asia
             ,
             that
             ●…oon
             vanished
             :
             and
             the
             Kingdom
             of
             Greece
             ,
             or
             Macedonia
             ,
             was
             very
             remote
             from
             the
             Confines
             of
             the
             Church
             .
             All
             the
             description
             is
             limited
             to
             the
             Two
             Successors
             ,
             
             
               Syria
               ,
               and
               Egypt
            
             ;
             and
             of
             these
             Two
             ,
             that
             of
             Syria
             was
             the
             more
             Potent
             .
             
               The
               King
               of
               the
               South
            
             (
             meaning
             
               Egypt
               ,
               shall
               be
               strong
               ,
               and
               another
               of
               his
               Princes
               shall
               be
               stronger
               than
               he
               ,
            
             vers
             .
             5.
             that
             is
             ,
             The
             Seleucian
             Prince
             in
             Syria
             ,
             called
             the
             King
             of
             the
             North
             ,
             shall
             be
             stronger
             than
             the
             other
             Succes●…or
             .
             And
             further
             ,
             Concerning
             the
             Seleucian
             ,
             it
             is
             added
             ,
             
               His
               Dominion
               shall
               be
               a
               great
               Dominion
               .
            
             This
             plainly
             sheweth
             ,
             That
             the
             Seleucian
             is
             the
             most
             eminent
             ,
             and
             the
             most
             notable
             of
             all
             the
             Successors
             ,
             according
             to
             the
             Testimony
             of
             Scripture
             .
             Secondly
             ,
             This
             is
             clear
             by
             the
             Testimony
             of
             Historians
             .
             For
             the
             Stories
             of
             the
             times
             plainly
             shew
             ,
             That
             the
             Seleucidae
             did
             possess
             
               Syria
               ,
               Babylon
            
             ,
             and
             part
             of
             Asia
             ;
             and
             ,
             as
             some
             will
             have
             it
             ,
             they
             possessed
             all
             from
             Phrygia
             ,
             to
             the
             River
             of
             Indus
             .
             Thirdly
             ,
             It
             may
             be
             confirmed
             by
             Reason
             :
             for
             the
             Antigonidae
             in
             Asia
             ,
             that
             were
             one
             of
             the
             Four
             Successors
             ,
             were
             subdued
             by
             the
             Seleucian
             :
             and
             therefore
             by
             the
             Addition
             of
             this
             ,
             the
             Seleucian
             must
             needs
             be
             the
             greater
             Dominion
             .
             Fourthly
             ,
             Here
             is
             the
             Consent
             of
             Modern
             Expositors
             ;
             for
             
               Iunius
               ,
               Broughton
               ,
               Rolloc
               ,
               Piscator
               ,
               W●…llet
               ,
            
             and
             other
             Interpreters
             of
             this
             way
             ,
             do
             pitch
             upon
             the
             Seleucian
             as
             the
             principal
             Successor
             .
             I
             do
             not
             say
             ,
             That
             their
             Position
             ,
             in
             the
             particular
             Application
             ,
             is
             true
             :
             but
             that
             which
             I
             stand
             upon
             ,
             is
             ,
             The
             ground
             of
             their
             Reasoning
             in
             a
             more
             general
             sense
             .
             For
             if
             they
             Affirm
             the
             Seleucian
             to
             be
             the
             fourth
             Kingdom
             ,
             in
             their
             judgement
             there
             must
             be
             somthing
             more
             eminent
             and
             remarkable
             in
             that
             Potentate
             ,
             above
             all
             the
             rest
             of
             the
             Successors
             .
             Wherefore
             else
             should
             they
             appropriate
             the
             Fourth
             Metal-Kingdom
             to
             him
             only
             ?
             Lastly
             ,
             We
             are
             to
             have
             special
             regard
             unto
             this
             ,
             rather
             than
             to
             any
             of
             the
             other
             Successors
             ;
             because
             whatsoever
             is
             spoken
             in
             the
             Prophecie
             of
             Daniel
             concerning
             the
             Graecian
             or
             the
             Third
             Metal-Kingdom
             ,
             is
             specially
             meant
             of
             the
             Seleucian
             Kings
             .
             As
             for
             Ensample
             :
             A
             great
             part
             of
             the
             description
             ,
             chap.
             8.
             and
             chap.
             11.
             is
             concerning
             
               Antiochus
               Epiphanes
            
             his
             rising
             ,
             greatness
             ,
             cruelty
             against
             the
             Saints
             ,
             and
             his
             polluting
             the
             Sanctuary
             .
             Now
             ,
             out
             of
             which
             of
             the
             Four
             Successors
             did
             he
             spring
             ?
             Was
             not
             his
             Original
             out
             of
             the
             Seleucian
             stock
             ?
             And
             did
             he
             not
             Reign
             as
             a
             Seleucian
             King
             ?
             For
             the
             Angel
             speaking
             
             of
             the
             Fall
             of
             Alexander
             ,
             and
             the
             Rising
             of
             the
             Four
             Successors
             ,
             proceedeth
             in
             these
             words
             :
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             
               and
               out
               of
               one
               of
               them
               came
               forth
               another
               little
               Horn.
            
             Now
             ,
             if
             you
             enquire
             ,
             which
             Successor
             was
             that
             One
             from
             whom
             
               Antiochus
               Epiphanes
            
             did
             spring
             ;
             Did
             he
             not
             arise
             out
             of
             the
             Seleucian
             Family
             ?
          
           
             By
             all
             that
             hath
             been
             said
             ,
             it
             is
             clear
             ,
             by
             the
             Testimony
             of
             Scriptures
             ,
             by
             the
             authority
             of
             Historians
             ,
             by
             the
             weight
             of
             Reason
             ,
             by
             the
             consent
             of
             Interpreters
             ,
             and
             by
             the
             sufferings
             of
             the
             Church
             ,
             That
             the
             Seleucian
             is
             the
             most
             eminent
             and
             notable
             Successor
             of
             Alexander
             .
             Therefore
             we
             do
             conclude
             ,
             That
             we
             have
             more
             special
             Reason
             to
             end
             the
             Third
             Metal-Kingdom
             at
             the
             destruction
             of
             the
             Seleucian
             ,
             rather
             than
             at
             the
             destruction
             of
             any
             other
             successor
             .
             If
             we
             must
             end
             at
             the
             the
             destruction
             of
             the
             Seleucian
             ;
             where
             he
             endeth
             ,
             the
             Roman
             must
             begin
             as
             the
             Fourth
             Metal-Kingdom
             .
          
        
         
           
             ARGUMENT
             III.
             
          
           
             
               When
               all
               things
               needful
               to
               the
               being
               of
               the
               Fourth
               Metal-Kingdom
               ,
               began
               first
               to
               be
               applicable
               to
               the
               Roman
               State
               ,
               at
               that
               instant
               of
               time
               did
               the
               Roman
               begin
               as
               the
               Fourth
               Kingdom
               .
            
             
               But
               at
               the
               time
               of
               Pompey's
               Victory
               over
               the
               Seleucian
               ,
               and
               his
               reducing
               of
               the
               Territories
               of
               the
               Church
               ,
               all
               things
               needful
               to
               the
               being
               of
               the
               Fourth
               Metal-Kingdom
               ,
               began
               to
               be
               applicable
               to
               the
               Roman
               State
               :
            
             
               Therefore
               ,
               at
               the
               time
               of
               Pompey's
               Victory
               over
               the
               Seleucian
               ,
               and
               his
               Reducing
               the
               Territories
               of
               the
               Church
               ,
               the
               Roman
               did
               begin
               as
               the
               Fourth
               Metal-Kingdom
               .
            
          
           
             For
             the
             Major
             ,
             none
             will
             Deny
             ,
             That
             the
             Roman
             did
             then
             begin
             as
             the
             Fourth
             Metal-Kingdom
             ,
             when
             it
             did
             receive
             all
             things
             necessary
             to
             the
             being
             of
             that
             Kingdom
             .
             Things
             do
             then
             begin
             ,
             when
             they
             receive
             all
             things
             necessary
             to
             their
             being
             .
             All
             the
             Controversie
             is
             about
             the
             Minor
             ,
             to
             wit
             ,
             That
             the
             Roman
             had
             all
             things
             necessary
             to
             the
             being
             of
             the
             Fourth
             Kingdom
             and
             the
             destruction
             of
             the
             Seleucian
             .
             This
             is
             proved
             in
             these
             Particulars
             .
          
           
             Particular
             1.
             
             When
             the
             Fourth
             Kingdom
             beginneth
             ,
             it
             must
             exercise
             sovereign
             Dominion
             over
             many
             inferiour
             Kingdoms
             .
             
             And
             so
             far
             Melancthon's
             definition
             of
             a
             Monarchy
             doth
             hold
             true
             ,
             though
             Bodin
             doth
             much
             deride
             it
             in
             hi
             Method
             of
             History
             ,
             chap.
             7.
             
             So
             saith
             
               Melancthon
               :
               Monarchia
               est
               summa
               unius
               Reipublica
               potentia
               ,
               quae
               aliarum
               opes
               &
               cop
               as
               super
               are
               possit
               .
               A
               Monarchy
               is
               the
               supreme
               Power
               of
               one
               Common-wealth
               ,
               which
               can
               easily
               excel
               the
               Riches
               and
               Plenty
               of
               all
               other
               Common-wealths
               whatsoever
               .
            
             And
             so
             could
             the
             Roman
             State
             ,
             in
             those
             times
             ,
             go
             beyond
             all
             the
             Kingdoms
             of
             the
             Earth
             ,
             when
             the
             ●…ewish
             Church
             came
             under
             the
             Obedience
             of
             that
             Nation
             or
             People
             .
          
           
             Particular
             2.
             
             When
             the
             Fourth
             Kingdom
             beginneth
             ,
             it
             must
             not
             only
             exercise
             sovereign
             Dominion
             over
             many
             inferiour
             States
             ,
             but
             also
             sovereign
             Dominion
             over
             many
             inferiour
             States
             in
             and
             about
             the
             Borders
             of
             the
             Church
             .
             Now
             ,
             the
             Roman
             did
             first
             begin
             to
             do
             this
             ,
             at
             the
             destruction
             of
             the
             Seleucian
             Kingdom
             ,
             and
             at
             the
             reducing
             of
             Iudea
             to
             the
             Obedience
             of
             the
             People
             of
             Rome
             .
          
           
             Particular
             3.
             
             The
             Fourth
             Kingdom
             did
             then
             begin
             ,
             when
             all
             the
             Three
             former
             Metal-Kingdoms
             had
             fulfilled
             their
             several
             and
             respective
             times
             .
             But
             the
             People
             of
             Babel
             ,
             of
             Persia
             ,
             and
             Greece
             ,
             had
             then
             only
             compleated
             the
             times
             of
             their
             Monarchical
             Rule
             in
             and
             about
             the
             Territories
             of
             the
             Jewish
             Church
             ,
             at
             the
             Overthrow
             of
             the
             Seleucian
             Kingdom
             :
             Ergo
             ,
             &c.
             
          
           
             If
             we
             put
             all
             these
             Particulars
             into
             one
             sum
             ,
             The
             Fourth
             of
             Daniel's
             Kingdoms
             may
             be
             thus
             described
             ,
             
               To
               be
               the
               Fourth
               tyrannical
               State
               ,
               which
               in
               its
               times
               ,
               at
               the
               end
               of
               the
               Three
               former
               ,
               is
               to
               bear
               Rule
               over
               all
               the
               Earth
               ;
               but
               more
               specially
               in
               and
               over
               the
               Churches
               Continent
               .
            
             This
             is
             the
             true
             definition
             of
             the
             Fourth
             Kingdom
             ,
             so
             far
             as
             such
             a
             matter
             may
             be
             defined
             .
             For
             ,
             First
             ,
             The
             thing
             Defined
             ,
             and
             the
             Definition
             ,
             are
             Convertible
             .
             Secondly
             ,
             The
             most
             Essential
             Attributes
             of
             the
             Fourth
             Kingdom
             are
             mentioned
             .
             Thirdly
             ,
             They
             are
             all
             mentioned
             ,
             therefore
             this
             is
             a
             true
             Definition
             .
             Now
             ,
             all
             these
             things
             ,
             necessary
             to
             the
             being
             of
             the
             Fourth
             Kingdom
             ▪
             began
             to
             be
             applicable
             to
             the
             Roman
             State
             at
             the
             Overthrow
             of
             the
             Seleucian
             ,
             and
             the
             Reducing
             of
             Iudea
             by
             Pompey
             the
             Great
             .
          
           
           
             Object
             .
             
               But
               here
               perhaps
               some
               will
               Reply
               ,
            
             Julius
             Caesar
             
               was
               the
               First
               Roman
               Monarch
               :
               Therefore
               the
               Roman
               ,
            
             quatenus
             
               the
               Fourth
               Monarchy
               ,
               did
               begin
               at
               the
               time
               of
            
             Julius
             Caesar
             ,
             
               and
               no●…
               at
               the
               time
               of
               their
               Free-State
               .
            
          
           
             Sol.
             If
             you
             take
             a
             Monarchy
             for
             a
             Form
             of
             Government
             in
             and
             by
             One
             only
             ,
             I
             acknowledge
             
               Iulius
               Caesar
            
             to
             be
             the
             Foundet
             of
             that
             Monarchy
             :
             For
             ,
             he
             was
             the
             first
             Prince
             that
             changed
             the
             Free
             State
             into
             the
             Government
             by
             O●…e
             .
             But
             I
             justly
             question
             ,
             whether
             this
             be
             Daniel's
             meaning
             ,
             That
             everywhere
             ,
             and
             in
             every
             point
             of
             time
             ,
             these
             Dominions
             must
             necessarily
             be
             under
             one
             Head.
             To
             say
             the
             truth
             ,
             This
             is
             but
             a
             Tradition
             borrowed
             from
             the
             custom
             of
             Speech
             .
             They
             take
             it
             for
             a
             granted
             truth
             ,
             That
             these
             Kingdoms
             must
             be
             so
             Constituted
             ;
             but
             this
             doth
             not
             alwayes
             necessarily
             hold
             .
             The
             Graecian
             Kingdom
             ,
             typed
             by
             the
             Brass-Metal
             ,
             was
             under
             one
             Head
             in
             Alexander
             the
             Great
             .
             But
             after
             that
             ,
             it
             came
             to
             be
             under
             Four
             Heads
             ,
             in
             the
             times
             of
             his
             successors
             .
             Nay
             ,
             in
             the
             inter-Regnum
             ,
             in
             the
             vacancie
             ,
             it
             was
             scarcely
             under
             any
             Head
             at
             all
             .
             The
             Roman
             Kingdom
             was
             under
             one
             Head
             in
             the
             time
             of
             the
             Caesars
             .
             After
             that
             ,
             it
             came
             divided
             into
             Ten
             inferiour
             Realms
             .
             Nay
             ,
             there
             was
             a
             time
             when
             there
             was
             an
             intercision
             of
             Roman
             Majesty
             ;
             the
             Beast
             was
             wounded
             in
             one
             of
             his
             Heads
             .
             And
             last
             of
             all
             ,
             when
             the
             Fourth
             Kingdom
             was
             destroyed
             ,
             the
             Dominion
             ,
             and
             the
             greatness
             of
             the
             Dominion
             under
             the
             whole
             Heaven
             ,
             was
             given
             to
             the
             Saints
             of
             the
             most
             High
             ,
             Dan.
             7.
             27.
             
             This
             is
             expresly
             said
             to
             be
             given
             to
             the
             People
             of
             the
             Saints
             ,
             in
             opposition
             to
             Four
             kinds
             of
             People
             that
             had
             the
             Dominion
             in
             the
             times
             of
             the
             Four
             Monarchies
             going
             before
             .
             All
             these
             Particulars
             shew
             ,
             That
             it
             is
             not
             alwayes
             necessary
             to
             the
             Being
             of
             Daniel's
             Four
             Kingdoms
             ,
             That
             the
             particular
             Form
             of
             Administration
             should
             be
             under
             one
             Head.
             It
             is
             a
             good
             and
             a
             material
             Observation
             of
             Helvicus
             ,
             in
             the
             aforementioned
             Treatise
             ,
             pag.
             3.
             
             Quamobrem
             (
             saith
             he
             )
             
               nihil
               movemur
               Aetymologiae
               Graecâ
               ex
               
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
              
               &
               
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
              
               quam
               Bodinus
               ostendit
               in
               Methodo
               Histor.
            
             cap.
             7.
             
             
               Cum
               per
               Monarchiam
               nihil
               aliud
               intelligan
               us
               quam
               imperium
               in
               mundo
               summum
               ,
               à
            
             Daniele
             
               praesiguratum
               ,
               quod
               Deus
               potentiâ
               prae
            
             
             
               caeteris
               instruit
               ,
               ut
               caetera
               illud
               respiciant
               .
            
             And
             in
             very
             deed
             ,
             if
             we
             narrowly
             look
             to
             the
             words
             of
             the
             text
             ,
             though
             these
             Kingdoms
             are
             familiarly
             called
             the
             Four
             Monarchies
             ,
             this
             is
             meant
             chiefly
             of
             their
             Latitude
             and
             sovereignty
             of
             Dominion
             ,
             as
             they
             are
             so
             many
             
               summa
               Imperia
            
             .
             But
             it
             is
             not
             necessary
             that
             these
             Dominions
             should
             be
             alwayes
             under
             one
             Head
             :
             and
             therefore
             ,
             whereas
             it
             is
             said
             ,
             That
             God
             gave
             to
             Nebuchadnezzar
             a
             great
             Kingdom
             ,
             and
             a
             second
             arose
             up
             after
             him
             ,
             and
             a
             Third
             that
             should
             bear
             rule
             over
             all
             the
             Earth
             ;
             and
             lastly
             ,
             a
             Fourth
             Kingdom
             ,
             as
             strong
             as
             Iron
             ,
             which
             shall
             bring
             all
             into
             subjection
             :
             From
             all
             this
             we
             may
             collect
             ,
             That
             these
             several
             Kingdoms
             must
             have
             supreme
             Dominion
             over
             inferiour
             Realms
             ;
             but
             it
             is
             not
             necessary
             to
             supreme
             Dominion
             ,
             That
             one
             man
             alwayes
             must
             bear
             Rule
             .
             And
             therefore
             look
             what
             sovereign
             Dominion
             Nebuchadnezzar
             began
             over
             the
             Church
             ,
             the
             same
             did
             descend
             in
             as
             large
             a
             way
             ,
             and
             in
             as
             ample
             a
             manner
             upon
             the
             Romans
             ,
             in
             the
             times
             of
             their
             Free-state
             ,
             when
             the
             Church
             came
             within
             the
             precincts
             of
             their
             Dominion
             .
             There
             is
             nothing
             then
             doth
             exclude
             ,
             but
             that
             the
             Roman
             might
             begin
             as
             the
             Fourth
             Empire
             in
             the
             time
             of
             their
             Freesta●…e
             :
             For
             then
             they
             became
             supreme
             Commanders
             about
             the
             Borders
             of
             the
             Church
             .
          
           
             Object
             .
             2.
             
             
               But
               if
               you
               Alledge
               ,
               That
               this
               is
               the
               way
               to
               confound
               the
               Free-state
               and
               the
               Monarchy
               of
               One
               together
               ,
               which
               ought
               not
               to
               be
               done
            
             ;
          
           
             Answ.
             It
             is
             the
             plot
             of
             the
             Spirit
             not
             to
             look
             upon
             the
             several
             Forms
             of
             Roman
             Dominion
             ,
             but
             upon
             the
             Roman
             as
             opposed
             to
             one
             Graecian
             ,
             one
             Persian
             ,
             one
             Babylonian
             Dominion
             going
             before
             .
             The
             scope
             of
             the
             Prophecie
             is
             to
             shew
             ,
             That
             the
             Earth
             ,
             especially
             the
             parts
             of
             the
             Earth
             about
             the
             Territories
             of
             the
             Church
             ,
             should
             fall
             under
             the
             sovereign
             Command
             of
             Four
             sorts
             of
             People
             .
             And
             further
             ,
             It
             is
             the
             scope
             of
             the
             Spirit
             to
             shew
             ,
             while
             these
             several
             Dominions
             are
             in
             their
             flux
             and
             succession
             ,
             Christ
             shall
             be
             born
             ,
             and
             his
             Kingdom
             shall
             be
             set
             up
             .
             If
             this
             be
             so
             ,
             we
             need
             not
             fear
             the
             confounding
             together
             of
             Two
             several
             kinds
             of
             Government
             into
             One.
             It
             is
             enough
             for
             our
             purpose
             ,
             that
             the
             Roman
             was
             Imperium
             
             
               in
               mundo
               summum
            
             ,
             the
             prevailing
             Dominion
             over
             the
             Earth
             at
             that
             time
             when
             the
             Church
             of
             the
             Jews
             came
             under
             their
             sovereign
             Lordship
             and
             Power
             .
          
           
             But
             yet
             further
             ,
             They
             that
             stand
             for
             such
             a
             Beginning
             of
             the
             Roman
             Empire
             at
             
               Iulius
               Caesar
            
             ,
             I
             desire
             they
             would
             Answer
             this
             Question
             .
             In
             the
             Tables
             of
             the
             Consuls
             it
             is
             manifest
             ,
             That
             there
             is
             the
             space
             of
             17
             years
             from
             the
             Conquest
             of
             Iudea
             to
             the
             Empire
             of
             
               Iulius
               Caesar.
            
             Now
             concerning
             this
             Number
             of
             years
             ,
             it
             must
             be
             either
             reckoned
             as
             a
             Chasme
             in
             the
             Prophetical
             Chronologie
             ;
             or
             else
             it
             must
             be
             applied
             to
             some
             one
             of
             the
             Four
             Metal-Kingdoms
             .
             But
             it
             cannot
             be
             reckoned
             as
             a
             Chasme
             in
             the
             Prophetical
             Chronologie
             .
             For
             it
             is
             clear
             from
             the
             Scriptures
             ,
             That
             these
             Four
             Monarchical
             States
             must
             continue
             one
             after
             another
             in
             a
             lineal
             succession
             ;
             and
             when
             their
             times
             are
             in
             flux
             and
             succession
             ,
             then
             the
             Kingdom
             of
             Christ
             shall
             begin
             .
             Therefore
             this
             portion
             of
             time
             from
             the
             Conquest
             of
             Iudea
             to
             the
             Monarchy
             of
             Caesar
             ,
             must
             necessarily
             be
             reckoned
             as
             appertaining
             to
             one
             of
             the
             Four
             Kingdoms
             .
             If
             so
             ,
             it
             must
             either
             appertain
             to
             the
             Graecian
             Kingdom
             typed
             by
             the
             Brass-Metal
             ,
             or
             to
             the
             Roman
             typed
             by
             the
             Iron-Metal
             .
             For
             none
             will
             be
             so
             absurd
             as
             to
             apply
             it
             either
             to
             Babel
             or
             Persia
             ,
             which
             were
             destroyed
             long
             before
             .
             Now
             ,
             they
             that
             apply
             this
             term
             of
             time
             to
             the
             Graecian
             Kingdom
             ,
             how
             can
             they
             make
             their
             Position
             good
             ,
             seeing
             that
             People
             were
             brought
             under
             the
             Power
             of
             the
             Romans
             ?
             But
             if
             you
             apply
             this
             to
             the
             time
             of
             the
             Roman
             typed
             by
             the
             Iron-Metal
             ,
             you
             give
             up
             the
             Cause
             ,
             to
             wit
             ,
             That
             the
             Roman
             began
             as
             the
             Fourth
             Metal-Kingdom
             in
             the
             time
             of
             their
             ●…ree-state
             .
          
           
             Object
             .
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               will
               Reply
               ,
               The
               Four
               Pers●…uting
               States
               of
               the
               world
               are
               compacted
               together
               into
               one
               Image
               ;
               but
               the
            
             Romans
             
               in
               the
               time
               of
               their
               Free-State
               did
               not
               Persecute
               the
               Church
               :
            
             Ergo.
             
          
           
             Sol.
             By
             the
             like
             Reason
             you
             may
             argue
             ,
             That
             Cyrus
             did
             not
             begin
             the
             Persian
             Kingdom
             ,
             nor
             Alexander
             the
             Graecian
             ,
             because
             neither
             of
             these
             Monarchs
             did
             actually
             afflict
             the
             Church
             .
             But
             if
             you
             shall
             say
             ,
             Though
             they
             raised
             no
             actual
             Persecution
             
             in
             their
             own
             persons
             ,
             yet
             they
             did
             first
             bring
             the
             Church
             within
             the
             verge
             of
             that
             Dominion
             ,
             which
             in
             its
             times
             did
             notably
             afflict
             her
             ;
             I
             may
             say
             the
             same
             of
             the
             Romans
             .
             For
             if
             it
             may
             be
             supposed
             ,
             That
             they
             did
             not
             afflict
             the
             Church
             in
             the
             times
             of
             their
             Free-state
             ,
             yet
             then
             she
             came
             first
             within
             the
             verge
             of
             that
             Dominion
             ,
             where
             were
             the
             ●…orest
             Persecutions
             that
             ever
             were
             .
             In
             the
             Book
             of
             the
             Revelation
             ,
             there
             is
             again
             and
             again
             mention
             made
             of
             the
             Sufferings
             of
             the
             Church
             under
             Roman
             Tyranny
             ;
             
               And
               when
               she
               was
               to
               bring
               forth
               her
               Man-Child
               that
               should
               Rule
               all
               Nations
               with
               a
               Rod
               of
               Iron
               ,
               when
               she
               cried
               in
               pains
               to
               be
               Delivered
               ,
               a
               great
               red
               Dragon
               with
               seven
               Heads
               and
               ten
               Horns
               did
               lie
               in
               wait
               to
               Devour
               her
               Child
               ,
               chap.
            
             12.
             
             All
             do
             agree
             ,
             That
             this
             noteth
             the
             Sufferings
             of
             the
             Church
             under
             Roman
             Tyranny
             .
             There
             must
             then
             be
             some
             particular
             instant
             of
             time
             when
             the
             Church
             first
             came
             under
             that
             Tyranny
             ,
             and
             there
             we
             must
             set
             the
             date
             of
             the
             Tribulation
             .
          
           
             Secondly
             ,
             Whereas
             it
             is
             Affirmed
             ,
             That
             the
             Romans
             did
             not
             Afflict
             the
             Church
             in
             the
             times
             of
             their
             Free-state
             ;
             this
             I
             do
             plainly
             Deny
             .
             For
             let
             us
             hear
             what
             is
             spoken
             by
             Iosephus
             :
             for
             he
             ,
             I
             presume
             ,
             in
             this
             matter
             ,
             is
             able
             to
             give
             us
             the
             best
             information
             .
             Thus
             saith
             he
             :
             Hircanus
             and
             Aristobulus
             ,
             
               through
               their
               Dissentions
               and
               civil
               Broyles
               ,
               were
               the
               cause
               of
               that
               Servitude
               that
               fell
               upon
               the
               Iews
               .
               For
               ,
               we
               have
               lost
               our
               Liberty
               ,
               and
               have
               been
               subdued
               by
               the
            
             Romans
             ,
             
               Antiq.
               lib.
            
             14.
             ch
             .
             8.
             
             And
             further
             he
             addeth
             ;
             
               That
               which
               is
               to
               be
               lamented
               ,
               the
            
             Romans
             
               in
               a
               little
               time
               have
               drawn
               from
               us
               more
               than
            
             10000
             
               talents
               :
               and
               the
               Royalty
               ,
               which
               before
               was
               an
               Honour
               reserved
               to
               the
               High
               Priests
               ,
               hath
               been
               bestowed
               upon
               men
               of
               obscurity
               ,
            
             Antiq.
             l.
             14.
             c.
             8.
             
             But
             if
             we
             go
             to
             Particulars
             ,
             it
             is
             a
             thing
             famously
             known
             to
             
             all
             Posterit●…
             ,
             how
             Crassus
             did
             rob
             the
             Temple
             at
             Ierusalem
             .
          
           
             And
             when
             all
             this
             is
             done
             ,
             shall
             we
             say
             ,
             That
             the
             Jews
             suffered
             nothing
             from
             the
             Romans
             during
             the
             times
             of
             their
             Free-state
             ?
             If
             we
             look
             to
             the
             times
             of
             Nehemiah
             ,
             we
             may
             well
             conceive
             that
             these
             were
             some
             of
             the
             best
             times
             of
             the
             Jewish
             Church
             :
             Yet
             mark
             what
             is
             expressed
             in
             the
             Confession
             of
             the
             Levi●…es
             :
             
               Behold
               ,
               we
               are
               Servants
               this
               day
               :
               and
               for
               the
               Land
            
             
             
               that
               thou
               gavest
               unto
               our
               Fathers
               to
               eate
               the
               Fruit
               thereof
               ,
               and
               the
               good
               thereof
               ;
               behold
               ,
               we
               are
               Servants
               in
               it
               ,
               and
               it
               yieldeth
               much
               encrease
               unto
               the
               Kings
               whom
               thou
               hast
               set
               over
               us
               because
               of
               our
               sins
               .
               Also
               ,
               they
               have
               Dominion
               over
               our
               Bodies
               ,
               and
               over
               our
               Cattel
               at
               their
               pleasure
               ,
               and
               we
               are
               in
               great
               distress
               ,
            
             chap.
             9.
             vers
             .
             36
             ,
             37.
             
             Here
             was
             then
             no
             publick
             Persecution
             for
             Religion
             ,
             only
             their
             Vassalage
             under
             the
             Persian
             Kings
             is
             here
             noted
             .
             And
             may
             not
             all
             things
             be
             rightly
             applied
             to
             the
             Romans
             when
             they
             came
             to
             have
             supreme
             Dominion
             in
             the
             Land
             of
             Promise
             ?
             Were
             not
             the
             Bodies
             ,
             Lives
             ,
             Goods
             ,
             Cattel
             ,
             of
             the
             Jews
             ,
             and
             all
             that
             they
             had
             ,
             at
             the
             Roman
             devotion
             ?
             Nay
             further
             ,
             if
             we
             will
             compare
             the
             times
             that
             went
             before
             ,
             with
             those
             that
             come
             after
             ,
             we
             shall
             find
             ,
             before
             the
             Romans
             came
             into
             Iudea
             ,
             that
             the
             Jews
             had
             indifferently
             well
             asserted
             their
             Liberty
             against
             the
             Tyranny
             of
             the
             Seleucian
             Kings
             ;
             as
             may
             appear
             in
             the
             Stories
             of
             the
             Macchabees
             ,
             that
             rose
             up
             for
             the
             defence
             of
             their
             Country
             .
             But
             from
             that
             time
             as
             the
             Roman
             Legions
             entred
             Ierusalem
             ,
             and
             a
             Conquest
             was
             made
             over
             the
             Churches
             Continent
             ,
             the
             Jews
             did
             totally
             and
             finally
             lose
             that
             Liberty
             ,
             to
             the
             destruction
             of
             their
             City
             and
             Temple
             .
             And
             that
             which
             is
             to
             be
             noted
             ,
             The
             Christian
             Church
             also
             hath
             been
             under
             Roman
             Tyranny
             ,
             more
             or
             less
             ,
             to
             this
             very
             day
             ;
             as
             may
             appear
             by
             the
             Book
             of
             the
             Revelation
             ,
             and
             the
             Stories
             of
             the
             Church
             .
          
           
             Now
             then
             ,
             if
             we
             put
             all
             together
             ,
             we
             may
             conclude
             ,
             That
             all
             things
             neeful
             to
             the
             beginning
             of
             the
             Fourth
             Kingdom
             in
             Daniel's
             Image
             ,
             began
             to
             be
             applicable
             to
             the
             Roman
             State
             at
             the
             destruction
             of
             the
             Seleucian
             Kingdom
             ,
             and
             at
             the
             subduing
             the
             Territories
             of
             the
             Church
             .
             And
             therefore
             we
             do
             here
             fix
             the
             beginning
             of
             the
             Roman
             as
             the
             Fourth
             Metal-Kingdom
             .
          
        
         
           
             ARGUMENT
             IV.
             
          
           
             
               Where
               the
               Story
               of
               the
               Gospel
               doth
               insinuate
               the
               beginning
               of
               the
               Roman
               to
               be
               ,
               that
               is
               the
               true
               beginning
               of
               the
               Roman
               as
               the
               Fourth
               Metal-Kingdom
               .
            
             
               But
               the
               Story
               of
               the
               Gospel
               doth
               insinuate
               the
               beginning
               of
               the
               Roman
               to
               be
               in
               the
               time
               of
               their
               Free-state
               ,
               when
               
               the
               Churches
               Continent
               came
               first
               within
               the
               Verge
               of
               their
               Dominion
               :
            
             
               Therefore
               ,
               within
               the
               time
               of
               their
               Free-state
               ,
               when
               the
               Churches
               Continent
               came
               under
               the
               Verge
               of
               that
               Dominion
               ,
               is
               the
               true
               beginning
               of
               the
               Roman
               as
               the
               Fourth
               Metal-Kingdom
               .
            
          
           
             The
             Major
             is
             plain
             :
             for
             we
             cannot
             but
             think
             that
             the
             Story
             of
             the
             Gospel
             doth
             rightly
             expound
             the
             true
             beginning
             of
             the
             Fourth
             Kingdom
             .
             And
             for
             the
             Minor
             ,
             That
             the
             Story
             of
             the
             Gospel
             doth
             insinuate
             the
             beginning
             of
             the
             Roman
             to
             be
             in
             the
             time
             of
             their
             Free-state
             ,
             we
             have
             these
             Instances
             that
             follow
             .
          
           
             The
             Evangelist
             being
             to
             write
             the
             Story
             of
             the
             Gospel
             ,
             and
             particularly
             the
             entrance
             of
             Christ
             into
             his
             Ministery
             ,
             he
             hath
             these
             words
             :
             
               In
               the
               fifteenth
               year
               of
               the
               Reign
               of
               Tiberius
               Caesar
               ,
               Pontius
               Pilate
               being
               Governor
               of
               Iudea
               ,
               and
               Herod
               being
               Tetrarch
               of
               Galilee
               ,
               and
               his
               Brother
               Philip
               Tetrarch
               of
               Iturea
               and
               of
               the
               Region
               of
               Trachonitis
               ,
               and
               Lysanias
               the
               Tetrarch
               of
               Abilene
               ;
               the
               Word
               of
               the
               Lord
               came
               to
               Iohn
               ,
               the
               Son
               of
               Zacharias
               ,
               in
               the
               Wilderness
               ,
            
             Luk.
             3.
             1
             ,
             2
             ,
             3.
             
             Here
             I
             demand
             ,
             What
             hath
             the
             Evangelist
             to
             do
             with
             the
             times
             of
             the
             Romans
             ,
             being
             a
             Government
             so
             alien
             to
             the
             affairs
             of
             the
             Church
             ?
             I
             Answer
             :
             There
             be
             Two
             Reasons
             wherefore
             he
             Numbreth
             the
             times
             according
             to
             the
             Roman
             accompt
             .
          
           
             The
             First
             is
             ,
             To
             shew
             the
             Truth
             of
             Daniel's
             Prophecie
             in
             the
             Image
             of
             Persecuting
             States
             .
             For
             there
             it
             is
             expresly
             said
             ,
             
               That
               in
               the
               dayes
               of
               these
               Kingdoms
               shall
               the
               God
               of
               Heaven
               raise
               up
               a
               Kingdom
               that
               never
               shall
               be
               destroyed
               ,
            
             Dan.
             2.
             44.
             
             Now
             the
             Evangelist
             expoundeth
             this
             to
             be
             the
             Kingdom
             of
             Christ
             ,
             and
             that
             the
             Roman
             in
             particular
             is
             the
             Metal-Kingdom
             ,
             in
             whose
             times
             the
             Kingdom
             of
             Christ
             did
             begin
             .
             And
             he
             doth
             leave
             it
             upon
             Record
             ,
             That
             the
             Lord
             Christ
             had
             a
             solemn
             Inauguration
             into
             his
             Office
             in
             that
             part
             of
             time
             when
             Tiberius
             was
             Emperor
             ,
             in
             the
             fifteenth
             year
             of
             his
             Reign
             ,
             when
             
               Pontius
               Pilate
            
             was
             Governor
             of
             Iudea
             ,
             &c.
             
             Now
             ,
             if
             it
             be
             the
             scope
             of
             the
             Evangelist
             to
             shew
             ,
             That
             the
             Lord
             did
             begin
             his
             Office
             in
             Preaching
             the
             Gospel
             when
             the
             Romans
             did
             bea●…
             
             Rule
             ,
             there
             must
             be
             a
             particular
             instant
             of
             time
             also
             ,
             when
             all
             in
             Iudea
             fell
             under
             the
             Dominion
             of
             that
             People
             ;
             and
             that
             in
             the
             sense
             of
             the
             Gospel
             must
             be
             the
             Epocha
             ,
             or
             term
             of
             the
             Roman
             Kingdom
             .
          
           
             Secondly
             ,
             The
             Evangelist
             doth
             so
             punctually
             Number
             the
             times
             according
             to
             the
             Roman
             Government
             ,
             because
             then
             Iudea
             (
             where
             the
             Gospel
             began
             to
             be
             Preached
             )
             was
             under
             the
             Command
             of
             the
             People
             of
             Rome
             .
             And
             the
             Evangelist
             doth
             no
             more
             in
             the
             times
             of
             the
             New
             Testament
             ,
             than
             what
             the
             Prophets
             and
             ancient
             Writers
             had
             done
             in
             the
             times
             of
             the
             Old.
             As
             for
             Ensample
             :
             Those
             Prophets
             that
             lived
             in
             the
             times
             of
             the
             Kings
             of
             Iudah
             and
             Israel
             ,
             as
             
               Isaiah
               ,
               Ieremy
               ,
               Hosea
            
             ,
             dated
             their
             Prophecies
             from
             the
             Reign
             of
             those
             Kings
             .
             And
             from
             that
             time
             that
             the
             Kings
             of
             the
             Line
             of
             David
             were
             taken
             away
             ,
             it
             was
             the
             use
             to
             reckon
             by
             the
             times
             of
             the
             Four
             Monarchical
             States
             .
             So
             Daniel
             and
             Hez●…kiel
             ,
             who
             lived
             in
             the
             times
             of
             the
             Babylonian
             Empire
             ,
             do
             reckon
             their
             Visions
             by
             the
             times
             of
             the
             Babylonian
             Kings
             :
             And
             after
             them
             ,
             
               Ezrah
               ,
               Nehemiah
               ,
               Haggie
            
             ,
             and
             Zachary
             ,
             who
             lived
             in
             the
             times
             of
             the
             Persian
             Monarchy
             ,
             dated
             their
             times
             by
             the
             Reigns
             of
             the
             Kings
             of
             Persia.
             And
             as
             for
             those
             Ecclesiastical
             Writers
             that
             lived
             in
             the
             times
             of
             the
             Graecian
             Kingdom
             (
             as
             the
             Author
             of
             the
             Book
             of
             the
             Macchabees
             )
             they
             accounted
             by
             the
             years
             of
             the
             Kingdom
             of
             the
             Greeks
             .
             In
             like
             manner
             ,
             the
             Evangelists
             ,
             living
             in
             the
             times
             of
             the
             Romans
             ,
             date
             the
             Story
             of
             the
             Gospel
             by
             the
             Roman
             account
             .
             In
             all
             which
             they
             do
             secretly
             imply
             ,
             That
             the
             Roman
             is
             the
             Fourth
             Metal-Kingdom
             ;
             and
             it
             began
             so
             to
             be
             ,
             when
             the
             Church
             of
             the
             Jews
             became
             subject
             to
             the
             People
             of
             Rome
             .
             So
             long
             the
             Stories
             of
             the
             Church
             were
             Numerable
             by
             the
             Roman
             account
             .
          
           
             But
             let
             us
             adde
             another
             Testimony
             out
             of
             the
             same
             Evangelist
             ,
             where
             he
             telleth
             us
             ,
             chap.
             2.
             vers
             .
             2.
             
             
               A
               Decree
               went
               forth
               from
               Caesar
               Augustus
               ,
               that
               all
               the
               world
               should
               be
               taxed
               :
               〈◊〉
               this
               taxing
               was
               first
               made
               when
               Cyreneus
               was
               Governor
               of
               Syria
               .
            
             Now
             whereas
             he
             saith
             ,
             That
             all
             the
             world
             should
             be
             taxed
             ;
             this
             is
             meant
             only
             of
             the
             world
             under
             the
             Roman
             obedience
             .
             And
             here
             we
             Affirm
             ,
             When
             Iudea
             and
             the
             Countries
             near
             
             Bordering
             ,
             became
             Members
             of
             this
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             or
             Roman
             world
             ;
             then
             did
             the
             Roman
             begin
             as
             the
             Fourth
             of
             Daniel's
             Kingdoms
             .
             The
             Evangelist
             being
             to
             speak
             of
             the
             Birth
             of
             the
             Kin●…
             of
             the
             Jews
             ,
             his
             special
             purpose
             is
             to
             shew
             how
             that
             particular
             Continent
             was
             under
             the
             sovereign
             Power
             of
             
               Augustus
               Caesar
            
             at
             that
             time
             ▪
          
           
             Object
             .
             1.
             
             
               But
               here
               it
               may
               be
               Objected
               ,
               How
               could
               Augustus
               tax
               Iudea
               ,
               when
               it
               was
               under
               the
               Power
               of
               Herod
               the
               King
               ?
            
          
           
             Sol.
             This
             matter
             is
             solidly
             Disputed
             by
             the
             learned
             Spanhemius
             ,
             in
             his
             
               Dubia
               Evangelica
               ,
               part
            
             .
             2.
             dub
             .
             2.
             pa.
             157.
             
             The
             sum
             of
             that
             which
             he
             doth
             deliver
             ,
             cometh
             to
             this
             issue
             :
             Though
             Herod
             was
             King
             ,
             he
             had
             not
             
               jus
               summum
            
             ,
             the
             supreme
             Dominion
             ;
             he
             had
             only
             
               jus
               subalternum
            
             ,
             a
             Right
             and
             a
             Power
             meerly
             by
             the
             courtesie
             of
             Augustus
             .
             And
             therefore
             he
             citeth
             a
             passage
             out
             of
             Appianus
             ,
             That
             as
             Darius
             was
             the
             King
             of
             Pontus
             ,
             and
             Polemon
             of
             Cilicia
             ;
             so
             Herod
             was
             King
             of
             the
             Jews
             ;
             that
             is
             ,
             meerly
             by
             favour
             and
             courtesie
             .
             Secondly
             ,
             He
             sheweth
             ,
             That
             there
             were
             often
             Appeals
             from
             Herod
             to
             the
             Romans
             :
             and
             therefore
             he
             was
             compelled
             to
             plēad
             for
             himself
             before
             Antonius
             at
             Laodicea
             ;
             and
             before
             Augustus
             ,
             after
             the
             Battel
             of
             Actium
             at
             Rhodes
             .
             Many
             more
             Arguments
             he
             brought
             ,
             to
             prove
             that
             his
             Government
             was
             meerly
             Precatious
             ,
             and
             at
             the
             will
             of
             the
             Romans
             .
             Now
             for
             that
             particular
             time
             when
             the
             Romans
             began
             to
             have
             the
             sovereignty
             over
             the
             People
             of
             the
             Jews
             ,
             this
             was
             at
             the
             times
             of
             Pompey
             the
             Great
             .
             These
             are
             the
             Authors
             own
             words
             ,
             pag.
             160
             :
             
               At
               a
               sane
               erat
               conditio
               populi
               Iudaici
               tempore
               Macchabaeorum
               qu
               indo
               à
               Iudâ
               Macchabaeo
               foedus
               primò
               cum
               Romanis
               initum
               ubi
               Iudae●…
               vocantur
            
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             
               populi
               Romani
               rescripto
               Sena
               ▪
               us
               ad
               De●…ctrium
               à
               quo
               premebantur
               ,
            
             1
             Mac.
             8.
             
             
               Sed
               quam●…rimum
               à
               Pompeio
               Magno
               subacti
               fuere
               ,
               societatis
               nomen
               in
               servitutem
               ab●…r
               ,
               &
               illi
               aequè
               ac
               aliae
               gentes
               d●…victae
               Romanis
               vectigales
               facti
               eorum
               imperio
               accessêre
               .
               Ab
               e●…
               tempore
               Iudaeorum
               gens
               in
               Clientelâ
               Romanorum
               fuit
               ,
               à
               qu●…bus
               Reges
               pro
               arbitrio
               instituebantur
               vel
               destituebantur
               &
               tales
               quidem
               ,
               quibus
               precarium
               &
               limitatum
               erat
               imperium
               ,
               à
               nutu
               eorum
               suspensum
               qui
               Romae
               rerum
               pot●…ebantur
               .
            
             
             In
             these
             words
             of
             his
             ,
             he
             doth
             plainly
             distinguish
             what
             the
             People
             of
             the
             Jews
             were
             before
             the
             Conquest
             of
             Judea
             by
             Pompey
             ,
             and
             what
             they
             were
             after
             .
             Before
             the
             Conquest
             ,
             they
             were
             Friends
             ,
             Allies
             ,
             and
             Auxiliaries
             ;
             and
             after
             that
             ,
             their
             society
             was
             turned
             into
             servitude
             ;
             and
             as
             other
             Conquered
             Nations
             ,
             so
             the
             Jews
             were
             made
             Tributaries
             to
             the
             Empire
             .
             From
             that
             time
             ,
             the
             Nation
             of
             the
             Jews
             was
             alwayes
             under
             the
             Dominion
             of
             the
             Romans
             ,
             by
             whom
             their
             Kings
             were
             either
             set
             up
             ,
             or
             plucked
             down
             at
             pleasure
             .
             And
             for
             the
             manner
             of
             their
             Rule
             ,
             it
             was
             meerly
             limited
             ,
             hanging
             upon
             the
             good
             will
             of
             them
             that
             had
             the
             supreme
             Command
             at
             Rome
             .
             Now
             if
             this
             be
             so
             ,
             I
             leave
             it
             to
             any
             man
             to
             judge
             when
             the
             Roman
             did
             begin
             as
             the
             Fourth
             Metal-Kingdom
             .
             According
             to
             these
             Principles
             ,
             he
             must
             needs
             begin
             at
             the
             times
             of
             Pompey
             ,
             when
             the
             Church
             was
             brought
             under
             the
             Power
             of
             the
             Romans
             .
          
           
             Object
             .
             2.
             
             
               Why
               is
               it
               said
               ,
               That
               the
               taxing
               was
               when
               Cyreneus
               was
               Governor
               of
               Syria
               ,
               and
               not
               rather
               when
               Herod
               was
               King
               of
               the
               Iews
               ?
            
          
           
             Sol.
             The
             Answer
             is
             clear
             ;
             That
             though
             Herod
             was
             King
             of
             the
             Jews
             ,
             yet
             Cyreneus
             was
             the
             principal
             Agent
             of
             the
             Romans
             in
             the
             Tax
             ;
             and
             Iudea
             was
             but
             a
             Member
             annexed
             to
             the
             Province
             of
             
               Syria
               .
               Maldonate
            
             upon
             the
             place
             (
             to
             my
             apprehension
             )
             speaketh
             satisfactorily
             :
             For
             ,
             saith
             he
             ,
             
               Cyreneus
               was
               not
               the
               Governor
               of
            
             Judea
             ,
             
               but
               of
            
             Syria
             :
             
               but
               because
            
             Judea
             
               did
               then
               belong
               to
               the
               Province
               of
            
             Syria
             (
             
               as
               all
               Authors
               do
               deliver
            
             )
             
               it
               was
               his
               Office
               to
               tax
               not
               only
            
             Syria
             ,
             but
             Judea
             also
             .
             And
             in
             very
             deed
             ,
             much
             is
             spoken
             in
             the
             Roman
             Story
             ,
             That
             Iudea
             was
             a
             Member
             annexed
             ;
             and
             Ios●…phus
             calleth
             it
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             the
             Apendix
             ,
             or
             the
             Additament
             of
             Syria
             .
             If
             we
             go
             to
             the
             Original
             ,
             we
             shall
             find
             in
             the
             Stories
             .
             That
             when
             the
             Seleucian
             Kingdom
             was
             destroyed
             ,
             Syria
             and
             Iudea
             ,
             both
             together
             came
             under
             the
             Power
             of
             the
             Romans
             ,
             by
             the
             means
             of
             Pompe●…
             the
             Great
             .
             And
             here
             we
             set
             the
             beginning
             of
             the
             Roman
             as
             the
             Fourth
             Metal-Kingdom
             .
          
           
             But
             because
             Spanhemius
             doth
             seem
             to
             go
             another
             way
             ,
             and
             doth
             stand
             upon
             it
             ,
             That
             Iudea
             was
             not
             a
             Member
             annexed
             to
             
             Syria
             ,
             till
             the
             time
             of
             Archelaus
             ,
             when
             Iudea
             was
             made
             a
             Province
             .
             Let
             him
             now
             give
             his
             Answer
             ,
             Why
             the
             Birth
             of
             Christ
             is
             recorded
             by
             the
             Evangelist
             to
             be
             in
             the
             times
             of
             the
             Oecumenical
             Tax
             of
             the
             Roman
             World
             ?
             His
             Answer
             is
             this
             :
             
               Ut
               non
               tantum
               res
               tam
               illustris
               Charactere
               temporis
               illustri
               consignaretur
               ,
               sed
               &
               tali
               qui
               responderet
               vaticiniis
               Propheticis
               :
               not
               only
               that
               so
               famous
               a
               matter
               should
               be
               decyphered
               by
               so
               famous
               a
               Character
               of
               time
               ,
               but
               by
               such
               a
               famous
               Character
               of
               time
               ,
               which
               should
               Answer
               the
               Predictions
               of
               the
               Prophets
               .
            
             And
             then
             in
             particular
             ,
             he
             citeth
             those
             words
             of
             the
             Prophecie
             of
             
               Daniel
               ,
               In
               the
               dayes
               of
               these
               Kingdoms
               shall
               the
               God
               of
               Heaven
               raise
               up
               a
               Kingdom
               that
               never
               shall
               be
               destroyed
               ,
            
             chap.
             2.
             vers
             .
             44.
             
             And
             then
             he
             concludeth
             upon
             the
             Premises
             ,
             in
             these
             words
             :
             
               Descriptio
               enim
               Iudaeorum
               sub
               Augusto
               erat
               publica
               servitutis
               professio
               ,
               &
               tessera
               Obsequii
               quod
               debebatur
               Principi
               Extero
               ,
               adeóque
               
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
              
               advenisse
               
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
              
               illud
               
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
              
               quo
               Messias
               nasci
               debuit
               ,
               &
               lapis
               sine
               manibus
               è
               monte
               excindi
               .
               The
               Tax
               of
               the
               Iews
               under
               Augustus
               ,
               was
               a
               publick
               profession
               of
               their
               Servitude
               ,
               and
               a
               Badge
               of
               that
               Homage
               which
               was
               due
               to
               a
               Forreign
               Prince
               ;
               and
               therefore
               a
               clear
               Demon●…ation
               that
               that
               fulness
               of
               time
               was
               come
               ,
               in
               which
               the
               Messiah
               should
               be
               born
               ,
               and
               in
               which
               the
               Stone
               should
               be
               cut
               out
               of
               the
               Mountain
               without
               hands
               .
            
             From
             these
             words
             of
             his
             ,
             we
             do
             conclude
             ,
             That
             in
             the
             sense
             of
             the
             Evangelists
             ,
             the
             Roman
             is
             the
             Fourth
             and
             last
             Metal-Kingdom
             .
             For
             when
             the
             Lord
             Christ
             was
             born
             ,
             the
             Jews
             did
             yield
             their
             Homage
             and
             Obedience
             to
             the
             Romans
             ,
             as
             to
             those
             that
             were
             set
             over
             them
             .
             But
             if
             we
             do
             enquire
             after
             the
             time
             when
             they
             came
             to
             be
             Homagers
             ,
             it
             was
             at
             the
             time
             of
             Pompey
             the
             Great
             .
             Therefore
             in
             the
             sense
             of
             the
             Evangelists
             ,
             we
             must
             there
             set
             the
             beginning
             of
             the
             Roman
             ,
             as
             the
             Fourth
             Metal-Kingdom
             .
          
        
         
           
             ARGUMENT
             V.
             
          
           
             
               That
               which
               doth
               necessarily
               spring
               from
               the●…r
               Principles
               who
               do
               most
               authentically
               expound
               the
               Monarchies
               ,
               that
               is
               the
               true
               beginning
               of
               the
               Roman
               ,
               as
               the
               Fourth
               Metal-Kingdom
               .
            
             
               But
               the
               beginning
               of
               the
               Roman
               ,
               at
               the
               time
               of
               their
               Free-state
               ,
               when
               the
               Church
               came
               first
               within
               the
               Verge
               of
               their
               Dominion
               ,
               is
               such
               :
               Ergo.
               
            
          
           
           
             The
             Major
             is
             plain
             :
             For
             we
             cannot
             reject
             that
             beginning
             of
             the
             Roman
             as
             the
             Fourth
             Metal-Kingdom
             which
             doth
             necessarily
             spring
             from
             the
             Principles
             of
             the
             most
             Authentick
             Expositors
             .
             We
             do
             in
             substance
             take
             that
             for
             truth
             which
             is
             implyed
             ,
             as
             that
             which
             is
             plainly
             expressed
             .
             But
             for
             the
             Minor
             ,
             That
             the
             beginning
             of
             the
             Roman
             Monarchy
             was
             at
             the
             time
             of
             their
             Free-stare
             ;
             and
             that
             this
             doth
             spring
             from
             the
             Principles
             of
             the
             most
             Authentick
             Expositors
             :
             This
             is
             proved
             by
             the
             enumeration
             of
             Singulars
             .
          
           
             First
             ,
             The
             most
             approved
             Interpreters
             do
             hold
             ,
             That
             all
             the
             Four
             Tyrannical
             Empires
             are
             compacted
             into
             one
             Image
             ;
             and
             though
             they
             differ
             in
             some
             particulars
             ,
             yet
             they
             all
             agree
             in
             the
             greatness
             of
             Dominion
             .
             In
             this
             sense
             nothing
             doth
             exclude
             the
             Roman
             from
             being
             one
             of
             the
             Four.
             
          
           
             Secondly
             ,
             They
             agree
             ,
             That
             all
             these
             Tyrannical
             Empires
             ,
             compacted
             into
             one
             Image
             ,
             continue
             a
             succession
             of
             that
             Lordship
             which
             the
             first
             (
             scil
             .
             the
             Babylonian
             )
             did
             take
             from
             the
             People
             of
             the
             Jews
             .
             If
             this
             be
             so
             ,
             the
             Roman
             must
             begin
             as
             the
             Fourth
             of
             Daniel's
             Kingdoms
             at
             that
             time
             only
             when
             the
             Church
             of
             the
             Jews
             came
             under
             their
             Dominion
             .
             For
             though
             the
             Romans
             were
             a
             mighty
             State
             ,
             and
             had
             gained
             to
             themselves
             a
             great
             Power
             in
             the
             West
             ;
             yet
             they
             were
             not
             the
             sucsessors
             of
             Nebuchadnezzar
             in
             that
             Monarchy
             which
             he
             had
             begun
             ,
             till
             they
             had
             taken
             in
             the
             Eastern
             Countries
             ,
             and
             brought
             the
             Jewish
             Church
             within
             the
             Power
             of
             their
             Kingdom
             .
             But
             when
             this
             matter
             was
             once
             effected
             ,
             then
             did
             the
             Roman
             begin
             as
             the
             Fourth
             Metal-Kingdom
             .
             And
             this
             doth
             necessarily
             arise
             from
             the
             Principles
             and
             Foundations
             of
             such
             as
             have
             best
             Expounded
             the
             Metal-Kingdoms
             .
          
           
             Object
             .
             
               But
               some
               perhaps
               may
               alledge
               ,
               You
               have
               formerly
               taught
               ,
               That
               the
               Metal-Kingdoms
               do
               not
               only
               respect
               the
               People
               of
               the
               Iews
               ,
               but
               the
               People
               of
               the
               Gentiles
               also
               ,
               when
               the
               Gentiles
               come
               to
               be
               the
               Church
               of
               Christ.
               
            
          
           
             Sol.
             This
             I
             confess
             to
             be
             a
             Truth
             :
             Yet
             withal
             ,
             in
             the
             right
             stating
             of
             the
             beginning
             of
             the
             Four
             Kingdoms
             ,
             we
             must
             have
             only
             respect
             to
             the
             Nation
             of
             the
             Jews
             .
             For
             when
             all
             these
             Kingdoms
             began
             ,
             and
             in
             particular
             the
             Fourth
             and
             the
             last
             ,
             
             there
             was
             no
             other
             Church
             in
             all
             the
             world
             ,
             but
             that
             of
             the
             Jews
             only
             .
             Afterwards
             ,
             by
             the
             Preaching
             of
             the
             Apostles
             ,
             the
             Church
             did
             greatly
             encrease
             ;
             and
             the
             whole
             Empire
             ,
             in
             its
             just
             Latitude
             ,
             from
             East
             to
             West
             ,
             from
             North
             to
             South
             ,
             was
             the
             Seat
             ,
             and
             the
             Place
             of
             the
             Church
             .
             And
             hence
             it
             is
             ,
             That
             the
             Spirit
             in
             the
             Revelation
             doth
             discover
             her
             State
             according
             to
             the
             changes
             of
             time
             in
             the
             Empire
             of
             the
             Romans
             .
             But
             yet
             however
             ,
             The
             Doctrine
             of
             the
             forementioned
             Interpreters
             will
             strongly
             inforce
             the
             beginning
             of
             the
             Roman
             ,
             when
             Iudea
             came
             under
             the
             Power
             of
             that
             People
             ,
             seeing
             there
             was
             no
             Church
             in
             all
             the
             world
             but
             that
             of
             the
             Jews
             only
             .
          
           
             Object
             .
             
               But
               if
               it
               be
               further
               Alledged
               ,
               Why
               do
               you
               call
               this
               a
               Principle
               of
               the
               most
               Approved
               Interpreters
               ;
               seeing
               you
               your self
               do
               not
               Allow
               their
               Exposition
               in
               some
               Particulars
               ?
            
          
           
             Sol.
             So
             far
             forth
             as
             the
             Exposition
             is
             Approved
             ,
             I
             do
             build
             upon
             it
             ;
             and
             it
             doth
             strongly
             inforce
             the
             Conclusion
             .
             And
             for
             the
             kinds
             of
             Interpreters
             ,
             I
             will
             shew
             who
             are
             the
             most
             Approved
             ,
             and
             why
             they
             are
             so
             called
             .
             After
             such
             times
             as
             it
             pleased
             the
             Lord
             to
             Reveal
             to
             Daniel
             the
             Four
             Ages
             of
             the
             Church
             ,
             under
             the
             Type
             and
             Similitude
             of
             Four
             Metals
             in
             the
             Image
             ;
             this
             Discovery
             hath
             been
             variously
             received
             .
             Some
             only
             having
             a
             glaring
             light
             of
             the
             Truth
             ,
             have
             turned
             it
             into
             Fables
             ;
             and
             it
             is
             very
             probable
             ,
             That
             Ovid
             in
             his
             Metamorphosis
             received
             some
             hints
             of
             the
             Four
             Metals
             of
             Daniel's
             Image
             ,
             when
             he
             spake
             of
             the
             Golden
             Age
             under
             Saturn
             ,
             and
             of
             the
             Silver
             Age
             under
             Iupiter
             ,
             &c.
             
             We
             must
             not
             think
             whatsoever
             is
             spoken
             by
             this
             Poet
             ,
             to
             be
             altogether
             a
             Fable
             :
             That
             which
             he
             saith
             concerning
             Deucalion's
             Flood
             ,
             in
             many
             particulars
             it
             was
             a
             Fable
             of
             his
             own
             making
             ;
             yet
             in
             the
             general
             ground
             we
             all
             know
             that
             it
             is
             a
             Scripture-Truth
             ,
             that
             there
             was
             a
             Deluge
             to
             drown
             the
             world
             .
             So
             he
             speaketh
             of
             the
             Gyants
             ,
             and
             of
             their
             heaping
             of
             Pelion
             upon
             Ossa
             ;
             we
             may
             conceive
             that
             in
             this
             he
             had
             some
             respect
             to
             the
             Gyants
             before
             the
             Flood
             ,
             and
             to
             the
             building
             of
             the
             Tower
             of
             Babel
             .
             So
             in
             the
             present
             case
             ,
             when
             he
             spoke
             of
             the
             Four
             Ages
             of
             the
             
             world
             ,
             of
             the
             Golden
             ,
             the
             Silver
             ,
             the
             Brass
             ,
             and
             the
             Iron-Ages
             ;
             though
             in
             this
             matter
             (
             to
             use
             the
             Apostles
             Expression
             )
             he
             turned
             the
             Truth
             of
             God
             into
             a
             Lye
             ,
             yet
             in
             the
             ground
             it
             is
             true
             ,
             That
             the
             times
             of
             the
             Church
             are
             divided
             into
             Four
             Ages
             ;
             and
             these
             Ages
             are
             figured
             by
             so
             many
             Metals
             of
             the
             Image
             .
             In
             after
             times
             ,
             they
             that
             lived
             in
             the
             Church
             ,
             and
             had
             the
             right
             Experience
             of
             things
             ,
             did
             expound
             the
             Babylonian
             to
             be
             the
             Head
             of
             Gold
             ,
             the
             Mede-Persian
             to
             be
             the
             Silver
             ,
             the
             Graecian
             to
             be
             the
             Brass
             ,
             and
             the
             Roman
             to
             be
             the
             Iron
             .
             This
             is
             a
             true
             Exposition
             in
             the
             main
             ;
             but
             in
             some
             particulars
             they
             have
             gone
             too
             much
             after
             Ovid
             in
             his
             Metamorphosis
             .
             It
             is
             true
             ,
             that
             the
             Babylonian
             Monarchy
             is
             represented
             by
             the
             Golden-Metal
             :
             but
             it
             is
             a
             common
             Error
             in
             the
             Ancients
             ,
             and
             now
             generally
             among
             the
             Historians
             ,
             Chronologers
             ,
             and
             Writers
             ,
             to
             begin
             the
             Babylonian
             Monarchy
             at
             Ninus
             .
             Upon
             the
             front
             of
             many
             Chronological
             Tables
             you
             shall
             find
             ,
             That
             Ninus
             is
             Pictured
             as
             the
             Founder
             of
             the
             
               Babylonian
               ,
               Cyrus
            
             of
             the
             
               Persian
               ,
               Alexander
            
             of
             the
             
               Graecian
               ,
               Iulius
               Caesar
            
             of
             the
             Roman
             Monarchy
             .
             This
             distribution
             ,
             though
             it
             may
             take
             in
             a
             greater
             compass
             of
             time
             ,
             yet
             it
             doth
             not
             agree
             with
             the
             sense
             of
             the
             Holy
             Ghost
             in
             some
             chief
             Circumstances
             .
             For
             the
             beginning
             of
             the
             Babylonian
             at
             Ninus
             ,
             Historians
             have
             taken
             this
             out
             of
             th●…ir
             own
             Heads
             ,
             and
             not
             out
             of
             the
             Word
             of
             God.
             And
             from
             hence
             Bodin
             ,
             in
             his
             Method
             of
             History
             ,
             
               ch
               .
               p.
            
             7.
             hath
             taken
             occasion
             to
             Dispute
             against
             the
             Scriptures
             ,
             and
             to
             strike
             out
             the
             Truth
             ,
             because
             some
             have
             mingled
             their
             own
             Inventions
             with
             the
             Word
             of
             God.
             He
             hath
             taken
             this
             Advantage
             upon
             the
             private
             Errors
             of
             some
             ,
             who
             have
             stood
             for
             the
             Truth
             in
             the
             main
             .
             But
             the
             latter
             Expositors
             do
             decline
             this
             Error
             of
             Ninus
             ,
             and
             do
             pitch
             upon
             this
             ,
             That
             Nebuchadnezzar
             is
             the
             Head
             of
             Gold
             ,
             and
             that
             the
             Babylonian
             Kingdom
             doth
             begin
             from
             his
             Monarchy
             .
             They
             find
             by
             Experience
             ,
             That
             the
             Scriptures
             do
             chiefly
             point
             to
             those
             several
             Empires
             that
             were
             to
             stand
             in
             fulness
             of
             Power
             one
             after
             another
             in
             those
             Countries
             where
             somtimes
             the
             Kings
             of
             the
             Lineage
             of
             David
             did
             bear
             Rule
             .
             These
             are
             the
             most
             approved
             Interpreters
             ;
             which
             I
             so
             call
             ,
             because
             they
             go
             
             according
             to
             the
             minde
             of
             the
             Scriptures
             .
             Now
             ,
             according
             to
             their
             grounds
             ,
             it
             followeth
             by
             necessary
             consequence
             ,
             That
             the
             Roman
             must
             begin
             as
             the
             Fourth
             Kingdom
             ,
             in
             the
             time
             of
             their
             Free-state
             ,
             when
             the
             Church
             ,
             and
             all
             the
             Countries
             adjoyning
             ,
             came
             under
             the
             Lordship
             and
             Dominion
             of
             the
             People
             of
             Rome
             .
             And
             whereas
             in
             the
             Chronographical
             Tables
             
               Iulius
               Caesar
            
             is
             set
             forth
             as
             the
             Founder
             of
             the
             Roman
             Empire
             ;
             this
             is
             as
             false
             an
             imagination
             as
             that
             of
             Ninus
             .
             First
             ,
             It
             is
             clear
             ,
             That
             every
             Metal-Kingdom
             did
             rise
             and
             encrease
             by
             the
             destruction
             of
             the
             Empire
             that
             went
             before
             .
             Now
             ,
             what
             part
             or
             parcel
             of
             the
             Graecian
             Empire
             did
             
               Iulius
               Caesar
            
             bring
             under
             the
             Power
             of
             the
             Romans
             ?
             Secondly
             ,
             What
             part
             or
             parcel
             of
             the
             Nations
             about
             the
             Borders
             of
             the
             Church
             ,
             did
             he
             bring
             under
             the
             Roman
             Obedience
             ?
             If
             we
             speak
             in
             a
             Latitude
             ,
             Caesar
             did
             change
             the
             Free-state
             into
             the
             Government
             by
             One
             ;
             yet
             to
             speak
             accurately
             ,
             The
             Roman
             did
             not
             begin
             then
             as
             the
             Fourth
             Metal-Kingdom
             ,
             but
             in
             the
             times
             of
             Pompey
             ,
             when
             the
             Jewish
             Church
             came
             under
             the
             Obedience
             of
             that
             Nation
             .
             And
             so
             our
             Argument
             is
             Founded
             upon
             the
             Principles
             of
             the
             best
             Expositors
             ,
             for
             the
             true
             beginning
             of
             the
             Roman
             Kingdom
             .
          
           
             Now
             then
             ,
             to
             gather
             all
             into
             one
             sum
             ,
             we
             may
             conclude
             the
             Roman
             to
             begin
             as
             the
             Fourth
             Metal-Kingdom
             ,
             when
             the
             Church
             came
             under
             the
             Dominion
             of
             that
             People
             .
             This
             is
             demonstrated
             ,
             First
             ,
             By
             the
             Analogie
             of
             the
             Three
             former
             Metal-Kingdoms
             ,
             which
             did
             begin
             each
             one
             as
             the
             Church
             came
             under
             their
             Dominion
             .
             Secondly
             ,
             By
             the
             end
             of
             the
             Graecian
             Kingdom
             ,
             typed
             by
             the
             Brass-Metal
             .
             Where
             the
             Graecian
             endeth
             ,
             there
             the
             Roman
             beginneth
             .
             Thirdly
             ,
             By
             that
             which
             is
             necessary
             to
             the
             Being
             of
             the
             Fourth
             Metal-Kingdom
             ,
             which
             began
             to
             be
             applicable
             to
             the
             Roman
             in
             the
             time
             aforementioned
             .
             Fourthly
             ,
             By
             the
             Testimony
             of
             the
             Evangelist
             S.
             Luke
             ,
             which
             doth
             insinuate
             such
             a
             Beginning
             .
             Fifthly
             ,
             By
             the
             Principles
             of
             the
             latter
             and
             most
             Approved
             Interpreters
             ,
             which
             being
             rightly
             laid
             ,
             do
             necessarily
             prove
             such
             a
             Beginning
             also
             .
          
           
             Having
             thus
             laid
             the
             Foundation
             ,
             I
             should
             now
             proceed
             
             to
             the
             Building
             .
             But
             there
             are
             some
             few
             Objections
             that
             yet
             remain
             to
             be
             Answered
             .
          
           
             Object
             .
             1.
             
             Mr
             Mede
             
               standeth
               upon
               it
               ,
               That
               the
               Roman
               came
               up
               by
               the
               same
               degrees
               as
               the
               Graecian
               went
               down
               :
               Therefore
               there
               can
               be
               no
               determinate
               and
               set
               time
               of
               the
               Beginning
               of
               the
               Roman
               ,
               as
               the
               Fourth
               Metal-Kingdom
               .
            
          
           
             Sol.
             What
             he
             speaketh
             in
             his
             Apostacy
             of
             the
             latter-times
             concerning
             the
             gradual
             encrease
             of
             the
             greatness
             of
             the
             Romans
             ,
             we
             do
             yield
             to
             be
             a
             truth
             in
             the
             main
             :
             But
             we
             here
             speak
             of
             the
             beginning
             of
             the
             Roman
             in
             a
             more
             strict
             sense
             ,
             in
             that
             acception
             as
             it
             is
             in
             the
             Fourth
             Metal-Kingdom
             .
             And
             here
             ,
             as
             there
             was
             a
             determinate
             time
             of
             the
             beginning
             of
             the
             
               Babylonian
               ,
               Persian
            
             ,
             and
             Graecian
             Empires
             :
             So
             there
             must
             be
             a
             determinate
             beginning
             of
             the
             Roman
             ,
             as
             the
             Fourth
             Metal-Kingdom
             .
             Secondly
             ,
             Daniel
             saw
             in
             the
             Vision
             the
             Four
             Beasts
             come
             up
             out
             of
             the
             Sea
             one
             after
             another
             ,
             and
             the
             Fourth
             Beast
             last
             of
             all
             :
             There
             must
             then
             be
             some
             determinate
             time
             of
             the
             beginning
             of
             the
             Fourth
             Empire
             .
             Thirdly
             ,
             It
             is
             the
             plot
             of
             the
             Spirit
             ,
             by
             the
             Four
             Empires
             ,
             to
             decypher
             so
             many
             periods
             of
             time
             .
             According
             to
             this
             Rule
             ,
             If
             there
             be
             no
             certain
             beginning
             of
             the
             Fourth
             Metal-Kingdom
             ,
             there
             will
             be
             a
             Chasme
             ;
             
               There
               will
               be
               some
               part
               of
               time
               ,
               which
               will
               be
               long
               to
               no
               Metal
               of
               the
               Image
               .
            
             For
             ,
             as
             Mr
             Mede
             himself
             doth
             allow
             ,
             The
             Image
             doth
             comprehend
             Four
             great
             Revolutions
             of
             time
             ,
             to
             begin
             one
             after
             another
             in
             an
             orderly
             succession
             .
             These
             are
             his
             own
             words
             :
             
               Apost
               .
               pag.
            
             69.
             
             
               For
               the
               true
               account
               of
               the
               times
               in
               Scripture
               ,
               we
               must
               have
               recourse
               to
               that
            
             Secret
             Kalendar
             
               and
               Great
            
             Almanack
             of
             Prophecie
             ,
             
               The
               Four
               Kingdoms
               of
            
             Daniel
             ,
             
               which
               are
               a
               Prophetical
               Chronologie
               of
               times
               ,
               measured
               by
               the
               Succession
               of
               Four
               Principal
               Kingdoms
               ,
               from
               the
               beginning
               of
               the
               Captivity
               of
            
             Israel
             ,
             
               until
               the
               Mysterie
               of
               God
               should
               be
               finished
               .
               A
               course
               of
               time
               ,
               during
               which
               the
               Church
               and
               the
               Nation
               of
               the
               Iews
               ,
               together
               with
               those
               whom
               ,
               by
               occasion
               of
               their
               unbelief
               in
               Christ
               ,
               God
               should
               surrogate
               in
               their
               rooms
               ,
               were
               to
               remain
               under
               the
               Bondage
               of
               the
               Gentiles
               ,
               and
               Oppression
               of
               Gentilism
               .
               But
               these
               times
               ,
               once
               fulfilled
               ,
               all
               the
               Kingdoms
               of
               the
               World
               should
               become
               the
               Kingdoms
               of
               our
               Lord
               ,
               and
               of
               his
               Christ.
            
             So
             far
             Mr
             Mede
             .
             
             In
             whose
             words
             I
             Note
             these
             Three
             Points
             .
             First
             ,
             That
             the
             Four
             Metal-Kingdoms
             in
             Daniel's
             Image
             ,
             are
             a
             Prophetical
             Chronologie
             of
             the
             times
             .
             Secondly
             ,
             That
             this
             Prophetical
             Chronologie
             beginneth
             at
             the
             Captivity
             of
             Babylon
             .
             Thirdly
             ,
             That
             it
             endeth
             at
             the
             glorious
             Kingdom
             of
             the
             Saints
             .
             And
             for
             the
             Four
             Kingdoms
             ,
             he
             Numbreth
             them
             in
             this
             manner
             ,
             First
             ,
             The
             Babylonian
             ;
             Secondly
             ,
             The
             Mede-Persian
             ;
             Thirdly
             ,
             The
             Graecian
             ;
             Fourthly
             ,
             The
             Roman
             .
             And
             for
             the
             beginning
             of
             the
             Roman
             ,
             (
             the
             Point
             that
             we
             now
             are
             upon
             )
             he
             hath
             this
             Observation
             :
             
               In
               which
               quaternary
               of
               Kingdoms
               ,
               as
               the
               Roman
               ,
               being
               the
               last
               of
               the
               Four
               ,
               is
               the
               last
               Kingdom
               :
               So
               are
               the
               times
               thereof
               the
               last
               times
               we
               seek
               for
               .
               During
               which
               times
               ,
               saith
            
             Daniel
             ,
             
               the
               God
               of
               Heaven
               shall
               raise
               up
               a
               Kingdom
               that
               never
               shall
               be
               destroyed
               ,
            
             &c.
             
             In
             these
             words
             also
             we
             do
             agree
             with
             the
             forenamed
             Author
             in
             Two
             Points
             .
             First
             ,
             In
             the
             Number
             of
             the
             Four
             Kingdoms
             .
             Secondly
             ,
             In
             the
             date
             of
             the
             last
             times
             from
             the
             beginning
             of
             the
             Fourth
             Kingdom
             .
             
               And
               this
               is
               that
               which
               we
               endeavor
               to
               prove
               ,
            
             That
             assoon
             as
             the
             Church
             came
             under
             the
             Dominion
             of
             the
             Romans
             ,
             that
             People
             became
             the
             Fourth
             Metal-Kingdom
             .
             And
             here
             also
             we
             do
             set
             the
             beginning
             of
             those
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             or
             latter
             times
             so
             much
             spoken
             of
             .
             If
             therefore
             we
             set
             our selves
             in
             this
             beginning
             ,
             where
             ,
             in
             Mr
             Mede's
             own
             Opinion
             ,
             the
             latter
             times
             do
             commence
             :
             If
             we
             Number
             666
             years
             ,
             we
             shall
             come
             to
             that
             particular
             time
             ,
             when
             the
             Name
             ,
             or
             Universal
             Headship
             of
             the
             Bishop
             of
             Rome
             began
             to
             be
             set
             up
             .
             And
             so
             every
             man
             may
             easily
             observe
             ,
             That
             we
             go
             in
             the
             true
             Scripture-way
             of
             account
             .
             But
             of
             this
             afterward
             .
             Now
             let
             us
             go
             on
             ,
             and
             consider
             wherein
             we
             do
             differ
             from
             Mr
             Mede
             about
             the
             true
             beginning
             of
             the
             Roman
             Kingdom
             .
             
               For
               either
            
             (
             saith
             he
             )
             
               we
               must
               set
               the
               beginning
               thereof
               when
               all
               Greece
               came
               under
               the
               Roman
               Obedience
               ,
               after
               the
               Conquest
               of
               Perseus
               ;
               or
               else
               the
               Roman
               Kingdom
               must
               begin
               by
               degrees
               .
            
             In
             which
             Opinion
             of
             his
             there
             are
             Two
             Errors
             :
             For
             that
             of
             the
             beginning
             at
             Perseus
             ,
             we
             have
             spoken
             already
             :
             And
             for
             the
             Roman
             Encroachment
             by
             degrees
             ,
             let
             it
             be
             what
             it
             will
             be
             ,
             there
             must
             be
             a
             certain
             determinate
             time
             where
             the
             Roman
             doth
             begin
             as
             the
             Fourth
             
             Metal-Kingdom
             ;
             unless
             we
             will
             admit
             of
             a
             Chasme
             ,
             or
             a
             vacuum
             ,
             in
             the
             Prophetical
             Chronologie
             .
             And
             yet
             further
             ,
             Upon
             Mr
             Mede's
             own
             grounds
             ,
             we
             do
             desire
             to
             press
             this
             Argument
             :
             
               If
               the
               Babylonian
               did
               begin
               as
               the
               first
               Metal-Kingdom
               ,
               when
               the
               People
               of
               Israel
               came
               under
               the
               Dominion
               of
               Babel
               ;
               then
               the
               Roman
               will
               begin
               as
               the
               Fourth
               Metal
               Kingdom
               ,
               when
               the
               same
               People
               of
               Israel
               〈◊〉
               under
               the
               〈◊〉
               of
               Rome
               .
               But
               the
               former
               is
               true
               :
            
             Ergo
             ,
             
               the
               latter
            
             .
             The
             Consequence
             is
             clear
             ,
             from
             Analogie
             ;
             for
             the
             Roman
             doth
             but
             continue
             that
             Dominion
             which
             the
             Babylonian
             began
             .
             And
             for
             the
             Minor
             ,
             our
             Author
             saith
             ,
             That
             the
             Four
             Metal-Kingdoms
             did
             begin
             from
             the
             Captivity
             of
             Israel
             ,
             when
             that
             People
             fell
             under
             the
             power
             of
             the
             Babylonians
             .
             I
             say
             also
             ,
             When
             the
             same
             People
             of
             Israel
             came
             under
             the
             power
             of
             the
             Romans
             ,
             there
             is
             the
             true
             determinate
             beginning
             of
             the
             Roman
             ,
             as
             the
             Fourth
             Metal-Kingdom
             .
             And
             this
             is
             proved
             by
             such
             Principles
             as
             Mr
             Mede
             himself
             will
             allow
             .
          
           
             Object
             .
             2.
             
             
               Others
               do
               plead
               ,
               That
               the
               Roman
               did
               begin
               as
               the
               Fourth
               Metal-Kingdom
               ,
               when
               it
               began
               to
               be
               the
               prevailing
               Dominion
               upon
               the
               Earth
               .
               But
               they
               were
               so
               some
               years
               before
               the
               Iewish
               Church
               came
               under
               their
               Obedience
               .
            
          
           
             Sol.
             It
             is
             true
             ,
             That
             all
             the
             Monarchical
             Kingdoms
             were
             prevailing
             ,
             when
             those
             times
             came
             that
             were
             appointed
             of
             God
             that
             they
             should
             prevail
             .
             For
             Nebuchadnezzar
             ,
             the
             Scriptures
             speak
             very
             much
             how
             he
             carried
             all
             before
             him
             .
             And
             for
             Cyrus
             ,
             the
             Founder
             of
             the
             Persian
             Kingdom
             ,
             
               Thus
               saith
               the
               Lord
               to
            
             Cyrus
             
               his
               anointed
               ,
               whose
               right
               hand
               I
               have
               holden
               .
            
             The
             right
             hand
             is
             the
             instrument
             of
             Action
             ;
             and
             Conquerors
             prevail
             by
             the
             Lord
             's
             holding
             up
             their
             right
             hand
             .
             
               I
               will
               loose
               the
               loyns
               of
               Kings
               .
            
             When
             the
             loyns
             of
             Kings
             are
             loosed
             ,
             wherein
             their
             strength
             lieth
             ,
             he
             must
             needs
             prevail
             against
             them
             .
             
               To
               open
               Before
               him
               the
               two-leaved
               Gates
               .
            
             It
             was
             the
             Power
             of
             God
             that
             did
             go
             before
             him
             ,
             and
             that
             was
             the
             Petard
             to
             burst
             open
             the
             Gates
             of
             his
             Enemies
             ,
             Isa.
             45.
             v.
             1
             ,
             2
             ,
             3
             ,
             4.
             
             And
             for
             Alexander
             the
             Great
             ,
             the
             Scripture
             saith
             ,
             
               Behold
               ,
               an
               He-goat
               came
               from
               the
               West
               ,
               on
               the
               face
               of
               the
               whole
               Earth
               ,
               and
               touched
               not
               the
               Ground
               ,
            
             Dan.
             8.
             5.
             
             Livy
             is
             of
             
             Opinion
             ,
             That
             if
             Alexander
             had
             turned
             his
             Arms
             against
             the
             Western
             people
             ,
             as
             he
             did
             against
             the
             Eastern
             ,
             he
             would
             have
             failed
             of
             his
             Conquests
             .
             And
             Caesar
             objected
             to
             Pompey
             ,
             That
             the
             Wars
             waged
             against
             the
             People
             of
             Asia
             ,
             in
             respect
             of
             others
             ,
             were
             rather
             against
             Women
             ,
             than
             Men.
             But
             these
             are
             only
             Observations
             of
             States-men
             and
             Souldiers
             ,
             that
             look
             upon
             second
             Causes
             .
             The
             Scripture
             yieldeth
             us
             the
             true
             reason
             wherefore
             Alexander
             prevailed
             against
             the
             Asiaticks
             ,
             &
             carried
             his
             victories
             so
             far
             eastward
             :
             
               I
               saw
               an
               He-goat
               come
               from
               the
               West
               to
               the
               East
               ,
               and
               touched
               not
               the
               ground
               .
            
             This
             is
             the
             true
             cause
             of
             the
             greatness
             and
             celerity
             of
             the
             Conquest
             of
             
               Alexander
               ;
               He
               came
               upon
               the
               face
               of
               the
               whole
               Earth
               ,
               and
               touched
               not
               the
               ground
               .
            
             It
             is
             not
             the
             situation
             of
             the
             People
             in
             the
             Western
             Hemisphere
             ,
             that
             maketh
             them
             prevail
             over
             the
             Eastern
             ;
             but
             they
             only
             shall
             prevail
             whom
             God
             will
             set
             up
             .
             We
             may
             see
             on
             the
             contrary
             ,
             That
             great
             Conquerors
             have
             come
             from
             East
             to
             West
             ,
             as
             well
             as
             they
             have
             passed
             from
             West
             to
             East
             .
             This
             may
             be
             seen
             in
             the
             Victories
             of
             
               Cyrus
               ,
               Belisarius
            
             ,
             the
             Saracens
             ,
             and
             now
             last
             of
             all
             ,
             the
             Turks
             ,
             which
             have
             come
             from
             the
             East
             too
             too
             far
             (
             but
             only
             that
             God
             would
             have
             it
             so
             )
             into
             the
             Roman
             Territories
             .
             Now
             ,
             if
             you
             would
             know
             the
             true
             Reason
             of
             the
             prevailing
             of
             the
             latter
             ,
             their
             Commission
             lieth
             in
             these
             words
             :
             
               Loose
               the
               Four
               Angels
               that
               are
               bound
               in
               the
               Great
               River
               Euphrates
               :
               and
               the
               Four
               Angels
               were
               loosed
               ,
               which
               were
               prepared
               for
               an
               hour
               ,
               and
               a
               day
               ,
               and
               a
               month
               ,
               and
               a
               year
               ,
               for
               to
               slay
               the
               third
               part
               of
               men
               ,
            
             Rev.
             9.
             14
             ,
             15.
             
             For
             the
             Four
             Angels
             ,
             the
             course
             of
             the
             Prophecie
             ,
             and
             the
             best
             Expositors
             ,
             do
             plainly
             shew
             ,
             That
             this
             is
             meant
             of
             the
             Turkish
             Nation
             ,
             which
             Originally
             were
             divided
             into
             Four
             Families
             ,
             and
             had
             power
             to
             come
             over
             the
             River
             Euphrates
             ,
             into
             the
             Territories
             of
             the
             Western
             World.
             And
             for
             that
             famous
             Instance
             of
             Xerxes
             ,
             That
             a
             few
             Graecians
             in
             the
             West
             ,
             did
             defeat
             multitudes
             of
             People
             that
             came
             out
             of
             the
             East
             ;
             the
             reason
             lieth
             not
             in
             the
             situation
             of
             either
             People
             ,
             in
             respect
             of
             the
             Hemisphere
             ,
             but
             in
             the
             hand
             of
             the
             Lord
             ,
             that
             fought
             against
             the
             Persian
             Empire
             .
             For
             from
             that
             time
             that
             the
             building
             of
             the
             Temple
             was
             hindred
             by
             the
             Persians
             ,
             and
             Daniel
             mourned
             
             for
             it
             full
             three
             weeks
             together
             ;
             the
             Angel
             to
             comfort
             him
             ,
             telleth
             him
             plainly
             ,
             Dan.
             10.
             20.
             
             
               I
               will
               return
               to
               fight
               with
               the
               Prince
               of
               Persia
               ,
               and
               then
               the
               King
               of
               Graecia
               shall
               come
               in
               .
            
             The
             meaning
             of
             which
             words
             is
             this
             ,
             That
             the
             power
             of
             the
             Empire
             of
             the
             Persians
             should
             be
             overthrown
             by
             the
             Graecians
             :
             and
             then
             he
             cometh
             to
             particulars
             ,
             to
             speak
             of
             the
             expedition
             of
             Xerxes
             into
             Greece
             ,
             how
             that
             the
             Fourth
             King
             of
             the
             Persians
             should
             raise
             up
             great
             multitudes
             of
             People
             against
             the
             Graecians
             .
             These
             are
             the
             words
             of
             the
             text
             :
             for
             speaking
             of
             
               Darius
               the
               Mede
            
             ,
             he
             saith
             ,
             
               In
               the
               first
               year
               of
               Darius
               the
               Mede
               ,
               I
               stood
               up
               to
               strengthen
               him
               ,
            
             chap.
             11.
             vers
             .
             1.
             
             And
             then
             he
             addeth
             :
             
               I
               will
               shew
               thee
               the
               truth
               ;
               behold
               ,
               there
               shall
               stand
               up
               three
               Kings
               in
               Persia
               ,
               to
               wit
               ,
               Cyrus
               ,
               Cambyses
               ,
               Darius
               :
               And
               the
               Fourth
            
             (
             meaning
             Xerxes
             )
             
               shall
               be
               richer
               than
               they
               all
               ;
               and
               by
               his
               strength
               ,
               through
               his
               riches
               ,
               he
               shall
               stir
               up
               all
               against
               the
               Realm
               of
               Graecia
               ,
            
             vers
             .
             2
             ,
             3.
             
             If
             we
             will
             go
             to
             the
             true
             Reason
             wherefore
             the
             Graecians
             were
             so
             couragious
             at
             the
             Straits
             of
             Thermopylae
             ,
             and
             wherefore
             they
             did
             prevail
             against
             the
             Persians
             ;
             the
             true
             cause
             doth
             lie
             in
             these
             words
             :
             
               I
               will
               fight
               against
               the
               Prince
               of
               Persia
               ,
               and
               then
               the
               Kingdom
               of
               Graecia
               shall
               come
            
             
             in
             .
             It
             was
             the
             secret
             and
             invisible
             hand
             of
             the
             Lord
             ,
             that
             was
             the
             cause
             of
             the
             declining
             of
             the
             Power
             of
             the
             Persians
             in
             the
             East
             ,
             and
             the
             rising
             of
             the
             Graecian
             in
             the
             West
             .
             It
             is
             true
             ,
             That
             the
             He-goat
             passed
             from
             West
             to
             East
             ,
             upon
             the
             face
             of
             the
             whole
             Earth
             :
             and
             yet
             it
             is
             as
             true
             ,
             That
             
               the
               Ram
               of
               Persia
               did
               push
               to
               the
               three
               several
               Coasts
               ,
               Westward
               ,
               Northward
               ,
               and
               Southward
               ,
            
             chap.
             8.
             vers
             .
             4.
             
             By
             these
             words
             it
             is
             plain
             ,
             If
             the
             Victories
             of
             the
             Graecians
             did
             pass
             from
             West
             to
             East
             ,
             then
             
               è
               converso
            
             ,
             it
             is
             as
             true
             ,
             That
             the
             Victories
             of
             the
             Persians
             did
             pass
             from
             East
             to
             West
             .
             Let
             us
             hear
             the
             words
             of
             the
             Prophet
             Isaiah
             ,
             to
             put
             all
             out
             of
             question
             ;
             for
             speaking
             of
             Cyrus
             ,
             thus
             he
             saith
             :
             
               I
               have
               called
               a
               ravenous
               Bird
               out
               of
               the
               East
               ,
               the
               man
               of
               my
               Counsel
               from
               a
               far
               Country
               ,
            
             chap.
             46.
             11.
             
             From
             hence
             it
             is
             plain
             ,
             When
             God
             will
             ,
             Conquerors
             shall
             come
             out
             of
             the
             East
             .
             And
             in
             Allusion
             to
             this
             Story
             ,
             those
             Kings
             that
             shall
             deliver
             the
             Mystical
             Israel
             out
             of
             the
             Captivity
             of
             Western
             Babylon
             ,
             are
             called
             the
             Kings
             of
             the
             East
             in
             a
             Figure
             ,
             Rev.
             16.
             12.
             
             It
             is
             
             not
             in
             the
             Climate
             ,
             in
             the
             Hemisphere
             ,
             in
             the
             temper
             of
             the
             Heavens
             ,
             in
             the
             better
             exercise
             of
             Military
             Discipline
             ,
             in
             the
             experience
             of
             old
             Souldiers
             ,
             in
             the
             success
             of
             fortunate
             Generals
             ,
             or
             any
             other
             inferiour
             cause
             ;
             but
             in
             the
             immediate
             Dispensation
             of
             God.
             Therefore
             ,
             to
             adde
             the
             words
             of
             the
             Psalmist
             ,
             as
             an
             
               Epiphonema
               ,
               Lift
               not
               up
               your
               Horn
               on
               high
               ,
               speak
               not
               with
               a
               stiff
               neck
               :
               for
               promotion
               cometh
               not
               from
               the
               East
               ,
               not
               from
               the
               West
               ;
               but
               God
               is
               judge
               ;
               he
               putteth
               down
               one
               ,
               and
               setteth
               up
               another
               ,
            
             Psal.
             75.
             5
             ,
             6
             ,
             7.
             
          
           
             I
             have
             staid
             the
             longer
             upon
             this
             digression
             ,
             because
             I
             set
             that
             States-men
             ,
             Souldiers
             ,
             and
             others
             of
             deepest
             wisdom
             ,
             look
             to
             these
             subtilties
             .
             Hereupon
             they
             trust
             in
             an
             Arm
             of
             Flesh
             ,
             oppose
             the
             Gospel
             ,
             perfecute
             the
             Saints
             ,
             bear
             themselves
             more
             high
             over
             those
             that
             are
             made
             subject
             to
             them
             ;
             Make
             no
             Conscience
             of
             Honesty
             ,
             Truth
             ,
             or
             Religion
             ,
             when
             they
             have
             the
             Law
             in
             their
             own
             hands
             .
             They
             should
             as
             well
             look
             to
             the
             invisible
             and
             spiritual
             causes
             of
             the
             Changes
             of
             Empire
             ,
             to
             the
             Providence
             of
             God
             ,
             to
             the
             Revelations
             in
             the
             Word
             ,
             to
             the
             Angels
             fighting
             against
             the
             Kingdoms
             of
             this
             world
             ,
             to
             the
             power
             of
             the
             Saints
             Prayers
             that
             are
             offered
             upon
             the
             golden
             Altar
             .
             There
             is
             nothing
             more
             divine
             ,
             nothing
             more
             spiritual
             ,
             and
             nothing
             more
             apt
             to
             carry
             up
             the
             Soul
             into
             an
             high
             contemplation
             of
             the
             manifold
             wisdom
             ,
             power
             ,
             truth
             ,
             and
             Fidelity
             of
             God
             ,
             then
             to
             behold
             ,
             in
             the
             Prophecie
             of
             Daniel
             ,
             and
             in
             the
             Book
             of
             the
             Revelation
             ,
             as
             in
             a
             Map
             ,
             the
             several
             Empires
             of
             the
             world
             where
             the
             Church
             should
             be
             seated
             ;
             their
             times
             ,
             their
             changes
             ,
             and
             their
             causes
             of
             the
             change
             ;
             and
             this
             many
             hundred
             years
             before
             these
             Empires
             come
             to
             be
             set
             up
             .
          
           
             They
             that
             read
             the
             VVord
             ,
             together
             with
             the
             Stories
             of
             the
             times
             ,
             may
             see
             the
             Fidelity
             of
             God
             ,
             and
             may
             by
             this
             come
             to
             know
             him
             by
             the
             Name
             Iehovah
             .
             But
             so
             much
             by
             the
             way
             ,
             touching
             the
             sudden
             growth
             of
             the
             Graecian
             Empire
             from
             VVest
             to
             East
             .
             Now
             we
             come
             to
             the
             Romans
             ;
             and
             in
             the
             times
             of
             their
             Dominion
             they
             must
             also
             have
             the
             strength
             of
             Iron
             ,
             to
             subdue
             the
             whole
             Earth
             and
             break
             it
             in
             pieces
             .
             And
             though
             great
             Nations
             and
             mighty
             Princes
             should
             rise
             against
             
             him
             ,
             as
             
               Pyrrhus
               ,
               Hannibal
               ,
               Perseus
               ,
               Iugurtha
               ,
               Sertorius
               ,
               Methridates
               ,
               Tigranes
               ,
            
             &c.
             yet
             in
             their
             times
             the
             Romans
             must
             be
             too
             hard
             for
             them
             all
             ,
             and
             break
             them
             all
             in
             pieces
             .
             And
             therefore
             when
             
               Dionysius
               Halicarnassaeus
               ,
               Cicero
            
             ,
             and
             others
             ,
             boast
             of
             the
             Roman
             Greatness
             ,
             it
             may
             be
             said
             to
             them
             ,
             as
             somtimes
             it
             was
             to
             
               Cyrus
               ,
               I
               have
               girded
               thee
               with
               strength
               ,
               though
               thou
               knowest
               not
               me
               ,
            
             Isa.
             45.
             1
             ,
             2.
             
             This
             was
             the
             true
             ,
             though
             the
             invisible
             cause
             ,
             why
             the
             Romans
             grew
             so
             Great
             ,
             and
             their
             Dominion
             reached
             to
             the
             ends
             of
             the
             Earth
             .
          
           
             But
             now
             it
             is
             high
             time
             to
             return
             ,
             (
             from
             whence
             we
             have
             made
             a
             digression
             )
             to
             shew
             when
             the
             Roman
             began
             as
             the
             Fourth
             Metal-Kingdom
             .
             Some
             think
             it
             was
             when
             that
             Nation
             was
             the
             most
             prevailing
             Nation
             upon
             the
             Earth
             :
             But
             this
             cannot
             be
             .
             For
             in
             the
             times
             of
             
               Antiochus
               the
               Great
            
             ,
             but
             more
             specially
             in
             the
             times
             of
             
               Antiochus
               Epiphanes
            
             ,
             they
             were
             the
             more
             prevailing
             People
             :
             yet
             they
             did
             not
             begin
             in
             those
             times
             as
             the
             Fourth
             Metal-Kingdom
             in
             Daniel's
             Image
             .
          
           
             You
             will
             say
             then
             ,
             VVhere
             shall
             we
             set
             the
             beginning
             of
             the
             Fourth
             Kingdom
             ?
             I
             Answer
             ;
             In
             this
             case
             we
             must
             distinguish
             between
             the
             Latitude
             of
             the
             Roman
             Dominion
             more
             absolutely
             considered
             ,
             and
             the
             Latitude
             of
             the
             Dominion
             in
             and
             about
             the
             Borders
             of
             the
             Church
             .
             If
             you
             speak
             of
             the
             Latitude
             of
             Dominion
             in
             a
             more
             absolute
             consideration
             ,
             then
             the
             Roman
             began
             as
             the
             more
             prevailing
             Dominion
             ,
             when
             it
             became
             more
             mighty
             than
             any
             other
             Empire
             of
             the
             world
             .
             But
             if
             you
             speak
             in
             a
             more
             strict
             sense
             ,
             it
             began
             then
             to
             be
             the
             Fourth
             Metal-Kingdom
             in
             Daniel's
             Image
             ,
             when
             it
             did
             begin
             to
             take
             in
             the
             greatest
             Amplitude
             and
             largeness
             of
             Rule
             in
             and
             about
             the
             Confines
             of
             the
             Church
             .
             And
             this
             is
             to
             our
             purpose
             .
          
           
             Object
             .
             3.
             
             
               Others
               perhaps
               may
               Alledge
               ,
               That
               we
               cannot
               begin
               the
               Roman
               as
               the
               Fourth
               Metal-Kingdom
               ,
               when
               the
               Iewish
               Church
               came
               under
               the
               Dominion
               of
               that
               People
               .
               For
               (
               say
               they
               )
               it
               is
               foretoll
               in
               the
               Prophecie
               of
            
             Jacob
             ;
             
               The
               Scepter
               shall
               not
               depart
               from
               Iudah
               ,
               nor
               a
               Law-giver
               from
               between
               his
               feet
               until
               Shiloh
               come
               ,
            
             Gen.
             49.
             10.
             
          
           
           
             Sol.
             I
             Answer
             :
             We
             must
             so
             expound
             the
             meaning
             of
             one
             ,
             that
             it
             may
             not
             dash
             against
             the
             main
             sense
             of
             another
             Scripture
             Now
             it
             is
             the
             manifest
             scope
             of
             other
             Scriptures
             to
             shew
             ,
             That
             the
             Four
             Monarchies
             must
             come
             to
             bear
             Rule
             over
             those
             Countries
             where
             the
             Kings
             of
             the
             Line
             of
             David
             had
             the
             power
             before
             .
             And
             therefore
             it
             is
             mentioned
             ,
             
               That
               a
               Rod
               shall
               come
               out
               of
               the
               stock
               of
               Iesse
               ,
               and
               a
               Branch
               shall
               come
               out
               of
               his
               Roots
               ,
            
             Isa.
             11.
             1
             ,
             2.
             
             
               A
               Lapide
            
             upon
             the
             place
             speaketh
             very
             well
             :
             
               Christo
               enim
               nascente
               regia
               Davidis
               familia
               ad
               pauperes
               redacta
               .
               When
               Christ
               was
               born
               ,
               the
               Kingly
               Family
               of
               David
               was
               brought
               very
               low
               .
            
             To
             this
             accordeth
             the
             Prophet
             
               Daniel
               :
               In
               the
               dayes
               of
               these
               Kingdoms
               shall
               the
               God
               of
               Heaven
               raise
               up
               a
               Kingdom
               that
               shall
               never
               be
               destroyed
               ,
            
             chap.
             2.
             vers
             .
             44.
             
             In
             these
             words
             he
             doth
             insinuate
             ,
             That
             when
             the
             Kingdom
             of
             Christ
             beginneth
             ,
             it
             shall
             be
             as
             it
             were
             a
             new-erected
             Kingdom
             ,
             raised
             up
             out
             of
             the
             rubbish
             .
             To
             me
             therefore
             Baronius
             in
             his
             Apparatus
             ,
             seemeth
             to
             deliver
             a
             strange
             Exposition
             of
             this
             Prophecie
             .
             For
             he
             speaketh
             to
             this
             effect
             ,
             
               That
               the
               Kingdom
               was
               specially
               foretold
               to
               the
               Tribe
               of
               Iudah
               above
               any
               other
               .
               To
               which
               when
               that
               tribe
               had
               once
               attained
               in
               David
               ,
               by
               a
               long
               race
               of
               Kings
               ,
               it
               held
               out
               to
               the
               Captivity
               of
               Babylon
               .
               And
               after
               the
               Captivity
               of
               Babylon
               (
               where
               there
               was
               some
               intermission
               for
               a
               time
               )
               the
               Empire
               recovered
               again
               in
               Zorobabel
               :
               And
               then
               ,
               from
               him
               being
               derived
               ,
               it
               held
               in
               his
               Posterity
               ,
               without
               any
               absolute
               interruption
               ,
               to
               the
               second
               year
               of
               the
            
             184
             
               Olympiad
               ,
               when
               Calvin
               and
               Pollio
               were
               Consuls
               .
               Then
               Herod
               an
               Idumaean
               ,
               a
               Gentile
               at
               the
               first
               ,
               and
               after
               that
               a
               Proselyte
               ,
               by
               the
               courtesie
               of
               the
               Romans
               ,
               took
               the
               Kingdom
               in
               Iudea
               ;
               and
               so
               the
               Government
               was
               translated
               from
               the
               Natives
               to
               a
               Forreigner
               .
            
             This
             is
             the
             sum
             of
             that
             which
             is
             more
             largely
             delivered
             .
             Where
             Three
             Errors
             are
             to
             be
             noted
             .
          
           
             First
             ,
             That
             he
             maketh
             the
             Davidical-Kingdom
             to
             last
             to
             the
             times
             of
             Herod
             .
             Which
             cannot
             be
             .
             For
             the
             Kingdom
             was
             taken
             from
             the
             Kings
             of
             the
             Line
             of
             David
             by
             the
             Babylonians
             .
             And
             by
             them
             it
             was
             transmitted
             to
             the
             Persians
             and
             Graecians
             .
             And
             so
             last
             of
             all
             ,
             it
             came
             to
             the
             Romans
             ,
             in
             whose
             time
             Christ
             was
             Born.
             Neither
             did
             Herod
             ,
             a
             Forreigner
             ,
             Reign
             any
             more
             
             by
             the
             courtesie
             and
             favour
             of
             the
             Romans
             ,
             than
             did
             Hyrcanus
             ,
             his
             immediate
             Predecessor
             .
          
           
             A
             Second
             is
             this
             ,
             That
             he
             maketh
             the
             Scepter
             to
             continue
             in
             the
             time
             of
             Zorobabel
             :
             which
             is
             not
             so
             .
             For
             they
             that
             plead
             for
             an
             inferiour
             way
             of
             Rule
             in
             the
             High
             Priests
             ,
             the
             men
             of
             the
             Great
             Sanhedr●…m
             do
             not
             affirm
             ,
             That
             all
             these
             came
             of
             Zorobabel
             ,
             no
             nor
             of
             David
             neither
             .
          
           
             Thirdly
             ,
             He
             erreth
             in
             this
             ,
             That
             he
             maketh
             the
             Scepter
             to
             depart
             from
             Iudah
             in
             the
             times
             of
             Herod
             ;
             for
             the
             Jews
             had
             some
             form
             of
             Government
             ,
             some
             Laws
             of
             their
             own
             ,
             which
             did
             continue
             to
             the
             destruction
             of
             Ierusalem
             .
             When
             the
             Lord
             Christ
             had
             provided
             him
             a
             People
             amongst
             the
             Gentiles
             ,
             then
             Ierusalem
             was
             destroyed
             ,
             and
             the
             Jews
             were
             cast
             away
             according
             to
             the
             Prophecies
             .
          
           
             Object
             .
             
               You
               will
               say
               then
               ,
               What
               is
               the
               true
               meaning
               of
            
             Jacob's
             Prophecie
             ?
          
           
             Sol.
             This
             is
             the
             meaning
             thereof
             ,
             That
             there
             should
             be
             a
             Succession
             of
             Kings
             in
             the
             Line
             of
             David
             ,
             till
             the
             Captivity
             of
             Babylon
             .
             And
             though
             the
             other
             Ten
             Tribes
             should
             be
             cast
             away
             ;
             yet
             that
             Tribe
             should
             remain
             .
             And
             after
             the
             Captivity
             ,
             though
             the
             supreme
             Power
             should
             be
             taken
             away
             from
             them
             ,
             yet
             still
             among
             that
             People
             there
             should
             be
             a
             continuation
             of
             some
             Laws
             and
             forms
             of
             Government
             under
             the
             
               Persians
               ,
               Graecians
            
             ,
             and
             Romans
             ,
             till
             the
             coming
             of
             the
             Messiah
             .
             When
             the
             Messiah
             shall
             be
             born
             ,
             he
             shall
             raise
             up
             the
             Tabernacle
             of
             David
             which
             hath
             fallen
             down
             ;
             he
             shall
             set
             up
             that
             Kingdom
             that
             never
             shall
             be
             destroyed
             .
             And
             at
             the
             end
             he
             shall
             destroy
             all
             the
             Metal-Kingdoms
             ,
             and
             fill
             the
             Earth
             .
             And
             so
             by
             consequence
             the
             Kingdom
             of
             David
             shall
             continue
             for
             ever
             .
             This
             is
             the
             full
             sense
             and
             the
             meaning
             of
             Iacob's
             Prophecie
             .
          
           
             Piscator
             ,
             in
             his
             Scholia
             upon
             this
             text
             ,
             doth
             confirm
             what
             we
             speak
             :
             
               Gubernatio
               plena
               cujus
               princeps
               pars
               est
               potestas
               judiciorum
               capitalium
               ,
               adempta
               fuit
               Posteris
               Iudae
               per
               Pompeium
               ,
               qui
               Iudaeam
               in
               formam
               Provinciae
               redegit
               ,
               imperioque
               Romanorum
               subjecit
               .
               Post
               quam
               gubernationis
               ademptionem
               paulò
               post
               natus
               est
               Christus
               sub
               Augusto
               .
               Quod
               autem
               potestas
               illa
               Iudaeis
               per
            
             
             
               Romanos
               fuerit
               adempta
               fatentur
               ipsi
            
             ,
             Joh.
             18.
             31.
             
             
               Gubernatio
               vero
               imminuta
               (
               ademptâ
               scilicet
               potestate
               Iudiciorum
               capitalium
               relictâ
               Potestate
               Iudiciorum
               civilium
               &
               Religionis
               )
               duravit
               usque
               ad
               tempus
               illud
               quo
               natus
               est
               Christus
               ,
               immo
               etiam
               quo
               patefactus
               est
               in
               orbo
               terrarum
               per
               praedicationem
               Apostolorum
               .
               Quippe
               Iudaeos
               adhuc
               tempore
               passionis
               Christi
               habuisse
               potestatem
               aliquam
               judiciorum
               patet
               ex
               verbis
               Pilati
               ad
               illos
               .
            
             In
             which
             words
             of
             his
             ,
             there
             is
             a
             plain
             distinction
             betwixt
             the
             Sovereign
             and
             Supreme
             Power
             ,
             and
             that
             which
             is
             subordinate
             .
             For
             the
             Sovereign
             and
             Supreme
             power
             in
             Capital
             Crimes
             ,
             he
             faith
             this
             was
             taken
             away
             from
             the
             Jews
             by
             the
             means
             of
             Pompey
             the
             Great
             ,
             who
             first
             brought
             that
             Nation
             in
             subjection
             ,
             and
             made
             it
             Tributary
             to
             the
             Romans
             .
             And
             so
             that
             speech
             of
             the
             Jews
             is
             to
             be
             expounded
             :
             
               It
               is
               not
               in
               our
               power
               to
               put
               any
               man
               to
               death
               ,
            
             Joh.
             18.
             31.
             
             For
             the
             subordinate
             Power
             ,
             which
             he
             calls
             
               gubernationem
               imminutam
            
             ,
             a
             regulated
             ,
             or
             limited
             power
             in
             Civil
             Causes
             and
             in
             matters
             of
             Religion
             ,
             this
             (
             saith
             he
             )
             did
             continue
             to
             the
             destruction
             of
             Ierusalem
             .
             And
             so
             those
             words
             are
             to
             be
             expounded
             :
             
               Ye
               have
               a
               Law
               ,
               and
               judge
               ye
               him
               according
               to
               your
               Law
               ,
            
             Joh.
             18.
             31.
             
             By
             this
             then
             we
             may
             understand
             how
             Iudea
             may
             be
             made
             subject
             to
             the
             Romans
             before
             the
             coming
             of
             Christ
             ,
             and
             yet
             some
             form
             of
             Policy
             might
             continue
             among
             that
             People
             ,
             to
             make
             good
             the
             Prophecie
             of
             Iacob
             .
          
           
             But
             if
             we
             must
             needs
             stand
             upon
             the
             words
             ,
             That
             the
             Scepter
             was
             taken
             away
             by
             the
             means
             of
             Pompey
             the
             Great
             ,
             this
             hath
             excellent
             ground
             in
             the
             Stories
             ;
             and
             it
             doth
             make
             exceedingly
             for
             our
             purpose
             .
             For
             the
             ground
             in
             the
             Stories
             ,
             we
             shall
             finde
             ,
             That
             the
             Jews
             that
             were
             in
             Bondage
             ,
             first
             ,
             to
             the
             Babylonians
             ;
             secondly
             ,
             to
             the
             Persians
             ;
             thirdly
             ,
             to
             the
             Graecians
             ;
             that
             after
             the
             death
             of
             
               Antiochus
               Epiphanes
            
             ,
             they
             did
             assert
             their
             Liberty
             against
             the
             Graecians
             of
             the
             Seleucian
             Line
             .
             And
             some
             Kings
             did
             Reign
             in
             Iudea
             of
             the
             stock
             of
             the
             Macchabees
             .
             But
             after
             such
             time
             as
             Pompey
             the
             Great
             brought
             Iudea
             under
             the
             power
             of
             the
             Romans
             ,
             they
             never
             recovered
             their
             Liberty
             again
             .
             Now
             then
             ,
             I
             leave
             it
             to
             any
             to
             judge
             ,
             Whether
             here
             is
             not
             the
             beginning
             of
             the
             Fourth
             Metal-Kingdom
             
             in
             Daniel's
             Image
             ?
             This
             we
             have
             confirmed
             by
             Reasons
             ,
             and
             have
             Answered
             such
             Objections
             as
             might
             be
             alledged
             to
             the
             contrary
             .
          
           
             Now
             let
             us
             go
             to
             the
             second
             Point
             ,
             to
             shew
             the
             Order
             of
             the
             times
             ,
             that
             there
             is
             the
             space
             of
             666
             years
             from
             the
             beginning
             of
             the
             Roman
             as
             the
             Fourth
             Metal-Kingdom
             ,
             to
             the
             setting
             up
             of
             the
             Name
             ,
             or
             Universal
             Headship
             of
             the
             Bishop
             of
             Rome
             ,
             under
             the
             Emperor
             Phocas
             .
          
           
             And
             for
             the
             time
             ,
             we
             cannot
             easily
             be
             deceived
             ,
             because
             the
             words
             of
             Iosephus
             are
             so
             plain
             ,
             That
             this
             came
             to
             pass
             in
             that
             year
             when
             Cicero
             and
             Antonius
             were
             Consuls
             at
             Rome
             ,
             in
             the
             179
             Olympiad
             ,
             in
             the
             third
             Month
             ,
             on
             a
             Fasting-day
             :
             he
             saith
             ,
             That
             Pompey
             entred
             Ierusalem
             with
             the
             Roman
             Legions
             ,
             
               Antiq.
               lib.
            
             12.
             cap.
             8.
             
             And
             for
             their
             subjection
             to
             the
             Romans
             ,
             he
             addeth
             ,
             That
             Syria
             and
             Iudea
             ,
             and
             all
             places
             from
             the
             Borders
             of
             Egypt
             to
             Euphrates
             ,
             were
             committed
             to
             the
             tuition
             of
             
               Scaurus
               ,
               Antiq.
               lib.
            
             14.
             cap.
             8.
             &
             
               de
               Bell.
               Iud.
               lib.
            
             1.
             cap.
             5.
             
             And
             here
             I
             finde
             ,
             That
             all
             Historians
             and
             Chronologers
             do
             agree
             in
             the
             aforementioned
             year
             .
          
           
             Now
             for
             the
             Number
             of
             time
             ,
             That
             there
             are
             666
             years
             from
             this
             beginning
             to
             the
             Universal
             Headship
             of
             the
             Bishop
             of
             Rome
             under
             the
             Emperor
             Phocas
             ;
             this
             is
             clear
             also
             in
             all
             our
             ordinary
             Books
             of
             Chronology
             .
             Dr
             Willet
             ,
             who
             doth
             differ
             from
             our
             Judgement
             about
             the
             Roman
             as
             the
             Fourth
             Metal-Kingdom
             ,
             he
             in
             his
             
               Synops.
               Papism
               .
               Quaest.
               de
               Antichr
               .
               part
               .
            
             2.
             saith
             ,
             That
             the
             Scepter
             was
             taken
             from
             Iudah
             at
             that
             year
             when
             Cicero
             was
             Consul
             at
             Rome
             ,
             which
             he
             affirmeth
             to
             be
             60
             years
             before
             the
             Birth
             of
             the
             Lord
             ,
             and
             666
             before
             the
             setting
             up
             of
             the
             Headship
             of
             the
             Bishop
             of
             Rome
             .
             And
             in
             general
             ,
             he
             doth
             approve
             the
             truth
             of
             our
             Interpretation
             ,
             as
             Bale
             the
             Historian
             did
             before
             him
             .
             And
             whereas
             it
             may
             be
             Alledged
             ,
             That
             Calvisius
             ,
             the
             most
             accurate
             Chronologer
             ,
             doth
             Number
             somthing
             more
             than
             60
             years
             to
             the
             Birth
             of
             the
             Lord
             :
             To
             solve
             this
             Difficulty
             ,
             let
             us
             say
             as
             he
             doth
             ,
             That
             Cicero
             and
             Antonius
             did
             enter
             their
             Office
             about
             the
             20
             of
             October
             ,
             when
             all
             was
             full
             of
             troubles
             at
             Rome
             :
             And
             in
             the
             fourth
             of
             Iuly
             following
             ,
             which
             was
             the
             17
             day
             of
             the
             Month
             
             Tamuz
             ,
             the
             Romans
             entered
             Ierusalem
             ,
             and
             Pompey
             went
             into
             the
             Temple
             .
             To
             this
             if
             we
             adde
             those
             Acts
             of
             his
             ,
             of
             breaking
             down
             the
             Wall
             of
             Ierusalem
             ,
             of
             making
             Iudea
             Tributary
             to
             the
             Romans
             ,
             and
             delivering
             all
             into
             the
             Power
             of
             Scaurus
             the
             Questor
             till
             further
             Order
             should
             be
             taken
             by
             the
             Senate
             ;
             These
             things
             must
             necessarily
             be
             done
             in
             the
             latter
             end
             of
             the
             year
             ,
             when
             C●…cero
             and
             Antonius
             were
             Consuls
             ;
             or
             rather
             ▪
             in
             the
             beginning
             of
             the
             next
             year
             ,
             which
             ,
             according
             to
             Calvisius
             his
             account
             ,
             is
             the
             year
             of
             the
             world
             3889.
             
             To
             which
             ,
             if
             you
             adde
             666
             years
             ,
             the
             Number
             of
             the
             Name
             of
             the
             Universal
             Headship
             of
             the
             Beast
             ,
             this
             will
             make
             the
             year
             of
             the
             world
             4554.
             
             And
             this
             will
             bring
             us
             to
             that
             fatal
             year
             of
             the
             Universal
             Headship
             of
             the
             Bishop
             of
             Rome
             under
             the
             Emperor
             Phocas
             .
             And
             so
             this
             present
             year
             will
             be
             ,
          
           
             From
             The
             Creation
             of
             the
             World
             the
             4555
             Year
             .
          
           
             From
             The
             Birth
             of
             the
             Lord
             the
             606
             Year
             .
          
           
             From
             The
             Beginning
             of
             the
             Roman
             ,
             as
             the
             Fourth
             Metal-Kingdom
             ,
             the
             666
             Year
             .
          
           
             For
             the
             Number
             of
             years
             ,
             there
             is
             yet
             one
             main
             Objection
             .
             Some
             will
             have
             the
             periods
             of
             time
             in
             Daniel's
             Image
             to
             be
             a
             meer
             Scholastical
             speculation
             .
          
           
             Sol.
             We
             will
             go
             to
             the
             Scriptures
             ,
             and
             to
             the
             Stories
             of
             the
             Church
             ,
             to
             decide
             the
             Question
             .
          
           
             For
             the
             Scriptures
             ,
             Let
             us
             first
             consider
             the
             words
             of
             Daniel's
             Thanksgiving
             ,
             upon
             the
             Revelation
             of
             the
             Mystery
             of
             the
             Four
             Metal-Kingdoms
             :
             
               Blessed
               be
               the
               Name
               of
               God
               for
               ever
               ;
               for
               Wisdom
               and
               Might
               are
               his
               :
               he
               changeth
               the
               times
               ,
               and
               seasons
               :
               he
               removeth
               Kings
               ,
               and
               setteth
               up
               Kings
               ,
            
             Dan.
             2.
             20
             ,
             21.
             
             The
             scope
             of
             the
             Vision
             is
             concerning
             the
             Four
             Metal-Kingdoms
             ,
             and
             so
             many
             changes
             of
             time
             answerable
             to
             those
             Four
             Mutations
             of
             Empire
             .
             But
             if
             we
             look
             more
             narrowly
             to
             the
             text
             ,
             the
             words
             in
             the
             Chaldee
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             —
             are
             times
             ,
             and
             revolutions
             of
             time
             .
             For
             the
             word
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             signifieth
             as
             much
             as
             
               tempus
               statutum
               &
               determinatum
            
             ,
             an
             appointed
             and
             determinate
             time
             .
             For
             the
             Lord
             having
             shewed
             Nebuchadnezzar's
             Dream
             to
             Daniel
             ,
             and
             the
             substance
             of
             the
             Dream
             ,
             
             That
             it
             concerned
             a
             Fourfold
             change
             of
             Empire
             ,
             and
             a
             Fourfold
             change
             of
             time
             upon
             the
             Earth
             ;
             Upon
             this
             Reason
             ,
             the
             Prophet
             breaketh
             forth
             into
             the
             praise
             of
             the
             Wisdom
             and
             the
             Power
             of
             God
             ,
             in
             a
             sutable
             manner
             to
             the
             present
             occasion
             .
             And
             in
             very
             deed
             ,
             if
             we
             look
             upon
             the
             translation
             of
             the
             Empire
             from
             the
             Babylonians
             to
             the
             Persians
             ,
             from
             the
             Persians
             to
             the
             Graecians
             ,
             from
             the
             Graecians
             to
             the
             Romans
             ;
             Here
             is
             a
             notable
             Example
             of
             the
             Wisdom
             and
             the
             Power
             of
             God.
             And
             that
             which
             is
             more
             considerable
             ,
             The
             Lord
             speaketh
             of
             the
             times
             of
             the
             sovereign
             Dominion
             of
             these
             People
             ,
             many
             years
             before
             they
             come
             to
             have
             the
             Dominion
             upon
             the
             Earth
             .
             For
             this
             cause
             the
             Prophet
             breaketh
             forth
             into
             the
             praises
             of
             the
             wisdom
             of
             God
             in
             his
             disposing
             the
             changes
             of
             times
             ,
             and
             the
             changes
             of
             Empire
             ;
             and
             for
             the
             communication
             of
             this
             deep
             secret
             to
             him
             and
             the
             other
             three
             Children
             ;
             and
             by
             their
             means
             ,
             to
             the
             information
             of
             the
             Church
             .
             And
             when
             all
             this
             is
             done
             ,
             shall
             we
             say
             ,
             That
             the
             Four
             changes
             of
             time
             ,
             in
             the
             Image
             of
             the
             Metal-Kingdoms
             ,
             are
             but
             a
             curious
             speculation
             ?
             Further
             ,
             it
             is
             added
             ,
             vers
             .
             44.
             
             
               In
               the
               dayes
               of
               these
               Kingdoms
               shall
               the
               God
               of
               Heaven
               raise
               up
               a
               Kingdom
               that
               shall
               never
               be
               destroyed
               .
            
             This
             is
             spoken
             of
             the
             rising
             of
             the
             Kingdom
             of
             Christ
             in
             the
             time
             of
             one
             of
             the
             Four
             Metal-Kingdoms
             .
             The
             Four
             periods
             of
             time
             then
             are
             not
             a
             bare
             Speculation
             ,
             but
             a
             plain
             Scripture-truth
             .
             For
             it
             is
             the
             plot
             of
             the
             Spirit
             to
             shew
             ,
             That
             down
             from
             Nebuchadnezzar
             there
             should
             be
             Four
             Changes
             of
             Empire
             ,
             and
             Four
             notable
             Revolutions
             of
             time
             ;
             and
             when
             these
             Changes
             should
             be
             in
             their
             course
             and
             succession
             ,
             then
             the
             Kingdom
             of
             Christ
             shall
             begin
             .
          
           
             Now
             whereas
             Bodin
             ,
             in
             his
             Method
             of
             History
             ,
             chap.
             7.
             taketh
             a
             great
             deal
             of
             pains
             in
             the
             Confutation
             of
             this
             ;
             Let
             us
             Consider
             what
             he
             Alledgeth
             .
          
           
             First
             ,
             There
             be
             many
             things
             he
             confuteth
             ,
             which
             we
             do
             not
             allow
             .
             For
             ,
             as
             we
             have
             formerly
             said
             ,
             The
             Babylonian
             Empire
             did
             not
             begin
             at
             Ninus
             ,
             but
             at
             Nebuchadnezzar
             .
          
           
             Secondly
             ,
             He
             taketh
             it
             as
             Granted
             ,
             That
             only
             the
             Amplitude
             of
             Dominion
             ,
             maketh
             a
             Monarchical
             Kingdom
             :
             And
             
             hereupon
             ,
             Reasons
             ,
             Why
             should
             not
             the
             Kingdoms
             of
             the
             
               Parthians
               ,
               Saracens
               ,
               Turks
               ,
               Tartars
               ,
            
             go
             under
             the
             account
             of
             Monarchical
             Kingdoms
             ?
             Here
             he
             is
             to
             consider
             ,
             That
             not
             only
             the
             greatness
             of
             Dominion
             ,
             but
             the
             greatness
             of
             Dominion
             over
             the
             Churches
             Continent
             ,
             is
             necessary
             to
             the
             Being
             of
             Daniel's
             Metal-Kingdoms
             .
             And
             therefore
             ,
             look
             what
             Kingdom
             Nebuchadnezzar
             did
             begin
             ,
             it
             did
             orderly
             descend
             to
             the
             
               Persians
               ,
               Graecians
            
             ,
             and
             Romans
             ;
             and
             not
             to
             the
             Parthians
             ,
             as
             experience
             sheweth
             .
             Therefore
             ,
             a
             Beast
             in
             Daniel
             or
             the
             Revelation
             doth
             not
             signifie
             a
             State
             or
             Government
             in
             the
             General
             Notion
             ;
             but
             a
             State
             or
             Government
             that
             is
             Idolatrous
             ,
             and
             doth
             persecute
             the
             Church
             .
             Neither
             doth
             it
             signifie
             an
             Idolatrous
             Government
             in
             the
             Latitude
             ;
             but
             such
             an
             Idolatrous
             Government
             in
             and
             about
             the
             Borders
             of
             the
             Church
             .
             If
             this
             distinction
             were
             well
             observed
             ,
             
               They
               that
               are
               Enemies
               to
               Magistracie
               ,
               would
               not
               have
               such
               harbour
               in
               the
               Revelation
               ,
               as
               they
               think
               they
               have
               .
            
          
           
             Thirdly
             ,
             He
             disputeth
             against
             those
             who
             stand
             for
             a
             German-Roman
             Empire
             .
             And
             with
             him
             we
             do
             agree
             ,
             That
             this
             is
             but
             a
             Fable
             .
             For
             the
             Empire
             ,
             of
             the
             last
             Edition
             ,
             is
             the
             whole
             Body
             of
             the
             Kings
             that
             make
             one
             Catholick
             Communion
             under
             the
             Pope
             their
             Head
             ,
             Rev.
             13.
             and
             chap.
             17.
             
             In
             these
             Particulars
             ,
             he
             doth
             not
             touch
             us
             in
             his
             Disputation
             ;
             but
             them
             only
             who
             do
             maintain
             the
             Truth
             with
             some
             mixtures
             of
             their
             own
             .
          
           
             Secondly
             ,
             For
             the
             Points
             wherein
             we
             differ
             :
             He
             standeth
             hard
             upon
             this
             ,
             That
             the
             Roman
             cannot
             be
             called
             the
             Iron-Metal
             ,
             seeing
             in
             these
             latter
             Ages
             ,
             Learning
             ,
             Civility
             ,
             Religion
             ,
             Discoveries
             by
             Navigation
             ,
             have
             been
             raised
             to
             a
             higher
             perfection
             :
             and
             therefore
             the
             Roman
             cannot
             be
             set
             forth
             by
             a
             more
             worthless
             Metal
             than
             the
             other
             Kingdoms
             .
          
           
             Sol.
             But
             in
             this
             matter
             he
             doth
             not
             Dispute
             so
             much
             against
             us
             ,
             as
             against
             the
             Scripture
             it self
             ,
             and
             the
             scope
             of
             the
             Spirit
             .
             For
             is
             it
             not
             the
             scope
             of
             the
             Spirit
             ,
             to
             compare
             the
             Fourth
             Kingdom
             to
             Iron
             ,
             because
             of
             the
             strength
             ,
             cruelty
             ,
             and
             power
             to
             break
             all
             things
             in
             pieces
             in
             and
             about
             the
             Borders
             of
             the
             Church
             ?
             What
             good
             will
             Learning
             ,
             Civility
             ,
             Navigation
             ,
             
             and
             other
             such
             things
             do
             ,
             when
             the
             Church
             of
             God
             is
             under
             Persecution
             ?
          
           
             But
             yet
             further
             ,
             to
             Convince
             the
             Consciences
             of
             men
             ,
             That
             the
             Four
             Metal-Kingdoms
             in
             Daniel's
             Image
             ,
             are
             no
             nice
             speculation
             ;
             I
             would
             willingly
             put
             it
             to
             men
             to
             Resolve
             me
             this
             Question
             :
             
               The
               Faithful
               that
               lived
               in
               the
               Iewish
               Church
               some
               years
               before
               the
               coming
               of
               Christ
               ,
               whether
               was
               it
               not
               their
               practise
               ,
               and
               some
               way
               their
               duty
               ,
               to
               search
               after
               the
               time
               of
               his
               coming
               ?
            
             These
             are
             the
             words
             of
             
               Peter
               :
               Of
               which
               Salvation
               the
               Prophets
               have
               enquired
               and
               searched
               diligently
               ,
               who
               Prophesied
               of
               the
               Grace
               that
               should
               come
               unto
               you
               ;
               searching
               what
               ,
               or
               what
               manner
               of
               time
               the
               Spirit
               of
               Christ
               which
               was
               in
               them
               did
               signifie
               ,
               when
               it
               testified
               before-hand
               the
               Sufferings
               of
               Christ
               ,
               and
               the
               glory
               that
               should
               follow
               ,
            
             1
             Pet.
             1.
             10
             ,
             11.
             
             Out
             of
             these
             words
             Three
             Points
             no
             necessarily
             issue
             .
             First
             ,
             The
             coming
             of
             Christ
             ,
             his
             Sufferings
             ,
             and
             the
             glory
             that
             followed
             ;
             this
             was
             revealed
             to
             the
             Church
             of
             the
             Jews
             .
             Secondly
             ,
             It
             was
             revealed
             to
             them
             ,
             in
             what
             period
             of
             time
             Christ
             should
             come
             .
             Thirdly
             ,
             They
             did
             diligently
             search
             the
             several
             periods
             and
             changes
             of
             time
             ,
             to
             come
             to
             that
             particular
             season
             when
             the
             Son
             of
             Man
             should
             come
             in
             the
             flesh
             .
             The
             words
             in
             the
             Original
             are
             very
             Emphatical
             ,
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Piscator
             hath
             it
             ,
             
               Scrutantes
               inquem
               &
               cujusmodi
               temporis
               articulum
               .
            
             Beza
             ,
             
               In
               quem
               aut
               qualem
               temporis
               articulum
               .
            
             But
             I
             think
             the
             words
             are
             more
             naturally
             rendered
             :
             
               Scrutantes
               ad
               quam
               aut
               qualem
               temporis
               periodum
               :
               Searching
               to
               which
               ,
               or
               to
               what
               kind
               of
               period
               of
               time
               the
               Spirit
               should
               point
               ,
               as
               with
               a
               finger
               ,
               when
               he
               spake
               of
               the
               coming
               of
               Christ
               in
               the
               flesh
               .
            
             But
             let
             the
             Translation
             be
             what
             it
             will
             be
             ,
             all
             is
             to
             this
             sense
             ,
             That
             the
             Believers
             of
             the
             Antient
             Church
             did
             diligently
             search
             the
             periods
             of
             time
             to
             the
             coming
             of
             Christ
             in
             the
             flesh
             .
             And
             our
             Saviour
             doth
             blame
             the
             Jews
             for
             it
             ,
             
               That
               they
               could
               discern
               the
               face
               of
               the
               skie
               ,
               and
               yet
               could
               not
               understand
               the
               signs
               of
               the
               times
               :
            
             that
             is
             ,
             The
             signs
             of
             the
             times
             of
             his
             coming
             in
             the
             flesh
             ,
             Matt.
             16.
             1
             ,
             2
             ,
             3.
             
             Now
             for
             the
             periods
             of
             time
             to
             the
             coming
             of
             the
             Son
             of
             Man
             in
             the
             flesh
             ,
             there
             are
             none
             more
             clear
             &
             demonstrative
             in
             the
             
             whole
             Old
             Testament
             ,
             than
             those
             two
             in
             the
             Prophecie
             of
             Daniel
             .
             The
             first
             is
             that
             of
             the
             Four
             Metal-Kingdoms
             ,
             chap.
             2.
             and
             the
             Second
             is
             that
             of
             the
             70
             weeks
             ,
             chap.
             9.
             
             By
             these
             Two
             ,
             the
             Saints
             and
             Prophets
             in
             the
             Old
             Testament
             might
             periodically
             come
             to
             the
             times
             of
             the
             Messiah
             ,
             and
             so
             might
             discover
             his
             coming
             in
             the
             flesh
             
               à
               priori
            
             .
             Our
             Saviour
             therefore
             doth
             blame
             them
             ,
             that
             by
             the
             changes
             of
             State
             in
             Iudea
             ,
             First
             ,
             From
             the
             Babylonians
             to
             the
             Persians
             ;
             Secondly
             ,
             From
             the
             Persians
             to
             the
             Graecians
             ;
             Thirdly
             ,
             From
             the
             Graecians
             to
             the
             Romans
             ;
             that
             by
             these
             several
             Alterations
             of
             time
             they
             did
             not
             discern
             the
             signs
             of
             his
             coming
             ,
             nor
             the
             beginning
             of
             his
             Kingdom
             ,
             which
             should
             be
             set
             up
             when
             the
             Image
             should
             come
             to
             the
             last
             and
             lowest
             Region
             ,
             to
             the
             Fourth
             and
             the
             last
             Metal-Kingdom
             .
             
               In
               the
               times
               of
               this
               Kingdom
               ,
               the
               God
               of
               Heaven
               shall
               set
               up
               a
               Kingdom
               that
               never
               shall
               be
               destroyed
               ,
               Dan.
            
             2.
             44.
             
             Therefore
             when
             the
             times
             of
             the
             Romans
             were
             come
             ,
             (
             the
             Fourth
             and
             the
             last
             Monarchical
             People
             )
             the
             Jews
             ,
             by
             the
             course
             of
             Daniel's
             periods
             ,
             might
             easily
             understand
             that
             they
             were
             not
             far
             from
             the
             times
             of
             the
             Messiah
             .
             And
             to
             put
             all
             out
             of
             doubt
             ,
             if
             they
             had
             Numbred
             490
             years
             ,
             or
             70
             weeks
             of
             years
             ,
             from
             the
             building
             of
             the
             City
             and
             Temple
             in
             the
             dayes
             of
             Ezra
             and
             Nehemiah
             ,
             by
             this
             period
             also
             they
             might
             have
             come
             to
             the
             time
             of
             the
             cutting
             off
             of
             the
             Messiah
             ,
             and
             to
             the
             preaching
             of
             the
             Gospel
             among
             all
             Nations
             .
             By
             the
             Collation
             and
             Parallel
             of
             these
             two
             periods
             ,
             the
             Saints
             in
             the
             Jewish
             Church
             might
             have
             found
             out
             in
             what
             Article
             or
             what
             period
             of
             time
             the
             Son
             of
             man
             should
             come
             in
             the
             flesh
             .
             And
             shall
             we
             then
             say
             ,
             That
             the
             Four
             periods
             of
             time
             in
             Daniel's
             Image
             ,
             is
             a
             Scholastical
             and
             nice
             speculation
             ?
          
           
             Thus
             I
             have
             largely
             insisted
             upon
             the
             Point
             ;
             where
             Two
             things
             are
             made
             good
             :
             First
             ,
             That
             the
             Roman
             doth
             begin
             as
             the
             Fourth
             Metal-Kingdom
             ,
             when
             the
             Church
             and
             the
             Continent
             of
             the
             Church
             ,
             came
             under
             the
             Dominion
             of
             that
             People
             .
             Secondly
             ,
             That
             the
             Number
             of
             years
             are
             666
             to
             the
             setting
             up
             of
             the
             Universal
             Headship
             of
             the
             Bishop
             of
             Rome
             under
             the
             Emperor
             Phocas
             ,
             if
             the
             account
             be
             made
             from
             the
             beginning
             of
             the
             Roman
             as
             the
             Fourth
             Metal-Kingdom
             .
             
             I
             have
             proved
             also
             ,
             That
             this
             Method
             of
             Account
             is
             no
             nice
             speculation
             ,
             but
             a
             true
             Scripture-way
             to
             calculate
             and
             Number
             the
             Prophetical
             times
             .
          
           
             Let
             us
             now
             proceed
             to
             the
             next
             Chapter
             ,
             to
             shew
             the
             issue
             of
             the
             Discourse
             .
          
        
      
       
         
           
             CHAP.
             VII
          
           .
           The
           whole
           Process
           of
           the
           Discourse
           is
           repeated
           :
           That
           there
           are
           666
           years
           from
           the
           beginning
           of
           the
           Roman
           as
           the
           Fourth
           Metal-Kingdom
           ,
           to
           the
           setting
           up
           of
           the
           Name
           ,
           or
           Vniversal
           Headship
           of
           the
           Bishop
           of
           Rome
           ;
           And
           that
           this
           is
           the
           meaning
           of
           the
           Spirit
           in
           the
           Revelation
           ,
           when
           he
           speaketh
           of
           the
           Name
           of
           the
           Beast
           ,
           and
           of
           the
           Number
           of
           the
           Name
           .
        
         
           FOR
           the
           cleerer
           Demonstration
           of
           the
           Truth
           ,
           it
           is
           necessary
           that
           I
           should
           Repeat
           the
           sum
           of
           that
           which
           I
           have
           formerly
           delivered
           ,
           that
           we
           may
           see
           the
           whole
           Process
           of
           the
           Disputation
           .
           First
           ,
           I
           have
           shewed
           ,
           That
           the
           Name
           of
           the
           Beast
           is
           not
           the
           word
           Lateinos
           ,
           nor
           any
           other
           Grammatical
           Name
           whatsoever
           ;
           but
           in
           the
           Apocalyptical
           stile
           ,
           it
           noteth
           his
           Universal
           Headship
           or
           Power
           ,
           standing
           in
           immediate
           Opposition
           to
           the
           Name
           or
           Headship
           of
           the
           Lamb.
           Secondly
           ,
           For
           the
           time
           of
           the
           beginning
           of
           this
           Universal
           Headship
           ,
           I
           have
           shewed
           ,
           That
           it
           had
           not
           only
           a
           determinate
           beginning
           ,
           but
           it
           began
           after
           the
           Fall
           of
           the
           Empire
           :
           and
           not
           only
           so
           ,
           but
           it
           began
           after
           the
           Fall
           of
           the
           Empire
           ,
           in
           such
           a
           time
           when
           the
           Universal
           Headship
           was
           ascribed
           to
           the
           Bishop
           of
           Rome
           .
           Now
           this
           I
           have
           proved
           ,
           out
           of
           the
           Stories
           ,
           to
           begin
           under
           the
           Emperor
           Phocas
           ,
           when
           the
           Decree
           went
           forth
           ,
           That
           the
           Bishop
           of
           Rome
           should
           be
           Head
           over
           all
           Churches
           .
           For
           the
           Calculation
           of
           the
           times
           ,
           I
           have
           shewed
           ,
           That
           there
           is
           a
           Chain
           
           of
           666
           years
           ,
           from
           the
           beginning
           of
           the
           Roman
           as
           the
           Fourth
           Metal-Kingdom
           ,
           to
           the
           setting
           up
           of
           the
           Name
           or
           Universal
           Headship
           aforesaid
           .
           To
           the
           clearer
           probation
           of
           which
           ,
           I
           have
           largely
           insisted
           upon
           two
           Points
           .
           First
           ,
           That
           the
           Roman
           is
           the
           Fourth
           Metal-Kingdom
           ;
           against
           Iunius
           and
           his
           followers
           .
           Secondly
           ,
           That
           the
           Roman
           doth
           begin
           ,
           as
           the
           Fourth
           Metal-Kingdom
           ,
           not
           from
           Iulius
           or
           
             Augustus
             Caesar
          
           ,
           but
           from
           that
           time
           when
           the
           Church
           came
           under
           the
           Dominion
           of
           that
           People
           .
           Now
           from
           this
           beginning
           ,
           I
           do
           positively
           Affirm
           ,
           That
           there
           is
           a
           Chain
           of
           666
           years
           to
           the
           beginning
           of
           the
           Papacie
           ,
           set
           forth
           by
           the
           Type
           or
           Emblem
           of
           the
           little
           Horn
           ,
           Dan.
           7.
           
           And
           this
           is
           the
           true
           Accommodation
           and
           Application
           of
           Daniel's
           Visions
           to
           the
           Stories
           of
           the
           Church
           .
        
         
           And
           whereas
           Iohn
           in
           the
           Revelation
           speaketh
           of
           the
           rising
           of
           the
           Two-Horned
           Beast
           out
           of
           the
           Earth
           ,
           that
           the
           Number
           of
           the
           Name
           ,
           or
           Universal
           Headship
           ,
           of
           this
           Beast
           is
           666
           ;
           His
           meaning
           is
           ,
           That
           there
           are
           666
           years
           from
           the
           beginning
           of
           the
           Roman
           as
           the
           Fourth
           Metal-Kingdom
           ,
           to
           the
           setting
           up
           of
           the
           Name
           or
           Universal
           Headship
           of
           the
           Beast
           .
           He
           doth
           more
           fully
           repeat
           that
           which
           was
           more
           briefly
           delivered
           before
           .
           And
           in
           these
           Calculations
           ,
           he
           doth
           but
           refer
           us
           to
           Daniel's
           Chronologie
           in
           the
           Image
           of
           persecuting
           States
           .
           This
           is
           the
           whole
           process
           of
           the
           Discourse
           .
        
         
           But
           before
           I
           come
           to
           the
           Point
           ,
           I
           will
           remove
           a
           mistake
           in
           some
           of
           our
           latter
           Commentaries
           ,
           which
           will
           have
           Mahomet
           ,
           or
           the
           Turk
           ,
           to
           be
           the
           little
           Horn.
           This
           is
           the
           Opinion
           of
           Grasserus
           ,
           and
           Mr
           Brightman
           .
        
         
           I
           have
           been
           held
           with
           some
           kind
           of
           admiration
           ,
           to
           see
           two
           such
           worthy
           Expositors
           to
           leave
           the
           Common
           and
           plain
           way
           ,
           and
           to
           embrace
           a
           private
           Fancy
           of
           their
           own
           ,
           so
           contrary
           to
           the
           scope
           of
           the
           Scriptures
           ,
           and
           to
           the
           ordinary
           Reason
           of
           men
           .
        
         
           But
           let
           us
           come
           to
           Argument
           .
        
         
           First
           ,
           The
           little
           Horn
           and
           the
           Ten
           Horns
           in
           the
           text
           ,
           are
           set
           forth
           as
           the
           parts
           that
           do
           integrate
           and
           make
           up
           the
           Roman
           as
           the
           Fourth
           Metal-Kingdom
           .
           But
           so
           do
           neither
           
           Mahomet
           ,
           nor
           the
           Turk
           ,
           as
           it
           is
           plain
           by
           experience
           .
           For
           who
           can
           say
           ,
           That
           the
           Turk
           or
           Mahomet
           ,
           are
           any
           integral
           parts
           of
           the
           Roman
           Kingdom
           ,
           being
           every
           way
           so
           contrary
           and
           opposite
           ,
           having
           no
           union
           or
           conjunction
           at
           all
           ?
        
         
           Object
           .
           1.
           
           
             But
             it
             may
             be
             Replied
             ,
             The
             ten
             Kings
             that
             arose
             out
             of
             the
             Ruines
             of
             the
             old
             Empire
             ,
             are
             reckoned
             as
             Branches
             and
             Parts
             of
             the
             Roman
             Kingdom
             ;
             and
             yet
             they
             were
             the
             Princes
             by
             whom
             the
             Empire
             was
             destroyed
             .
          
        
         
           Sol.
           To
           this
           I
           Reply
           ;
           The
           forenamed
           Interpreters
           may
           easily
           give
           an
           Answer
           to
           this
           Doubt
           ,
           out
           of
           the
           Revelation
           .
           Though
           the
           Ten
           Kings
           did
           arise
           out
           of
           the
           Ruines
           of
           the
           Empire
           ,
           yet
           all
           of
           them
           afterward
           were
           united
           in
           one
           Roman
           Body
           of
           the
           last
           Edition
           ;
           but
           neither
           Mahomet
           nor
           the
           Turk
           ever
           came
           within
           this
           union
           or
           combination
           .
        
         
           Object
           .
           2.
           
           
             But
             it
             may
             be
             further
             Alledged
             ,
             That
             the
             little
             Horn
             did
             subdue
             three
             of
             the
             former
             Horns
             ;
             and
             this
             rather
             agreeth
             to
             Mahomet
             and
             the
             Turk
             ,
             than
             to
             the
             Papacie
             ,
             whose
             part
             it
             is
             to
             preserve
             them
             .
          
        
         
           Sol.
           Among
           the
           many
           Notes
           of
           the
           little
           Horn
           ,
           it
           is
           possible
           some
           few
           may
           be
           applicable
           to
           Mahomet
           and
           to
           the
           Turk
           :
           but
           we
           should
           also
           consider
           the
           multitude
           and
           Evidence
           of
           those
           others
           that
           do
           utterly
           reject
           such
           an
           Application
           .
           Now
           there
           are
           many
           Notes
           that
           cannot
           possibly
           agree
           with
           Mahomet
           or
           the
           Turk
           ,
           if
           we
           should
           come
           to
           singulars
           .
           And
           for
           the
           eradication
           of
           Three
           Horns
           ,
           we
           have
           largely
           proved
           how
           the
           Papacie
           did
           humble
           Three
           Dominions
           ,
           to
           have
           elbow-room
           in
           Italy
           .
           He
           did
           cast
           down
           some
           of
           the
           former
           ;
           and
           it
           is
           as
           true
           ,
           That
           he
           did
           preserve
           the
           union
           of
           the
           Residue
           ,
           to
           make
           a
           Roman
           Catholick
           Empire
           .
           Secondly
           ,
           For
           the
           Blasphemies
           of
           the
           little
           Horn
           ,
           
             The
             Beast
             was
             destroyed
             ,
             and
             his
             Body
             given
             to
             the
             burning
             fire
             .
          
           Now
           ,
           what
           Congruity
           or
           colour
           of
           Reason
           is
           there
           ,
           That
           the
           Roman
           Kingdom
           should
           be
           destroyed
           for
           the
           Blasphemies
           of
           Mahomet
           ?
           If
           you
           apply
           this
           to
           the
           Papacy
           ,
           this
           is
           fully
           verified
           in
           that
           which
           is
           spoken
           ,
           
             The
             Beast
             was
             taken
             ,
             and
             with
             him
             the
             false
             Prophet
             ,
             and
             they
             both
             were
             cast
             into
             the
             Lake
             of
             fire
             .
          
           Thirdly
           ,
           In
           all
           
             the
             times
             of
             the
             Roman
             Kingdom
             ,
          
           from
           the
           beginning
           to
           the
           end
           ,
           there
           was
           the
           greatest
           
           cruelty
           exercised
           against
           the
           Saints
           in
           the
           times
           of
           the
           little
           Horn.
           Now
           ,
           if
           you
           apply
           this
           to
           Mahomet
           and
           the
           Turk
           ,
           though
           they
           have
           made
           great
           waste
           in
           the
           Christian
           world
           ,
           yet
           the
           War
           hath
           not
           been
           formerly
           against
           the
           Saints
           as
           such
           ;
           neither
           hath
           their
           cruelty
           been
           the
           greatest
           that
           ever
           hath
           been
           .
           But
           if
           we
           apply
           this
           to
           the
           Papacy
           ,
           here
           hath
           been
           a
           War
           against
           the
           Saints
           ,
           as
           Saints
           ;
           and
           here
           hath
           been
           the
           greatest
           Persecutions
           that
           ever
           were
           ,
           as
           appeareth
           by
           the
           whole
           Book
           of
           the
           Revelation
           .
           Fourthly
           ,
           The
           little
           Horn
           is
           said
           to
           continue
           a
           time
           ,
           times
           ,
           and
           the
           dividing
           of
           time
           .
           This
           will
           not
           agree
           to
           the
           duration
           of
           Mahomet
           ;
           for
           ,
           what
           place
           of
           Scripture
           doth
           once
           mention
           such
           a
           thing
           ?
           But
           it
           is
           plainly
           applied
           to
           the
           Papacy
           ,
           Rev.
           12.
           6.
           
           Rev.
           13.
           5.
           
        
         
           These
           ,
           and
           many
           more
           Reasons
           ,
           may
           be
           produced
           to
           prove
           ,
           That
           Mahomet
           cannot
           be
           resembled
           by
           the
           little
           Horn
           :
           and
           the
           Reasons
           for
           the
           Affirmative
           are
           very
           weak
           and
           feeble
           .
           On
           the
           contrary
           ,
           if
           you
           take
           the
           whole
           Body
           of
           the
           Chapter
           ,
           and
           the
           whole
           Bundle
           of
           Notes
           ,
           they
           will
           be
           wholly
           applied
           to
           the
           Bishop
           of
           Rome
           ;
           and
           strongly
           prove
           ,
           That
           the
           Papacy
           is
           the
           little
           Horn.
           
        
         
           Now
           I
           will
           try
           the
           truth
           of
           one
           Principle
           ,
           on
           which
           the
           forenamed
           Authors
           do
           build
           ,
           when
           they
           take
           Mahomet
           to
           be
           the
           little
           Horn.
           
        
         
           
             The
             chief
             Ground
             they
             build
             upon
             ,
             is
             this
             ,
             Because
             the
             Turk
             doth
             hold
             all
             those
             Countries
             in
             Asia
             ,
             which
             were
             formerly
             the
             Continent
             of
             the
             Iewish
             Church
             .
          
        
         
           To
           this
           I
           have
           said
           before
           ,
           That
           so
           long
           as
           the
           Jews
           were
           the
           only
           People
           of
           God
           ,
           the
           delineation
           of
           the
           Four
           Metal-Kingdoms
           was
           in
           special
           reference
           to
           that
           Church
           .
           But
           they
           being
           cast
           off
           ,
           the
           Metal-Kingdoms
           ,
           so
           much
           of
           them
           as
           doth
           remain
           ,
           doth
           more
           immediately
           concern
           the
           Churches
           of
           the
           Gentiles
           .
           If
           Mahomet
           be
           the
           little
           Horn
           ,
           who
           were
           the
           Saints
           of
           the
           most
           High
           whom
           he
           did
           wear
           cut
           ?
           Will
           any
           man
           say
           That
           they
           were
           only
           the
           Saints
           of
           the
           Jewish
           Church
           ?
           Alas
           !
           the
           Jews
           were
           a
           People
           cast
           away
           some
           hundreds
           of
           years
           before
           the
           Name
           of
           Mahomet
           was
           heard
           in
           the
           world
           :
           and
           they
           do
           remain
           till
           this
           day
           a
           People
           not
           called
           again
           .
        
         
         
           It
           may
           be
           more
           truly
           affirmed
           ,
           That
           the
           Metal-Kingdoms
           in
           Daniel's
           Image
           ,
           do
           not
           concern
           the
           Jews
           only
           ,
           nor
           the
           Gentiles
           only
           ;
           but
           both
           Jews
           and
           Gentiles
           in
           their
           several
           times
           .
           For
           proof
           of
           this
           ,
           we
           will
           lay
           down
           some
           special
           Observations
           .
        
         
           First
           ,
           In
           the
           Image
           of
           persecuting
           States
           ,
           it
           is
           not
           the
           purpose
           of
           God
           only
           to
           shew
           Four
           Revolutions
           of
           Empire
           ,
           but
           his
           more
           special
           intent
           is
           to
           shew
           the
           beginning
           of
           the
           Kingdom
           of
           his
           Son.
           Secondly
           ,
           It
           is
           his
           purpose
           not
           to
           reveal
           this
           only
           to
           the
           Jews
           ,
           but
           to
           the
           People
           of
           the
           Gentiles
           also
           .
           This
           latter
           may
           be
           proved
           from
           the
           person
           of
           Nebuchadnezzar
           ,
           to
           whom
           this
           secret
           was
           revealed
           .
           For
           if
           it
           had
           only
           concerned
           the
           National
           Church
           of
           the
           Jews
           ,
           That
           the
           God
           of
           Heaven
           will
           raise
           up
           a
           Kingdom
           that
           never
           shall
           be
           destroyed
           ,
           Why
           was
           this
           delivered
           to
           Nebuchadnezzar
           ,
           an
           Heathen
           Man
           ,
           and
           an
           Enemy
           of
           the
           Church
           ?
           When
           the
           Lord
           did
           reveal
           to
           Pharoah
           the
           Dream
           of
           the
           seven
           fat
           Kine
           ;
           and
           after
           ,
           the
           Dream
           of
           seven
           lean
           Kine
           ,
           this
           was
           not
           only
           discovered
           for
           the
           good
           of
           the
           Church
           ,
           but
           for
           the
           preservation
           of
           mankind
           .
           So
           the
           Succession
           of
           the
           Four
           great
           Empires
           ,
           and
           the
           beginning
           of
           the
           Kingdom
           of
           Christ
           in
           the
           times
           of
           the
           last
           Empire
           ,
           these
           things
           were
           not
           revealed
           only
           to
           Nebuchadnezzar
           ,
           that
           the
           Jews
           might
           understand
           the
           truth
           ,
           but
           that
           the
           whole
           habitable
           world
           under
           Nebuchadnezzar's
           Dominion
           ,
           might
           take
           notice
           of
           that
           which
           God
           did
           intend
           to
           do
           .
        
         
           Secondly
           ,
           This
           appeareth
           by
           the
           manner
           of
           the
           Revelation
           to
           Nebuchadnezzar
           ,
           which
           was
           to
           this
           end
           ,
           That
           the
           whole
           world
           might
           observe
           it
           ,
           First
           ,
           If
           you
           consider
           the
           Person
           ,
           Nebuchadnezzar
           dreamed
           a
           Dream
           .
           Secondly
           ,
           The
           way
           of
           God's
           dealing
           with
           him
           ;
           he
           forgat
           the
           Dream
           ,
           and
           therefore
           a
           great
           trouble
           fell
           upon
           his
           Spirit
           .
           Thirdly
           ,
           His
           calling
           for
           the
           wise-men
           of
           Babylon
           ,
           which
           City
           in
           these
           times
           was
           the
           Eye
           of
           the
           world
           ,
           and
           the
           seat
           of
           the
           Empire
           .
           Now
           ,
           it
           is
           not
           to
           be
           imagined
           ,
           but
           all
           that
           lived
           within
           the
           Verge
           of
           so
           large
           a
           Dominion
           would
           be
           apt
           to
           hearken
           after
           such
           a
           thing
           :
           Specially
           ,
           when
           they
           should
           hear
           of
           the
           trouble
           of
           the
           King
           ,
           and
           of
           the
           Edict
           to
           kill
           all
           the
           wise-men
           of
           Babylon
           .
           
           Here
           was
           a
           matter
           set
           out
           ,
           in
           the
           view
           of
           all
           Asia
           as
           it
           were
           ,
           to
           prove
           Three
           Particulars
           .
           First
           ,
           That
           the
           God
           of
           Israel
           was
           the
           true
           God.
           Secondly
           ,
           That
           he
           would
           set
           up
           Four
           great
           Changes
           of
           Empire
           in
           the
           world
           .
           Thirdly
           ,
           That
           in
           the
           last
           Succession
           of
           Empire
           he
           would
           set
           up
           a
           Kingdom
           that
           never
           should
           be
           destroyed
           .
           These
           things
           were
           propounded
           not
           only
           for
           the
           Church
           ,
           but
           for
           the
           Observation
           of
           the
           whole
           habitable
           Earth
           under
           the
           Babylonian
           Empire
           that
           then
           was
           ,
           and
           for
           the
           Ages
           following
           .
        
         
           Thirdly
           ,
           If
           we
           look
           to
           the
           Story
           of
           the
           Evangelists
           ,
           we
           do
           read
           that
           the
           Evangelist
           S.
           Matthew
           doth
           tell
           us
           ,
           That
           when
           the
           Lord
           Christ
           was
           Born
           in
           Bethleem
           ,
           in
           the
           dayes
           of
           Herod
           the
           King
           ,
           wise-men
           came
           to
           
             Ierusalem
             ,
             Matth.
          
           2.
           1
           ,
           2
           ,
           3
           ,
           4.
           
           Here
           Interpreters
           upon
           the
           place
           do
           raise
           many
           Questions
           .
           First
           ,
           Who
           these
           wise-men
           were
           ?
           Secondly
           ,
           Why
           was
           it
           Revealed
           to
           them
           by
           a
           Star
           ?
           Thirdly
           ,
           Why
           did
           the
           Star
           guide
           them
           to
           Ierusalem
           ,
           and
           then
           vanish
           out
           of
           〈◊〉
           These
           Questions
           are
           propounded
           by
           Interpreters
           ;
           and
           they
           do
           give
           very
           learned
           and
           solid
           Answers
           to
           them
           .
           Only
           there
           is
           a
           Question
           to
           which
           I
           do
           not
           yet
           finde
           a
           satisfactory
           Answer
           ;
           and
           that
           is
           this
           :
           Why
           was
           this
           matter
           Revealed
           to
           wise-men
           in
           the
           East
           ,
           rather
           than
           to
           any
           other
           Nation
           ,
           Profession
           ,
           or
           Sect
           among
           the
           Gentiles
           ?
           Spanhemius
           doth
           handle
           this
           Point
           in
           his
           
             Dubia
             Evangelica
             ,
             part
          
           .
           2.
           dub
           .
           31.
           pag.
           326.
           and
           he
           doth
           come
           to
           this
           issue
           in
           the
           close
           :
           
             Concludimus
             itaque
             causum
             vocationis
             Magorum
             nequaquam
             in
             illis
             suisse
             ,
             sed
             in
             solâ
             Dei
             vocantis
             bonitate
             ,
             &
             illos
             ex
             merâ
             ejus
             gratiâ
             vocatos
             ,
             sive
             absolutè
             eorum
             vocatio
             consideretur
             ,
             sive
             comparatè
             :
             Quod
             enim
             &
             vocati
             ,
             &
             vocati
             prae
             aliis
             Dei
             miserentis
             fuit
             illorum
             potius
             quam
             aliorum
             .
             Et
             haec
             causa
             causarum
             est
             ,
             &
             summa
             ratio
             ,
             pag.
          
           329.
           
           Here
           I
           do
           agree
           ,
           That
           the
           Call
           of
           the
           wise-men
           doth
           chiefly
           depend
           upon
           the
           Grace
           and
           Mercy
           of
           God.
           This
           is
           the
           Cause
           of
           causes
           ,
           and
           the
           chiefest
           Reason
           why
           they
           were
           called
           ,
           and
           why
           they
           were
           called
           before
           any
           other
           .
           But
           yet
           ,
           with
           submission
           to
           a
           better
           judgement
           ,
           I
           think
           there
           lies
           a
           plain
           reason
           in
           the
           Scriptures
           ,
           why
           the
           Birth
           of
           the
           King
           of
           the
           Jews
           ,
           was
           revealed
           to
           the
           wise-men
           of
           the
           East
           ,
           
           rather
           than
           to
           any
           other
           Gentiles
           .
           For
           when
           the
           Lord
           had
           a
           purpose
           to
           Reveal
           Four
           great
           Changes
           of
           time
           to
           the
           world
           ,
           and
           particularly
           the
           time
           of
           the
           setting
           up
           of
           the
           Kingdom
           of
           his
           Son
           ,
           he
           had
           appointed
           in
           his
           Providence
           that
           the
           wisemen
           of
           Babylon
           ,
           whose
           Profession
           it
           was
           to
           understand
           the
           changes
           of
           time
           ,
           that
           they
           should
           come
           to
           take
           notice
           of
           these
           things
           ;
           but
           more
           specially
           of
           the
           time
           when
           the
           Kingdom
           of
           Christ
           should
           be
           set
           up
           .
           But
           because
           they
           could
           not
           know
           this
           by
           their
           own
           strength
           ,
           the
           Lord
           did
           Reveal
           it
           to
           them
           by
           the
           Ministery
           of
           Daniel
           ,
           That
           he
           would
           set
           up
           Four
           Kingdoms
           over
           the
           Earth
           ,
           whereof
           the
           Babylonian
           in
           Being
           was
           the
           first
           ;
           and
           then
           in
           the
           latter
           end
           he
           would
           set
           up
           a
           Kingdom
           that
           never
           should
           be
           destroyed
           .
           In
           a
           word
           ,
           This
           is
           the
           Cause
           wherefore
           these
           changes
           of
           times
           were
           revealed
           to
           the
           wise-men
           of
           the
           East
           ,
           because
           it
           did
           suit
           with
           their
           Profession
           to
           take
           notice
           of
           such
           things
           .
           And
           the
           Lord
           having
           once
           revealed
           in
           particular
           the
           time
           of
           the
           setting
           up
           of
           the
           Kingdom
           of
           his
           Son
           to
           the
           wise-men
           of
           the
           East
           ,
           when
           the
           Lord
           Christ
           was
           born
           at
           Bethleem
           in
           Iudea
           ,
           in
           the
           days
           of
           Herod
           the
           King
           ;
           he
           did
           Call
           that
           sort
           of
           men
           in
           special
           ,
           to
           take
           notice
           of
           that
           which
           was
           foretold
           .
           Because
           these
           things
           were
           revealed
           to
           them
           ,
           they
           were
           called
           in
           a
           special
           manner
           to
           take
           notice
           of
           the
           Birth
           of
           the
           Messiah
           ,
           and
           of
           the
           beginning
           of
           his
           Kingdom
           .
        
         
           From
           all
           that
           hath
           been
           said
           ,
           we
           may
           conclude
           ,
           That
           the
           Vision
           of
           the
           Metal-Kingdoms
           doth
           concern
           both
           Jews
           and
           Gentiles
           :
           Therefore
           there
           is
           no
           necessity
           that
           
             Brightman
             ,
             Grasserus
          
           ,
           and
           other
           learned
           men
           ,
           should
           take
           the
           little
           Horn
           for
           Mahomet
           ,
           because
           the
           Country
           of
           Iudea
           is
           now
           under
           the
           Turks
           .
           Many
           other
           Arguments
           might
           ,
           be
           brought
           to
           prove
           ,
           That
           neither
           Mahomet
           nor
           the
           Turk
           can
           possibly
           be
           resembled
           by
           the
           Type
           of
           the
           little
           Horn.
           The
           scope
           of
           the
           text
           ,
           and
           the
           whole
           collection
           of
           Circumstances
           ,
           do
           altogether
           pitch
           upon
           the
           Papacy
           ,
           which
           arose
           after
           the
           division
           of
           the
           Roman
           Empire
           into
           ten
           inferiour
           Kingdoms
           in
           the
           time
           of
           the
           Emperor
           Phocas
           ,
           666
           years
           from
           the
           beginning
           of
           the
           Roman
           as
           the
           Fourth
           Metal-Kingdom
           .
           This
           is
           the
           true
           Application
           of
           
           the
           times
           to
           the
           Stories
           of
           the
           Church
           ;
           and
           this
           is
           the
           natural
           sense
           of
           Iohn
           in
           the
           Book
           of
           the
           Revelation
           ,
           That
           the
           Number
           of
           the
           Name
           of
           the
           Beast
           is
           666.
           
        
         
           Now
           for
           the
           truth
           of
           this
           Interpretation
           ,
           we
           will
           prove
           it
           ,
           First
           ,
           From
           the
           whole
           scope
           of
           the
           text
           ,
           Rev.
           13.
           
           Secondly
           ,
           From
           the
           drift
           of
           the
           Spirit
           ,
           Rev.
           17.
           
           Thirdly
           ,
           From
           the
           whole
           Harmony
           of
           the
           Prophecie
           in
           the
           chief
           and
           remarkable
           Circumstances
           .
           Lastly
           ,
           From
           the
           scope
           of
           the
           Apostle
           ,
           2
           Thess.
           2.
           
           And
           of
           these
           in
           their
           Order
           .
        
      
       
         
           
             CHAP.
             VIII
          
           .
           The
           Truth
           of
           the
           Interpretation
           is
           proved
           ,
           from
           the
           remarkable
           Circumstances
           of
           the
           Text
           it self
           ,
           
             Revel
             .
             13.
             16
             ,
             17
             ,
             18.
             
          
        
         
           THere
           be
           many
           excellent
           and
           precious
           Truths
           in
           the
           general
           ,
           which
           we
           cannot
           alwayes
           avouch
           ,
           That
           the
           Spirit
           doth
           intend
           them
           in
           such
           or
           such
           a
           particular
           Scripture
           .
           Now
           that
           this
           may
           appear
           to
           be
           a
           right
           Interpretation
           ,
           we
           will
           compare
           it
           with
           every
           Circumstance
           in
           the
           Text.
           These
           are
           the
           words
           that
           follow
           :
           
             And
             he
             causeth
             all
             ,
             both
             small
             and
             great
             ,
             rich
             and
             poor
             ,
             free
             and
             bond
             ,
             to
             Receive
             a
             Mark
             in
             their
             right
             hand
             ,
             and
             in
             their
             forehead
             ;
             and
             that
             no
             man
             might
             buy
             or
             sell
             ,
             save
             he
             that
             had
             the
             Mark
             ,
             or
             the
             Name
             of
             the
             Beast
             ,
             or
             the
             Number
             of
             the
             Name
             .
             Here
             is
             Wisdom
             ;
             Let
             him
             that
             hath
             Understanding
             ●…ount
             the
             Number
             of
             the
             Beast
             ,
             for
             it
             is
             the
             Number
             of
             a
             Man
             ,
             and
             his
             Number
             is
             six
             hundred
             threescore
             and
             six
             .
          
           In
           these
           words
           we
           are
           to
           Note
           Four
           Particulars
           .
           1.
           
           The
           matter
           of
           the
           Law
           which
           the
           Beast
           doth
           impose
           ;
           he
           causeth
           all
           men
           to
           receive
           a
           Mark
           in
           their
           right
           Hand
           ,
           and
           in
           their
           Forehead
           ;
           and
           that
           they
           have
           the
           Name
           of
           the
           Beast
           ,
           and
           the
           Number
           of
           it
           .
           
           2.
           
           The
           maker
           of
           the
           Law
           :
           soil
           .
           The
           Beast
           with
           Two
           Horns
           .
           He
           causeth
           men
           to
           receive
           the
           Mark
           by
           his
           coercive
           power
           .
           3.
           
           The
           Persons
           on
           whom
           he
           doth
           impose
           the
           Law.
           He
           causeth
           all
           both
           small
           and
           great
           ,
           bond
           and
           free
           ,
           rich
           and
           poor
           ,
           to
           receive
           a
           Mark.
           For
           though
           there
           is
           great
           difference
           in
           civil
           Relations
           between
           poor-men
           and
           rich
           ,
           bondmen
           and
           free
           ;
           yet
           in
           this
           matter
           none
           are
           exempted
           .
           All
           must
           receive
           the
           Mark
           ,
           one
           as
           well
           as
           the
           other
           :
           there
           is
           no
           difference
           of
           Condition
           .
           4.
           
           The
           Penalty
           inflicted
           on
           him
           that
           will
           not
           submit
           to
           the
           Law
           ;
           He
           must
           have
           no
           civil
           Commerce
           with
           men
           ;
           he
           must
           not
           buy
           nor
           sell
           ,
           that
           hath
           not
           these
           Three
           Things
           :
           First
           ,
           The
           Mark
           ;
           Secondly
           ,
           The
           Name
           ;
           Thirdly
           ,
           The
           Number
           of
           the
           Name
           .
        
         
           Now
           ,
           that
           men
           might
           rightly
           conceive
           what
           is
           meant
           by
           these
           things
           ,
           the
           same
           Spirit
           doth
           exhort
           them
           to
           Calculate
           the
           Number
           ,
           the
           Point
           that
           we
           are
           now
           upon
           .
        
         
           For
           the
           Calculation
           of
           the
           Number
           ,
           these
           Four
           Particulars
           also
           ought
           to
           be
           Observed
           :
           First
           ,
           The
           Person
           exhorted
           ,
           who
           it
           is
           that
           must
           make
           the
           Discovery
           .
           And
           this
           is
           every
           such
           one
           as
           hath
           a
           mind
           given
           him
           of
           God
           more
           accurately
           to
           search
           into
           the
           meaning
           of
           the
           Prophecies
           .
           The
           matter
           is
           not
           easio
           to
           be
           understood
           at
           the
           first
           sight
           ;
           there
           must
           be
           some
           Wisdom
           used
           to
           the
           Discovery
           thereof
           .
           Secondly
           ,
           The
           manner
           :
           It
           must
           be
           by
           the
           way
           of
           Reckoning
           ,
           or
           Numbering
           .
           
             Let
             him
             that
             hath
             Wisdom
             reckon
             the
             Number
             of
             the
             Beast
             .
          
           Thirdly
           ,
           The
           Rule
           and
           Method
           of
           Account
           .
           There
           is
           some
           way
           of
           Reckoning
           ,
           called
           ,
           
             The
             Number
             of
             a
             Man
          
           ;
           by
           and
           through
           which
           ,
           the
           Calculation
           is
           to
           be
           made
           .
           Fourthly
           ,
           The
           particular
           Number
           it self
           :
           and
           in
           this
           Method
           or
           way
           of
           Account
           ,
           it
           is
           666.
           
        
         
           These
           are
           the
           Natural
           distributions
           of
           the
           words
           of
           the
           text
           .
           Now
           according
           to
           this
           Pattern
           or
           Platform
           ,
           let
           us
           proceed
           to
           shew
           the
           truth
           of
           our
           Interpretation
           ,
           and
           what
           apt
           coherence
           it
           hath
           with
           the
           Circumstances
           ,
           and
           with
           the
           Natural
           scope
           of
           the
           text
           .
        
         
           To
           begin
           therefore
           with
           the
           matter
           of
           the
           Law
           :
           It
           is
           expresly
           said
           ,
           That
           the
           Beast
           did
           cause
           all
           to
           receive
           a
           Mark
           ,
           to
           have
           the
           Name
           ,
           and
           the
           Number
           of
           the
           Name
           .
           For
           the
           
           Mark
           ,
           we
           are
           not
           to
           take
           it
           for
           a
           material
           Character
           ,
           but
           it
           is
           the
           publick
           Profession
           of
           the
           Faith
           of
           a
           Roman
           Catholick
           ,
           by
           and
           through
           which
           he
           doth
           publickly
           acknowledg
           his
           subjection
           and
           Allegeance
           to
           the
           Universal
           Headship
           of
           the
           Bishop
           of
           Rome
           .
           For
           ,
           as
           in
           the
           words
           immediately
           following
           ,
           when
           Iohn
           saw
           the
           Lamb
           stand
           upon
           Mount
           Sion
           ,
           and
           with
           him
           144000
           ,
           having
           their
           Father's
           Name
           written
           in
           their
           Forehead
           ,
           We
           do
           not
           take
           the
           Name
           of
           the
           Father
           written
           in
           the
           Forehead
           for
           a
           literal
           Character
           ,
           but
           for
           the
           visibility
           of
           their
           Profession
           that
           yield
           subjection
           to
           the
           Commands
           of
           God
           the
           Father
           as
           their
           Sovereign
           Lord
           :
           So
           on
           the
           other
           side
           ,
           The
           followers
           of
           the
           Beast
           ,
           the
           Mark
           in
           their
           Forehead
           ,
           and
           in
           their
           right
           hand
           ,
           is
           not
           a
           visible
           brand
           or
           print-mark
           consisting
           of
           Letters
           and
           syllables
           ;
           but
           it
           sheweth
           the
           visibility
           of
           their
           Profession
           that
           do
           own
           the
           Bishop
           of
           Rome's
           Universal
           Headship
           over
           all
           Churches
           ,
           and
           that
           they
           are
           in
           Conscience
           bound
           to
           be
           subject
           to
           his
           Laws
           ,
           as
           to
           another
           Christ.
           Paraeus
           upon
           the
           place
           speaketh
           to
           the
           same
           effect
           :
           
             Unde
             secundò
             liquet
             ,
             cum
             Bestia
             Antichristiana
             sit
             Papa
             Romanus
             ,
             exuviis
             Romani
             Imperii
             &
             tunicâ
             Christi
             indutus
             ,
             Characterem
             Bestiae
             esse
             Professionem
             Papistici
             cultus
             ,
             sicut
             supra
             Character
             Christi
             non
             fuit
             nota
             materialis
             ,
             sed
             professio
             Christiani
             cultus
             .
          
        
         
           But
           that
           in
           this
           matter
           we
           may
           not
           altogether
           depend
           upon
           Authority
           ,
           we
           will
           prove
           by
           many
           Arguments
           that
           the
           publick
           Profession
           of
           the
           Catholicism
           or
           Universal
           Headship
           of
           the
           Bishop
           of
           Rome
           is
           the
           Mark
           in
           the
           Forehead
           and
           in
           the
           right
           Hand
           .
           First
           ,
           This
           agreeth
           omni
           ,
           to
           every
           Subject
           in
           the
           Beast's
           Kingdom
           .
           
             He
             causeth
             all
             ,
             both
             small
             and
             great
             ,
             rich
             and
             poor
             ,
             free
             and
             bond
             ,
             to
             receive
             a
             Mark.
          
           And
           such
           a
           Mark
           is
           the
           Profession
           of
           the
           Faith
           of
           a
           Roman
           Catholick
           .
           And
           though
           all
           are
           not
           Cardinals
           ,
           all
           are
           not
           Archbishops
           ,
           all
           are
           not
           Bishops
           ;
           yet
           all
           are
           Roman
           Catholicks
           :
           all
           agree
           in
           this
           ,
           To
           profess
           the
           Universal
           Headship
           of
           the
           Bishop
           of
           Rome
           .
           This
           is
           
             Nota
             maximè
             communis
          
           .
           Secondly
           ,
           The
           Mark
           agreeth
           Soli
           ,
           only
           to
           such
           a
           one
           as
           is
           a
           Subject
           of
           the
           Beast's
           Kingdom
           .
           For
           as
           Princes
           have
           Marks
           and
           Cognizances
           to
           distinguish
           
           their
           Servants
           and
           Subjects
           :
           So
           the
           Beast
           hath
           a
           peculiar
           Character
           ,
           to
           discern
           between
           those
           that
           are
           his
           ,
           and
           those
           that
           are
           none
           of
           his
           .
           Now
           ,
           if
           you
           apply
           this
           to
           the
           Profession
           of
           a
           Roman
           Catholick
           ,
           all
           that
           whole
           Society
           and
           Body
           of
           men
           ,
           as
           they
           are
           one
           among
           themselves
           in
           their
           publick
           Profession
           :
           So
           in
           this
           they
           are
           distinguished
           from
           all
           other
           kinds
           of
           men
           in
           the
           whole
           world
           .
           Here
           is
           
             nota
             maximè
             propria
          
           .
           Thirdly
           ,
           The
           Mark
           agreeth
           to
           the
           Subjects
           of
           the
           Beast's
           Kingdom
           at
           all
           times
           .
           For
           not
           only
           at
           the
           first
           beginning
           of
           the
           spiritual
           Monarchy
           ,
           he
           caused
           every
           man
           to
           receive
           a
           Mark
           ,
           but
           in
           all
           the
           times
           of
           his
           Kingdom
           he
           did
           impose
           this
           Law
           upon
           his
           Subjects
           .
           And
           therefore
           we
           reade
           in
           the
           latter
           end
           of
           his
           Dominion
           ,
           That
           
             the
             first
             Vial
             was
             poured
             out
             upon
             them
             that
             had
             the
             Mark
             of
             the
             Beast
             ,
             and
             worshipped
             his
             Image
             ,
          
           chap.
           16.
           vers
           .
           2.
           
           And
           those
           Souls
           that
           lived
           again
           to
           Reign
           with
           Christ
           1000
           years
           ,
           were
           such
           as
           were
           beheaded
           in
           all
           the
           times
           of
           the
           Beast's
           Kingdom
           ,
           because
           they
           had
           not
           worshipped
           the
           Image
           ,
           nor
           received
           the
           Mark.
           The
           receiving
           of
           the
           Mark
           in
           the
           Forehead
           it
           must
           be
           semper
           ,
           in
           all
           the
           times
           of
           the
           Beast's
           Kingdom
           .
           Now
           ,
           such
           a
           Mark
           is
           the
           Profession
           of
           a
           Roman
           Catholick
           .
           This
           hath
           been
           received
           in
           all
           times
           .
           There
           are
           some
           things
           received
           by
           that
           Society
           of
           men
           ,
           which
           are
           not
           much
           more
           ancient
           than
           the
           Council
           of
           Trent
           ,
           which
           were
           not
           established
           
             de
             fide
          
           ,
           till
           that
           time
           .
           And
           though
           in
           the
           dayes
           of
           Queen
           Mary
           ,
           the
           Critical
           Question
           was
           ,
           
             What
             say
             you
             to
             the
             Sacrament
             of
             the
             Altar
             ?
          
           Yet
           it
           is
           well
           known
           ,
           That
           Transubstantiation
           hath
           been
           introduced
           in
           the
           latter
           times
           .
           But
           now
           it
           is
           not
           so
           with
           the
           Universal
           Headship
           of
           the
           Bishop
           of
           Rome
           :
           this
           hath
           been
           in
           hatching
           in
           all
           Ages
           almost
           down
           from
           the
           times
           of
           the
           Apostles
           ,
           till
           in
           the
           666th
           year
           from
           the
           beginning
           of
           the
           Roman
           as
           the
           Fourth
           Metal-Kingdom
           ,
           it
           began
           publickly
           to
           be
           established
           under
           the
           Emperor
           Phocas
           .
           And
           here
           was
           the
           true
           beginning
           of
           the
           Name
           or
           Universal
           Headship
           of
           the
           Beast
           ,
           and
           of
           the
           Mark
           of
           the
           Name
           .
           Fourthly
           ,
           The
           Mark
           in
           the
           Forehead
           and
           in
           the
           right
           Hand
           ,
           is
           a
           convertible
           and
           reciprocal
           Note
           ,
           to
           distinguish
           the
           Subjects
           of
           the
           Beast's
           Kingdom
           from
           other
           men
           ;
           and
           
           such
           a
           convertible
           Note
           is
           the
           publick
           Profession
           of
           a
           Roman
           Catholick
           .
           And
           therefore
           many
           of
           their
           chief
           Writers
           do
           lay
           down
           Three
           Notes
           to
           prove
           a
           true
           Church
           by
           :
           
             Verae
             fidei
             Professione
             ;
             by
             the
             Profession
             of
             the
             true
             Faith
             :
             Sacramentorum
             Communione
             ;
             by
             participating
             of
             the
             Sacraments
             :
             Pontifici
             Romano
             tanquam
             legitimo
             Pastori
             subjectione
             ;
             by
             subjection
             to
             the
             Bishop
             of
             Rome
             as
             to
             their
             lawful
             Pastor
             .
          
           Fifthly
           ,
           The
           Mark
           in
           the
           Forehead
           and
           the
           right
           Hand
           ,
           must
           be
           such
           a
           thing
           as
           is
           in
           open
           view
           ,
           and
           in
           common
           use
           :
           for
           so
           do
           these
           figurative
           Expressions
           import
           .
           It
           is
           not
           said
           ,
           That
           he
           causeth
           all
           to
           receive
           a
           Mark
           in
           their
           Arm
           ,
           or
           Breast
           ,
           or
           Foot
           ,
           or
           Leg
           ,
           or
           any
           other
           Member
           of
           the
           Body
           :
           but
           in
           the
           Forehead
           ,
           which
           is
           in
           open
           view
           ;
           and
           in
           the
           right
           Hand
           ,
           as
           being
           that
           part
           of
           the
           Body
           which
           is
           of
           most
           common
           use
           .
           Now
           ,
           what
           is
           there
           among
           that
           Society
           of
           men
           ,
           which
           is
           of
           more
           common
           use
           and
           publick
           view
           ,
           than
           the
           Profession
           of
           a
           Roman
           Catholick
           ?
           Experience
           doth
           plainly
           shew
           ,
           That
           none
           can
           buy
           ,
           nor
           sell
           ,
           nor
           hold
           Land
           and
           Possessions
           ,
           but
           such
           a
           one
           as
           doth
           acknowledge
           this
           Universal
           Headship
           .
           Sixthly
           ,
           The
           Mark
           in
           the
           Forehead
           and
           in
           the
           right
           Hand
           is
           in
           express
           and
           significant
           terms
           called
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           the
           Mark
           of
           his
           Name
           .
           
             They
             have
             no
             rest
             day
             nor
             night
             that
             worship
             the
             Beast
             ,
             and
             his
             Image
             ,
             and
             receive
             the
             Mark
             of
             his
             Name
             ,
          
           chap.
           14.
           vers
           .
           11.
           
           Now
           ,
           if
           you
           apply
           this
           to
           the
           Profession
           of
           a
           Roman
           Catholick
           ,
           all
           things
           will
           agree
           .
           For
           ,
           what
           is
           a
           Roman
           Catholick
           ,
           but
           such
           a
           one
           as
           doth
           make
           it
           the
           chief
           and
           main
           Article
           of
           his
           Faith
           ,
           to
           acknowledge
           the
           Universal
           Headship
           of
           the
           Bishop
           of
           Rome
           ,
           and
           to
           subject
           his
           Conscience
           to
           the
           Laws
           made
           by
           that
           Authority
           ?
           And
           this
           we
           have
           already
           proved
           ,
           in
           the
           Third
           Chapter
           of
           this
           Treatise
           ,
           to
           be
           no
           other
           but
           the
           Name
           of
           the
           Beast
           .
           For
           if
           there
           were
           no
           such
           thing
           as
           the
           Universal
           Headship
           ,
           Sovereign
           Power
           ,
           and
           Supreme
           Dominion
           of
           the
           Bishop
           of
           Rome
           ,
           what
           would
           become
           of
           the
           Faith
           and
           Profession
           of
           a
           Roman
           Catholick
           ?
           The
           Name
           or
           Universal
           Headship
           is
           that
           which
           giveth
           foundation
           to
           the
           Mark
           or
           Profession
           
             à
             priori
          
           :
           and
           the
           Mark
           or
           Profession
           is
           that
           which
           declareth
           the
           Name
           or
           Universal
           Headship
           
             à
             posteriori
          
           .
           
           And
           therefore
           in
           significant
           terms
           it
           is
           called
           the
           Mark
           of
           the
           Name
           .
           Seventhly
           ,
           The
           Mark
           in
           the
           Forehead
           and
           in
           the
           right
           Hand
           is
           that
           which
           the
           Subjects
           of
           the
           Beast's
           Kingdom
           do
           assume
           to
           themselves
           as
           a
           matter
           of
           the
           greatest
           Honour
           and
           Dignity
           .
           It
           is
           not
           a
           brand
           or
           nick-Name
           put
           upon
           them
           by
           their
           Enemies
           ,
           but
           that
           which
           themselves
           do
           voluntarily
           profess
           ,
           as
           may
           be
           seen
           in
           the
           whole
           Book
           of
           the
           Revelation
           .
           Now
           such
           a
           Name
           is
           the
           Profession
           of
           a
           Roman
           Catholick
           .
           The
           Roman
           Church
           comprehendeth
           all
           those
           Nations
           ,
           Languages
           ,
           and
           People
           ,
           that
           agree
           in
           the
           same
           Unity
           of
           the
           Faith
           under
           the
           Pope
           the
           Head.
           And
           every
           Member
           of
           this
           Church
           ,
           of
           what
           sort
           soever
           ,
           maketh
           this
           as
           the
           principal
           Badge
           of
           his
           Profession
           ,
           to
           adhere
           to
           the
           Bishop
           of
           Rome
           ,
           as
           to
           the
           visible
           Head
           of
           the
           Church
           .
           Eighthly
           ,
           The
           Mark
           in
           the
           right
           Hand
           and
           in
           the
           Forehead
           must
           be
           so
           expounded
           ,
           That
           in
           receiving
           of
           this
           ,
           men
           must
           be
           guilty
           of
           great
           sin
           against
           Christ
           ,
           and
           so
           consequently
           lyable
           to
           most
           grievous
           Judgements
           ,
           except
           they
           repent
           .
           And
           therefore
           it
           is
           expressed
           ,
           That
           such
           shall
           be
           tormented
           day
           and
           night
           that
           worship
           the
           Beast
           ,
           and
           receive
           his
           Mark.
           Surely
           then
           that
           act
           of
           receiving
           the
           Mark
           of
           the
           Beast
           must
           needs
           be
           a
           grievous
           sin
           ,
           because
           the
           Lord
           Christ
           doth
           threaten
           it
           with
           so
           heavie
           a
           Judgement
           .
           Now
           if
           you
           take
           the
           Profession
           of
           the
           Faith
           of
           a
           Roman
           Catholick
           as
           he
           professeth
           his
           subjection
           to
           the
           Bishop
           of
           Rome
           ,
           this
           is
           the
           greatest
           derogation
           that
           can
           be
           to
           Christ
           ,
           to
           supplant
           him
           in
           his
           Universal
           Headship
           .
           For
           it
           is
           his
           peculiar
           and
           incommunicable
           Priviledge
           ,
           to
           be
           the
           only
           Head
           of
           the
           Church
           ,
           his
           Mystical
           Body
           .
           Therefore
           ,
           whosoever
           he
           is
           that
           doth
           ascribe
           this
           to
           himself
           ,
           or
           to
           any
           other
           ,
           doth
           sin
           against
           the
           Kingly
           .
           Office
           of
           Christ
           ,
           and
           doth
           what
           in
           him
           lies
           ,
           to
           dethrone
           ,
           and
           put
           Christ
           from
           his
           sovereign
           Dignity
           .
           A
           Wife
           may
           be
           guilty
           of
           many
           Offences
           against
           her
           Husband
           ;
           but
           that
           is
           one
           of
           the
           most
           capital
           ,
           when
           she
           doth
           take
           another
           in
           his
           room
           :
           for
           that
           is
           ,
           in
           a
           sense
           ,
           To
           break
           the
           bond
           ,
           and
           to
           cast
           him
           off
           from
           being
           her
           Husband
           ,
           when
           she
           doth
           give
           her self
           to
           another
           man.
           
             A
             Roman
             Catholick
             then
             when
             he
             doth
             profess
             his
             Allegiance
          
           to
           the
           Bishop
           of
           Rome
           ,
           as
           to
           
           the
           visible
           Head
           of
           the
           Church
           ,
           this
           publick
           Profession
           of
           his
           is
           Rebellion
           ,
           and
           high
           Treason
           against
           the
           Lord
           Christ
           ,
           the
           true
           Head
           of
           the
           Church
           ;
           this
           doth
           supplant
           him
           of
           his
           Kingly
           Power
           and
           Dignity
           :
           and
           therefore
           he
           doth
           threaten
           this
           sin
           with
           such
           grievous
           Judgements
           .
           Those
           words
           therefore
           that
           are
           added
           as
           an
           Epiphonema
           in
           the
           end
           of
           the
           
             Revelation
             ,
             Whosoever
             shall
             adde
             to
             the
             words
             of
             this
             Book
             ,
             God
             will
             adde
             to
             him
             the
             Plagues
             that
             are
             written
             in
             this
             Book
             .
             And
             if
             any
             man
             shall
             take
             away
             from
             the
             words
             of
             the
             Book
             of
             this
             Prophecie
             ,
             God
             will
             take
             away
             his
             part
             out
             of
             the
             Book
             of
             Life
             ,
             and
             out
             of
             the
             Holy
             City
             ,
             and
             from
             the
             things
             which
             are
             written
             in
             this
             Book
             ,
          
           chap.
           22.
           vers
           .
           18.
           19.
           
           Interpreters
           do
           usually
           apply
           this
           place
           to
           those
           that
           bring
           in
           Traditions
           ;
           but
           I
           think
           that
           here
           is
           a
           more
           special
           sense
           intended
           ,
           sutable
           to
           the
           nature
           of
           the
           Book
           :
           for
           the
           principal
           scope
           of
           the
           Book
           of
           the
           Revelation
           ,
           is
           to
           speak
           of
           the
           Kingly
           Office
           of
           Christ
           ;
           and
           therefore
           they
           that
           set
           up
           another
           Head
           of
           the
           Church
           ,
           they
           do
           adde
           to
           the
           words
           of
           the
           Prophecie
           of
           this
           Book
           ,
           and
           God
           will
           adde
           to
           them
           the
           Plagues
           that
           are
           written
           in
           the
           Book
           .
           So
           they
           that
           take
           away
           from
           the
           Kingly
           Office
           of
           Christ
           ,
           they
           do
           in
           a
           more
           special
           sense
           take
           away
           from
           the
           words
           of
           the
           Prophecie
           of
           this
           Book
           .
           And
           therefore
           God
           will
           take
           away
           their
           part
           out
           of
           the
           New
           Ierusalem
           ,
           and
           from
           the
           things
           that
           are
           contained
           in
           the
           Book
           .
           If
           these
           things
           are
           so
           ,
           I
           cannot
           but
           admire
           at
           
             Hugo
             Grotius
          
           ,
           a
           man
           of
           great
           Learning
           in
           these
           last
           times
           ,
           who
           in
           his
           Tract
           
             de
             Antichristo
          
           ,
           doth
           speak
           very
           favourably
           of
           the
           Universal
           Headship
           of
           the
           Bishop
           of
           Rome
           .
           But
           ,
           saving
           the
           great
           worth
           and
           Learning
           of
           such
           an
           Author
           ,
           here
           is
           the
           very
           formality
           of
           Antichristianism
           ,
           for
           which
           which
           men
           shall
           be
           liable
           to
           very
           great
           Judgements
           ,
           unless
           they
           do
           repent
           .
           And
           though
           they
           do
           distinguish
           betwixt
           Two
           kinds
           of
           Heads
           ;
           that
           Head
           which
           is
           Supreme
           ,
           and
           that
           which
           is
           Ministerial
           :
           it
           is
           too
           too
           well
           known
           ,
           if
           we
           go
           to
           Practice
           ,
           That
           the
           Bishop
           of
           Rome
           hath
           not
           assumed
           a
           Ministerial
           Headship
           to
           himself
           :
           nay
           ,
           indeed
           and
           in
           truth
           ,
           he
           hath
           made
           the
           Headship
           of
           Christ
           nothing
           at
           all
           .
           Ninthly
           ,
           The
           Mark
           in
           the
           Forehead
           and
           in
           the
           right
           Hand
           ,
           ought
           to
           be
           so
           expounded
           ,
           that
           therein
           
           must
           appear
           the
           principal
           Cause
           of
           the
           sufferings
           of
           the
           Martyrs
           .
           For
           after
           that
           the
           Beast
           was
           destroyed
           ,
           Iohn
           saw
           in
           the
           Vision
           the
           Souls
           of
           them
           that
           were
           beheaded
           for
           the
           Word
           God
           ,
           and
           for
           the
           Testimony
           of
           Jesus
           ,
           that
           had
           not
           worshipped
           the
           Beast
           ,
           nor
           received
           his
           Mark
           ,
           Chap.
           20.
           3
           ,
           4.
           
           The
           special
           Cause
           of
           the
           sufferings
           of
           the
           Martyrs
           ,
           must
           be
           for
           the
           refusal
           of
           these
           things
           .
           If
           we
           transfer
           this
           to
           Experience
           ,
           we
           shall
           find
           ,
           That
           great
           Multitudes
           of
           Men
           and
           Women
           have
           been
           put
           to
           death
           in
           all
           the
           times
           of
           the
           Beast's
           Kingdom
           ,
           because
           they
           would
           not
           yield
           Obedience
           to
           the
           Laws
           ,
           Ceremonies
           ,
           Traditions
           ,
           and
           Superstitious
           Observations
           ,
           imposed
           upon
           them
           by
           the
           Authority
           of
           the
           Bishop
           of
           Rome
           ,
           as
           Universal
           Head
           of
           the
           Church
           .
           They
           were
           slain
           ,
           because
           they
           held
           the
           Word
           of
           God
           ,
           and
           the
           Testimony
           of
           Jesus
           Christ
           ;
           because
           they
           took
           the
           Lord
           Christ
           alone
           for
           the
           true
           Head
           of
           the
           Church
           ,
           and
           would
           live
           only
           in
           subjection
           to
           his
           Laws
           .
        
         
           Now
           then
           ,
           to
           gather
           up
           all
           the
           aforementioned
           particulars
           into
           one
           sum
           ;
           it
           is
           clear
           ,
           That
           the
           Profession
           of
           a
           Roman
           Catholick
           ,
           in
           the
           visibility
           thereof
           ,
           is
           the
           Mark
           of
           the
           Beast
           in
           the
           Forehead
           ,
           and
           in
           the
           right
           Hand
           ;
           and
           all
           Circumstances
           do
           wonderfully
           agree
           .
        
         
           But
           let
           us
           now
           come
           to
           give
           some
           special
           instance
           for
           this
           out
           of
           the
           Old
           Testament
           .
           And
           here
           ,
           if
           we
           go
           to
           the
           times
           of
           
             Antiochus
             Epiphanes
          
           ,
           we
           shall
           finde
           a
           cleer
           instance
           of
           the
           Character
           or
           Mark
           of
           the
           Beast
           in
           the
           times
           of
           the
           Graecian
           Antichrist
           .
           For
           there
           is
           mention
           made
           of
           one
           Iason
           ,
           when
           he
           had
           bought
           the
           High
           Priesthood
           for
           Money
           ,
           and
           did
           assign
           150
           Talents
           more
           ,
           if
           he
           might
           have
           license
           to
           set
           up
           a
           place
           for
           Exercise
           ,
           and
           for
           the
           training
           up
           of
           Youth
           in
           the
           Fashions
           of
           the
           Heathen
           ;
           and
           to
           write
           them
           of
           Hierusalem
           ,
           by
           the
           Name
           of
           Antiochians
           .
           Which
           ,
           when
           the
           King
           had
           granted
           ,
           and
           he
           had
           gotten
           the
           Rule
           into
           his
           hand
           ,
           it
           is
           expressly
           said
           of
           this
           Iason
           ,
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           .
           Our
           English
           hath
           it
           ,
           
             He
             forthwith
             brought
             his
             own
             Nation
             to
             the
             Greekish
             Fashion
             .
             Iunius
             ,
          
           and
           Montanus
           ,
           and
           the
           
             Lexicographer
             Scapula
          
           ,
           have
           it
           ,
           
             Ad
             Graecum
             Ritum
          
           .
           But
           I
           think
           the
           words
           may
           better
           be
           translated
           ,
           
             He
             carried
             over
             his
             own
             Country-men
             to
             the
          
           
           
             Greek
             Character
          
           ,
           2
           Macc.
           4.
           9
           ,
           10.
           
        
         
           For
           the
           more
           close
           and
           perfect
           Application
           of
           this
           Truth
           ,
           we
           will
           note
           these
           four
           Particulars
           :
           1.
           
           What
           is
           the
           Hellenick
           or
           Graecian
           Character
           .
           2.
           
           Who
           are
           the
           Persons
           that
           do
           receive
           it
           .
           3.
           
           The
           Time
           when
           .
           4.
           
           The
           Power
           and
           Authority
           which
           did
           compel
           them
           to
           receive
           it
           .
        
         
           For
           the
           first
           ,
           A
           Character
           is
           nothing
           else
           but
           a
           Note
           of
           Distinction
           ,
           by
           and
           through
           which
           one
           sort
           of
           People
           are
           distinguished
           from
           another
           :
           as
           the
           Ephraimites
           were
           distinguished
           from
           the
           Gileadites
           ,
           by
           the
           Word
           Shiboleth
           ;
           so
           one
           Nation
           is
           distinguished
           from
           another
           by
           their
           Language
           ,
           Attire
           ,
           and
           other
           Customes
           .
           But
           in
           this
           case
           we
           have
           not
           to
           do
           with
           the
           Marks
           of
           civil
           distinction
           ;
           and
           therefore
           when
           it
           is
           said
           ,
           That
           Iason
           carried
           over
           his
           own
           Country-men
           to
           the
           Hellenick
           Character
           ,
           this
           is
           meant
           of
           such
           a
           way
           of
           worship
           ,
           as
           was
           the
           publick
           Profession
           among
           the
           profane
           Graecians
           in
           matters
           of
           Religion
           .
           In
           respect
           whereof
           ,
           that
           publick
           Profession
           was
           ,
           
             determinatus
             modus
             vivendi
          
           ,
           (
           as
           the
           School-men
           speak
           )
           containing
           that
           manner
           and
           way
           of
           living
           according
           to
           the
           Law
           of
           the
           Antiochians
           .
           The
           like
           may
           be
           said
           ,
           That
           the
           Mark
           of
           the
           Beast
           in
           the
           Revelation
           is
           that
           whereby
           they
           of
           the
           Romish
           Religion
           are
           distinguished
           from
           others
           :
           for
           they
           have
           a
           peculiar
           manner
           of
           living
           according
           to
           the
           Laws
           of
           that
           Church
           under
           the
           Pope
           the
           Head.
           There
           is
           then
           an
           exact
           Agreement
           betwixt
           the
           Hellenick
           and
           the
           Romish
           Character
           ;
           and
           in
           both
           Nations
           Men
           are
           distinguished
           by
           this
           ,
           as
           by
           the
           Badge
           of
           their
           Profession
           .
        
         
           Secondly
           ,
           For
           the
           Persons
           ;
           who
           were
           they
           that
           Iason
           carried
           over
           to
           receive
           the
           Mark
           of
           the
           Beast
           in
           the
           Graecian
           Tyranny
           ?
           It
           is
           plainly
           said
           ,
           That
           he
           carried
           over
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           
             his
             own
             Country-men
          
           ,
           of
           the
           Stock
           and
           Lineage
           of
           Abraham
           .
           And
           these
           things
           were
           foretold
           by
           Daniel
           the
           Prophet
           many
           yeers
           before
           ,
           That
           in
           the
           dayes
           of
           
             Antiochus
             Epiphanes
          
           ,
           many
           of
           his
           own
           Country-men
           should
           forsake
           the
           Holy
           Covenant
           ,
           Dan.
           11.
           31
           ,
           32.
           and
           as
           he
           foretold
           ,
           it
           came
           to
           pass
           indeed
           ,
           as
           appeareth
           in
           the
           Book
           of
           the
           Macchabees
           ,
           and
           in
           the
           Stories
           of
           Iosephus
           and
           others
           .
           Now
           if
           we
           apyly
           this
           to
           the
           Beast
           in
           the
           Revelation
           ,
           
           there
           is
           a
           more
           general
           Defection
           and
           Apostacie
           of
           the
           whole
           Christian
           world
           :
           He
           causeth
           all
           to
           receive
           a
           Mark
           in
           their
           forehead
           ,
           and
           in
           their
           right
           hand
           .
        
         
           Thirdly
           ,
           For
           the
           time
           ;
           When
           was
           it
           that
           Iason
           carryed
           over
           his
           own
           Country-men
           to
           the
           Hellenick
           Character
           ,
           to
           the
           publike
           Profession
           of
           Religion
           used
           by
           the
           Grecians
           in
           the
           Sele●…cian
           State
           ?
           It
           was
           in
           the
           times
           of
           Antiochus
           the
           Grecian
           Antichrist
           .
           If
           therefore
           we
           read
           in
           the
           Book
           of
           the
           Revelation
           ,
           That
           the
           Beast
           did
           cause
           all
           to
           receive
           a
           Mark
           in
           their
           forehead
           and
           in
           their
           right
           hand
           ;
           this
           was
           no
           other
           but
           that
           which
           was
           done
           before
           ,
           in
           the
           times
           of
           Antiochus
           the
           Grecian
           Antichrist
           ;
           who
           is
           set
           forth
           as
           a
           Type
           and
           a
           Figure
           of
           that
           great
           Antichrist
           who
           should
           come
           in
           the
           last
           times
           .
        
         
           Fourthly
           ,
           For
           the
           power
           by
           and
           through
           which
           Iason
           should
           carry
           over
           his
           own
           Country-men
           to
           the
           Hellenick
           Character
           ,
           or
           to
           that
           way
           of
           Profession
           :
           It
           was
           then
           ,
           when
           he
           had
           gotten
           the
           Rule
           into
           his
           hands
           .
           Some
           sins
           do
           increase
           by
           Propagation
           ,
           as
           Original
           sin
           ;
           some
           ,
           by
           Ensample
           ,
           as
           many
           evil
           Customs
           amongst
           us
           :
           But
           here
           is
           mention
           made
           of
           the
           increase
           and
           prevailing
           of
           a
           sin
           by
           Imperial
           Edict
           ,
           by
           the
           Countenance
           ,
           Power
           and
           Authority
           of
           them
           that
           have
           the
           Soveraignty
           in
           their
           hands
           .
           The
           like
           may
           be
           said
           of
           the
           Beast
           in
           the
           Revelation
           ;
           all
           did
           receive
           the
           Mark
           in
           their
           forehead
           and
           in
           their
           right
           hand
           :
           and
           if
           you
           look
           to
           the
           reason
           ,
           it
           was
           a
           sin
           of
           Monarchy
           or
           Imperial
           power
           .
           The
           Beast
           ,
           as
           a
           Potentate
           ,
           did
           cause
           all
           to
           receive
           a
           Mark
           in
           their
           forehead
           and
           in
           their
           right
           hand
           .
        
         
           By
           the
           
             Hellenick
             Character
          
           used
           in
           the
           times
           of
           the
           Grecian
           Tyranny
           ,
           we
           may
           know
           what
           is
           the
           Mark
           of
           the
           Beast
           so
           often
           mentioned
           in
           the
           Revelation
           ;
           and
           by
           the
           one
           ,
           we
           may
           finde
           out
           the
           meaning
           of
           the
           other
           .
        
         
           I
           have
           stay'd
           the
           longer
           on
           this
           Point
           ,
           because
           it
           is
           the
           principal
           matter
           in
           the
           Text
           ;
           and
           the
           right
           discovery
           of
           this
           ,
           will
           guide
           us
           in
           the
           clearing
           of
           other
           things
           .
           For
           if
           we
           do
           rightly
           conceive
           what
           is
           meant
           by
           the
           Mark
           of
           the
           Name
           ,
           we
           may
           come
           to
           demonstrate
           the
           Name
           it self
           what
           it
           is
           .
           And
           when
           the
           Name
           it self
           is
           truly
           and
           Apocalyptically
           defined
           ,
           we
           may
           
           be
           the
           better
           prepared
           for
           the
           discovery
           of
           the
           Number
           .
           All
           these
           do
           mutually
           depend
           each
           upon
           other
           .
           And
           therefore
           for
           the
           subject-matter
           of
           the
           Law
           of
           the
           Beast
           ,
           in
           the
           several
           branches
           thereof
           ,
           we
           do
           thus
           determine
           ,
           in
           these
           three
           Particulars
           .
           First
           ,
           The
           Mark
           that
           he
           causeth
           all
           to
           receive
           in
           their
           forehead
           and
           in
           their
           right
           hand
           ,
           is
           nothing
           else
           but
           the
           visibility
           of
           their
           Profession
           ,
           that
           do
           acknowledge
           him
           as
           Head
           of
           the
           Church
           :
           And
           this
           he
           compelleth
           men
           of
           all
           sorts
           to
           submit
           and
           to
           yeeld
           obedience
           unto
           .
           Secondly
           ,
           For
           the
           Name
           of
           the
           Beast
           ,
           which
           is
           also
           a
           part
           of
           that
           Law
           which
           he
           did
           impose
           upon
           his
           Subjects
           ,
           That
           
             none
             might
             buy
             nor
             sell
             ,
             but
             they
             that
             have
             the
             Name
             of
             the
             Beast
             .
          
           This
           Name
           ,
           I
           have
           formerly
           proved
           ,
           in
           the
           third
           Chapter
           of
           this
           Treatise
           ,
           That
           it
           is
           not
           the
           word
           Lateinos
           ,
           nor
           any
           other
           Grammatical
           Name
           ;
           but
           the
           Name
           is
           the
           Universal
           Headship
           it self
           .
           The
           matter
           cometh
           to
           this
           Issue
           ,
           That
           none
           must
           buy
           nor
           sell
           ,
           nor
           have
           civil
           commerce
           within
           the
           Dominions
           of
           the
           Beast
           ,
           but
           those
           onely
           who
           will
           acknowledge
           his
           Name
           or
           Headship
           .
           Thirdly
           ,
           For
           the
           Number
           of
           the
           Name
           ,
           the
           third
           part
           or
           branch
           of
           the
           Law
           imposed
           upon
           the
           Subjects
           of
           that
           Kingdom
           ,
           that
           none
           must
           buy
           nor
           sell
           but
           they
           that
           had
           the
           Number
           of
           the
           Name
           ;
           I
           have
           shewed
           in
           part
           ,
           and
           I
           shall
           more
           fully
           declare
           afterward
           ,
           That
           the
           Number
           is
           not
           made
           out
           of
           the
           Numeral
           letters
           of
           the
           name
           Lateinos
           ,
           or
           out
           of
           any
           other
           Grammatical
           Name
           whatsoever
           :
           but
           it
           is
           the
           Number
           of
           time
           when
           that
           Name
           or
           Headship
           had
           its
           first
           visible
           and
           remarkable
           Institution
           :
           and
           therefore
           it
           is
           called
           ,
           The
           Number
           of
           the
           Name
           .
           The
           matter
           then
           must
           come
           to
           this
           Issue
           ,
           That
           none
           must
           buy
           nor
           sell
           ,
           but
           he
           that
           doth
           own
           the
           Universal
           Headship
           as
           it
           was
           established
           and
           set
           up
           in
           the
           first
           Foundation
           and
           Institution
           of
           that
           spiritual
           Monarchy
           .
        
         
           Object
           .
           You
           perhaps
           will
           alleadge
           ,
           That
           
             the
             words
             are
             plain
             ,
             That
             none
             must
             buy
             nor
             sell
             ,
             but
             he
             that
             hath
             the
             Number
             of
             the
             Name
             :
             Therefore
             if
             the
             Number
             of
             the
             Name
             be
             the
             Number
             of
             time
             when
             this
             Name
             or
             Universal
             Headship
             began
             ,
             according
             to
             this
             Exposition
             ,
             he
             must
             not
             buy
             nor
             sell
             ,
             who
             hath
             not
             the
             Number
             of
             time
             when
             this
             Universal
             Headship
             began
             .
          
        
         
         
           Sol.
           We
           must
           not
           take
           the
           words
           further
           then
           they
           naturally
           intend
           :
           And
           therefore
           this
           is
           the
           meaning
           of
           the
           Text
           ,
           That
           he
           must
           not
           buy
           nor
           sell
           ,
           who
           doth
           not
           receive
           the
           Catholicism
           ,
           or
           Universal
           Headship
           of
           the
           Bishop
           of
           Rome
           ,
           as
           it
           was
           Enacted
           in
           the
           first
           Institution
           of
           that
           Spiritual
           Monarchy
           .
           And
           if
           we
           look
           attentively
           to
           the
           words
           ,
           we
           shall
           finde
           ,
           that
           there
           is
           some
           difference
           to
           be
           made
           betwixt
           the
           Mark
           of
           the
           Name
           ,
           and
           the
           Number
           .
           For
           when
           the
           Spirit
           speaketh
           of
           the
           Mark
           in
           the
           forehead
           and
           in
           the
           right
           hand
           ,
           and
           of
           the
           Name
           in
           relation
           to
           the
           Mark
           ,
           he
           speaketh
           of
           such
           a
           thing
           as
           is
           apparent
           to
           the
           sight
           of
           every
           man.
           The
           Beast's
           Subjects
           ,
           in
           their
           usual
           buying
           and
           selling
           ,
           may
           discern
           who
           have
           the
           Mark
           in
           the
           forehead
           ,
           and
           who
           have
           not
           .
           But
           now
           for
           the
           Number
           of
           the
           Name
           ,
           and
           for
           the
           Name
           in
           reference
           to
           the
           Number
           ,
           it
           is
           nowhere
           said
           ,
           that
           this
           is
           in
           the
           forehead
           or
           in
           the
           right
           hand
           :
           for
           it
           is
           of
           a
           more
           secret
           and
           occult
           nature
           .
           
             Let
             him
             that
             hath
             wisdom
             count
             the
             Number
             of
             the
             Beast
             .
          
           This
           sheweth
           plainly
           ,
           that
           the
           Number
           is
           to
           be
           found
           out
           by
           some
           subtilty
           of
           observation
           ;
           and
           ,
           it
           is
           not
           to
           be
           discerned
           in
           the
           ordinary
           use
           of
           buying
           and
           selling
           .
        
         
           Object
           .
           You
           will
           say
           ,
           
             Why
             are
             all
             these
             joyned
             together
             ,
             that
             none
             must
             buy
             nor
             sell
             ,
             but
             he
             that
             hath
             the
             Mark
             of
             the
             Beast
             ,
             the
             Name
             ,
             and
             the
             Number
             of
             the
             N●…me
             ?
          
        
         
           Sol.
           They
           are
           all
           joyned
           together
           ,
           by
           reason
           of
           their
           affinity
           or
           relation
           that
           the
           one
           hath
           to
           the
           other
           :
           and
           therefore
           a
           man
           cannot
           well
           take
           upon
           him
           the
           Profession
           of
           a
           Romane
           Catholick
           ,
           which
           is
           the
           Mark
           of
           the
           Name
           ;
           but
           he
           must
           also
           profess
           the
           Name
           or
           Soveraign
           power
           it self
           :
           And
           he
           cannot
           profess
           the
           Name
           or
           Universal
           Headship
           ,
           but
           he
           must
           relate
           also
           to
           the
           first
           Foundation
           and
           Institution
           thereof
           ,
           in
           the
           time
           when
           it
           first
           began
           visibly
           to
           appear
           .
           And
           therefore
           when
           the
           Romane
           Catholicks
           do
           at
           this
           day
           own
           the
           Universal
           Headship
           of
           the
           Bishop
           of
           Rome
           ,
           they
           do
           not
           mean
           it
           onely
           personally
           of
           the
           Pope
           now
           living
           ,
           but
           of
           the
           Succession
           that
           hath
           continued
           many
           hundred
           years
           .
           There
           must
           then
           be
           some
           particular
           instant
           of
           time
           ,
           where
           this
           Institution
           did
           begin
           .
           In
           many
           great
           Kingdoms
           at
           this
           day
           ,
           it
           is
           not
           safe
           for
           a
           
           man
           to
           live
           among
           them
           ,
           unless
           he
           will
           acknowledge
           the
           Universal
           Headship
           of
           the
           Bishop
           of
           Rome
           .
           Now
           I
           say
           then
           ,
           there
           must
           be
           some
           particular
           term
           and
           instant
           of
           time
           ,
           where
           this
           Universal
           Headship
           had
           its
           first
           institution
           ,
           where
           we
           must
           set
           the
           date
           thereof
           .
           And
           here
           I
           say
           ,
           it
           must
           be
           in
           the
           time
           of
           the
           Emperor
           Phocas
           ,
           666
           years
           from
           the
           beginning
           of
           the
           Roman
           ,
           as
           the
           fourth
           Metal-Kingdom
           .
           Thus
           I
           have
           distinctly
           shewed
           the
           matter
           of
           the
           Law
           which
           the
           Beast
           imposeth
           upon
           his
           Subjects
           ,
           in
           the
           three
           branches
           thereof
           :
           And
           though
           I
           have
           departed
           in
           some
           particulars
           from
           the
           ordinary
           stream
           of
           Interpreters
           ,
           yet
           I
           do
           agree
           with
           many
           Protestant
           Writers
           in
           the
           main
           sense
           and
           substance
           of
           the
           Interpretation
           .
           Since
           the
           preaching
           of
           
             Luther
             ,
             Bullinger
          
           was
           one
           of
           the
           first
           that
           did
           historically
           and
           with
           Principles
           expound
           the
           Book
           of
           Revelation
           :
           And
           so
           Paraeus
           speaking
           of
           Expositors
           of
           the
           last
           times
           ,
           hath
           these
           words
           ,
           
             Quibus
             omnibus
             meo
             judicio
             facem
             praetulit
             Henricus
             Bullingerus
             ,
             quam
             ferè
             secuti
             sunt
             alii
             .
          
           Prooe●…
           .
           in
           Apocal.
           Cap.
           4.
           
           Now
           this
           Interpreter
           doth
           pitch
           upon
           the
           same
           sense
           as
           we
           do
           ,
           as
           it
           is
           manifest
           in
           his
           Commentary
           upon
           the
           Revelation
           .
           And
           so
           do
           some
           other
           Interpreters
           ,
           as
           
             Danaeus
             de
             Antichristo
          
           ,
           &c.
           
        
         
           If
           therefore
           a
           Reason
           be
           demanded
           ,
           Why
           the
           latter
           Interpreters
           have
           not
           gone
           on
           in
           this
           ancient
           and
           true
           way
           of
           Exposition
           :
           There
           are
           two
           Reasons
           ,
           which
           are
           usually
           given
           ,
           as
           we
           may
           see
           in
           the
           Commentary
           of
           Paraeus
           upon
           the
           Revelation
           ,
           and
           of
           Downham
           in
           his
           Tract
           
             de
             Antichristo
          
           ,
           and
           of
           Dr.
           Mayer
           in
           his
           Expositions
           upon
           the
           Revelation
           .
        
         
           First
           ,
           they
           alledge
           ,
           That
           the
           Number
           of
           the
           Beast
           is
           
             numerus
             nominis
          
           ,
           the
           Number
           of
           his
           Name
           ,
           and
           not
           the
           Number
           of
           the
           time
           of
           his
           rising
           .
        
         
           Sol.
           If
           these
           Interpreters
           will
           consider
           the
           truth
           of
           that
           which
           we
           have
           largely
           disputed
           ;
           to
           wit
           ,
           that
           the
           Name
           of
           the
           Beast
           is
           no
           other
           but
           his
           Universal
           Headship
           and
           Power
           ;
           by
           the
           discovery
           of
           this
           ,
           they
           will
           finde
           that
           there
           is
           no
           difference
           between
           the
           Number
           of
           the
           Name
           ,
           and
           the
           Number
           of
           the
           time
           of
           the
           rising
           of
           the
           Beast
           ,
           when
           that
           Name
           or
           Universal
           Headship
           began
           .
           We
           reade
           when
           our
           Saviour
           
           was
           born
           at
           Bethleem
           ,
           that
           certain
           wise-men
           came
           from
           the
           East
           to
           Ierusalem
           ,
           saying
           ,
           
             Where
             is
             born
             the
             King
             of
             the
             Iews
             ?
          
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           
             for
             we
             have
             seen
             his
             Star
             in
             the
             East
             ,
             Matth.
          
           2.
           1
           ,
           2
           ,
           3.
           
           Here
           I
           demand
           ,
           Why
           is
           this
           Star
           called
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           his
           Star
           ?
           The
           reason
           is
           plain
           ,
           Because
           it
           did
           denote
           and
           set
           forth
           the
           time
           of
           his
           birth
           .
           So
           in
           the
           like
           case
           ,
           the
           Number
           of
           the
           Beast
           may
           be
           called
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           the
           Number
           of
           his
           Name
           ,
           because
           it
           doth
           characterize
           ,
           decypher
           and
           set
           forth
           the
           time
           when
           that
           Name
           or
           Universal
           Headship
           began
           .
        
         
           Secondly
           ,
           whereas
           they
           alledge
           ,
           That
           there
           are
           onely
           606
           years
           to
           the
           setting
           up
           of
           the
           Name
           or
           Universal
           Headship
           of
           the
           Bishop
           of
           Rome
           ,
           under
           the
           Emperor
           Phocas
           :
           I
           confess
           this
           is
           true
           ,
           if
           we
           make
           our
           account
           by
           the
           years
           of
           our
           Lord.
           But
           what
           warrant
           have
           we
           to
           proceed
           in
           this
           method
           ?
           For
           though
           the
           Christians
           do
           generally
           use
           this
           way
           of
           computation
           ,
           yet
           the
           general
           use
           hath
           not
           been
           so
           to
           reckon
           :
           For
           as
           Martinius
           an
           acu●…e
           Grammarian
           ,
           speaketh
           of
           the
           reading
           of
           the
           Hebrew
           ,
           so
           we
           also
           may
           say
           the
           same
           concerning
           the
           computation
           of
           the
           times
           in
           the
           Book
           of
           the
           Revelation
           ;
           We
           are
           not
           in
           this
           to
           follow
           the
           modern
           ,
           but
           the
           ancient
           use
           .
           These
           are
           his
           words
           :
           
             We
             ought
             not
             to
             think
             the
             custome
             of
             our
             age
             to
             be
             the
             rule
             and
             direction
             of
             speaking
             Hebrew
             ,
             but
             so
             far
             onely
             as
             it
             doth
             agree
             with
             the
             custome
             of
             the
             ancient
             people
             .
          
           Further
           he
           addeth
           ,
           
             In
             every
             Nation
             there
             are
             skilful
             and
             learned
             men
             in
             that
             language
             ,
             yet
             they
             do
             not
             all
             reade
             after
             the
             same
             manner
             ▪
             The
             Germans
             pronounce
             their
             words
             one
             way
             ,
             the
             French
             another
             ,
             the
             Spaniards
             and
             Italians
             another
             ;
             and
             each
             of
             them
             say
             they
             have
             their
             proper
             and
             peculiar
             custome
             .
             But
             such
             a
             custome
             is
             not
             to
             be
             accounted
             a
             lawful
             argument
             .
             Let
             us
             hold
             this
             therefore
             for
             a
             sound
             foundation
             ,
             both
             in
             reading
             ,
             writing
             and
             ●…ronouncing
             Hebrew
             ,
             
               Veterem
               Haebraeorum
               usum
               sequendum
               esse
            
             ,
             The
             ancient
             use
             of
             the
             Hebrews
             is
             to
             be
             followed
             .
          
           Technol
           .
           p.
           45.
           
           So
           I
           may
           say
           in
           the
           present
           case
           ,
           They
           that
           take
           the
           Name
           of
           the
           Beast
           for
           the
           Universal
           Headship
           ,
           &
           they
           that
           stand
           upon
           the
           beginning
           of
           the
           Universal
           Headship
           (
           for
           so
           
             Paraeus
             ,
             Downham
          
           ,
           and
           our
           best
           Interpreters
           do
           )
           at
           the
           Emperor
           Phocas
           ,
           they
           must
           not
           count
           the
           Number
           of
           time
           by
           the
           year
           of
           
           the
           Lord
           ,
           or
           by
           any
           such
           like
           modern
           style
           ;
           but
           they
           must
           have
           recourse
           
             ad
             veterem
             Prophetarum
             &
             Apostolorum
             usum
             ,
          
           to
           the
           ancient
           use
           of
           the
           Prophets
           and
           the
           Apostles
           in
           the
           days
           of
           Iohn
           .
           And
           here
           they
           may
           finde
           ,
           that
           the
           Name
           of
           the
           Beast
           ,
           which
           is
           onely
           606
           in
           the
           years
           of
           the
           Lord
           ,
           will
           be
           666
           in
           Daniels
           Chronologie
           .
           And
           that
           which
           may
           be
           for
           a
           confirmation
           of
           this
           truth
           ,
           let
           us
           but
           remember
           what
           hath
           been
           formerly
           proved
           ,
           to
           wit
           ,
           that
           Iohn
           in
           the
           Revolation
           doth
           largely
           repeat
           shat
           which
           hath
           been
           more
           briefly
           mentioned
           by
           Daniel
           concerning
           the
           Roman
           or
           the
           fourth
           Metal-Kingdom
           .
           Further
           ,
           we
           reade
           ,
           That
           when
           the
           seventh
           Angel
           began
           to
           sound
           ,
           it
           is
           expresly
           said
           ,
           That
           
             time
             shall
             be
             no
             more
             ,
             but
             the
             mystery
             of
             God
             shall
             be
             finished
             ,
             as
             he
             hath
             spoke
             to
             his
             servants
             the
             Prophots
             ,
          
           Rev.
           10.
           6
           ,
           7.
           
           Here
           two
           questions
           are
           to
           be
           demanded
           ,
           First
           ,
           what
           did
           he
           mean
           when
           he
           saith
           ,
           That
           
             time
             shall
             be
             no
             more
          
           ?
           Secondly
           ,
           To
           what
           Prophets
           doth
           he
           refer
           us
           ,
           when
           he
           saith
           ,
           
             As
             he
             hath
             spoken
             to
             his
             servants
             the
             Prophets
             ?
          
           By
           Time
           ,
           we
           are
           to
           take
           it
           onely
           ,
           with
           a
           restriction
           ,
           for
           the
           time
           of
           the
           sufferings
           of
           the
           Church
           ,
           under
           the
           Tyrannical
           Governments
           of
           this
           world
           ,
           as
           it
           is
           set
           forth
           in
           the
           type
           of
           the
           four
           Metal-Kingdoms
           :
           But
           more
           specially
           ,
           in
           the
           last
           and
           Antichristian
           state
           of
           the
           fourth
           Kingdom
           .
           Secondly
           ,
           for
           
             the
             servants
             the
             Prophets
          
           ,
           Mr.
           
             Mede
             ,
             Grasserus
          
           ,
           and
           others
           ,
           do
           understand
           this
           of
           the
           times
           in
           the
           Prophecy
           of
           Daniel
           ,
           which
           do
           reach
           to
           the
           dissolution
           and
           destruction
           of
           the
           Antichristian
           Kingdom
           .
           If
           we
           put
           all
           this
           together
           ,
           we
           shall
           finde
           ,
           that
           the
           times
           of
           the
           Beasts
           Kingdom
           ought
           not
           to
           be
           computed
           by
           the
           years
           of
           the
           Lord
           ,
           but
           by
           the
           ancient
           and
           Prophetical
           Chronologie
           in
           the
           Visions
           of
           
             Daniel
             .
             These
             two
             Arguments
             being
             answered
             ,
             Paraeus
             ,
             Downham
             ,
          
           and
           other
           Protestant
           Writers
           are
           wholly
           ours
           :
           For
           they
           altogether
           in
           a
           manner
           in
           their
           Treatises
           and
           Commentaries
           do
           teach
           ,
           that
           the
           formality
           of
           Antichristianism
           doth
           lye
           in
           the
           Universal
           Headship
           ;
           and
           that
           a
           thing
           is
           Antichristian
           ,
           so
           far
           as
           it
           doth
           contribute
           to
           the
           Universal
           Headship
           of
           the
           Bishop
           of
           Rome
           ,
           to
           put
           him
           in
           the
           place
           of
           Christ
           ,
           who
           is
           the
           onely
           ,
           undoubted
           ,
           unquestionable
           Head
           of
           the
           Church
           ,
           and
           there
           is
           none
           besides
           .
           And
           so
           much
           concerning
           
           the
           matter
           of
           the
           Law
           ,
           that
           the
           Beast
           causeth
           these
           three
           things
           to
           be
           received
           ,
           The
           Mark
           ,
           the
           Name
           ,
           and
           the
           Number
           of
           the
           Name
           .
        
         
           Onely
           here
           is
           one
           hard
           question
           to
           be
           dissolved
           ,
           in
           which
           I
           finde
           ,
           that
           Interpreters
           are
           greatly
           divided
           ,
           and
           that
           is
           this
           ;
           Whether
           the
           Mark
           ,
           Name
           and
           Number
           are
           so
           many
           expressions
           of
           one
           and
           the
           same
           matter
           ,
           or
           whether
           are
           they
           three
           distinct
           several
           matters
           ?
           Some
           are
           of
           opinion
           ,
           as
           Alcasar
           ,
           that
           all
           these
           three
           ought
           to
           be
           coupled
           together
           exegeticè
           ,
           by
           way
           of
           explanation
           :
           Seeing
           that
           which
           in
           this
           and
           the
           former
           verse
           is
           absolutely
           called
           the
           Mark
           ,
           is
           afterward
           expresly
           called
           the
           Mark
           of
           the
           Beast
           ,
           Chap.
           15.
           ver
           .
           2.
           and
           the
           Mark
           of
           the
           Name
           of
           the
           Beast
           ,
           Chap.
           14.
           ver
           .
           11.
           
           Others
           are
           of
           a
           different
           judgement
           ,
           as
           Ribera
           ;
           for
           they
           hold
           ,
           that
           these
           things
           ought
           to
           be
           distinguished
           :
           for
           they
           that
           stand
           on
           the
           glassie
           Sea
           ,
           are
           said
           in
           express
           terms
           to
           overcome
           the
           Beast
           ,
           his
           Image
           ,
           Mark
           ,
           Name
           ,
           and
           the
           Number
           of
           his
           Name
           ,
           Chap.
           15.
           ver
           .
           1
           ,
           2.
           
           Now
           our
           answer
           to
           this
           question
           is
           this
           :
           First
           ,
           we
           say
           ,
           That
           the
           Mark
           ,
           Name
           ,
           and
           the
           Number
           of
           the
           Name
           ,
           cannot
           be
           affirmed
           to
           signifie
           one
           and
           the
           same
           thing
           ,
           seeing
           they
           are
           in
           many
           places
           of
           the
           Prophecy
           delivered
           with
           distinction
           ;
           and
           the
           reason
           of
           the
           distinction
           is
           laid
           down
           in
           sundry
           Texts
           .
           To
           the
           second
           also
           we
           answer
           ,
           That
           these
           are
           not
           three
           several
           matters
           ,
           as
           
             Ribera
             ,
             Paraeus
             ,
             Abbot
          
           ,
           and
           others
           will
           have
           it
           ;
           as
           though
           some
           of
           the
           Beasts
           Subjects
           should
           have
           the
           Mark
           ,
           others
           the
           Name
           ,
           and
           a
           third
           sort
           the
           Number
           of
           the
           Name
           .
           There
           is
           no
           reason
           that
           we
           should
           put
           those
           things
           asunder
           ,
           which
           in
           the
           Prophecy
           are
           always
           joyned
           together
           .
        
         
           Therefore
           to
           determine
           the
           question
           ,
           we
           will
           take
           a
           middle
           way
           between
           these
           two
           extremes
           :
           We
           affirm
           then
           ,
           That
           in
           the
           general
           these
           three
           do
           agree
           in
           one
           matter
           for
           the
           substance
           ,
           though
           it
           be
           distinguished
           by
           three
           Apocalyptical
           considerations
           .
           Let
           us
           come
           to
           that
           particular
           place
           where
           Iohn
           saw
           the
           Number
           of
           them
           that
           stood
           upon
           the
           glassie
           Sea
           mingled
           with
           fire
           ,
           who
           had
           overcome
           the
           Beast
           ,
           his
           Image
           ,
           Mark
           ,
           Name
           ,
           and
           the
           Number
           of
           his
           Name
           ,
           Chap.
           15.
           ver
           .
           2.
           
           All
           
           these
           several
           expressions
           set
           forth
           one
           sort
           of
           men
           ,
           that
           had
           persevered
           and
           held
           out
           for
           Christ
           against
           the
           Power
           and
           Headship
           of
           Antichrist
           in
           all
           the
           time
           of
           that
           Tribulation
           .
           And
           yet
           as
           this
           matter
           is
           one
           ,
           it
           is
           branched
           into
           several
           Considerations
           .
        
         
           First
           ,
           If
           you
           speak
           of
           the
           Papacy
           as
           a
           State
           or
           Government
           afflicting
           the
           Saints
           ,
           so
           it
           is
           called
           a
           Beast
           ,
           like
           to
           one
           of
           the
           Beasts
           in
           Daniel
           .
           Secondly
           ,
           If
           you
           speak
           of
           the
           Universal
           Headship
           ,
           wherein
           the
           form
           and
           essence
           of
           the
           Kingdom
           doth
           consist
           ,
           this
           is
           the
           Name
           of
           the
           Beast
           .
           Thirdly
           ,
           If
           you
           speak
           of
           that
           Universal
           Headship
           ,
           as
           a
           Representative
           of
           that
           Soveraign
           Majesty
           that
           was
           formerly
           lost
           in
           
             Rome
             Imperial
          
           ,
           and
           now
           repaired
           in
           
             Rome
             Papal
          
           ,
           this
           is
           the
           Image
           of
           the
           Beast
           .
           Fourthly
           ,
           If
           you
           speak
           of
           the
           publick
           profession
           of
           this
           Universal
           Headship
           in
           the
           society
           of
           men
           ,
           this
           is
           the
           Mark
           of
           the
           Beast
           .
           Fifthly
           ,
           If
           you
           speak
           of
           the
           time
           when
           this
           Universal
           Headship
           began
           visibly
           and
           remarkably
           to
           appear
           ,
           this
           is
           the
           Number
           of
           the
           Beast
           ,
           and
           more
           specially
           of
           his
           Name
           and
           Headship
           .
           All
           these
           are
           so
           many
           distinct
           Apocalyptical
           Considerations
           ,
           which
           agree
           in
           one
           main
           Truth
           in
           the
           general
           .
           And
           thus
           having
           spoken
           of
           the
           Law
           of
           the
           Beast
           ,
           in
           the
           three
           branches
           thereof
           ,
           we
           will
           now
           come
           to
           speak
           more
           briefly
           of
           the
           other
           particulars
           ,
           because
           they
           are
           more
           easie
           to
           be
           understood
           .
        
         
           Secondly
           ,
           For
           the
           Law-maker
           ,
           the
           Power
           by
           and
           through
           which
           he
           caused
           all
           to
           receive
           the
           Mark
           ;
           this
           is
           a
           Spiritual
           Christ-like
           efficacy
           prevailing
           in
           the
           Consciences
           of
           men
           ,
           to
           make
           them
           subject
           to
           his
           Laws
           .
           It
           is
           said
           of
           the
           Monarchy
           of
           Nebuchadnezzar
           ,
           that
           
             the
             most
             High
             God
             did
             give
             to
             him
             a
             Kingdome
             ;
             And
             for
             the
             Majesty
             that
             he
             gave
             him
             ,
             all
             People
             ,
             Nations
             and
             Languages
             trembled
             ,
             and
             feared
             before
             him
             :
             whom
             he
             would
             ,
             he
             slew
             ;
             and
             whom
             he
             would
             ,
             he
             kept
             alive
             ,
          
           Chap.
           5.
           ver
           .
           18
           ,
           19.
           
           So
           the
           Beast
           in
           the
           Revelation
           hath
           the
           same
           transcendent
           power
           ;
           he
           causeth
           all
           to
           receive
           a
           Mark
           ,
           whether
           rich
           or
           poor
           ,
           bond
           or
           free
           ,
           male
           or
           female
           ;
           he
           compelleth
           all
           to
           yield
           obedience
           ,
           as
           they
           sometimes
           did
           ,
           that
           were
           under
           the
           power
           of
           Nebuchadnezzar
           .
           But
           here
           is
           the
           difference
           :
           
           The
           power
           of
           Nebuchadnezzar
           was
           more
           external
           ,
           over
           the
           bodies
           of
           men
           ;
           this
           is
           more
           internal
           ,
           over
           their
           Mindes
           and
           Consciences
           ,
           and
           by
           consequence
           over
           their
           bodies
           also
           .
           Secondly
           ,
           They
           tha●…
           were
           under
           the
           Jurisdiction
           of
           Nebuchadnezzar
           ,
           had
           they
           been
           left
           to
           their
           free
           choyce
           ,
           they
           would
           have
           been
           glad
           to
           have
           enjoyed
           their
           liberty
           :
           but
           now
           for
           those
           that
           lived
           in
           subjection
           to
           the
           See
           of
           Rome
           ,
           for
           the
           most
           part
           ,
           the
           matter
           was
           far
           otherwise
           with
           them
           ▪
           they
           would
           not
           be
           free
           if
           they
           might
           .
           The
           Kings
           of
           the
           Earth
           divided
           in
           Interests
           ,
           and
           in
           many
           Civil
           respects
           ,
           all
           of
           them
           could
           agree
           in
           this
           one
           thing
           ,
           To
           give
           their
           Power
           to
           the
           Beast
           ,
           
             Rev.
             Ch.
          
           17.
           
           They
           thought
           they
           could
           not
           be
           saved
           ,
           unless
           in
           all
           Realms
           there
           was
           a
           Universal
           subjection
           to
           this
           Headship
           ,
           given
           by
           Christ
           himself
           ,
           as
           they
           thought
           ,
           to
           Peter
           and
           his
           Successors
           .
           And
           for
           the
           time
           of
           the
           publick
           Institution
           of
           this
           Universal
           Headship
           ,
           there
           were
           some
           preparations
           and
           previous
           workings
           towards
           the
           setting
           up
           of
           this
           Power
           ;
           but
           there
           was
           no
           publick
           Establishment
           thereof
           ,
           till
           the
           time
           of
           the
           Emperor
           Phocas
           .
           Let
           us
           hear
           what
           Mr.
           Fox
           in
           his
           
             Acts
             and
             Monuments
          
           speaketh
           concerning
           this
           matter
           ,
           Pag.
           108.
           
           Col.
           2.
           
           
             But
             Rome
          
           (
           saith
           he
           )
           would
           not
           so
           soon
           lose
           the
           Supremacy
           once
           given
           ,
           
             as
             the
             giver
             lost
             his
             life
             :
             For
             ever
             since
             from
             that
             day
             ,
             she
             hath
             holden
             ,
             defended
             and
             maintained
             the
             same
             still
             ,
             and
             yet
             doth
             to
             this
             present
             day
             ,
             by
             all
             force
             and
             policy
             possible
             .
             And
             thus
             much
             concerning
          
           Boniface
           ,
           
             whom
             by
             the
             words
             of
          
           Gregory
           
             we
             may
             call
             the
          
           Fore-runner
           of
           Antichrist
           .
           
             For
             as
          
           Gregory
           
             brought
             in
             the
             style
          
           Servus
           Servorum
           :
           
             So
             this
          
           Boniface
           
             brought
             into
             their
             heads
             first
          
           ,
           Volumus
           &
           Mandamus
           ,
           Statuimus
           &
           Praecipimus
           ;
           that
           is
           ,
           
             We
             Will
             and
             Command
             ,
             We
             Injoyn
             and
             Charge
             you
             .
          
           The
           same
           is
           mentioned
           by
           Paraens
           ,
           in
           his
           Commentary
           upon
           the
           
             Revelation
             ,
             Chap.
          
           6.
           ver
           .
           12.
           
           From
           whence
           I
           gather
           ,
           As
           the
           Bishops
           of
           Rome
           have
           had
           a
           Mandatory
           Power
           in
           and
           over
           the
           Church
           ;
           so
           this
           first
           began
           in
           the
           time
           of
           the
           Emperor
           Phocas
           ,
           in
           the
           Decree
           of
           the
           Universal
           Headship
           .
        
         
           Thirdly
           ,
           Let
           us
           consider
           the
           persons
           ,
           who
           they
           are
           that
           are
           subject
           to
           his
           Power
           .
           He
           commandeth
           all
           ,
           both
           small
           and
           great
           ,
           rich
           and
           poor
           ,
           to
           receive
           a
           Mark.
           The
           greatness
           of
           rich
           
           men
           cannot
           procure
           a
           toleration
           ;
           neither
           can
           the
           meanness
           of
           poor
           men
           exempt
           them
           by
           their
           poverty
           .
           Bullinger
           upon
           the
           place
           speaketh
           very
           pithily
           :
           
             We
             see
          
           (
           saith
           he
           )
           
             that
             Emperors
             ,
             Kings
             ,
             Dukes
             ,
             Marquesses
             ,
             Earls
             ,
             Barons
             ,
             Realms
             ,
             Countreys
             ,
             Cities
             ,
             Patriarchs
             ,
             Archbishops
             ,
             Bishops
             ,
             Prelates
             ,
             Doctors
             ,
             Clerks
             and
             Lay
             men
             ,
             obey
             him
             .
             And
             also
             men
             of
             the
             greatest
             Power
             ,
             Riches
             ,
             Wisdome
             ,
             together
             with
             the
             poor
             people
             .
             There
             is
             no
             such
             Kingdome
             ,
             and
             so
             diversly
             compact
             ,
             in
             the
             whole
             world
             ,
             no
             not
             among
             the
             Mahometans
             :
             And
             all
             these
             are
             willingly
             subject
             to
             the
             Seat
             ;
             yea
             ,
             they
             have
             perswaded
             themselves
             ,
             that
             they
             cannot
             well
             live
             ,
             and
             that
             they
             cannot
             be
             saved
             ,
             unless
             they
             be
             subject
             to
             the
             See
             of
             Rome
             .
          
           So
           far
           Bullinger
           .
           From
           hence
           we
           gather
           ,
           that
           the
           event
           doth
           fully
           answer
           the
           Prophecy
           ;
           for
           we
           see
           by
           experience
           ,
           how
           all
           the
           world
           hath
           worshipped
           the
           Beast
           ,
           and
           received
           his
           Mark.
           And
           whereas
           some
           ,
           to
           illude
           this
           truth
           ,
           have
           pleaded
           ,
           that
           the
           Popish
           Churches
           in
           France
           do
           not
           own
           the
           Pope
           for
           Head
           of
           the
           Church
           :
           We
           will
           easily
           grant
           ,
           that
           they
           may
           not
           be
           so
           strictly
           obliged
           to
           the
           Popes
           Chair
           in
           some
           temporal
           respects
           ;
           yet
           it
           is
           too
           plain
           ,
           that
           his
           Authority
           is
           set
           up
           in
           their
           Consciences
           ,
           and
           that
           they
           are
           subject
           to
           his
           Laws
           .
        
         
           Fourthly
           ,
           Let
           us
           consider
           the
           punishment
           to
           be
           inflicted
           upon
           those
           that
           have
           not
           the
           Mark
           in
           the
           Forehead
           ,
           and
           in
           the
           right-hand
           ;
           they
           are
           forbidden
           to
           buy
           or
           sell.
           Mr.
           Mede
           doth
           take
           this
           for
           Excommunication
           ,
           or
           casting
           out
           of
           Church-fellowship
           .
           But
           rather
           the
           words
           signifie
           ,
           a
           cutting
           off
           from
           all
           civil
           commerce
           among
           men
           .
           Yea
           ,
           if
           we
           compare
           the
           Scriptures
           ,
           we
           shall
           finde
           that
           it
           was
           present
           death
           for
           any
           man
           to
           refuse
           to
           have
           the
           Mark
           in
           the
           forehead
           ,
           and
           in
           the
           right-hand
           .
           Therefore
           when
           Iohn
           saw
           
             the
             Souls
             of
             those
             that
             were
             beheaded
             for
             the
             Word
             of
             God
             ,
             and
             the
             testimony
             of
             Iesus
             ,
             that
             had
             not
             worshipped
             the
             Image
             ,
             nor
             received
             the
             Mark
             ,
          
           Chap.
           20.
           ver
           .
           4.
           he
           doth
           plainly
           shew
           ,
           that
           the
           beheading
           was
           for
           the
           Non-worship
           of
           the
           Beast
           ,
           and
           for
           the
           not
           receiving
           of
           the
           Mark.
           We
           may
           conclude
           then
           ,
           when
           men
           are
           exempted
           from
           bu●…ing
           and
           selling
           ,
           this
           is
           a
           Synecdoche
           :
           By
           this
           one
           ,
           all
           other
           kindes
           of
           punishment
           whatsoever
           are
           understood
           .
           And
           thus
           
           we
           have
           seen
           the
           matter
           of
           the
           Law
           ,
           the
           Law-maker
           ,
           the
           persons
           subject
           to
           the
           Law
           ,
           and
           the
           penalty
           upon
           all
           such
           as
           shall
           refuse
           subjection
           .
           Let
           us
           now
           come
           to
           the
           several
           particulars
           which
           concern
           the
           right
           calculation
           of
           the
           Number
           .
        
         
           First
           ,
           For
           the
           Person
           ,
           who
           it
           is
           that
           must
           make
           the
           discovery
           :
           It
           is
           such
           a
           one
           as
           hath
           wisdome
           ,
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           &c.
           
           
             Here
             is
             wisdome
             ,
             let
             him
             that
             hath
             understanding
             count
             the
             Number
             of
             the
             Beast
             ,
             &c.
             
          
           The
           discovery
           then
           must
           be
           by
           understanding
           .
           But
           here
           we
           are
           not
           to
           conceive
           such
           a
           kinde
           of
           wisdome
           as
           lyeth
           meerly
           in
           Mathematical
           subtilties
           :
           For
           how
           can
           it
           be
           imagined
           ,
           that
           the
           holy
           Spirit
           (
           and
           that
           under
           the
           highest
           penalties
           )
           should
           give
           such
           serious
           warning
           to
           the
           Church
           ,
           to
           beware
           of
           receiving
           the
           Mark
           of
           the
           Beast
           ,
           the
           Name
           ,
           and
           the
           Number
           of
           the
           Name
           ,
           and
           these
           things
           be
           onely
           discoverable
           to
           them
           that
           have
           skill
           in
           the
           Mathematicks
           ?
           You
           will
           say
           ,
           What
           wisdome
           is
           here
           intended
           ?
           I
           answer
           ,
           such
           a
           skill
           and
           dexterity
           onely
           ,
           by
           which
           men
           are
           able
           to
           render
           the
           mystical
           and
           figurative
           expressions
           of
           the
           Prophecy
           in
           their
           true
           natural
           sense
           and
           construction
           .
           The
           like
           expression
           is
           used
           ,
           Rev.
           17.
           9.
           
           
             Here
             is
             the
             minde
             that
             hath
             wisdome
             :
             the
             seven
             Heads
             are
             seven
             Mountains
             where
             the
             woman
             sitteth
             .
          
           By
           wisedome
           ,
           he
           doth
           here
           mean
           a
           sagacity
           and
           skill
           to
           expound
           the
           Parables
           ,
           and
           mystical
           expressions
           of
           the
           Prophecy
           in
           their
           bare
           sense
           and
           signification
           .
           And
           so
           in
           the
           present
           case
           ,
           when
           he
           speaketh
           of
           the
           Name
           and
           Universal
           Headship
           of
           the
           Beast
           ,
           and
           the
           Number
           of
           the
           Name
           ,
           it
           is
           not
           to
           be
           doubted
           ,
           but
           that
           he
           pointeth
           to
           some
           method
           of
           Account
           famously
           known
           in
           the
           days
           of
           Iohn
           .
           And
           whereas
           he
           doth
           not
           openly
           and
           plainly
           ,
           but
           under
           dark
           terms
           ,
           express
           the
           matter
           ,
           to
           wit
           ,
           that
           it
           is
           the
           Number
           of
           a
           Man
           ,
           and
           the
           Number
           666
           :
           By
           this
           he
           doth
           imply
           ,
           that
           some
           kinde
           of
           wisdome
           is
           to
           be
           used
           in
           the
           true
           calculation
           and
           discovery
           of
           the
           Number
           .
        
         
           You
           will
           say
           ,
           If
           there
           be
           666
           years
           to
           the
           setting
           up
           of
           the
           Name
           ,
           or
           Universal
           Headship
           of
           the
           Bishop
           of
           Rome
           ,
           why
           is
           not
           this
           expressed
           in
           plain
           and
           significant
           terms
           ?
        
         
           By
           the
           like
           manner
           of
           reasoning
           ,
           you
           may
           argue
           ,
           Why
           doth
           the
           Spirit
           ,
           through
           the
           whole
           body
           of
           the
           Prophecy
           ,
           
           carry
           on
           the
           description
           of
           the
           state
           of
           the
           Church
           in
           a
           figurative
           ,
           mystical
           ,
           and
           typical
           way
           of
           expression
           ?
           He
           might
           (
           if
           he
           had
           so
           pleased
           )
           have
           said
           in
           so
           many
           syllables
           ,
           that
           the
           seven
           Heads
           of
           the
           Beast
           ,
           are
           so
           many
           Mountains
           of
           the
           City
           of
           Rome
           ,
           and
           so
           many
           Heads
           of
           Roman
           Government
           :
           But
           he
           doth
           rather
           use
           a
           dark
           circumlocution
           ,
           of
           a
           woman
           sitting
           upon
           a
           Beast
           with
           seven
           Heads
           .
           He
           doth
           use
           such
           an
           hidden
           way
           of
           expressing
           these
           things
           in
           Emblems
           and
           Figures
           ,
           that
           pious
           men
           might
           bestow
           the
           more
           diligence
           in
           searching
           the
           Stories
           of
           the
           Church
           .
           Paraeus
           in
           his
           Commentary
           upon
           the
           
             R●…velatun
             ,
             Chap.
          
           17.
           v.
           7.
           speaketh
           to
           the
           same
           purpose
           :
           
             Piis
             vero
             interpretatione
             aenigmatic
             à
             aurem
             ve●…icare
             voluit
             spiritus
             ,
             ut
             subinde
             in
             suorum
             temporum
             eventus
             atque
             Historias
             invigilar●…nt
             .
          
           And
           if
           we
           come
           to
           example
           ,
           we
           shall
           finde
           ,
           That
           the
           ●…even
           Trumpets
           are
           delivered
           in
           a
           very
           dark
           and
           mystical
           manner
           :
           For
           after
           that
           the
           Angel
           had
           offered
           much
           incense
           ,
           with
           the
           Prayers
           of
           all
           Saints
           ,
           upon
           the
           Golden
           Altar
           before
           the
           Throne
           ,
           then
           the
           seven
           Angels
           began
           to
           sound
           .
           When
           the
           first
           Angel
           sounded
           ,
           there
           followed
           Hail
           ,
           and
           Fire
           mingled
           with
           Blood
           ,
           Chap.
           8.
           ver
           .
           7.
           
           When
           the
           second
           Angel
           sounded
           ,
           a
           Mountain
           burning
           with
           fire
           was
           cast
           into
           the
           Sea
           ,
           ver
           .
           8.
           
           And
           when
           the
           third
           Angel
           sounded
           ,
           a
           great
           Star
           fell
           from
           Heaven
           into
           the
           Rivers
           ,
           and
           Fountains
           ;
           and
           the
           Name
           of
           the
           Star
           is
           Wormwood
           ,
           ver
           .
           10
           ,
           11.
           
           Here
           it
           is
           plain
           ,
           That
           by
           these
           Emblems
           and
           Figures
           ,
           so
           many
           Judgements
           of
           God
           ,
           in
           a
           succession
           ,
           are
           said
           to
           fall
           upon
           the
           world
           ,
           for
           their
           persecuting
           of
           the
           Saints
           .
           For
           after
           the
           Prayers
           of
           all
           Saints
           were
           offered
           up
           on
           the
           Golden
           Altar
           upon
           the
           Throne
           ,
           then
           the
           seventh
           Angel
           began
           to
           sound
           .
           As
           in
           the
           like
           case
           ,
           when
           Eliah
           fled
           to
           Horeb
           ,
           he
           made
           intercession
           against
           Israel
           ,
           saying
           ,
           
             I
             have
             been
             very
             jealous
             for
             the
             Lord
             God
             of
             Hosts
             :
             for
             the
             children
             of
             Israel
             have
             forsaken
             thy
             Covenant
             ,
             thrown
             down
             thine
             Altars
             ,
             and
             killed
             thy
             Prophets
             ;
             and
             I
             am
             left
             alone
             ,
             and
             they
             seek
             my
             life
             ,
             to
             take
             it
             away
             .
          
           In
           answer
           to
           this
           Prayer
           ,
           the
           Lord
           bade
           him
           go
           out
           ,
           and
           stand
           upon
           the
           Mount
           ,
           1
           Kings
           19.
           11
           ,
           12
           ,
           13.
           
           And
           as
           he
           stood
           ,
           first
           
             the
             Lord
             passed
             by
             ,
             and
             a
             great
             and
             a
             strong
             Wind
             rent
             the
             Mountaine
             ;
             and
             after
             the
             Wind
             ,
             there
             was
             an
             Earthquake
             ▪
          
           
           
             and
             after
             the
             Earthquake
             ,
             a
             Fire
             .
          
           Here
           if
           we
           would
           inquire
           after
           the
           signification
           of
           these
           three
           Emblems
           (
           for
           we
           cannot
           otherwise
           think
           ,
           but
           that
           something
           is
           specially
           intended
           in
           Visions
           of
           this
           nature
           )
           the
           Lords
           own
           interpretation
           will
           shew
           the
           meaning
           of
           this
           ,
           in
           the
           words
           that
           follow
           :
           
             He
             that
             escapeth
             the
             sword
             of
             Hazael
             ,
             shall
             Ie●…u
             s●…ay
             ;
             and
             he
             that
             escapeth
             the
             sword
             of
             Ie●…u
             ,
             shall
             El●…shah
             s●…ay
             .
          
           Here
           then
           are
           three
           Judgements
           in
           a
           succession
           ,
           the
           Wind
           ,
           the
           Earthquake
           ,
           and
           the
           Fire
           .
           And
           for
           the
           still
           small
           voice
           that
           is
           expressed
           in
           these
           words
           ,
           
             I
             have
             reserved
             to
             my self
             seven
             thousand
             men
             that
             have
             not
             bowed
             the
             knee
             to
             Baal
             ,
          
           ver
           .
           18.
           
           Now
           if
           you
           go
           to
           the
           seven
           Trumpets
           ,
           it
           is
           clear
           ,
           That
           they
           are
           so
           many
           Judgements
           of
           God
           ,
           that
           come
           one
           after
           another
           upon
           the
           world
           ,
           for
           their
           Idolatry
           ,
           and
           for
           their
           killing
           of
           the
           Saints
           .
           But
           who
           shall
           assure
           us
           ,
           what
           is
           certainly
           meant
           by
           each
           Trumpet
           ?
           What
           is
           meant
           by
           the
           Hail
           mingled
           with
           fire
           ;
           by
           the
           Mountain
           burning
           with
           fire
           ?
           Who
           shall
           assure
           us
           ,
           what
           is
           meant
           by
           these
           Types
           ,
           seeing
           the
           Spirit
           doth
           not
           set
           down
           his
           meaning
           ,
           as
           he
           doth
           in
           the
           Vision
           represented
           to
           Elias
           ?
           We
           should
           in
           this
           case
           have
           recourse
           to
           the
           Body
           of
           the
           Stories
           of
           the
           Church
           :
           For
           I
           am
           perswaded
           ,
           That
           the
           Lord
           doth
           on
           set
           purpose
           deliver
           these
           things
           more
           Aenigmatically
           and
           Figuratively
           ,
           that
           we
           should
           attentively
           consider
           the
           way
           of
           his
           dealing
           ,
           in
           judging
           the
           World
           ,
           and
           in
           delivering
           his
           Church
           .
           
             O
             how
             far
             then
             do
             they
             go
             out
             of
             the
             true
             way
             ,
             who
             are
             Enemies
             against
             all
             secular
             Learning
             ,
             in
             the
             profitable
             and
             sober
             use
             thereof
             !
          
           God
           doth
           of
           set
           purpose
           carry
           on
           the
           whole
           Prophecy
           so
           darkly
           ,
           because
           we
           should
           turn
           every
           way
           for
           the
           discovery
           of
           the
           truth
           .
           And
           this
           is
           the
           reason
           ,
           wherefore
           he
           doth
           speak
           so
           mystically
           concerning
           the
           Name
           of
           the
           Beast
           ,
           the
           Number
           of
           a
           Man
           ,
           and
           the
           Number
           666.
           
           Further
           also
           ,
           we
           are
           to
           consider
           ,
           That
           seeing
           the
           Kingdom
           of
           the
           Beast
           was
           to
           be
           set
           up
           by
           deceiving
           of
           the
           Nations
           ,
           it
           was
           not
           needful
           to
           speak
           every
           Circumstance
           plainly
           ,
           to
           the
           understanding
           of
           men
           .
           How
           should
           the
           Beast
           have
           deceived
           the
           world
           ,
           if
           his
           deceits
           and
           pious
           frauds
           ,
           if
           the
           time
           of
           his
           Kingdome
           ,
           and
           every
           particular
           should
           have
           been
           fully
           discovered
           ?
           There
           is
           
           then
           a
           peculiar
           sort
           of
           people
           ,
           to
           whom
           the
           Lord
           hath
           given
           a
           special
           desire
           to
           look
           into
           the
           things
           contained
           in
           this
           Book
           of
           the
           Revelation
           ;
           and
           they
           have
           in
           some
           measure
           an
           ability
           (
           though
           others
           are
           dark
           )
           to
           understand
           the
           meaning
           of
           the
           Spirit
           in
           his
           deep
           and
           mystical
           expressions
           .
           In
           the
           several
           Epistles
           to
           the
           seven
           Churches
           in
           Asia
           ,
           this
           is
           added
           in
           the
           close
           of
           all
           ,
           
             He
             that
             hath
             an
             ear
             ,
             let
             him
             hear
             what
             the
             Spirit
             saith
             to
             the
             Churches
             .
          
           There
           are
           many
           excellent
           things
           that
           he
           speaketh
           to
           the
           Churches
           ,
           in
           the
           way
           of
           Reproof
           ,
           in
           the
           way
           of
           Advice
           ,
           and
           in
           the
           way
           of
           Comfort
           ;
           yet
           onely
           he
           that
           hath
           an
           ear
           to
           hear
           ,
           will
           understand
           the
           meaning
           of
           his
           words
           .
           And
           so
           in
           the
           present
           case
           ,
           when
           it
           is
           said
           ,
           
             Here
             is
             wisdome
             :
             let
             him
             that
             hath
             understanding
             count
             the
             Number
             of
             the
             Beast
             .
          
           This
           implieth
           ,
           That
           this
           matter
           must
           be
           found
           out
           by
           some
           subtilty
           of
           observation
           .
           The
           person
           that
           doth
           inquire
           ,
           must
           be
           such
           a
           one
           as
           hath
           wisdome
           .
        
         
           Secondly
           ,
           For
           the
           manner
           of
           discovery
           ,
           it
           must
           be
           by
           calculation
           of
           the
           Number
           ;
           and
           therefore
           it
           is
           said
           ,
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           
             Let
             him
             count
             the
             Number
             of
             the
             Beast
             .
          
           The
           word
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           signifieth
           such
           a
           kinde
           of
           Numbring
           as
           is
           by
           Counters
           or
           Stones
           ,
           of
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           
             Lapillus
             ,
             Calculus
          
           .
           But
           in
           the
           ordinary
           and
           common
           use
           ,
           it
           doth
           promiscuously
           note
           any
           kinde
           of
           reckoning
           .
           And
           therefore
           it
           is
           said
           concerning
           the
           man
           that
           went
           about
           to
           build
           a
           Tower
           ,
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           he
           counteth
           or
           reckoneth
           the
           cost
           ,
           Luke
           14.
           28.
           
           And
           so
           in
           the
           present
           case
           ,
           there
           is
           a
           computation
           or
           way
           of
           account
           to
           finde
           out
           the
           mystery
           of
           the
           Number
           :
           But
           here
           is
           the
           difference
           betwixt
           Interpreters
           ;
           some
           go
           to
           the
           extraction
           of
           the
           root
           ,
           some
           to
           the
           numeral
           Letters
           of
           the
           name
           Lateinos
           :
           But
           of
           these
           we
           have
           spoken
           in
           part
           already
           ,
           and
           we
           shall
           further
           shew
           the
           vanity
           of
           this
           way
           in
           the
           process
           of
           the
           Discourse
           .
           We
           will
           therefore
           come
           positively
           and
           plainly
           to
           set
           down
           the
           meaning
           of
           the
           Spirit
           :
           And
           we
           shall
           finde
           ,
           That
           there
           is
           nothing
           more
           familiar
           in
           the
           Predictions
           of
           Prophetical
           Scriptures
           ,
           then
           for
           the
           Spirit
           to
           foretel
           remarkable
           occurrences
           ,
           by
           a
           definite
           number
           of
           years
           to
           every
           such
           occurrence
           .
           Of
           many
           Examples
           that
           may
           be
           given
           ,
           take
           these
           few
           .
           When
           the
           
           Lord
           would
           give
           Noah
           warning
           concerning
           the
           Flood
           ,
           he
           told
           him
           ,
           That
           such
           a
           Number
           of
           years
           should
           fulfil
           their
           course
           ,
           and
           then
           the
           Flood
           should
           come
           :
           
             My
             Spirit
             shall
             not
             alway
             str●…ve
             with
             man
             ;
             yet
             his
             dayes
             shall
             be
             an
             hundred
             and
             twenty
             years
             ,
          
           Gen.
           6.
           3.
           
           So
           when
           he
           made
           a
           Promise
           to
           Abraham
           ,
           that
           he
           would
           give
           to
           his
           Posterity
           the
           Land
           of
           Canaan
           for
           an
           Inheritance
           ,
           he
           told
           him
           ,
           That
           400
           years
           should
           run
           compleat
           ,
           to
           the
           performance
           of
           the
           Promise
           :
           
             Thy
             seed
             shall
             be
             a
             stranger
             in
             a
             land
             that
             is
             not
             theirs
             ;
             and
             shall
             serve
             them
             ,
             and
             they
             shall
             afflict
             them
             four
             hundred
             years
             ,
             and
             afterwards
             they
             shall
             come
             out
             with
             great
             substance
             ,
          
           Gen.
           15.
           13
           ,
           14
           15.
           
           Further
           ,
           when
           the
           people
           of
           the
           Jews
           were
           carried
           captive
           into
           Babylon
           ,
           in
           the
           times
           of
           Ie●…kims
           Captivity
           ;
           to
           these
           the
           Prophet
           Ieremy
           did
           send
           a
           Consolatory
           Letter
           ,
           in
           which
           he
           did
           declare
           two
           things
           of
           eminent
           note
           ;
           Their
           remarkable
           deliverance
           ,
           and
           the
           overthrow
           of
           the
           Babylonian
           Empire
           :
           Yet
           withall
           ●…e
           did
           declare
           ,
           That
           seventy
           years
           must
           first
           be
           fulfilled
           and
           accomplished
           at
           Babylon
           ,
           before
           their
           deliverance
           wi●…
           come
           :
           
             And
             these
             Nations
             shall
             serve
             the
             King
             of
             Babylon
             seventy
             years
             ;
             and
             when
             seventy
             years
             are
             accomplished
             ,
             then
             will
             I
             visit
             the
             King
             of
             Babylon
             ,
          
           Jer.
           25.
           ver
           .
           11
           ,
           12.
           
           And
           again
           ,
           
             Thus
             saith
             the
             Lord
             ,
             After
             seventy
             years
             be
             accomplished
             at
             Babylon
             ,
             I
             will
             visit
             you
             ,
             and
             perform
             my
             good
             word
             towards
             you
             ,
             in
             causing
             you
             to
             return
             unto
             this
             place
             ,
          
           Jer.
           29.
           10
           ,
           11.
           
           Last
           of
           all
           ,
           when
           Daniel
           himself
           was
           m●…sing
           on
           the
           truth
           of
           the
           Promise
           of
           God
           ,
           and
           gave
           himself
           to
           understand
           the
           Times
           ,
           and
           to
           pray
           in
           faith
           for
           the
           accomplishment
           of
           the
           Promises
           ,
           he
           had
           a
           further
           discovery
           of
           the
           seventy
           weeks
           ,
           that
           should
           lead
           him
           to
           the
           times
           of
           the
           Messiah
           ,
           to
           his
           Passion
           ,
           to
           the
           Preaching
           of
           the
           Gospel
           among
           all
           Nations
           ,
           and
           to
           the
           destruction
           of
           Ierusalem
           .
           Now
           to
           the
           performance
           of
           these
           things
           ,
           it
           was
           shewed
           to
           him
           ,
           That
           there
           must
           be
           seventy
           Sevens
           ,
           or
           seventy
           weeks
           of
           years
           ,
           or
           490
           years
           in
           all
           ,
           to
           begin
           and
           commence
           from
           the
           building
           of
           the
           second
           Temple
           :
           which
           line
           of
           years
           if
           he
           followed
           ,
           it
           would
           bring
           him
           to
           that
           time
           when
           all
           these
           things
           should
           be
           fulfilled
           .
           By
           these
           Examples
           it
           is
           manifest
           ,
           That
           it
           is
           a
           frequent
           thing
           in
           Prophetical
           Scriptures
           ,
           to
           foretell
           
           future
           occurrences
           ,
           and
           to
           shew
           the
           Number
           of
           years
           that
           shall
           pass
           before
           the
           event
           .
           If
           this
           be
           so
           ,
           we
           have
           a
           rational
           ground
           to
           build
           upon
           ,
           when
           we
           make
           666
           the
           Number
           of
           years
           ,
           to
           the
           setting
           up
           of
           the
           Name
           or
           Universal
           Headship
           of
           the
           Bishop
           of
           Rome
           .
        
         
           But
           for
           the
           further
           clearing
           of
           the
           truth
           ,
           That
           the
           study
           and
           the
           calculation
           of
           the
           Prophetical
           years
           is
           said
           to
           be
           wisdome
           ,
           we
           can
           make
           this
           appear
           by
           some
           special
           Examples
           out
           of
           Scripture
           .
        
         
           We
           reade
           in
           the
           the
           Prophecy
           of
           
             Daniel
             ,
             In
             the
             first
             year
             of
             Darius
             the
             son
             of
             Ahashuerosh
             ,
             of
             the
             seed
             of
             the
             Medes
             ,
             which
             was
             made
             King
             over
             the
             Realm
             of
             the
             Caldeans
             ,
             in
             the
             first
             year
             of
             his
             reign
             ,
             I
             Daniel
             understood
             by
             books
             ,
             the
             Number
             of
             the
             years
             ,
             whereof
             the
             word
             of
             the
             Lord
             came
             to
             Ieremiah
             the
             Prophet
             ,
             that
             he
             would
             accomplish
             seventy
             years
             in
             the
             desolations
             of
             Ierusalem
             ,
          
           Dan.
           9.
           1
           ,
           2
           ,
           3.
           
           Concerning
           Darius
           the
           Mede
           ,
           there
           is
           a
           great
           Controversie
           among
           Chronologers
           ,
           whether
           he
           came
           to
           the
           Kingdome
           of
           the
           Caldeans
           by
           Conquest
           ,
           or
           by
           free
           Election
           .
           But
           let
           that
           point
           be
           what
           it
           will
           be
           ,
           all
           do
           agree
           in
           it
           ,
           That
           Darius
           the
           Mede
           raigned
           immediately
           before
           Cyrus
           the
           Persian
           .
           And
           it
           is
           as
           clear
           also
           by
           the
           stories
           of
           the
           times
           ,
           That
           the
           first
           year
           of
           Darius
           the
           Mede
           ,
           was
           upon
           the
           very
           dawning
           of
           the
           Churches
           deliverance
           .
           In
           this
           year
           then
           Daniel
           gave
           himself
           to
           study
           by
           books
           ,
           the
           Number
           of
           years
           that
           the
           Lord
           would
           accomplish
           in
           the
           Churches
           desolations
           .
           In
           him
           then
           ,
           by
           the
           way
           ,
           let
           us
           note
           ,
           
             That
             they
             who
             have
             the
             greatest
             fulness
             of
             Spirit
             ,
             are
             chiefly
             imployed
             in
             the
             meditation
             of
             the
             Scriptures
             :
             And
             they
             who
             are
             conversant
             in
             the
             Prophetical
             Scriptures
             ,
             are
             many
             times
             helped
             out
             in
             the
             knowledge
             of
             these
             things
             ,
             by
             the
             Sacred
             and
             the
             Civil
             Stories
             .
          
           But
           now
           let
           us
           take
           notice
           of
           the
           process
           and
           order
           of
           his
           meditations
           .
           First
           ,
           he
           did
           lay
           it
           as
           a
           general
           ground
           ,
           That
           seventy
           years
           must
           be
           expired
           ,
           before
           deliverance
           will
           come
           :
           But
           now
           ,
           saith
           he
           ,
           the
           seventy
           years
           of
           the
           desolations
           of
           Ierusalem
           begin
           almost
           to
           be
           fulfilled
           ;
           Therefore
           in
           these
           times
           we
           are
           almost
           come
           to
           the
           promised
           deliverance
           .
           And
           thereupon
           he
           did
           pray
           with
           great
           faith
           in
           the
           Promises
           of
           God
           ,
           as
           
           appeareth
           by
           the
           scope
           of
           the
           Chapter
           .
           Here
           now
           in
           this
           Syllogism
           Daniel
           did
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           by
           two
           known
           Numbers
           he
           did
           finde
           out
           a
           third
           unknown
           :
           His
           major
           Proposition
           was
           the
           Prophecy
           of
           Ieremy
           ;
           his
           Assumption
           was
           his
           own
           experience
           ,
           and
           the
           Chaldee
           Registers
           of
           the
           Time
           :
           and
           his
           Conclusion
           was
           the
           approach
           of
           the
           delivery
           of
           the
           Church
           :
           And
           the
           whole
           operation
           in
           computing
           the
           times
           was
           by
           wisdome
           .
           For
           these
           are
           the
           words
           of
           the
           Text
           ,
           
             I
             Daniel
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             understood
             by
             books
             .
             Piscator
          
           hath
           it
           ,
           
             Consideravi
             in
             libris
             :
             Iunius
             ,
             Fui
             considerans
             ex
             libris
             .
          
           All
           cometh
           to
           one
           sense
           ,
           That
           whether
           he
           did
           consider
           these
           times
           in
           books
           ,
           or
           by
           books
           ,
           or
           out
           of
           books
           ,
           he
           laid
           the
           times
           together
           ,
           to
           wit
           ,
           the
           times
           in
           the
           Prophecy
           of
           Ieremy
           ,
           and
           the
           times
           that
           had
           past
           in
           the
           Churches
           experience
           ,
           and
           accordingly
           did
           argue
           the
           approach
           of
           the
           deliverance
           that
           should
           come
           .
           This
           act
           of
           his
           was
           by
           wisdome
           or
           understanding
           ,
           for
           so
           the
           word
           doth
           signifie
           ;
           the
           inward
           contriving
           or
           plotting
           of
           any
           thing
           in
           the
           minde
           ,
           as
           Artificers
           do
           cast
           the
           frame
           of
           a
           building
           :
           Thus
           Kirkerus
           doth
           render
           the
           meaning
           of
           the
           word
           in
           his
           Concordance
           .
           Iunius
           upon
           the
           place
           doth
           very
           significantly
           express
           the
           meaning
           of
           the
           word
           ,
           
             Fuit
             intelligens
             ex
             libris
             Prophetiarum
             Hieromiae
             quibus
             annorum
             numerus
             fuit
             praefinitus
             ,
             tum
             Historiis
             temporum
             quae
             à
             deportationis
             initio
             effluxerant
             .
          
           In
           Daniel●…hen
           ●…hen
           we
           have
           an
           example
           of
           computing
           the
           times
           ,
           and
           of
           his
           wisedome
           in
           numbring
           the
           seventy
           years
           of
           Ieremy
           before
           the
           event
           .
           And
           this
           Daniel
           did
           do
           ,
           not
           by
           extraordinary
           revelation
           ,
           but
           as
           an
           ordinary
           believer
           might
           do
           by
           search
           .
        
         
           Let
           us
           now
           go
           to
           another
           Instance
           .
           When
           the
           Disciples
           came
           privately
           to
           our
           Saviour
           upon
           Mount
           Olivet
           ,
           they
           asked
           him
           concerning
           the
           time
           of
           the
           destruction
           of
           Ierusalem
           :
           and
           in
           order
           to
           their
           question
           ,
           he
           made
           them
           this
           answer
           ,
           
             When
             ye
             therefore
             shall
             see
             the
             abomination
             of
             desolation
             stand
             in
             the
             holy
             place
             :
             let
             him
             that
             readeth
             ,
             understand
             ,
          
           Mat.
           24.
           15.
           
           Here
           I
           demand
           ,
           What
           is
           meant
           by
           him
           that
           readeth
           ?
           Secondly
           ,
           what
           is
           meant
           by
           the
           book
           that
           he
           must
           reade
           ?
           By
           
             him
             that
             readeth
          
           ,
           is
           meant
           ,
           any
           one
           to
           whom
           God
           hath
           given
           a
           minde
           to
           search
           and
           to
           look
           into
           the
           meaning
           of
           the
           Scripture
           :
           And
           for
           the
           
           Book
           ,
           that
           must
           needs
           be
           the
           Prophecy
           of
           Daniel
           ,
           concerning
           the
           seventy
           weeks
           ,
           Dan.
           9.
           
           And
           whereas
           it
           is
           said
           ,
           
             Let
             him
             that
             readeth
             ,
             understand
          
           ;
           the
           words
           must
           go
           in
           this
           tenor
           ,
           
             Let
             him
             that
             readeth
             ,
             know
             and
             understand
             how
             many
             years
             the
          
           70
           
             weeks
             of
          
           Daniel
           
             must
             contain
             ,
             and
             where
             they
             must
             begin
             :
             And
             from
             the
             knowledge
             of
             these
             two
             ,
             if
             he
             reckon
             well
             ,
             he
             shall
             come
             to
             that
             time
             where
             they
             shall
             make
             an
             end
             ,
             and
             that
             will
             be
             the
             time
             of
             the
             destruction
             of
             Ierusalem
             .
          
           And
           so
           we
           have
           an
           answer
           to
           the
           Disciples
           question
           .
           But
           yet
           further
           ,
           concerning
           the
           time
           when
           the
           period
           of
           the
           seventy
           weeks
           are
           to
           be
           studied
           ,
           and
           that
           is
           ,
           
             when
             you
             see
             the
             abomination
             of
             desolation
             standing
             in
             the
             holy
             place
             .
          
           In
           that
           particular
           instant
           it
           is
           said
           ,
           
             Then
             let
             him
             that
             readeth
             ,
             understand
             .
          
           As
           for
           the
           standing
           of
           the
           abomination
           of
           desolation
           in
           the
           most
           holy
           place
           ,
           our
           Saviour
           doth
           expound
           his
           meaning
           more
           plainly
           in
           another
           Evangelist
           :
           
             When
             ye
             shall
             see
             Ierusalem
             compassed
             about
             with
             Armies
             ,
             then
             know
             that
             the
             desolation
             thereof
             is
             nigh
             ,
          
           Luke
           21.
           20.
           
           Here
           some
           man
           may
           object
           ,
           It
           is
           not
           always
           a
           necessary
           truth
           ,
           that
           when
           a
           City
           is
           compassed
           with
           Armies
           ,
           therefore
           it
           shall
           be
           taken
           ;
           and
           when
           it
           is
           taken
           ,
           it
           is
           not
           infallible
           that
           it
           shall
           be
           brought
           to
           utter
           desolation
           :
           What
           doth
           our
           Saviour
           then
           mean
           by
           this
           speech
           ?
           His
           meaning
           is
           not
           ,
           that
           from
           such
           weak
           principles
           men
           should
           draw
           a
           Conclusion
           of
           that
           weight
           ;
           but
           this
           is
           the
           drift
           of
           his
           speech
           ,
           When
           ye
           shall
           see
           Ierusalem
           compassed
           about
           with
           Armies
           ,
           then
           let
           him
           that
           readeth
           ,
           fall
           upon
           the
           calculation
           of
           the
           times
           in
           the
           Prophecy
           of
           Daniel
           :
           Let
           him
           consider
           where
           they
           begin
           ,
           how
           long
           they
           shall
           continue
           ,
           and
           where
           they
           make
           an
           end
           :
           and
           then
           by
           the
           joynt
           consideration
           of
           all
           these
           together
           ,
           they
           shall
           finde
           they
           be
           not
           far
           from
           the
           destruction
           of
           Ierusalem
           ,
           and
           that
           the
           years
           of
           the
           patience
           of
           God
           are
           run
           out
           .
           And
           yet
           further
           ,
           our
           Saviour
           would
           not
           have
           men
           calculate
           the
           times
           to
           satisfie
           their
           curiosity
           ,
           but
           meerly
           for
           use
           and
           practise
           ,
           and
           better
           information
           .
           He
           saith
           ,
           
             Let
             him
             that
             readeth
             ,
             understand
             .
          
           But
           to
           what
           end
           ?
           These
           words
           are
           immediately
           added
           ,
           ver
           .
           16.
           
           
             Then
             let
             them
             which
             are
             in
             Iudea
             ,
             flee
             to
             the
             Mountains
             ,
             &c.
             
          
           Now
           the
           understanding
           of
           the
           Prophetical
           times
           is
           no
           common
           
           matter
           ,
           but
           there
           must
           be
           much
           study
           and
           meditation
           used
           ,
           to
           finde
           out
           the
           meaning
           of
           the
           Spirit
           .
           The
           words
           of
           the
           Text
           are
           most
           emphatical
           ,
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           Let
           him
           that
           readeth
           ,
           ponder
           and
           consider
           the
           times
           ,
           by
           some
           subtilty
           of
           observation
           .
        
         
           Now
           then
           to
           apply
           all
           this
           to
           the
           present
           Text
           ,
           and
           so
           we
           have
           many
           examples
           out
           of
           Scripture
           ,
           to
           warrant
           us
           .
           That
           the
           Number
           666
           may
           be
           such
           a
           Number
           of
           years
           to
           the
           setting
           up
           of
           the
           Name
           or
           Universal
           Headship
           of
           the
           Bishop
           of
           Rome
           .
           And
           for
           the
           computation
           of
           these
           years
           before
           the
           event
           ,
           this
           in
           the
           Scripture-language
           is
           called
           by
           the
           name
           of
           Wisedome
           .
           Having
           then
           such
           a
           multitude
           of
           Examples
           out
           of
           the
           Old
           Testament
           ,
           where
           pious
           men
           have
           calculated
           the
           Prophetical
           years
           before
           the
           accomplishment
           ;
           why
           by
           the
           like
           reason
           may
           we
           not
           conceive
           ,
           That
           Iohn
           spake
           to
           the
           people
           in
           his
           own
           times
           ,
           to
           the
           ages
           immediately
           following
           ,
           but
           most
           specially
           to
           those
           who
           should
           live
           upon
           the
           borders
           of
           Antichrists
           rising
           ,
           that
           they
           should
           calculate
           666
           years
           to
           the
           beginning
           of
           his
           Kingdom
           ?
           The
           coming
           of
           Christ
           in
           the
           flesh
           ,
           and
           the
           glory
           that
           should
           follow
           ,
           was
           revealed
           to
           the
           ancient
           Prophets
           ,
           though
           under
           dark
           and
           figurative
           expressions
           .
           Now
           mark
           what
           the
           Apostle
           S.
           Peter
           speaketh
           of
           the
           practise
           of
           those
           wonderful
           men
           :
           
             Of
             which
             salvation
             the
             Prophets
             have
             inquired
             ,
             and
             searched
             diligently
             ;
             searching
             into
             what
             manner
             of
             time
             the
             Spirit
             did
             point
             to
             ,
             when
             he
             spake
             of
             the
             sufferings
             of
             Christ
             ,
             and
             the
             glory
             that
             should
             follow
             ,
          
           1
           Pet.
           1.
           10
           ,
           11
           ,
           12.
           
           The
           times
           of
           the
           ancient
           Church
           were
           divided
           into
           many
           periods
           .
           Now
           it
           was
           shewed
           them
           (
           though
           darkly
           )
           in
           what
           period
           of
           time
           Christ
           should
           come
           :
           And
           accordingly
           they
           who
           had
           his
           Spirit
           in
           them
           ,
           made
           no
           spare
           to
           search
           when
           that
           time
           should
           be
           .
           In
           like
           manner
           ,
           the
           times
           of
           the
           New
           Testament
           are
           divided
           into
           many
           regions
           or
           parts
           ;
           and
           it
           was
           revealed
           to
           the
           Apostles
           in
           mystical
           terms
           ,
           how
           Antichrist
           should
           come
           ,
           in
           what
           particular
           period
           of
           time
           he
           should
           come
           ,
           and
           what
           should
           be
           the
           signs
           of
           his
           coming
           .
           Now
           seeing
           these
           things
           are
           revealed
           in
           the
           Prophecies
           of
           the
           New
           Testament
           (
           as
           I
           think
           none
           can
           well
           deny
           )
           was
           it
           not
           the
           duty
           of
           men
           immediately
           
           after
           the
           Apostles
           time
           ,
           and
           so
           downward
           ,
           to
           calculate
           the
           Times
           .
           And
           for
           the
           actual
           rising
           of
           the
           Kingdom
           of
           Anti-Christ
           ,
           there
           is
           no
           one
           place
           doth
           speak
           more
           of
           his
           pedigree
           and
           genealogie
           ,
           then
           the
           Text
           we
           now
           are
           upon
           .
           If
           this
           be
           so
           ,
           it
           will
           quickly
           appear
           ,
           of
           what
           nature
           the
           Number
           666
           is
           ,
           seeing
           it
           is
           put
           in
           the
           close
           of
           the
           Chapter
           .
           There
           is
           then
           the
           greatest
           probability
           as
           can
           be
           supposed
           ,
           that
           this
           must
           be
           the
           Number
           of
           years
           to
           the
           first
           Institution
           and
           Foundation
           of
           that
           Spiritual
           Monarchy
           ,
           and
           the
           person
           who
           hath
           wisedome
           is
           to
           make
           up
           the
           account
           .
           Further
           ,
           if
           we
           take
           666
           for
           the
           Number
           of
           time
           ,
           and
           particularly
           for
           the
           Number
           of
           years
           ,
           this
           will
           agree
           with
           the
           word
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ▪
           for
           in
           the
           known
           and
           most
           familiar
           use
           ,
           that
           art
           which
           teacheth
           us
           to
           number
           Periods
           ,
           Cycles
           ,
           and
           greater
           Revolutions
           of
           years
           ,
           is
           called
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           the
           art
           of
           Computation
           .
           But
           if
           all
           this
           will
           not
           give
           satisfaction
           ,
           if
           any
           shall
           still
           say
           ,
           That
           this
           may
           be
           the
           sense
           ,
           yet
           it
           doth
           not
           prove
           that
           it
           must
           be
           so
           .
           For
           the
           further
           clearing
           of
           the
           matter
           ,
           we
           will
           go
           to
           the
           third
           Circumstance
           ,
           to
           the
           Method
           or
           the
           Rule
           which
           we
           must
           number
           by
           .
           And
           here
           we
           shall
           finde
           ,
           That
           we
           have
           not
           onely
           typical
           proof
           ,
           but
           true
           Apocalyptical
           and
           demonstrative
           grounds
           to
           build
           upon
           ,
           if
           we
           compare
           the
           words
           of
           Scripture
           with
           our
           own
           experience
           .
        
         
           Thirdly
           ,
           the
           method
           by
           which
           we
           are
           to
           account
           ,
           is
           ,
           by
           the
           Numbers
           of
           the
           four
           Metal-Kingdoms
           in
           Daniels
           Image
           .
           So
           then
           ,
           if
           we
           account
           from
           the
           beginning
           of
           the
           Roman
           as
           the
           fourth
           Metal-Kingdom
           ,
           there
           will
           be
           an
           exact
           line
           of
           666
           years
           ,
           to
           the
           setting
           up
           of
           the
           Name
           or
           Universal
           Headship
           of
           the
           Bishop
           of
           Rome
           under
           the
           Emperor
           Phocas
           .
           And
           here
           the
           best
           Expositors
           do
           set
           the
           rising
           of
           the
           two-horned
           Beast
           out
           of
           the
           earth
           .
           And
           this
           is
           the
           reason
           that
           666
           is
           called
           the
           Number
           of
           the
           Name
           of
           the
           Beast
           :
           and
           experience
           also
           sheweth
           ,
           That
           the
           account
           is
           to
           be
           made
           by
           the
           periods
           of
           time
           in
           Daniels
           Image
           .
           And
           so
           we
           have
           not
           onely
           probabili●…y
           ,
           but
           also
           apodeictical
           proof
           for
           the
           Exposition
           of
           the
           Number
           .
           But
           now
           to
           come
           to
           clear
           the
           point
           ,
           we
           will
           shew
           the
           Reasons
           why
           the
           account
           by
           Daniels
           method
           is
           called
           
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           the
           Number
           of
           a
           Man
           ,
           and
           that
           this
           is
           the
           meaning
           of
           the
           Spirit
           .
        
         
           First
           ,
           it
           may
           fitly
           be
           called
           a
           Number
           ,
           because
           (
           as
           Mr.
           Mede
           rightly
           saith
           )
           
             It
             is
             the
             Sacred
             Kalendar
             ,
             or
             Prophetical
             Chronologie
             ,
             appointed
             by
             God
             himself
             to
             measure
             the
             times
             .
          
           We
           may
           therefore
           fitly
           call
           it
           a
           Number
           ,
           or
           (
           as
           they
           speak
           in
           the
           Schools
           )
           
             numerus
             numerans
          
           ,
           because
           it
           comprehendeth
           the
           four
           Periods
           of
           time
           appointed
           by
           God
           himself
           ,
           to
           number
           the
           special
           occurrences
           of
           the
           Church
           .
        
         
           Secondly
           ,
           in
           a
           more
           special
           sense
           it
           is
           called
           the
           Number
           of
           a
           Man
           ,
           because
           it
           pleaseth
           the
           Holy
           Ghost
           by
           the
           four
           Regions
           ,
           Parts
           and
           Divisions
           of
           the
           Body
           of
           Man
           ,
           to
           number
           the
           four
           great
           Empires
           of
           the
           world
           ,
           and
           the
           four
           notable
           and
           remarkable
           Revolutions
           of
           Time.
           The
           Image
           in
           the
           parts
           and
           in
           the
           divisions
           of
           it
           ,
           doth
           not
           (
           as
           Interpreters
           well
           observe
           )
           naturally
           signifie
           these
           things
           ,
           but
           meerly
           by
           positive
           and
           divine
           Institution
           .
           It
           pleaseth
           the
           Lord
           by
           the
           four
           parts
           of
           the
           
             Humane
             Image
          
           ,
           to
           decypher
           so
           many
           periods
           of
           time
           .
           And
           this
           is
           the
           true
           reason
           ,
           wherefore
           the
           Spirit
           in
           the
           figure
           calls
           this
           form
           ,
           method
           ,
           and
           way
           of
           account
           ,
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           the
           Number
           of
           a
           Man
           ,
           because
           it
           is
           the
           Number
           of
           the
           Humane
           Image
           .
        
         
           Thirdly
           ,
           this
           way
           of
           expression
           doth
           agree
           with
           the
           manner
           of
           the
           Spirit
           in
           other
           places
           :
           As
           for
           example
           ;
           
             Thou
             art
             this
             Head
             of
             Gold
          
           ;
           that
           is
           ,
           Thou
           art
           signified
           by
           this
           Head
           of
           Gold.
           
             The
             seven
             kine
             are
             seven
             years
          
           ;
           that
           is
           ,
           the
           seven
           kine
           do
           represent
           seven
           years
           .
           And
           ,
           
             The
             seven
             Heads
             are
             seven
             Mountains
          
           ;
           that
           is
           ,
           the
           seven
           Heads
           do
           type
           and
           set
           forth
           seven
           Mountains
           .
           And
           so
           in
           the
           present
           case
           ,
           
             The
             Number
             of
             the
             Beast
             is
             the
             Number
             of
             a
             Man
             ,
          
           and
           that
           Number
           is
           666.
           
           The
           plain
           meaning
           whereof
           is
           this
           ,
           That
           666
           signifieth
           so
           many
           years
           specified
           and
           declared
           in
           the
           accounts
           of
           Daniels
           Image
           ,
           called
           ,
           The
           Number
           of
           a
           Man.
           It
           is
           so
           styled
           ,
           because
           the
           Number
           is
           such
           in
           that
           Calculation
           ;
           and
           it
           is
           so
           to
           be
           made
           out
           in
           that
           method
           and
           way
           of
           account
           .
        
         
           Fourthly
           ,
           this
           method
           of
           account
           will
           agree
           with
           the
           word
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           .
           Here
           will
           be
           an
           excellent
           subject
           for
           a
           man
           that
           
           hath
           dexterity
           in
           the
           Calculations
           of
           the
           Times
           ,
           to
           imploy
           the
           art
           and
           skill
           of
           a
           good
           Accomptant
           .
           For
           to
           what
           end
           did
           the
           Lord
           reveal
           this
           Prophetical
           Chronologie
           ,
           under
           the
           figure
           and
           similitude
           of
           the
           four
           Regions
           and
           Parts
           of
           the
           Body
           of
           Man
           ,
           but
           that
           it
           might
           be
           a
           certain
           and
           a
           standing
           rule
           to
           all
           Posterities
           ,
           to
           number
           those
           times
           and
           changes
           of
           times
           ,
           that
           should
           befall
           in
           and
           about
           the
           affairs
           of
           the
           Church
           ?
        
         
           Fifthly
           ,
           the
           Number
           of
           time
           by
           the
           account
           of
           Daniels
           Image
           ,
           is
           the
           most
           fit
           to
           decypher
           the
           rising
           of
           a
           Tyrannical
           State
           ,
           such
           as
           the
           Kingdome
           of
           the
           Beast
           is
           ,
           whereof
           we
           speak
           .
           Now
           what
           is
           the
           Image
           of
           Daniel
           ?
           It
           is
           no
           other
           but
           a
           Systeme
           or
           body
           of
           the
           four
           great
           persecuting
           Empires
           ,
           which
           should
           rise
           up
           one
           after
           another
           in
           the
           same
           succession
           ,
           notably
           to
           afflict
           the
           Church
           of
           God.
           Now
           fith
           the
           Beast
           with
           two
           Horns
           in
           the
           Revelation
           ,
           is
           such
           a
           Dominion
           or
           State
           that
           shall
           notably
           afflict
           the
           Saints
           in
           the
           latter
           days
           ;
           where
           can
           it
           be
           more
           properly
           or
           fitly
           placed
           ,
           then
           in
           the
           Image
           of
           Tyrannical
           Empires
           ?
           All
           these
           are
           of
           the
           same
           lineage
           and
           kindred
           .
           And
           therefore
           seeing
           it
           is
           the
           plot
           of
           the
           Spirit
           to
           delineate
           these
           four
           Successions
           by
           so
           many
           Parts
           of
           the
           Body
           of
           Man
           ,
           we
           may
           well
           conclude
           ,
           That
           this
           way
           of
           Computation
           is
           the
           Number
           of
           a
           Man
           meant
           in
           the
           Text
           ,
           seeing
           it
           doth
           so
           notably
           agree
           with
           the
           event
           .
        
         
           Sixthly
           ,
           the
           Number
           of
           Time
           by
           the
           account
           of
           Daniels
           Image
           ,
           in
           the
           days
           of
           Iohn
           ,
           and
           in
           the
           times
           immediately
           following
           ,
           was
           most
           apt
           to
           finde
           out
           the
           events
           that
           should
           befal
           the
           Church
           .
           For
           this
           is
           to
           be
           observed
           ,
           That
           though
           the
           Beast
           ,
           his
           Name
           ,
           Mark
           ,
           and
           Image
           were
           not
           extant
           in
           the
           times
           of
           Iohn
           ,
           yet
           the
           number
           by
           and
           through
           which
           these
           were
           to
           be
           computed
           ,
           must
           then
           be
           not
           onely
           extant
           ,
           but
           it
           must
           be
           also
           of
           remarkable
           use
           .
           As
           for
           example
           :
           The
           Anti-Christian
           Church
           had
           no
           beeing
           in
           the
           days
           of
           Iohn
           ,
           nor
           in
           the
           ages
           immediately
           following
           ;
           yet
           nevertheless
           the
           Spirit
           in
           the
           Revelation
           doth
           decypher
           the
           place
           of
           this
           Church
           by
           such
           a
           Character
           ,
           as
           was
           famously
           known
           in
           the
           days
           of
           
             Iohn
             .
             The
             seven
             Heads
             are
             seven
             Mountains
             ,
             where
             the
             woman
             sitteth
             .
          
           Now
           this
           did
           more
           properly
           appertain
           to
           those
           first
           times
           in
           
           which
           S.
           Iohn
           lived
           ,
           That
           Rome
           was
           seated
           upon
           seven
           Mountains
           :
           For
           the
           people
           then
           living
           ,
           though
           they
           should
           never
           see
           the
           Antichristian
           times
           ,
           yet
           Iohn
           did
           foreshew
           the
           place
           where
           that
           Church
           should
           have
           her
           beeing
           in
           the
           time
           appointed
           and
           limited
           by
           the
           Lord.
           In
           like
           manner
           ,
           though
           the
           Name
           ,
           Image
           ,
           and
           Mark
           of
           the
           Name
           ,
           had
           none
           of
           them
           existence
           in
           the
           days
           of
           Iohn
           ;
           yet
           the
           Number
           by
           which
           all
           these
           must
           be
           accounted
           ,
           must
           needs
           then
           be
           in
           some
           tolerable
           use
           .
           For
           how
           shall
           a
           man
           that
           hath
           wisdome
           ,
           by
           the
           Number
           finde
           out
           the
           Name
           ,
           if
           the
           Number
           were
           no
           way
           discoverable
           in
           those
           times
           ?
           Mr.
           Brightman
           upon
           the
           place
           ,
           doth
           fully
           agree
           with
           us
           :
           His
           words
           are
           these
           :
           
             Though
             the
             Mark
             and
             the
             Name
             were
             not
             extant
             ,
             the
             Beast
             being
             not
             as
             yet
             ;
             Nevertheless
             ,
             the
             Number
             of
             the
             Name
             might
             be
             manifest
             to
             that
             age
             wherein
          
           John
           
             lived
             ;
             and
             not
             onely
             to
             himself
             by
             Revelation
             ,
             but
             to
             some
             others
             also
             by
             search
             .
             For
             how
             could
             it
             be
             possible
             ,
             that
             a
             Government
             to
             come
             might
             be
             discoverable
             by
             a
             Number
             ,
             and
             that
             Number
             not
             extant
             ?
             How
             great
             a
             torment
             would
             it
             be
             for
             a
             man
             to
             assay
             to
             do
             that
             thing
             that
             were
             altogether
             impossible
             ?
          
           From
           which
           words
           of
           his
           ,
           I
           do
           conclude
           ,
           That
           the
           Number
           which
           must
           discover
           the
           Name
           of
           the
           Beast
           ,
           must
           be
           some
           way
           extant
           in
           the
           days
           of
           Iohn
           .
           If
           this
           be
           so
           ,
           what
           Number
           was
           then
           more
           familiarly
           known
           ,
           then
           the
           Number
           by
           the
           four
           divisions
           and
           parts
           of
           the
           Body
           of
           Man
           ,
           by
           and
           through
           which
           Daniel
           doth
           number
           the
           four
           persecuting
           Empires
           of
           the
           world
           ?
           Therefore
           we
           may
           well
           conclude
           ,
           That
           this
           Prophetical
           Chronologie
           was
           the
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           the
           Number
           of
           a
           Man
           meant
           in
           the
           Text.
           
        
         
           Object
           .
           You
           will
           say
           ,
           That
           the
           four
           great
           Empires
           in
           Daniels
           Image
           ,
           were
           all
           destroyed
           before
           the
           coming
           of
           Christ
           in
           the
           flesh
           ,
           and
           therefore
           no
           way
           sutable
           or
           apt
           to
           number
           the
           times
           of
           the
           new
           Prophecy
           .
        
         
           Sol.
           By
           the
           same
           reason
           you
           may
           say
           ,
           That
           five
           forms
           of
           Government
           were
           fallen
           in
           the
           City
           of
           Rome
           ;
           Kings
           ,
           Consuls
           ,
           Dictators
           ,
           Decemvirs
           ,
           Tribunes
           :
           Therefore
           these
           several
           forms
           of
           account
           are
           not
           fit
           to
           decypher
           the
           Beast
           in
           the
           last
           and
           Antichristian
           edition
           of
           Roman
           Government
           .
           And
           this
           
           were
           plainly
           to
           〈◊〉
           against
           the
           scope
           of
           the
           Text
           ,
           Rev.
           17.
           
           But
           in
           the
           present
           case
           we
           answer
           ,
           It
           is
           true
           ,
           that
           the
           Babylonian
           ,
           the
           Mede-Persian
           ,
           and
           the
           Graecian
           Empires
           were
           fully
           destroyed
           before
           the
           coming
           of
           Christ
           ;
           but
           this
           is
           not
           true
           of
           the
           Roman
           ,
           for
           that
           stood
           in
           fulness
           of
           power
           ,
           when
           Iohn
           wrote
           the
           Revelation
           .
           If
           therefore
           the
           people
           living
           in
           his
           times
           ,
           had
           made
           their
           account
           from
           the
           beginning
           of
           the
           Roman
           (
           as
           the
           onely
           remaining
           Empire
           of
           the
           four
           )
           by
           a
           line
           of
           666
           years
           ,
           they
           would
           have
           come
           to
           that
           particular
           instant
           where
           the
           Name
           and
           Universal
           Headship
           of
           the
           Beast
           should
           begin
           .
           And
           so
           by
           the
           Number
           of
           a
           Man
           ,
           by
           that
           Prophetical
           Chronologie
           they
           might
           have
           discovered
           the
           times
           of
           the
           rising
           of
           the
           second
           Beast
           
             a
             priori
          
           .
           Now
           whereas
           many
           learned
           men
           in
           these
           times
           are
           of
           opinion
           ,
           That
           all
           the
           old
           Prophets
           do
           end
           at
           Christ
           ,
           and
           that
           none
           of
           their
           Predictions
           are
           repeated
           in
           the
           new
           Prophecy
           :
           I
           yield
           ,
           that
           this
           is
           true
           in
           part
           ,
           but
           it
           is
           not
           universally
           true
           ;
           for
           there
           are
           some
           things
           declared
           in
           the
           old
           Prophets
           ,
           which
           are
           more
           distinctly
           and
           fully
           set
           down
           in
           the
           
             Revelation
             .
             Beza
          
           in
           his
           Preface
           speaketh
           to
           excellent
           purpose
           :
           
             Spiritum
             Sanctum
             in
             hunc
             pretiosum
             librum
             congerere
             volu●…sse
             quae
             ex
             superiorum
             Prophetarum
             praedictionibus
             implenda
             supererant
             ,
             &
             nonnulla
             addidisse
             quae
             nos
             interesse
             cognovit
             .
          
           And
           this
           is
           true
           in
           the
           four
           Metal-Kingdoms
           in
           Daniels
           Image
           .
           For
           what
           is
           more
           briefly
           and
           more
           darkly
           delivered
           in
           that
           Prophecy
           ,
           concerning
           the
           Roman
           as
           the
           fourth
           Metal-Kingdom
           ,
           is
           more
           fully
           and
           clearly
           revealed
           by
           the
           Spirit
           in
           the
           Revelation
           .
           And
           therefore
           had
           the
           people
           that
           lived
           in
           the
           days
           of
           Iohn
           ,
           computed
           the
           times
           from
           the
           beginning
           of
           the
           Roman
           Kingdom
           (
           for
           this
           was
           the
           onely
           surviving
           and
           remaining
           Kingdom
           of
           the
           four
           )
           by
           a
           line
           of
           666
           years
           ,
           they
           had
           been
           carried
           upon
           the
           year
           of
           the
           Universal
           Headship
           of
           the
           Bishop
           of
           Rome
           ,
           upon
           that
           time
           when
           the
           Name
           ,
           and
           the
           Mark
           of
           the
           Name
           of
           the
           Beast
           did
           begin
           .
        
         
           Lastly
           ,
           the
           Number
           of
           a
           Man
           ,
           in
           the
           Text
           ,
           must
           be
           so
           expounded
           ,
           that
           it
           may
           also
           be
           the
           Number
           of
           the
           Beast
           :
           for
           though
           ordinarily
           a
           Man
           hath
           nothing
           to
           do
           with
           a
           Beast
           ,
           there
           being
           so
           great
           a
           difference
           in
           their
           kindes
           ;
           yet
           the
           words
           
           of
           the
           Text
           are
           plain
           ,
           
             Let
             him
             that
             hath
             wisdome
             ,
             count
          
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           
             the
             Number
             of
             the
             Beast
          
           ,
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           
             ●…r
             it
             is
             the
             Number
             of
             a
             Man.
          
           In
           this
           sense
           of
           the
           Text
           th●…n
           ,
           the
           Number
           of
           the
           Beast
           and
           the
           Number
           of
           a
           Man
           be
           all
           one
           ,
           and
           here
           is
           no
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           though
           it
           may
           〈◊〉
           ●…
           to
           be
           .
           For
           a●…
           Daniel
           describeth
           the
           four
           great
           Em●…es
           by
           so
           many
           parts
           of
           the
           Body
           of
           Man
           ,
           Chap.
           2.
           
           So
           he
           ●…escribeth
           the
           same
           Empires
           under
           the
           type
           and
           similitude
           of
           ●…our
           Beasts
           ,
           Chap.
           7.
           
           In
           the
           present
           case
           then
           ,
           the
           Number
           of
           the
           Beast
           and
           the
           Number
           of
           a
           Man
           are
           all
           one
           .
           And
           that
           which
           may
           make
           for
           the
           more
           abundant
           confirmation
           of
           the
           truth
           ,
           all
           Interpreters
           (
           some
           few
           excepted
           )
           do
           agree
           ,
           That
           the
           Little
           Horn
           in
           the
           7
           of
           Daniel
           ,
           is
           the
           Emblem
           and
           Type
           of
           the
           Papacy
           ,
           and
           that
           it
           is
           all
           one
           with
           the
           two-horned
           Beast
           mentioned
           in
           the
           Revelation
           .
           And
           therefore
           when
           the
           Spirit
           saith
           ,
           
             Let
             him
             that
             hath
             wisdome
             ,
             count
             the
             Number
             of
             the
             Beast
             ,
             for
             it
             is
          
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           
             the
             Number
             of
             a
             Man
          
           ;
           he
           doth
           but
           refer
           us
           to
           that
           ancient
           Prophetical
           way
           of
           account
           ,
           by
           the
           members
           and
           parts
           of
           the
           Body
           of
           a
           Man
           in
           Daniels
           Image
           .
           Therefore
           seeing
           all
           Circumstances
           do
           agree
           ,
           and
           we
           finde
           it
           true
           in
           the
           event
           ,
           we
           may
           conclude
           ,
           that
           the
           calculation
           by
           the
           times
           of
           Daniels
           Image
           ,
           is
           the
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           the
           Number
           of
           a
           Man
           meant
           in
           the
           Text.
           
        
         
           But
           that
           this
           may
           better
           take
           with
           the
           Reader
           ,
           we
           will
           make
           a
           brief
           Narrative
           in
           what
           order
           ,
           and
           by
           what
           degrees
           we
           came
           to
           be
           of
           this
           judgement
           .
           It
           may
           be
           when
           he
           shall
           finde
           the
           process
           of
           this
           discovery
           to
           be
           upon
           probative
           grounds
           ,
           this
           will
           give
           him
           the
           fuller
           and
           the
           surer
           satisfaction
           .
        
         
           The
           first
           thing
           I
           builded
           upon
           ,
           was
           ,
           The
           subject
           of
           the
           Number
           .
           For
           I
           found
           by
           the
           whole
           scope
           of
           the
           Prophecy
           ,
           (
           as
           I
           have
           formerly
           proved
           )
           that
           the
           name
           of
           the
           beast
           is
           no
           other
           ,
           but
           his
           Universal
           Headship
           and
           Power
           .
           And
           therefore
           for
           the
           discovery
           of
           the
           Number
           ,
           the
           true
           work
           was
           to
           finde
           out
           the
           Number
           of
           the
           Universal
           Headship
           :
           and
           here
           was
           the
           first
           degree
           of
           discovery
           .
           Therefore
           they
           who
           have
           spent
           their
           time
           about
           the
           word
           Lateinos
           ,
           and
           the
           numeral
           Letters
           
           of
           that
           or
           such
           like
           Grammatical
           names
           ,
           have
           but
           wasted
           their
           time
           ,
           and
           have
           erred
           in
           the
           very
           beginning
           of
           the
           work
           .
           Therefore
           I
           did
           conclude
           ,
           That
           the
           Name
           was
           the
           Universal
           Headship
           ,
           and
           that
           the
           ●…umber
           was
           the
           Number
           of
           the
           Unini●…ersal
           Headship
           ,
           and
           no
           other
           .
           And
           this
           was
           the
           first
           step
           .
        
         
           Secondly
           ,
           for
           the
           discovery
           of
           the
           Number
           ,
           I
           did
           observe
           ,
           That
           in
           every
           Mathematica
           Proposition
           that
           is
           dubious
           ,
           three
           things
           are
           specially
           observable
           :
           First
           ,
           the
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           where
           both
           the
           subject
           and
           the
           predicate
           are
           propounded
           ;
           and
           so
           here
           the
           datum
           or
           the
           subject
           ,
           is
           the
           Name
           or
           Universal
           Headship
           of
           the
           Beast
           :
           The
           quaesitum
           ,
           or
           the
           praed●…cate
           ,
           is
           666.
           
           The
           second
           is
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           the
           Exposition
           of
           the
           Antecedent
           that
           is
           given
           ,
           or
           of
           the
           subject
           of
           the
           Demonstration
           :
           and
           so
           ,
           as
           I
           have
           formerly
           spoken
           ,
           the
           Name
           of
           the
           B●…ast
           I
           found
           to
           be
           no
           other
           ,
           then
           his
           Universal
           Power
           and
           Headship
           .
        
         
           The
           third
           is
           ,
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           the
           definition
           and
           explanation
           of
           the
           Predicate
           or
           of
           the
           Consequent
           .
           And
           so
           the
           great
           question
           was
           to
           me
           ,
           how
           the
           Name
           or
           Universal
           Headship
           of
           the
           Beast
           should
           be
           666
           ?
        
         
           Here
           I
           mused
           ,
           and
           often
           pondered
           in
           my
           minde
           what
           is
           the
           manner
           and
           use
           of
           the
           Spirit
           in
           the
           Scriptures
           ,
           when
           he
           speaketh
           of
           the
           ri●…ng
           of
           Governments
           ,
           and
           their
           Calculations
           by
           Number
           ,
           to
           discover
           their
           beginning
           .
           And
           here
           I
           found
           (
           as
           I
           believe
           every
           man
           shall
           do
           the
           like
           ,
           who
           will
           give
           himself
           to
           observation
           )
           that
           the
           Prophetical
           Scriptures
           do
           very
           often
           reckon
           Governments
           ,
           either
           by
           the
           Number
           of
           years
           to
           the
           time
           of
           their
           rising
           ,
           or
           by
           the
           Number
           of
           years
           how
           long
           they
           shall
           continue
           .
           Now
           I
           was
           sure
           ,
           that
           666
           could
           not
           be
           the
           time
           of
           the
           continuance
           of
           the
           Antichristian
           Kingdom
           ,
           seeing
           in
           the
           whole
           body
           of
           the
           Prophecy
           ,
           it
           is
           largely
           shewed
           ,
           That
           the
           Kingdom
           of
           the
           Beast
           must
           continue
           1260
           Prophetical
           days
           ,
           or
           years
           ;
           and
           that
           this
           time
           must
           commence
           from
           the
           rising
           of
           the
           ten-horned
           Beast
           out
           of
           the
           Sea
           ,
           or
           the
           ten
           Kings
           out
           of
           the
           ruines
           of
           the
           Empire
           .
           Therefore
           Mr.
           Archer
           in
           his
           book
           of
           the
           Personal
           Reign
           ,
           is
           a
           very
           fabulous
           Writer
           in
           this
           ,
           as
           in
           many
           other
           particulars
           ,
           when
           he
           will
           
           needs
           have
           666
           to
           be
           the
           time
           of
           the
           continuance
           of
           the
           Beasts
           Kingdome
           .
           All
           the
           circumstances
           of
           the
           Text
           plainly
           laid
           together
           ,
           do
           decypher
           this
           Kingdome
           
             à
             priori
          
           ;
           and
           therefore
           the
           Number
           must
           refer
           to
           the
           time
           of
           the
           beginning
           ,
           or
           the
           standing
           up
           of
           the
           Name
           or
           Headship
           .
        
         
           But
           then
           the
           great
           〈◊〉
           was
           ,
           〈◊〉
           what
           time
           I
           should
           〈◊〉
           to
           Number
           ?
           In
           this
           ca●…e
           I
           was
           helped
           by
           the
           practise
           of
           Chronologers
           .
           For
           the●…
           ,
           when
           they
           have
           a
           Prophetical
           Number
           ,
           and
           do
           not
           know
           ●…rom
           what
           beginning
           to
           compute
           i●…
           ,
           a●…k
           how
           long
           it
           continueth
           ,
           and
           where
           it
           maketh
           an
           eno
           ?
           And
           if
           they
           be
           certain
           of
           these
           two
           ,
           they
           will
           finde
           out
           the
           third
           ▪
           where
           it
           ought
           to
           begin
           .
           It
           is
           a
           sure
           rule
           in
           this
           ,
           as
           in
           other
           kindes
           of
           learning
           ,
           
             By
             two
             known
             things
             ,
             you
             may
             come
             to
             discover
             a
             third
             unknown
             .
          
           And
           sometimes
           it
           so
           cometh
           to
           pass
           ,
           that
           some
           diligence
           must
           be
           used
           ,
           before
           we
           can
           come
           to
           the
           knowledge
           of
           the
           two
           ,
           by
           and
           through
           which
           we
           may
           prove
           the
           third
           .
           As
           for
           example
           ,
           We
           reade
           ,
           That
           the
           Prophet
           Ezekiel
           was
           to
           lye
           upon
           his
           left
           side
           390
           days
           ,
           which
           signifie
           so
           many
           years
           of
           the
           patience
           of
           God
           in
           bearing
           the
           iniquity
           of
           the
           house
           of
           Israel
           .
           Again
           ,
           he
           was
           to
           turn
           ,
           and
           to
           lye
           upon
           his
           right
           side
           40
           days
           ;
           which
           signifie
           so
           many
           years
           ,
           of
           the
           patience
           of
           God
           in
           bearing
           the
           iniquity
           of
           the
           house
           of
           
             Iudah
             ,
             Ezek.
          
           4.
           4
           ,
           5.
           
           Now
           for
           the
           application
           of
           the
           times
           ,
           the
           great
           Que●…ion
           is
           ,
           Where
           the
           390
           years
           begin
           ,
           and
           where
           they
           make
           an
           end
           ,
           and
           how
           long
           they
           do
           continue
           .
           For
           the
           continuation
           ,
           there
           is
           no
           doubt
           to
           be
           made
           ;
           and
           for
           the
           time
           of
           the
           ending
           ,
           this
           must
           be
           at
           the
           destruction
           of
           Ierusalem
           by
           the
           Chaldaeans
           :
           For
           the
           time
           of
           the
           end
           ,
           though
           it
           is
           not
           set
           down
           in
           express
           terms
           ,
           yet
           it
           may
           be
           collected
           from
           the
           whole
           scope
           of
           the
           Text.
           For
           five
           years
           before
           the
           destruction
           of
           
             Ierusalem
             ,
             Ezekiel
          
           was
           to
           take
           a
           Tile
           ,
           and
           pourtray
           upon
           it
           the
           city
           Ierusalem
           ,
           and
           la●…
           s●…ge
           against
           it
           ,
           &
           build
           a
           fort
           against
           it
           .
           So
           then
           ,
           the
           scope
           of
           the
           whole
           Vision
           is
           to
           shew
           ,
           That
           after
           the
           390
           years
           of
           the
           patience
           of
           God
           are
           run
           out
           ,
           the
           time
           should
           come
           ,
           that
           the
           Chaldaeans
           should
           destroy
           both
           City
           and
           Temple
           .
           In
           this
           Ezekiel
           was
           a
           sign
           to
           the
           home
           of
           Israel
           ,
           to
           foretel
           the
           destruction
           of
           the
           City
           and
           
           Temple
           ,
           five
           years
           before
           it
           came
           to
           pass
           ,
           Ezek.
           1.
           2.
           
           Upon
           these
           grounds
           Chronologers
           do
           reason
           in
           this
           manner
           :
           If
           the
           390
           years
           do
           end
           at
           the
           destruction
           of
           Ierusalem
           by
           the
           Chaldaeans
           ,
           they
           must
           necessarily
           begin
           at
           the
           Apostacy
           of
           Ieroboam
           .
           For
           ,
           if
           you
           take
           the
           right
           vein
           of
           Chronologie
           in
           the
           Book
           of
           the
           Kings
           ,
           and
           number
           the
           times
           interchangably
           ,
           as
           each
           King
           of
           Iudah
           ,
           and
           each
           King
           of
           Israel
           began
           to
           reign
           ,
           and
           to
           carry
           on
           the
           whole
           series
           and
           order
           of
           years
           ,
           you
           shall
           find
           by
           induction
           of
           singulars
           ,
           That
           there
           will
           be
           an
           exact
           line
           of
           390
           years
           from
           the
           defection
           of
           Ieroboam
           ,
           to
           the
           destruction
           of
           Ierusalem
           aforesaid
           .
           He
           that
           desires
           the
           particular
           account
           of
           the
           years
           ,
           and
           how
           it
           is
           exactly
           computed
           ,
           let
           him
           go
           to
           the
           Isagoge
           of
           Calvisius
           .
           And
           of
           the
           certainty
           of
           the
           account
           ,
           the
           Chronologer
           thus
           speaketh
           ,
           
             Hunc
             igitur
             numerum
             annorum
          
           390
           
             ex
             annotatione
             Historiarum
             hujus
             temporis
             ab
             initio
             Ieroboami
             usque
             ad
             excidium
             Hierosolymae
             nos
             colligemus
             .
             It
             a
             quidem
             ,
             ne
             conjecturas
             nos
             Lectori
             ob●…rudamus
             ,
             neque
             etiam
             sacrae
             Scripturae
             vim
             faciamus
             .
             Isag.
             Cap.
          
           40.
           
           And
           in
           very
           deed
           ,
           his
           performance
           is
           answerable
           to
           the
           Promise
           :
           for
           he
           doth
           exactly
           prove
           by
           induction
           of
           singulars
           ,
           and
           that
           from
           the
           words
           of
           Scripture
           ,
           That
           there
           are
           390
           years
           from
           the
           Apostacy
           of
           Ieroboam
           to
           the
           destruction
           of
           Ierusalem
           .
        
         
           But
           now
           for
           the
           40
           years
           of
           the
           iniquity
           of
           the
           house
           of
           Iudah
           ,
           this
           matter
           is
           somewhat
           more
           dark
           :
           But
           yet
           nevertheless
           Chronologers
           do
           reason
           in
           this
           wise
           :
           If
           40
           years
           be
           the
           time
           of
           the
           patience
           of
           God
           in
           bearing
           the
           iniquities
           of
           the
           house
           of
           Iudah
           ,
           and
           those
           years
           must
           run
           compleat
           at
           the
           destruction
           of
           Ierusalem
           by
           the
           Chaldees
           ;
           then
           it
           will
           follow
           ,
           according
           to
           the
           Scripture-Chronologie
           ,
           and
           the
           series
           of
           the
           times
           ,
           that
           they
           must
           necessarily
           commence
           from
           the
           13
           year
           of
           Iosiah
           .
           Now
           if
           a
           question
           be
           made
           ,
           Why
           these
           years
           should
           begin
           from
           the
           13
           of
           Iosiah
           ,
           who
           was
           a
           reformer
           of
           the
           Church
           ?
           Though
           he
           was
           ,
           these
           times
           are
           to
           begin
           there
           ,
           because
           the
           Lord
           did
           then
           begin
           to
           strive
           with
           that
           people
           ,
           to
           bring
           them
           to
           Repentance
           by
           the
           Ministery
           of
           Ieremy
           .
           These
           are
           the
           words
           of
           the
           Text
           :
           
             From
             the
             thirteenth
             year
             of
             Iosiah
             the
             son
             of
             Ammon
             King
             of
             Iudah
             ,
             even
             unto
             this
             day
             (
             that
             is
             ,
          
           
           
             the
             three
             and
             twentieth
             year
             )
             the
             word
             of
             the
             Lord
             hath
             come
             unto
             me
             ,
             and
             I
             have
             spoken
             unto
             you
             ,
             rising
             early
             and
             speaking
             ,
             but
             ye
             have
             not
             hearkned
             .
             And
             the
             Lord
             hath
             sent
             unto
             you
             all
             his
             servants
             the
             Prophets
             ,
             rising
             early
             and
             sending
             them
             ,
             but
             ye
             have
             not
             hearkened
             ,
             nor
             inclined
             your
             ear
             to
             hear
             ,
          
           Jer.
           25.
           3
           ,
           4.
           
           From
           these
           words
           it
           is
           plain
           ,
           That
           the
           40
           years
           patience
           of
           God
           in
           bearing
           the
           iniquitie
           of
           the
           house
           of
           Iudah
           ,
           did
           begin
           from
           the
           Ministery
           of
           Ieremy
           :
           and
           when
           these
           should
           run
           compleat
           ,
           then
           the
           Prophet
           ●…zekiel
           doth
           signifie
           ,
           That
           there
           shall
           be
           the
           destruction
           of
           Ierusalem
           .
           From
           this
           ,
           and
           from
           some
           such
           like
           passages
           ,
           I
           was
           moved
           to
           take
           the
           like
           course
           .
           I
           argued
           in
           this
           manner
           :
           If
           666
           be
           such
           a
           Number
           of
           years
           ,
           and
           if
           this
           period
           of
           time
           also
           must
           end
           at
           the
           setting
           up
           of
           the
           Universal
           Headship
           under
           the
           Emperor
           Phocas
           ,
           by
           necessary
           consequence
           I
           did
           conclude
           ,
           That
           this
           time
           must
           begin
           60
           years
           before
           the
           birth
           of
           the
           Lord.
           Consulting
           with
           Chronologers
           ,
           I
           found
           ,
           that
           this
           was
           much
           about
           that
           time
           when
           Cicero
           and
           Antonius
           were
           Consuls
           at
           Rome
           .
           But
           here
           to
           me
           was
           the
           great
           difficulty
           ,
           Why
           I
           should
           begin
           the
           times
           from
           the
           Consulships
           aforesaid
           ,
           there
           being
           neither
           ground
           in
           History
           nor
           Chronologie
           for
           such
           a
           way
           of
           account
           .
           And
           further
           ,
           to
           increase
           the
           difficulty
           ,
           in
           my
           first
           thoughts
           of
           the
           matter
           ,
           I
           was
           perswaded
           that
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           was
           no
           other
           but
           a
           Number
           commonly
           and
           frequently
           used
           amongst
           men
           .
           Besides
           the
           judgement
           of
           Interpreters
           ,
           I
           did
           ground
           much
           upon
           that
           Scripture
           where
           the
           Angel
           measured
           the
           wall
           of
           the
           
             New
             Ierusalem
          
           144
           Cubits
           ,
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           according
           to
           the
           measure
           of
           a
           man
           ,
           Chap.
           21.
           v.
           17.
           
           Here
           I
           thought
           that
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           the
           Number
           of
           a
           Man
           ,
           in
           discrete
           quantity
           ,
           was
           the
           same
           with
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           in
           quantity
           continued
           .
           Now
           it
           is
           clear
           ,
           that
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           the
           measure
           of
           a
           Man
           ,
           is
           no
           other
           but
           that
           by
           and
           through
           which
           men
           do
           familiarly
           Number
           Furlongs
           withall
           .
           I
           could
           not
           say
           this
           touching
           the
           Consulship
           of
           Cicero
           and
           Antonius
           .
           The
           usual
           Computation
           of
           the
           times
           in
           that
           age
           ,
           was
           from
           the
           building
           of
           the
           City
           of
           Rome
           ,
           from
           the
           beginning
           of
           
             Iulius
             Caesar
          
           ,
           from
           the
           
             Spanish
             Aera
          
           ,
           from
           the
           Battel
           of
           Actium
           ;
           and
           not
           from
           the
           time
           of
           the
           two
           Consuls
           aforesaid
           ,
           
           With
           these
           difficulties
           I
           was
           intangled
           ,
           in
           my
           first
           thoughts
           upon
           this
           argument
           .
           But
           there
           was
           one
           thing
           that
           chiefly
           kept
           me
           on
           in
           this
           way
           of
           account
           :
           I
           found
           in
           our
           Modern
           Chronologers
           ,
           that
           the
           year
           in
           which
           Cicero
           and
           Antonius
           were
           Consuls
           ,
           the
           Jewish
           Church
           came
           first
           under
           the
           Dominion
           of
           the
           State
           of
           Rome
           .
           For
           if
           you
           look
           before
           this
           time
           ,
           you
           shall
           finde
           ,
           That
           the
           same
           people
           of
           the
           Jews
           that
           were
           formerly
           under
           the
           Dominion
           of
           the
           people
           of
           
             Babel
             ,
             Persia
          
           and
           Greece
           ,
           in
           this
           year
           they
           came
           first
           of
           all
           under
           the
           Dominion
           of
           the
           people
           of
           Rome
           .
           Further
           ,
           if
           you
           look
           to
           the
           times
           following
           ,
           you
           shall
           finde
           everywhere
           ,
           that
           the
           Church
           was
           under
           the
           Tyranny
           of
           the
           Romans
           .
           The
           whole
           order
           of
           the
           Book
           of
           the
           Revelation
           ,
           is
           concerning
           the
           times
           of
           the
           Roman
           Tyranny
           ,
           and
           of
           the
           susterings
           of
           the
           Church
           under
           that
           people
           .
           Now
           if
           you
           ask
           ,
           at
           what
           instant
           of
           time
           the
           Church
           came
           under
           the
           Roman
           obedience
           ,
           it
           was
           in
           that
           year
           when
           Antonius
           and
           Cicero
           were
           Consuls
           ,
           or
           much
           thereabouts
           .
           Which
           way
           soever
           therefore
           ye
           go
           ,
           the
           forementioned
           year
           must
           be
           famous
           for
           the
           accounts
           of
           the
           Church
           .
           Here
           also
           upon
           further
           search
           I
           found
           ,
           that
           the
           Roman
           did
           begin
           as
           the
           fourth
           Metal-Kingdom
           ,
           as
           I
           have
           formerly
           proved
           .
           So
           far
           I
           proceeded
           in
           the
           discovery
           :
           Onely
           I
           could
           not
           solve
           the
           Point
           ,
           how
           this
           could
           be
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           the
           Number
           that
           men
           did
           familiarly
           count
           withall
           .
           When
           I
           proceeded
           this
           way
           ,
           I
           found
           ,
           that
           one
           thing
           would
           not
           hang
           with
           another
           :
           Therefore
           being
           cast
           upon
           a
           more
           deep
           consideration
           of
           the
           matter
           ,
           I
           did
           finally
           pitch
           upon
           this
           sense
           .
           The
           account
           of
           the
           times
           in
           Daniels
           Image
           ,
           is
           called
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           the
           Number
           of
           a
           Man
           ;
           not
           because
           men
           do
           familiarly
           use
           this
           way
           of
           Calculation
           ,
           but
           because
           it
           pleased
           the
           Lord
           to
           Number
           the
           times
           of
           the
           Church
           by
           so
           many
           Regions
           and
           Parts
           of
           the
           Body
           of
           Man
           in
           the
           Humane
           Image
           .
           And
           thus
           ,
           Reader
           ,
           thou
           hast
           a
           true
           Narrative
           by
           what
           degrees
           I
           came
           to
           rest
           in
           this
           Interpretation
           :
           And
           truly
           ,
           when
           we
           look
           to
           the
           whole
           Coherence
           of
           the
           Text
           ,
           the
           very
           words
           will
           excellently
           agree
           with
           such
           a
           sense
           .
           For
           ,
           when
           one
           that
           hath
           wisdome
           ,
           is
           exhorted
           to
           calculate
           the
           Number
           of
           the
           Beast
           ,
           may
           be
           not
           
           be
           apt
           to
           say
           ,
           What
           Rule
           must
           I
           observe
           in
           the
           Calculation
           ?
           Or
           who
           shall
           assure
           me
           ,
           whether
           666
           be
           the
           Number
           of
           Time
           ,
           the
           Number
           of
           Place
           ,
           the
           Number
           of
           Degrees
           ,
           the
           Number
           of
           Longitude
           ,
           or
           the
           Number
           of
           Latitude
           ,
           or
           what
           is
           it
           the
           Number
           of
           ?
           But
           if
           you
           will
           say
           to
           him
           ,
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           it
           is
           the
           Number
           of
           Time
           in
           Daniels
           Humane
           Image
           ,
           then
           you
           do
           ●…ive
           him
           a
           certain
           ,
           〈◊〉
           ,
           and
           determinate
           Rule
           to
           Number
           by
           :
           You
           shew
           him
           where
           he
           must
           begin
           ,
           and
           where
           he
           must
           end
           ;
           and
           how
           all
           being
           laid
           together
           ,
           will
           discover
           the
           Name
           or
           the
           Universal
           Headship
           of
           the
           Beast
           .
           On
           the
           contrary
           ,
           they
           who
           take
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           for
           such
           a
           number
           as
           is
           ordinarily
           and
           〈◊〉
           used
           amongst
           men
           ,
           the
           words
           may
           seem
           to
           run
           fair
           in
           this
           sense
           ,
           and
           to
           go
           smoothly
           with
           the
           Context
           .
           But
           yet
           nevertheless
           ,
           they
           who
           are
           of
           this
           judgement
           ,
           I
           do
           desire
           to
           propound
           these
           things
           to
           their
           deliberate
           consideration
           .
           First
           ,
           seeing
           the
           methods
           of
           Numbring
           used
           amongst
           men
           ,
           are
           infinite
           and
           uncertain
           ;
           let
           them
           positively
           and
           determinately
           shew
           ,
           what
           that
           Number
           is
           ,
           by
           and
           through
           which
           they
           will
           count
           the
           Name
           of
           the
           Beast
           .
           The
           familiar
           ways
           of
           numbring
           among
           men
           ,
           whether
           you
           respect
           the
           Number
           of
           Time
           ,
           the
           Number
           of
           Place
           ,
           or
           the
           Number
           of
           Persons
           ,
           is
           infinite
           almost
           .
           The
           Number
           of
           Time
           familiarly
           used
           ,
           is
           very
           various
           ;
           if
           you
           look
           either
           to
           the
           ancient
           or
           the
           latter
           Ages
           of
           the
           Church
           ,
           to
           the
           Civil
           or
           Ecclesiastical
           ,
           to
           the
           Astronomical
           or
           the
           Vulgar
           〈◊〉
           .
           If
           the
           Number
           of
           a
           Man
           ,
           be
           a
           Number
           familiarly
           used
           amongst
           men
           ,
           who
           shall
           assign
           ,
           limit
           or
           specifie
           the
           particular
           way
           ,
           amongst
           so
           many
           several
           kindes
           ?
           Secondly
           ,
           now
           can
           it
           be
           imagined
           ,
           that
           the
           holy
           Spirit
           should
           deliver
           to
           the
           Church
           a
           Number
           ,
           which
           is
           the
           Characteristical
           Note
           of
           the
           Name
           or
           Soveraignty
           of
           the
           Beast
           ,
           and
           never
           circumscribe
           or
           define
           what
           that
           Number
           is
           ,
           but
           leave
           the
           matter
           at
           randome
           ?
           I
           cannot
           finde
           that
           he
           doth
           so
           in
           any
           〈◊〉
           of
           the
           Old
           or
           New
           Testament
           .
           When
           he
           speaketh
           of
           the
           Beast
           with
           seven
           Heads
           and
           ten
           Horns
           ,
           how
           doth
           he
           particularize
           and
           individuate
           the
           matter
           ?
           The
           seven
           Heads
           are
           seven
           Mountains
           ,
           where
           the
           woman
           sitteth
           ;
           The
           ten
           Horns
           are
           ten
           Kings
           that
           shall
           
           arise
           at
           the
           fall
           of
           the
           Empire
           of
           the
           Romans
           ;
           and
           many
           such
           like
           instances
           may
           be
           found
           .
           Thirdly
           ,
           they
           who
           expound
           the
           Number
           of
           a
           Man
           ,
           for
           a
           Number
           frequently
           used
           amongst
           men
           ,
           do
           not
           practise
           according
           to
           this
           Rule
           .
           For
           let
           them
           shew
           how
           it
           is
           the
           familiar
           use
           of
           men
           to
           decypher
           the
           rising
           of
           States
           and
           Governments
           ,
           by
           the
           Anagram
           and
           Numeral
           Letters
           of
           a
           Grammatical
           Name
           .
           I
           think
           scarcely
           an
           instance
           can
           be
           given
           for
           this
           ,
           in
           any
           solid
           and
           serious
           learning
           ;
           to
           which
           I
           think
           the
           holy
           Spirit
           would
           rather
           refer
           us
           ,
           then
           to
           the
           dotages
           and
           trifles
           of
           the
           Cabalists
           .
           All
           these
           Reasons
           laid
           together
           ,
           do
           plainly
           teach
           ,
           that
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           is
           not
           to
           be
           construed
           for
           a
           Number
           familiarly
           used
           amongst
           men
           :
           but
           the
           circumstances
           of
           the
           Text
           ,
           and
           the
           event
           of
           things
           ,
           do
           fully
           pitch
           upon
           the
           Number
           of
           time
           in
           Daniels
           Image
           .
           And
           so
           there
           is
           an
           excellent
           coherence
           of
           one
           thing
           with
           another
           ,
           the
           Visions
           and
           the
           Stories
           do
           fully
           agree
           .
           Fourthly
           ,
           concerning
           the
           Number
           it self
           ,
           it
           is
           expresly
           said
           to
           be
           666.
           
           The
           Spanish
           Bibles
           have
           it
           in
           words
           at
           leng●…h
           ,
           and
           not
           in
           figures
           :
           For
           so
           the
           Text
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           .
           But
           the
           other
           Greek
           Copies
           onely
           in
           figures
           :
           Though
           some
           Interpreters
           ,
           as
           
             Irenaeus
             ,
             Paraeus
          
           ,
           Dr.
           Mayer
           ,
           do
           put
           some
           distinction
           between
           this
           way
           of
           writing
           ,
           to
           the
           understanding
           ,
           both
           ways
           do
           come
           but
           to
           one
           sense
           ,
           if
           you
           go
           to
           the
           sum
           of
           the
           matter
           .
           For
           if
           you
           would
           speak
           of
           a
           thing
           to
           be
           done
           in
           one
           of
           the
           years
           of
           the
           Lord
           ,
           as
           in
           thi●…
           present
           year
           for
           instance
           :
           Is
           not
           1654
           in
           figures
           ,
           all
           one
           with
           One
           thousand
           ,
           〈◊〉
           hundred
           ,
           fifty
           and
           four
           ,
           in
           letters
           written
           at
           length
           ?
           Do
           not
           we
           decypher
           the
           years
           of
           the
           Lord
           in
           our
           common
           way
           of
           writing
           by
           figures
           in
           brief
           ,
           as
           well
           as
           by
           words
           in
           their
           full
           delinearion
           ?
           If
           none
           can
           deny
           this
           ,
           we
           may
           conceive
           the
           like
           of
           the
           meaning
           of
           the
           Spirit
           ,
           when
           he
           saith
           ,
           that
           the
           Number
           of
           the
           〈◊〉
           〈◊〉
           that
           is
           as
           much
           as
           to
           say
           ,
           the
           666th
           year
           is
           the
           Number
           of
           time
           when
           this
           Government
           shall
           begin
           to
           be
           〈◊〉
           up
           .
           But
           ●…eeing
           there
           have
           been
           in
           former
           Ages
           ,
           and
           now
           there
           are
           that
           are
           do●…ing
           ripe
           upon
           the
           Numeral
           Letters
           ;
           I
           do
           here
           seriously
           put
           it
           to
           them
           ,
           to
           〈◊〉
           me
           their
           opinion
           concerning
           the
           two
           Letters
           of
           the
           Greek
           Alphabet
           ,
           α
           and
           ω.
           The
           question
           is
           
           proper
           to
           the
           purpose
           in
           hand
           :
           for
           they
           may
           well
           observe
           ,
           as
           the
           Lamb
           standeth
           in
           direct
           opposition
           to
           the
           Beast
           ,
           the
           Name
           and
           Soveraignty
           of
           the
           Lamb
           ,
           to
           the
           Soveraignty
           of
           the
           Beast
           ;
           so
           the
           Number
           of
           the
           Name
           ,
           or
           Dominion
           of
           the
           Lamb
           (
           if
           oppositio
           be
           
             in
             eodem
          
           )
           must
           necessarily
           be
           opposed
           to
           the
           Number
           of
           the
           Name
           ,
           or
           Dominion
           of
           the
           Beast
           .
           But
           for
           the
           Letters
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           and
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           there
           is
           none
           that
           ever
           went
           about
           to
           find
           out
           the
           Anagram
           of
           the
           Name
           of
           the
           Lamb
           in
           the
           Elements
           of
           the
           Greek
           Alphabet
           .
           These
           Characters
           do
           not
           set
           forth
           any
           literal
           Name
           ,
           nor
           the
           Numeral
           Letters
           of
           any
           Grammatical
           word
           ▪
           but
           they
           do
           denote
           and
           set
           forth
           the
           infinity
           and
           eternity
           of
           his
           Kingdom
           .
           For
           when
           he
           is
           called
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           and
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           this
           is
           all
           one
           with
           that
           expression
           ,
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           
             The
             first
             and
             the
             last
             ,
             which
             is
             ,
             which
             was
             ,
             and
             which
             is
             to
             come
             ,
             the
             Almighty
             ,
             Chap.
          
           1.
           v.
           8
           ,
           11.
           
           So
           in
           immediate
           opposition
           to
           those
           Characters
           of
           the
           Kingdom
           of
           the
           Lamb
           ,
           the
           Number
           of
           the
           Name
           or
           Headship
           of
           the
           Beast
           ,
           is
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           666
           ,
           according
           to
           the
           Calculation
           of
           the
           times
           in
           Daniels
           Image
           .
           For
           as
           the
           Characters
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           and
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           if
           we
           take
           them
           severally
           in
           themselves
           ,
           they
           may
           be
           ascribed
           to
           any
           kinde
           of
           Infinity
           in
           the
           Lambs
           Kingdom
           ;
           he
           may
           be
           said
           to
           be
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           and
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           in
           reference
           to
           Place
           ,
           Power
           ,
           and
           time
           :
           But
           in
           the
           Book
           of
           the
           Revelation
           ,
           it
           is
           necessary
           that
           these
           Characters
           should
           be
           restrained
           onely
           to
           the
           Number
           of
           time
           .
           So
           in
           the
           like
           case
           ,
           the
           Number
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           may
           many
           ways
           be
           applied
           to
           the
           Beasts
           Kingdom
           ;
           but
           in
           the
           natural
           and
           genuine
           sense
           of
           the
           Prophecy
           ,
           this
           doth
           onely
           denote
           such
           a
           Number
           of
           time
           to
           the
           setting
           up
           of
           his
           Kingdom
           .
           Now
           for
           the
           further
           confirmation
           of
           this
           truth
           ,
           let
           us
           call
           to
           minde
           what
           is
           written
           in
           the
           Prophecy
           of
           Daniel
           ,
           concerning
           the
           Ancient
           of
           Days
           :
           
             I
             beheld
             till
             the
             Thrones
             were
             cast
             down
          
           ;
           or
           more
           properly
           ,
           
             I
             beheld
             till
             the
             Thrones
             were
             set
             ,
             and
             the
             Ancient
             of
             Days
             did
             sit
             ,
             whose
             garment
             is
             as
             white
             as
             snow
             ,
             and
             the
             hair
             of
             his
             head
             like
             the
             pure
             wooll
             ,
          
           Ch.
           7.
           v.
           5.
           
           In
           these
           words
           ,
           why
           is
           God
           the
           Father
           called
           ,
           
             The
             Ancient
             of
             days
          
           ?
           why
           is
           the
           hair
           of
           his
           head
           compared
           to
           
             the
             pure
             wooll
          
           ?
           This
           doth
           note
           the
           eternity
           of
           his
           Kingdom
           ,
           in
           immediate
           opposition
           to
           the
           four
           great
           Periods
           of
           time
           ,
           set
           forth
           by
           the
           Tyranny
           of
           the
           four
           great
           Empires
           
           of
           the
           World.
           So
           the
           same
           is
           ●…aid
           concerning
           the
           Dominion
           of
           the
           Son
           of
           Man
           ,
           that
           
             his
             Dominion
             is
             an
             everlasting
             Dominion
             ,
             that
             shall
             not
             pass
             away
             ,
             and
             his
             Kingdom
             that
             which
             shall
             not
             be
             destroyed
             ,
          
           ver
           .
           14
           ▪
           Here
           then
           if
           we
           demand
           ,
           Why
           the
           Kingdom
           of
           the
           Son
           of
           Man
           is
           called
           
             An
             everlasting
             Kingdome
          
           ?
           This
           is
           in
           immediate
           opposition
           to
           the
           several
           and
           respective
           times
           of
           the
           four
           Beasts
           :
           their
           Kingdoms
           had
           an
           end
           ,
           and
           they
           were
           destroyed
           ;
           but
           the
           Kingdom
           of
           the
           Son
           of
           Man
           is
           an
           everlasting
           Kingdome
           ,
           that
           never
           shall
           be
           destroyed
           .
           According
           to
           this
           Analogie
           do
           we
           conform
           the
           Exposition
           of
           the
           Number
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           and
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           the
           Number
           of
           the
           Kingdome
           of
           the
           Lamb
           :
           we
           do
           oppose
           it
           to
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           the
           Number
           of
           the
           Name
           of
           the
           Beast
           .
           And
           so
           Iohn
           in
           the
           Revelation
           ,
           and
           Daniel
           in
           his
           Prophecy
           ,
           do
           agree
           in
           the
           Numbers
           ,
           and
           in
           the
           same
           method
           and
           way
           of
           account
           .
           For
           when
           the
           Son
           is
           said
           to
           be
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           and
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           the
           First
           and
           the
           Last
           ,
           in
           the
           order
           of
           time
           ;
           is
           not
           this
           all
           one
           with
           that
           passage
           in
           
             Daniel
             ,
             His
             Dominion
             is
             an
             everlasting
             Dominion
             ?
          
        
         
           But
           because
           many
           stand
           upon
           the
           Letters
           ,
           we
           will
           cite
           the
           famous
           Canon
           of
           Ptolomy
           ,
           where
           the
           Kings
           of
           Babylon
           ,
           of
           Persia
           ,
           of
           Greece
           ,
           and
           Rome
           ,
           are
           set
           forth
           by
           the
           Characters
           of
           the
           Greek
           Alphabet
           .
           It
           is
           useful
           to
           illustrate
           many
           passages
           in
           this
           Book
           ,
           and
           therefore
           it
           followeth
           as
           hereunder
           written
           .
        
         
           
             
               
                 
                 
                   De
                   Epochâ
                   Nabonassareâ
                   .
                
                 
                   Ex
                   Manuscripto
                   libro
                   Graeco
                   Claudii
                   Ptolomaei
                   continente
                   Hypothes●…s
                   〈◊〉
                   .
                
                 
                   
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   
                     
                       
                         〈◊〉
                         〈◊〉
                         〈◊〉
                         〈◊〉
                         〈◊〉
                      
                       .
                    
                     
                       
                         
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                        
                         .
                      
                       
                         
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                        
                      
                    
                     
                       
                         
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                        
                      
                       
                         
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                        
                      
                       
                         
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                        
                      
                       
                         14
                      
                    
                     
                       
                         
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                        
                      
                       
                         
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                        
                      
                       
                         
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                        
                      
                       
                         16
                      
                    
                     
                       
                         
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                        
                      
                       
                         
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                        
                      
                       
                         
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                        
                      
                       
                         21
                      
                    
                     
                       
                         
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                        
                      
                       
                         
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                        
                      
                       
                         
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                        
                      
                       
                         26
                      
                    
                     
                       
                         
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                        
                      
                       
                         
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                        
                      
                       
                         
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                        
                      
                       
                         38
                      
                    
                     
                       
                         
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                        
                      
                       
                         
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                        
                      
                       
                         
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                        
                      
                       
                         43
                      
                    
                     
                       
                         
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                        
                      
                       
                         
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                        
                      
                       
                         
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                        
                      
                       
                         45
                      
                    
                     
                       
                         
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                        
                      
                       
                         
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                        
                      
                       
                         
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                        
                      
                       
                         48
                      
                    
                     
                       
                         
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                        
                      
                       
                         
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                        
                      
                       
                         
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                        
                      
                       
                         54
                      
                    
                     
                       
                         
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                        
                      
                       
                         
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                        
                      
                       
                         
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                        
                      
                       
                         55
                      
                    
                     
                       
                         
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                        
                      
                       
                         
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                        
                      
                       
                         
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                        
                      
                       
                         59
                      
                    
                     
                       
                         
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                        
                      
                       
                         
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                        
                      
                       
                         
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                        
                      
                       
                         67
                      
                    
                     
                       
                         
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                        
                      
                       
                         
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                        
                      
                       
                         
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                        
                      
                       
                         80
                      
                    
                     
                       
                         
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                        
                      
                       
                         
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                        
                      
                       
                         
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                        
                      
                       
                         100
                      
                    
                     
                       
                         
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                        
                      
                       
                         
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                        
                      
                       
                         
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                        
                      
                       
                         122
                      
                    
                     
                       
                         
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                        
                      
                       
                         
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                        
                      
                       
                         
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                        
                      
                       
                         143
                      
                    
                     
                       
                         
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                        
                      
                       
                         
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                        
                      
                       
                         
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                        
                      
                       
                         186
                      
                    
                     
                       
                         
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                        
                      
                       
                         
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                        
                      
                       
                         
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                        
                      
                       
                         188
                      
                    
                     
                       
                         
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                        
                      
                       
                         
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                        
                      
                       
                         
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                        
                      
                       
                         192
                      
                    
                     
                       
                         
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                        
                      
                       
                         
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                        
                      
                       
                         
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                        
                      
                       
                         109
                      
                    
                  
                   
                     
                       
                         〈◊〉
                         〈◊〉
                         〈◊〉
                         〈◊〉
                         〈◊〉
                      
                       .
                    
                     
                       
                         
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                        
                      
                       
                         
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                        
                      
                       
                         
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                        
                      
                       
                         218
                      
                    
                     
                       
                         
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                        
                      
                       
                         
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                        
                      
                       
                         
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                        
                      
                       
                         226
                      
                    
                     
                       
                         
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                        
                      
                       
                         
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                        
                      
                       
                         
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                        
                      
                       
                         262
                      
                    
                     
                       
                         
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                        
                      
                       
                         
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                        
                      
                       
                         
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                        
                      
                       
                         283
                      
                    
                     
                       
                         
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                        
                      
                       
                         
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                        
                      
                       
                         
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                        
                      
                       
                         324
                      
                    
                     
                       
                         
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                        
                      
                       
                         
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                        
                      
                       
                         
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                        
                      
                       
                         343
                      
                    
                     
                       
                         
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                        
                      
                       
                         
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                        
                      
                       
                         
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                        
                      
                       
                         389
                      
                    
                     
                       
                         
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                        
                      
                       
                         
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                        
                      
                       
                         
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                        
                      
                       
                         410
                      
                    
                     
                       
                         
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                        
                      
                       
                         
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                        
                      
                       
                         
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                        
                      
                       
                         412
                      
                    
                     
                       
                         
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                        
                      
                       
                         
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                        
                      
                       
                         
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                        
                      
                       
                         416
                      
                    
                  
                   
                     
                       
                         〈◊〉
                         〈◊〉
                         〈◊〉
                         〈◊〉
                         〈◊〉
                      
                       .
                    
                     
                       
                         
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                        
                      
                       
                         
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                        
                         .
                      
                    
                     
                       
                          
                      
                       
                          
                      
                       
                         Anni
                         Phil.
                         &
                         Al●…x
                         .
                      
                       
                         Nabonass
                         .
                      
                    
                     
                       
                         
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                        
                         .
                      
                       
                         
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                        
                      
                       
                          
                      
                       
                         424
                      
                    
                     
                       
                         
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                        
                      
                       
                         
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                        
                      
                       
                         7
                      
                       
                         431
                      
                    
                     
                       
                         
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                        
                      
                       
                         
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                        
                      
                       
                         19
                      
                       
                         443
                      
                    
                  
                   
                     
                       
                         〈◊〉
                         〈◊〉
                         〈◊〉
                         〈◊〉
                         〈◊〉
                      
                       .
                    
                     
                       
                         
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                        
                      
                       
                         
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                        
                      
                       
                         
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                        
                      
                       
                         39
                      
                       
                         463
                      
                    
                     
                       
                         
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                        
                      
                       
                         
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                        
                      
                       
                         
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                        
                      
                       
                         77
                      
                       
                         501
                      
                    
                     
                       
                         
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                        
                      
                       
                         
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                        
                      
                       
                         
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                        
                      
                       
                         102
                      
                       
                         526
                      
                    
                     
                       
                         
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                        
                      
                       
                         
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                        
                      
                       
                         
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                        
                      
                       
                         119
                      
                       
                         543
                      
                    
                     
                       
                         
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                        
                      
                       
                         
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                        
                      
                       
                         
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                        
                      
                       
                         143
                      
                       
                         567
                      
                    
                     
                       
                         
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                        
                      
                       
                         
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                        
                      
                       
                         
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                        
                      
                       
                         178
                      
                       
                         602
                      
                    
                     
                       
                         
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                        
                      
                       
                         
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                        
                      
                       
                         
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                        
                      
                       
                         207
                      
                       
                         631
                      
                    
                     
                       
                         
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                        
                      
                       
                         
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                        
                      
                       
                         
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                        
                      
                       
                         243
                      
                       
                         667
                      
                    
                     
                       
                         
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                        
                      
                       
                         
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                        
                      
                       
                         
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                        
                      
                       
                         272
                      
                       
                         696
                      
                    
                     
                       
                         
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                        
                      
                       
                         
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                        
                      
                       
                         
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                        
                      
                       
                         294
                      
                       
                         718
                      
                    
                  
                   
                     
                       
                         〈◊〉
                         〈◊〉
                         〈◊〉
                         〈◊〉
                         〈◊〉
                      
                       .
                    
                     
                       
                         
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                        
                      
                       
                         
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                        
                      
                       
                         
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                        
                      
                       
                         337
                      
                       
                         761
                      
                    
                     
                       
                         
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                        
                      
                       
                         
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                        
                      
                       
                          
                      
                       
                         359
                      
                       
                         783
                      
                    
                     
                       
                         
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                        
                      
                       
                         
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                        
                      
                       
                         
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                        
                      
                       
                         363
                      
                       
                         789
                      
                    
                     
                       
                         
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                        
                      
                       
                         
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                        
                      
                       
                         
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                        
                      
                       
                         377
                      
                       
                         801
                      
                    
                     
                       
                         
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                        
                      
                       
                         
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                        
                      
                       
                         
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                        
                      
                       
                         391
                      
                       
                         815
                      
                    
                     
                       
                         
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                        
                      
                       
                         
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                        
                      
                       
                         
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                        
                      
                       
                         401
                      
                       
                         825
                      
                    
                     
                       
                         
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                        
                      
                       
                         
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                        
                      
                       
                         
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                        
                      
                       
                         404
                      
                       
                         828
                      
                    
                     
                       
                         
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                        
                      
                       
                         
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                        
                      
                       
                         
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                        
                      
                       
                         419
                      
                       
                         843
                      
                    
                     
                       
                         
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                        
                      
                       
                         
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                        
                      
                       
                         
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                        
                      
                       
                         420
                      
                       
                         844
                      
                    
                     
                       
                         
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                        
                      
                       
                         
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                        
                      
                       
                         
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                        
                      
                       
                         439
                      
                       
                         863
                      
                    
                     
                       
                         
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                        
                      
                       
                         
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                        
                      
                       
                         
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                        
                      
                       
                         460
                      
                       
                         864
                      
                    
                     
                       
                         
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                        
                      
                       
                         
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                        
                      
                       
                         
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                           〈◊〉
                        
                      
                       
                         483
                      
                       
                         907
                      
                    
                  
                
              
            
          
        
         
         
           Here
           it
           is
           clear
           ,
           That
           Ptolomy
           doth
           set
           down
           particularly
           how
           long
           each
           King
           did
           Reign
           in
           the
           four
           great
           Empires
           ;
           and
           he
           doth
           also
           Collect
           the
           whole
           Number
           of
           yeares
           ,
           the
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           from
           the
           beginning
           of
           Nabonassar
           .
           Some
           Ecclesiastical
           Writers
           ,
           as
           Panadorus
           and
           others
           ,
           do
           frequently
           mention
           this
           Canon
           ,
           with
           whom
           
             Ioseph
             Scaliger
          
           did
           finde
           it
           ,
           but
           very
           corrupt
           ;
           who
           also
           did
           insert
           it
           in
           the
           third
           Book
           of
           his
           
             Isagogicall
             Canons
          
           .
           But
           Calvisius
           doth
           represent
           it
           more
           pure
           and
           uncorrupt
           ,
           out
           of
           the
           Greek
           Manuscript
           .
           And
           for
           the
           testimony
           which
           he
           doth
           give
           ,
           he
           doth
           not
           shun
           to
           call
           it
           
             more
             precious
             then
             any
             Gold
             ;
             and
             that
             had
             it
             been
             sooner
             published
             ,
             the
             matters
             of
             Chronologie
             would
             have
             been
             in
             a
             far
             better
             condition
             ,
             Calv.
             Isag.
             pag.
          
           102.
           
           And
           for
           my
           part
           ,
           if
           I
           might
           cast
           in
           my
           Mi●…e
           ,
           I
           may
           say
           also
           ,
           That
           I
           have
           been
           greatly
           delighted
           with
           this
           excellent
           Monument
           of
           Antiquity
           ;
           but
           for
           this
           reason
           more
           especially
           :
           From
           the
           Creation
           of
           the
           world
           ,
           to
           the
           times
           of
           the
           Persian
           Monarchy
           ,
           we
           have
           a
           plain
           Scripture-Chronologie
           :
           but
           from
           the
           times
           of
           the
           Persians
           ,
           to
           the
           coming
           of
           Christ
           ,
           for
           the
           space
           of
           500
           years
           ,
           or
           thereabouts
           ,
           for
           this
           whole
           interval
           of
           time
           (
           set
           the
           Prophecy
           of
           Daniel
           aside
           )
           we
           have
           no
           continued
           History
           in
           the
           Canonical
           Scriptures
           .
           Many
           things
           have
           been
           foretold
           by
           
             Isaiah
             ,
             ●…eremiah
          
           ,
           and
           other
           Prophets
           ;
           and
           we
           finde
           also
           all
           along
           in
           the
           Stories
           of
           the
           Scripture
           ,
           how
           the
           Prophecies
           have
           been
           fulfilled
           .
           Now
           it
           is
           not
           so
           with
           those
           things
           that
           are
           foretold
           in
           the
           Prophecy
           of
           Daniel
           :
           there
           is
           no
           Story
           in
           the
           Old
           Testament
           that
           doth
           shew
           the
           truth
           of
           his
           Predictions
           .
           Now
           I
           say
           ,
           What
           must
           be
           done
           in
           this
           case
           ?
           It
           is
           the
           minde
           of
           God
           that
           we
           should
           go
           to
           the
           Civil
           Stories
           ,
           to
           
             Herodotus
             ,
             Xenophon
             ,
             Diodorus
             Siculus
             ,
             Appianus
             ,
             Iosephus
             ,
          
           and
           others
           :
           For
           these
           have
           left
           upon
           record
           ,
           the
           truth
           of
           that
           which
           Daniel
           long
           before
           did
           foretel
           ,
           concerning
           the
           Persian
           and
           the
           Graecian
           Empires
           .
           And
           for
           his
           Prophetical
           Chronologie
           of
           the
           70
           weeks
           ,
           this
           Number
           of
           time
           may
           fitly
           be
           expounded
           by
           the
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           or
           the
           Collection
           of
           years
           in
           the
           Canon
           aforementioned
           .
           And
           for
           the
           certainty
           of
           the
           Computation
           ,
           we
           may
           believe
           ,
           That
           Ptolomy
           ,
           so
           exact
           an
           Artist
           ,
           could
           not
           easily
           be
           mistaken
           ▪
           
           seeing
           he
           lived
           near
           the
           times
           of
           the
           Apostles
           ,
           at
           Alexandria
           in
           Egypt
           ,
           the
           chiefest
           School
           of
           Learning
           in
           all
           the
           East
           .
           The
           like
           may
           be
           said
           of
           the
           whole
           Book
           of
           the
           Revelation
           :
           for
           though
           many
           things
           are
           recorded
           in
           the
           Evangelists
           ,
           and
           the
           
             Acts
             of
             the
             Apostles
          
           ,
           concerning
           the
           fulfilling
           of
           the
           old
           Prophecies
           ;
           yet
           the
           Predictions
           in
           the
           Book
           of
           the
           Revelation
           ,
           which
           contain
           many
           an
           hundred
           years
           from
           the
           first
           to
           the
           second
           coming
           of
           Christ
           ,
           are
           declared
           in
           no
           Story
           of
           the
           New
           or
           Old
           Testament
           .
           What
           must
           then
           be
           done
           in
           such
           a
           case
           as
           this
           ?
           It
           is
           the
           minde
           of
           God
           ,
           that
           we
           should
           reade
           the
           Stories
           of
           the
           Church
           ,
           and
           so
           accordingly
           by
           the
           order
           of
           the
           Story
           ,
           expound
           the
           Prophecy
           .
           These
           things
           I
           thought
           good
           to
           note
           ,
           for
           their
           sakes
           who
           are
           the
           
             Enemies
             of
             Huma●…e
             Learning
          
           in
           these
           times
           .
           Now
           let
           us
           return
           again
           to
           that
           Point
           ,
           from
           which
           we
           have
           made
           so
           necessary
           a
           Digression
           .
           I
           say
           then
           ,
           if
           we
           peruse
           the
           aforementioned
           Canon
           ,
           we
           may
           see
           how
           Governments
           ,
           and
           the
           Changes
           of
           Government
           ,
           may
           be
           numbred
           by
           the
           Characters
           of
           the
           Greek
           Alphabet
           .
           Let
           us
           take
           Nebuchadnezzar
           for
           instance
           ,
           the
           Root
           of
           the
           Babylonian
           Monarchy
           ;
           he
           is
           called
           in
           the
           Canon
           by
           the
           Name
           of
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ;
           and
           the
           Number
           of
           his
           Government
           from
           the
           beginning
           of
           Nabonassar
           ,
           is
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           144
           ,
           for
           in
           that
           year
           of
           Nabonassar
           he
           began
           to
           Reign
           .
           So
           Darius
           the
           Mede
           ,
           who
           is
           called
           in
           the
           Canon
           by
           the
           Title
           of
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           the
           Number
           of
           his
           Government
           is
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           193
           ;
           for
           in
           that
           year
           he
           did
           begin
           to
           Reign
           ,
           from
           the
           beginning
           of
           Nabonassar
           :
           And
           so
           of
           the
           rest
           .
           The
           like
           may
           be
           said
           in
           the
           present
           case
           of
           the
           Universal
           Headship
           of
           the
           Bishop
           of
           Rome
           ,
           that
           from
           the
           beginning
           of
           the
           Roman
           ,
           as
           the
           fourth
           Metal
           Kingdom
           ,
           the
           Number
           of
           his
           Name
           or
           Government
           is
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           666
           :
           Onely
           the
           difference
           is
           in
           the
           manner
           of
           the
           Computation
           .
           For
           when
           we
           account
           the
           times
           of
           
             Darius
             ,
             Nebuchadnezzar
          
           ,
           and
           others
           ,
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           it
           is
           the
           Number
           of
           Nabonassar
           :
           But
           when
           we
           account
           the
           Name
           or
           Universal
           Headship
           of
           the
           Bishop
           of
           Rome
           ,
           and
           the
           beginning
           thereof
           ,
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           it
           is
           the
           Number
           in
           Daniels
           Image
           ,
           in
           the
           way
           of
           the
           Prophetical
           Chronologie
           ,
           figuratively
           called
           the
           Number
           of
           a
           Man.
           
        
         
         
           Let
           us
           carry
           the
           matter
           to
           
             Antiochus
             Epiphanes
          
           ,
           the
           Graecian
           Antichrist
           .
           Of
           the
           beginning
           of
           his
           Reign
           and
           Government
           it
           is
           said
           ,
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           he
           reigned
           in
           the
           137
           year
           of
           the
           Kingdome
           of
           the
           Greeks
           ,
           1
           Mac
           1.
           11.
           
           If
           we
           will
           draw
           this
           matter
           into
           figures
           ,
           the
           Number
           of
           his
           Name
           or
           Government
           is
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           137.
           
           And
           for
           the
           way
           and
           method
           of
           account
           ,
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           it
           is
           the
           Number
           of
           the
           Kingdome
           of
           the
           Greeks
           ;
           for
           in
           such
           a
           year
           of
           their
           Kingdome
           he
           began
           to
           Reign
           .
           If
           we
           apply
           this
           to
           the
           Roman
           Antichrist
           ,
           to
           the
           beginning
           of
           the
           Universal
           Headship
           under
           the
           Emperor
           Phocas
           ,
           we
           may
           say
           that
           he
           began
           that
           Dominion
           in
           the
           year
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           666
           ,
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           .
           For
           from
           that
           time
           ,
           as
           the
           Church
           of
           God
           came
           under
           the
           Dominion
           of
           the
           Romans
           ,
           there
           is
           such
           an
           exact
           Number
           of
           years
           .
           Many
           more
           instances
           might
           be
           brought
           out
           of
           Antiquity
           ,
           to
           shew
           how
           it
           hath
           been
           the
           manner
           of
           the
           Ancients
           to
           reckon
           the
           Times
           and
           the
           Changes
           of
           Government
           ,
           by
           the
           Characters
           of
           the
           Greek
           Alphabet
           .
           But
           these
           shall
           suffice
           .
        
         
           Now
           to
           gather
           all
           into
           one
           sum
           ,
           I
           have
           compared
           the
           Interpretation
           with
           all
           the
           particulars
           of
           the
           Text.
           I
           have
           shewed
           ,
           what
           is
           meant
           by
           the
           Law
           ,
           what
           by
           the
           Beast
           that
           made
           the
           Law
           ,
           what
           by
           the
           Persons
           that
           did
           receive
           the
           Mark
           in
           their
           Forehead
           ,
           and
           in
           their
           Right-hand
           .
           I
           have
           largely
           discoursed
           also
           concerning
           the
           Calculation
           of
           the
           Number
           ;
           who
           the
           Person
           is
           that
           is
           to
           make
           the
           discovery
           ;
           what
           the
           Calculation
           is
           ;
           what
           is
           meant
           by
           the
           Number
           of
           a
           Man
           ;
           and
           what
           by
           666
           years
           ,
           to
           the
           setting
           up
           of
           the
           Name
           or
           Universal
           Hea●…ship
           of
           the
           Bishop
           of
           Rome
           .
           And
           seeing
           I
           finde
           all
           things
           to
           agree
           ,
           therefore
           I
           conclude
           ,
           That
           this
           is
           a
           true
           Interpretation
           .
           For
           the
           confirmation
           of
           this
           ,
           let
           us
           go
           to
           the
           next
           Chapter
           .
        
      
       
         
         
           
             CHAP.
             IX
          
           .
           The
           Truth
           of
           the
           Interpretation
           is
           further
           confirmed
           ,
           from
           the
           scope
           of
           the
           Seventeenth
           Chapter
           of
           the
           Revelation
           .
        
         
           HEre
           all
           solid
           Expositors
           do
           agree
           ,
           That
           the
           same
           matter
           is
           handled
           again
           ,
           which
           was
           formerly
           discoursed
           of
           in
           the
           13th
           Chapter
           .
           
             The
             thing
             is
             not
          
           aliud
           &
           aliud
           ,
           
             another
             and
             another
             ;
             though
             it
             be
             delivered
          
           aliter
           &
           aliter
           ,
           
             in
             another
             and
             another
             manner
          
           .
           That
           which
           is
           there
           spoken
           concerning
           the
           Beast
           ,
           as
           a
           King
           or
           Potentate
           ,
           is
           here
           applied
           to
           an
           Idolatrous
           or
           Whorish
           Church
           .
           But
           let
           us
           hear
           the
           words
           of
           the
           Text
           :
           
             So
             he
             carried
             me
             away
             in
             the
             Spirit
             into
             the
             Wilderness
             ,
             and
             I
             saw
             a
             woman
             sit
             upon
             a
             Scarlet-coloured
             Beast
             ,
             full
             of
             the
             Names
             of
             Blasphemy
             ,
             having
             seven
             Heads
             ,
             and
             ten
             Horns
             ,
          
           v.
           3.
           
           This
           Woman
           is
           an
           Idolatrous
           Church
           ;
           and
           ,
           if
           we
           look
           to
           the
           whole
           scope
           of
           the
           description
           ,
           she
           can
           be
           no
           other
           ,
           but
           the
           Roman
           Idolatrous
           Church
           .
           That
           this
           is
           meant
           of
           the
           City
           of
           Rome
           ,
           is
           clear
           ,
           from
           the
           9th
           Vers.
           
             The
             seven
             Heads
             are
             seven
             Mountains
             ,
             where
             the
             Woman
             sitteth
             .
          
           Now
           all
           Stories
           do
           agree
           ,
           That
           Rome
           was
           seated
           upon
           seven
           Hills
           ,
           and
           was
           famous
           through
           all
           the
           world
           by
           the
           title
           of
           Septi-collis
           ,
           or
           
             The
             Seven-hilled
             City
          
           .
           And
           to
           put
           all
           out
           of
           question
           ,
           the
           Angel
           saith
           ,
           
             The
             Woman
             which
             thou
             sawest
             ,
             is
             the
             great
             City
             that
             reigneth
             over
             the
             Kings
             of
             the
             Earth
             ,
          
           ver
           .
           18.
           
           Now
           what
           was
           the
           Great
           City
           ,
           which
           in
           the
           days
           of
           Iohn
           reigned
           over
           all
           earthly
           Kings
           ,
           but
           the
           City
           of
           Rome
           ?
           There
           are
           such
           clear
           Characters
           in
           the
           Text
           ,
           that
           the
           Ancients
           who
           lived
           before
           the
           fall
           of
           the
           Empire
           ,
           did
           all
           agree
           in
           it
           ,
           That
           Rome
           was
           the
           City
           Babylon
           .
           And
           the
           Jesuits
           in
           these
           days
           ,
           who
           of
           all
           men
           living
           are
           the
           most
           active
           to
           hide
           the
           meaning
           of
           this
           Scripture
           ,
           do
           yield
           that
           Rome
           is
           here
           intended
           :
           But
           how
           ?
           Not
           
             Rome
             Christian
          
           ,
           but
           
             Rome
             Pagan
          
           .
           To
           this
           we
           reply
           ,
           Though
           the
           Apostle
           doth
           
           make
           mention
           of
           
             Rome
             Pagan
          
           ;
           yet
           he
           doth
           primarily
           intend
           
             Rome
             Christian
          
           ,
           or
           rather
           
             Rome
             Antichristian
          
           .
           Let
           it
           be
           considered
           what
           Title
           is
           given
           to
           her
           ;
           and
           so
           ,
           not
           onely
           in
           this
           Chapter
           ,
           but
           in
           other
           places
           ,
           she
           is
           called
           
             The
             Whore
             of
             Babylon
          
           .
           In
           Scripture-language
           ,
           this
           Name
           is
           onely
           given
           to
           Idolatrous
           Churches
           .
           We
           never
           ,
           or
           at
           least
           seldome
           ,
           reade
           in
           the
           Writings
           of
           the
           Prophets
           ,
           of
           the
           Whore
           of
           Egypt
           ,
           of
           the
           Whore
           of
           Edom
           ,
           of
           the
           Whore
           of
           Tyrus
           ,
           or
           of
           the
           Whore
           of
           Damascus
           :
           this
           Title
           is
           usually
           given
           to
           Samaria
           and
           Ierusalem
           ,
           to
           the
           Churches
           of
           Israel
           and
           Iudah
           ,
           as
           they
           did
           fall
           away
           from
           the
           Worship
           of
           the
           true
           God
           ,
           to
           serve
           other
           gods
           .
           And
           therefore
           Hosea
           in
           the
           Vision
           was
           to
           take
           a
           wife
           of
           fornications
           ,
           
             because
             the
             land
             had
             committed
             great
             whoredome
             ,
             in
             departing
             from
             the
             Lord
             ,
          
           Hos.
           1.
           2.
           
           So
           the
           Prophet
           Ezekiel
           being
           to
           speak
           of
           the
           spiritual
           fornications
           of
           Samaria
           and
           Ierusalem
           ,
           calleth
           the
           one
           Aholah
           ,
           and
           the
           other
           
             Aholibamah
             ,
             Ezek.
          
           23.
           4.
           
           From
           these
           and
           many
           other
           Scriptures
           ,
           it
           is
           evident
           ,
           That
           the
           Title
           is
           usually
           given
           to
           Idolatrous
           Churches
           ,
           which
           have
           departed
           away
           from
           Christ
           their
           lawful
           Husband
           .
           So
           then
           ,
           if
           the
           Whore
           of
           Babylon
           doth
           signifie
           Rome
           ;
           this
           must
           needs
           be
           applied
           to
           
             Rome
             Christian
          
           ,
           as
           she
           did
           break
           her
           Marriage-Covenant
           with
           Christ
           ,
           and
           yield
           her self
           up
           to
           another
           Husband
           .
           For
           
             Rome
             Pagan
          
           was
           never
           married
           to
           Christ
           ;
           and
           therefore
           though
           she
           might
           be
           called
           Babylon
           in
           the
           figure
           ,
           yet
           she
           is
           not
           the
           Whore
           of
           Babylon
           .
        
         
           Secondly
           ,
           she
           is
           described
           in
           the
           Text
           ,
           having
           
             a
             Golden
             Cup
             in
             her
             hand
             :
          
           By
           which
           amorous
           po●…ion
           ,
           she
           did
           entice
           the
           Kings
           of
           the
           Earth
           to
           commit
           fornication
           with
           her
           .
           Now
           this
           doth
           not
           appertain
           to
           
             Rome
             Pagan
          
           ,
           but
           to
           the
           Romish
           Church
           ,
           which
           hath
           greatly
           deceived
           the
           Kings
           of
           the
           Earth
           by
           her
           Idolatries
           and
           Superditions
           .
        
         
           Thirdly
           ,
           it
           is
           clear
           from
           the
           scope
           of
           the
           Text
           ,
           That
           the
           Woman
           doth
           ride
           the
           Beast
           in
           its
           last
           and
           renewed
           State
           ,
           in
           the
           times
           of
           the
           ten
           Kings
           ;
           for
           these
           shall
           carry
           the
           Whore
           ,
           and
           shall
           be
           wholly
           at
           her
           devotion
           ,
           
             till
             the
             words
             of
             God
             be
             fulfilled
             ;
             and
             after
             that
             ,
             they
             shall
             hate
             her
             as
             much
             ,
             and
             burn
             her
             flesh
             with
             fire
             .
          
           If
           we
           apply
           this
           to
           
             Rome
             Pagan
          
           ,
           there
           is
           nothing
           
           will
           agree
           :
           for
           she
           had
           no
           beeing
           in
           the
           times
           of
           the
           Ten
           Kings
           .
           But
           all
           things
           may
           be
           fitly
           applied
           to
           
             Rome
             Antichristian
          
           ,
           which
           is
           truly
           and
           properly
           called
           the
           
             Whore
             of
             Babylon
          
           in
           the
           figure
           .
        
         
           But
           now
           a
           little
           to
           draw
           nearer
           to
           the
           Point
           :
           When
           was
           it
           that
           the
           Whore
           did
           begin
           to
           ride
           the
           Beast
           ,
           and
           where
           shall
           we
           set
           the
           date
           of
           her
           Dominion
           ?
           For
           so
           the
           Angel
           doth
           expound
           the
           words
           ;
           
             The
             Waters
             where
             the
             Whore
             sitteth
             ,
             are
             Kindreds
             ,
             and
             People
             ,
             and
             Multitudes
             ,
             and
             Nations
             ,
             and
             Languages
             ,
          
           ver
           .
           17.
           
           Her
           sitting
           upon
           the
           Beast
           ,
           and
           upon
           many
           Waters
           ,
           doth
           not
           onely
           imply
           an
           ordinary
           sitting
           ,
           but
           a
           sitting
           in
           the
           way
           of
           Lordship
           ,
           Dominion
           ,
           and
           Supreme
           Command
           .
           Such
           a
           kinde
           of
           sitting
           we
           must
           look
           after
           ,
           if
           we
           will
           truly
           know
           the
           time
           when
           the
           Whore
           began
           to
           ride
           the
           Beast
           .
           And
           here
           ,
           I
           say
           ,
           at
           that
           time
           when
           the
           Bishop
           of
           Rome
           did
           begin
           to
           be
           the
           second
           Beast
           ,
           or
           Universal
           Head
           under
           the
           Emperor
           Phocas
           ;
           then
           at
           the
           same
           time
           did
           the
           Roman
           Church
           begin
           to
           be
           the
           Mother
           of
           all
           Churches
           ;
           or
           rather
           ,
           the
           Great
           Whore
           that
           rideth
           the
           Beast
           ;
           the
           Mother
           of
           all
           the
           Fornications
           ,
           and
           the
           Idolatries
           of
           the
           Earth
           .
        
         
           Let
           us
           therefore
           more
           distinctly
           consider
           the
           times
           ,
           as
           the
           Angel
           doth
           give
           the
           true
           delineation
           of
           them
           :
           And
           therefore
           speaking
           of
           the
           Ten
           Kings
           that
           should
           carry
           the
           Whore
           ,
           that
           should
           be
           wholly
           at
           her
           devotion
           ,
           he
           doth
           expresly
           speak
           of
           them
           ,
           
             They
             have
             no
             Kingdome
             as
             yet
             ,
             but
             receive
             a
             Kingdome
             as
             Kings
             ,
             one
             hour
             with
             the
             Beast
             ,
          
           ver
           .
           12.
           
           Therefore
           the
           fall
           of
           the
           Empire
           ,
           and
           the
           rising
           of
           the
           Kings
           ,
           must
           needs
           anticipate
           or
           go
           before
           the
           Jurisdiction
           and
           Dominion
           of
           the
           Great
           Whore.
           And
           lest
           there
           should
           be
           any
           mistake
           in
           the
           time
           ,
           the
           Angel
           doth
           plainly
           shew
           ,
           That
           there
           must
           be
           eight
           Revolutions
           of
           State
           in
           the
           City
           of
           Rome
           ;
           and
           that
           seven
           of
           them
           must
           fall
           ,
           before
           the
           time
           cometh
           that
           the
           Whore
           shall
           ride
           the
           Beast
           .
           These
           are
           his
           words
           :
           
             There
             are
             seven
             Kings
             ;
             five
             are
             fallen
             ,
             one
             is
             ,
             and
             the
             other
             is
             not
             yet
             come
             ;
             and
             when
             he
             cometh
             ,
             he
             must
             continue
             a
             short
             space
             :
             And
             the
             Beast
             that
             was
             ,
             and
             is
             not
             ,
             he
             is
             the
             eighth
             ,
             and
             is
             of
             the
             seventh
             ,
             and
             goeth
             into
             Perdition
             ,
          
           ver
           .
           10
           ,
           11.
           
           From
           whence
           it
           is
           manifest
           ,
           That
           the
           
           Ten
           Kings
           must
           arise
           ,
           and
           seven
           Forms
           of
           Government
           must
           fall
           in
           the
           City
           of
           Rome
           ,
           before
           the
           times
           of
           the
           Great
           Whore
           can
           begin
           .
           But
           here
           is
           a
           hard
           question
           to
           be
           decided
           by
           the
           way
           :
           
             How
             can
             the
             Beast
             be
             said
             to
             be
             the
             eighth
             King
             ,
             and
             yet
             one
             of
             the
             seven
             Heads
             ?
          
           I
           will
           the
           more
           willingly
           take
           it
           into
           Consideration
           ,
           because
           I
           have
           been
           heretofore
           much
           puzled
           with
           the
           question
           .
           And
           I
           finde
           also
           ,
           that
           the
           very
           best
           and
           most
           approved
           Interpreters
           do
           not
           give
           a
           certain
           sound
           .
           To
           let
           pass
           how
           far
           Brightman
           and
           Paraeus
           have
           gone
           aside
           in
           the
           matter
           ;
           Mr.
           Forbes
           makes
           the
           Kings
           ,
           and
           Heads
           of
           the
           Beast
           ,
           to
           be
           co
           incident
           terms
           :
           but
           in
           this
           he
           is
           greatly
           mistaken
           .
           For
           the
           Beast
           ,
           in
           the
           order
           of
           Kings
           ,
           is
           expresl●…
           said
           to
           be
           the
           eighth
           King
           ;
           and
           in
           the
           order
           of
           Heads
           ,
           he
           is
           onely
           one
           of
           the
           seventh
           .
           Therefore
           we
           may
           certainly
           conclude
           ,
           That
           these
           are
           not
           equivalent
           terms
           ,
           but
           that
           necessarily
           some
           distinction
           must
           be
           made
           betwixt
           the
           Heads
           and
           the
           Kings
           .
           Mr.
           Mede
           therefore
           keeps
           himself
           in
           doubtful
           terms
           :
           for
           speaking
           of
           the
           seventh
           Change
           of
           State
           ;
           to
           wit
           ,
           
             The
             Christian
             Caesars
          
           ;
           he
           saith
           ,
           That
           
             this
             Potentate
             ,
             because
             he
             should
             be
             of
             short
             continuance
             ,
          
           shall
           seem
           to
           be
           
             Dynastes
             alius
             ,
             another
             Ruler
             ;
             sed
             revera
             non
             alius
             ,
             in
             deed
             and
             in
             truth
             not
             another
             .
          
           So
           likewise
           concerning
           the
           Beast
           ,
           in
           which
           State
           he
           should
           carry
           the
           Whore
           ,
           
             This
             Beast
          
           (
           saith
           he
           )
           
             in
             respect
             of
             the
             Change
             of
             the
             Caesars
             ,
             seemeth
             to
             be
             the
             eighth
             ;
             but
          
           revera
           non
           nisi
           septimus
           ,
           
             in
             deed
             and
             in
             truth
             no
             other
             but
             the
             seventh
             .
          
           In
           which
           words
           of
           his
           ,
           so
           far
           as
           I
           apprehend
           ,
           there
           are
           two
           passages
           which
           seem
           to
           me
           to
           differ
           from
           the
           scope
           of
           the
           Text
           :
           For
           when
           he
           speaketh
           of
           the
           Change
           of
           the
           Caesareate
           ,
           from
           the
           Pagan
           to
           the
           Christian
           Caesars
           ,
           how
           can
           he
           call
           that
           of
           the
           Christian
           
             Caesars
             ,
             Dynasten
             quasi
             alium
             ,
             revera
             tamen
             non
             alium
             ?
          
           The
           words
           of
           the
           Text
           are
           plain
           ,
           
             Five
             are
             fallen
             ;
             one
             is
             ,
          
           to
           wit
           ,
           that
           of
           the
           Pagan
           Caesars
           ,
           when
           Iohn
           wrote
           the
           Revelation
           ;
           and
           
             the
             other
          
           ,
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           that
           
             of
             the
             Christian
             Caesars
             is
             not
             yet
             come
             .
          
           It
           is
           clear
           then
           ,
           that
           the
           Governments
           of
           the
           City
           of
           Rome
           are
           eight
           in
           all
           ,
           and
           not
           eight
           in
           appearance
           onely
           ;
           and
           the
           Dynasty
           of
           the
           Christian
           Caesars
           is
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           another
           in
           reality
           and
           truth
           ,
           and
           not
           another
           in
           shew
           onely
           ,
           as
           Mr.
           Mede
           will
           
           have
           it
           .
           So
           likewise
           for
           the
           Beast
           ,
           it
           is
           strange
           ,
           that
           he
           should
           affirm
           him
           to
           be
           
             quasi
             octavum
             Dynasten
          
           ,
           as
           it
           were
           the
           eighth
           Potentate
           ,
           
             sed
             revera
             non
             nisi
             septimum
          
           ,
           but
           in
           deed
           and
           in
           truth
           no
           other
           but
           the
           seventh
           .
           The
           words
           of
           the
           Text
           are
           express
           :
           
             The
             Beast
             that
             was
             ,
             and
             is
             not
             ,
          
           he
           is
           octavus
           ,
           the
           eighth
           in
           reality
           and
           in
           truth
           ,
           and
           not
           the
           eighth
           in
           appearance
           only
           .
           Therefore
           the
           Exposition
           of
           Mr.
           Mede
           doth
           contradict
           the
           words
           of
           the
           Text
           ,
           and
           the
           knot
           remains
           .
           Upon
           much
           debate
           ,
           I
           finde
           ,
           that
           we
           must
           go
           another
           way
           to
           work
           ;
           and
           here
           we
           must
           distinguish
           the
           Roman
           Governments
           ,
           as
           they
           are
           simply
           so
           called
           ,
           from
           the
           Roman
           Governments
           ,
           as
           they
           are
           Heads
           of
           the
           Beast
           .
           If
           you
           look
           upon
           the
           Roman
           Governments
           ,
           as
           so
           many
           Policies
           and
           Forms
           of
           Dominion
           ,
           then
           it
           is
           clear
           ,
           That
           there
           are
           eight
           Forms
           of
           Regency
           ;
           to
           wit
           ,
           The
           Kings
           ,
           the
           Consuls
           ,
           the
           Decemvirs
           ,
           the
           Dictators
           ,
           the
           Tribunes
           ,
           the
           Pagan
           Caesars
           ,
           the
           Christian
           Caesars
           ;
           and
           after
           all
           these
           seven
           ,
           cometh
           the
           Beast
           ,
           as
           
             octavus
             Dynastes
          
           ,
           the
           eighth
           Potentate
           .
           Now
           on
           the
           other
           side
           ,
           if
           you
           reckon
           the
           Heads
           of
           the
           Beast
           ,
           there
           can
           be
           but
           seven
           Heads
           ;
           and
           therefore
           the
           Beast
           must
           needs
           be
           the
           particular
           seventh
           ,
           seeing
           the
           Christian
           Caesars
           ,
           from
           Constantine
           to
           Augustus
           ,
           cannot
           be
           called
           an
           Head
           of
           the
           Beast
           at
           all
           ,
           unless
           we
           will
           go
           against
           the
           scope
           of
           Scripture
           :
           For
           it
           is
           not
           the
           manner
           of
           the
           Scripture
           ,
           to
           call
           Christian
           Governments
           by
           the
           Title
           of
           a
           Beast
           ,
           or
           the
           Head
           of
           a
           Beast
           :
           This
           Character
           doth
           properly
           appertain
           to
           the
           Kingdomes
           and
           States
           of
           this
           World
           ,
           that
           persecute
           the
           Church
           ,
           and
           are
           contrary
           to
           the
           Laws
           of
           the
           Kingdom
           of
           Christ.
           Upon
           this
           account
           the
           Christian
           Caesars
           do
           indeed
           make
           a
           distinct
           Dynasty
           or
           Policy
           ,
           and
           yet
           are
           no
           part
           or
           Head
           of
           the
           Beast
           .
           The
           words
           of
           the
           Text
           are
           clear
           :
           for
           when
           the
           Spirit
           speaketh
           of
           the
           other
           that
           should
           come
           ,
           to
           wit
           ,
           the
           Dynasty
           of
           the
           Christian
           Caesars
           ,
           he
           doth
           not
           say
           ,
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           another
           Head
           ;
           but
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           another
           King
           :
           which
           sheweth
           plainly
           ,
           That
           the
           Christian
           Casars
           are
           a
           distinct
           Form
           of
           Government
           ,
           but
           no
           Head
           of
           the
           Beast
           .
           So
           likewise
           the
           Beast
           of
           the
           last
           edition
           is
           not
           termed
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           the
           eighth
           Head
           ;
           but
           he
           is
           simply
           called
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           the
           eighth
           King.
           Touching
           the
           Kings
           ,
           it
           is
           
           spoken
           of
           them
           ,
           
             Five
             are
             fallen
             ,
             one
             is
             ,
             and
             the
             other
             is
             not
             yet
             come
             :
             and
             the
             Beast
             that
             cometh
             out
             of
             the
             Bottomless
             Pit
             ,
             he
             is
             the
             eighth
             .
          
           To
           satisfie
           the
           doubt
           ,
           we
           do
           pitch
           upon
           this
           sense
           ,
           that
           
             the
             Beast
             is
             both
             the
             eighth
             Dynasty
             ,
             and
             the
             seventh
             Head.
          
           For
           if
           you
           reckon
           by
           the
           order
           of
           Kings
           ,
           (
           the
           Dynasty
           of
           the
           Christian
           Caesars
           being
           included
           )
           he
           must
           needs
           be
           the
           eighth
           .
           But
           if
           you
           reckon
           by
           the
           Heads
           of
           the
           Beast
           ,
           which
           are
           Pagan
           and
           Idolatrous
           Forms
           of
           Government
           ;
           then
           that
           of
           the
           Christian
           Caesars
           must
           be
           
             Status
             ex●…resimus
          
           ,
           or
           exemptilis
           ,
           a
           State
           exempted
           and
           put
           out
           of
           the
           Kalendar
           .
           From
           whence
           it
           comes
           to
           pass
           ,
           That
           the
           Beast
           ,
           if
           you
           reckon
           him
           among
           the
           Kings
           ,
           his
           place
           is
           to
           be
           the
           eighth
           ;
           but
           yet
           among
           the
           Heads
           ,
           he
           is
           but
           the
           seventh
           .
           And
           so
           these
           words
           ,
           
             The
             Beast
             that
             was
             ,
             and
             is
             not
             ,
             he
             is
             the
             eighth
             ,
             and
             is
             one
             of
             the
             seventh
             ,
          
           are
           plain
           (
           as
           I
           take
           it
           )
           and
           the
           knot
           is
           untied
           .
           But
           leaving
           this
           scruple
           ,
           I
           finde
           ,
           That
           all
           solid
           Interpreters
           do
           agree
           in
           the
           general
           sense
           of
           the
           Text
           ;
           to
           wit
           ,
           That
           the
           Antichristian
           times
           begin
           at
           the
           fall
           of
           the
           Empire
           ,
           and
           the
           rising
           of
           the
           Ten
           Kings
           .
           The
           words
           of
           the
           Angel
           are
           so
           clear
           ;
           for
           speaking
           of
           the
           Roman
           Dominion
           ,
           and
           the
           Ten
           Horns
           of
           that
           Beast
           ,
           he
           expresly
           saith
           ,
           
             These
             have
             no
             Kingdome
             as
             yet
             ,
             but
             shall
             receive
             a
             Kingdome
             one
             hour
             with
             the
             Beast
             :
          
           which
           plainly
           sheweth
           ,
           That
           their
           times
           shall
           be
           ,
           when
           the
           Roman
           Dominion
           shall
           come
           to
           the
           last
           and
           Antichristian
           edition
           of
           State.
           The
           fall
           of
           the
           old
           Empire
           ,
           and
           the
           rising
           of
           the
           Ten
           Kings
           ,
           is
           an
           infallible
           Character
           of
           the
           beginning
           of
           the
           Antichristian
           times
           .
           And
           this
           no
           man
           can
           rationally
           deny
           ,
           that
           doth
           look
           upon
           the
           true
           scope
           of
           the
           Angels
           Interpretation
           .
        
         
           But
           our
           question
           is
           ,
           concerning
           the
           times
           of
           the
           Great
           Whore
           ;
           when
           was
           it
           that
           she
           did
           begin
           to
           ride
           the
           Beast
           ?
           We
           cannot
           say
           ,
           That
           it
           was
           at
           that
           time
           when
           the
           Kings
           did
           rise
           out
           of
           the
           ruines
           of
           the
           Empire
           :
           For
           then
           the
           Kings
           of
           the
           Earth
           did
           not
           dogmatically
           and
           conscientiously
           acknowledge
           the
           Church
           of
           Rome
           the
           Mother
           of
           all
           Churches
           .
           To
           the
           resolution
           of
           the
           case
           ,
           we
           will
           consider
           what
           Expositors
           do
           say
           to
           this
           purpose
           .
           For
           in
           the
           17th
           Chapter
           ,
           though
           there
           is
           mention
           made
           of
           the
           Beast
           with
           Ten
           Horns
           ;
           yet
           there
           is
           
           not
           the
           least
           word
           of
           the
           two-horned
           Beast
           .
           Now
           the
           reason
           ordinarily
           given
           ,
           is
           very
           solid
           ,
           and
           it
           doth
           agree
           with
           the
           scope
           of
           the
           Scripture
           :
           For
           it
           is
           plain
           ,
           That
           the
           description
           under
           the
           resemblance
           of
           a
           Beast
           with
           two
           Horns
           ,
           Chap.
           13.
           is
           again
           repeated
           under
           the
           similitude
           and
           type
           of
           a
           Great
           Whore
           ,
           Chap.
           17.
           
           Both
           Scriptures
           speak
           of
           one
           and
           the
           same
           matter
           in
           substance
           ,
           though
           in
           a
           different
           manner
           :
           And
           if
           need
           should
           require
           ,
           we
           have
           many
           Arguments
           to
           prove
           the
           Parallel
           .
        
         
           Now
           then
           ,
           in
           the
           present
           case
           ,
           seeing
           Iohn
           speaks
           of
           the
           City
           of
           Rome
           ,
           that
           in
           his
           days
           was
           the
           great
           City
           that
           ruled
           over
           the
           Kings
           of
           the
           Earth
           ,
           it
           is
           to
           our
           purpose
           to
           inquire
           ,
           when
           the
           Church
           came
           within
           the
           verge
           of
           the
           Dominion
           o●…
           that
           great
           City
           .
           And
           here
           I
           say
           ,
           if
           we
           calculate
           the
           times
           aright
           ,
           and
           reckon
           666
           years
           ,
           from
           that
           time
           when
           that
           great
           City
           came
           to
           have
           Dominion
           over
           the
           Church
           ,
           we
           shall
           precisely
           come
           to
           that
           point
           and
           instant
           of
           time
           ,
           when
           the
           Church
           of
           Rome
           was
           made
           the
           Catholick
           and
           the
           General
           Mother
           of
           all
           other
           Churches
           .
           The
           Church
           first
           came
           under
           the
           Dominion
           of
           the
           City
           of
           Rome
           :
           and
           then
           666
           years
           after
           ,
           ●…hat
           Church
           her self
           was
           declared
           Universal
           Mother
           of
           all
           Churches
           .
           And
           here
           then
           our
           Interpretation
           is
           one
           and
           the
           same
           in
           substance
           ,
           in
           both
           Scriptures
           .
           And
           whereas
           the
           Woman
           hath
           this
           Inscription
           on
           her
           Forehead
           ,
           
             Mystery
             ,
             Babylon
             the
             Great
             ,
             the
             Mother
             of
             Harlots
             ,
             and
             the
             Abominations
             of
             the
             Earth
             :
          
           The
           Name
           then
           on
           the
           Forehead
           of
           the
           Woman
           ,
           is
           not
           a
           Grammatical
           word
           ,
           consisting
           of
           Letters
           and
           Syllables
           ;
           but
           it
           signifieth
           her
           Universal
           Maternity
           or
           Motherhood
           ,
           when
           she
           began
           to
           be
           declared
           Universal
           Mother
           over
           all
           other
           Churches
           .
           Now
           if
           you
           apply
           this
           to
           the
           times
           ,
           it
           came
           to
           pass
           in
           the
           666th
           year
           from
           that
           time
           ,
           when
           the
           Church
           ,
           and
           the
           Territories
           of
           the
           Church
           ,
           came
           under
           the
           obedience
           of
           the
           City
           of
           Rome
           .
           And
           this
           is
           the
           Number
           of
           her
           Maternity
           or
           general
           Motherhood
           ,
           or
           of
           the
           Name
           written
           in
           the
           Forehead
           of
           the
           Woman
           .
           If
           we
           apply
           this
           to
           the
           two-horned
           Beast
           in
           the
           13
           Chapter
           ,
           his
           Name
           is
           no
           other
           ,
           but
           his
           Paternity
           or
           Universal
           Headship
           ;
           and
           the
           Number
           of
           his
           
           Name
           is
           no
           other
           ,
           but
           the
           Number
           of
           his
           Universal
           Headship
           ,
           from
           the
           beginning
           of
           the
           Roman
           as
           the
           fourth
           Metal-Kingdome
           .
           And
           so
           the
           sense
           of
           one
           Chapter
           is
           clear
           ,
           by
           the
           scope
           and
           drift
           of
           the
           other
           .
           But
           we
           go
           on
           .
        
      
       
         
           
             CHAP.
             X.
          
           A
           List
           of
           Fifteen
           Principles
           drawn
           from
           the
           main
           sense
           of
           the
           Prophecy
           ,
           concerning
           the
           Beast
           ,
           his
           Name
           ,
           Mark
           ,
           and
           Number
           ;
           by
           the
           Position
           of
           which
           ,
           the
           present
           Interpretation
           is
           established
           .
           Also
           ,
           the
           several
           Expositions
           of
           Mr.
           Potter
           and
           other
           Writers
           ,
           are
           brought
           to
           Tryall
           .
        
         
           FOr
           the
           more
           full
           proof
           of
           the
           Point
           ,
           we
           must
           take
           the
           same
           method
           to
           prove
           the
           truth
           of
           our
           Interpretation
           ,
           as
           Divines
           do
           when
           they
           would
           prove
           the
           Pope
           to
           be
           Anti-Christ
           .
           They
           do
           infallibly
           determine
           him
           to
           be
           so
           ,
           because
           all
           the
           Properties
           of
           the
           Beast
           ,
           do
           punctually
           pitch
           upon
           that
           Seat
           or
           Succession
           :
           So
           in
           the
           present
           case
           ,
           we
           may
           say
           ,
           That
           666
           is
           such
           a
           Number
           of
           years
           ,
           to
           the
           setting
           up
           of
           the
           Name
           or
           Universal
           Headship
           of
           the
           Beast
           .
           And
           this
           we
           take
           to
           be
           an
           infallible
           and
           undoubted
           Truth
           ,
           because
           all
           the
           Principles
           of
           the
           Prophecy
           do
           pitch
           ,
           and
           mainly
           centre
           upon
           such
           an
           Interpretation
           .
           We
           can
           prove
           the
           truth
           thereof
           ,
           by
           the
           accumulation
           of
           Notes
           .
           W●…
           may
           further
           take
           in
           the
           words
           of
           the
           Jesuite
           Suarez
           ;
           for
           he
           himself
           well
           obserueth
           ,
           
             That
             it
             is
             not
             sufficient
             to
             decypher
             Antichrist
             by
             one
             ,
             two
             ,
             or
             three
             Notes
             ,
             but
             by
             the
             Concurrence
             of
             all
             the
             Properties
             that
             do
             appertain
             to
             him
             :
          
           So
           I
           may
           say
           ,
           for
           a
           tight
           Exposition
           of
           the
           Name
           of
           the
           Beast
           ,
           and
           the
           Number
           thereof
           ,
           we
           must
           not
           rest
           in
           a
           few
           Circumstances
           ,
           for
           so
           many
           have
           been
           brought
           for
           the
           name
           Lateinos
           .
           And
           M.
           P●…tters
           Interpretation
           also
           seemeth
           to
           be
           very
           
           fair
           .
           But
           this
           is
           that
           which
           I
           mainly
           stand
           upon
           ,
           That
           their
           several
           Interpretations
           will
           not
           agree
           with
           many
           Principles
           .
           The
           same
           course
           then
           that
           we
           take
           to
           prove
           the
           Truth
           ,
           shall
           be
           to
           disprove
           their
           Error
           .
           But
           now
           to
           the
           Principles
           in
           order
           .
        
         
           Princ.
           1.
           
           
             The
             Name
             of
             the
             Beast
             ,
             his
             Mark
             and
             Number
             ,
             do
             all
             agree
             to
             the
             Papall
             Tyranny
             ,
             by
             a
             special
             application
             .
          
           This
           is
           proved
           from
           the
           whole
           scope
           of
           the
           Text.
           For
           the
           Beast
           is
           a
           Tyrannical
           Empire
           or
           Government
           ;
           and
           not
           onely
           so
           ,
           but
           also
           a
           Roman
           Tyrannical
           Empire
           ,
           in
           the
           last
           edition
           thereof
           :
           Therefore
           these
           Characters
           are
           specially
           applicable
           to
           that
           Government
           ,
           and
           to
           the
           Hierarchy
           thereof
           ,
           and
           not
           to
           any
           other
           .
           They
           erre
           therefore
           ,
           that
           seek
           after
           the
           Number
           in
           the
           Name
           of
           any
           one
           particular
           man
           ,
           as
           Bellarmine
           doth
           in
           the
           Names
           of
           some
           Protestant
           Divines
           .
           Whereas
           ,
           to
           speak
           properly
           ,
           the
           Name
           of
           the
           Beast
           is
           the
           Name
           of
           a
           Tyrannical
           State
           or
           Government
           .
           Secondly
           ,
           they
           also
           do
           depart
           far
           from
           the
           Truth
           ,
           that
           will
           have
           the
           word
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           to
           be
           the
           Name
           of
           the
           Beast
           .
           And
           though
           indeed
           the
           Name
           doth
           make
           666
           ,
           according
           to
           the
           Numeral
           Letters
           in
           the
           Greek
           Alphabet
           ;
           this
           cannot
           be
           the
           sense
           :
           For
           though
           the
           Turks
           make
           a
           Tyrannical
           Empire
           ,
           and
           have
           greatly
           afflicted
           the
           Church
           ;
           yet
           the
           scop●…
           of
           the
           Spirit
           is
           here
           mainly
           to
           speak
           of
           a
           Roman
           Tyrannical
           State
           in
           the
           last
           edition
           ;
           and
           this
           is
           clear
           from
           the
           scope
           of
           the
           whole
           Prophecy
           .
        
         
           Princ.
           2.
           
           
             The
             Name
             of
             the
             Beast
             ,
             his
             Mark
             ,
             Image
             ,
             and
             the
             Number
             of
             his
             Name
             ,
             ought
             so
             to
             be
             expounded
             ,
             that
             all
             these
             may
             have
             mutual
             relation
             each
             to
             other
             .
          
           This
           is
           proved
           from
           the
           Text
           ,
           Chap.
           13.
           ver
           .
           15
           ,
           16
           ,
           17
           ,
           18.
           
           Chap.
           14.
           ver
           .
           9
           ,
           10
           ,
           11.
           
           For
           there
           the
           persons
           who
           did
           worship
           the
           Image
           of
           the
           Beast
           ,
           are
           also
           said
           to
           receive
           his
           Mark
           in
           their
           Forehead
           ,
           and
           in
           their
           Right-hand
           .
           Now
           how
           is
           it
           possible
           that
           they
           could
           receive
           the
           Mark
           ,
           but
           they
           must
           also
           receive
           the
           Name
           ,
           sith
           it
           is
           called
           
             The
             Mark
             of
             the
             Name
          
           ?
           And
           how
           can
           they
           receive
           the
           Name
           ,
           but
           they
           must
           receive
           the
           Number
           ,
           seeing
           it
           is
           styled
           ,
           
             The
             Number
             of
             the
             Name
          
           ?
           All
           these
           are
           Homogeneal
           ,
           and
           have
           near
           relation
           each
           to
           other
           .
           And
           therefore
           when
           
           Iohn
           did
           behold
           that
           company
           that
           stood
           upon
           the
           glassie
           Sea
           mingled
           with
           fire
           ,
           and
           did
           sing
           the
           triumphal
           Song
           in
           honor
           to
           the
           Lamb
           ;
           they
           are
           said
           to
           overcome
           the
           Beast
           ,
           his
           Image
           ,
           Mark
           ,
           and
           the
           Number
           of
           his
           Name
           .
           Therefore
           all
           these
           have
           a
           neer
           affinity
           and
           correspondence
           each
           with
           other
           .
           From
           whence
           we
           may
           convince
           those
           Interpreters
           of
           error
           ,
           who
           do
           distinguish
           the
           Subjects
           of
           the
           Beast
           into
           divers
           kindes
           ;
           into
           those
           that
           worship
           the
           Image
           ,
           into
           others
           that
           receive
           the
           Mark
           ,
           into
           a
           third
           sort
           that
           have
           the
           Number
           of
           the
           Name
           :
           Whereas
           ,
           according
           to
           the
           Text
           ,
           the
           same
           persons
           that
           worship
           the
           Image
           ,
           receive
           the
           Mark
           and
           the
           Number
           thereof
           .
           Secondly
           ,
           those
           Expositors
           are
           too
           blame
           ,
           which
           do
           not
           ground
           their
           Demonstration
           upon
           these
           things
           ,
           but
           do
           immediately
           proceed
           to
           calculate
           the
           Number
           .
           Mr.
           Potter
           in
           his
           Treatise
           ,
           endeavoreth
           to
           finde
           out
           the
           Number
           in
           six
           things
           in
           the
           Hierarchy
           of
           the
           Church
           of
           Rome
           ,
           as
           they
           stand
           opposite
           to
           six
           things
           in
           the
           
             New
             Ierusalem
          
           .
           But
           in
           my
           apprehension
           ,
           he
           doth
           not
           lay
           a
           right
           foundation
           :
           for
           the
           Number
           which
           he
           is
           to
           calculate
           ,
           is
           the
           Number
           of
           the
           Name
           of
           the
           Beast
           ;
           and
           the
           Number
           is
           answerable
           to
           the
           Mark.
           Therefore
           the
           proper
           work
           which
           he
           hath
           to
           do
           ,
           is
           ,
           to
           handle
           these
           matters
           ,
           and
           not
           six
           things
           in
           the
           Hierarchy
           of
           the
           Church
           of
           Rome
           ,
           immediately
           opposed
           to
           six
           things
           in
           the
           description
           of
           the
           
             New
             Ierusalem
          
           .
        
         
           Princ.
           3.
           
           
             The
             Name
             of
             the
             Beast
             ,
             his
             Mark
             and
             Number
             ,
             must
             necessarily
             begin
             at
             the
             first
             Visible
             Constitution
             of
             his
             Dominion
             ;
             and
             continue
             in
             all
             times
             ,
             to
             the
             end
             thereof
             .
          
           For
           the
           first
           Visible
           Constitution
           ,
           we
           reade
           ,
           That
           as
           soon
           as
           the
           second
           Beast
           came
           up
           out
           of
           the
           Earth
           ,
           
             he
             made
             an
             Image
             to
             the
             Beast
             ,
             and
             caused
             all
             to
             worship
             the
             Image
             ,
             and
             to
             receive
             a
             Mark
             in
             their
             Forehead
             ,
          
           Chap.
           13.
           ver
           .
           14
           ,
           15
           ,
           16
           ,
           17.
           
           Now
           this
           was
           not
           done
           onely
           at
           the
           time
           of
           the
           beginning
           ,
           but
           in
           all
           the
           times
           of
           that
           Kingdome
           ,
           from
           the
           beginning
           to
           the
           end
           .
           For
           ,
           
             the
             Vials
             were
             poured
             out
             upon
             them
             that
             worshipped
             the
             Beast
             ,
             and
             received
             the
             Mark
             ,
          
           Chap.
           16.
           ver
           .
           2.
           
           And
           at
           the
           ending
           of
           the
           Beasts
           Kingdome
           ,
           when
           the
           eternal
           Gospel
           is
           preached
           to
           every
           Kindred
           ,
           Tongue
           and
           Nation
           ;
           then
           are
           the
           threatnings
           
           denounced
           against
           all
           those
           that
           worship
           the
           Beast
           ,
           and
           receive
           the
           Mark
           ,
           Chap.
           14.
           ver
           .
           9
           ,
           10
           ,
           11.
           
           From
           whence
           we
           gather
           ,
           That
           the
           Name
           ,
           Mark
           and
           Image
           ,
           must
           be
           in
           all
           the
           times
           of
           the
           Kingdome
           of
           the
           Beast
           .
           According
           to
           this
           Rule
           ,
           how
           can
           Iunius
           apply
           the
           Number
           of
           the
           Beast
           to
           the
           Canon-Law
           ?
           How
           can
           he
           make
           it
           appear
           ,
           that
           this
           Law
           hath
           been
           in
           force
           all
           the
           times
           of
           that
           Kingdome
           ?
           Mr.
           Potter
           also
           ,
           when
           he
           doth
           apply
           this
           Number
           to
           the
           Cardinals
           ,
           Gates
           ,
           and
           other
           circumstances
           in
           the
           City
           of
           Rome
           ;
           how
           can
           he
           prove
           ,
           that
           these
           have
           been
           in
           all
           the
           times
           of
           that
           Kingdom
           ?
           He
           doth
           mainly
           stand
           upon
           it
           ,
           
             That
             the
             Cardinals
             are
             the
             very
             Essence
             of
             the
             Papacy
             ,
             so
             nearly
             united
             to
             the
             Pope
             ,
             that
             they
             make
             one
             Body
             ,
             containing
             and
             representing
             all
             Ecelesiastical
             Iurisdiction
             .
          
           Well
           ,
           be
           it
           so
           ;
           but
           how
           proveth
           he
           this
           Colledge
           to
           have
           been
           in
           all
           the
           times
           of
           the
           Beasts
           Kingdome
           ?
           I
           do
           willingly
           yield
           to
           that
           solid
           determination
           of
           his
           :
           
             I
             conceive
          
           (
           saith
           he
           )
           
             the
             second
             Beast
             ,
             mentioned
          
           Rev.
           13.
           ver
           .
           11.
           
             to
             be
             that
             unlawful
             Ecclesiastical
             Power
             ,
             which
             these
             latter
             times
             have
             setled
             upon
             the
             Pope
             .
             And
             I
             believe
             ,
             that
             he
             is
             the
             Great
             Anti-Christ
             ,
             not
             as
             Bishop
             ,
             or
             Archbishop
             ,
             or
             Patriarch
             ;
             but
             as
             he
             pretends
             himself
             Pope
             ,
             and
             Vicar
             of
             Christ
             ;
             having
             such
             a
             transcendent
             Ecclesiastical
             Power
             ,
             as
             is
             incommunicable
             to
             any
             other
             upon
             Earth
             ,
          
           pag.
           55.
           
           This
           Testimony
           I
           take
           to
           be
           a
           plain
           Scripture-truth
           ;
           and
           for
           my
           part
           ,
           I
           do
           believe
           ,
           Though
           the
           Mystery
           of
           Iniquity
           was
           long
           in
           working
           ,
           the
           Bishop
           of
           Rome
           did
           not
           begin
           to
           be
           the
           solemn
           Antichrist
           ,
           and
           the
           two-horned
           Beast
           did
           not
           rise
           up
           out
           of
           the
           earth
           ,
           till
           the
           times
           of
           the
           Universal
           Headship
           .
           In
           this
           I
           do
           fully
           agree
           with
           the
           Author
           aforenamed
           :
           But
           yet
           ,
           with
           submission
           to
           a
           better
           judgement
           ,
           I
           cannot
           understand
           how
           the
           Colledge
           of
           Cardinals
           ,
           or
           the
           other
           five
           particular
           Circumstances
           ,
           applied
           to
           the
           Hierarchy
           of
           Rome
           ,
           how
           these
           began
           at
           the
           time
           of
           the
           declaration
           of
           the
           Universal
           Headship
           ;
           or
           how
           they
           have
           continued
           in
           all
           the
           times
           of
           the
           Beasts
           Kingdome
           ,
           from
           the
           beginning
           to
           the
           end
           thereof
           .
           Now
           it
           is
           apparently
           evident
           ,
           That
           the
           Name
           and
           the
           Mark
           have
           been
           applicable
           to
           the
           Kingdome
           of
           the
           Beast
           in
           all
           the
           times
           thereof
           .
        
         
         
           Princ.
           4.
           
           
             In
             submitting
             to
             ,
             in
             worshipping
             the
             Image
             ,
             and
             in
             receiving
             the
             Mark
             ,
             the
             Name
             ,
             and
             the
             Number
             of
             the
             Name
             ,
             hath
             been
             the
             great
             sin
             of
             the
             world
             in
             departing
             from
             Christ.
          
           This
           may
           be
           proved
           from
           the
           whole
           scope
           of
           the
           Prophecy
           :
           the
           great
           deceiving
           of
           the
           Nations
           in
           all
           Antichristian
           times
           ,
           hath
           been
           in
           the
           matter
           of
           the
           worship
           of
           the
           Image
           ,
           and
           receiving
           the
           Mark
           ,
           Chap.
           20.
           ver
           .
           1
           ,
           2
           ,
           3.
           
           Chap.
           13.
           ver
           .
           15
           ,
           16
           ,
           17
           ,
           18.
           
           From
           whence
           I
           further
           argue
           ,
           That
           the
           Number
           25
           cannot
           be
           proved
           to
           be
           the
           Number
           of
           the
           Name
           of
           the
           Beast
           ;
           neither
           hath
           the
           Apostacy
           of
           the
           world
           consisted
           in
           the
           frequent
           and
           superstitious
           use
           of
           this
           Number
           .
           For
           how
           doth
           a
           State
           sin
           ,
           when
           they
           use
           such
           a
           particular
           Number
           as
           this
           ?
           The
           Philistims
           were
           a
           people
           given
           to
           superstitious
           observations
           ;
           yet
           I
           cannot
           see
           how
           they
           did
           sin
           in
           the
           observation
           of
           the
           Number
           5
           ,
           when
           they
           did
           send
           five
           Golden
           Emerods
           ,
           and
           five
           Golden
           Mice
           ,
           1
           Sam.
           6.
           4.
           
           The
           Number
           5
           ,
           is
           the
           Number
           of
           so
           many
           parts
           of
           their
           Jurisdiction
           ;
           and
           thereupon
           they
           observed
           this
           Number
           in
           their
           Trespass-offering
           :
           But
           we
           cannot
           say
           ,
           that
           it
           was
           their
           sin
           to
           do
           it
           .
           Neither
           can
           I
           see
           (
           if
           there
           should
           be
           the
           like
           National
           cause
           )
           that
           it
           is
           simply
           a
           sin
           in
           any
           State
           ,
           to
           be
           frequent
           in
           the
           use
           of
           the
           Number
           25.
           
           For
           in
           it self
           ,
           what
           good
           or
           what
           evil
           is
           in
           that
           Number
           ?
           You
           will
           then
           say
           ,
           What
           is
           meant
           by
           the
           Name
           ,
           and
           the
           Number
           thereof
           ?
           I
           answer
           ,
           Take
           the
           Number
           666
           severally
           by
           it self
           ,
           it
           is
           nothing
           ;
           but
           if
           you
           take
           it
           joyntly
           ,
           as
           the
           Character
           of
           the
           Name
           ,
           and
           the
           Mark
           of
           the
           Name
           ,
           we
           may
           say
           ,
           That
           in
           these
           things
           hath
           consisted
           the
           grand
           Apostacy
           of
           the
           latter
           Times
           .
           And
           for
           Mr.
           Potters
           Interpretation
           ,
           I
           cannot
           be
           satisfied
           in
           it
           ,
           for
           these
           three
           Reasons
           :
           First
           ,
           he
           undertaketh
           to
           expound
           the
           Number
           ,
           and
           to
           apply
           it
           to
           so
           many
           Cardinals
           ,
           so
           many
           Churches
           ,
           so
           many
           Altars
           ,
           &c.
           
           Whereas
           the
           Number
           is
           not
           the
           Number
           of
           these
           ,
           but
           it
           is
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           the
           Number
           of
           the
           Name
           of
           the
           Beast
           .
           Secondly
           ,
           he
           undertaketh
           to
           shew
           ,
           how
           the
           Beast
           is
           frequent
           in
           the
           use
           of
           such
           a
           particular
           Number
           :
           whereas
           the
           Number
           is
           rather
           the
           specifi●…al
           Note
           and
           Character
           of
           the
           Kingdome
           it self
           ,
           Thirdly
           ,
           he
           sheweth
           how
           the
           Beast
           is
           frequent
           in
           the
           
           use
           of
           the
           Number
           25
           ,
           the
           square-root
           of
           666.
           
           But
           what
           sin
           is
           there
           in
           the
           frequent
           use
           of
           such
           a
           Number
           ?
           To
           speak
           properly
           ,
           in
           these
           things
           there
           is
           neither
           good
           nor
           evil
           .
           These
           are
           some
           of
           the
           Reasons
           ,
           that
           move
           me
           to
           depart
           from
           the
           Interpretation
           of
           the
           forementioned
           Author
           ;
           whom
           I
           do
           otherwise
           acknowledge
           to
           be
           a
           man
           of
           solid
           and
           excellent
           Learning
           ,
           and
           much
           to
           be
           approved
           for
           his
           industry
           and
           diligence
           ,
           which
           he
           hath
           bestowed
           toward
           the
           discovery
           of
           these
           Mysteries
           .
        
         
           Princ.
           5.
           
           
             For
             the
             Mark
             of
             the
             Beast
             ,
             and
             for
             the
             worship
             of
             the
             Image
             ,
             and
             for
             such-like
             things
             ,
             the
             world
             is
             made
             liable
             to
             the
             most
             grievous
             Iudgements
             of
             God.
          
           This
           I
           have
           largely
           proved
           from
           Rev.
           14.
           9
           ,
           10
           ,
           11.
           
           Now
           if
           you
           apply
           this
           to
           singulars
           ,
           How
           can
           men
           rationally
           be
           tormented
           day
           and
           night
           ?
           How
           can
           the
           smoke
           of
           their
           burning
           ascend
           for
           ever
           and
           ever
           ,
           for
           the
           superstitious
           use
           of
           the
           Number
           25
           ,
           the
           square-root
           of
           666
           ?
           Surely
           ,
           all
           these
           things
           ought
           so
           to
           be
           stated
           ,
           that
           the
           Justice
           of
           God
           may
           be
           cleared
           in
           the
           execution
           of
           Judgement
           .
           I
           cannot
           then
           think
           ,
           that
           so
           grievous
           a
           Judgement
           is
           denounced
           against
           the
           superstitious
           use
           of
           the
           Number
           25
           ;
           but
           rather
           (
           as
           I
           have
           largely
           proved
           )
           for
           the
           yielding
           subjection
           to
           the
           Name
           or
           Universal
           Headship
           of
           the
           Bishop
           of
           Rome
           ,
           as
           it
           began
           publickly
           to
           be
           established
           in
           the
           666th
           year
           from
           the
           beginning
           of
           the
           Roman
           ,
           as
           the
           fourth
           Metal-Kingdome
           .
        
         
           Princ.
           6.
           
           
             In
             over
             coming
             the
             Name
             of
             the
             Beast
             ,
             and
             the
             Number
             of
             the
             Name
             ,
             standeth
             the
             special
             object
             of
             the
             Martyrs
             Victory
             .
          
           This
           I
           have
           largely
           proved
           ,
           from
           Chap.
           15.
           ver
           .
           2.
           
           The
           persons
           that
           stood
           on
           the
           glassie
           Sea
           ,
           that
           overcame
           the
           Beast
           ,
           were
           the
           company
           and
           society
           of
           Martyrs
           ,
           which
           suffered
           for
           Christ
           in
           all
           Antichristian
           times
           ;
           and
           their
           Victory
           is
           no
           other
           but
           a
           Victory
           of
           Martyrdome
           .
           Now
           if
           you
           apply
           this
           to
           the
           ordinary
           Interpretation
           :
           If
           the
           Name
           of
           the
           Beast
           be
           no
           other
           but
           the
           word
           Lateinos
           ,
           and
           the
           Number
           no
           other
           but
           the
           Numeral
           Letters
           of
           that
           Name
           ;
           what
           a
           kinde
           of
           Victory
           shall
           the
           Martyrs
           obtain
           over
           Words
           ,
           and
           Syllables
           ,
           and
           Numeral
           Letters
           ?
           We
           may
           be
           well
           assured
           ,
           That
           there
           
           is
           another
           kinde
           of
           meaning
           in
           these
           words
           ;
           that
           is
           ,
           the
           Martyrs
           did
           overcome
           that
           Power
           ,
           Authority
           ,
           and
           Universal
           Headship
           it self
           ,
           which
           began
           solemnly
           and
           publickly
           to
           be
           established
           in
           the
           666th
           year
           ,
           from
           the
           beginning
           of
           the
           Roman
           as
           the
           fourth
           Metal-Kingdome
           .
        
         
           Princ.
           7.
           
           
             The
             glorious
             Resurrection
             of
             the
             Martyrs
             to
             reign
             with
             Christ
          
           1000
           
             years
             ,
             is
             grounded
             in
             special
             upon
             this
             Reason
             ,
             Because
             they
             did
             refuse
             to
             worship
             the
             Image
             ,
             and
             to
             receive
             the
             Mark.
          
           And
           therefore
           Iohn
           in
           the
           Vision
           saith
           ,
           
             I
             saw
             the
             souls
             of
             them
             that
             were
             beheaded
             for
             the
             Word
             of
             God
             ,
             and
             the
             Testimony
             of
             Iesus
             ,
             that
             these
             lived
          
           (
           to
           wit
           ,
           out
           of
           their
           Antichristian
           death
           )
           
             and
             reigned
             with
             Christ
          
           1000
           years
           ,
           Chap.
           20.
           v.
           3.
           
           It
           is
           evident
           from
           hence
           then
           ,
           That
           the
           Name
           Lateinos
           ,
           or
           any
           such-like
           Grammatical
           word
           ,
           cannot
           be
           the
           Name
           of
           the
           Beast
           :
           For
           the
           Martyrs
           were
           never
           put
           to
           death
           ,
           neither
           shall
           they
           ever
           have
           their
           glorious
           Resurrection
           ,
           for
           Names
           consisting
           of
           Letters
           and
           Syllables
           .
           The
           slaughter
           hath
           been
           mainly
           for
           the
           refusal
           of
           the
           Authority
           ,
           and
           the
           Laws
           made
           by
           the
           Authority
           or
           Universal
           Headship
           of
           the
           Bishop
           of
           Rome
           .
           Therefore
           their
           glorious
           Resurrection
           to
           reign
           with
           Christ
           ,
           shall
           be
           for
           their
           suffering
           in
           the
           behalfe
           of
           Christ.
           
        
         
           Princ.
           8.
           
           
             The
             Image
             of
             the
             Beast
             ought
             so
             to
             be
             expounded
             ,
             that
             it
             may
             express
             to
             the
             life
             the
             repair
             of
             Roman
             Majesty
             ,
             after
             the
             deadly
             wound
             .
          
           This
           is
           proved
           from
           the
           scope
           of
           the
           Text.
           When
           the
           second
           Beast
           came
           out
           of
           the
           earth
           ,
           he
           did
           cure
           the
           deadly
           wound
           that
           the
           first
           Beast
           had
           in
           one
           of
           his
           Heads
           .
           
             He
             had
             power
             also
             to
             give
             life
             to
             the
             Image
             of
             the
             Beast
             ,
             that
             the
             Image
             should
             both
             speak
             and
             live
             ,
          
           Chap.
           13.
           ver
           .
           14
           ,
           15.
           
           Now
           for
           the
           curing
           of
           the
           wound
           of
           the
           first
           Beast
           ,
           and
           the
           giving
           life
           to
           the
           Image
           of
           the
           Beast
           ;
           these
           typical
           expressions
           do
           denote
           the
           onely
           repair
           of
           Roman
           Majesty
           ,
           after
           the
           fall
           of
           the
           old
           Empire
           .
           This
           is
           clear
           from
           the
           scope
           of
           the
           Scripture
           ,
           and
           it
           is
           abundantly
           shewed
           in
           many
           Commentaries
           .
           The
           Angel
           also
           in
           Rev.
           17.
           hath
           this
           expression
           ,
           
             The
             Beast
             thou
             sawest
             ,
             that
             was
             ,
             is
             not
             ,
             and
             yet
             is
             .
          
           Here
           he
           speaketh
           of
           the
           marvelous
           recovery
           of
           the
           Roman
           Majesty
           ,
           after
           a
           former
           
           loss
           and
           destruction
           :
           which
           is
           nothing
           else
           in
           sense
           and
           substance
           ,
           but
           the
           making
           of
           an
           Image
           to
           the
           Beast
           that
           was
           wounded
           in
           one
           of
           his
           Heads
           ,
           and
           the
           causing
           of
           the
           Image
           both
           to
           speak
           and
           live
           .
           For
           in
           a
           sense
           it
           is
           true
           ,
           that
           there
           was
           a
           total
           eradication
           of
           the
           Roman
           Soveraignty
           for
           a
           while
           ;
           and
           when
           it
           was
           set
           up
           in
           the
           Popes
           ,
           there
           was
           a
           kinde
           of
           reviving
           ,
           and
           a
           rising
           of
           that
           Soveraignty
           from
           the
           dead
           .
           The
           laying
           down
           of
           this
           one
           Position
           ,
           did
           drive
           me
           from
           an
           Interpretation
           ,
           which
           seemed
           to
           be
           very
           plausible
           in
           my
           first
           meditations
           upon
           this
           Argument
           .
           Now
           that
           particular
           Interpretation
           did
           concern
           the
           times
           of
           Victor
           his
           Excommunicating
           the
           Churches
           of
           Asia
           ,
           not
           long
           after
           the
           writing
           of
           the
           Revelation
           .
           Now
           because
           the
           Roman
           Jurisdiction
           over
           all
           Churches
           ,
           did
           begin
           to
           make
           its
           first
           visible
           appearance
           in
           these
           times
           ;
           I
           did
           therefore
           apply
           the
           Number
           of
           the
           Beast
           to
           the
           forementioned
           Excommunication
           .
           And
           for
           the
           particular
           time
           ,
           Calvisius
           the
           Chronologer
           saith
           ,
           That
           
             those
             Churches
             were
             Excommunicated
             in
             the
             year
             of
             the
             World
          
           4145
           ,
           
             and
             in
             the
             year
             of
             the
             Lord
          
           196.
           
           Now
           if
           you
           subduct
           666
           years
           out
           of
           4145
           ,
           there
           will
           remain
           the
           3479th
           year
           of
           the
           World
           ,
           which
           was
           the
           first
           year
           of
           the
           Twentieth
           Jubilee
           ,
           according
           to
           the
           Authority
           of
           the
           Chronologer
           aforementioned
           .
           Being
           furnished
           with
           these
           Principles
           ,
           as
           also
           being
           firmly
           perswaded
           by
           other
           Reasons
           ,
           That
           the
           Beast
           was
           the
           Bishop
           of
           Rome
           ,
           and
           that
           the
           Number
           did
           signifie
           the
           first
           visible
           declaration
           of
           the
           Authority
           of
           that
           See
           :
           Finding
           also
           the
           account
           by
           Jubilees
           to
           be
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ▪
           a
           Number
           frequently
           used
           amongst
           men
           in
           those
           ancient
           times
           :
           Upon
           these
           Considerations
           ,
           I
           was
           at
           length
           induced
           (
           probably
           at
           least
           )
           to
           take
           this
           as
           the
           meaning
           of
           the
           Text
           :
           As
           who
           would
           say
           in
           plainer
           terms
           ,
           Let
           him
           that
           hath
           wisdome
           ,
           count
           by
           the
           Jubilees
           ,
           a
           Number
           frequently
           used
           amongst
           men
           ,
           and
           he
           shall
           finde
           ,
           that
           this
           Beast
           shall
           begin
           to
           erect
           and
           put
           forth
           his
           Power
           in
           the
           666th
           year
           ,
           from
           the
           beginning
           of
           the
           Twentieth
           Jubilee
           ;
           and
           so
           he
           shall
           come
           to
           the
           particular
           year
           when
           Victor
           Excommunicated
           the
           Churches
           of
           Asia
           .
           This
           Interpretation
           ,
           though
           it
           seemed
           very
           specious
           and
           plausible
           at
           the
           first
           ;
           yet
           
           afterward
           ,
           when
           I
           came
           to
           dive
           into
           the
           Prophecy
           ,
           and
           to
           compare
           the
           Commentaries
           ,
           and
           to
           look
           into
           the
           natural
           sense
           of
           the
           Visions
           ;
           I
           did
           finde
           from
           the
           collation
           of
           all
           ,
           that
           there
           must
           be
           first
           a
           death
           ,
           and
           a
           wound
           of
           the
           Roman
           Majestie
           in
           the
           Caesars
           ,
           before
           it
           could
           be
           revived
           in
           the
           Popes
           ;
           the
           Caesareate
           must
           fall
           ,
           before
           the
           Papacy
           could
           begin
           .
           This
           I
           gathered
           from
           the
           whole
           scope
           of
           the
           Apocalyptical
           learning
           :
           And
           I
           do
           admire
           ,
           how
           any
           can
           begin
           the
           42
           Moneths
           from
           
             Constantine
             the
             Great
          
           ,
           or
           from
           
             Iulian
             the
             Apostata
          
           ,
           or
           from
           any
           other
           time
           before
           the
           fall
           of
           the
           old
           Empire
           .
           They
           who
           do
           this
           ,
           to
           my
           understanding
           ,
           go
           against
           the
           scope
           and
           drift
           of
           this
           kinde
           of
           learning
           .
           Another
           Interpretation
           I
           had
           ,
           which
           I
           did
           favour
           in
           the
           beginning
           ;
           and
           that
           is
           the
           Interpretation
           of
           Moulin
           ,
           in
           his
           Treatise
           concerning
           the
           Complement
           of
           Prophecies
           :
           He
           in
           that
           Treatise
           
             doth
             set
             the
             beginning
             of
             the
             Beasts
             Kingdome
             ,
             at
             the
             fall
             of
             the
             Exarchs
             of
          
           Ravenna
           ;
           and
           so
           concludeth
           ,
           
             That
             where
             the
             Empire
             made
             an
             end
             ,
             there
             the
             Papacy
             was
             to
             begin
             :
          
           But
           the
           Empire
           ended
           at
           the
           Exarchate
           ;
           Ergo.
           In
           this
           Exposition
           of
           his
           ,
           he
           doth
           well
           to
           set
           the
           beginning
           of
           Rome
           Papal
           ,
           after
           the
           destruction
           of
           Rome
           Imperial
           ;
           for
           this
           is
           but
           the
           sense
           of
           the
           Prophecy
           .
           But
           yet
           withal
           this
           must
           be
           remembred
           ,
           that
           we
           must
           not
           set
           the
           beginning
           of
           the
           Beasts
           Kingdom
           where
           we
           will
           ,
           &
           how
           we
           will
           our selves
           ;
           but
           we
           must
           set
           it
           there
           where
           it
           ought
           to
           be
           set
           .
           Now
           for
           the
           place
           where
           it
           ought
           to
           be
           set
           ,
           it
           must
           be
           at
           the
           beginning
           of
           the
           Universal
           Headship
           of
           the
           Beast
           ,
           which
           is
           the
           Name
           of
           the
           Beast
           ,
           when
           he
           did
           make
           an
           Image
           to
           the
           Beast
           that
           had
           a
           wound
           in
           one
           of
           his
           Heads
           .
           If
           these
           things
           be
           applied
           to
           the
           times
           ,
           they
           do
           not
           agree
           to
           the
           ruine
           of
           the
           Exarchate
           ,
           but
           to
           the
           setting
           up
           of
           the
           Universal
           Headship
           of
           the
           Bishop
           of
           Rome
           ,
           under
           the
           Emperor
           Phocas
           .
           Then
           there
           was
           an
           Image
           made
           to
           the
           Beast
           ;
           then
           the
           Name
           or
           Universal
           Headship
           began
           ;
           then
           the
           Roman
           Potency
           did
           revive
           in
           the
           Popes
           ,
           which
           was
           formerly
           lost
           in
           the
           Caesars
           ;
           then
           the
           second
           Beast
           caused
           the
           Image
           both
           to
           speak
           and
           live
           .
        
         
           Princ.
           9.
           
           
             The
             Name
             of
             the
             Beast
             ought
             so
             in
             special
             to
             be
             exp●…unded
             ,
             that
             it
             may
             be
             the
             subject-matter
             of
             the
             Mark.
          
           This
           
           is
           proved
           from
           Chap.
           14.
           ver
           .
           11.
           where
           the
           Mark
           is
           expresly
           called
           ,
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           The
           Mark
           of
           his
           Name
           .
           Now
           it
           would
           not
           be
           so
           called
           ,
           if
           there
           were
           not
           something
           in
           the
           Name
           ,
           that
           giveth
           beeing
           to
           the
           Mark.
           And
           therefore
           when
           Mr.
           Potter
           endevoreth
           to
           shew
           ,
           That
           25
           is
           the
           Number
           of
           the
           Beast
           ;
           and
           that
           the
           Government
           may
           be
           known
           by
           the
           frequent
           use
           of
           the
           Number
           25
           ,
           the
           square-root
           of
           666
           :
           In
           my
           apprehension
           ,
           he
           should
           not
           have
           imployed
           himself
           in
           the
           variety
           of
           those
           things
           in
           the
           Beasts
           Kingdome
           ,
           to
           which
           this
           Number
           might
           be
           applied
           :
           His
           prime
           work
           had
           been
           ,
           first
           to
           have
           found
           out
           the
           Name
           of
           the
           Beast
           ;
           and
           then
           he
           should
           have
           proceeded
           to
           the
           Mark
           ,
           and
           the
           Number
           of
           the
           Name
           .
           For
           there
           is
           no
           other
           Mark
           ,
           but
           that
           which
           relateth
           to
           the
           Name
           ;
           and
           there
           is
           no
           other
           Number
           ,
           but
           that
           which
           is
           the
           Number
           of
           the
           Name
           .
           I
           cannot
           conceive
           any
           other
           :
           but
           his
           mistake
           is
           in
           the
           
             subjectâ
             materiâ
          
           ,
           in
           the
           subject
           matter
           of
           the
           Number
           .
           He
           that
           erreth
           in
           the
           beginning
           ,
           must
           needs
           go
           far
           out
           of
           the
           way
           .
        
         
           Princ.
           10.
           
           
             The
             Name
             of
             the
             Beast
             ought
             so
             in
             special
             to
             be
             expounded
             ,
             that
             it
             may
             appear
             to
             be
             the
             matter
             about
             which
             the
             Number
             is
             conversant
             .
          
           This
           is
           proved
           from
           Ch.
           13
           v.
           17.
           
           There
           it
           is
           expresly
           called
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           The
           Name
           then
           only
           must
           be
           the
           immediate
           Object
           of
           the
           Number
           ,
           or
           the
           thing
           Numbred
           :
           Why
           is
           it
           else
           called
           ,
           The
           Number
           of
           the
           Name
           ?
           By
           this
           Reason
           then
           ,
           I
           cannot
           see
           how
           Mr.
           Potter
           can
           apply
           the
           Number
           indefinitely
           to
           all
           such
           kinde
           of
           things
           as
           are
           essential
           and
           constituent
           in
           the
           Kingdome
           of
           the
           Beast
           ,
           seeing
           the
           Number
           is
           onely
           restrained
           to
           the
           Name
           ,
           and
           is
           the
           Number
           of
           the
           Name
           or
           Universal
           Headship
           .
           But
           let
           us
           look
           to
           the
           grounds
           of
           the
           Interpretation
           laid
           down
           by
           that
           learned
           man.
           
             He
             supposeth
             this
             Number
          
           666
           
             to
             be
             an
             Image
             or
             typical
             Representation
             of
             the
             whole
             Body
             of
             Antichrist
             ;
             that
             is
             ,
             of
             the
             whole
             Body
             of
             his
             Kingdome
             ,
             State
             ,
             or
             Hierarchy
             .
             And
             thus
             much
             ,
          
           saith
           he
           ,
           
             is
             acknowledged
             by
             many
             Writers
             ,
             but
             especially
             by
             Cotterius
             .
          
           Further
           ,
           he
           addeth
           ,
           
             If
             this
             Number
             be
             an
             Image
             or
             a
             Type
             of
             the
             whole
             Body
             of
             Antichrist
             ;
             then
             no
             man
             ought
             to
             imagine
             ,
             that
             the
             whole
             Image
             of
             Antichrist
             is
             like
             to
             one
             prrticular
          
           
           
             Member
             ,
             or
             part
             of
             the
             Body
             of
             Antichrist
             .
             For
             as
             the
             whole
             Image
             of
          
           Caesar
           
             is
             not
             like
             unto
             the
             Hand
             of
          
           Caesar
           ,
           
             or
             ▪
             the
             Head
             of
          
           Caesar
           :
           
             so
             neither
             is
             the
             Number
             considered
             wholly
             applicable
             to
             any
             particular
             Times
             ,
             Names
             ,
             Persons
             ,
             Places
             ,
             or
             other
             Individuall
             things
             ,
             or
             Circumstances
             belonging
             unto
             Antichrist
             ,
             as
             divers
             Interpreters
             have
             laboured
             to
             apply
             it
             .
             But
          
           (
           saith
           he
           )
           
             if
             any
             man
             desire
             to
             know
          
           Caesar
           
             by
             his
             Image
             ,
             he
             must
             compare
             Head
             to
             Head
             ,
             Face
             to
             Face
             ,
             Eye
             to
             Eye
             ,
             Foot
             to
             Foot
             ;
             and
             so
             conclude
             a
             likeness
             in
             general
             ,
             from
             an
             induction
             of
             particulars
             .
             In
             like
             manner
             ,
             he
             that
             desires
             to
             know
             Antichrist
             by
             his
             Number
             ,
             he
             must
             first
             finde
             in
             this
             Number
             ,
             such
             things
             as
             are
             essential
             and
             remarkable
             to
             that
             Government
             .
          
           So
           far
           Mr.
           Potter
           .
           In
           which
           words
           of
           his
           ,
           though
           I
           do
           acknowledge
           there
           is
           greater
           solidity
           ,
           then
           I
           have
           ordinarily
           met
           withall
           in
           Interpretations
           of
           this
           kinde
           ;
           yet
           under
           favour
           ,
           I
           conceive
           when
           all
           is
           done
           ,
           the
           Number
           must
           be
           the
           Number
           of
           the
           Name
           ,
           or
           Universal
           Headship
           ,
           and
           that
           by
           right
           ought
           to
           be
           the
           thing
           Numbred
           .
           And
           whereas
           he
           saith
           ,
           That
           the
           Number
           is
           not
           applicable
           to
           any
           particular
           Times
           ,
           Persons
           ,
           Places
           ,
           or
           other
           petty
           Circumstances
           of
           the
           Kingdome
           of
           Antichrist
           ;
           I
           do
           acknowledge
           ,
           That
           there
           hath
           been
           vanity
           more
           then
           too
           much
           among
           Interpreters
           ,
           about
           the
           explication
           of
           these
           things
           .
           And
           whereas
           the
           Author
           aforenam●…d
           ,
           following
           Cotterius
           and
           other
           learned
           men
           ,
           doth
           tell
           us
           ,
           That
           the
           Number
           must
           be
           applied
           to
           that
           which
           is
           essential
           in
           the
           Kingdome
           of
           the
           Beast
           :
           In
           this
           we
           do
           fully
           agree
           with
           him
           ;
           and
           therefore
           we
           have
           stated
           the
           Name
           ,
           Mark
           ,
           and
           Image
           of
           the
           Beast
           ,
           and
           have
           so
           explained
           these
           things
           ,
           that
           they
           do
           contain
           the
           very
           essence
           ,
           form
           and
           beeing
           of
           that
           Kingdome
           .
           For
           what
           is
           the
           Name
           ,
           but
           the
           Power
           and
           Universal
           Headship
           ?
           And
           what
           is
           the
           Mark
           of
           the
           Name
           ,
           but
           the
           profession
           of
           Subjection
           to
           that
           Power
           or
           Headship
           ?
           Thus
           we
           come
           to
           the
           sense
           of
           Cotterius
           and
           others
           in
           the
           main
           .
           Now
           whereas
           Mr.
           Potter
           doth
           stand
           upon
           25
           Cardinals
           ,
           25
           Churches
           ,
           25
           Articles
           ,
           in
           the
           compilation
           of
           
             Pius
             Quartus
          
           ;
           How
           doth
           he
           make
           all
           these
           the
           Name
           of
           the
           Beast
           ?
           In
           all
           true
           Mathematical
           Demonstration
           ,
           we
           should
           begin
           with
           
             expositio
             Dati
          
           ,
           the
           Exposition
           of
           the
           Subject
           
           or
           Antecedent
           .
           If
           therefore
           the
           Name
           of
           the
           Beast
           be
           Datum
           ,
           or
           the
           subject
           of
           the
           Demonstration
           ;
           this
           must
           be
           first
           expounded
           ,
           before
           the
           Number
           can
           be
           rightly
           applied
           ,
           seeing
           it
           is
           called
           the
           Number
           of
           the
           Name
           .
           Secondly
           ,
           if
           25
           be
           the
           Characteristical
           Number
           of
           the
           State
           or
           Hierarchy
           of
           the
           Beast
           ;
           why
           doth
           not
           the
           Holy
           Spirit
           ,
           in
           so
           large
           a
           description
           of
           that
           Kingdome
           ,
           once
           make
           mention
           of
           the
           Number
           25
           ?
           Shall
           we
           imagine
           ,
           that
           he
           will
           not
           once
           mention
           that
           which
           is
           individually
           necessary
           ,
           but
           altogether
           stand
           upon
           remoter
           points
           ?
           Thirdly
           ,
           if
           the
           Number
           25
           is
           to
           be
           applied
           to
           the
           Hierarchy
           of
           the
           Beast
           ,
           as
           the
           Number
           12
           is
           to
           the
           
             New
             Ierusalem
          
           ;
           why
           is
           not
           the
           like
           reason
           given
           for
           the
           one
           as
           for
           the
           other
           ?
           The
           Number
           12
           is
           therefore
           so
           frequently
           used
           in
           sacred
           Numbers
           ,
           in
           reference
           to
           the
           first
           Original
           of
           the
           Church
           ,
           and
           to
           the
           division
           into
           Twelve
           Tribes
           .
           And
           therefore
           we
           reade
           of
           Twelve
           Cakes
           of
           Shew-bread
           ,
           Exod.
           24.
           5
           ;
           of
           Twelve
           Pillars
           of
           Moses
           his
           Altar
           ,
           Exod.
           24.
           4
           ;
           of
           Twelve
           Stones
           in
           the
           Breast-plate
           of
           
             Aaron
             ,
             Exod.
          
           28.
           21
           ;
           of
           Twelve
           Oxen
           brought
           to
           the
           Dedication
           of
           the
           Tabernacle
           ,
           Numb
           .
           7.
           23
           ;
           of
           Twelve
           Rods
           laid
           up
           before
           the
           Ark
           of
           the
           Testimony
           ,
           Numb
           .
           17.
           1
           ;
           of
           Twelve
           Spies
           sent
           to
           search
           the
           Land
           of
           
             Canaan
             ,
             Numb
          
           .
           13.
           1
           ;
           of
           Twelve
           Stones
           in
           
             Iordan
             ,
             Iosh.
          
           4.
           9
           ;
           of
           the
           Garment
           of
           Ieroboam
           rent
           into
           Twelve
           pieces
           ,
           1
           Kings
           11.
           30
           ;
           of
           Twelve
           Stones
           on
           which
           the
           Altar
           of
           Eliah
           was
           built
           :
           and
           many
           such-like
           instances
           .
           Now
           it
           is
           apparent
           in
           these
           Scriptures
           ,
           That
           the
           Spirit
           standeth
           upon
           the
           exact
           Number
           12
           :
           and
           all
           this
           in
           reference
           to
           that
           ancient
           distribution
           of
           the
           Church
           into
           12
           Tribes
           .
           Therefore
           in
           imitation
           of
           the
           Jewish
           Church
           ,
           the
           Holy
           Spirit
           in
           the
           new
           Prophecy
           ,
           is
           very
           frequent
           in
           the
           use
           of
           the
           same
           Number
           ,
           when
           he
           setteth
           forth
           the
           state
           of
           the
           Gospel-Church
           in
           these
           latter
           days
           .
           But
           can
           there
           be
           the
           like
           Reason
           given
           ,
           why
           the
           Antichristian
           Church
           is
           so
           frequent
           in
           the
           Number
           25
           ?
           Fourthly
           ,
           if
           it
           can
           be
           proved
           in
           some
           places
           ,
           that
           12
           is
           the
           square-root
           of
           144
           ;
           and
           that
           the
           Spirit
           doth
           stand
           upon
           this
           way
           of
           Calculation
           :
           yet
           I
           am
           sure
           he
           doth
           not
           universally
           do
           this
           in
           the
           description
           of
           the
           New
           
           Ierusalem
           :
           For
           there
           is
           a
           remarkable
           passage
           ,
           touching
           the
           measures
           of
           that
           City
           ,
           in
           these
           words
           :
           
             And
             the
             City
             lieth
             four-square
             ,
             and
             the
             length
             is
             as
             large
             as
             the
             Breadth
             ;
             and
             he
             measured
             the
             City
             with
             a
             reed
          
           12000
           
             furlongs
             ;
             the
             length
             ,
             breadth
             and
             height
             of
             it
             are
             all
             equal
             ,
          
           Rev.
           21.
           16.
           
           If
           there
           be
           any
           one
           Text
           that
           do●…h
           shew
           a
           Characteristical
           Number
           to
           decypher
           the
           Holy
           City
           ,
           this
           is
           that
           Scripture
           .
           Now
           if
           it
           be
           the
           manner
           of
           the
           Spirit
           ,
           in
           all
           Apocalyptical
           Computations
           ,
           to
           count
           the
           square-root
           of
           any
           figurate
           Number
           ;
           why
           doth
           he
           not
           use
           that
           method
           here
           ?
           In
           this
           particular
           Number
           then
           ,
           109
           is
           the
           square-root
           ;
           and
           if
           you
           will
           multiply
           it
           into
           it self
           ,
           it
           will
           make
           11881
           ,
           and
           the
           remainder
           will
           be
           119.
           
           Therefore
           in
           the
           Dimensions
           of
           the
           Holy
           City
           ,
           the
           Spirit
           doth
           not
           perpetually
           look
           to
           the
           Number
           12
           ,
           as
           to
           the
           square-root
           of
           those
           Holy
           Numbers
           .
           Fifthly
           ,
           if
           it
           could
           be
           proved
           ,
           That
           12
           is
           the
           Root
           of
           all
           the
           Numbers
           in
           the
           
             New
             Ierusalem
          
           ;
           yet
           it
           cannot
           be
           made
           manifest
           ,
           That
           25
           is
           the
           square-root
           of
           666
           ,
           in
           so
           special
           a
           manner
           at
           least
           .
           For
           all
           the
           Numbers
           from
           625
           to
           676
           ,
           have
           25
           for
           their
           square-root
           :
           and
           therefore
           all
           the
           Numbers
           aforementioned
           ,
           may
           be
           the
           Number
           of
           the
           Name
           ,
           as
           well
           as
           the
           Number
           666.
           
           According
           to
           this
           ground
           ,
           what
           certainty
           of
           Interpretation
           is
           here
           to
           be
           had
           ?
           More
           properly
           then
           ,
           if
           25
           were
           the
           square-root
           ,
           625
           would
           rather
           be
           the
           Number
           of
           the
           Name
           of
           the
           Beast
           .
           For
           if
           you
           Multiply
           25
           into
           it self
           ,
           it
           will
           make
           exactly
           625
           ,
           and
           no
           fractions
           remaining
           :
           Whereas
           666
           (
           as
           skilful
           Artists
           do
           use
           to
           speak
           )
           is
           
             numerus
             surdus
          
           ,
           a
           deaf
           Number
           ;
           it
           hath
           25
           for
           the
           square-root
           ,
           and
           41
           fractions
           remaining
           .
           All
           these
           Reasons
           put
           together
           ,
           do
           plainly
           shew
           ,
           That
           25
           is
           not
           the
           onely
           Characteristical
           Number
           ;
           and
           if
           it
           could
           be
           proved
           to
           be
           so
           ,
           yet
           is
           not
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           The
           Number
           of
           the
           Name
           of
           the
           Beast
           .
        
         
           Princ.
           11.
           
           
             The
             Mark
             of
             the
             Beast
             ought
             so
             in
             special
             to
             be
             expounded
             ,
             that
             it
             may
             agree
             to
             all
             those
             ,
             and
             onely
             to
             those
             that
             are
             the
             Beasts
             Subjects
             ,
             and
             that
             it
             may
             be
             the
             Badge
             and
             Livery
             of
             their
             Profession
             .
          
           This
           is
           proved
           from
           Chap.
           13.
           ver
           .
           16
           ,
           17.
           
           
             He
             causeth
             all
             ,
             both
             small
             and
             great
             ,
             to
             receive
             a
             Mark
             in
             their
          
           
           
             Forehead
             ,
             and
             in
             their
             Right-hand
             .
          
           The
           Mark
           then
           agreeth
           to
           all
           the
           Subjects
           of
           the
           Beasts
           Kingdome
           ,
           and
           to
           those
           onely
           that
           are
           his
           :
           And
           this
           also
           is
           the
           badge
           of
           the
           distinction
           ,
           in
           the
           matter
           of
           buying
           and
           selling
           .
           If
           this
           be
           so
           ,
           how
           doth
           Mr.
           Potter
           give
           a
           true
           Exposition
           of
           the
           Number
           ?
           For
           admit
           the
           Number
           25
           be
           rightly
           applied
           to
           the
           Cardinals
           ,
           Gates
           ,
           Churches
           ,
           and
           other
           remarkable
           Circumstances
           of
           the
           City
           of
           Rome
           ;
           yet
           how
           doth
           he
           distinguish
           the
           Beasts
           Subjects
           in
           the
           matter
           of
           buying
           and
           selling
           ?
           The
           Text
           saith
           plainly
           ,
           That
           
             none
             might
             buy
             nor
             sell
             ,
             but
             he
             that
             had
             the
             Mark
             ,
             the
             Name
             ,
             and
             the
             Number
             of
             the
             Name
             .
          
           The
           right
           understanding
           of
           these
           things
           ,
           lieth
           nor
           in
           the
           subtilties
           of
           Arithmetick
           ,
           nor
           in
           the
           extraction
           of
           the
           square-root
           of
           any
           figurate
           Number
           ,
           or
           in
           any
           occu't
           Circumstance
           of
           the
           Kingdome
           of
           the
           Beast
           :
           for
           these
           things
           are
           discernible
           unto
           all
           ,
           and
           are
           obvious
           in
           the
           matter
           of
           buying
           and
           selling
           .
           Secondly
           ,
           how
           do
           they
           also
           rightly
           expound
           the
           Number
           ,
           who
           apply
           these
           things
           to
           more
           then
           the
           Subjects
           of
           the
           Beasts
           Kingdome
           ;
           seeing
           these
           are
           the
           peculiar
           Characters
           of
           them
           onely
           ,
           who
           are
           of
           his
           flock
           ?
           Therefore
           they
           who
           will
           have
           Lateinos
           to
           be
           the
           Name
           of
           the
           Beast
           ,
           how
           do
           they
           make
           this
           the
           individuall
           Character
           of
           the
           Beasts
           Subjects
           ?
           Our
           Saviour
           himself
           ,
           his
           Apostles
           ,
           and
           many
           holy
           Martyrs
           for
           sundry
           ages
           ,
           have
           been
           under
           the
           Dominion
           of
           the
           Latines
           or
           Romans
           :
           Therefore
           we
           cannot
           be
           of
           so
           flinty
           a
           Philosophy
           ,
           to
           believe
           ,
           That
           all
           sinned
           who
           lived
           under
           the
           Roman
           Obedience
           ;
           or
           that
           all
           had
           the
           Mark
           of
           the
           Beast
           ,
           who
           were
           Subjects
           under
           that
           Jurisdiction
           .
           To
           speak
           properly
           ,
           they
           sin
           onely
           against
           the
           Kingly
           Power
           of
           Christ
           ,
           and
           his
           Regal
           Office
           as
           Mediator
           ,
           that
           submit
           to
           the
           Roman
           ,
           or
           rather
           to
           the
           Antichristian
           Dominion
           in
           these
           last
           times
           .
        
         
           Princ.
           12.
           
           
             The
             Mark
             of
             the
             Beast
             ought
             so
             in
             special
             to
             be
             expounded
             ,
             that
             the
             whole
             Company
             which
             c●…rrieth
             the
             Mark
             ,
             may
             be
             set
             in
             direct
             opposition
             to
             the
          
           144000
           ,
           
             who
             had
             their
             Fathers
             Name
             written
             in
             their
             Forehead
             .
          
           This
           is
           clearly
           proved
           ,
           from
           the
           collation
           of
           two
           Scriptures
           ,
           Chap.
           13.
           ver
           .
           16
           ,
           17
           ,
           18.
           with
           Chap.
           14.
           ver
           .
           2
           ,
           3
           ,
           4
           ,
           5.
           
           In
           the
           former
           Scripture
           ,
           we
           have
           a
           
           description
           of
           those
           
             that
             worshipped
             the
             Image
             ,
             and
             received
             the
             Mark
             :
          
           and
           immediaiely
           after
           them
           ,
           there
           is
           the
           description
           of
           those
           
             that
             were
             with
             the
             Lamb
             upon
             Mount
             Sion
             ,
             and
             had
             their
             Fathers
             Name
             written
             in
             their
             Forehead
             .
          
           It
           is
           plain
           then
           ,
           That
           there
           is
           an
           immediate
           Antithesis
           or
           Contraposition
           betwixt
           the
           Lamb
           and
           the
           Beast
           ;
           the
           Name
           of
           the
           Lamb
           ,
           and
           the
           Name
           of
           the
           Beast
           ;
           the
           Followers
           of
           the
           Lamb
           ,
           and
           the
           Followers
           of
           the
           Beast
           .
           There
           is
           then
           a
           perfect
           contrariety
           betwixt
           these
           two
           ,
           as
           may
           be
           seen
           in
           the
           whole
           Body
           of
           the
           Prophecy
           .
           They
           therefore
           who
           will
           rightly
           expound
           the
           Book
           of
           the
           Revelation
           ,
           must
           diligently
           observe
           the
           Contraposition
           ;
           and
           by
           the
           one
           ,
           expound
           the
           meaning
           of
           the
           other
           contrary
           .
           But
           withall
           ,
           this
           Rule
           ought
           to
           be
           remembred
           ,
           That
           oppositio
           ,
           must
           be
           
             in
             eodem
             ,
             &
             circa
             idem
          
           ;
           the
           opposition
           must
           be
           in
           the
           same
           ,
           and
           about
           the
           same
           matter
           .
           And
           therefore
           ,
           to
           apply
           the
           matter
           to
           particulars
           ,
           I
           cannot
           see
           how
           Mr.
           Potter
           doth
           proceed
           by
           this
           Rule
           ,
           in
           that
           Contraposition
           of
           his
           ,
           between
           the
           Number
           of
           the
           Beast
           ,
           and
           the
           Numbers
           of
           the
           
             New
             Ierusalem
          
           .
           First
           ,
           whereas
           he
           opposeth
           the
           Number
           144
           ,
           to
           the
           Number
           666
           ,
           he
           should
           have
           proceeded
           
             in
             eodem
          
           ,
           and
           made
           the
           opposition
           in
           the
           same
           matter
           .
           If
           therefore
           144000
           be
           the
           Characteristical
           Number
           of
           the
           Subjects
           of
           the
           Lambs
           Kingdome
           ;
           then
           666000
           should
           be
           the
           Number
           of
           the
           Subjects
           of
           the
           Beast
           :
           and
           so
           Subject
           will
           be
           opposed
           to
           Subject
           ,
           and
           Number
           to
           Number
           .
           Secondly
           ,
           Mr.
           Potter
           opposeth
           the
           Number
           of
           the
           Beast
           ,
           to
           the
           Numbers
           of
           the
           
             New
             Ierusalem
          
           ;
           which
           cannot
           properly
           be
           said
           to
           be
           
             oppositio
             in
             eodem
          
           ,
           an
           opposition
           in
           and
           about
           the
           same
           matter
           .
           For
           in
           the
           true
           Apocalyptical
           method
           ,
           the
           Beast
           is
           not
           so
           much
           opposed
           to
           the
           
             New
             Ierusalem
          
           ,
           as
           to
           the
           Lamb
           ,
           his
           Ri●…al
           in
           Kingly
           Power
           .
           If
           we
           will
           speak
           plainly
           ,
           the
           
             New
             Ierusalem
          
           is
           opposed
           to
           the
           Whore
           of
           Babylon
           ;
           the
           Gospel-Church
           ,
           to
           the
           Roman
           Idolatrous
           Church
           .
           For
           after
           that
           the
           Saints
           had
           sung
           their
           Halelujahs
           at
           the
           destruction
           of
           the
           Great
           Whore
           ,
           these
           words
           are
           immediately
           added
           :
           
             Let
             us
             be
             glad
             and
             rejoyce
             ,
             for
             the
             Marriage
             of
             the
             Lamb
             is
             come
             ,
             and
             his
             wife
             hath
             made
             her self
             ready
             ,
          
           Chap.
           19.
           ver
           .
           1
           ,
           2
           ,
           3
           ,
           4
           ,
           &c.
           
           Therefore
           the
           contrariety
           
           standeth
           more
           immediately
           betwixt
           the
           Lamb
           and
           the
           Beast
           ;
           the
           
             New
             Ierusalem
          
           ,
           and
           the
           Whore
           of
           Babylon
           .
           Therefore
           the
           Number
           of
           the
           Beast
           ,
           is
           not
           so
           immediately
           opposed
           to
           the
           Dimensions
           of
           the
           
             New
             Ierusalem
          
           .
           And
           yet
           further
           ,
           in
           the
           opposition
           between
           the
           Lamb
           and
           the
           Beast
           ;
           between
           the
           Whore
           of
           Babylon
           ,
           and
           the
           
             New
             Ierusalem
          
           ,
           we
           must
           go
           so
           far
           onely
           ,
           as
           may
           be
           well
           warranted
           by
           Scripture
           ,
           or
           by
           necessary
           deduction
           from
           Scripture
           .
           And
           therefore
           whereas
           Mr.
           Potter
           layeth
           down
           this
           Maxime
           ,
           
             The
             description
             of
             the
          
           New
           Jerusalem
           ,
           
             is
             not
             for
             this
             reason
             onely
             set
             down
             in
             Scripture
             ,
             that
             by
             it
             the
             knowledge
             of
             the
             true
             Church
             of
             Christ
             might
             be
             described
             ;
             but
             that
             the
             false
             Church
             of
             Antichrist
             ,
             by
             way
             of
             Antithesis
             ,
             might
             by
             the
             same
             description
          
           (
           mutatis
           mutandis
           )
           
             be
             also
             manifestly
             revealed
          
           ,
           pag.
           122.
           
           This
           Position
           of
           that
           learned
           Author
           ,
           I
           do
           in
           part
           receive
           ;
           but
           yet
           I
           do
           not
           think
           ,
           that
           we
           are
           to
           extend
           it
           to
           every
           particular
           ,
           without
           any
           restriction
           .
           We
           reade
           in
           the
           description
           of
           the
           
             New
             Ierusalem
          
           ,
           of
           12
           Gates
           ,
           12
           Apostles
           ,
           12
           Angels
           ,
           12
           Foundations
           ;
           and
           yet
           I
           do
           not
           think
           ,
           that
           we
           have
           warrant
           to
           look
           after
           such
           a
           set
           Number
           of
           Gates
           ,
           of
           Angels
           ,
           of
           Apostles
           ,
           of
           Foundations
           ,
           in
           the
           City
           of
           Rome
           .
           And
           yet
           further
           ,
           if
           we
           could
           finde
           such
           certain
           Numbers
           in
           the
           City
           aforesaid
           ,
           it
           were
           not
           to
           the
           purpose
           in
           hand
           :
           For
           in
           the
           true
           sense
           of
           the
           Prophecy
           ,
           not
           Rome
           within
           such
           Walls
           or
           Gates
           ,
           but
           the
           Romish
           Church
           in
           such
           a
           largeness
           and
           compass
           of
           Territories
           ,
           is
           immediately
           opposed
           to
           the
           
             New
             Ierusalem
          
           ,
           or
           the
           Gospel-Church
           that
           shall
           be
           in
           the
           latter
           times
           ,
           at
           the
           end
           and
           destruction
           of
           the
           Beasts
           Kingdome
           .
           We
           reade
           in
           the
           slaughter
           of
           the
           Witnesses
           ,
           
             that
             they
             did
             lie
             slain
             in
             the
             streets
             of
             the
             great
             City
             ,
             spiritually
             called
             Sodom
             and
             Egypt
             ,
             and
             where
             our
             Lord
             was
             Crucified
             ,
          
           Chap.
           11.
           ver
           .
           8.
           
           Now
           there
           is
           none
           that
           will
           say
           ,
           that
           they
           did
           lie
           slain
           in
           the
           streets
           of
           Rome
           ,
           literally
           so
           called
           ,
           but
           within
           the
           verge
           and
           precincts
           of
           the
           Romish
           Church
           .
           This
           properly
           is
           the
           Great
           City
           ,
           that
           is
           opposed
           to
           the
           
             New
             Ierusalem
          
           ,
           to
           the
           Holy
           City
           ,
           to
           the
           Lambs
           Wife
           that
           comes
           from
           God
           out
           of
           Heaven
           .
        
         
           Princ.
           13.
           
           
             The
             Number
             ought
             so
             in
             special
             to
             be
             expounded
             ,
          
           
           
             that
             it
             may
             appear
             to
             be
          
           666
           ,
           
             in
             that
             method
             and
             way
             of
             account
             ,
             which
             is
             called
             the
             Number
             of
             a
             Man.
             For
             so
             it
             is
             expresly
             said
             ,
             Let
             him
             that
             hath
             wisdome
             ,
             count
             the
             Number
             of
             the
             Beast
             ;
             for
             it
             is
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             the
             Number
             of
             a
             Man.
          
           They
           therefore
           who
           will
           have
           Lateinos
           ,
           or
           some
           such
           Grammatical
           word
           ,
           to
           be
           the
           Number
           of
           the
           Name
           ;
           how
           do
           they
           make
           it
           appear
           ,
           That
           this
           is
           the
           Number
           of
           a
           Man
           ,
           or
           that
           it
           is
           the
           manner
           of
           men
           to
           calculate
           States
           and
           Governments
           by
           Anagams
           or
           Numeral
           Letters
           of
           any
           Grammatical
           Name
           whatsoever
           ?
        
         
           Princ.
           14.
           
           
             The
             Number
             ought
             so
             in
             special
             to
             be
             counted
             ,
             not
             according
             to
             the
             subtilties
             of
             humane
             invention
             ,
             but
             according
             to
             the
             nature
             of
             the
             subject
             matter
             ,
             and
             the
             manner
             of
             the
             Holy
             Spirit
             in
             such-like
             descriptions
             .
          
           For
           the
           nature
           of
           the
           subject
           matter
           ,
           the
           great
           sin
           of
           the
           world
           ,
           is
           ,
           in
           receiving
           the
           Name
           ,
           and
           the
           Mark
           of
           the
           Name
           .
           And
           shall
           we
           think
           ,
           when
           the
           Lord
           Christ
           speaketh
           to
           his
           Churches
           concerning
           these
           things
           ,
           that
           only
           they
           who
           have
           skill
           in
           the
           subtilties
           and
           mysteries
           of
           Art
           ,
           shall
           have
           ability
           to
           understand
           his
           meaning
           ?
           Surely
           ,
           though
           the
           Number
           it self
           may
           be
           more
           mysterious
           ,
           yet
           the
           Matter
           Numbred
           must
           be
           in
           more
           open
           view
           .
           Secondly
           ,
           for
           the
           manner
           and
           use
           of
           the
           Spirit
           in
           such-like
           descriptions
           ,
           his
           use
           is
           to
           speak
           Parabolically
           and
           Typically
           ;
           and
           yet
           we
           finde
           no
           one
           instance
           of
           the
           discovery
           of
           a
           Government
           ,
           by
           the
           extraction
           of
           the
           square-root
           .
           Very
           often
           we
           finde
           ,
           when
           he
           speaketh
           of
           the
           rising
           of
           a
           Government
           ,
           or
           the
           destruction
           of
           a
           State
           ,
           he
           doth
           usually
           Number
           such
           a
           Chain
           or
           Line
           of
           years
           to
           each
           such
           remarkable
           occurrence
           ;
           and
           he
           doth
           refer
           us
           either
           to
           the
           Chronologie
           of
           the
           Bible
           ,
           or
           to
           the
           Stories
           of
           the
           Church
           .
           These
           things
           are
           most
           necessary
           ,
           for
           the
           Calculation
           of
           the
           Times
           ,
           and
           for
           the
           Exposition
           of
           the
           Prophecies
           .
           But
           whereas
           Mr.
           Potter
           doth
           wholly
           build
           upon
           the
           extraction
           of
           the
           square-root
           in
           a
           figurate
           Number
           ,
           I
           cannot
           see
           how
           this
           doth
           agree
           with
           the
           practise
           of
           the
           Spirit
           in
           other
           Scriptures
           .
           I
           must
           needs
           confess
           ,
           that
           he
           speaketh
           very
           rationally
           in
           these
           words
           ,
           as
           they
           follow
           :
           
             I
             have
          
           (
           saith
           he
           )
           
             but
             beaten
             &
             made
             plain
             the
             same
             path
             which
             Mr.
          
           Forbes
           ,
           
             and
             other
             Commentators
             have
             trodden
             out
             before
             .
             But
             I
             am
             now
             come
             to
             the
             place
             ,
             where
             they
             either
             stood
             still
             ,
             or
          
           
           
             turned
             out
             of
             the
             way
             .
             They
             say
             ,
             that
             the
             Number
          
           12
           
             is
             the
             square
             root
             of
          
           144
           :
           
             why
             then
             do
             they
             not
             proceed
             in
             the
             same
             Method
             ,
             to
             finde
             out
             the
             root
             of
             the
             Number
             of
             the
             Beast
             ,
             seeing
             they
             say
             it
             is
             opposed
             to
             the
             Number
          
           144
           ?
           
             These
             learned
             men
             cannot
             be
             supposed
             to
             be
             guilty
             of
             so
             much
             nescience
             ,
             as
             to
             be
             ignorant
             of
             the
             square-root
             of
             a
             Number
             .
             Rather
             ,
             they
             thought
             it
             unbeseeming
             the
             Wisdome
             of
             God
             ,
             and
             the
             Majesty
             of
             the
             Scripture
             ,
             to
             wrap
             up
             such
             Divine
             Mysteries
             in
             Humane
             Inventions
             .
             But
             be
             it
             what
             it
             will
             be
             ,
             it
             is
             the
             foundation
             of
             Geometry
             and
             Arithmetick
             ;
             it
             is
             that
             also
             ,
             in
             and
             through
             which
             many
             famous
             inventions
             have
             been
             brought
             to
             light
             :
             And
             the
             words
             themselves
             also
             do
             insinuate
             ,
             that
             the
             discovery
             is
             to
             be
             made
             by
             wisdome
             .
          
           So
           far
           Mr.
           
             Potter
             ,
             pag.
          
           47.
           
           In
           this
           I
           do
           agree
           with
           him
           ,
           That
           it
           is
           the
           foundation
           of
           Geometry
           and
           Arithmetick
           in
           some
           good
           measure
           ,
           to
           extract
           the
           square-root
           of
           any
           figurate
           Number
           :
           yet
           for
           all
           that
           ,
           I
           cannot
           see
           when
           the
           Spirit
           ,
           either
           in
           Daniel
           or
           in
           the
           Revelation
           ,
           doth
           speak
           of
           Tyrannical
           States
           or
           Empires
           ,
           under
           divers
           Emblems
           and
           Figures
           ,
           that
           we
           should
           discover
           and
           finde
           out
           these
           Governments
           ,
           by
           calculating
           the
           square-root
           of
           any
           Number
           ;
           but
           rather
           ,
           we
           should
           go
           to
           the
           Chronologie
           of
           the
           Times
           ,
           and
           the
           Stories
           of
           the
           Church
           .
           And
           in
           this
           sense
           we
           hold
           ,
           
             That
             Humane
             Learning
             is
             exceeding
             necessary
             .
          
           And
           for
           the
           invention
           of
           the
           square-root
           ,
           it
           is
           very
           necessary
           in
           its
           kinde
           .
        
         
           Princ.
           15.
           
           
             The
             Number
             ought
             so
             in
             special
             to
             be
             expounded
             ,
             that
             it
             may
             be
             in
             some
             sort
             discoverable
             to
             the
             people
             that
             lived
             in
             the
             days
             of
          
           John
           ,
           
             and
             in
             the
             ages
             immediately
             following
             ,
             though
             they
             lived
             before
             the
             beginning
             of
             the
             Beasts
             Kingdome
             .
          
           Therefore
           when
           it
           is
           said
           ,
           
             Let
             him
             that
             hath
             wisdome
             ,
             count
             the
             Number
             of
             the
             Beast
          
           ;
           S.
           Iohn
           in
           these
           words
           speaketh
           to
           the
           people
           that
           lived
           in
           his
           days
           ,
           and
           in
           the
           ages
           immediately
           following
           ,
           that
           by
           this
           they
           should
           understand
           the
           signs
           of
           the
           coming
           of
           the
           Man
           of
           Sin.
           And
           he
           doth
           yet
           further
           shew
           ,
           in
           what
           Revolution
           of
           Time
           he
           shall
           appear
           :
           
             There
             are
             seven
             Kings
             ;
             five
             are
             fallen
             ,
             one
             is
             ,
             and
             the
             other
             is
             not
             yet
             come
             :
             and
             the
             Beast
             that
             comes
             out
             of
             the
             Bottomless
             Pit
             ,
             he
             is
             the
             eighth
             .
          
           In
           which
           words
           of
           his
           ,
           he
           doth
           plainly
           shew
           ,
           That
           when
           seven
           Forms
           
           of
           Government
           are
           fallen
           in
           the
           City
           of
           Rome
           ,
           then
           the
           Beast
           shall
           begin
           as
           the
           eighth
           Potentate
           .
           At
           the
           same
           time
           also
           he
           saith
           ,
           That
           the
           Roman
           Empire
           shall
           be
           divided
           into
           ten
           inferiour
           Kingdomes
           ;
           that
           these
           
             have
             no
             beeing
             as
             yet
             ,
             but
             receive
             a
             Kingdome
             one
             hour
             with
             the
             Beast
             .
          
           By
           the
           collation
           of
           both
           these
           Scriptures
           ,
           it
           is
           clear
           ,
           That
           the
           Number
           was
           discoverable
           in
           the
           times
           of
           Iohn
           ;
           and
           not
           onely
           to
           Iohn
           by
           Revelation
           ,
           but
           to
           others
           also
           ,
           that
           would
           imploy
           themselves
           by
           search
           .
           From
           hence
           then
           we
           may
           clearly
           discern
           ,
           That
           they
           are
           in
           an
           error
           ,
           who
           would
           have
           the
           Number
           666
           ,
           to
           be
           the
           Number
           of
           the
           time
           of
           the
           rising
           of
           the
           Beast
           ,
           and
           yet
           make
           their
           account
           by
           the
           years
           of
           the
           Lord.
           So
           Danaeus
           in
           his
           Treatise
           
             de
             Antichristo
             :
             The
             Spirit
             of
             God
             in
             that
             place
          
           (
           saith
           he
           )
           
             medleth
             not
             with
             Arithmetical
             signification
             of
             Letters
             ,
             but
             with
             the
             Time
             and
             Number
             of
             years
             ,
             wherein
             those
             things
             shall
             be
             accomplished
             that
             are
             there
             spoken
             of
             :
             and
             for
             the
             particular
             time
             ,
             he
             referreth
             us
             to
             the
             year
          
           666
           ,
           pag.
           13
           ,
           14.
           
           Alstedius
           saith
           ,
           
             Denotatur
             tempus
             quo
             Antichristus
             inchoaturus
             regnum
             suum
             ,
             scil
             .
             anno
          
           666
           ,
           
             quo
             tempore
             coepit
             Papa
             maxime
             dominari
             ,
          
           Theol.
           Polem
           .
           Part.
           4.
           
           Controv.
           5.
           pag.
           388.
           
           The
           like
           is
           said
           By
           Eckard
           the
           Lutheran
           ,
           and
           others
           .
           Though
           in
           this
           matter
           we
           do
           agree
           with
           the
           forenamed
           Expositors
           ,
           That
           about
           the
           666th
           year
           from
           the
           birth
           of
           the
           Lord
           ,
           the
           Universal
           Headship
           of
           the
           Bishop
           of
           Rome
           was
           set
           up
           ;
           though
           this
           be
           true
           in
           some
           latitude
           of
           speech
           ,
           yet
           it
           cannot
           be
           the
           meaning
           of
           the
           Text.
           For
           what
           knowledge
           had
           the
           people
           that
           lived
           in
           the
           days
           of
           Iohn
           ,
           and
           in
           the
           ages
           immediately
           following
           ,
           of
           the
           account
           by
           the
           year
           of
           the
           Lord
           ?
           Why
           should
           not
           the
           Christians
           that
           lived
           in
           Spain
           ,
           finde
           out
           the
           Number
           by
           the
           
             Spanish
             Aera
          
           ?
           The
           Christians
           in
           Aegy●…t
           and
           Africa
           ,
           by
           the
           Aera
           of
           Dioclesian
           ?
           And
           the
           Christians
           under
           the
           Emperors
           of
           Constantinople
           ,
           by
           the
           Indictions
           ?
           These
           ,
           and
           many
           other
           ways
           of
           account
           ,
           were
           anciently
           used
           .
           
             Dyonisius
             the
             Less
          
           ,
           about
           the
           year
           532
           ,
           did
           begin
           to
           compute
           by
           the
           years
           of
           the
           Lord
           ;
           and
           that
           way
           of
           Computation
           came
           not
           into
           vulgar
           use
           many
           years
           after
           .
           It
           is
           therefore
           very
           strange
           ,
           That
           men
           should
           Number
           the
           times
           of
           the
           beginning
           of
           the
           Beasts
           Kingdome
           ,
           after
           the
           account
           
           by
           the
           years
           of
           the
           Lord
           ,
           and
           yet
           certain
           hundred
           years
           after
           ,
           the
           Church
           should
           be
           wholly
           ignorant
           of
           that
           way
           of
           Computation
           .
        
         
           And
           thus
           laying
           all
           things
           together
           ,
           we
           have
           proved
           by
           the
           concatenation
           and
           connexion
           of
           all
           particulars
           ,
           That
           ours
           is
           the
           true
           Interpretation
           ;
           because
           it
           doth
           agree
           with
           all
           the
           Body
           of
           the
           Circumstances
           fore-alledged
           .
           And
           for
           other
           Expositions
           ,
           we
           have
           shewed
           the
           Reason
           why
           we
           cannot
           rest
           in
           them
           ,
           because
           in
           severall
           Principles
           ,
           more
           or
           less
           ,
           they
           do
           cross
           the
           meaning
           of
           the
           Spirit
           .
           Now
           it
           remaineth
           ,
           that
           we
           compare
           the
           substance
           of
           our
           Interpretation
           ,
           with
           the
           scope
           of
           the
           Apostle
           S.
           Paul
           ,
           2
           Thess.
           2.
           
        
      
       
         
           
             CHAP.
             XI
          
           .
           A
           brief
           Description
           of
           the
           Doctrine
           of
           S.
           Paul
           ,
           2
           Thess.
           2.
           
           And
           how
           he
           doth
           fully
           agree
           with
           the
           present
           Interpretation
           .
        
         
           ALl
           Interpreters
           and
           Writers
           ,
           in
           a
           manner
           ,
           do
           agree
           in
           this
           ,
           That
           the
           Beast
           ,
           his
           Name
           ,
           and
           Image
           ,
           spoken
           of
           Rev.
           13.
           are
           all
           one
           and
           the
           same
           in
           substance
           with
           the
           description
           of
           the
           Great
           Antichrist
           in
           the
           Thessalonians
           .
           Let
           us
           come
           to
           the
           words
           of
           the
           Text.
           
        
         
           Vers.
           1.
           
           &
           2.
           
           
             Now
             we
             beseech
             you
             ,
             Brethren
             ,
             by
             the
             coming
             of
             our
             Lord
             Iesus
             Christ
             ,
             and
             by
             our
             gathering
             together
             to
             him
             ,
             that
             ye
             be
             not
             soon
             shaken
             in
             minde
             ,
             nor
             be
             troubled
             ,
             neither
             by
             Spirit
             ▪
             nor
             by
             word
             ,
             nor
             by
             letter
             ,
             as
             from
             us
             ,
             as
             though
             the
             day
             of
             Christ
             were
             at
             hand
             .
          
           In
           these
           words
           ,
           there
           is
           some
           darkness
           in
           our
           English
           Translation
           :
           for
           whereas
           the
           Translation
           hath
           it
           ,
           
             We
             beseech
             you
             ,
             Brethren
             ,
             by
             the
             coming
             of
             the
             Lord
          
           ;
           the
           word
           in
           the
           Original
           is
           ,
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           
             for
             the
             cause
             of
             the
             coming
             of
             the
             Lord.
          
           The
           Apostle
           in
           the
           former
           Epistle
           ,
           having
           spoken
           
           of
           the
           coming
           of
           Christ
           to
           Judgement
           ;
           of
           the
           Resurrection
           from
           the
           Dead
           ;
           and
           the
           taking
           up
           of
           those
           that
           should
           remain
           ,
           to
           meet
           the
           Lord
           in
           the
           air
           :
           Hereupon
           ,
           certain
           among
           the
           Thessalonians
           mistaking
           the
           meaning
           of
           the
           Apostle
           ,
           did
           conclude
           ,
           That
           the
           Day
           of
           Judgement
           ,
           and
           the
           general
           Assembly
           of
           the
           Saints
           ,
           was
           then
           at
           hand
           .
           Now
           to
           diminish
           this
           opinion
           ,
           the
           Apostle
           doth
           exhort
           them
           in
           these
           words
           ,
           
             I
             beseech
             you
             ,
             Brethren
          
           ,
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           
             for
             the
             cause
             of
             the
             coming
             of
             Christ
             to
             Iudgement
             ,
          
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           
             for
             the
             matter
             or
             cause
             of
             our
             gathering
             together
             unto
             him
             ,
             that
             ye
             be
             not
             soon
             shaken
             in
             minde
             ,
             nor
             be
             troubled
             ,
             either
             by
             Spirit
             ,
             by
             word
             ,
             or
             by
             letter
             ,
             as
             from
             us
             ,
             as
             that
             the
             day
             of
             Christ
             is
             at
             hand
             .
          
           This
           sheweth
           plainly
           ,
           That
           they
           did
           mistake
           the
           Apostle
           in
           his
           former
           Epistle
           ,
           and
           did
           understand
           his
           words
           ,
           as
           though
           Christ
           should
           come
           presently
           to
           Judgement
           .
           Now
           for
           their
           better
           information
           ,
           he
           proceedeth
           .
        
         
           Vers.
           3.
           
           
             Let
             no
             man
             deceive
             you
             by
             any
             means
             ;
             for
             that
             day
             shall
             not
             come
             ,
             except
             there
             come
             a
             falling
             away
             first
             ,
             and
             the
             Man
             of
             Sin
             be
             revealed
             ,
             the
             Son
             of
             Perdition
             .
          
           He
           plainly
           sheweth
           ,
           what
           things
           should
           precede
           the
           coming
           of
           Christ
           ;
           to
           wit
           ,
           A
           general
           defection
           from
           the
           Faith
           ,
           and
           the
           revelation
           of
           the
           Man
           of
           Sin.
           And
           this
           ,
           I
           take
           it
           ,
           doth
           fully
           open
           the
           meaning
           of
           our
           Saviours
           words
           in
           the
           Gospel
           ,
           concerning
           the
           woful
           state
           of
           the
           Church
           in
           the
           latter
           times
           .
           He
           speaketh
           plainly
           ,
           that
           
             many
             false
             Christs
             shall
             arise
             ,
             and
             shall
             deceive
             ,
             if
             it
             were
             possible
             ,
             the
             very
             Elect
             ,
          
           Matth.
           24.
           5
           ,
           23
           ,
           24.
           
           Now
           to
           what
           times
           can
           we
           better
           refer
           this
           ,
           then
           to
           the
           times
           of
           Antichrist
           ,
           to
           the
           times
           of
           the
           Apostacy
           ,
           in
           which
           men
           shall
           depart
           from
           the
           Faith
           ,
           and
           shall
           give
           heed
           to
           the
           Doctrine
           of
           Devils
           ?
           1
           Tim.
           4.
           1.
           
        
         
           Now
           whereas
           the
           Apostle
           saith
           ,
           That
           
             there
             shall
             come
             a
             falling
             away
             first
             :
          
           Some
           of
           the
           Ancients
           ,
           as
           Hierom
           ,
           did
           understand
           this
           ,
           of
           the
           defection
           from
           the
           Roman
           Empire
           .
           Though
           this
           be
           a
           truth
           ,
           yet
           it
           is
           not
           the
           meaning
           of
           the
           Text
           :
           For
           ,
           the
           
             falling
             away
          
           here
           meant
           ,
           is
           ,
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           
             a
             falling
             away
          
           from
           the
           true
           Faith
           ,
           or
           from
           the
           pure
           Worship
           of
           God.
           So
           the
           word
           is
           used
           commonly
           in
           the
           New
           Testament
           :
           
           and
           the
           sense
           of
           the
           Text
           doth
           plainly
           shew
           ,
           That
           God
           gave
           men
           up
           to
           delusions
           ,
           to
           believe
           lies
           ,
           because
           they
           did
           not
           receive
           the
           love
           of
           the
           truth
           ,
           that
           they
           might
           be
           saved
           .
           The
           words
           then
           do
           not
           intend
           a
           Civil
           ,
           but
           a
           Spiritual
           apostacy
           or
           falling
           away
           .
           Further
           ,
           whereas
           it
           is
           said
           ,
           
             And
             the
             Man
             of
             Sin
             shall
             be
             revealed
             ,
             the
             Son
             of
             Perdition
             :
          
           Here
           is
           a
           great
           question
           ,
           Whether
           the
           times
           of
           the
           Apostacy
           ,
           and
           the
           Revelation
           of
           the
           Man
           of
           Sin
           ,
           do
           begin
           all
           at
           one
           instant
           ?
           Some
           will
           have
           this
           to
           be
           a
           Figure
           ,
           which
           the
           Rhetoricians
           call
           Hendyadys
           :
           But
           they
           are
           deceived
           ;
           for
           the
           words
           are
           plain
           ,
           that
           a
           falling
           away
           from
           the
           Faith
           ,
           should
           be
           by
           degrees
           :
           and
           when
           this
           Apostacy
           should
           come
           to
           some
           ripeness
           and
           maturity
           ,
           then
           the
           Man
           of
           Sin
           should
           be
           revealed
           .
           For
           how
           is
           it
           possible
           ,
           that
           the
           Christian
           Church
           should
           degenerate
           so
           far
           from
           Christ
           ,
           to
           take
           Antichrist
           for
           her
           Head
           ;
           but
           she
           must
           be
           moulded
           ,
           prepared
           and
           wrought
           by
           degrees
           for
           such
           a
           rebellion
           ?
           And
           for
           that
           expression
           ,
           
             The
             Man
             of
             Sin
          
           ;
           whereas
           the
           Romish
           Interpreters
           ,
           and
           
             Hugo
             Grotius
          
           in
           his
           Tract
           
             de
             Antichristo
          
           ,
           do
           take
           this
           for
           one
           individual
           Man
           ,
           herein
           they
           are
           monstrous
           absurd
           .
           For
           if
           he
           be
           one
           Man
           ,
           as
           they
           suppose
           ,
           then
           the
           Apostle
           tells
           us
           ,
           That
           he
           was
           secretly
           conceived
           in
           those
           first
           times
           ,
           the
           Mystery
           of
           Iniquity
           did
           then
           begin
           to
           work
           .
           And
           he
           further
           addeth
           ,
           that
           he
           shall
           continue
           till
           the
           last
           times
           ,
           
             whom
             the
             Lord
             shall
             consume
             with
             the
             word
             of
             his
             mouth
             ,
             and
             shall
             abolish
             with
             the
             brightness
             of
             his
             coming
             .
          
           Upon
           these
           grounds
           ,
           if
           the
           Man
           of
           Sin
           be
           one
           individual
           Man
           ,
           he
           must
           needs
           be
           very
           long-lived
           ,
           he
           must
           live
           in
           a
           manner
           from
           the
           first
           to
           the
           second
           coming
           of
           Christ.
           But
           leaving
           them
           to
           make
           good
           their
           own
           conceits
           ,
           to
           speak
           positively
           ,
           The
           Man
           of
           Sin
           meant
           in
           the
           Text
           ,
           is
           ,
           A
           State
           ,
           or
           a
           Succession
           of
           Men
           in
           a
           State
           or
           Government
           :
           for
           Iohn
           in
           the
           Revlation
           doth
           call
           this
           Tyrannical
           Empire
           ,
           by
           the
           Title
           of
           a
           Beast
           ;
           which
           all
           do
           know
           ,
           in
           the
           sense
           of
           the
           Prophets
           ,
           doth
           intend
           an
           Idolatrous
           or
           a
           persecuting
           Empire
           .
           He
           is
           called
           ,
           The
           Man
           of
           Sin
           ,
           by
           a
           singular
           Emphasis
           ,
           as
           being
           exceeding
           sinful
           ,
           and
           the
           cause
           of
           sin
           to
           others
           :
           for
           so
           it
           is
           said
           in
           the
           Scriptures
           ,
           
             Ieroboam
             the
             son
             of
             Nebat
             ,
             that
             made
             Israel
             to
             sin
             .
          
           And
           if
           he
           be
           the
           Man
           of
           Sin
           ,
           
           it
           is
           no
           hard
           matter
           to
           render
           a
           reason
           why
           he
           should
           be
           called
           ,
           
             The
             childe
             of
             Perdition
          
           .
           This
           Title
           was
           sometimes
           given
           to
           
             Iudas
             :
             While
             I
             was
             with
             them
             in
             the
             world
             ,
             I
             kept
             them
             in
             thy
             Name
             ;
             those
             that
             thou
             gavest
             me
             ,
             have
             I
             kept
             ,
             and
             none
             of
             them
             is
             lost
             ,
             save
             the
             Son
             of
             Perdition
             ,
          
           Joh.
           17.
           12.
           
           In
           the
           next
           words
           ,
           the
           Apostle
           doth
           describe
           him
           according
           to
           his
           nature
           .
        
         
           Ver.
           4.
           
           
             Who
             opposeth
             and
             exalteth
             himself
             above
             all
             that
             is
             called
             God
             ,
             or
             is
             worshipped
             :
             So
             that
             he
             as
             God
             sitteth
             in
             the
             Temple
             of
             God
             ,
             shewing
             himself
             that
             he
             is
             God.
          
           For
           his
           opposing
           himself
           ,
           this
           is
           spoken
           in
           relation
           to
           Christ
           ,
           as
           he
           is
           King
           ,
           Priest
           and
           Prophet
           .
           So
           the
           Beast
           in
           the
           Revelat.
           is
           set
           in
           immediate
           opposition
           against
           the
           Lamb
           ,
           as
           if
           he
           were
           another
           Christ
           ,
           the
           Rival
           of
           his
           Kingly
           Power
           and
           Dignity
           .
           And
           whereas
           he
           doth
           
             exalt
             himself
             above
             all
             that
             is
             called
             God
          
           ;
           Interpreters
           do
           ordinarily
           take
           this
           for
           Magistrates
           ,
           whether
           Inferior
           or
           Superior
           ;
           above
           all
           which
           ,
           Antichrist
           must
           advance
           himself
           .
           The
           expression
           
             above
             all
             that
             is
             called
             God
             ,
          
           is
           a
           style
           too
           diminuent
           to
           express
           the
           true
           God
           by
           :
           
             There
             be
             ma●…y
             that
             be
             called
             Gods
             ;
             yet
             to
             us
             there
             is
             but
             one
             God
             ,
          
           1
           Cor.
           8.
           5.
           
           This
           is
           spoken
           of
           Magistrates
           ,
           that
           they
           are
           called
           Gods
           ;
           and
           above
           all
           these
           ,
           Antichrist
           ,
           as
           he
           doth
           pretend
           himself
           Universal
           Head
           of
           the
           Church
           ,
           shall
           exalt
           himself
           .
           Further
           ,
           whereas
           it
           is
           said
           ,
           that
           
             he
             sits
             in
             the
             Temple
             of
             God
          
           ;
           this
           is
           meant
           of
           the
           Church
           of
           God
           ,
           where
           God
           is
           worshipped
           in
           the
           time
           of
           the
           New
           Testament
           ,
           as
           he
           was
           in
           the
           Temple
           of
           Ierusalem
           of
           old
           .
           Now
           that
           the
           Church
           is
           called
           ,
           
             The
             Temple
             of
             God
          
           ,
           is
           clear
           from
           that
           of
           the
           Apostle
           ,
           
             Know
             ye
             not
             that
             ye
             are
             the
             Temple
             of
             God
             ?
          
           and
           ,
           
             The
             Temple
             of
             God
             is
             holy
             ,
             which
             ye
             are
             ,
          
           1
           Cor.
           3.
           16.
           
           The
           result
           of
           the
           whole
           speech
           ,
           is
           this
           ,
           That
           Antichrist
           shall
           sit
           in
           the
           Universal
           Church
           ,
           as
           in
           his
           Episcopal
           See
           :
           for
           so
           the
           word
           in
           the
           Original
           doth
           signifie
           ,
           
             Cathedraticâ
             potestate
             praesidere
          
           .
           By
           these
           words
           it
           is
           plain
           ,
           That
           the
           formality
           of
           Antichristianism
           ,
           lies
           in
           the
           Universal
           Headship
           .
           For
           when
           the
           Apostle
           doth
           describe
           the
           Great
           Antichrist
           by
           his
           nature
           ,
           he
           saith
           ,
           That
           
             he
             sitteth
             in
             the
             Church
             of
             God
             ,
             as
             the
             supreme
             Lord
             and
             Ruler
             .
          
           Therefore
           if
           that
           be
           true
           which
           I
           have
           so
           largely
           dispured
           in
           the
           Body
           of
           the
           
           Treatise
           ,
           That
           the
           Name
           of
           the
           Beast
           is
           no
           other
           ,
           but
           his
           Universal
           Power
           and
           Headship
           over
           the
           Church
           of
           God
           ;
           then
           I
           will
           leave
           any
           man
           to
           consider
           ,
           Whether
           one
           and
           the
           same
           thing
           is
           not
           here
           spoken
           by
           S.
           Paul
           ,
           in
           the
           Epistle
           to
           the
           
             Thessalonians
             :
             He
             as
             God
             ,
             sitteth
             in
             the
             Temple
             of
             God
             ,
             shewing
             himself
             that
             he
             is
             God.
          
           And
           hath
           not
           the
           Bishop
           of
           Rome
           for
           1000
           years
           ,
           put
           himself
           in
           the
           place
           of
           Christ
           ,
           as
           the
           Head
           and
           Law-giver
           to
           the
           Church
           of
           Christ
           ?
           But
           the
           Apostle
           goes
           on
           .
        
         
           Vers.
           5.
           
           
             Remember
             you
             ●…ot
             when
             I
             was
             with
             you
             ,
             I
             told
             you
             these
             things
             ?
          
           We
           reade
           in
           Acts
           20.
           when
           the
           〈◊〉
           sent
           to
           Ephesus
           ,
           he
           called
           for
           the
           E●…ders
           of
           the
           Church
           ;
           he
           told
           them
           ,
           
             that
             grievous
             Wolves
             should
             come
             ,
             and
             that
             they
             should
             not
             spare
             the
             stock
             .
          
           The
           same
           things
           in
           effect
           he
           spake
           among
           the
           Thessalonians
           ,
           when
           he
           did
           foreshew
           the
           decay
           of
           the
           Christian
           faith
           ,
           and
           the
           revelation
           of
           the
           Man
           of
           Sin.
           Now
           for
           the
           time
           of
           his
           coming
           ,
           and
           the
           knowledge
           they
           had
           o●…
           that
           time
           ,
           he
           hath
           these
           words
           .
        
         
           Vers.
           6.
           
           
             And
             now
             ye
             know
             what
             with
             hol●…eth
             ,
             〈◊〉
             he
             may
             be
             revealed
             in
             his
             time
             .
          
           ●…y
           the
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           the
           thing
           that
           doth
           withhold
           ,
           all
           Interpreters
           ,
           for
           the
           most
           part
           ,
           〈◊〉
           understand
           the
           Great
           Empire
           of
           the
           Romans
           .
           For
           as
           long
           as
           the
           M●…jesty
           of
           that
           Empire
           did
           stand
           ,
           it
           would
           keep
           〈◊〉
           the
           dominion
           of
           Antichrist
           ,
           who
           should
           ari●…e
           .
           What
           knowledge
           the
           〈◊〉
           Thessalonians
           had
           of
           this
           ,
           is
           doubtful
           :
           yet
           there
           i●…
           nothing
           more
           ●…ure
           ,
           then
           that
           the
           Ancient
           Writers
           ,
           〈◊〉
           as
           lived
           before
           the
           fall
           of
           the
           Empire
           ,
           did
           believe
           ,
           That
           when
           this
           〈◊〉
           〈◊〉
           come
           ,
           then
           the
           Man
           of
           Sin
           should
           be
           revealed
           ▪
           Among
           many
           others
           ,
           when
           Hierom
           heard
           of
           the
           taking
           of
           Rome
           by
           the
           R●…me
           ,
           he
           did
           make
           application
           of
           this
           Scripture
           ,
           that
           then
           the
           Man
           of
           Sin
           was
           at
           the
           doors
           .
           Now
           whereas
           some
           Interpreters
           think
           ,
           that
           we
           cannot
           shew
           any
           precise
           time
           of
           the
           coming
           of
           Antichrist
           ,
           they
           divide
           themselves
           into
           sundry
           opinions
           :
           And
           therefore
           some
           speak
           of
           his
           Conception
           ,
           some
           of
           his
           Birth
           ,
           some
           of
           his
           higher
           advancement
           into
           the
           Throne
           ,
           and
           some
           of
           the
           full
           Perfection
           of
           his
           Power
           .
           Others
           there
           are
           ,
           that
           take
           all
           these
           together
           ,
           and
           tell
           us
           ,
           That
           he
           was
           conceived
           in
           
           the
           Primitive
           Times
           ,
           born
           about
           the
           times
           of
           Constantane
           ,
           set
           up
           in
           the
           Throne
           under
           the
           Emperor
           Phocas
           ,
           and
           raised
           to
           the
           high
           pitch
           ,
           when
           he
           did
           assume
           the
           Power
           of
           both
           Swords
           .
           But
           all
           these
           are
           but
           conceits
           of
           mens
           own
           Commenting
           .
           For
           the
           time
           of
           the
           revelation
           of
           the
           Man
           of
           Sin
           ,
           must
           not
           be
           as
           every
           one
           will
           feign
           it
           at
           his
           own
           pleasure
           ,
           but
           as
           it
           is
           positively
           and
           plainly
           set
           down
           in
           the
           Word
           of
           Truth
           .
           Now
           if
           we
           go
           to
           the
           scope
           of
           the
           Context
           ,
           the
           Great
           Empire
           of
           the
           Roman
           ,
           the
           impediment
           that
           hindred
           must
           be
           taken
           away
           ,
           and
           then
           after
           that
           ,
           the
           Man
           of
           Sin
           must
           be
           revealed
           ,
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           in
           his
           definite
           and
           determinate
           time
           .
           There
           is
           then
           a
           precise
           .
           definite
           ,
           and
           determinate
           time
           ,
           for
           the
           revelation
           of
           the
           Man
           of
           Sin
           ;
           and
           this
           must
           be
           after
           the
           fall
           of
           the
           old
           Empire
           .
           N●…w
           according
           to
           these
           grounds
           ,
           there
           can
           be
           no
           other
           time
           intended
           ,
           but
           when
           he
           was
           installed
           Oecumenical
           Bishop
           under
           the
           Emperor
           Phocas
           .
           It
           is
           clear
           by
           the
           Stories
           of
           the
           Church
           ,
           That
           the
           Empire
           fell
           ,
           and
           the
           Kings
           arose
           in
           the
           fifth
           Century
           .
           And
           after
           that
           ,
           in
           the
           year
           606
           from
           the
           birth
           of
           the
           Lord
           ,
           and
           in
           the
           year
           666
           from
           the
           beginning
           of
           the
           Roman
           as
           the
           fourth
           Metal-Kingdome
           ,
           the
           Bishop
           of
           Rome
           was
           declared
           Universal
           Head
           over
           all
           Churches
           in
           the
           times
           of
           the
           Emperor
           Phocas
           .
           In
           this
           year
           he
           was
           revealed
           ,
           and
           declared
           to
           the
           world
           ,
           in
           such
           a
           manner
           ,
           as
           the
           Apostle
           doth
           describe
           him
           :
           for
           in
           this
           year
           he
           did
           begin
           to
           sit
           in
           the
           Church
           ,
           or
           in
           the
           Temple
           of
           God
           ,
           as
           
             in
             Cathedrá
          
           ,
           as
           Oecumenical
           and
           Universal
           Bishop
           and
           Head
           of
           the
           Church
           .
           And
           so
           we
           have
           the
           particular
           time
           when
           Antichrist
           was
           revealed
           ,
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           in
           his
           definite
           time
           .
           This
           we
           take
           to
           be
           the
           natural
           sense
           of
           the
           Text
           :
           for
           if
           these
           two
           things
           be
           supposed
           ,
           First
           ,
           that
           the
           beeing
           of
           the
           Man
           of
           Sin
           lies
           essentially
           in
           his
           Headship
           over
           the
           Church
           and
           Temple
           of
           God.
           Secondly
           ,
           that
           he
           did
           appear
           in
           his
           proper
           time
           ,
           after
           the
           fall
           of
           the
           old
           Empire
           :
           What
           other
           thing
           can
           here
           be
           signified
           or
           decyphered
           ,
           but
           that
           which
           we
           speak
           of
           ,
           to
           wit
           ,
           that
           the
           Number
           666
           in
           the
           Revelation
           ,
           doth
           point
           out
           the
           time
           of
           the
           rising
           of
           this
           Spiritual
           Monarchy
           ?
           For
           as
           we
           have
           formerly
           shewed
           ,
           the
           year
           606
           ,
           according
           to
           the
           calculation
           of
           the
           
           times
           in
           Daniel
           ,
           is
           the
           Number
           666
           ,
           the
           Number
           of
           the
           Name
           or
           Universal
           Headship
           of
           the
           Beast
           .
           And
           thus
           we
           see
           how
           the
           scope
           of
           the
           Apostle
           in
           this
           Scripture
           ,
           doth
           fully
           answer
           our
           Interpretation
           ,
           concerning
           the
           Name
           of
           the
           Beast
           ,
           and
           the
           Number
           of
           the
           Name
           .
           Now
           let
           us
           go
           to
           the
           words
           of
           the
           Apostle
           ,
           as
           they
           follow
           .
        
         
           Vers.
           7
           ,
           8.
           
           
             For
             the
             Mystery
             of
             Iniquity
             doth
             already
             work
             :
             onely
             he
             who
             now
             letteth
             ,
             will
             let
             ,
             till
             he
             be
             taken
             out
             of
             the
             way
             ;
             and
             then
             shall
             that
             wicked
             one
             be
             revealed
             .
          
           Here
           Interpreters
           do
           inquire
           ,
           what
           is
           meant
           by
           the
           Mystery
           of
           Iniquity
           .
           Some
           do
           think
           ,
           that
           the
           Apostle
           doth
           refer
           to
           those
           Heresies
           in
           the
           first
           times
           ,
           that
           were
           previous
           to
           the
           bringing
           in
           of
           the
           Man
           of
           Sin.
           But
           how
           could
           those
           gross
           Heresies
           be
           so
           called
           ?
           The
           Mystery
           of
           Iniquity
           did
           incroach
           upon
           the
           Church
           ,
           and
           upon
           godly
           men
           ,
           under
           the
           appearance
           of
           the
           greatest
           holiness
           .
           Secondly
           ,
           suppose
           that
           in
           those
           first
           times
           there
           were
           some
           beginnings
           of
           Free-will
           ,
           Justification
           by
           the
           Merit
           of
           Man
           ;
           yet
           these
           things
           are
           not
           to
           our
           purpose
           :
           for
           we
           are
           here
           specially
           to
           look
           after
           such
           a
           working
           of
           the
           Mystery
           of
           Iniquity
           ,
           as
           makes
           way
           for
           the
           Papacy
           ,
           or
           the
           Papal
           Government
           ,
           or
           the
           Universal
           Headship
           of
           Antichrist
           ,
           that
           he
           shall
           sit
           as
           Lord
           ,
           or
           chief
           Ruler
           in
           and
           over
           the
           Church
           and
           Temple
           of
           God.
           The
           question
           is
           ,
           What
           previous
           workings
           were
           there
           in
           the
           Apostles
           days
           ,
           and
           so
           downwards
           ,
           towards
           the
           setting
           up
           of
           the
           Universal
           Headship
           .
           For
           this
           is
           to
           the
           scope
           of
           the
           Text
           ,
           and
           this
           doth
           answer
           the
           matter
           in
           hand
           .
           Let
           us
           therefore
           consult
           with
           other
           Scriptures
           .
           S.
           Iohn
           saith
           ,
           
             Ye
             have
             heard
             that
             Antichrist
             shall
             come
             :
             even
             so
             the
             spirit
             of
             Antichrist
             is
             already
             in
             the
             world
             ,
          
           1
           Joh.
           4.
           3.
           
           What
           doth
           he
           mean
           by
           this
           ,
           that
           
             the
             spirit
             of
             Antichrist
             was
             already
             in
             the
             world
             ?
          
           He
           doth
           explain
           himself
           in
           his
           third
           Epistle
           ,
           and
           the
           9th
           verse
           ,
           
             I
             would
             have
             wrote
             unto
             the
             Church
             ,
             but
             Diotrephes
             ,
             who
             loveth
             to
             have
             the
             pre-eminence
             ,
             suffereth
             us
             not
             .
          
           It
           appears
           from
           hence
           then
           ,
           that
           in
           those
           first
           times
           men
           did
           affect
           that
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           that
           Primacy
           or
           Headship
           in
           and
           over
           the
           Church
           of
           God.
           Here
           then
           the
           Mystery
           of
           Iniquity
           did
           begin
           to
           work
           in
           those
           first
           times
           .
           But
           lest
           any
           man
           might
           alledge
           ,
           that
           these
           incroachments
           
           were
           too
           gross
           ;
           and
           that
           the
           Mystery
           of
           Iniquity
           must
           be
           carried
           on
           with
           greater
           shews
           of
           holiness
           ,
           that
           very
           godly
           men
           themselves
           might
           be
           deceived
           by
           it
           :
           For
           the
           clearing
           of
           this
           ,
           let
           us
           consider
           ,
           That
           the
           Universal
           Headship
           of
           the
           Bishop
           of
           Rome
           ,
           is
           built
           upon
           the
           Primacy
           of
           Peter
           over
           the
           rest
           of
           the
           Apostles
           :
           and
           for
           the
           Primacy
           of
           Peter
           ,
           there
           were
           some
           beginnings
           thereof
           in
           the
           very
           Apostles
           days
           .
           His
           Authority
           was
           so
           great
           ,
           that
           it
           seemed
           to
           be
           a
           Law.
           Paul
           chargeth
           him
           ,
           that
           
             he
             did
             compel
             the
             Gentiles
             to
             be
             circumcised
             ,
          
           Gal.
           2.
           13
           ,
           14.
           
           I
           demand
           then
           ,
           How
           did
           he
           compel
           them
           ?
           Not
           by
           Precept
           or
           Command
           ;
           not
           by
           any
           coercive
           Power
           ,
           but
           by
           his
           Example
           .
           His
           Authority
           was
           so
           great
           in
           the
           Consciences
           of
           the
           People
           of
           those
           times
           ,
           that
           is
           seemed
           to
           be
           a
           Law
           :
           And
           
             Barnabas
             himself
             also
             was
             drawn
             away
             with
             their
             dissimulation
             .
          
           S.
           Paul
           also
           ,
           an
           eminent
           Apostle
           ,
           seemed
           to
           be
           nothing
           in
           comparison
           of
           Peter
           :
           for
           so
           he
           expresseth
           himself
           ;
           
             Iames
             ,
             and
             Iohn
             ,
             and
             Cephus
             ,
             which
             seemed
             to
             be
             Pillars
             ,
          
           Gal.
           2.
           9.
           
           Such
           credit
           had
           Peter
           with
           the
           Faithful
           in
           those
           first
           times
           .
           And
           truly
           ,
           after
           his
           death
           it
           was
           not
           diminished
           :
           for
           the
           ancient
           Fathers
           of
           the
           Church
           ,
           conceiving
           him
           to
           be
           Bishop
           of
           Rome
           ,
           did
           ascribe
           more
           then
           too
           much
           to
           his
           Successors
           ,
           and
           to
           that
           Succession
           for
           his
           sake
           :
           At
           least
           ,
           the
           Bishops
           of
           Rome
           themselves
           did
           take
           too
           much
           upon
           them
           ,
           under
           that
           consideration
           .
           And
           this
           did
           go
           on
           ,
           and
           increase
           so
           by
           degrees
           ,
           that
           it
           did
           never
           leave
           ,
           till
           it
           came
           at
           that
           pitch
           at
           last
           ,
           that
           the
           Bishop
           of
           Rome
           was
           declared
           Universal
           Head
           of
           the
           Church
           .
           And
           this
           Universal
           Headship
           ,
           we
           call
           the
           Name
           of
           the
           Beast
           ;
           and
           the
           time
           of
           the
           Institution
           ,
           and
           remarkable
           appearance
           thereof
           ,
           the
           Number
           of
           the
           Name
           .
           And
           look
           as
           the
           ancient
           Church
           ,
           having
           a
           Promise
           of
           the
           coming
           of
           Christ
           ,
           were
           held
           in
           expectation
           about
           the
           time
           of
           his
           coming
           :
           So
           the
           Christian
           Church
           ,
           being
           forewarned
           of
           the
           coming
           of
           Antichrist
           ,
           were
           also
           bu●…ied
           about
           the
           times
           of
           his
           coming
           .
           Now
           for
           the
           means
           to
           understand
           the
           time
           when
           it
           should
           be
           :
           First
           ,
           they
           were
           to
           look
           to
           the
           Revolution
           of
           Empires
           :
           Secondly
           ,
           to
           the
           Number
           of
           years
           ,
           to
           the
           setting
           up
           of
           that
           State
           or
           Government
           .
           For
           the
           Revolution
           of
           Empires
           ,
           the
           Apostle
           saith
           ,
           He
           
           
             that
             letteth
             ,
             will
             let
             ,
             till
             he
             be
             taken
             out
             of
             the
             way
             .
          
           All
           the
           Ancients
           did
           understand
           this
           of
           the
           fall
           of
           the
           Empire
           ;
           and
           when
           the
           Empire
           should
           be
           removed
           ,
           then
           they
           did
           believe
           that
           the
           Man
           of
           Sin
           should
           be
           revealed
           in
           his
           time
           .
           Again
           ,
           we
           have
           further
           proved
           ,
           That
           the
           time
           of
           his
           coming
           is
           not
           onely
           discoverable
           by
           the
           Changes
           and
           Revolutions
           of
           Empire
           ,
           but
           by
           the
           Number
           of
           years
           .
           For
           if
           you
           reckon
           666
           years
           from
           the
           beginning
           of
           the
           Roman
           as
           the
           fourth
           Metal-Kingdome
           ,
           you
           will
           come
           punctually
           ,
           prec●…ely
           ,
           and
           determinately
           ,
           to
           the
           Universal
           Headship
           of
           the
           Bishop
           of
           Rome
           ,
           under
           the
           Emperor
           Phocas
           .
           And
           
             this
             is
             that
             which
             the
             Apostle
             d●…
             mainly
             treat
             of
             in
             this
             Chapter
             ,
          
           That
           
             when
             A●…
             〈◊〉
             ,
             ●…e
             shall
             sit
             as
             God
             in
             the
             Temple
             of
             God
          
           ;
           that
           is
           ,
           he
           〈◊〉
           sit
           in
           the
           Church
           ,
           as
           in
           his
           Ep●…opal
           ●…ee
           .
           From
           the
           ●…ope
           of
           the
           whole
           ,
           it
           is
           clear
           ,
           That
           the
           formality
           of
           〈◊〉
           ,
           d●…h
           lie
           in
           the
           Universal
           Headship
           .
           And
           for
           the
           time
           of
           the
           revelation
           thereof
           ,
           the
           Apostle
           saith
           ,
           It
           must
           be
           after
           the
           removal
           of
           the
           old
           Empire
           ,
           and
           then
           the
           Man
           of
           Sin
           shall
           be
           revealed
           in
           his
           time
           .
           Now
           this
           time
           can
           be
           no
           other
           ,
           but
           in
           the
           decree
           of
           the
           Universal
           Headship
           ,
           under
           the
           Emperor
           P●…ocas
           ,
           666
           years
           from
           the
           beginning
           of
           the
           Roman
           as
           the
           fourth
           Metal-Kingdome
           .
           And
           so
           Iohn
           in
           the
           Revelation
           ,
           and
           Paul
           in
           the
           Thessalonians
           ,
           do
           agree
           in
           one
           and
           the
           same
           sense
           ;
           and
           both
           Scriptures
           do
           
             facere
             paria
          
           .
        
         
           Now
           then
           ,
           to
           gather
           up
           all
           into
           one
           sum
           .
           Seeing
           the
           truth
           of
           our
           Interpretation
           is
           verified
           in
           all
           the
           particulars
           of
           the
           Text
           ,
           Rev.
           13.
           
           Seeing
           also
           it
           is
           confirmed
           by
           the
           whole
           sense
           of
           the
           Chapter
           ,
           Rev.
           17.
           
           Seeing
           also
           it
           agreeth
           with
           all
           the
           Principles
           and
           Grounds
           throughout
           the
           whole
           Prophecy
           .
           And
           last
           of
           all
           ,
           seeing
           it
           doth
           fully
           con●…ent
           with
           the
           scope
           of
           the
           Apostle
           in
           the
           Epistle
           to
           the
           Th●…ssalonians
           :
           We
           may
           safely
           conclude
           ,
           That
           we
           have
           given
           a
           right
           Exposition
           of
           the
           meaning
           of
           the
           Spirit
           ;
           and
           have
           truly
           shewed
           ,
           what
           is
           meant
           by
           the
           Beast
           ,
           his
           Name
           ,
           Image
           ,
           Mark
           ,
           and
           the
           Number
           of
           his
           Name
           .
           Now
           we
           will
           come
           to
           the
           practical
           part
           ,
           to
           the
           use
           of
           the
           Point
           .
        
      
       
         
         
           
             CHAP.
             XII
          
           .
           The
           Application
           of
           the
           whole
           :
           〈◊〉
           〈◊〉
           is
           made
           first
           ,
           of
           those
           things
           t●…at
           are
           〈◊〉
           〈◊〉
           .
        
         
           HEre
           if
           we
           apply
           our selves
           to
           the
           Times
           ,
           we
           shall
           finde
           ,
           That
           the
           term
           ●…ntichristian
           ,
           is
           used
           by
           sundry
           sorts
           of
           men
           ,
           for
           sundry
           kindes
           of
           Intere●…
           .
           ●…ome
           do
           use
           it
           aright
           ,
           and
           others
           do
           dangerousl●…
           and
           schismatically
           traduce
           ,
           by
           the
           misapplication
           thereof
           .
           For
           ,
           seeing
           the
           great
           sin
           of
           the
           world
           hath
           consisted
           in
           this
           ,
           In
           subjecting
           themselves
           to
           an
           Anti-Christian
           Authority
           ,
           and
           to
           the
           Laws
           ma●…e
           by
           that
           Power
           ;
           And
           seeing
           i●…
           is
           the
           duty
           of
           all
           true
           Christians
           ,
           to
           separate
           and
           depart
           from
           such
           an
           Authority
           ,
           as
           being
           so
           diametrally
           contrar●…
           to
           the
           Crown
           and
           Dignity
           of
           Christ
           their
           Soveraign
           Lord
           :
           In
           this
           point
           ,
           it
           is
           not
           to
           be
           doubted
           ,
           but
           the
           Protestant
           Churches
           have
           rightly
           rejected
           the
           Beast
           ,
           his
           Name
           ,
           Mark
           ,
           Image
           ,
           and
           the
           Number
           of
           his
           Name
           ,
           as
           they
           have
           cast
           away
           the
           Authority
           of
           the
           Bishop
           of
           Rome
           ,
           and
           the
           Laws
           ,
           as
           they
           stand
           by
           that
           Power
           and
           Headship
           .
           In
           all
           the
           passages
           of
           the
           ●…atise
           af●…regoing
           ,
           we
           have
           largely
           proved
           ,
           That
           the
           Universal
           Headship
           of
           the
           Bishop
           of
           Rome
           ,
           is
           the
           Name
           direct●…
           opposed
           to
           the
           Name
           ,
           P●…wer
           and
           Headship
           of
           the
           Lam●…
           ▪
           And
           therefore
           the
           Protestant
           Churches
           ,
           as
           formerly
           ,
           so
           now
           ,
           ●…ave
           just
           Reason
           to
           depart
           from
           the
           Church
           of
           Rome
           ,
           as
           she
           ha●…h
           departed
           from
           Christ.
           
        
         
           Now
           the
           Friends
           and
           the
           Followers
           of
           the
           Separation
           ,
           do
           endeavor
           in
           these
           times
           ,
           to
           go
           in
           t●…e
           same
           method
           ;
           for
           by
           this
           they
           think
           to
           free
           themselves
           from
           Schism
           .
           When
           they
           are
           put
           upon
           it
           to
           give
           a
           Reason
           ,
           Why
           they
           depart
           from
           the
           Ministery
           ,
           from
           the
           Ordinances
           ,
           and
           the
           Publick
           Worship
           ;
           they
           tell
           us
           ,
           The
           Ministery
           is
           Antichristian
           ;
           they
           have
           not
           renounced
           their
           Calling
           by
           the
           Bishops
           .
           In
           a
           word
           ,
           they
           call
           all
           that
           Antichristian
           ,
           which
           hath
           been
           used
           in
           Antichristian
           
           times
           ,
           and
           hath
           a
           conveyance
           and
           transmission
           down
           to
           us
           ,
           by
           the
           means
           of
           Antichristian
           men
           .
           Which
           Position
           of
           theirs
           ,
           as
           it
           is
           most
           erroneous
           and
           false
           ;
           so
           it
           doth
           draw
           many
           dangerous
           consequences
           along
           with
           it
           .
           Therefore
           to
           prevent
           such
           cunning
           Tricks
           of
           Legerdemain
           ,
           we
           will
           lay
           down
           the
           truth
           distinctly
           .
           First
           ,
           we
           will
           shew
           the
           things
           that
           are
           directly
           Antichristian
           .
           Secondly
           the
           things
           that
           are
           Anti-Christian
           by
           Analogie
           and
           Reduction
           .
           Thirdly
           ,
           the
           things
           that
           are
           Antichristian
           by
           the
           Position
           of
           some
           Circumstances
           ,
           as
           they
           are
           truly
           Christian
           by
           the
           Position
           of
           others
           .
           Fourthly
           ,
           the
           things
           that
           are
           Antichristian
           falsly
           so
           called
           .
           For
           that
           which
           is
           ●…ruly
           Antichristian
           ,
           all
           such
           are
           said
           to
           have
           the
           Mark
           of
           the
           Beast
           in
           their
           Forehead
           ,
           and
           Right-hand
           .
           For
           the
           Mark
           ,
           in
           the
           Greek
           it
           is
           said
           ,
           
             He
             caused
             all
             to
             give
             them
             a
             Mark
          
           ;
           as
           if
           the
           intent
           of
           the
           Beast
           were
           by
           this
           ,
           that
           they
           should
           give
           testimony
           that
           they
           are
           his
           .
           They
           are
           also
           said
           
             to
             receive
             a
             Mark
          
           ,
           Chap.
           14.
           
           
             To
             have
             the
             Mark
          
           ,
           Chap.
           16.
           
           Now
           then
           we
           are
           sure
           ,
           that
           to
           give
           ,
           receive
           ,
           or
           have
           the
           Mark
           of
           the
           Beast
           ,
           is
           no
           other
           ,
           but
           that
           Act
           by
           which
           the
           Consciences
           of
           men
           are
           obliged
           to
           the
           Authority
           of
           the
           Pope
           and
           his
           Church
           ;
           When
           also
           they
           do
           prosess
           ,
           That
           by
           their
           Swords
           ,
           Wits
           ,
           Goods
           ,
           Lives
           ,
           and
           by
           all
           that
           they
           have
           ,
           they
           will
           maintain
           the
           Decrees
           and
           Laws
           made
           by
           that
           Authority
           .
           The
           Mark
           in
           the
           Forehead
           ,
           is
           the
           publick
           Profession
           of
           the
           Universal
           Headship
           in
           the
           view
           of
           men
           :
           and
           the
           Mark
           in
           the
           Right-hand
           ,
           is
           the
           solemn
           Resolution
           and
           Obligation
           to
           defend
           and
           maintain
           the
           Authority
           of
           the
           Beast
           ,
           against
           all
           that
           do
           oppose
           it
           .
           And
           truly
           ,
           the
           event
           of
           things
           doth
           notably
           answer
           the
           prediction
           .
           For
           we
           see
           by
           plain
           experience
           ,
           That
           the
           Papists
           (
           such
           is
           their
           zeal
           to
           the
           Catholick
           Cause
           )
           do
           out-strip
           us
           by
           many
           degrees
           .
           The
           Jesui●…es
           are
           never
           idle
           ,
           they
           compass
           Sea
           and
           Land
           ,
           they
           ●…urn
           themselves
           into
           all
           forms
           ,
           and
           are
           still
           animating
           of
           Princes
           and
           People
           against
           the
           Protestant
           Cause
           :
           Yea
           ,
           they
           have
           so
           wrought
           ,
           that
           almost
           no
           man
           among
           them
           seemeth
           to
           spare
           either
           Labour
           ,
           Wealth
           ,
           Counsel
           ,
           or
           Life
           it self
           ,
           to
           uphold
           the
           Name
           and
           Universal
           Headship
           of
           the
           Bishop
           of
           Rome
           .
           God
           grant
           ,
           that
           one
           day
           they
           do
           not
           rise
           up
           in
           Judgment
           against
           us
           ,
           
           for
           we
           do
           not
           come
           near
           them
           in
           the
           least
           degree
           ,
           in
           promoting
           the
           Kingdom
           of
           Christ
           ,
           or
           in
           setting
           up
           the
           Gospel
           as
           the
           Regent-Law
           among
           the
           Nations
           .
        
         
           But
           the
           Papists
           will
           not
           hear
           that
           they
           are
           enemies
           ,
           or
           that
           they
           go
           against
           the
           Lord
           and
           his
           Word
           :
           They
           hold
           ,
           That
           the
           Bishop
           of
           Rome
           is
           the
           Vicar
           of
           Christ
           ;
           and
           that
           he
           hath
           all
           his
           Authority
           by
           delegation
           from
           him
           .
           These
           are
           specious
           shews
           ;
           But
           in
           deed
           and
           in
           truth
           ,
           they
           are
           real
           enemies
           against
           Christ
           :
           For
           ,
           the
           Scriptures
           and
           the
           words
           of
           the
           Gospel
           ,
           they
           can
           do
           nothing
           ,
           but
           meerly
           as
           the
           Pope
           and
           the
           Church
           of
           Rome
           do
           give
           life
           ,
           vigour
           and
           authority
           to
           them
           ,
           and
           as
           they
           do
           interpret
           them
           ,
           which
           always
           they
           do
           to
           their
           own
           advantage
           .
           There
           is
           no
           truth
           more
           clearly
           delivered
           in
           Scripture
           ,
           then
           the
           Doctrine
           of
           Justification
           by
           Faith
           in
           Christ
           ;
           and
           yet
           the
           Pope
           saith
           on
           the
           contrary
           ,
           That
           there
           is
           a
           Purgatory
           after
           this
           life
           ;
           and
           that
           the
           souls
           there
           detained
           ,
           are
           freed
           by
           Masses
           ,
           Indulgences
           ,
           Pardons
           ,
           and
           such
           like
           means
           .
           God
           and
           his
           Word
           say
           ,
           
             Thou
             shalt
             worship
             the
             Lord
             thy
             God
             ,
             and
             him
             onely
             shalt
             thou
             serve
             .
          
           The
           Pope
           on
           the
           contrary
           saith
           ,
           
             Thou
             shalt
             worship
             Saints
             ,
             Images
             ,
             Crosses
             ,
             Reliques
             ,
             and
             the
             like
             .
          
           God
           and
           Christ
           have
           commanded
           all
           men
           ,
           to
           
             search
             the
             Scriptures
          
           ,
           and
           to
           
             try
             the
             Spirits
          
           ,
           of
           what
           nature
           they
           be
           :
           Now
           the
           Pope
           on
           the
           contrary
           commandeth
           ,
           that
           
             men
             should
             forbear
             the
             doing
             of
             this
             ,
          
           and
           that
           
             they
             should
             depend
             upon
             him
             alone
             .
          
           God
           and
           Christ
           say
           ,
           
             Marriage
             is
             honourable
             amongst
             all
             men
             ,
             and
             the
             bed
             undefiled
             :
          
           The
           Pope
           on
           the
           contrary
           ,
           
             forbiddeth
             Marriage
             to
             the
             Ministry
          
           .
           By
           these
           ,
           and
           sundry
           such-like
           instances
           ,
           it
           is
           apparent
           ,
           That
           the
           Name
           and
           Soveraignty
           of
           the
           Beast
           ,
           is
           every
           way
           contrary
           to
           the
           Name
           and
           Soveraignty
           of
           the
           Lamb.
           For
           what
           the
           Lamb
           doth
           command
           ,
           the
           Beast
           doth
           countermand
           for
           the
           most
           part
           .
           From
           hence
           it
           is
           clear
           then
           (
           say
           the
           Papists
           what
           they
           will
           )
           when
           they
           leave
           Christ
           ,
           to
           follow
           the
           Laws
           of
           the
           Pope
           ,
           in
           sense
           and
           substance
           they
           make
           him
           their
           Christ
           ,
           their
           Spiritual
           King
           ,
           Head
           and
           Governour
           ,
           and
           so
           in
           effect
           are
           no
           true
           Christians
           .
           Now
           on
           the
           contrary
           ,
           seeing
           the
           Lord
           Christ
           is
           given
           as
           a
           Leader
           and
           Commander
           to
           his
           people
           ,
           they
           who
           refuse
           the
           Laws
           of
           the
           Pope
           ▪
           
           to
           yield
           subjection
           to
           Christ
           ,
           in
           the
           times
           of
           the
           greatest
           persecution
           ,
           are
           every
           where
           mentioned
           in
           the
           Revelation
           ,
           to
           have
           
             the
             Name
             of
             the
             Father
             written
             in
             their
             Forehead
             ,
          
           Chap.
           14.
           ver
           .
           15.
           
           
             To
             be
             the
             remnant
             of
             the
             seed
             of
             the
             woman
             ,
             that
             keep
             the
             Commandments
             of
             God
             ,
             and
             have
             the
             Testimony
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             ,
             Chap.
          
           12.
           ver
           .
           17.
           
           The
           Papists
           then
           in
           receiving
           the
           Doctrines
           and
           Decrees
           of
           the
           Bishop
           of
           Rome
           ,
           under
           that
           formality
           as
           they
           do
           believe
           him
           Universal
           Head
           of
           the
           Church
           ,
           are
           positively
           ,
           directly
           and
           immediately
           Antichristian
           .
        
         
           This
           Truth
           being
           laid
           down
           ,
           a
           stream
           of
           excellent
           Uses
           do
           naturally
           flow
           from
           it
           .
        
         
           First
           ,
           We
           may
           here
           contemplate
           and
           behold
           the
           truth
           and
           infinite
           Wisdome
           of
           God
           ,
           speaking
           in
           the
           Scriptures
           .
           It
           is
           now
           above
           1500
           years
           since
           ,
           that
           Iohn
           wrote
           the
           Revelation
           ,
           in
           which
           he
           spake
           of
           the
           Beast
           ,
           his
           Name
           ,
           Mark
           ,
           Image
           ,
           and
           the
           Number
           of
           his
           Name
           .
           Now
           if
           we
           go
           to
           experience
           ,
           What
           have
           all
           ages
           for
           this
           thousand
           years
           last
           past
           ,
           but
           verified
           and
           fulfilled
           the
           truth
           of
           that
           which
           he
           spake
           of
           long
           before
           ?
           He
           that
           shall
           diligently
           reade
           the
           present
           Treatise
           ,
           will
           finde
           it
           to
           be
           true
           as
           we
           have
           said
           .
        
         
           Secondly
           ,
           here
           is
           matter
           for
           our
           prayers
           and
           tears
           ,
           yea
           for
           our
           bowels
           to
           yern
           over
           those
           great
           Countries
           ,
           Kingdomes
           and
           Commonweals
           ,
           which
           do
           as
           yet
           own
           the
           Universal
           Headship
           of
           the
           Bishop
           of
           Rome
           .
           They
           do
           continue
           in
           a
           great
           sin
           against
           the
           Kingly
           Office
           of
           Christ
           ;
           their
           profession
           is
           no
           other
           ,
           but
           Apostacy
           from
           the
           true
           Head
           of
           the
           Church
           ;
           and
           unless
           they
           repent
           ,
           they
           will
           one
           day
           feel
           the
           great
           Plagues
           contained
           in
           the
           words
           of
           the
           Prophecy
           .
        
         
           Thirdly
           ,
           here
           is
           cause
           for
           the
           Protestant
           Churches
           to
           be
           thankful
           to
           the
           Lord
           :
           For
           did
           they
           rightly
           understand
           it
           ,
           he
           hath
           delivered
           them
           from
           a
           bondage
           and
           slavery
           ,
           which
           far
           surpasseth
           the
           bondage
           of
           Egypt
           or
           Babylon
           .
           For
           in
           the
           present
           case
           ,
           if
           men
           under
           this
           Government
           refuse
           to
           Worship
           the
           Beast
           ,
           and
           to
           receive
           his
           Mark
           ;
           the
           penalty
           is
           ,
           that
           they
           shall
           have
           no
           liberty
           to
           buy
           nor
           sell
           ;
           they
           shall
           be
           killed
           with
           the
           Sword
           ;
           they
           shall
           have
           their
           blood
           spilt
           ;
           they
           shall
           be
           subjected
           to
           sundry
           kindes
           of
           death
           :
           On
           the
           contrary
           ,
           if
           
           they
           do
           worship
           the
           Beast
           ,
           and
           receive
           his
           Mark
           ,
           the
           Lord
           Christ
           doth
           threaten
           on
           the
           other
           side
           ,
           that
           
             they
             shall
             be
             tormented
             day
             and
             night
             ,
             and
             the
             smoke
             of
             their
             burning
             shall
             ascend
             for
             ever
             and
             ever
             ,
          
           Rev.
           Chap.
           14.
           ver
           .
           7
           ,
           8
           ,
           9
           ,
           10.
           
           The
           day
           of
           the
           deliverance
           of
           the
           Churches
           from
           Romish
           Tyranny
           ,
           was
           a
           day
           of
           deliverance
           from
           a
           Tyranny
           over
           their
           Souls
           ,
           over
           their
           Consciences
           ,
           over
           their
           Bodies
           ,
           over
           their
           Estates
           .
           But
           all
           Treatises
           are
           full
           of
           Uses
           of
           this
           kinde
           .
           We
           will
           proceed
           ●…o
           that
           which
           is
           Antichristian
           by
           Analogie
           and
           Reduction
           ;
           for
           this
           is
           more
           immediate
           to
           our
           purpose
           .
        
      
       
         
           
             CHAP.
             XIII
          
           .
           Concerning
           that
           which
           is
           Antichristian
           by
           Analogie
           and
           〈◊〉
           .
        
         
           IN
           the
           progress
           of
           the
           Discourse
           ,
           we
           have
           shewed
           ,
           That
           the
           formality
           of
           Antichristianism
           ,
           is
           in
           the
           Headship
           of
           the
           Beast
           .
           By
           this
           Standard
           of
           the
           Market
           ,
           we
           may
           prove
           all
           other
           things
           that
           do
           more
           remotely
           symbolize
           and
           agree
           with
           the
           Great
           Anti-Christ
           .
        
         
           First
           ,
           the
           power
           of
           the
           Magistrate
           ,
           when
           it
           hath
           no
           bounds
           or
           limits
           ,
           but
           he
           doth
           all
           by
           his
           Will
           and
           Prerogative
           in
           the
           Church
           of
           God
           ,
           doth
           come
           too
           near
           to
           the
           formality
           of
           Anti-Christianism
           .
           
             Antiochus
             Epiphanes
          
           ,
           in
           the
           Prophecy
           of
           Daniel
           ,
           is
           described
           as
           a
           mighty
           King
           or
           Potentate
           in
           the
           Seleucian
           Line
           ;
           but
           when
           he
           was
           not
           contented
           with
           his
           Power
           ,
           which
           was
           great
           enough
           ,
           but
           would
           exalt
           himself
           against
           the
           Prince
           of
           the
           Host
           ,
           and
           tread
           down
           the
           Sanctuary
           ,
           and
           do
           all
           things
           after
           his
           own
           will
           ;
           in
           this
           he
           was
           a
           figure
           of
           the
           Antichrist
           to
           come
           ,
           Dan.
           8.
           12.
           
           But
           that
           we
           may
           speak
           more
           distinctly
           in
           a
           matter
           of
           so
           great
           moment
           ,
           we
           do
           desire
           to
           lay
           down
           this
           necessary
           caution
           in
           the
           beginning
           .
           Let
           us
           then
           distinguish
           
           betwixt
           the
           Essence
           ,
           and
           the
           Exercise
           of
           the
           power
           .
           For
           the
           Essence
           ,
           we
           do
           willingly
           acknowledg
           ,
           that
           the
           Lord
           hath
           ordained
           Magistrates
           to
           be
           over
           the
           people
           ,
           for
           his
           own
           glory
           ,
           and
           the
           publick
           good
           ;
           and
           that
           Magistracy
           is
           the
           Ordinance
           of
           God
           ,
           Rom.
           13.
           v.
           1
           ,
           2
           ,
           3.
           
           And
           though
           he
           hath
           not
           tied
           any
           Nation
           or
           People
           ,
           so
           strictly
           and
           precisely
           ,
           to
           this
           or
           that
           particular
           Form
           of
           Government
           ;
           yet
           his
           pleasure
           is
           ,
           That
           the
           People
           should
           obey
           the
           Government
           that
           is
           set
           over
           them
           .
           In
           this
           case
           ,
           
             If
             they
             resist
             the
             Power
             ,
             they
             resist
             the
             Ordinance
             of
             God
             ,
          
           and
           draw
           great
           guilt
           upon
           their
           Souls
           for
           their
           resisting
           .
           If
           we
           look
           to
           the
           Nation
           and
           People
           of
           the
           Jews
           ,
           they
           did
           meet
           with
           the
           greatest
           Changes
           and
           Alterations
           of
           State
           ;
           yet
           in
           each
           Alteration
           the
           will
           of
           the
           Lord
           was
           ,
           that
           they
           should
           obey
           the
           Civil
           Authority
           ,
           set
           over
           them
           ,
           for
           the
           preservation
           of
           the
           Publick
           Peace
           .
           The
           hardest
           Change
           that
           they
           ever
           met
           withal
           ,
           was
           the
           translation
           of
           their
           State
           from
           the
           house
           of
           David
           ;
           yet
           they
           were
           to
           pray
           for
           the
           peace
           of
           the
           King
           of
           Babylon
           ,
           &
           seek
           the
           good
           of
           the
           City
           ,
           whither
           they
           were
           carried
           Captive
           .
           All
           this
           plainly
           sheweth
           ,
           That
           Magistracy
           is
           the
           Ordinance
           of
           God
           ;
           and
           the
           Lord
           would
           have
           his
           own
           Command
           to
           be
           observed
           by
           his
           People
           ,
           though
           they
           did
           live
           under
           Heathen
           Kings
           .
           Secondly
           ,
           we
           are
           to
           consider
           the
           Exercise
           of
           the
           Power
           .
           And
           here
           ,
           First
           ,
           is
           the
           lawful
           execution
           ;
           and
           ,
           Secondly
           ,
           the
           exorbitancy
           and
           excess
           of
           the
           Power
           above
           Law.
           For
           the
           lawful
           use
           of
           the
           Power
           ,
           we
           do
           willingly
           yield
           ,
           That
           the
           Supreme
           Magistrate
           hath
           not
           onely
           Authority
           in
           the
           Common-wealth
           ,
           but
           he
           hath
           also
           great
           Power
           ,
           in
           and
           about
           the
           affairs
           of
           the
           Church
           .
           And
           this
           thing
           we
           have
           often
           incu●…cated
           in
           the
           Body
           of
           the
           Treatise
           ;
           to
           wit
           ,
           That
           the
           Reign
           of
           Christ
           doth
           begin
           upon
           the
           Earth
           ,
           when
           the
           Kingdoms
           ,
           States
           and
           Governments
           of
           this
           World
           ,
           become
           Nursing
           Fathers
           to
           the
           Church
           .
           And
           so
           we
           do
           affirm
           ,
           That
           it
           doth
           appertain
           to
           the
           Higher
           Powers
           ,
           to
           take
           order
           ,
           that
           Unity
           and
           Peace
           be
           preserved
           in
           the
           Church
           ;
           that
           the
           Truth
           be
           kept
           pure
           and
           intire
           ;
           that
           horrid
           Blasphemies
           be
           supprest
           ;
           that
           the
           Ordinances
           of
           God
           be
           duly
           setled
           ;
           that
           the
           profane
           ,
           the
           ignorant
           ,
           and
           rude
           body
           of
           the
           People
           (
           who
           of
           themselves
           would
           
           never
           call
           upon
           the
           Name
           of
           the
           Lord
           )
           be
           brought
           by
           their
           Power
           and
           Authority
           to
           the
           publick
           places
           of
           Worship
           .
           For
           the
           better
           effecting
           of
           which
           ,
           they
           have
           Power
           to
           call
           Synods
           ,
           to
           be
           present
           at
           them
           ,
           and
           to
           provide
           ,
           That
           whatsoever
           is
           transacted
           in
           them
           ,
           be
           according
           to
           the
           minde
           of
           God.
           In
           this
           sense
           we
           may
           not
           doubt
           to
           say
           ,
           That
           the
           Chief
           Magistrate
           in
           every
           Common-wealth
           ,
           is
           the
           Supreme
           Head
           in
           Causes
           Ecclesiastical
           ;
           that
           is
           to
           say
           ,
           The
           Supreme
           Head
           in
           Causes
           Ecclesiastical
           that
           do
           of
           right
           appertain
           to
           him
           ,
           and
           do
           fall
           under
           his
           cognizance
           by
           the
           Law-Divine
           .
           In
           the
           forementioned
           cases
           ,
           he
           is
           the
           Delegate
           and
           Vice-gerent
           of
           Christ
           upon
           the
           Earth
           .
           And
           this
           we
           take
           to
           be
           the
           lawful
           Exercise
           of
           the
           Power
           .
           Thirdly
           ,
           there
           is
           the
           Hyperbole
           or
           Excess
           of
           the
           Power
           ,
           when
           the
           Magistrate
           is
           not
           contented
           with
           his
           own
           limits
           or
           bounds
           ,
           but
           shall
           further
           endeavor
           to
           carry
           all
           by
           Will
           and
           Prerogative
           in
           the
           Church
           of
           Christ.
           This
           is
           that
           which
           comes
           nearest
           to
           the
           formality
           of
           Antichristianism
           :
           for
           ,
           Antichrist
           is
           said
           
             to
             sit
             in
             the
             Temple
             of
             God
             ,
             shewing
             himself
             that
             he
             is
             God.
          
           If
           therefore
           the
           Supreme
           Magistrate
           shall
           do
           the
           same
           in
           the
           Church
           of
           Christ
           ;
           if
           he
           shall
           controll
           and
           do
           all
           things
           after
           his
           own
           Will
           in
           the
           house
           of
           Christ
           ;
           this
           is
           to
           resemble
           the
           Great
           Antichrist
           ,
           and
           to
           do
           the
           same
           in
           effect
           which
           he
           doth
           .
           But
           for
           this
           we
           have
           a
           clear
           example
           in
           
             Steven
             Gardiner
          
           Bishop
           of
           Winchester
           ,
           who
           of
           all
           others
           is
           noted
           by
           Forraign
           Divines
           to
           cry
           up
           such
           an
           excessive
           Prerogative
           of
           the
           Kings
           of
           England
           in
           Causes
           Ecclesiastical
           .
           For
           he
           did
           not
           shun
           to
           maintain
           ,
           That
           
             it
             was
             at
             the
             pleasure
             of
             the
             King
             to
             abrogate
             Statutes
             ,
             and
             institute
             new
             Rites
             in
             the
             worship
             of
             God
             :
          
           yea
           ,
           he
           further
           said
           ,
           That
           
             it
             was
             lawful
             for
             the
             King
             to
             forbid
             the
             people
             the
             use
             of
             the
             Cup
             in
             the
             Lords
             Supper
             ,
             and
             the
             use
             of
             Marriage
             to
             the
             Ministers
             .
          
           And
           the
           ●…round
           of
           all
           this
           was
           ,
           
             Because
             the
             King
             was
             Supreme
             Head
             in
             Causes
             Ecclesiastical
             .
          
           Now
           in
           way
           of
           opposition
           to
           this
           ,
           the
           Forraign
           Divines
           have
           risen
           with
           great
           indignation
           .
           These
           are
           the
           words
           of
           Dr.
           Rivet
           ,
           in
           his
           Explication
           of
           the
           Decalogue
           ,
           Edit
           .
           2.
           pag.
           203.
           
           
             Qui
             enim
             Papatus
             doctrinam
             adhuc
             fovebat
             ,
             ut
             posteà
             apparuit
             ,
             novum
             Papatum
             in
             personâ
             Regis
             erigebat
             .
             For
             he
          
           (
           meaning
           
           
             Steven
             Gardiner
          
           aforesaid
           )
           
             who
             did
             as
             yet
             nourish
             the
             Doctrine
             of
             the
             Papacy
          
           (
           as
           after
           it
           appeared
           )
           
             did
             erect
             a
             new
             Papacy
             in
             the
             Person
             of
             the
             King.
          
           And
           Calvin
           in
           his
           Commentary
           upon
           
             Amos
             ,
             Chap.
          
           7
           ▪
           ver
           .
           13.
           speaking
           of
           them
           who
           did
           ascribe
           the
           Title
           of
           Supreme
           Head
           in
           Causes
           Ecclesiastical
           to
           Hen.
           8.
           
           King
           of
           England
           ,
           hath
           these
           words
           ;
           
             Hoc
             me
             semper
             gravitèr
             vulneravit
             ,
             quum
             vocarent
             ipsum
             summum
             Ecclesiae
             Caput
             sub
             Christo.
             This
             hath
             grievously
             wounded
             me
             always
             ,
             when
             they
             called
             him
             the
             Supreme
             Head
             of
             the
             Church
             under
             Christ.
          
           He
           did
           take
           this
           for
           no
           other
           ,
           then
           an
           incroachment
           upon
           the
           Prerogative
           of
           Christ.
           And
           he
           might
           well
           do
           so
           ,
           if
           we
           look
           to
           the
           Interpretation
           of
           
             Steven
             Gardiner
          
           aforementioned
           ,
           with
           whom
           he
           had
           to
           do
           .
           But
           the
           learned
           man
           doth
           proceed
           in
           these
           words
           :
           
             It
             is
             certain
             ,
             if
             Kings
             do
             their
             duty
             ,
             they
             are
             both
             Patrons
             of
             Religion
             ,
             and
             Nursing
             Fathers
             of
             the
             Church
             ,
             as
             Isaiah
             calls
             them
             ,
          
           Chap.
           49.
           ver
           .
           23.
           
           
             This
             therefore
             is
             principally
             required
             of
             Kings
             ,
             That
             they
             use
             the
             Sword
             wherewith
             they
             are
             furnished
             ,
             for
             the
             maintaining
             of
             Gods
             Worship
             .
             But
             in
             the
             mean
             time
             ,
             there
             are
             inconsiderate
             men
             ,
             who
             make
             them
             too
             Spiritual
             ;
             and
             this
             fault
             reigns
             up
             and
             down
          
           Germany
           ,
           
             yea
             spreads
             too
             much
             in
             these
             Countries
             .
             And
             now
             we
             perceive
             what
             fruit
             springs
             from
             this
             root
             ,
          
           viz.
           
             That
             Princes
             ,
             and
             all
             that
             are
             in
             the
             place
             of
             Government
             ,
             think
             themselves
             to
             be
             so
             Spiritual
             ,
             that
             there
             is
             no
             other
             Ecclesiastical
             Government
             .
             And
             this
             Sacriledge
             creeps
             amongst
             us
             ;
             because
             they
             cannot
             measure
             their
             Office
             with
             certain
             and
             lawful
             bounds
             ,
             but
             are
             of
             opinion
             ,
             they
             cannot
             reign
             ,
             unless
             they
             abol●…sh
             all
             the
             Authority
             of
             the
             Church
             ,
             and
             become
             the
             Chief
             Iudges
             both
             in
             Doctrine
             ,
             and
             in
             the
             whole
             Spiritual
             Government
             .
             Therefore
             there
             ought
             to
             be
             a
             temper
             kept
             :
             for
             this
             disease
             hath
             always
             reigned
             in
             Princes
             ,
             to
             desire
             to
             bend
             Religion
             according
             to
             their
             own
             pleasure
             and
             lust
             ,
             and
             for
             their
             own
             profits
             in
             the
             mean
             time
             .
          
           So
           far
           he
           .
           In
           which
           words
           ,
           two
           Points
           are
           observable
           :
           First
           ,
           the
           lawful
           exercise
           of
           the
           Power
           of
           the
           Supreme
           Magistrate
           ,
           as
           it
           doth
           keep
           its
           due
           limits
           in
           Causes
           Ecclesiastical
           .
           Secondly
           ,
           the
           redundancy
           and
           the
           excess
           of
           the
           Power
           ,
           when
           it
           doth
           tread
           under
           foot
           the
           Laws
           of
           the
           Church
           .
           That
           which
           these
           learned
           men
           did
           speak
           concerning
           the
           Supremacy
           of
           the
           
           Kings
           of
           England
           in
           Causes
           Ecclesiastical
           ,
           and
           the
           danger
           of
           the
           excess
           of
           the
           Civil
           Power
           ,
           hath
           been
           too
           truly
           verified
           by
           some
           in
           our
           days
           ;
           not
           onely
           to
           the
           total
           ruine
           of
           themselves
           ,
           but
           also
           to
           the
           destruction
           of
           that
           Soveraignty
           it self
           ,
           which
           they
           did
           so
           immeasurably
           exalt
           .
           And
           whereas
           Calvin
           in
           the
           place
           aforementioned
           hath
           these
           words
           ;
           
             Et
             hodie
             quam
             multi
             sunt
             in
             Papatu
             ,
             qui
             regibus
             accumulant
             quicquid
             possunt
             juris
             &
             potestatis
             .
             And
             at
             this
             day
          
           (
           saith
           he
           )
           
             how
             many
             are
             there
             in
             the
             Papacy
             ,
             that
             heap
             upon
             Kings
             whatsoever
             Right
             or
             Power
             they
             can
             possible
             ?
             So
             that
             there
             may
             not
             be
             any
             Dispute
             of
             Religion
             ,
             but
             this
             Power
             shall
             be
             in
             one
             King
             ,
             to
             Decree
             according
             to
             his
             own
             pleasure
             ,
             whatsoever
             he
             list
             ;
             and
             that
             should
             remain
             fixed
             without
             Controversie
             .
          
           So
           far
           he
           .
           But
           we
           for
           our
           parts
           may
           not
           onely
           say
           ,
           
             Quam
             multi
             in
             Papatu
          
           ?
           How
           many
           in
           the
           Papacy
           ?
           but
           how
           many
           in
           the
           Profession
           of
           the
           Protestant
           Religion
           ,
           have
           accumulated
           this
           great
           Power
           upon
           Princes
           ,
           that
           they
           might
           do
           what
           they
           list
           in
           the
           Church
           of
           God
           ,
           and
           in
           the
           determination
           of
           matters
           of
           Faith
           ?
           In
           Daniel
           and
           the
           Revelation
           ,
           these
           things
           are
           set
           down
           as
           the
           true
           causes
           of
           the
           destruction
           of
           Kingdomes
           .
           That
           is
           a
           most
           Divine
           expression
           of
           Daniel
           and
           the
           three
           Children
           ,
           Chap.
           2.
           ver
           .
           20
           ,
           21.
           
           
             Wisdome
             and
             might
             are
             his
             ,
             and
             he
             changeth
             the
             times
             and
             seasons
             ;
             he
             removeth
             Kings
             ,
             and
             setteth
             up
             Kings
             .
          
           And
           for
           the
           cause
           of
           these
           Changes
           ,
           it
           is
           more
           particularly
           expressed
           Chap.
           7.
           v.
           11.
           
           
             I
             beheld
             then
             ,
             because
             of
             the
             voice
             of
             the
             great
             words
             which
             the
             Horn
             spake
             ;
             I
             beheld
             even
             till
             the
             Beast
             was
             slain
             ,
             and
             his
             body
             destroyed
             ,
             and
             given
             to
             the
             burning
             fire
             .
          
           All
           solid
           Interpreters
           do
           understand
           some
           State
           or
           Government
           to
           be
           typed
           by
           the
           Little
           Horn.
           Now
           the
           destruction
           of
           such
           a
           State
           or
           Government
           ,
           doth
           arise
           immediately
           from
           hence
           ,
           because
           of
           great
           words
           which
           the
           Horn
           did
           speak
           against
           the
           most
           High.
           Therefore
           the
           exorbitancy
           of
           the
           Power
           against
           Religion
           ,
           Christ
           ,
           and
           his
           Saints
           ,
           is
           oftentimes
           the
           cause
           of
           the
           eversion
           of
           States
           and
           Kingdomes
           .
           But
           that
           we
           may
           more
           fully
           understand
           how
           far
           the
           Power
           may
           go
           ,
           and
           whither
           it
           must
           not
           go
           ,
           let
           us
           consider
           the
           examples
           of
           the
           Kings
           of
           Iudah
           .
           And
           here
           it
           is
           clear
           ,
           That
           
             Asa
             ,
             Iehosaphat
             ,
             Hezekiah
             ,
             Iosiah
             ,
          
           did
           great
           things
           
           about
           the
           affairs
           of
           the
           Church
           ,
           and
           had
           a
           very
           large
           testimony
           for
           their
           zeal
           in
           the
           Worship
           of
           God
           :
           yet
           I
           am
           sure
           none
           can
           say
           that
           their
           Power
           was
           so
           transcendent
           ,
           as
           to
           abrogate
           any
           thing
           that
           was
           appointed
           or
           immediately
           commanded
           by
           God
           in
           his
           Word
           .
           For
           when
           Uzziah
           the
           King
           would
           offer
           Incense
           ,
           that
           appertained
           not
           to
           him
           ,
           but
           to
           the
           Sons
           of
           Aaron
           ,
           he
           was
           imitten
           with
           leprosie
           ,
           and
           compelled
           to
           dwell
           alone
           ,
           as
           one
           that
           should
           have
           no
           commerce
           nor
           society
           with
           men
           .
           So
           Belshazzar
           the
           King
           ,
           when
           he
           made
           a
           Feast
           to
           a
           thousand
           of
           his
           Lords
           ,
           we
           reade
           ,
           That
           in
           the
           time
           of
           the
           Feast
           ,
           the
           fingers
           of
           a
           mans
           hand
           did
           appear
           ,
           and
           write
           upon
           the
           wall
           the
           destruction
           of
           the
           King
           and
           the
           Kingdome
           .
           And
           the
           cause
           of
           this
           Judgement
           is
           expounded
           by
           Daniel
           himself
           ,
           in
           these
           words
           ,
           Chap.
           5.
           ver
           .
           25.
           
           
             Thou
             hast
             lifted
             up
             thy self
             against
             the
             Lord
             of
             Heaven
             ,
             and
             they
             have
             brought
             the
             vessels
             of
             his
             House
             before
             thee
             :
             and
             thou
             and
             thy
             Lords
             ,
             thy
             Wives
             and
             thy
             Concubines
             ,
             have
             drunk
             wine
             in
             them
             .
             Belshazzar
          
           and
           Nebuchadnezzar
           both
           ,
           by
           strong
           convictions
           and
           demonstrations
           ,
           were
           brought
           to
           understand
           ,
           That
           the
           God
           of
           Israel
           was
           the
           onely
           true
           God
           ,
           and
           that
           they
           had
           their
           Dominion
           from
           him
           .
           Now
           when
           they
           were
           not
           contented
           with
           this
           which
           the
           Lord
           had
           given
           them
           ,
           but
           would
           insult
           over
           the
           Giver
           ,
           and
           drink
           wine
           in
           the
           Bowls
           of
           the
           Temple
           ,
           which
           they
           had
           taken
           with
           sacrilegious
           hands
           ;
           this
           was
           the
           cause
           of
           the
           ruine
           of
           the
           King
           and
           Kingdome
           at
           last
           .
           There
           is
           a
           remarkable
           passage
           of
           Herodotus
           in
           his
           second
           Book
           ,
           where
           he
           maketh
           mention
           of
           a
           Statue
           that
           was
           set
           up
           to
           Sennacherib
           in
           one
           of
           the
           Temples
           of
           Egypt
           ,
           with
           this
           Inscription
           and
           Title
           upon
           it
           ,
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           
             Whosoever
             looks
             upon
             me
             ,
             let
             him
             learn
             to
             be
             pious
             .
          
           This
           Testimony
           ,
           as
           it
           hath
           the
           greatest
           probability
           of
           truth
           ;
           so
           doth
           it
           singularly
           well
           agree
           with
           the
           Story
           of
           the
           Scripture
           .
           We
           reade
           ,
           that
           185000
           were
           slain
           in
           one
           night
           in
           the
           Camp
           of
           the
           Assyrians
           ,
           by
           an
           Angel
           sent
           from
           Heaven
           ;
           Sennacherib
           himself
           was
           killed
           by
           his
           own
           two
           sons
           ;
           and
           that
           great
           Empire
           did
           decline
           and
           lose
           its
           vigour
           by
           degrees
           .
           Now
           if
           we
           look
           into
           the
           cause
           of
           all
           this
           ,
           we
           shall
           finde
           ,
           That
           the
           insolency
           of
           that
           King
           against
           God
           and
           his
           
           Church
           ,
           was
           that
           which
           broke
           him
           all
           to
           pieces
           .
           This
           was
           done
           in
           the
           sight
           of
           all
           Asia
           ,
           that
           the
           world
           might
           know
           that
           the
           insolency
           of
           the
           greatest
           Powers
           of
           the
           Earth
           against
           God
           ,
           will
           prove
           the
           certain
           cause
           of
           their
           destruction
           .
           But
           we
           will
           conclude
           this
           matter
           with
           that
           Exhortation
           of
           the
           Psalmist
           ,
           for
           so
           he
           speaketh
           to
           all
           Princes
           and
           Potentates
           who
           do
           intrench
           upon
           the
           Prerogative
           of
           Christ
           ,
           
             Be
             wise
             now
             therefore
             ,
             O
             ye
             Kings
             ,
             and
             be
             instructed
             ,
             ye
             Iudges
             of
             the
             Earth
             :
             serve
             the
             Lord
             with
             fear
             ,
             and
             rejoyce
             with
             trembling
             :
             Kiss
             the
             Son
             ,
             lest
             he
             be
             angry
             ,
             and
             ye
             perish
             from
             the
             way
             ,
          
           Psa.
           2.
           ver
           .
           10
           ,
           11
           ,
           12.
           
           Now
           why
           doth
           he
           exhort
           the
           Kings
           and
           Judges
           of
           the
           Earth
           to
           be
           wise
           ,
           rather
           then
           other
           men
           ?
           They
           are
           Gods
           Vicegerents
           ,
           and
           there
           is
           none
           greater
           in
           Power
           then
           they
           ;
           and
           through
           the
           greatness
           of
           their
           place
           ,
           none
           are
           more
           apt
           to
           bend
           Religion
           according
           to
           their
           own
           pleasures
           and
           lusts
           ,
           then
           they
           are
           .
           Because
           this
           is
           more
           immediately
           against
           the
           Kingdome
           of
           Christ
           ,
           and
           cometh
           nearest
           to
           Antichristian
           pride
           ,
           the
           Psalmist
           doth
           advise
           them
           to
           take
           heed
           what
           they
           do
           ,
           to
           
             serve
             the
             Lord
             with
             fear
             ,
             and
             to
             rejoyce
             with
             trembling
             :
          
           If
           not
           ,
           he
           tells
           them
           plainly
           ,
           their
           insolency
           against
           Christ
           and
           his
           Church
           ,
           will
           be
           a
           certain
           cause
           of
           their
           destruction
           .
           This
           is
           made
           manifest
           from
           the
           beginning
           of
           the
           Psalm
           :
           
             The
             Kings
             of
             the
             earth
             set
             themselves
             ,
             and
             the
             Rulers
             take
             counsel
             together
             ,
             against
             the
             L●…rd
             ,
             and
             against
             his
             anointed
             ,
             saying
             ,
             Let
             us
             break
             their
             bonds
             asunder
             ,
             and
             cast
             away
             their
             cords
             from
             us
             ,
          
           ver
           .
           2.
           
           Now
           he
           doth
           direct
           his
           speech
           to
           such
           as
           these
           ,
           and
           tells
           them
           plainly
           ,
           That
           the
           Lord
           Christ
           
             will
             break
             them
             with
             a
             Rod
             of
             Iron
             ,
             and
             dash
             them
             in
             pieces
             like
             a
             Potters
             vessel
             .
          
           The
           scope
           of
           the
           Text
           ,
           is
           chiefly
           concerning
           the
           exorbitancy
           and
           exaltation
           of
           Earthly
           Powers
           against
           Christ.
           And
           these
           ,
           we
           say
           ,
           do
           more
           nearly
           and
           immediately
           symbolize
           with
           the
           Great
           Antichrist
           .
        
         
           Secondly
           ,
           they
           come
           also
           in
           the
           nearest
           resemblance
           to
           Antichrist
           ,
           and
           to
           that
           which
           is
           truly
           Antichristian
           ,
           who
           forsake
           the
           Scriptures
           ,
           to
           hang
           meerly
           upon
           Dreams
           and
           Revelations
           .
           For
           as
           the
           true
           Believers
           ,
           who
           take
           Christ
           for
           the
           Head
           of
           the
           Church
           ,
           have
           the
           Word
           of
           the
           Gospel
           applied
           
           to
           their
           hearts
           ,
           and
           sealed
           to
           their
           Consciences
           by
           the
           inward
           working
           of
           the
           Spirit
           :
           So
           on
           the
           contrary
           ,
           they
           who
           mis-believe
           ,
           and
           take
           Antichrist
           for
           the
           Head
           of
           the
           Church
           ,
           have
           his
           Superstitions
           ,
           Laws
           ,
           and
           Decrees
           ,
           rooted
           and
           grounded
           in
           them
           ,
           by
           Visions
           ,
           Dreams
           ,
           and
           Apocryphal
           Revelations
           .
           This
           is
           clear
           from
           the
           scope
           of
           the
           Scripture
           .
           And
           here
           is
           the
           es●…igies
           and
           lively
           pourtraicture
           of
           Antichrists
           Kingdome
           .
           But
           before
           I
           come
           to
           the
           point
           ,
           it
           is
           necessary
           that
           I
           should
           premise
           one
           Caution
           in
           the
           beginning
           .
           And
           here
           let
           it
           be
           noted
           ,
           That
           I
           do
           not
           speak
           of
           Revelations
           absolutely
           and
           in
           their
           full
           extent
           ,
           but
           of
           Revelations
           restrictively
           ,
           and
           in
           a
           sense
           onely
           .
           If
           we
           take
           Revelations
           in
           the
           first
           sense
           ,
           I
           do
           easily
           agree
           ,
           That
           not
           onely
           in
           the
           first
           2000
           years
           from
           Adam
           to
           Abraham
           ,
           but
           also
           in
           the
           last
           dispensation
           ,
           since
           the
           coming
           of
           Christ
           ,
           God
           hath
           wonderfully
           revealed
           himself
           to
           his
           People
           ,
           as
           it
           is
           clear
           by
           the
           Scriptures
           ,
           and
           by
           the
           Stories
           of
           the
           Church
           .
           And
           in
           my
           own
           experience
           I
           can
           avouch
           it
           to
           be
           true
           ,
           as
           I
           have
           had
           occasion
           to
           converse
           in
           several
           places
           ,
           so
           I
           have
           met
           with
           some
           good
           Christian●…
           ,
           whom
           it
           hath
           pleased
           the
           Lord
           to
           bring
           home
           ,
           by
           an
           admirable
           way
           of
           Conversion
           .
           And
           some
           select
           persons
           also
           I
           know
           ,
           whom
           it
           hath
           pleased
           the
           Lord
           to
           chuse
           out
           for
           himself
           ,
           to
           bear
           witness
           to
           his
           Truth
           ,
           both
           in
           dark
           and
           troublesome
           times
           :
           I
           have
           found
           ,
           that
           they
           have
           spoken
           great
           things
           ,
           concerning
           the
           last
           troubles
           ,
           and
           divers
           events
           thereof
           ,
           which
           experience
           hath
           confirmed
           to
           be
           true
           .
           But
           concerning
           this
           kinde
           of
           people
           (
           that
           a
           distinction
           may
           be
           made
           between
           true
           and
           Apocryphal
           Revelations
           )
           I
           have
           ever
           noted
           three
           things
           in
           them
           .
           First
           ,
           they
           have
           diligently
           waited
           upon
           the
           publick
           Ordinances
           of
           God
           ,
           and
           have
           broke
           through
           all
           difficulties
           ;
           through
           perswasions
           of
           Friends
           ,
           through
           oppositions
           of
           Enemies
           ,
           through
           threatnings
           of
           Tyrannical
           Courts
           ,
           that
           they
           might
           enjoy
           the
           means
           of
           their
           Salvation
           .
           Secondly
           ,
           I
           have
           observed
           ,
           that
           they
           have
           always
           adhered
           to
           the
           written
           Word
           ,
           and
           have
           spent
           very
           much
           time
           in
           the
           meditation
           of
           the
           Promises
           ,
           Commands
           ,
           and
           other
           Passages
           ;
           desiring
           nothing
           more
           in
           all
           the
           world
           ,
           then
           that
           they
           might
           know
           
           the
           minde
           of
           God
           ,
           that
           they
           might
           save
           their
           own
           ,
           &
           the
           Souls
           of
           other
           people
           .
           Thirdly
           ,
           I
           have
           observed
           this
           in
           them
           ,
           That
           though
           they
           have
           been
           under
           extraordinary
           teachings
           ,
           yet
           they
           have
           had
           great
           darknesses
           ,
           in
           which
           they
           have
           always
           begged
           of
           the
           Lord
           ,
           that
           he
           would
           not
           leave
           them
           so
           ,
           and
           that
           he
           would
           carry
           them
           on
           further
           .
           Now
           in
           praying
           ,
           waiting
           ,
           and
           using
           the
           means
           ,
           they
           have
           first
           or
           last
           had
           assured
           help
           from
           the
           Lord
           ,
           by
           the
           immediate
           supply
           of
           his
           Spirit
           .
           There
           is
           much
           spoken
           by
           the
           School-men
           ,
           concerning
           the
           harmony
           betwixt
           the
           Grace
           of
           God
           and
           Endeavor
           of
           Man
           :
           Suarez
           hath
           his
           way
           ,
           Alvarez
           bath
           his
           ;
           Penottus
           seemeth
           to
           draw
           a
           threed
           betwixt
           both
           :
           and
           Cajetan
           saith
           ,
           
             In
             hoc
             ego
             non
             possum
             quietare
             intellectum
             meum
             :
             In
             this
             I
             cannot
             satisfie
             my
             understanding
             .
          
           But
           for
           my
           part
           ,
           I
           never
           found
           better
           grounds
           of
           resolution
           any-where
           ,
           then
           from
           the
           experiences
           of
           some
           Christians
           ,
           whom
           it
           hath
           pleased
           the
           Lord
           a
           long
           time
           to
           exercise
           in
           the
           Schoole
           of
           Temptation
           .
           As
           they
           have
           had
           sundry
           changes
           of
           trouble
           and
           fear
           ;
           so
           they
           have
           had
           interchangable
           supply
           of
           Spirit
           ,
           and
           of
           auxiliary
           Grace
           ,
           to
           direct
           ,
           help
           ,
           and
           comfort
           them
           in
           all
           their
           fears
           .
           There
           hath
           been
           a
           sweet
           parallel
           betwixt
           Gods
           grace
           and
           their
           endeavor
           ;
           as
           they
           did
           work
           under
           the
           grace
           ,
           and
           by
           the
           help
           of
           grace
           ,
           received
           .
           By
           their
           experiences
           ,
           I
           do
           finde
           ,
           That
           it
           is
           the
           manner
           of
           God
           in
           dealing
           with
           a
           Soul
           ,
           to
           break
           it
           all
           to
           pieces
           ,
           and
           then
           wholly
           to
           make
           it
           up
           ,
           by
           the
           continual
           help
           of
           his
           Spirit
           .
           Now
           this
           doth
           not
           any
           way
           drown
           the
           endeavor
           of
           man
           ,
           but
           doth
           onely
           put
           him
           upon
           the
           work
           of
           his
           Salvation
           with
           fear
           and
           trembling
           ,
           and
           upon
           an
           humble
           dependance
           upon
           the
           Lord
           ,
           for
           the
           supply
           of
           his
           grace
           .
           This
           I
           have
           found
           from
           the
           experiences
           of
           such
           as
           have
           lived
           by
           Faith
           in
           the
           Promises
           ,
           and
           have
           prayed
           much
           by
           Faith
           in
           the
           Promises
           .
           With
           some
           of
           these
           the
           Lord
           hath
           dealt
           by
           peculiar
           Revelations
           .
           But
           these
           are
           particular
           priviledges
           ,
           which
           he
           doth
           vouchsafe
           to
           certain
           persons
           extraordinarily
           ,
           whom
           he
           doth
           set
           apart
           for
           special
           services
           ,
           either
           to
           himself
           ,
           or
           to
           his
           Church
           .
           I
           do
           acknowledge
           ,
           That
           some
           Believers
           in
           this
           last
           dispensation
           ,
           may
           be
           partakers
           of
           such
           extraordinary
           workings
           of
           
           the
           Spirit
           ;
           therefore
           I
           will
           not
           absolutely
           and
           peremptorily
           conclude
           against
           all
           Dreams
           ,
           Visions
           ,
           and
           Revelations
           in
           these
           last
           Times
           .
           And
           I
           think
           it
           very
           expedient
           ,
           that
           men
           should
           be
           moderate
           in
           their
           censure
           .
        
         
           But
           yet
           for
           the
           ordinary
           course
           of
           Visions
           and
           Revelations
           ,
           which
           men
           do
           make
           boast
           of
           in
           these
           days
           ,
           it
           is
           very
           much
           to
           be
           suspected
           ,
           that
           they
           do
           proceed
           from
           no
           good
           Spirit
           :
           Especially
           when
           they
           are
           carried
           so
           high
           ,
           as
           to
           live
           above
           Ordinances
           ,
           and
           to
           slight
           the
           Scriptures
           ,
           which
           God
           hath
           appointed
           as
           the
           way
           and
           means
           to
           Salvation
           .
           Nay
           ,
           when
           they
           shall
           go
           further
           ,
           and
           maintain
           things
           apparently
           contrary
           to
           Scripture
           ,
           and
           the
           analogie
           of
           Faith
           ,
           and
           rest
           wholly
           upon
           the
           proof
           of
           extraordinary
           Revelation
           ;
           there
           is
           great
           cause
           why
           we
           should
           have
           this
           way
           in
           deep
           suspition
           ,
           that
           the
           power
           and
           working
           of
           Satan
           is
           here
           .
           And
           they
           who
           call
           every
           thing
           Antichristian
           in
           the
           Ministery
           ,
           in
           the
           Ordinances
           ,
           in
           the
           Worship
           ,
           in
           the
           literal
           expressions
           of
           Scripture
           ;
           if
           they
           would
           be
           pleased
           to
           examine
           themselves
           ,
           and
           lay
           their
           hands
           upon
           their
           own
           hearts
           ,
           they
           would
           finde
           ,
           That
           by
           their
           slighting
           of
           the
           Scripture
           ,
           &
           by
           their
           hanging
           upon
           extraordinary
           Revelations
           in
           matters
           contrary
           to
           Scripture
           ,
           they
           themselves
           are
           the
           most
           Antichristian
           men
           ,
           and
           do
           come
           in
           the
           nearest
           resemblance
           to
           the
           Great
           Antichrist
           ,
           as
           he
           is
           described
           by
           the
           Apostle
           ,
           in
           the
           Epistle
           to
           the
           Thessalonians
           ,
           and
           by
           Iohn
           in
           the
           Book
           of
           the
           Revelation
           .
           But
           let
           us
           come
           to
           particulars
           ;
           these
           are
           the
           words
           of
           the
           Apostle
           ,
           
             Even
             him
             whose
             coming
             is
             after
             the
             working
             of
             Satan
             ,
             with
             miracles
             ,
             signs
             ,
             and
             lying
             wonders
             ,
             and
             with
             all
             deceivableness
             of
             unrighteousness
             in
             them
             that
             perish
             ,
             because
             they
             did
             not
             receive
             the
             truth
             in
             the
             love
             of
             it
             ,
             that
             they
             might
             be
             saved
             ,
          
           Chap.
           2.
           ver
           .
           9
           ,
           10.
           
           In
           which
           words
           the
           Apostle
           doth
           plainly
           shew
           ,
           and
           foretell
           ,
           That
           not
           onely
           at
           the
           coming
           of
           Antichrist
           ,
           but
           also
           in
           all
           the
           time
           of
           his
           Kingdome
           ,
           the
           Devil
           shall
           have
           power
           given
           him
           to
           do
           great
           things
           ;
           to
           deceive
           the
           world
           ,
           that
           they
           may
           believe
           the
           lies
           of
           Antichrist
           .
           It
           is
           expresly
           said
           ,
           That
           
             his
             coming
             is
             after
             the
             power
             of
             Satan
             :
          
           for
           as
           God
           did
           work
           by
           the
           Apostles
           ,
           to
           bring
           men
           to
           Salvation
           ;
           so
           shall
           the
           Devil
           put
           forth
           all
           his
           power
           in
           Antichrist
           ,
           
           and
           his
           followers
           ,
           to
           seduce
           the
           world
           to
           destruction
           .
           Oecumenius
           hath
           a
           very
           proper
           expression
           ,
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           
             The
             Devil
             shall
             do
             all
             in
             the
             middest
             of
             him
             ,
          
           or
           by
           him
           as
           the
           mean
           or
           instrument
           .
           The
           friends
           and
           followers
           of
           the
           Church
           of
           Rome
           do
           strongly
           plead
           the
           glory
           of
           Miracles
           ,
           as
           a
           note
           of
           their
           Church
           :
           and
           so
           they
           do
           truly
           fulfil
           the
           Scripture
           ;
           for
           it
           is
           expresly
           said
           ,
           that
           
             the
             coming
             of
             Antichrist
             is
             with
             all
             power
             ,
             and
             signs
             ,
             and
             lying
             wonders
             ,
             and
             that
             he
             doth
             seduce
             the
             world
             with
             all
             deceivableness
             of
             unrighteousness
             .
          
           And
           we
           see
           by
           experience
           ,
           where
           he
           hath
           wanted
           the
           Scripture
           ,
           and
           the
           colour
           of
           Divine
           Revelation
           ,
           there
           he
           hath
           usually
           confirmed
           his
           Doctrines
           by
           lying
           wonders
           ;
           that
           is
           ,
           by
           such
           wonders
           as
           the
           Lord
           doth
           permit
           him
           to
           work
           ,
           to
           establish
           lies
           and
           errors
           in
           the
           Consciences
           of
           men
           .
           The
           Stories
           of
           the
           Church
           are
           full
           of
           examples
           of
           this
           kinde
           ,
           and
           innumerable
           instances
           may
           be
           given
           .
           And
           although
           many
           of
           our
           Writers
           do
           take
           all
           those
           things
           in
           a
           manner
           for
           lies
           ,
           which
           are
           written
           in
           the
           Legend
           ;
           for
           it
           is
           the
           punishment
           of
           a
           liar
           ,
           that
           he
           shall
           not
           be
           believed
           when
           he
           speaks
           true
           :
           yet
           for
           all
           this
           ,
           I
           do
           incline
           to
           their
           opinion
           ,
           who
           do
           distinguish
           the
           several
           pieces
           contained
           in
           that
           Rhapsodie
           .
           Some
           things
           there
           mentioned
           were
           meerly
           invented
           ,
           and
           others
           there
           are
           which
           we
           may
           probably
           judge
           to
           be
           real
           operations
           of
           Satan
           to
           deceive
           the
           world
           .
           The
           words
           of
           the
           Scripture
           come
           to
           this
           Emphasis
           and
           height
           of
           expression
           ;
           
             For
             this
             cause
             God
             shall
             give
             men
             strong
             delusions
             to
             believe
             lies
             :
          
           Therefore
           the
           Devil
           must
           have
           very
           great
           power
           in
           the
           times
           of
           Antichrist
           ,
           to
           deceive
           the
           world
           ,
           how
           else
           should
           the
           Scriptures
           be
           fulfilled
           ?
           But
           passing
           by
           the
           multitude
           of
           examples
           that
           might
           be
           given
           ,
           for
           their
           sakes
           who
           in
           these
           times
           do
           slight
           the
           Scriptures
           ,
           and
           hang
           upon
           Revelations
           ,
           we
           will
           come
           to
           a
           pregnant
           instance
           in
           the
           Tenth
           Century
           .
           This
           for
           the
           most
           part
           is
           called
           by
           Writers
           
             The
             dark
             age
             .
             Bellarmine
          
           and
           Baronius
           themselves
           do
           mourn
           over
           it
           ,
           for
           the
           want
           of
           learning
           .
           But
           for
           my
           part
           ,
           I
           do
           believe
           ,
           it
           was
           not
           so
           much
           defective
           in
           these
           things
           ,
           as
           it
           did
           abound
           in
           Revelations
           ,
           Visions
           ,
           Dreams
           ,
           and
           such-like
           ,
           by
           and
           through
           which
           Satan
           had
           a
           very
           great
           power
           in
           the
           
           Consciences
           of
           people
           .
           In
           that
           Century
           ,
           in
           the
           times
           of
           the
           Saxon
           Monarchs
           ,
           in
           the
           year
           977
           ,
           well
           near
           700
           years
           ago
           ,
           there
           was
           (
           as
           Speed
           doth
           relate
           in
           his
           Chronicle
           )
           a
           very
           hot
           contention
           about
           the
           Marriage
           of
           Ministers
           .
           Dunstan
           and
           the
           Monks
           stood
           strongly
           on
           the
           one
           part
           ,
           that
           Ministers
           should
           put
           away
           their
           wives
           ;
           and
           the
           Ministers
           strongly
           pleaded
           on
           the
           other
           side
           ,
           that
           Marriage
           was
           the
           Ordinance
           of
           God.
           Concerning
           this
           matter
           ,
           
             a
             Councel
             was
             held
             at
          
           Winchester
           ,
           
             where
             after
             long
             dispute
             ,
             and
             much
             against
             the
             Monks
             ,
             it
             was
             greatly
             suspected
             that
             side
             had
             gone
             down
             ,
             had
             they
             not
             referred
             themselves
             to
             the
             Rood
             or
             Crucifix
             placed
             upon
             the
             w●…ll
             of
             the
             Church
             ,
             where
             the
             Councel
             sate
             .
             To
             this
             great
             Oracle
             S.
          
           Dunstan
           
             desired
             them
             devoutly
             to
             pray
             ,
             and
             to
             give
             diligent
             ear
             for
             an
             answer
             :
             who
             in
             as
             great
             bounty
             ,
             as
             they
             in
             devotion
             ,
             gave
             them
             this
             advice
             :
             God
             forbid
             it
             should
             be
             so
          
           (
           said
           he
           )
           
             you
             judged
             well
             once
             ,
             and
             to
             change
             that
             again
             ,
             is
             not
             good
             .
             This
             ,
          
           saith
           our
           Historian
           ,
           
             was
             Authority
             sufficient
             to
             suppress
             the
             Priests
             ,
             who
             now
             with
             their
             wives
             went
             down
             the
             wind
             .
             And
             indeed
          
           (
           saith
           he
           )
           
             to
             blame
             they
             were
             ,
             to
             suspect
             this
             their
             Iudge
             ,
             who
             never
             was
             heard
             to
             give
             wrong
             sentence
             before
             .
          
           Speed.
           Chron.
           pag.
           355.
           
           Saving
           the
           great
           worth
           and
           learning
           of
           the
           Historian
           ,
           I
           believe
           ,
           That
           this
           was
           not
           the
           first
           false
           judgement
           given
           by
           this
           Judge
           ;
           and
           I
           believe
           it
           will
           not
           be
           the
           last
           ,
           as
           afterwards
           shall
           be
           declared
           .
           Spondanus
           in
           his
           Epitome
           of
           the
           Annals
           of
           Baronius
           ,
           in
           the
           year
           975
           ,
           doth
           differ
           somewhat
           from
           this
           relation
           .
           These
           are
           his
           words
           :
           
             Quâ
             de
             re
             cum
             à
             Sancto
          
           Dunstano
           Cantuariensi
           
             Archiepiscopo
             Synodus
          
           Wintoniae
           
             congregata
             esset
             ,
             deprecante
             ipso
             rege
             ac
             plerisque
             Episcopis
             ,
             ut
             iidem
             Clerici
             restituerentur
             ,
             mirandum
             illud
             contigit
             ut
             Imago
             Cruc●…fixi
             in
             edito
             Ecclesiae
             affixa
             ,
             audientibus
             cunctis
             dixerit
             ,
          
           Non
           fiet
           ,
           non
           fiet
           ;
           judicastis
           bene
           mutaretis
           non
           bene
           .
           
             Quod
             omnes
             Clericos
             eorumque
             fautores
             confusos
             reddidit
             &
             lingues
             .
          
           It
           appeareth
           by
           this
           passage
           ,
           That
           King
           Edward
           surnamed
           the
           Martyr
           ,
           and
           many
           Bishops
           with
           him
           ,
           did
           intercede
           very
           much
           ,
           that
           the
           Ministers
           might
           have
           their
           wives
           restored
           unto
           them
           ;
           and
           when
           all
           were
           in
           a
           suspence
           what
           answer
           should
           be
           made
           ,
           this
           wonder
           happened
           ,
           that
           the
           Crucifix
           determined
           the
           contrary
           :
           
           and
           so
           the
           Priests
           were
           confounded
           ,
           and
           made
           speechless
           .
           After
           these
           things
           were
           done
           ,
           the
           Ministers
           were
           not
           yet
           satisfied
           ;
           therefore
           the
           matter
           was
           brought
           again
           to
           Councel
           ,
           and
           a
           great
           Assembly
           congregated
           at
           Cleve
           in
           Wilishire
           ,
           whither
           repaired
           the
           Prelates
           ,
           and
           most
           of
           the
           Estates
           of
           the
           Land
           ,
           besides
           Gentlemen
           ,
           and
           of
           the
           Commons
           an
           innumerable
           sort
           .
           This
           Synod
           being
           set
           ,
           and
           the
           Controversie
           propounded
           ,
           a
           hot
           and
           a
           sharp
           Disputation
           insued
           ,
           and
           was
           maintained
           for
           a
           while
           with
           many
           bitter
           invectives
           .
           But
           whether
           through
           the
           weakness
           of
           the
           foundation
           ,
           or
           the
           overpress
           of
           weight
           ,
           or
           both
           ;
           the
           Joysts
           of
           the
           upper-Loft
           ,
           wherein
           the
           Councel
           was
           held
           ,
           suddenly
           brake
           ,
           and
           down
           fell
           the
           floor
           ,
           with
           all
           the
           people
           thereon
           ;
           whereof
           many
           were
           hurt
           ,
           and
           some
           slain
           out-right
           .
           Onely
           Archbishop
           Dunstan
           ,
           then
           President
           and
           Mouth
           for
           the
           Monks
           ,
           remained
           unhurt
           :
           For
           the
           Post
           whereon
           his
           Chair
           was
           set
           ,
           stood
           (
           and
           not
           without
           miracle
           )
           wholly
           untouched
           .
           And
           hereupon
           the
           Historian
           concludeth
           in
           these
           words
           :
           
             Thus
             by
             this
             fall
             ,
             fell
             the
             Cause
             of
             the
             Secular
             Priests
             ,
             and
             the
             Peoples
             affections
             were
             drawn
             to
             the
             Monks
             :
             and
             the
             liberty
             of
             the
             Ministers
             to
             accompany
             their
             wives
             ,
             was
             now
             taken
             away
             .
             Spondanus
          
           saith
           ,
           that
           
             this
             Councel
             was
             held
             at
             Calne
          
           ;
           but
           there
           is
           no
           great
           difference
           :
           Calne
           the
           Market-town
           ,
           and
           Cleve
           a
           small
           Village
           are
           so
           near
           together
           .
           
             In
             that
             Councel
          
           ,
           saith
           he
           ,
           
             Mirandum
             illud
             accidit
             cunctis
             adversariis
             vel
             extinctis
             vel
             contritis
             ,
             solus
          
           Dunstanus
           
             qui
             Synodo
             praesidebat
             illaesus
             evaserit
          
           :
           That
           is
           ,
           
             All
             of
             the
             adverse
             party
             who
             were
             for
             the
             Marriage
             of
             Ministers
             ,
             being
             either
             killed
             out-right
             ,
             or
             sorely
             brused
             ;
             onely
          
           Dunstan
           ,
           
             the
             President
             of
             the
             Synod
             ,
             remained
             without
             hurt
             .
          
        
         
           This
           is
           a
           true
           relation
           of
           the
           fact
           ,
           and
           most
           Historians
           do
           agree
           .
           Now
           let
           us
           come
           to
           inquire
           ,
           by
           what
           power
           and
           by
           what
           efficacy
           these
           things
           were
           done
           .
           And
           for
           my
           part
           ,
           I
           think
           it
           was
           very
           just
           with
           God
           ,
           to
           forsake
           the
           Christian
           world
           ,
           and
           to
           deliver
           them
           u●…to
           strong
           delusions
           to
           believe
           lies
           ,
           because
           they
           had
           forsaken
           his
           truth
           ;
           and
           because
           the
           Ministers
           were
           so
           base
           ,
           as
           to
           suffer
           their
           Cause
           to
           be
           tryed
           by
           the
           Rood
           or
           Crucifix
           ,
           it
           was
           very
           just
           that
           they
           should
           further
           be
           
           deluded
           by
           the
           power
           of
           Satan
           .
           What
           shall
           we
           think
           of
           the
           Oracles
           among
           the
           Heathen
           ;
           of
           the
           answer
           of
           the
           Gentile
           gods
           ;
           of
           the
           power
           which
           the
           Devil
           hath
           in
           those
           Countries
           that
           lye
           wholly
           under
           gross
           Idolatries
           ?
           There
           is
           no
           doubt
           to
           be
           made
           ,
           but
           that
           Satan
           had
           great
           power
           to
           deceive
           the
           world
           by
           wonders
           .
           See
           August
           .
           in
           his
           Book
           
             Of
             the
             City
             of
             God
          
           ,
           Lib.
           10.
           
           Cap.
           16.
           
           The
           Scripture
           also
           is
           very
           plain
           to
           the
           same
           purpose
           ▪
           
             If
             there
             arise
             among
             you
             a
             Prophet
             ,
             or
             a
             Dreamer
             of
             Dreams
             ,
             and
             giveth
             thee
             a
             sign
             or
             a
             wonder
             ;
             and
             the
             sign
             or
             the
             wonder
             cometh
             to
             pass
             ,
             whereof
             he
             spake
             unto
             thee
             ,
             saying
             ,
             Let
             us
             go
             after
             other
             gods
             ,
             which
             thou
             hast
             not
             known
             ,
             and
             let
             us
             serve
             them
             :
             Thou
             shalt
             not
             hearken
             to
             the
             words
             of
             that
             Prophet
             ,
             or
             Dreamer
             of
             Dreams
             ;
             for
             the
             Lord
             your
             God
             proveth
             you
             ,
             to
             know
             whether
             you
             will
             love
             the
             Lord
             your
             God
             with
             all
             your
             heart
             ,
             and
             with
             all
             your
             soul
             ,
          
           Deut.
           13.
           ver
           .
           1
           ,
           2
           ,
           3.
           
           In
           which
           words
           it
           is
           plain
           ,
           That
           the
           Truth
           may
           be
           set
           up
           in
           the
           Church
           of
           God
           ,
           according
           to
           the
           written
           Word
           ;
           and
           yet
           for
           the
           tryal
           of
           the
           sincerity
           of
           men
           ,
           God
           may
           suffer
           seducers
           to
           arise
           to
           do
           great
           things
           .
           We
           have
           a
           large
           experience
           of
           this
           in
           all
           the
           times
           of
           the
           Beasts
           Kingdome
           :
           For
           when
           our
           Saviour
           saith
           ,
           
             There
             shall
             arise
             false
             Christs
             ,
             and
             false
             Prophets
             ,
             and
             shall
             shew
             great
             signs
             and
             wonders
             ;
             insomuch
             that
             if
             it
             were
             possible
             ,
             they
             shall
             deceive
             the
             very
             elect
             ,
          
           Mat.
           24.
           24.
           these
           things
           are
           specially
           spoken
           of
           the
           times
           of
           the
           Kingdome
           of
           Anti-Christ
           ,
           when
           the
           Devil
           by
           the
           permission
           of
           God
           ,
           had
           great
           power
           given
           to
           him
           to
           deceive
           the
           world
           by
           wonders
           and
           signs
           ,
           and
           great
           variety
           of
           Revelations
           .
           From
           hence
           I
           am
           induced
           to
           believe
           ,
           That
           the
           answer
           given
           by
           the
           Crucifix
           at
           Winchester
           was
           reall
           ,
           and
           it
           was
           done
           by
           more
           then
           an
           ordinary
           power
           .
           Let
           us
           consider
           the
           meaning
           of
           that
           place
           in
           the
           Prophecy
           of
           
             Zachary
             :
             Ask
             ye
             of
             the
             Lord
             rain
             in
             the
             time
             of
             the
             latter
             rain
             ;
             so
             the
             Lord
             shall
             make
             bright
             clouds
             ,
             and
             give
             showers
             of
             rain
             ,
             to
             every
             one
             grass
             in
             the
             field
             :
             For
             the
             Idols
             have
             spoken
             vanity
             ,
             and
             the
             Diviners
             have
             seen
             a
             lie
             ,
             and
             have
             told
             false
             dreams
             ,
          
           Chap.
           10.
           ver
           .
           1
           ,
           2.
           
           Here
           I
           demand
           ,
           How
           could
           the
           Idols
           speak
           vanity
           ?
           The
           word
           in
           the
           Original
           is
           Teraphim
           ,
           Idols
           made
           after
           the
           similitude
           of
           a
           Man.
           With
           
           these
           Idolaters
           did
           usually
           consult
           in
           matters
           of
           great
           difficulty
           :
           And
           Mr.
           Pemble
           upon
           the
           place
           ,
           saith
           ,
           
             It
             is
             very
             probable
             ,
             th●…t
             the
             Devil
             used
             the
             like
             feats
             to
             cozen
             the
             Iews
             ,
             as
             he
             did
             to
             the
             Greeks
             and
             other
             simple
             Gentiles
             .
          
           And
           we
           may
           say
           the
           same
           touching
           the
           answer
           of
           the
           Rood
           :
           God
           in
           his
           just
           judgement
           might
           suffer
           apostatizing
           Christians
           to
           be
           deceived
           by
           the
           immediate
           delusions
           of
           Satan
           ,
           because
           they
           did
           not
           receive
           the
           truth
           in
           the
           love
           of
           it
           ,
           that
           they
           might
           be
           saved
           .
           But
           of
           all
           others
           ,
           that
           place
           of
           the
           Apostle
           is
           most
           proper
           to
           the
           purpose
           ,
           
             The
             Spirit
             speaketh
             expresly
             ,
             that
             in
             the
             latter
             times
             some
             shall
             depart
             from
             the
             faith
             ,
             giving
             heed
             to
             seducing
             spirits
             ,
             and
             doctrines
             of
             Devils
             ,
             speaking
             lies
             in
             hypocrisie
             ,
             having
             their
             Consciences
             seared
             with
             a
             hot
             iron
             ;
             forbidding
             to
             marry
             ,
             and
             commanding
             to
             abstain
             from
             meats
             ,
             which
             God
             hath
             created
             to
             be
             received
             with
             thanksgiving
             ,
          
           1
           Tim.
           4.
           1
           ,
           2
           ,
           3.
           
           Seeing
           the
           Apostle
           doth
           here
           so
           plainly
           speak
           of
           the
           Apostacy
           of
           the
           latter
           times
           ,
           and
           of
           the
           Prohibition
           of
           Marriage
           ,
           Meats
           ,
           and
           other
           lawful
           things
           ;
           all
           do
           agree
           in
           it
           ,
           That
           he
           pointeth
           to
           the
           times
           of
           Antichrists
           Kingdome
           .
           Onely
           the
           great
           Question
           lieth
           here
           ,
           Why
           the
           Prohibition
           of
           Marriage
           is
           called
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           
             A
             Doctrine
             of
             Devils
          
           .
           Mr.
           Mede
           in
           his
           learned
           Treatise
           concerning
           the
           Apostacy
           of
           the
           later
           times
           ,
           thinketh
           that
           this
           is
           
             Genitivus
             materiae
          
           ,
           a
           Genitive
           case
           of
           the
           matter
           ;
           because
           Daemons
           and
           the
           Souls
           departed
           ,
           are
           so
           much
           worshipped
           in
           the
           Papal
           Kingdome
           .
           Though
           it
           is
           true
           in
           the
           general
           ,
           That
           Daemon-worship
           (
           as
           he
           saith
           )
           is
           used
           in
           that
           Kingdome
           ;
           yet
           it
           is
           not
           the
           meaning
           of
           this
           Text
           :
           For
           here
           is
           plainly
           
             Genitivus
             efficientis
          
           ,
           a
           Genitive
           case
           of
           the
           efficient
           cause
           ;
           for
           the
           Doctrine
           of
           the
           Prohibition
           of
           Marriage
           is
           ,
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           
             A
             Doctrine
             of
             Devils
          
           ,
           because
           it
           was
           brought
           into
           the
           Church
           by
           the
           suggestions
           of
           those
           impure
           Spirits
           ,
           to
           cast
           miserable
           mortals
           upon
           all
           occasions
           of
           sin
           .
           If
           therefore
           we
           do
           determine
           the
           case
           ,
           that
           the
           Devil
           in
           the
           Rood
           did
           utter
           this
           voice
           touching
           the
           Marriage
           of
           Ministers
           ,
           
             God
             forbid
             it
             should
             be
             so
          
           ;
           it
           doth
           singularly
           agree
           with
           the
           words
           of
           the
           Apostle
           ,
           when
           he
           speaketh
           of
           the
           Prohibition
           of
           Marriage
           in
           Antichristian
           times
           ,
           that
           it
           is
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ▪
           
             A
             Doctrine
             of
             Devils
          
           .
           
           For
           to
           say
           truly
           ,
           The
           Prohibition
           of
           Marriage
           ,
           as
           it
           did
           continue
           for
           many
           hundred
           years
           together
           ,
           so
           it
           had
           its
           immediate
           original
           from
           the
           delusion
           of
           Satan
           .
           Now
           for
           the
           fall
           of
           the
           house
           at
           Cleve
           or
           Calne
           ,
           we
           may
           probably
           believe
           ▪
           That
           God
           might
           suffer
           the
           Devil
           to
           do
           great
           wonders
           (
           for
           so
           Spondanus
           calls
           it
           ,
           mirandum
           )
           to
           deceive
           the
           world
           :
           What
           else
           should
           be
           the
           meaning
           of
           that
           place
           ,
           Rev.
           20
           ?
           
             He
             layed
             hold
             on
             the
             Dragon
             that
             old
             Serpent
             ,
             which
             is
             the
             Devil
             and
             Satan
             ,
             and
             bound
             him
             a
             thousand
             years
             ,
             and
             cast
             him
             into
             the
             Bottomless
             Pit
             ,
             and
             shut
             him
             up
             ,
             and
             set
             a
             seal
             upon
             him
             ,
             that
             he
             should
             deceive
             the
             Nations
             no
             more
             ,
          
           ver
           .
           2
           ,
           3.
           
           By
           this
           he
           doth
           tacitely
           imply
           ,
           That
           the
           whole
           time
           of
           the
           Beasts
           Kingdome
           ,
           was
           a
           time
           of
           the
           loosing
           of
           Satan
           ,
           in
           which
           God
           was
           preased
           to
           give
           him
           leave
           to
           do
           great
           wonders
           to
           deceive
           the
           world
           ;
           and
           therefore
           in
           the
           two
           last
           Verses
           of
           the
           former
           Chapter
           ,
           these
           words
           are
           expressed
           :
           
             And
             the
             Beast
             was
             taken
             ,
             and
             with
             him
             the
             false
             Prophet
             ,
             that
             wrought
             Miracles
             before
             him
             ,
             with
             which
             he
             deceived
             them
             who
             had
             received
             the
             Mark
             of
             the
             Beast
             ,
             and
             them
             that
             worshipped
             his
             Image
             :
             These
             both
             were
             cast
             alive
             into
             a
             Lake
             of
             fire
             burning
             with
             brimstone
             ,
          
           ver
           .
           20.
           
           When
           this
           was
           done
           ,
           an
           Angel
           came
           down
           from
           Heaven
           with
           a
           great
           Chain
           in
           his
           hand
           ,
           and
           bound
           the
           Dragon
           ,
           the
           old
           Serpent
           ,
           that
           he
           should
           deceive
           the
           Nations
           no
           more
           .
           All
           this
           plainly
           declareth
           ,
           That
           in
           Antichristian
           times
           ,
           the
           Devil
           had
           freedome
           to
           do
           great
           wonders
           to
           deceive
           the
           Nations
           .
           If
           therefore
           at
           the
           fall
           of
           the
           house
           ,
           they
           who
           stood
           against
           the
           Marriage
           of
           Ministers
           were
           marvellously
           delivered
           ,
           and
           those
           that
           stood
           for
           it
           were
           slain
           out-right
           ,
           or
           sorely
           bruised
           ,
           we
           must
           not
           wonder
           at
           these
           things
           :
           The
           Devil
           can
           do
           great
           things
           to
           deceive
           them
           who
           forsake
           the
           Scriptures
           ,
           and
           the
           known
           Will
           of
           God
           ,
           to
           hang
           upon
           Visions
           ,
           Dreams
           and
           Revelations
           .
           There
           was
           a
           time
           when
           the
           Devil
           could
           not
           touch
           a
           hair
           of
           Iobs
           head
           :
           
             Thou
             hast
             made
             an
             hedge
             about
             him
             ,
             and
             his
             substance
             is
             increased
             in
             the
             Land
             :
          
           yet
           we
           see
           when
           God
           did
           give
           leave
           ,
           the
           Devil
           could
           cause
           fire
           to
           come
           down
           from
           heaven
           to
           devour
           his
           sheep
           ;
           he
           could
           blow
           down
           the
           house
           upon
           his
           Children
           by
           a
           violent
           wind
           ;
           he
           could
           do
           any
           thing
           when
           he
           was
           let
           loose
           
           And
           so
           truly
           the
           times
           of
           Antichrist
           were
           the
           times
           of
           the
           loosing
           of
           Satan
           :
           God
           did
           permit
           him
           to
           do
           great
           things
           to
           deceive
           that
           kinde
           of
           people
           ,
           who
           had
           forsaken
           the
           plain
           way
           to
           Salvation
           written
           in
           the
           Word
           ,
           to
           look
           after
           dispensations
           of
           a
           higher
           light
           ,
           by
           Visions
           ,
           Dreams
           and
           Revelations
           .
        
         
           Now
           then
           ,
           to
           make
           Application
           of
           all
           these
           things
           to
           our
           times
           ;
           my
           speech
           and
           exhortation
           is
           to
           them
           who
           amongst
           us
           have
           departed
           from
           Ordinances
           ,
           and
           from
           Scriptures
           ,
           and
           are
           now
           for
           extraordinary
           Revelations
           :
           my
           earnest
           desire
           is
           to
           them
           ,
           That
           they
           would
           lay
           these
           things
           to
           heart
           .
           If
           they
           go
           on
           ,
           if
           they
           build
           upon
           such
           uncertain
           grounds
           ,
           let
           them
           seriously
           consider
           ,
           whether
           they
           may
           not
           be
           deluded
           by
           the
           power
           of
           Satan
           ;
           and
           whether
           God
           in
           his
           just
           Judgment
           may
           not
           deliver
           them
           over
           to
           believe
           lies
           .
           I
           will
           not
           make
           mention
           of
           that
           Sect
           which
           goeth
           under
           the
           Name
           of
           the
           Quakers
           ;
           what
           they
           are
           ,
           and
           who
           they
           are
           ,
           God
           knows
           :
           I
           do
           desire
           to
           contain
           my self
           in
           such
           things
           as
           I
           have
           some
           experience
           of
           .
           There
           have
           been
           some
           friends
           of
           my
           familiarity
           heretofore
           ,
           whom
           I
           did
           conceive
           to
           be
           people
           of
           good
           hope
           ;
           these
           ,
           as
           I
           have
           observed
           ,
           have
           departed
           first
           from
           the
           Ministery
           ,
           and
           then
           have
           come
           to
           slight
           the
           Written
           Word
           ;
           and
           then
           last
           of
           all
           ,
           to
           hang
           upon
           Revelations
           ,
           and
           extraordinary
           Enthusiasms
           of
           the
           Spirit
           .
           I
           have
           seen
           a
           Book
           scattered
           abroad
           by
           these
           men
           ,
           it
           beareth
           the
           Title
           of
           
             Gerard
             Winstanley
             his
             new
             Law
             of
             Righteousness
             .
          
           The
           argument
           of
           the
           Treatise
           ,
           is
           ,
           That
           the
           Propriety
           of
           Goods
           is
           the
           Curse
           laid
           upon
           the
           Creature
           ;
           That
           all
           things
           should
           lie
           in
           common
           ;
           and
           that
           the
           whole
           earth
           should
           be
           brought
           to
           a
           Publick
           Treasury
           .
           For
           probation
           of
           this
           ,
           as
           he
           doth
           make
           some
           mention
           of
           the
           practise
           of
           the
           Apostles
           in
           the
           Primitive
           times
           ,
           and
           that
           which
           shall
           be
           in
           the
           future
           glorious
           estate
           of
           the
           Church
           :
           so
           for
           the
           more
           special
           confirmation
           of
           this
           ,
           he
           doth
           depend
           upon
           an
           extraordinary
           Revelation
           ,
           as
           it
           is
           expressed
           ,
           pag.
           57.
           
           In
           the
           beginning
           of
           the
           Treatise
           ,
           he
           doth
           distinguish
           three
           Ministrations
           ;
           the
           Ministration
           of
           Moses
           ,
           of
           Christ
           ,
           and
           of
           the
           
             Spirit
             :
             And
          
           ,
           saith
           he
           ,
           
             as
             the
             worshippers
             in
          
           Moses
           
             Ministration
             envied
          
           
           
             those
             that
             worshipped
             the
             Son
             of
             Man
             :
             So
             those
             who
             now
             worship
             Christ
             at
             a
             distance
             in
             their
             several
             Congregations
             and
             Forms
             ,
             and
             are
             most
             zealous
             ,
             these
             are
             the
             bitterest
             enemies
             to
             the
             Ministration
             of
             Christ
             in
             the
             Spirit
             ,
          
           pag.
           14.
           
           But
           further
           ,
           when
           he
           comes
           to
           expound
           himself
           concerning
           the
           Ministration
           of
           the
           Spirit
           ,
           he
           slights
           all
           outward
           Forms
           ,
           and
           doth
           look
           onely
           to
           inward
           Teachings
           .
           Now
           I
           will
           speak
           a
           word
           or
           two
           to
           the
           followers
           of
           this
           way
           :
           I
           will
           not
           say
           in
           positive
           terms
           ,
           that
           they
           are
           led
           by
           the
           delusions
           of
           Satan
           ;
           neither
           will
           I
           judge
           of
           their
           final
           estate
           ;
           they
           stand
           or
           fall
           to
           their
           own
           Master
           :
           yet
           nevertheless
           ,
           I
           may
           be
           so
           bold
           (
           seeing
           they
           have
           so
           often
           in
           their
           mouths
           the
           
             Whore
             of
             Babylon
          
           ,
           and
           ,
           
             Come
             out
             of
             Babylon
             my
             people
          
           ;
           and
           that
           every
           thing
           is
           Antichristian
           ,
           not
           onely
           in
           M●…nistery
           ,
           Magistracy
           ,
           but
           also
           in
           the
           propriety
           of
           goods
           )
           to
           desire
           them
           to
           look
           home
           to
           their
           own
           hearts
           ,
           whether
           they
           are
           not
           most
           Antichristian
           themselves
           ,
           or
           whether
           that
           Spirit
           which
           did
           so
           strongly
           deceive
           the
           Antichristian
           world
           ,
           doth
           not
           deceive
           them
           also
           ,
           when
           they
           do
           believe
           and
           profess
           such
           things
           as
           are
           directly
           and
           diametrally
           contrary
           to
           Scripture
           .
           For
           these
           men
           ,
           though
           I
           do
           desire
           to
           speak
           moderately
           of
           them
           ;
           yet
           in
           some
           particulars
           they
           are
           delivered
           over
           to
           deep
           delusions
           ,
           when
           they
           go
           so
           palpably
           against
           the
           written
           Word
           ,
           and
           pretend
           extraordinary
           Revelation
           .
           It
           were
           good
           in
           this
           case
           ,
           that
           they
           would
           judge
           themselves
           ,
           that
           they
           do
           not
           prove
           in
           the
           event
           the
           greatest
           promoters
           of
           the
           Kingdome
           of
           the
           Beast
           .
           I
           am
           perswaded
           ,
           that
           
             Gregory
             the
             Great
          
           was
           in
           the
           main
           a
           godly
           and
           zealous
           man
           ;
           yet
           it
           appeareth
           by
           his
           Dialogues
           ,
           that
           he
           did
           run
           into
           foul
           errors
           ,
           into
           Idolatry
           ,
           into
           wil-worship
           ,
           and
           the
           like
           ,
           when
           he
           left
           the
           Scriptures
           to
           follow
           Revelations
           .
           This
           is
           the
           only
           word
           which
           I
           do
           desire
           to
           speak
           to
           them
           .
        
         
           Secondly
           ,
           here
           is
           also
           a
           word
           of
           Admonition
           ,
           for
           all
           those
           who
           endevour
           in
           these
           times
           to
           extinguish
           Book-learning
           .
           For
           though
           it
           is
           a
           most
           certain
           truth
           ,
           and
           much
           to
           be
           lamented
           ,
           that
           men
           have
           looked
           too
           much
           to
           Scholarship
           ,
           and
           have
           made
           an
           Idol
           of
           it
           ;
           for
           they
           have
           not
           regarded
           the
           inward
           teachings
           of
           the
           Spirit
           in
           the
           heart
           ,
           nor
           the
           Spiritual
           understanding
           of
           the
           Mystery
           of
           Salvation
           ,
           which
           are
           the
           principal
           
           qualifications
           to
           prepare
           and
           fit
           men
           for
           the
           Ministery
           .
           These
           things
           ,
           I
           confess
           ,
           have
           been
           too
           much
           slighted
           ,
           and
           the
           slighting
           and
           neglect
           of
           them
           hath
           been
           a
           great
           cause
           of
           hurt
           to
           the
           Church
           of
           God
           ,
           and
           damage
           to
           the
           Souls
           of
           men
           .
           This
           shall
           never
           be
           denied
           by
           me
           .
           For
           how
           may
           we
           probably
           conceive
           ,
           that
           a
           Minister
           will
           come
           home
           with
           the
           Demonstration
           and
           Evidence
           of
           the
           Spirit
           (
           so
           powerfully
           at
           least
           )
           to
           the
           Conscience
           of
           the
           Hearer
           ,
           when
           he
           himself
           is
           altogether
           a
           stranger
           to
           these
           inward
           workings
           ?
           How
           can
           he
           so
           effectually
           bring
           home
           the
           lost
           Sons
           of
           men
           to
           Christ
           ,
           when
           he
           himself
           never
           had
           a
           true
           feeling
           of
           his
           lost
           condition
           ?
           They
           must
           needs
           then
           run
           into
           a
           great
           extream
           ,
           who
           dote
           so
           much
           upon
           Secular
           Learning
           ,
           and
           do
           neglect
           the
           chiefest
           thing
           .
           But
           yet
           on
           the
           other
           side
           ,
           they
           go
           as
           far
           out
           of
           the
           way
           ,
           who
           would
           have
           this
           kinde
           of
           learning
           to
           be
           extinguished
           in
           the
           Church
           of
           God.
           This
           I
           much
           fear
           may
           be
           one
           mean
           to
           throw
           the
           world
           back
           again
           upon
           Visions
           ,
           Dreams
           ,
           and
           Revelations
           ,
           to
           set
           up
           the
           Kingdome
           of
           Antichrist
           once
           more
           .
           Now
           whereas
           it
           is
           alledged
           ,
           That
           there
           were
           excellent
           Preachers
           in
           the
           Apostles
           times
           ,
           when
           there
           were
           no
           Universities
           ,
           nor
           was
           there
           any
           Humane
           Learning
           acquired
           by
           study
           .
           Though
           this
           should
           be
           granted
           ,
           those
           extraordinary
           Revelations
           are
           now
           ceased
           .
           Therefore
           we
           must
           be
           contented
           ,
           to
           go
           in
           the
           ordinary
           way
           ,
           and
           not
           to
           look
           for
           those
           extraordinary
           distributions
           ,
           which
           were
           in
           the
           first
           times
           .
           They
           who
           are
           for
           the
           dissolving
           of
           Universities
           ,
           and
           for
           the
           total
           cashiering
           of
           Humane
           Learning
           ,
           let
           them
           stay
           untill
           there
           be
           a
           renovation
           and
           a
           return
           of
           these
           extraordinary
           gifts
           unto
           the
           Churches
           .
           Some
           are
           of
           opinion
           ,
           that
           such
           times
           shall
           come
           :
           if
           that
           be
           true
           ,
           let
           them
           be
           patient
           till
           they
           do
           come
           .
           However
           ,
           as
           the
           case
           doth
           stand
           for
           the
           present
           ,
           I
           believe
           they
           who
           take
           away
           Humane
           Learning
           ,
           do
           what
           in
           them
           lies
           to
           reduce
           the
           Antichristian
           times
           .
           All
           do
           agree
           ,
           that
           in
           these
           times
           the
           Church
           was
           in
           an
           eclipse
           or
           great
           darkness
           .
           Now
           let
           us
           inquire
           after
           the
           time
           of
           the
           emersion
           ,
           how
           the
           Church
           came
           out
           ;
           and
           the
           time
           of
           the
           immersion
           ,
           how
           she
           was
           brought
           into
           this
           darkness
           ?
           For
           the
           time
           of
           the
           emersion
           ,
           most
           do
           pitch
           upon
           it
           ,
           that
           she
           
           waded
           out
           of
           obscurity
           at
           the
           time
           of
           Luther
           ,
           when
           the
           eternal
           Gospel
           began
           to
           be
           preached
           to
           every
           Kindred
           ,
           Tongue
           ,
           and
           Nation
           .
           Yet
           if
           we
           seriously
           consider
           the
           times
           ,
           we
           shall
           finde
           ,
           That
           the
           light
           began
           to
           break
           out
           ,
           and
           the
           day
           began
           to
           dawn
           ,
           at
           the
           taking
           of
           Constantinople
           ,
           in
           the
           year
           1453.
           
           For
           the
           Greek
           Empire
           being
           destroyed
           ,
           and
           that
           Eye
           of
           the
           Christian
           world
           being
           put
           out
           ,
           it
           pleased
           the
           Lord
           by
           this
           means
           to
           cast
           many
           learned
           Grecians
           into
           this
           Western
           World.
           This
           gave
           occasion
           to
           the
           reviving
           of
           the
           Languages
           ;
           and
           the
           reviving
           of
           the
           Languages
           brought
           in
           the
           study
           of
           the
           Scriptures
           ,
           and
           other
           ancient
           Authors
           ;
           and
           things
           began
           to
           be
           cast
           into
           another
           mould
           .
           By
           this
           means
           the
           more
           learned
           sort
           were
           brought
           off
           from
           the
           Doctrine
           of
           the
           School-men
           ,
           and
           the
           more
           zealous
           ones
           from
           Visions
           ,
           Dreams
           ,
           and
           Revelations
           ;
           and
           so
           the
           world
           was
           prepared
           to
           receive
           another
           kinde
           of
           light
           .
           Not
           to
           mention
           the
           troubles
           which
           
             Reuchlin
             ,
             Pagnin
          
           ,
           and
           
             Arias
             Montanus
          
           did
           meet
           withall
           ,
           it
           is
           manifest
           by
           the
           Epistles
           of
           Erasmus
           ,
           how
           much
           the
           Monks
           and
           Friars
           were
           inraged
           at
           him
           :
           He
           tells
           us
           how
           in
           
             England
             ,
             France
             ,
             Spain
             ,
             Italy
             ,
          
           and
           every-where
           in
           a
           manner
           ,
           they
           did
           both
           publickly
           and
           privately
           inveigh
           against
           him
           .
           And
           it
           went
           for
           a
           received
           Maxime
           among
           many
           ,
           That
           Erasmus
           did
           more
           hurt
           then
           Luther
           .
           How
           could
           that
           be
           ?
           He
           revived
           the
           Tongues
           ,
           he
           was
           an
           instrument
           to
           bring
           men
           to
           the
           study
           of
           the
           Scriptures
           ,
           and
           ancient
           Authors
           :
           and
           by
           those
           
             amoeniores
             literae
          
           (
           which
           he
           so
           often
           speaks
           of
           )
           he
           did
           bring
           the
           world
           from
           Monkish
           darkness
           ,
           and
           foolish
           Revelations
           .
           Campanella
           therefore
           calls
           the
           War
           betwixt
           the
           Protestants
           and
           the
           Papists
           ,
           
             Grammaticale
             Bellum
          
           ,
           a
           Grammarian
           War
           ;
           because
           by
           the
           study
           of
           the
           Languages
           ,
           by
           the
           Greek
           and
           the
           Hebrew
           Tongues
           ,
           the
           Reformation
           of
           the
           Church
           was
           introduced
           .
           And
           it
           is
           the
           sentence
           of
           
             Melancthon
             ,
             Non
             aliam
             ad
             veterem
             barbariem
             reducendam
             magis
             compendiariam
             esse
             viam
             ,
             quam
             si
             studia
             linguarum
             interirent
             .
             There
             is
             no
             more
             compendious
             way
             to
             reduce
             the
             ancient
             barbarism
             ,
             then
             if
             the
             studies
             of
             Languages
             should
             peresh
             ,
          
           Orat.
           tom
           .
           4.
           pag.
           465.
           
           As
           light
           then
           as
           men
           make
           of
           Humane
           Learning
           in
           these
           times
           ,
           it
           was
           one
           chief
           mean
           ,
           under
           God
           ,
           
           to
           bring
           the
           world
           out
           of
           Antichristian
           darkness
           .
           And
           it
           is
           the
           judgement
           of
           so
           id
           men
           ,
           that
           if
           it
           should
           be
           totally
           abolished
           ,
           it
           would
           occasion
           the
           return
           of
           that
           darkness
           once
           again
           .
        
         
           Now
           let
           us
           come
           to
           consider
           the
           Stories
           and
           the
           time
           of
           the
           immersion
           ,
           how
           the
           Church
           came
           first
           under
           this
           darkness
           .
           It
           is
           clear
           from
           the
           process
           of
           the
           aforementioned
           Discourse
           ,
           that
           about
           the
           time
           of
           the
           Emperor
           Phocas
           ,
           the
           Universal
           Headship
           of
           the
           Bishop
           of
           Rome
           was
           publickly
           proclaimed
           ,
           the
           Scriptures
           began
           to
           be
           slighted
           ;
           and
           the
           Traditions
           of
           the
           Church
           immoderately
           extol'd
           .
           Now
           here
           is
           a
           great
           demand
           ,
           How
           is
           it
           possible
           that
           the
           Church
           could
           apostatize
           and
           degenerate
           so
           far
           in
           one
           or
           two
           Centuries
           ,
           seeing
           in
           the
           age
           of
           the
           Christian
           Caesars
           ,
           when
           
             Chrysostome
             ,
             Hierom
             ,
             Augustine
          
           ,
           and
           others
           lived
           ,
           there
           was
           so
           much
           light
           ?
           The
           answer
           is
           clear
           ,
           The
           
             Goths
             ,
             Hunnes
          
           and
           Vandals
           ,
           and
           other
           barbarous
           Nations
           ,
           came
           out
           of
           the
           North
           ,
           overturned
           Churches
           ,
           burned
           Libraries
           ,
           overthrew
           Schools
           of
           Learning
           ;
           and
           by
           this
           means
           the
           world
           was
           organized
           and
           fashioned
           to
           receive
           the
           Kingdome
           of
           Antichrist
           ,
           and
           all
           that
           whole
           body
           of
           false
           Doctrine
           ,
           that
           should
           be
           set
           up
           in
           the
           Consciences
           of
           ignorant
           people
           ,
           by
           Visions
           ,
           Dreams
           and
           Revelations
           .
           From
           all
           which
           I
           do
           conclude
           ,
           If
           there
           should
           be
           a
           total
           abrogation
           of
           Book-learning
           ,
           it
           would
           be
           a
           compendious
           way
           &
           means
           to
           bring
           the
           Church
           into
           its
           former
           darkness
           :
           For
           as
           experience
           sheweth
           ,
           That
           the
           taking
           away
           of
           that
           Learning
           ,
           was
           one
           chief
           me●…n
           to
           introduce
           Antichristian
           darkness
           :
           So
           the
           restoring
           and
           renewing
           of
           it
           again
           ,
           was
           one
           principal
           mean
           of
           the
           recovery
           of
           the
           former
           light
           .
        
         
           Thirdly
           ,
           they
           do
           symbolize
           and
           come
           in
           the
           nearest
           similitude
           to
           the
           true
           formality
           of
           Antichristianism
           ,
           
             who
             do
             build
             their
             Corsciences
             upon
             men
             ,
             and
             do
             make
             men
             the
             Lords
             of
             their
             Faith.
          
           In
           this
           sense
           we
           are
           to
           take
           the
           words
           of
           our
           Saviour
           ,
           when
           he
           saith
           ,
           Mat.
           23.
           9.
           
           
             Call
             no
             man
             your
             Father
             upon
             the
             earth
             ;
             for
             one
             is
             your
             Father
             ,
             which
             is
             in
             heaven
             :
             Neither
             be
             ye
             called
             Masters
             ;
             for
             one
             is
             your
             Master
             ,
             even
             Christ.
          
           Some
           are
           so
           void
           of
           understanding
           ,
           as
           to
           take
           these
           words
           according
           
           to
           the
           letter
           ;
           as
           though
           the
           practise
           of
           Christianity
           should
           extinguish
           civil
           relations
           and
           distinctions
           betwixt
           man
           and
           man.
           But
           these
           are
           idle
           conceits
           ,
           we
           are
           to
           look
           to
           the
           scope
           of
           our
           Saviours
           meaning
           :
           The
           Jews
           in
           his
           time
           were
           divided
           into
           divers
           Factions
           ,
           into
           the
           Sects
           of
           the
           
             Pharisees
             ,
             Sadduces
             ,
             Herodians
             ,
             Gaulonites
             ,
          
           and
           the
           like
           .
           Now
           it
           was
           the
           ambition
           of
           those
           times
           ,
           for
           every
           man
           to
           have
           his
           Rabbi
           ,
           and
           each
           Rabbi
           to
           have
           his
           Scholars
           depend
           upon
           him
           ,
           as
           the
           Lord
           of
           their
           Faith.
           In
           this
           sense
           our
           Saviour
           speaks
           ,
           that
           they
           should
           call
           no
           man
           
             Rabbi
             ,
             Rabbi
          
           ;
           and
           gives
           this
           reason
           ,
           
             One
             is
             your
             Master
             ,
             even
             Christ
             ,
             and
             all
             ye
             are
             Brethren
             .
          
           In
           these
           words
           he
           doth
           especially
           point
           at
           the
           formality
           of
           Antichristianism
           ,
           that
           should
           be
           in
           the
           Popes
           Kingdome
           .
           For
           though
           there
           is
           much
           ado
           made
           betwixt
           the
           Criticks
           in
           the
           
             Greek
             ,
             Hebrew
          
           ,
           and
           Syriack
           Tongues
           ,
           about
           the
           true
           Origination
           of
           the
           word
           Papa
           ;
           yet
           I
           finde
           ,
           That
           all
           do
           agree
           in
           the
           signification
           ,
           that
           it
           is
           as
           much
           in
           sense
           as
           
             Spiritual
             Father
          
           .
           Now
           then
           ,
           if
           we
           look
           to
           the
           practise
           of
           the
           Romish
           Church
           ,
           we
           shall
           finde
           it
           apparent
           ,
           That
           the
           Body
           of
           the
           People
           do
           depend
           upon
           their
           Teachers
           ,
           as
           their
           Spiritual
           Fathers
           ;
           and
           all
           the
           Spiritual
           Fathers
           of
           the
           lower
           degree
           ,
           do
           depend
           upon
           the
           Bishop
           of
           Rome
           as
           the
           Father
           of
           all
           .
           And
           herein
           that
           Hierarchy
           doth
           directly
           oppose
           the
           true
           Church
           of
           Christ
           ,
           as
           it
           is
           described
           ,
           Eph.
           4.
           ver
           .
           4.
           5
           ,
           6.
           
           
             There
             is
             one
             Body
             ,
             and
             one
             Spirit
             ,
             even
             as
             you
             are
             called
             into
             one
             hope
             of
             your
             calling
             :
             one
             Lord
             ,
             one
             Faith
             ,
             one
             Baptism
             ,
             one
             God
             and
             Father
             of
             all
             .
          
           The
           Apostle
           further
           speaketh
           ,
           how
           the
           Mystery
           of
           Iniquity
           did
           begin
           to
           work
           in
           the
           Church
           of
           
             Corinth
             :
             Every
             one
             of
             you
             saith
             ,
             I
             am
             of
             Paul
             ,
             and
             I
             of
             Apollo
             ,
             and
             I
             of
             Cephas
             ,
             and
             I
             of
             Christ
             :
             Is
             Christ
             divided
             ?
             was
             Paul
             crucified
             for
             you
             ?
             or
             were
             ye
             baptized
             in
             the
             Name
             of
             Paul
             ?
          
           1
           Cor.
           1.
           12
           ,
           13.
           
           It
           appears
           by
           this
           ,
           That
           the
           Unity
           of
           that
           Church
           was
           broken
           by
           many
           divisions
           ;
           several
           Believers
           had
           their
           several
           Rabbies
           ,
           on
           whom
           they
           did
           depend
           :
           and
           though
           Paul
           and
           Cephas
           would
           not
           take
           so
           much
           upon
           them
           ,
           to
           be
           the
           Lords
           of
           peoples
           Faith
           ,
           and
           the
           Heads
           of
           Parties
           ;
           yet
           the
           false
           Apostles
           did
           wonderfully
           affect
           such
           a
           kinde
           of
           Title
           ,
           and
           too
           many
           carnal
           Christians
           
           in
           those
           days
           were
           too
           forward
           to
           pin
           their
           Faith
           upon
           other
           mens
           sleeves
           ,
           and
           to
           come
           in
           the
           nearest
           formasity
           to
           the
           Antichristian
           practise
           in
           these
           last
           times
           .
           The
           world
           is
           too
           apt
           to
           fall
           into
           Divisions
           ,
           and
           to
           say
           ,
           
             I
             am
             of
             Paul
             ,
             I
             am
             of
             Apollo
             ,
             and
             I
             am
             of
             Cephas
             .
          
           And
           in
           this
           ,
           men
           must
           needs
           symbolize
           with
           them
           ,
           who
           make
           the
           Bishop
           of
           Rome
           the
           Lord
           of
           their
           Faith
           ,
           and
           do
           profess
           themselves
           to
           be
           Members
           of
           his
           Church
           .
           The
           building
           upon
           men
           then
           ,
           is
           that
           which
           doth
           bring
           any
           people
           in
           the
           nearest
           resemblance
           to
           Antichristianisme
           ;
           and
           the
           more
           they
           do
           this
           ,
           the
           more
           or
           less
           are
           they
           Antichristian
           .
           And
           this
           I
           conceive
           to
           be
           one
           chief
           reason
           in
           Scripture
           ,
           why
           the
           falls
           of
           the
           most
           eminent
           Saints
           are
           left
           upon
           record
           ,
           Because
           others
           should
           not
           dote
           too
           much
           upon
           them
           .
           Moses
           did
           anger
           the
           Lord
           at
           the
           Waters
           of
           Meribah
           and
           Massah
           ;
           he
           died
           before
           he
           entred
           into
           the
           Land
           of
           Canaan
           ,
           and
           the
           Angel
           of
           the
           Lord
           did
           bury
           him
           in
           obscurity
           :
           No
           man
           knew
           of
           his
           Sepulchre
           ,
           because
           the
           Children
           of
           Israel
           should
           not
           go
           a-whoring
           after
           it
           ,
           Deut.
           34.
           6.
           
           And
           in
           the
           New
           Testament
           ,
           among
           all
           the
           Apostles
           ,
           the
           faults
           of
           none
           are
           left
           so
           upon
           publick
           record
           ,
           as
           those
           of
           Peter
           :
           And
           what
           is
           the
           reason
           of
           all
           this
           ?
           Doubtless
           the
           Lord
           did
           foresee
           ,
           what
           Idolatry
           the
           Church
           of
           Rome
           would
           commit
           ,
           in
           owning
           his
           Universal
           Headship
           over
           the
           Church
           ,
           as
           that
           the
           Power
           of
           the
           Keyes
           was
           given
           into
           his
           hand
           alone
           .
           For
           these
           causes
           I
           believe
           the
           great
           falls
           of
           Peter
           are
           left
           upon
           record
           ,
           that
           the
           Papists
           should
           not
           say
           ,
           
             I
             am
             of
             Peter
             ,
             I
             am
             of
             the
             Bishop
             of
          
           Rome
           
             the
             Head
             of
             the
             Church
             ,
             by
             succession
             from
          
           Peter
           .
           Cyprian
           and
           some
           of
           the
           Churches
           of
           Africa
           ,
           fell
           into
           another
           extreme
           :
           They
           thought
           ,
           if
           a
           man
           had
           denied
           the
           truth
           in
           time
           of
           persecution
           ,
           he
           should
           never
           be
           received
           into
           the
           Ministery
           again
           ,
           but
           should
           stand
           in
           the
           Body
           of
           the
           People
           ,
           as
           one
           of
           them
           onely
           .
           I
           cannot
           but
           in
           the
           general
           approve
           the
           strictness
           of
           the
           Discipline
           ,
           especially
           against
           the
           faults
           and
           corruptions
           of
           Ministers
           ,
           who
           should
           be
           Lights
           and
           Examples
           to
           others
           :
           But
           that
           they
           should
           be
           so
           strictly
           dealt
           with
           all
           ,
           never
           to
           be
           received
           ,
           no
           not
           upon
           terms
           of
           the
           greatest
           Repentance
           ,
           Humiliation
           ,
           and
           godly
           Sorrow
           ;
           I
           may
           say
           in
           this
           
           case
           ,
           That
           Cyprian
           ,
           and
           the
           rest
           of
           the
           African
           Fathers
           ,
           were
           too
           Canonical
           .
           And
           it
           was
           well
           for
           S.
           Peter
           ,
           that
           he
           was
           no
           Minister
           in
           Africa
           ,
           when
           he
           denied
           his
           Master
           in
           the
           High-Priests
           Hall
           :
           Surely
           ,
           by
           the
           rigour
           of
           such
           Principles
           ,
           they
           would
           never
           have
           received
           him
           into
           Office
           again
           .
           But
           the
           Lord
           Christ
           had
           a
           better
           end
           in
           the
           permission
           of
           his
           fall
           :
           Simon
           (
           saith
           he
           )
           
             Satan
             hath
             desired
             to
             winnow
             thee
             as
             wheat
             :
             but
             I
             have
             prayed
             for
             thee
             ,
             that
             thy
             faith
             should
             not
             fail
             ,
          
           Luke
           22.
           31.
           
           Here
           then
           the
           reason
           is
           clearly
           shewed
           ,
           why
           Satan
           did
           prevail
           so
           against
           Peter
           ,
           why
           he
           was
           upheld
           meerly
           by
           the
           Prayer
           of
           Christ
           ;
           the
           reason
           is
           this
           ,
           
             When
             thou
             art
             converted
             ,
             strengthen
             thy
             Brethren
          
           God
           in
           great
           wisdome
           doth
           suffer
           the
           most
           eminent
           Ministers
           to
           fall
           greatly
           ,
           to
           pluck
           down
           their
           pride
           ,
           that
           they
           may
           be
           more
           humble
           ,
           and
           that
           their
           bowels
           of
           affection
           and
           tenderness
           ,
           may
           be
           greater
           towards
           the
           lost
           Sons
           of
           men
           ;
           and
           that
           they
           should
           preach
           the
           Grace
           of
           God
           more
           tenderly
           and
           more
           feelingly
           ,
           to
           the
           winning
           and
           saving
           of
           miserable
           Souls
           .
           These
           were
           the
           causes
           of
           the
           fall
           of
           Peter
           :
           and
           one
           special
           reason
           is
           also
           here
           to
           be
           remembred
           ,
           God
           did
           permit
           him
           to
           fall
           so
           foully
           ,
           to
           prevent
           that
           sin
           of
           Antichristianity
           (
           as
           I
           may
           so
           speak
           )
           which
           should
           be
           so
           general
           in
           the
           last
           times
           .
           Now
           the
           sin
           of
           Antichristianity
           ,
           is
           to
           make
           men
           the
           Lords
           of
           our
           Faith
           ,
           to
           build
           upon
           Peter
           ,
           or
           the
           Pope
           ,
           the
           pretended
           Successor
           of
           Peter
           ,
           in
           matters
           of
           Faith
           and
           Salvation
           .
        
         
           Fourthly
           ,
           they
           do
           symbolize
           with
           the
           Great
           Antichrist
           ,
           who
           use
           a
           lawful
           Authority
           ,
           Antichrist-like
           ,
           to
           serve
           their
           own
           pride
           ,
           ambition
           ,
           and
           external
           glory
           .
           The
           Apostle
           saith
           ,
           
             I
             would
             have
             written
             unto
             the
             Churches
             ;
             but
             Diotrephes
             ,
             who
             loveth
             to
             have
             the
             pre-eminence
             ,
             suffered
             us
             not
             ,
          
           3
           Joh.
           ver
           .
           9.
           
           Here
           then
           ,
           seeing
           he
           did
           love
           to
           have
           the
           pre-eminence
           ,
           we
           may
           probably
           conceive
           ,
           That
           it
           was
           in
           the
           lawful
           Government
           of
           the
           Church
           ;
           there
           was
           an
           affectation
           of
           precedency
           even
           in
           those
           dayes
           .
           And
           in
           what
           times
           may
           not
           the
           like
           spirit
           of
           pride
           be
           in
           some
           men
           ,
           when
           they
           are
           put
           into
           place
           of
           Rule
           ?
           We
           reade
           also
           in
           the
           Directions
           of
           Paul
           concerning
           the
           choice
           of
           a
           Bishop
           ,
           that
           
             he
             must
             not
             be
             a
             Novice
             ,
             lest
             being
             swollen
             up
             with
             pride
             ,
             he
             fall
             into
             the
             condemnation
             of
             the
             Devil
             ,
          
           1
           Tim.
           3.
           6.
           
           
           It
           is
           clear
           from
           these
           words
           ,
           as
           also
           from
           the
           whole
           Epistle
           ,
           that
           there
           must
           be
           a
           Government
           in
           the
           Church
           of
           God
           :
           and
           whosoever
           S.
           Paul's
           Bishop
           is
           ,
           he
           must
           have
           the
           principal
           stroke
           in
           the
           Government
           .
           For
           these
           words
           are
           immediately
           added
           :
           
             If
             a
             man
             know
             not
             how
             to
             rule
             his
             own
             house
             ,
             how
             shall
             he
             take
             care
             for
             the
             Church
             of
             God
             ?
          
           The
           Church
           of
           God
           is
           Christs
           house
           ;
           and
           the
           Bishops
           ,
           Elders
           ,
           and
           Ministers
           of
           the
           Church
           ,
           have
           their
           Office
           by
           delegation
           from
           him
           ,
           and
           not
           from
           any
           other
           Authority
           .
           Now
           such
           a
           lawful
           power
           as
           this
           is
           ,
           men
           may
           sinfully
           abuse
           and
           pervert
           ,
           to
           the
           setting
           up
           of
           their
           own
           greatness
           ;
           and
           therefore
           the
           Apostle
           doth
           give
           this
           caveat
           ,
           
             Not
             a
             Novice
             ,
             lest
             being
             swollen
             up
             with
             pride
             ,
             he
             fall
             into
             the
             condemnation
             of
             the
             Devil
             .
          
           By
           a
           Novice
           ,
           he
           doth
           not
           intend
           a
           man
           yong
           in
           years
           ,
           for
           Timothy
           himself
           was
           but
           yong
           ;
           but
           he
           meaneth
           a
           beginner
           in
           the
           School
           of
           Christ
           ,
           a
           Novice
           in
           manners
           :
           such
           a
           one
           he
           would
           not
           have
           set
           over
           the
           House
           of
           God
           ,
           lest
           being
           swollen
           up
           with
           pride
           ,
           he
           fall
           into
           the
           same
           sin
           ,
           and
           the
           same
           condemnation
           as
           the
           Devil
           did
           ,
           being
           sometimes
           an
           Angel
           of
           light
           .
           From
           this
           instance
           then
           it
           is
           clear
           ,
           That
           a
           lawful
           Power
           may
           be
           used
           in
           an
           Antichristian
           manner
           .
           Such
           beginnings
           of
           pride
           ,
           the
           Apostle
           probably
           might
           see
           in
           those
           dayes
           :
           and
           these
           might
           occasion
           him
           to
           say
           ,
           
             The
             Mystery
             of
             Iniquity
             doth
             already
             work
             .
          
           Now
           whereas
           some
           do
           impute
           it
           to
           this
           or
           that
           Government
           ,
           that
           it
           would
           be
           as
           Tyrannical
           and
           Antichristian
           ,
           as
           any
           that
           went
           before
           :
           Let
           them
           not
           deceive
           themselves
           :
           The
           Government
           may
           be
           Christs
           ;
           yet
           if
           any
           do
           use
           it
           to
           serve
           their
           own
           Pride
           ,
           Tyranny
           ,
           or
           Lordliness
           ,
           the
           fault
           is
           their
           own
           :
           It
           lies
           in
           the
           corruption
           of
           the
           Person
           ,
           but
           not
           in
           the
           nature
           of
           the
           Office.
           The
           superiority
           of
           Parents
           over
           their
           Children
           ,
           of
           Husbands
           over
           their
           Wives
           ,
           of
           Magistrates
           over
           the
           People
           ,
           are
           all
           by
           Divine
           Institution
           ;
           yet
           the
           persons
           may
           so
           demean
           themselves
           ,
           that
           they
           may
           tyrannize
           ,
           and
           if
           we
           may
           so
           speak
           it
           ,
           may
           Antichristianize
           .
           That
           is
           a
           remarkable
           passage
           which
           the
           Lord
           hath
           ,
           concerning
           Stewards
           in
           a
           lawful
           power
           ;
           
             If
             that
             evil
             servant
             shall
             say
             ,
             My
             Lord
             deferreth
             his
             coming
             ;
             and
             shall
             begin
             to
             smite
             his
             fellow-servants
             ,
             and
             shall
             eat
             and
             drink
          
           
           
             with
             the
             drunken
             :
             the
             Lord
             of
             that
             servant
             will
             come
             in
             a
             day
             when
             he
             looketh
             not
             for
             him
             ,
             and
             will
             cut
             him
             in
             sunder
             ,
             and
             appoint
             him
             his
             portion
             with
             hypocrites
             ,
          
           Mat.
           24.
           48
           ,
           49.
           
           By
           a
           Servant
           or
           Steward
           ,
           we
           may
           understand
           Magistrate
           ,
           Minister
           ,
           or
           any
           other
           whom
           the
           Lord
           hath
           intrusted
           with
           a
           lawful
           Power
           in
           Church
           or
           Common-wealth
           .
           Now
           if
           they
           use
           this
           Power
           illegally
           and
           tyrannically
           ;
           if
           Ministers
           cast
           those
           out
           of
           the
           Church
           ,
           who
           should
           be
           kept
           in
           ;
           if
           they
           keep
           in
           those
           who
           should
           be
           cast
           out
           ;
           if
           they
           abuse
           the
           Power
           of
           the
           Keyes
           which
           Christ
           hath
           committed
           to
           their
           custody
           ;
           if
           they
           use
           the
           Discipline
           of
           the
           Church
           ,
           meerly
           as
           a
           Rod
           to
           smite
           their
           fellow-servants
           :
           In
           such
           a
           case
           as
           this
           is
           ,
           we
           may
           say
           ,
           That
           in
           respect
           of
           their
           persons
           ,
           the
           Elders
           of
           the
           Church
           may
           resemble
           the
           Great
           Antichrist
           ,
           and
           may
           symbolize
           with
           him
           in
           his
           Pride
           and
           Tyranny
           ;
           yet
           for
           all
           this
           ,
           the
           Office
           is
           Christs
           ,
           and
           it
           is
           from
           God
           by
           divine
           Institution
           .
           It
           were
           then
           a
           very
           profitable
           point
           ,
           that
           the
           Friends
           and
           Followers
           of
           the
           Separation
           ,
           who
           to
           justifie
           their
           practise
           ,
           do
           call
           this
           Antichristian
           ,
           and
           that
           Antichristian
           ,
           would
           distinguish
           betwixt
           the
           several
           forms
           and
           kindes
           of
           Antichristianity
           .
           For
           as
           I
           have
           made
           it
           appear
           by
           the
           course
           of
           this
           Chapter
           ,
           some
           things
           are
           directly
           Antichristian
           ,
           and
           other
           things
           are
           onely
           Antichristian
           by
           consequence
           and
           reduction
           :
           So
           also
           some
           things
           are
           Antichristian
           in
           respect
           of
           the
           Office
           it self
           ,
           and
           other
           things
           onely
           have
           the
           form
           of
           Antichristianity
           ,
           meerly
           because
           of
           the
           evil
           carriage
           of
           the
           person
           in
           a
           lawful
           Office.
           These
           things
           are
           specially
           to
           be
           noted
           .
           And
           so
           much
           concerning
           the
           several
           particulars
           which
           are
           truly
           Antichristian
           by
           Analogie
           and
           Reduction
           .
           Let
           us
           now
           go
           to
           the
           third
           point
           ,
        
      
       
         
         
           
             CHAP.
             XIV
          
           .
           What
           those
           things
           are
           which
           are
           〈◊〉
           onely
           by
           the
           position
           of
           some
           Circumstances
           ,
           as
           they
           are
           truly
           Christian
           by
           the
           position
           of
           others
           .
           The
           Conclusion
           of
           the
           whole
           .
        
         
           THere
           be
           two
           things
           especially
           ,
           that
           here
           need
           to
           be
           inquired
           into
           .
           The
           first
           is
           concerning
           the
           Compulsive
           Power
           of
           the
           Supreme
           Magistrate
           in
           matters
           of
           Religion
           ,
           whether
           that
           be
           Antichristian
           yea
           or
           no
           ?
           The
           second
           is
           ,
           Whether
           it
           be
           Antichristian
           ,
           to
           maintain
           the
           future
           glory
           and
           splendor
           of
           the
           Church
           of
           Christ
           upon
           the
           Earth
           ?
           For
           some
           do
           think
           ,
           that
           this
           position
           will
           bring
           us
           back
           again
           to
           the
           Riches
           and
           Magnificence
           of
           the
           Popish
           Church
           .
           In
           these
           two
           cases
           we
           are
           carefully
           to
           distinguish
           :
           for
           such
           may
           be
           the
           Circumstances
           ,
           that
           these
           things
           may
           symbolize
           with
           the
           Antichristian
           Patern
           ;
           and
           such
           they
           may
           be
           ,
           that
           they
           may
           set
           forth
           ,
           decypher
           and
           express
           that
           future
           glory
           of
           the
           Church
           as
           it
           shall
           be
           .
        
         
           First
           ,
           concerning
           the
           Coercive
           power
           of
           the
           Magistrate
           ,
           we
           do
           then
           acknowledge
           his
           Coercion
           to
           be
           Antichristian
           ,
           when
           he
           shall
           constrain
           men
           to
           subject
           their
           Consciences
           to
           those
           things
           which
           are
           directly
           contrary
           to
           the
           Laws
           of
           Christ.
           And
           of
           this
           we
           have
           largely
           spoken
           in
           this
           Treatise
           ,
           when
           we
           had
           occasion
           to
           make
           mention
           of
           the
           two-horned
           Beast
           ,
           and
           of
           his
           compelling
           all
           men
           to
           receive
           a
           Mark
           in
           their
           Forehead
           ,
           and
           in
           their
           Right-hand
           .
           There
           is
           no
           doubt
           to
           be
           made
           ,
           but
           Compulsion
           in
           this
           case
           is
           directly
           Antichristian
           .
           Secondly
           ,
           Rites
           and
           Institutions
           of
           Humane
           Invention
           ,
           though
           perhaps
           they
           may
           seem
           to
           be
           more
           innocent
           ,
           yet
           it
           doth
           coast
           too
           near
           upon
           Antichristian
           Tyranny
           ,
           to
           compel
           the
           Consciences
           of
           men
           to
           these
           things
           .
           For
           the
           Ceremonies
           of
           the
           Church
           of
           England
           ,
           when
           they
           stood
           in
           their
           vigour
           ,
           men
           did
           judge
           
           diversly
           of
           them
           .
           Some
           did
           esteem
           them
           to
           be
           Antichristian
           ;
           others
           did
           beat
           them
           as
           burthens
           ;
           and
           a
           third
           sort
           judged
           them
           harmless
           and
           inoffensive
           .
           But
           yet
           among
           those
           who
           did
           give
           the
           fairest
           Interpretation
           ,
           there
           were
           some
           who
           did
           think
           it
           very
           hard
           ,
           that
           men
           should
           be
           compelled
           ,
           that
           the
           godly
           Ministers
           should
           be
           deprived
           ,
           and
           that
           so
           many
           sincere
           Christians
           should
           be
           subjected
           to
           persecution
           in
           the
           Ecclesiastical
           Courts
           ;
           that
           no
           tears
           or
           prayers
           would
           prevail
           ,
           but
           that
           they
           must
           either
           yield
           ,
           or
           suffer
           the
           greatest
           extremity
           .
           The
           instance
           of
           the
           curious
           Glasses
           of
           Pollio
           the
           famous
           Roman
           ,
           is
           well
           known
           :
           It
           had
           been
           better
           they
           had
           been
           broken
           ,
           then
           that
           the
           Servant
           should
           have
           been
           so
           cruelly
           beaten
           .
           But
           now
           that
           power
           is
           laid
           aside
           .
           Thirdly
           ,
           in
           points
           more
           remote
           from
           the
           foundation
           ,
           where
           the
           Scriptures
           seem
           to
           run
           as
           clear
           for
           one
           opinion
           ,
           as
           for
           the
           other
           ;
           it
           is
           very
           hard
           in
           these
           lesser
           scruples
           ,
           that
           they
           who
           have
           the
           power
           in
           their
           hands
           ,
           should
           hang
           the
           Consciences
           of
           other
           men
           at
           their
           girdles
           .
           Oftentimes
           it
           may
           come
           to
           pass
           ,
           that
           they
           who
           have
           the
           Authority
           ,
           have
           not
           the
           Truth
           on
           their
           side
           ;
           and
           they
           who
           have
           the
           Truth
           in
           the
           main
           ,
           may
           be
           dark
           in
           some
           particulars
           ,
           and
           may
           need
           a
           better
           light
           .
           In
           this
           case
           then
           ,
           must
           they
           who
           dissent
           be
           compelled
           to
           yield
           ,
           or
           be
           censured
           as
           Rebels
           against
           the
           Laws
           of
           the
           State
           ?
           This
           would
           be
           an
           hard
           Censure
           ;
           yet
           I
           will
           not
           call
           it
           directly
           Antichristian
           ,
           though
           the
           practise
           may
           come
           somewhat
           too
           near
           that
           method
           ,
           and
           may
           resemble
           it
           very
           much
           .
        
         
           But
           here
           an
           Objection
           may
           be
           made
           concerning
           the
           present
           Heresies
           which
           are
           now
           in
           the
           Land
           ,
           What
           should
           be
           done
           to
           the
           suppression
           of
           these
           ?
        
         
           I
           will
           not
           enter
           into
           the
           bowels
           of
           this
           Question
           ,
           it
           being
           so
           largely
           and
           learnedly
           handled
           by
           others
           in
           several
           Treatises
           which
           are
           now
           in
           the
           hands
           of
           all
           men
           .
           My
           desire
           is
           ,
           onely
           to
           keep
           close
           to
           the
           point
           of
           Compulsion
           ,
           so
           far
           forth
           onely
           as
           it
           hath
           the
           formality
           of
           Antichristianism
           .
           Therefore
           as
           to
           the
           present
           Sects
           ,
           I
           think
           it
           necessary
           to
           distinguish
           between
           the
           persons
           who
           are
           Leaders
           meerly
           upon
           Principles
           of
           Conscience
           ,
           and
           those
           who
           are
           led
           by
           them
           .
           For
           the
           persons
           
           who
           are
           Leaders
           ,
           it
           is
           expedient
           also
           to
           distinguish
           betwixt
           their
           first
           Principles
           ,
           and
           the
           absurd
           Deductions
           and
           Consequences
           drawn
           from
           those
           Principles
           .
           Now
           for
           those
           persons
           who
           are
           Leaders
           of
           others
           meerly
           upon
           Principles
           of
           Conscience
           ,
           I
           think
           it
           necessary
           ,
           that
           Compulsion
           should
           be
           more
           sparingly
           used
           ,
           and
           greater
           care
           should
           be
           to
           give
           satisfaction
           .
           For
           some
           Doctrines
           I
           believe
           are
           now
           on
           foo●…
           ,
           which
           have
           tolerable
           Principles
           ,
           though
           they
           have
           ill
           Consequences
           .
           I
           will
           give
           one
           instance
           :
           The
           Doctrine
           of
           the
           Millenaries
           for
           many
           hundred
           years
           ,
           from
           the
           times
           of
           Hierom
           and
           Augustine
           ,
           hath
           gone
           for
           an
           error
           in
           the
           Church
           of
           God.
           But
           to
           speak
           truly
           ,
           the
           error
           lies
           in
           the
           Consequences
           ,
           and
           in
           the
           ill
           deductions
           of
           falshoods
           from
           true
           Principles
           :
           For
           in
           it self
           it
           is
           true
           ,
           that
           Christ
           shall
           reign
           upon
           the
           Earth
           a
           thousand
           years
           ,
           and
           this
           reign
           shall
           begin
           at
           the
           dissolution
           of
           the
           Antichristian
           Kingdome
           .
           This
           is
           the
           scope
           of
           Rev.
           20.
           and
           it
           is
           a
           hard
           thing
           to
           compel
           a
           man
           to
           deny
           such
           a
           truth
           ,
           so
           plainly
           delivered
           in
           the
           Scriptures
           .
           Yet
           I
           must
           needs
           confess
           ,
           as
           heretofore
           ,
           so
           now
           ,
           men
           have
           mixed
           this
           truth
           ,
           with
           many
           falsities
           of
           their
           own
           invention
           .
           Yea
           ,
           there
           is
           scarce
           an
           opinion
           which
           conscientious
           men
           do
           follow
           ,
           but
           there
           is
           some
           one
           Principle
           or
           other
           ,
           which
           doth
           chiefly
           incline
           them
           to
           be
           of
           that
           belief
           .
           It
           were
           good
           then
           ,
           that
           the
           conscientious
           at
           all
           seasons
           were
           cited
           to
           make
           Confession
           of
           their
           Faith
           ,
           and
           to
           render
           a
           Reason
           of
           the
           hope
           that
           is
           in
           them
           ;
           and
           that
           there
           should
           be
           a
           more
           moderate
           use
           of
           Compulsion
           .
           But
           this
           Question
           I
           leave
           to
           the
           large
           Disputes
           of
           others
           ,
           who
           have
           copiously
           handled
           the
           subject
           .
           Now
           we
           will
           come
           to
           the
           other
           Point
           ,
           where
           Coercive
           Power
           is
           necessarily
           to
           be
           used
           .
        
         
           Secondly
           ,
           the
           use
           of
           the
           Coercive
           Power
           is
           so
           far
           from
           being
           Tyrannical
           or
           Antichristian
           ,
           that
           it
           is
           most
           necessary
           for
           the
           suppression
           of
           Blasphemies
           and
           Reproaches
           against
           the
           known
           Truth
           of
           God
           :
           For
           some
           fall
           into
           a
           contrary
           extream
           ,
           they
           think
           all
           Compulsion
           to
           be
           illegal
           .
           And
           hereupon
           they
           are
           for
           an
           absolute
           ,
           boundless
           ,
           and
           universal
           Toleration
           of
           all
           Opinions
           ;
           never
           considering
           the
           Circumstances
           ,
           but
           desperately
           
           passing
           from
           one
           extream
           to
           another
           .
           If
           they
           did
           well
           consider
           the
           matter
           ,
           there
           is
           no
           ground
           for
           Toleration
           of
           Blaspemous
           Opinions
           ,
           rightly
           so
           called
           :
           For
           perhaps
           some
           ,
           either
           through
           passion
           ,
           or
           ignorance
           ,
           or
           both
           ,
           may
           bestow
           such
           an
           opprobious
           Title
           upon
           the
           Truth
           .
           We
           have
           a
           clear
           instance
           for
           this
           ,
           in
           the
           glorious
           state
           of
           the
           Church
           mentioned
           by
           
             Zachary
             :
             And
             it
             shall
             come
             to
             pass
             ,
             when
             any
             shall
             yet
             Prophesie
             ,
             then
             his
             father
             and
             his
             mother
             that
             begat
             him
             ,
             shall
             say
             unto
             him
             ,
             Thou
             shalt
             not
             live
             ,
             for
             thou
             speakest
             lyes
             in
             the
             Name
             of
             the
             Lord.
             And
             his
             father
             &
             his
             mother
             that
             begat
             him
             ,
             shall
             thrust
             him
             through
             when
             he
             prophesieth
             ,
          
           Za●…h
           .
           13.
           3.
           
           It
           is
           clear
           ,
           that
           these
           things
           are
           spoken
           concerning
           the
           glorious
           times
           of
           the
           Church
           at
           the
           call
           of
           the
           Jews
           ;
           
             when
             the
             Lord
             shall
             pour
             upon
             that
             Nation
             the
             Spirit
             of
             Grace
             and
             supplication
             ;
             when
             they
             shall
             look
             to
             the
             Messiah
             whom
             they
             have
             crucified
             ;
             when
             there
             shall
             be
             a
             Fountain
             opened
             to
             the
             House
             of
             David
             ,
             and
             to
             the
             Inhabitants
             of
             Ierusalem
             ,
             for
             sin
             and
             for
             uncleanness
             .
          
           Their
           chief
           sin
           ,
           is
           their
           enmity
           against
           the
           Gospel
           ,
           and
           the
           justification
           of
           their
           Ancestors
           for
           the
           Crucifying
           of
           Christ.
           When
           this
           sin
           shall
           be
           mourned
           over
           and
           pardoned
           ,
           then
           the
           Lord
           doth
           promise
           ,
           That
           all
           Idols
           shall
           be
           taken
           out
           of
           the
           land
           ,
           and
           such
           zeal
           shall
           be
           to
           the
           Truth
           ,
           that
           the
           Parents
           themselves
           ,
           rather
           then
           fail
           ,
           should
           concur
           to
           the
           coercion
           of
           such
           a
           Son
           ,
           who
           should
           prophesie
           lyes
           in
           the
           Name
           of
           the
           Lord.
           But
           there
           is
           a
           great
           question
           touching
           this
           expression
           ,
           
             His
             father
             and
             mother
             that
             begat
             him
             ,
             shall
             thrust
             him
             through
             .
          
           This
           cannot
           be
           taken
           according
           to
           the
           letter
           ,
           for
           it
           belongs
           only
           to
           the
           Magistrate
           to
           have
           the
           power
           of
           life
           and
           death
           .
           We
           are
           to
           expound
           this
           phrase
           ,
           according
           to
           the
           analogie
           of
           the
           Old
           Testament
           ,
           where
           the
           Parents
           were
           to
           bring
           their
           Son
           to
           the
           Elders
           of
           the
           Gate
           .
           And
           so
           proportionably
           in
           the
           times
           of
           the
           New
           Testament
           ,
           when
           all
           other
           means
           should
           be
           tryed
           in
           vain
           ,
           the
           Parents
           themselves
           shall
           bring
           their
           Son
           to
           the
           Civil
           Magistrate
           ,
           to
           suffer
           ,
           rather
           then
           the
           truth
           it self
           should
           suffer
           .
           Many
           have
           endeavored
           to
           avoid
           the
           force
           of
           this
           Scripture
           ,
           and
           to
           illude
           it
           by
           distinctions
           ;
           but
           for
           my
           part
           ,
           I
           cannot
           see
           but
           it
           is
           of
           great
           force
           against
           fundamental
           errors
           ,
           rightly
           and
           truly
           so
           
           called
           ,
           which
           tend
           to
           the
           apparent
           and
           manifest
           ruine
           of
           the
           Doctrine
           of
           Salvation
           ,
           and
           to
           the
           great
           hurt
           of
           the
           Souls
           of
           men
           .
           Though
           the
           affections
           of
           Parents
           are
           tender
           towards
           their
           Children
           ,
           yet
           in
           those
           wonderful
           times
           ,
           the
           Prophet
           doth
           insinuate
           ,
           that
           they
           shall
           be
           more
           tender
           to
           the
           truth
           ,
           and
           to
           the
           welfare
           of
           the
           Church
           of
           God.
           In
           a
           comparative
           sense
           then
           ,
           it
           is
           said
           ,
           That
           
             his
             father
             and
             mother
             that
             begat
             him
             ,
             shall
             thrust
             him
             through
             .
          
           Further
           ,
           though
           a
           Toleration
           may
           be
           granted
           to
           tender
           Consciences
           ,
           yet
           the
           profane
           ,
           the
           careless
           ,
           and
           those
           that
           never
           minde
           the
           Salvation
           of
           their
           Souls
           ,
           ought
           not
           to
           be
           left
           to
           their
           free
           indifferency
           ;
           the
           Magistrate
           should
           use
           Com●…ulsion
           to
           them
           ,
           to
           bring
           them
           to
           the
           Publick
           Worship
           .
           For
           if
           we
           travel
           through
           the
           Land
           in
           the
           length
           and
           breadth
           thereof
           ,
           we
           cannot
           probably
           presume
           any
           other
           ,
           but
           that
           the
           greater
           part
           would
           desire
           rather
           to
           live
           like
           Heathens
           ,
           without
           God
           ,
           and
           without
           Christ
           in
           the
           world
           .
           If
           that
           be
           true
           which
           is
           spoken
           of
           some
           places
           ,
           it
           is
           much
           to
           be
           lamented
           ,
           That
           the
           people
           are
           left
           destitute
           of
           the
           means
           of
           their
           Salvation
           .
           Let
           the
           richer
           sort
           pay
           no
           Tythes
           ,
           or
           ,
           that
           which
           is
           equivalent
           ,
           have
           them
           at
           an
           easie
           rate
           :
           Let
           the
           Youth
           have
           their
           pleasures
           and
           pastimes
           upon
           the
           Lords-day
           ;
           I
           believe
           it
           matters
           not
           much
           with
           these
           ,
           whether
           there
           be
           any
           publick
           Worship
           or
           no.
           If
           it
           be
           wholly
           at
           their
           choyce
           ,
           the
           Church
           ,
           or
           the
           Publick-place
           of
           Meeting
           ,
           may
           well
           be
           left
           for
           Jack-Daws
           ,
           or
           such
           like
           Birds
           ,
           to
           build
           in
           :
           So
           little
           do
           they
           minde
           the
           means
           of
           their
           Salvation
           .
           In
           such
           a
           case
           ,
           I
           conceive
           ,
           the
           Supreme
           Magistrate
           ,
           the
           Keeper
           of
           both
           the
           Tables
           ,
           the
           Vicegerent
           of
           Christ
           upon
           the
           Earth
           ,
           is
           to
           compel
           men
           to
           come
           to
           the
           Publick-places
           of
           Worship
           .
           So
           did
           the
           godly
           Kings
           of
           Iudah
           ;
           and
           so
           have
           the
           Christian
           States
           and
           Governments
           ever
           done
           ;
           they
           have
           demolished
           the
           Monuments
           of
           Idolatry
           ,
           established
           the
           Publick
           Ordinances
           ,
           and
           have
           compelled
           the
           more
           ignorant
           and
           rude
           sort
           to
           wait
           upon
           the
           means
           of
           their
           Salvation
           .
           And
           this
           I
           take
           to
           be
           the
           meaning
           of
           the
           Parable
           ,
           
             When
             the
             Lord
             sent
             forth
             his
             servants
             to
             invite
             guests
             to
             the
             Wedding
             ;
             go
             out
             into
             the
             high-ways
             and
             hedges
             ,
             and
             compel
             them
             to
             come
             in
             ,
             that
             my
             house
             may
             be
             filled
             ,
          
           Luke
           14.
           ver
           .
           23.
           
           
           Here
           two
           Questions
           are
           to
           be
           demanded
           :
           The
           first
           is
           ,
           What
           is
           meant
           by
           the
           guests
           that
           did
           lie
           in
           the
           high-ways
           and
           the
           hedges
           ?
           Secondly
           ,
           Why
           should
           compulsion
           be
           used
           rather
           toward
           them
           ,
           then
           to
           the
           two
           former
           kindes
           ?
           For
           the
           guests
           that
           did
           lie
           in
           the
           hedges
           ,
           we
           must
           necessarily
           understand
           the
           ruder
           and
           more
           ignorant
           sort
           of
           people
           ,
           as
           the
           wanderers
           and
           beggars
           from
           door
           to
           door
           .
           Of
           these
           we
           cannot
           give
           a
           reason
           ,
           what
           rule
           of
           Marriage
           they
           do
           observe
           ,
           what
           difference
           there
           is
           betwixt
           father
           and
           childe
           :
           we
           may
           probably
           presume
           ,
           that
           the
           greater
           part
           of
           them
           live
           without
           God
           ,
           and
           without
           Christ
           ,
           without
           the
           consideration
           of
           Heaven
           or
           Hell
           ,
           or
           the
           future
           state
           of
           the
           Soul
           hereafter
           .
           These
           are
           the
           guests
           that
           lie
           in
           the
           high-ways
           and
           in
           the
           hedges
           .
           Now
           why
           is
           it
           that
           Compulsion
           should
           be
           used
           towards
           these
           ,
           rather
           then
           the
           other
           two
           kinde
           of
           guests
           ?
           The
           reason
           I
           take
           it
           is
           this
           ,
           That
           they
           have
           not
           a
           tolerable
           discretion
           to
           judge
           of
           that
           which
           is
           good
           for
           their
           Salvation
           ;
           and
           therefore
           compulsion
           should
           be
           used
           towards
           such
           brutish
           kinde
           of
           men
           .
           And
           though
           they
           would
           lose
           their
           own
           Souls
           by
           what
           lies
           in
           them
           ,
           yet
           the
           Magistrate
           or
           the
           Minister
           should
           not
           lose
           them
           .
           For
           the
           two
           former
           kinde
           of
           guests
           ,
           the
           one
           was
           of
           a
           more
           civil
           education
           :
           for
           being
           invited
           to
           the
           Marriage
           ,
           they
           did
           all
           plead
           their
           necessary
           imployments
           ;
           one
           had
           married
           a
           wife
           ,
           another
           had
           bought
           five
           yoke
           of
           Oxen
           ,
           and
           a
           third
           had
           bought
           a
           parcel
           of
           Land.
           The
           inordinate
           affection
           to
           some
           one
           worldly
           thing
           or
           other
           ,
           is
           the
           true
           cause
           why
           men
           do
           not
           come
           to
           Christ
           ,
           to
           take
           him
           as
           their
           Lord
           and
           Husband
           .
           Though
           they
           have
           a
           minde
           to
           come
           ,
           yet
           they
           are
           loth
           to
           deny
           such
           a
           particular
           profit
           or
           pleasure
           that
           is
           dear
           to
           them
           .
           Now
           concerning
           these
           ,
           we
           reade
           ,
           That
           the
           servant
           was
           not
           to
           compel
           them
           to
           come
           to
           the
           Wedding
           ;
           only
           the
           Lord
           said
           ,
           
             None
             of
             these
             shall
             taste
             of
             my
             Supper
             .
          
           They
           who
           refuse
           the
           offer
           of
           Christ
           ,
           for
           the
           injoyment
           of
           any
           worldly
           thing
           ,
           it
           is
           just
           with
           Christ
           to
           refuse
           them
           .
           The
           second
           kinde
           of
           guests
           were
           the
           blinde
           ,
           the
           lame
           ,
           the
           poor
           ,
           the
           maimed
           ,
           who
           did
           lie
           in
           the
           streets
           and
           lanes
           of
           the
           City
           :
           These
           ,
           out
           of
           the
           sense
           of
           their
           own
           misery
           ,
           did
           come
           to
           the
           feast
           ,
           and
           there
           needed
           no
           
           compulsion
           .
           So
           then
           ,
           the
           force
           of
           the
           whole
           Parable
           is
           this
           ,
           That
           the
           ruder
           sort
           of
           people
           ,
           which
           are
           under
           the
           care
           and
           custody
           of
           the
           Magistrate
           ,
           are
           in
           a
           special
           manner
           to
           be
           compelsed
           to
           Worship
           God
           ,
           and
           to
           wait
           upon
           the
           means
           of
           their
           Salvation
           .
           But
           lest
           any
           should
           think
           that
           this
           Parabolical
           Divinity
           is
           not
           of
           such
           force
           ,
           as
           to
           conclude
           the
           Point
           ,
           we
           have
           many
           other
           places
           to
           prove
           ,
           That
           those
           that
           are
           in
           Authority
           have
           a
           power
           to
           compel
           those
           that
           are
           under
           them
           to
           worship
           God
           ,
           and
           to
           call
           upon
           the
           Name
           of
           the
           Lord.
           What
           else
           should
           be
           the
           meaning
           of
           those
           words
           in
           the
           fourth
           Commandment
           ,
           
             In
             it
             thou
             shalt
             not
             do
             any
             work
             ,
             thou
             ,
             nor
             thy
             son
             ,
             nor
             thy
             daughter
             ;
             thy
             man
             servant
             ,
             nor
             thy
             maid
             servant
             ,
             thy
             cattel
             ,
             nor
             thy
             stranger
             which
             is
             within
             thy
             gates
             ?
          
           Exod.
           20.
           10.
           
           Here
           we
           may
           demand
           the
           reason
           ,
           why
           these
           words
           are
           extended
           to
           Children
           and
           Servants
           ?
           What
           have
           Parents
           and
           Masters
           to
           do
           with
           their
           sanctifying
           of
           the
           Sabbath
           ?
           All
           Expositors
           upon
           the
           place
           do
           give
           this
           reason
           ,
           That
           the
           Parent
           or
           the
           Master
           do
           not
           rightly
           worship
           God
           themselves
           ,
           unless
           they
           take
           care
           that
           they
           also
           do
           worship
           him
           ,
           who
           are
           under
           their
           Authority
           and
           Jurisdiction
           .
           The
           command
           that
           concerns
           the
           duty
           of
           Servants
           ,
           is
           given
           to
           Masters
           .
           That
           is
           therefore
           a
           most
           excellent
           speech
           of
           
             Augustine
             ,
             Tom.
          
           2.
           
           Ep.
           50.
           where
           speaking
           of
           the
           duty
           of
           Kings
           ,
           out
           of
           the
           second
           Psalm
           ,
           he
           hath
           these
           words
           :
           Therefore
           (
           saith
           he
           )
           
             how
             do
             Kings
             serve
             the
             Lord
             in
             fear
             and
             trembling
             ?
             No
             other
             way
             ,
             but
             by
             prohibiting
             and
             punishing
             those
             things
             which
             are
             done
             against
             the
             commands
             of
             God.
             He
             doth
             serve
             God
             after
             one
             manner
             as
             he
             is
             a
             man
             ,
             and
             after
             another
             manner
             as
             he
             is
             a
             King.
             As
             he
             is
             a
             man
             ,
             he
             serveth
             him
             by
             living
             religiously
             ;
             as
             he
             is
             a
             King
             ,
             he
             serveth
             him
             by
             establ●…shing
             such
             kinde
             of
             Laws
             with
             convenient
             rigour
             ,
             as
             do
             command
             things
             that
             are
             just
             ,
             and
             forbid
             things
             unjust
             .
             Even
             as
          
           Hezekias
           
             served
             the
             Lord
             ,
             by
             destroying
             the
             Groves
             ,
             and
             the
             Temples
             of
             Idols
             ,
             and
             the
             High-places
             ,
             which
             were
             built
             against
             the
             Commandments
             of
             God
             :
             As
          
           Josiah
           
             served
             the
             Lord
             ,
             by
             doing
             the
             same
             things
             which
          
           Hezekiah
           
             did
             :
             As
             the
             King
             of
             the
          
           Ninevites
           
             served
             the
             Lord
             ,
             by
             compelling
             the
             whole
             City
             to
             humble
             themselves
             ,
             and
             intreat
             the
             face
             of
             God.
          
           And
           going
           on
           in
           passages
           of
           the
           
           like
           nature
           ,
           he
           concludes
           with
           this
           
             Epiphonema
             ,
             In
             hoc
             ergo
             serviunt
             domino
             Reges
             in
             quantum
             sunt
             reges
             ,
             cum
             ea
             faciunt
             ad
             serviendum
             illi
             quae
             non
             possunt
             facere
             nisi
             Reges
             .
             In
             this
             therefore
             Kings
             do
             serve
             the
             Lord
             ,
             so
             far
             forth
             as
             they
             are
             Kings
             ,
             when
             they
             do
             those
             things
             for
             his
             service
             ,
             which
             otherwise
             they
             cannot
             do
             but
             in
             relation
             as
             they
             are
             Kings
             .
          
           This
           passage
           ,
           worthy
           to
           be
           written
           in
           letters
           of
           Gold
           ,
           is
           cited
           by
           Zanchy
           in
           his
           Work
           concerning
           the
           Attributes
           of
           God
           ,
           in
           the
           Preface
           to
           Casimire
           ,
           Palatine
           of
           the
           Rhyne
           .
           There
           he
           sheweth
           ,
           That
           it
           is
           the
           duty
           of
           a
           Christian
           Prince
           ,
           principally
           to
           take
           care
           in
           his
           Dominion
           ,
           that
           Religion
           be
           taught
           out
           of
           the
           pure
           Word
           of
           God
           ,
           according
           to
           the
           first
           Principles
           of
           the
           Faith
           ,
           which
           others
           call
           ,
           The
           Analogie
           of
           Faith.
           And
           the
           pure
           Word
           of
           God
           being
           established
           ,
           he
           saith
           also
           ,
           
             That
             it
             concerneth
             the
             Prince
             or
             the
             Ruler
             ,
             to
             take
             care
             that
             the
             people
             wait
             upon
             the
             means
             of
             their
             Salvation
             .
          
           And
           this
           is
           that
           which
           we
           have
           so
           largely
           stood
           upon
           ,
           when
           we
           have
           spoken
           of
           the
           Reign
           of
           Christ
           upon
           the
           Earth
           ,
           in
           sundry
           parts
           of
           this
           Treatise
           ;
           we
           have
           not
           followed
           the
           Conceit
           of
           them
           who
           are
           for
           a
           personal
           Reign
           .
           This
           noteth
           onely
           the
           coming
           in
           of
           the
           States
           ,
           Governments
           ,
           and
           Dominions
           of
           the
           Earth
           to
           own
           the
           Gospel
           ,
           and
           to
           set
           it
           up
           as
           a
           Regent-Law
           .
           To
           my
           understanding
           then
           ,
           this
           matter
           is
           plainly
           expressed
           ,
           Ier.
           3.
           17.
           
           
             At
             that
             time
             shall
             they
             call
             Ierusalem
             the
             Throne
             of
             the
             Lord
             ;
             and
             all
             the
             Nations
             shall
             be
             gathered
             unto
             it
             to
             the
             Name
             of
             the
             Lord
             to
             Ierusalem
             :
             Neither
             shall
             they
             walk
             any
             more
             after
             the
             imagination
             of
             their
             evil
             heart
             .
          
           In
           these
           words
           he
           doth
           speak
           of
           the
           glorious
           state
           of
           the
           Church
           in
           the
           latter
           times
           :
           It
           cannot
           be
           meant
           of
           the
           Jewish
           Church
           ,
           before
           the
           coming
           of
           Christ
           ;
           nor
           of
           that
           literal
           kinde
           of
           worship
           ,
           as
           it
           appeareth
           ver
           .
           16.
           
           
             They
             shall
             say
             no
             more
             ,
             The
             Ark
             of
             the
             Covenant
             of
             the
             Lord
             ;
             neither
             shall
             it
             come
             to
             minde
             ,
             neither
             shall
             they
             remember
             it
             ,
             neither
             shall
             they
             visit
             it
             ,
             neither
             shall
             that
             be
             done
             any
             more
             .
          
           It
           is
           manifest
           then
           ,
           that
           these
           things
           are
           spoken
           concerning
           the
           happy
           estate
           of
           the
           Church
           in
           the
           times
           of
           the
           New
           Testament
           .
           But
           in
           what
           part
           of
           the
           times
           of
           the
           New
           Testament
           ,
           must
           these
           things
           be
           fulfilled
           ?
           It
           is
           clear
           from
           the
           Context
           ,
           That
           he
           speaketh
           
           of
           the
           call
           of
           the
           Jews
           :
           
             In
             those
             days
             the
             house
             of
             Iudah
             shall
             walk
             with
             the
             house
             of
             Israel
             ,
          
           ver
           .
           18.
           
           This
           is
           meant
           of
           the
           glory
           of
           the
           Church
           in
           the
           latter
           days
           .
           But
           what
           are
           the
           means
           that
           the
           Lord
           hath
           sanctified
           ,
           to
           the
           introducing
           of
           this
           glory
           ?
           They
           are
           expressed
           in
           these
           words
           ,
           
             I
             will
             give
             them
             Pastors
             after
             mine
             own
             heart
             .
          
           He
           doth
           speak
           of
           the
           Civil
           Pastor
           in
           the
           Common-wealth
           ,
           as
           well
           as
           the
           Spiritual
           Pastor
           in
           the
           Church
           .
           David
           was
           a
           Pastor
           after
           the
           heart
           of
           Christ
           himself
           ,
           when
           he
           chose
           him
           to
           feed
           and
           govern
           the
           People
           of
           Israel
           .
           Such
           Pastors
           there
           shall
           be
           in
           the
           latter
           times
           ;
           and
           by
           such
           the
           Lord
           will
           bring
           in
           the
           glory
           of
           the
           Church
           .
           The
           like
           passage
           is
           in
           the
           Prophecy
           of
           Isaiah
           ,
           when
           he
           speaketh
           of
           the
           Churches
           glory
           that
           shall
           be
           :
           
             I
             will
             make
             all
             thy
             officers
             peace
             ,
             and
             thy
             exactors
             righteousness
             ,
          
           Isa.
           60.
           17.
           
           The
           word
           in
           the
           Original
           is
           ,
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           all
           thy
           visitation
           peace
           :
           It
           noteth
           the
           visitation
           of
           the
           Prince
           ,
           as
           a
           Nursing
           Father
           ,
           that
           hath
           care
           of
           the
           Church
           .
           And
           further
           it
           is
           added
           ,
           
             Thine
             exactors
             righteousness
          
           ;
           the
           word
           in
           the
           Original
           is
           ,
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           a
           Taskmaster
           ,
           one
           that
           driveth
           on
           the
           work
           ;
           which
           implieth
           ,
           as
           there
           shall
           be
           Magistrates
           ,
           so
           there
           shall
           be
           use
           of
           a
           Coercive
           Power
           in
           those
           glorious
           times
           .
           And
           therefore
           this
           passage
           is
           immediately
           added
           ,
           
             Violence
             shall
             be
             no
             more
             heard
             in
             thee
             :
          
           The
           Magistrates
           shall
           themselves
           be
           so
           holy
           and
           righteous
           ,
           that
           they
           shall
           not
           oppress
           ,
           and
           tyrannize
           ;
           and
           they
           shall
           also
           be
           so
           impartial
           and
           sincere
           ,
           in
           the
           use
           of
           the
           Sword
           ,
           that
           they
           shall
           keep
           down
           and
           suppress
           all
           exorbitant
           and
           lawless
           courses
           .
           I
           have
           the
           more
           carefully
           noted
           this
           Point
           ,
           because
           many
           in
           the
           times
           that
           we
           now
           live
           ,
           are
           of
           opinion
           ,
           That
           all
           Coercion
           and
           Compulsion
           in
           matters
           of
           Religion
           ,
           is
           absolutely
           to
           be
           laid
           aside
           .
           And
           because
           they
           reade
           ,
           when
           the
           Beast
           did
           bear
           rule
           ,
           that
           he
           did
           compel
           all
           the
           world
           to
           receive
           a
           Mark
           ;
           and
           that
           none
           might
           buy
           nor
           sell
           ,
           but
           they
           that
           had
           the
           Mark
           in
           their
           Forehead
           ,
           and
           in
           their
           Right-hand
           :
           thereupon
           they
           gather
           ,
           That
           all
           Coercion
           in
           matters
           of
           Religion
           ,
           is
           after
           the
           Antichristian
           form
           .
           And
           because
           they
           would
           stand
           far
           enough
           from
           that
           Patern
           ,
           they
           think
           it
           best
           ,
           and
           most
           comporting
           with
           the
           future
           glory
           of
           the
           Church
           ,
           to
           leave
           all
           to
           a
           boundless
           Toleration
           ,
           Nay
           ,
           some
           learned
           men
           of
           good
           note
           have
           gone
           
           so
           far
           ,
           that
           they
           look
           upon
           the
           Edicts
           of
           Constantine
           ,
           and
           the
           succeeding
           Princes
           ,
           as
           upon
           the
           Bottom-stones
           of
           the
           Tower
           of
           Babel
           .
           And
           their
           ground
           is
           this
           ,
           Because
           the
           Laws
           which
           the
           aforementioned
           Princes
           did
           make
           ,
           for
           the
           suppressing
           of
           Blasphemies
           and
           Idolatries
           ,
           were
           afterward
           perverted
           ,
           and
           turned
           against
           the
           true
           Members
           of
           Christ
           ,
           in
           all
           Antichristian
           times
           .
           We
           willingly
           yield
           ,
           That
           great
           care
           is
           to
           be
           used
           in
           this
           matter
           ;
           yet
           withall
           we
           are
           to
           consider
           ,
           That
           the
           use
           of
           the
           Coercive
           Power
           ,
           as
           it
           is
           truly
           Christian
           by
           the
           Position
           of
           some
           Circumstances
           ,
           may
           be
           Antichristian
           by
           the
           Position
           of
           others
           :
           the
           Circumstances
           do
           vary
           the
           case
           .
           The
           Papists
           are
           not
           Antichristian
           in
           this
           ,
           as
           they
           compel
           men
           to
           come
           to
           the
           Publick
           Worship
           of
           God
           ;
           for
           some
           godless
           and
           wretched
           men
           would
           never
           worship
           God
           ,
           nor
           call
           upon
           his
           Name
           :
           but
           their
           Antichristianity
           lieth
           in
           this
           ,
           as
           they
           compel
           men
           to
           an
           Idolatrous
           Will-worship
           of
           their
           own
           devising
           .
           They
           are
           not
           Antichristian
           in
           that
           ,
           as
           they
           hold
           the
           Government
           of
           the
           Church
           to
           be
           Monarchical
           ,
           or
           that
           there
           is
           one
           Oecumenical
           Bishop
           of
           all
           :
           so
           Christ
           is
           the
           true
           Head
           of
           the
           Church
           ,
           and
           the
           great
           Bishop
           of
           our
           Souls
           ,
           1
           Pet.
           2.
           25.
           and
           Chap.
           5.
           v.
           3.
           
           But
           their
           Antichristianism
           lieth
           in
           this
           ,
           as
           they
           make
           the
           Bishop
           of
           Rome
           Universal
           Bishop
           ,
           and
           do
           compel
           all
           men
           to
           be
           subject
           to
           his
           Laws
           ,
           as
           to
           the
           Laws
           of
           Christ.
           We
           must
           distinguish
           the
           Coercive
           Power
           ;
           for
           it
           may
           be
           either
           Christian
           or
           Antichristian
           ,
           as
           the
           Circumstances
           do
           stand
           .
           Nebuchadnezzar
           did
           set
           up
           an
           Image
           ,
           and
           commanded
           all
           the
           States
           of
           his
           Empire
           ,
           under
           pair
           of
           death
           ,
           to
           fall
           down
           and
           worship
           it
           .
           In
           this
           act
           of
           Compulsion
           ,
           he
           did
           come
           in
           the
           nearest
           resemblance
           to
           the
           Beast
           in
           the
           Revelation
           ,
           and
           was
           no
           doubt
           a
           Type
           and
           Figure
           of
           the
           Antichrist
           that
           was
           to
           come
           .
           But
           this
           doth
           not
           hold
           in
           every
           kinde
           ;
           for
           afterward
           we
           reade
           ,
           that
           the
           same
           Nebuchadnezzar
           did
           make
           a
           Decree
           ,
           
             That
             every
             Nation
             and
             Language
             that
             should
             speak
             any
             thing
             against
             the
             God
             of
             Shadrach
             ,
             Meshach
             ,
             and
             Abednego
             ,
             should
             be
             cut
             in
             pieces
             .
          
           In
           this
           case
           we
           cannot
           say
           ,
           That
           the
           exercise
           of
           the
           Compulsory
           Power
           is
           Antichristian
           ;
           unless
           we
           will
           make
           it
           Antichristianism
           ,
           to
           restrain
           Idolaters
           ,
           that
           they
           should
           not
           blaspheme
           the
           Name
           of
           the
           
           true
           God.
           I
           might
           here
           take
           occasion
           to
           make
           mention
           of
           the
           Law
           made
           by
           the
           King
           of
           Nineveh
           ,
           and
           his
           Nobles
           ,
           That
           all
           under
           that
           Government
           should
           fast
           ,
           and
           pray
           ;
           and
           that
           they
           should
           turn
           every
           one
           from
           the
           evil
           of
           his
           ways
           .
           Though
           here
           was
           the
           use
           of
           the
           Compulsory
           Power
           ,
           yet
           none
           can
           say
           ,
           that
           they
           did
           symbolize
           with
           Antichrist
           ,
           in
           his
           Tyranny
           over
           the
           Consciences
           of
           men
           .
           The
           Lord
           did
           turn
           from
           the
           greatness
           of
           his
           wrath
           ;
           and
           the
           commendation
           of
           their
           Repentance
           is
           upon
           record
           ,
           in
           the
           story
           of
           the
           Gospel
           .
           From
           all
           that
           hath
           been
           said
           ,
           we
           may
           conclude
           ,
           As
           the
           exercise
           of
           the
           Coercive
           Power
           about
           matters
           of
           Religion
           ,
           may
           in
           some
           cases
           be
           Tyrannical
           and
           Antichristian
           ;
           so
           the
           practise
           of
           it
           in
           others
           ,
           may
           be
           holy
           ,
           and
           truly
           Christian
           :
           and
           men
           do
           unadvisedly
           jumble
           and
           confound
           those
           things
           together
           ,
           which
           should
           be
           distinctly
           laid
           down
           .
        
         
           Secondly
           ,
           many
           in
           these
           times
           ,
           think
           the
           Doctrine
           of
           the
           Reign
           of
           Christ
           for
           1000
           years
           ,
           and
           the
           glory
           of
           the
           Church
           ,
           too
           nearly
           to
           resemble
           the
           Antichristian
           Pomp
           and
           Magnificence
           .
           Now
           ,
           say
           they
           ,
           these
           things
           cannot
           be
           applied
           to
           the
           Christian
           Church
           ;
           for
           as
           long
           as
           she
           is
           in
           this
           vale
           of
           tears
           ,
           she
           is
           liable
           to
           continual
           sufferings
           .
           And
           indeed
           ,
           the
           practise
           of
           men
           hath
           been
           some
           way
           sutable
           to
           this
           opinion
           :
           for
           seeing
           the
           great
           riches
           ,
           splendor
           ,
           magnificence
           ,
           and
           state
           of
           the
           Church
           of
           Rome
           ;
           that
           her
           Merchants
           are
           the
           great
           men
           of
           the
           earth
           :
           they
           have
           set
           upon
           such
           a
           way
           of
           Reformation
           ,
           in
           casting
           out
           Romish
           Idolatries
           and
           Superstitions
           ,
           that
           they
           have
           left
           the
           true
           Church
           of
           Christ
           poor
           enough
           .
           In
           many
           places
           the
           Maintenance
           is
           so
           bare
           ,
           that
           the
           Ministers
           have
           scarcely
           wherewithall
           to
           keep
           them
           upon
           the
           work
           .
           In
           their
           Conscience
           ,
           the
           glory
           of
           the
           Gospel-Church
           must
           stand
           in
           penury
           and
           want
           of
           outward
           things
           ,
           because
           the
           Romish
           Antichristian
           Church
           hath
           enjoyed
           these
           things
           in
           so
           great
           plenty
           .
           But
           in
           this
           point
           ,
           to
           my
           understanding
           ,
           they
           are
           greatly
           deceived
           :
           for
           the
           Prophets
           ,
           and
           Iohn
           in
           the
           Revelation
           ,
           do
           everywhere
           speak
           of
           the
           glory
           of
           the
           Church
           that
           shall
           be
           ;
           that
           the
           Kings
           shall
           come
           to
           the
           beauty
           of
           her
           rising
           ;
           that
           they
           shall
           be
           Nursing-Fathers
           ;
           that
           they
           shall
           bring
           their
           glory
           to
           her
           .
           Mr.
           Burroughs
           
           in
           his
           Lectures
           upon
           Hosea
           ,
           is
           very
           solid
           and
           copious
           upon
           the
           point
           .
           And
           if
           these
           things
           be
           truly
           explained
           ,
           we
           may
           finde
           great
           comfort
           in
           the
           predictions
           of
           the
           Prophets
           .
           But
           let
           us
           come
           to
           the
           Book
           of
           the
           Revelation
           ,
           and
           we
           shall
           there
           see
           things
           more
           clearly
           made
           cut
           .
           It
           was
           the
           speech
           of
           the
           Saints
           at
           the
           destruction
           of
           the
           Whore
           of
           
             Babylon
             ,
             Let
             us
             be
             glad
             and
             rejoyce
             ,
             and
             give
             honour
             to
             him
             :
             for
             the
             Marriage
             of
             the
             Lamb
             is
             come
             ,
             and
             his
             Wife
             hath
             made
             her self
             ready
             ,
          
           Rev.
           19.
           7.
           
           Now
           in
           the
           next
           Chapter
           it
           is
           explained
           ,
           what
           is
           meant
           by
           the
           Lambs
           Wife
           :
           These
           are
           the
           words
           of
           the
           Angel
           to
           Iohn
           ,
           v.
           9.
           
           
             Come
             hither
             ,
             and
             I
             will
             shew
             thee
             the
             Bride
             ,
             the
             Lambs
             Wife
             .
             And
             he
             carried
             me
             away
             in
             the
             Spirit
             to
             a
             great
             high
             Mountain
             ,
             and
             shewed
             me
             that
             great
             City
             ,
             the
             Holy
             Ierusalem
             ,
             descending
             out
             of
             Heaven
             from
             God.
          
           Here
           then
           it
           is
           clear
           ,
           that
           the
           
             New
             Ierusalem
          
           ,
           or
           the
           Gospel-Church
           ,
           in
           relation
           to
           her
           felicity
           in
           the
           latter
           days
           ,
           is
           termed
           ,
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           that
           Great
           City
           ,
           in
           opposition
           to
           the
           greatness
           and
           magnificence
           of
           the
           Church
           of
           Rome
           ,
           or
           the
           Whore
           of
           Babylon
           ,
           which
           hath
           everywhere
           in
           the
           Prophecy
           such
           a
           transcendent
           Title
           ascribed
           to
           her
           .
           The
           scope
           of
           the
           Text
           doth
           plainly
           shew
           ,
           that
           the
           Church
           upon
           the
           Earth
           shall
           injoy
           times
           of
           great
           glory
           .
        
         
           But
           the
           great
           Question
           is
           ,
           concerning
           the
           
             New
             Ierusalem
          
           ,
           Whether
           this
           be
           meant
           of
           the
           state
           of
           the
           Church
           upon
           the
           Earth
           .
           To
           the
           clearing
           of
           this
           ,
           let
           us
           look
           to
           the
           scope
           of
           the
           whole
           Prophecy
           .
           In
           the
           Twelfth
           Chapter
           of
           the
           Revelation
           ,
           we
           reade
           ,
           and
           the
           first
           Verse
           ,
           That
           
             a
             Woman
             was
             clothed
             with
             the
             Sun
             ,
             and
             the
             Moon
             was
             under
             her
             feet
             ,
             and
             upon
             her
             head
             a
             Crown
             of
             twelve
             stars
             :
             And
             she
             being
             with
             childe
             ,
             cried
             ,
             travelling
             in
             birth
             ,
             and
             pained
             to
             be
             delivered
             .
          
           By
           the
           woman
           ,
           is
           meant
           the
           Primitive
           Church
           ,
           as
           she
           was
           in
           travel
           with
           all
           Nations
           ,
           to
           bring
           forth
           her
           Christ-like
           issue
           ;
           and
           by
           
             the
             Dragon
             with
             seven
             Heads
             and
             ten
             Horns
             ,
          
           we
           must
           necessarily
           understand
           the
           great
           persecuting
           Empire
           of
           the
           Romans
           ,
           which
           for
           300
           years
           did
           endeavor
           to
           devour
           her
           Childe
           .
           When
           she
           was
           delivered
           ,
           the
           next
           attempt
           was
           ,
           to
           drown
           her
           with
           a
           stood
           of
           Barbarous
           Nations
           that
           came
           out
           of
           the
           North.
           After
           this
           ,
           she
           fled
           into
           the
           Wilderness
           ,
           and
           was
           there
           fed
           1260
           
           days
           :
           So
           many
           years
           the
           Church
           was
           under
           Antichristian
           persecution
           .
           When
           these
           times
           were
           ended
           ,
           and
           the
           Whore
           of
           Babylon
           burned
           ,
           then
           began
           the
           marriage
           of
           the
           Lamb
           ,
           and
           the
           
             New
             Ierusalem
          
           came
           from
           God
           out
           of
           Heaven
           ,
           as
           a
           Bride
           adorned
           for
           her
           Husband
           .
           All
           these
           are
           but
           Emblems
           and
           Figures
           of
           so
           many
           several
           changes
           and
           varieties
           ,
           that
           the
           outward
           Visible
           Church
           should
           meet
           withall
           upon
           the
           earth
           .
           She
           doth
           very
           much
           resemble
           the
           Moon
           ,
           in
           her
           several
           forms
           and
           appearances
           .
           The
           outward
           Visible
           Church
           is
           one
           and
           the
           same
           in
           substance
           ,
           but
           she
           is
           distinguished
           according
           to
           different
           relations
           ,
           in
           sundry
           changes
           of
           time
           .
           These
           things
           are
           so
           clearly
           delivered
           in
           the
           whole
           body
           of
           the
           Prophecy
           ,
           that
           no
           further
           question
           may
           be
           made
           .
           But
           to
           the
           Point
           in
           hand
           ,
           concerning
           the
           future
           glory
           that
           the
           Church
           shall
           injoy
           in
           the
           later
           days
           ,
           let
           us
           compare
           it
           with
           a
           passage
           in
           the
           Prophecy
           of
           Zachary
           .
           The
           Prophet
           in
           the
           Vision
           looked
           ,
           
             and
             beheld
             a
             man
             with
             a
             measuring
             line
             in
             his
             hand
             ,
          
           Chap.
           2.
           ver
           .
           1.
           
           Men
           go
           to
           measure
           when
           they
           build
           Cities
           and
           Towns
           :
           and
           this
           is
           spoken
           in
           relation
           to
           the
           waste
           of
           Ierusalem
           ,
           mentioned
           in
           the
           former
           Chapter
           ,
           ver
           .
           12.
           
           
             How
             long
             wilt
             thou
             not
             have
             mercy
             on
             Ierusalem
             ,
             and
             the
             Cities
             of
             Iudah
             ,
             against
             which
             thou
             hast
             indignation
             this
             three
             score
             and
             ten
             years
             ?
          
           In
           opposition
           to
           this
           waste
           of
           the
           Church
           in
           all
           the
           times
           of
           the
           Babylonian
           captivity
           ,
           the
           Prophet
           in
           the
           Vision
           did
           see
           a
           man
           with
           a
           measuring
           line
           in
           his
           hand
           ,
           to
           measure
           Ierusalem
           ,
           to
           see
           what
           is
           the
           breadth
           thereof
           ,
           and
           what
           is
           the
           length
           thereof
           .
           The
           same
           things
           are
           spoken
           in
           effect
           ,
           Rev.
           21.
           15.
           
           
             The
             Angel
             had
             a
             golden
             Reed
             ,
             to
             measure
             the
             City
             ,
             and
             the
             gates
             thereof
             ,
             and
             the
             wall
             thereof
             ;
             and
             the
             City
             lieth
             four-square
             ,
             and
             the
             length
             is
             as
             large
             as
             the
             breadth
             .
             And
             he
             measured
             the
             City
             with
             a
             Reod
             ,
             twelve
             thousand
             furlongs
             .
          
           All
           these
           figurative
           expressions
           ,
           do
           set
           forth
           the
           repair
           of
           the
           Church
           ,
           in
           opposition
           to
           her
           waste
           ,
           in
           all
           Antichristian
           times
           .
           For
           in
           the
           beginning
           of
           these
           times
           ,
           the
           Angel
           was
           commanded
           
             to
             rise
             ,
             and
             to
             measure
             the
             Temple
             of
             God
             ,
             and
             the
             Altar
             ,
             and
             them
             that
             worship
             therein
             :
             but
             to
             leave
             out
             the
             Court
             that
             was
             without
             the
             Temple
             ,
             and
             not
             to
             measure
             it
             :
             for
             it
             was
             given
             to
             the
             Gentiles
             ,
             and
             the
             holy
             City
             should
             they
             tread
             under
          
           
           
             foot
             forty
             and
             two
             moneths
          
           ,
           Chap.
           11.
           ver
           .
           1
           ,
           2.
           
           The
           whole
           time
           of
           the
           Beasts
           Kingdome
           ,
           was
           the
           space
           of
           treading
           down
           the
           Holy
           City
           ,
           by
           Antichristian
           Gentiles
           .
           In
           opposition
           to
           the
           waste
           ,
           and
           conculcation
           ,
           the
           Angel
           doth
           measure
           the
           walls
           of
           the
           
             New
             Ierusalem
          
           ,
           and
           doth
           foretel
           the
           repair
           of
           the
           Church
           ,
           and
           the
           restitution
           of
           that
           glorious
           state
           ,
           which
           she
           shall
           have
           in
           the
           latter
           times
           .
           Much
           more
           might
           be
           spoken
           to
           the
           same
           purpose
           ;
           but
           this
           shall
           suffice
           to
           shew
           ,
           that
           the
           Tenet
           of
           the
           external
           glory
           of
           the
           Church
           ,
           will
           not
           bring
           us
           back
           again
           to
           Popery
           :
           neither
           is
           it
           absolutely
           so
           in
           all
           ,
           although
           it
           may
           be
           Antichristian
           in
           the
           position
           of
           some
           Circumstances
           onely
           .
           What
           if
           Rome
           Antichristian
           be
           called
           ,
           
             The
             Great
             City
             ,
             that
             ruleth
             over
             the
             Kings
             of
             the
             Earth
          
           ;
           Is
           not
           the
           
             New
             Ierusalem
             the
             Great
             City
             ,
             that
             cometh
             down
             from
             God
             out
             of
             Heaven
             ?
          
           What
           if
           Rome
           Antichristian
           
             be
             the
             Woman
             that
             is
             adorn'd
             with
             gold
             ,
             and
             silver
             ,
             and
             precious
             stones
             ,
          
           Chap.
           17.
           
           Is
           the
           Bride
           the
           Lambs
           Wife
           altogether
           destitute
           of
           these
           Ornaments
           ?
           
             Are
             not
             the
             streets
             of
             the
             City
             all
             of
             gold
             ,
             like
             to
             transparent
             glass
             ,
             Rev.
             Chap.
          
           21
           ?
           What
           if
           Rome
           Antichristian
           be
           the
           City
           ,
           
             whose
             Merchants
             be
             the
             great
             men
             of
             the
             earth
             ,
          
           Rev.
           Chap.
           18.
           
           Is
           not
           the
           
             New
             Ierusalem
          
           that
           City
           ,
           of
           whom
           also
           it
           is
           foretold
           ,
           that
           
             the
             Kings
             of
             the
             earth
             shall
             bring
             their
             glory
             to
             her
             ?
          
           Do
           not
           all
           the
           Prophets
           (
           specially
           the
           Prophet
           Isaiah
           )
           speak
           of
           the
           call
           of
           the
           Jews
           ,
           and
           of
           the
           glory
           of
           that
           Church
           that
           shall
           be
           in
           the
           latter
           days
           ?
           From
           all
           that
           hath
           been
           said
           ,
           we
           may
           conclude
           ,
           though
           the
           outward
           splendor
           of
           the
           Church
           may
           be
           Antichristian
           in
           some
           cases
           ,
           it
           may
           be
           truly
           Christian
           in
           others
           .
        
      
       
         
         
           
             CHAP.
             XV.
          
           Concerning
           th●…se
           things
           that
           are
           not
           Antichristian
           ,
           ●…ut
           are
           onely
           falsly
           so
           called
           by
           the
           Separation
           .
        
         
           VVE
           will
           not
           go
           over
           all
           the
           Points
           ,
           but
           insist
           onely
           upon
           those
           that
           are
           of
           greatest
           moment
           ;
           to
           wit
           ,
           Magistracy
           and
           Ministery
           .
           By
           these
           we
           may
           judge
           of
           the
           rest
           .
        
         
           For
           the
           standing
           of
           the
           Magistracy
           ,
           they
           take
           it
           to
           be
           Antichristian
           ,
           because
           they
           have
           a
           power
           over
           other
           men
           ;
           and
           the
           Beast
           ,
           his
           Heads
           ,
           and
           Horns
           ,
           in
           the
           Revelation
           and
           Daniel
           ,
           they
           finde
           by
           reading
           ,
           That
           these
           do
           signifie
           Empires
           ,
           Dominions
           ,
           and
           the
           Kingdomes
           of
           the
           world
           .
           But
           herein
           they
           are
           greatly
           deceived
           ;
           For
           in
           the
           Prophecies
           aforesaid
           ,
           the
           Beasts
           ,
           and
           their
           Horns
           ,
           do
           not
           absolutely
           signifie
           Empires
           &
           Dominions
           ,
           but
           Idolatrous
           Empires
           and
           Dominions
           ;
           and
           not
           absolutely
           Idolatrous
           Empires
           ,
           but
           such
           Empires
           and
           Dominions
           which
           do
           Lord
           and
           Tyrannize
           it
           over
           the
           Church
           of
           God
           ,
           and
           do
           try
           the
           faith
           and
           patience
           of
           the
           Saints
           .
           By
           many
           passages
           of
           the
           present
           Discourse
           ,
           we
           have
           sufficiently
           cleared
           the
           Point
           ,
           That
           when
           Christ
           shall
           begin
           his
           Reign
           upon
           Earth
           ,
           this
           will
           not
           be
           with
           the
           abrogation
           of
           all
           Magistracy
           ,
           Power
           and
           Authority
           ;
           onely
           the
           Authorities
           and
           Governments
           shall
           acknowledge
           him
           (
           as
           indeed
           he
           is
           )
           the
           onely
           Lord
           and
           Head
           of
           the
           Church
           .
           The
           Reign
           of
           the
           Lamb
           is
           immediately
           opposed
           to
           the
           Reign
           of
           the
           Beast
           :
           as
           therefore
           the
           Beast
           ,
           in
           the
           times
           of
           his
           Empire
           ,
           did
           not
           disannul
           the
           Being
           of
           Governments
           ,
           though
           they
           were
           under
           his
           Power
           and
           Headship
           ;
           no
           more
           will
           the
           Reign
           of
           the
           Lamb
           abrogate
           ,
           and
           take
           away
           the
           Governments
           of
           this
           world
           ,
           though
           they
           are
           made
           subject
           to
           his
           Laws
           .
           Magistracy
           is
           the
           Ordinance
           of
           God
           :
           they
           are
           guilty
           of
           a
           foul
           error
           then
           ,
           whosoever
           they
           be
           ,
           that
           shall
           go
           about
           to
           pluck
           up
           Magistracy
           ,
           under
           the
           colour
           and
           pretence
           of
           an
           Antichristian
           Encroachment
           .
        
         
           But
           this
           engine
           now
           a-days
           is
           more
           principally
           used
           against
           
           the
           Ministery
           ;
           the
           great
           designs
           to
           throw
           the
           Ministery
           out
           of
           the
           consciences
           of
           the
           people
           :
           and
           therefore
           they
           are
           told
           again
           and
           again
           ,
           That
           the
           Ministers
           are
           Antichristian
           in
           their
           Titles
           ,
           in
           their
           Ordination
           by
           Bishops
           ,
           in
           their
           Maintenance
           by
           Tythes
           ,
           &c.
           
           For
           Antichristianism
           in
           Title
           ,
           to
           make
           this
           good
           ,
           they
           reckon
           up
           a
           defamed
           Catalogue
           of
           Names
           ;
           the
           Pope
           ,
           Cardinals
           ,
           Archbishops
           ,
           Bishops
           ,
           Parsons
           ,
           Vicars
           ,
           Curats
           .
           But
           to
           this
           ,
           abundant
           satisfaction
           is
           given
           ,
           as
           by
           others
           ,
           so
           by
           the
           old
           Non-conformists
           themselves
           ,
           and
           specially
           by
           Mr.
           Ball
           ,
           in
           his
           Answer
           to
           Canne
           .
           Among
           many
           other
           passages
           ,
           these
           are
           his
           own
           words
           ,
           pag.
           45.
           
           
             To
             contend
             about
             the
             Name
             of
             Parson
             ,
             is
             vain
             and
             fr●…valous
             :
             but
             if
             we
             speak
             of
             the
             Office
             and
             Ministery
             ,
             as
             it
             is
             exercised
             by
             the
             godly
             ,
             learned
             ,
             and
             painful
             Ministers
             of
             the
             Church
             of
          
           England
           :
           
             for
             the
             substance
             thereof
             ,
             it
             is
             instituted
             of
             Christ
             ,
             acknowledged
             by
             all
             true
             Churches
             in
             the
             world
             ,
             ever
             since
             the
             first
             Plantation
             of
             the
             Christian
             Church
             ;
             known
             by
             all
             Reformed
             Churches
             at
             this
             day
             ,
             and
             so
             maintained
             by
             the
             Nonconformists
             .
             Against
             the
             Name
             ,
             some
             it
             may
             be
             have
             taken
             exception
             ;
             and
             against
             the
             pride
             ,
             idleness
             ,
             and
             covetousness
             of
             others
             ,
             much
             hath
             been
             written
             :
             but
             that
             the
             Office
             it self
             of
             Parson
             or
             Vicar
             ,
             as
             they
             preach
             the
             Gospel
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             ,
             and
             administer
             the
             Sacraments
             ,
             according
             to
             the
             institution
             of
             Christ
             ,
             and
             w●…tch
             over
             the
             flock
             committed
             to
             their
             charge
             ;
             that
             this
             Office
             ,
             I
             say
             ,
             sh●…uld
             be
             condemned
             as
             Antichristian
             by
             the
             Non-conformists
             ,
             is
             notoriously
             f●…lse
             ,
             and
             the
             contrary
             is
             apparently
             known
             to
             your self
             .
          
           In
           many
           passages
           of
           that
           learned
           Treatise
           ,
           this
           point
           is
           solidly
           disputed
           ,
           and
           the
           Reader
           may
           there
           finde
           ,
           That
           many
           things
           are
           termed
           Antichristian
           ,
           which
           are
           not
           ,
           but
           are
           falsly
           so
           called
           by
           the
           Separation
           .
           But
           touching
           the
           Ordination
           by
           the
           Bishop
           ,
           there
           is
           a
           greater
           accusation
           :
           
             The
             Pulpit-guard
             Routed
          
           hath
           these
           words
           :
           
             You
             your selves
             have
             concluded
             the
             Bishops
             Antichristian
             in
             their
             Calling
             ,
             and
             is
             yours
             Christian
             ?
             You
             had
             your
             outward
             Calling
             from
             them
             ,
             a●…d
             can
             they
             give
             you
             that
             they
             never
             had
             themselves
             ?
             If
             the
             Bishops
             were
             true
             Ministers
             ,
             and
             did
             rightly
             ordain
             ,
             why
             then
             did
             you
             preach
             them
             down
             as
             Antichristian
             ?
          
           This
           being
           the
           principal
           Objection
           ,
           it
           hath
           an
           Answer
           already
           in
           sundry
           Treatises
           ;
           so
           that
           my
           pains
           may
           be
           spared
           in
           the
           point
           .
           Onely
           
           because
           the
           present
           Discourse
           is
           concerning
           this
           subject
           ,
           what
           is
           Antichristian
           ,
           and
           what
           is
           not
           :
           we
           will
           propound
           these
           Quaeres
           to
           them
           that
           differ
           .
           First
           ,
           in
           case
           the
           Ministers
           as
           ordained
           by
           Bishops
           ,
           are
           Antichristian
           ;
           yet
           a
           great
           part
           of
           the
           Ministery
           in
           being
           ,
           did
           never
           partake
           of
           such
           an
           Ordination
           :
           they
           were
           made
           Ministers
           when
           the
           Bishops
           were
           not
           .
           Secondly
           ,
           though
           the
           Diocesan
           Bishop
           was
           not
           put
           down
           as
           Antichristian
           ;
           yet
           none
           can
           say
           ,
           That
           the
           formality
           of
           Antichristianism
           ,
           was
           or
           is
           primarily
           and
           immediately
           seated
           in
           him
           .
           For
           ,
           as
           I
           have
           shewed
           in
           all
           the
           passages
           of
           the
           Treatise
           aforegoing
           ,
           the
           formality
           of
           Antichristianism
           d●…th
           stand
           in
           the
           Universal
           Headship
           ;
           and
           this
           began
           to
           be
           set
           up
           many
           hundred
           years
           after
           the
           times
           of
           the
           Diocesan
           Bishop
           .
           All
           that
           can
           be
           said
           ,
           he
           is
           Antichristian
           ,
           so
           far
           as
           he
           doth
           symbolize
           with
           the
           Great
           Antichrist
           ,
           in
           Lordliness
           and
           Tyranny
           over
           the
           Church
           and
           People
           of
           God
           :
           and
           how
           much
           better
           are
           they
           ,
           that
           drive
           the
           trade
           of
           
             I
             am
             of
             Paul
             ,
             I
             am
             of
             Apollo
             ,
             I
             am
             of
             Cephas
             ?
          
           Surely
           in
           respect
           of
           their
           pride
           ,
           singularity
           ,
           and
           affectation
           to
           make
           rents
           and
           schisms
           in
           the
           Church
           ,
           they
           also
           may
           be
           termed
           Antichristian
           by
           Analogie
           and
           Reduction
           .
           Thirdly
           ,
           it
           is
           absolutely
           false
           ,
           that
           the
           Ordination
           of
           Ministers
           did
           formerly
           depend
           onely
           upon
           the
           Bishop
           :
           For
           by
           the
           Laws
           and
           Usages
           of
           this
           Church
           ,
           he
           could
           not
           Ordain
           without
           the
           assistance
           of
           other
           Ministers
           ;
           and
           the
           execution
           of
           his
           Office
           ,
           as
           to
           this
           point
           ,
           was
           not
           so
           much
           as
           Lord
           Bishop
           ,
           but
           as
           Minister
           and
           Elder
           in
           the
           Church
           .
           Fourthly
           ,
           let
           it
           be
           supposed
           ,
           that
           the
           power
           to
           Ordain
           had
           been
           wholly
           seated
           in
           the
           Diocesan
           ;
           the
           error
           and
           corruption
           in
           the
           instrument
           ,
           doth
           not
           disannul
           the
           institution
           of
           Christ.
           Ordination
           of
           Ministers
           is
           from
           Christ
           alone
           ,
           though
           the
           mean
           to
           transmit
           and
           convey
           it
           ,
           is
           from
           Men.
           Fifthly
           ,
           if
           any
           should
           go
           so
           far
           ,
           to
           cast
           away
           their
           Ordination
           ,
           because
           they
           have
           received
           it
           by
           the
           means
           of
           the
           Bishop
           ;
           must
           not
           they
           by
           the
           analogie
           and
           force
           of
           the
           same
           rule
           ,
           be
           driven
           upon
           this
           rock
           ,
           To
           renounce
           the
           Sacraments
           ,
           and
           all
           other
           Ordinances
           of
           Christ
           ,
           when
           they
           conceive
           that
           they
           are
           applied
           by
           the
           hand
           of
           evil
           Ministers
           ?
           And
           what
           is
           this
           but
           plain
           Popery
           ,
           to
           make
           the
           Ordinance
           of
           Christ
           wholly
           ●…o
           depend
           upon
           the
           personal
           worthiness
           
           or
           unworthiness
           of
           the
           administrator
           .
           For
           the
           maintenance
           of
           the
           Ministers
           by
           the
           Tythes
           ,
           they
           are
           most
           frivolous
           to
           affirm
           ,
           That
           this
           is
           an
           Antichristian
           provision
           .
           For
           what
           if
           this
           way
           of
           allowance
           hath
           been
           used
           in
           Antichristian
           times
           ,
           and
           hath
           been
           conveyed
           to
           us
           by
           the
           means
           of
           Antichristian
           men
           ;
           shall
           we
           therefore
           abdicate
           and
           cast
           it
           away
           as
           Antichristian
           ?
           By
           the
           same
           rule
           ,
           we
           must
           renounce
           the
           Articles
           of
           our
           Creed
           ,
           the
           Ten
           Commandments
           ,
           the
           Lords
           Prayer
           ,
           our
           Priviledges
           that
           we
           hold
           by
           
             Magna
             Charta
          
           ,
           our
           Lands
           that
           we
           possess
           
             in
             Capite
          
           ,
           and
           Socage
           ;
           and
           what
           not
           ?
           for
           these
           have
           been
           used
           in
           the
           times
           of
           Antichrist
           ,
           and
           have
           passed
           down
           to
           us
           by
           the
           means
           of
           Antichristian
           men
           .
           By
           all
           that
           hath
           been
           said
           ,
           it
           is
           clear
           ,
           That
           many
           things
           are
           called
           Antichristian
           ,
           which
           are
           not
           so
           ,
           but
           are
           falsly
           so
           termed
           by
           the
           Seperation
           .
           Yet
           nevertheless
           ,
           if
           Ministers
           or
           others
           have
           in
           any
           kinde
           acknowledged
           an
           Authority
           ,
           which
           is
           directly
           or
           indirectly
           ,
           mediately
           or
           immediately
           Antichristian
           ;
           so
           far
           as
           they
           have
           more
           or
           less
           acknowledged
           it
           ,
           so
           far
           they
           ought
           to
           mourn
           or
           repent
           .
           Antichristianism
           is
           a
           sin
           more
           directly
           and
           immediately
           against
           the
           Kingly
           Office
           of
           Christ
           :
           for
           which
           cause
           he
           hath
           denounced
           such
           heavy
           Judgements
           against
           it
           ,
           as
           we
           have
           formerly
           shewed
           .
           So
           far
           forth
           then
           as
           a
           man
           doth
           submit
           to
           an
           Authority
           ,
           and
           to
           the
           Laws
           made
           by
           an
           Authority
           that
           is
           contrary
           to
           Christ
           ;
           so
           far
           forth
           he
           doth
           sin
           against
           Christ
           :
           for
           this
           in
           effect
           ,
           is
           to
           put
           him
           out
           of
           place
           ,
           and
           to
           entertain
           his
           enemy
           in
           his
           room
           .
           Now
           this
           no
           pious
           man
           can
           or
           will
           do
           ,
           but
           he
           will
           easily
           apprehend
           it
           to
           be
           a
           piercing
           and
           wounding
           of
           Christ
           ;
           and
           for
           this
           
             he
             will
             go
             forth
             into
             the
             porch
             ,
             and
             weep
             bitterly
             .
          
           Thus
           I
           have
           divided
           the
           matter
           between
           two
           Extremes
           :
           Though
           Ministers
           and
           others
           are
           not
           to
           leave
           their
           stations
           ;
           yet
           as
           they
           have
           in
           any
           kinde
           sinned
           against
           the
           Authority
           of
           the
           true
           Head
           and
           King
           of
           the
           Church
           ,
           they
           have
           so
           far
           forth
           cause
           to
           
             judge
             themselves
             ,
             that
             they
             may
             not
             be
             judged
             .
          
        
         
           FINIS
        
      
    
     
       
         
         
           POSTSCRIPT
           .
        
         
           
             Courteous
             READER
             ,
          
        
         
           ALthough
           about
           two
           years
           since
           ,
           at
           the
           request
           of
           a
           Friend
           I
           lately
           reviewed
           it
           ;
           yet
           this
           Treatise
           of
           mine
           was
           finished
           certain
           years
           ago
           :
           Since
           that
           ,
           it
           hath
           met
           with
           many
           hindrances
           ;
           and
           now
           I
           believe
           (
           had
           not
           another
           occasion
           brought
           me
           up
           to
           the
           City
           )
           it
           had
           neither
           at
           this
           time
           come
           into
           publick
           view
           .
        
         
           All
           things
           considered
           ,
           the
           whole
           series
           and
           continual
           succession
           of
           impediments
           of
           years
           past
           ,
           and
           now
           onely
           the
           opportunity
           offered
           :
           By
           this
           I
           am
           induced
           to
           believe
           ,
           the
           publishing
           of
           these
           things
           ,
           is
           not
           so
           much
           by
           Humane
           Counsel
           ,
           as
           by
           Divine
           Providence
           .
        
         
           Perhaps
           ,
           Gods
           Work
           is
           now
           set
           on
           foot
           ,
           for
           the
           deliverance
           of
           his
           poor
           afflicted
           People
           :
           and
           it
           may
           be
           ,
           in
           this
           juncture
           of
           time
           ,
           some
           passages
           in
           this
           Treatise
           may
           be
           subservient
           to
           such
           ends
           .
           The
           Wise-man
           saith
           ,
           
             Words
             spoken
             in
             due
             season
             ,
             are
             like
             Apples
             of
             Gold
             in
             pictures
             of
             Silver
             .
          
           By
           the
           things
           that
           I
           have
           written
           ,
           thou
           mayest
           understand
           how
           ,
           and
           in
           what
           manner
           ,
           those
           Princes
           and
           Potentates
           of
           
           the
           Earth
           do
           sin
           ,
           Whosoever
           they
           be
           ,
           that
           hold
           up
           the
           Name
           and
           Headship
           of
           the
           Beast
           ,
           in
           direct
           opposition
           to
           the
           Name
           and
           Headship
           of
           the
           Lamb.
           Thou
           mayest
           further
           understand
           ,
           how
           greatly
           they
           do
           aggravate
           their
           sin
           ,
           that
           compass
           Sea
           and
           Land
           ,
           that
           make
           search
           and
           inquisition
           into
           every
           corner
           ,
           and
           persecute
           unto
           the
           death
           ,
           all
           that
           will
           not
           live
           in
           subjection
           to
           this
           Name
           or
           Headship
           .
           Hereby
           also
           thou
           mayest
           be
           informed
           ,
           what
           sympathy
           ,
           what
           bowels
           of
           affection
           thou
           shouldst
           shew
           to
           those
           that
           live
           under
           the
           Tyranny
           of
           the
           Beasts
           Kingdome
           .
           For
           i●…
           on
           the
           one
           side
           ,
           poor
           Souls
           do
           Worship
           the
           Beast
           ,
           receive
           his
           Mark
           and
           Name
           ;
           Christ
           (
           as
           he
           hath
           cause
           enough
           )
           doth
           denounce
           the
           most
           grievous
           Judgements
           against
           them
           ;
           On
           the
           other
           side
           ,
           if
           they
           refuse
           to
           subject
           their
           Consciences
           to
           his
           Papal
           determinations
           ;
           such
           is
           the
           hard
           condition
           of
           many
           Countreys
           ,
           that
           it
           is
           the
           loss
           of
           all
           ,
           yea
           of
           life
           it self
           .
           This
           is
           the
           Glassie
           Sea
           mingled
           with
           fire
           ,
           through
           which
           the
           Saints
           have
           passed
           ;
           which
           also
           they
           are
           yet
           in
           passing
           .
           But
           how
           few
           of
           us
           are
           sensible
           of
           their
           hard
           condition
           ?
           How
           few
           do
           mourn
           for
           the
           affliction
           of
           Ioseph
           ?
           If
           that
           be
           true
           ,
           that
           the
           Members
           of
           the
           Protestant
           Churches
           abroad
           are
           in
           imminent
           danger
           ;
           If
           they
           have
           been
           lately
           Massacred
           in
           Piedmont
           ,
           without
           sparing
           Age
           or
           Sex
           ;
           If
           they
           are
           bleeding
           in
           Switzerland
           ,
           divers
           there
           having
           been
           put
           to
           death
           for
           no
           fault
           ,
           but
           being
           Protestants
           ;
           If
           the
           designes
           be
           upon
           the
           whole
           Interest
           by
           the
           Popish
           Party
           ,
           almost
           in
           all
           places
           of
           Europe
           :
           Then
           we
           have
           reason
           to
           condole
           with
           our
           Brethren
           in
           their
           Sufferings
           .
           And
           the
           reading
           of
           the
           present
           Treatise
           ,
           will
           help
           us
           more
           clearly
           to
           see
           ,
           and
           judge
           of
           that
           which
           is
           the
           cause
           of
           the
           Quarrel
           .
           We
           shall
           see
           also
           ,
           what
           is
           the
           Minde
           of
           Christ
           concerning
           these
           things
           ,
           and
           to
           what
           issue
           they
           will
           be
           brought
           at
           the
           end
           of
           all
           .
        
         
           Hereby
           also
           thou
           mayest
           be
           advertised
           ,
           to
           beware
           of
           the
           Opinion
           of
           such
           ,
           that
           make
           the
           Christian
           Magistrate
           the
           Fountain
           of
           all
           Church-Power
           :
           This
           is
           to
           set
           up
           a
           Civil
           Anti-Christ
           ,
           in
           the
           stead
           of
           a
           Spiritual
           .
           Christ
           is
           the
           Head
           of
           his
           own
           Church
           ;
           and
           therefore
           he
           hath
           appointed
           Laws
           ,
           by
           
           which
           his
           Kingdome
           is
           to
           be
           governed
           ;
           Censures
           ,
           by
           which
           his
           rebellious
           Subjects
           are
           to
           be
           punished
           ;
           and
           Officers
           ,
           to
           dispense
           those
           Censures
           .
           If
           there
           be
           no
           such
           Name
           or
           Headship
           ,
           What
           should
           be
           the
           meaning
           of
           the
           Apostle
           ,
           when
           he
           speaketh
           of
           the
           Incestuous
           
             Corinthian
             ?
             Concerning
             him
             that
             hath
             done
             this
             deed
             ;
             in
             the
             Name
             of
             the
             Lord
             Iesus
             Christ
             ,
             when
             you
             are
             gathered
             together
             ,
             and
             my
             Spirit
             ,
             with
             the
             power
             of
             the
             Lord
             Iesus
             ,
             to
             deliver
             such
             a
             one
             to
             Satan
             ,
          
           1
           Cor.
           5.
           4.
           
           And
           in
           that
           other
           place
           ,
           
             Now
             we
             command
             you
             ,
             Brethren
             ,
             in
             the
             Name
             of
             the
             Lord
             Iesus
             ,
             that
             you
             withdraw
             your selves
             from
             every
             Brother
             that
             walketh
             disorderly
             ,
          
           2
           Thess.
           3.
           6.
           
           And
           in
           that
           Scripture
           ,
           
             Whatsoever
             ye
             shall
             binde
             on
             earth
             ,
             shall
             be
             bound
             in
             heaven
             :
             for
             where
             two
             or
             three
             are
             gathered
             together
             in
             my
             Name
             ,
             I
             will
             be
             in
             the
             midst
             of
             them
             ,
          
           Matth.
           18.
           ver
           .
           18
           ,
           19
           ,
           20.
           
           In
           these
           several
           places
           ,
           the
           Name
           of
           Christ
           is
           his
           Power
           and
           Headship
           in
           and
           over
           the
           Church
           his
           own
           House
           :
           which
           is
           not
           onely
           opposite
           to
           the
           Name
           of
           the
           Beast
           ,
           but
           in
           an
           inferior
           degree
           ,
           to
           that
           Spiritual
           Power
           and
           Supremacy
           which
           some
           would
           give
           to
           Princes
           and
           Potentates
           of
           the
           Earth
           .
           The
           London-Ministers
           in
           their
           Vindication
           ,
           do
           speak
           to
           good
           purpose
           ,
           when
           they
           say
           ,
           
             Christ
             Iesus
             is
             the
             onely
             Head
             of
             the
             Church
             ,
             governing
             it
             not
             onely
             inwardly
             and
             invisibly
             ,
             by
             the
             working
             of
             his
             Spirit
             ,
             but
             outwardly
             also
             and
             visibly
             ,
             as
             a
             Political
             Ministerial
             Body
             .
             In
             which
             he
             hath
             appointed
             his
             own
             proper
             Ambassadors
             ,
             Assemblies
             ,
             Laws
             ,
             Ordinances
             ,
             and
             Censures
             ,
             to
             be
             administred
             in
             his
             Name
             ,
             and
             according
             to
             his
             own
             way
             ,
          
           pag.
           4.
           
           By
           this
           account
           then
           ,
           they
           must
           be
           judged
           to
           come
           neer
           a
           very
           dangerous
           Errour
           ,
           whosoever
           they
           be
           ,
           that
           take
           this
           Name
           and
           Headship
           from
           him
           ,
           and
           give
           it
           to
           Temporal
           Princes
           .
           Calvin
           and
           other
           friends
           of
           ours
           ,
           have
           been
           much
           offended
           at
           the
           Title
           that
           was
           given
           to
           Henry
           the
           Eighth
           and
           his
           Successors
           :
           And
           our
           Adversaries
           also
           have
           hereby
           taken
           occasion
           to
           insult
           over
           us
           .
           For
           these
           are
           the
           words
           of
           Wadesworth
           ,
           in
           a
           Letter
           of
           his
           to
           Mr.
           
             Bedell
             :
             N●…r
             will
             I
          
           (
           saith
           he
           )
           
             insist
             upon
             the
             passions
             that
             moved
             King
          
           Henry
           
             violently
             to
             Divorce
             himself
             from
             his
             lawful
             Wife
             ;
             to
             fall
             out
             with
             the
             Pope
             his
             Friend
             ;
             ●…o
             Marry
             Lady
          
           Anne
           Bullen
           ,
           
             and
             soon
             after
             to
             Behead
             her
             ;
             to
             disinherit
          
           
           Queen
           Mary
           ,
           
             and
             to
             inable
             Queen
          
           Elizabeth
           ;
           
             and
             presently
             to
             disinherit
             Queen
          
           Elizabeth
           ,
           
             and
             to
             restore
             Queen
          
           Mary
           ;
           
             to
             hang
             Catholicks
             for
             Traytors
             ,
             and
             to
             burn
             Protestants
             for
             Hereticks
             ;
             to
             destroy
             Monasteries
             ;
             to
             pill
             Churches
             :
             Were
             these
             fit
             beginnings
             for
             the
             Gospel
             of
             Christ
             ?
             I
             pray
             was
             this
             man
             a
             good
             Head
             of
             Gods
             Church
             ?
             For
             my
             part
             ,
             I
             pray
             our
             Lord
             to
             bless
             me
             from
             being
             a
             Member
             of
             such
             a
             Head
             ,
             or
             such
             a
             Church
             ,
          
           pag.
           11.
           
           Now
           what
           saith
           Mr.
           Bedel
           to
           all
           this
           ?
           
             You
             demand
          
           ,
           saith
           he
           ,
           
             if
             this
             man
             King
          
           Henry
           
             were
             a
             good
             Head
             of
             Gods
             Church
             ?
             What
             if
             I
             should
             demand
             the
             same
             touching
          
           Alexander
           
             the
             sixth
          
           ,
           Julius
           
             the
             second
          
           ,
           Leo
           
             the
             tenth
             ,
             or
             twenty
             more
             of
             the
             Catalogue
             of
             Popes
             ,
             in
             respect
             of
             whom
             King
          
           Henry
           
             might
             be
             Canoniz'd
             for
             a
             Saint
             ?
             But
             there
             is
             a
             story
             in
          
           Tullies
           Offices
           ,
           
             of
             one
          
           Lutatius
           ,
           
             that
             laid
             a
             Wager
             ,
             That
             he
             was
          
           (
           bonus
           vir
           )
           
             a
             good
             man
             ,
             and
             would
             be
             judged
             by
             one
          
           Fimbria
           ,
           
             a
             man
             of
             Consular
             Dignity
             .
             He
             ,
             when
             he
             understood
             the
             case
             ,
             said
             ,
             He
             would
             never
             judge
             that
             matter
             ,
             lest
             either
             he
             should
             diminish
             the
             reputation
             of
             a
             man
             well
             esteemed
             of
             ;
             or
             set
             down
             that
             any
             man
             was
             a
             good
             man
             ,
             which
             he
             accounted
             to
             consist
             in
             an
             innumerable
             sort
             of
             excellencies
             and
             praises
             .
             That
             which
             he
             said
             of
             a
             good
             man
             ,
             with
             much
             more
             reason
             may
             I
             say
             of
             a
             good
             King
             ;
             one
             of
             whose
             highest
             excellencies
             ,
             is
             to
             be
             a
             good
             Head
             of
             the
             Church
             .
             And
             therefore
             it
             is
             a
             question
             which
             I
             will
             never
             take
             upon
             me
             to
             answer
             ,
             Whether
             King
          
           Henry
           
             was
             such
             or
             no
             ,
             unless
             you
             will
             before-hand
             interpret
             ,
             &c.
          
           pag.
           131.
           
           He
           hath
           some
           other
           passages
           concerning
           the
           use
           of
           the
           Authority
           of
           the
           said
           King
           ,
           in
           doing
           things
           that
           were
           good
           ,
           and
           in
           removing
           the
           Popes
           Tyranny
           :
           
             Which
             Acts
             of
             his
          
           (
           saith
           he
           )
           
             whosoever
             shall
             impartially
             consider
             of
             ,
             may
             well
             esteem
             him
             a
             better
             Head
             to
             the
             Church
             of
          
           England
           ,
           
             then
             any
             Pope
             these
             thousand
             years
             ,
          
           pag.
           132.
           
           But
           for
           my
           part
           ,
           I
           conceive
           here
           are
           two
           Questions
           to
           be
           answered
           ;
           Whether
           that
           King
           were
           rightly
           and
           truly
           a
           Head
           of
           the
           Church
           at
           all
           ?
           That
           being
           granted
           ;
           the
           second
           ,
           Whether
           he
           were
           a
           good
           one
           ,
           yea
           or
           no
           ?
           To
           determine
           these
           Questions
           ,
           I
           am
           clearly
           of
           Fimbria's
           judgement
           in
           that
           other
           case
           .
           As
           on
           the
           one
           part
           ,
           I
           am
           loth
           to
           diminish
           the
           lawful
           Power
           of
           Princes
           ,
           which
           they
           have
           ,
           they
           ought
           to
           have
           ,
           and
           ever
           had
           ,
           in
           disposing
           
           the
           affairs
           of
           the
           Church
           :
           so
           on
           the
           other
           side
           ,
           I
           conceive
           ,
           That
           it
           is
           too
           high
           to
           call
           Hen.
           8.
           or
           any
           other
           Supreme
           Magistrate
           ,
           an
           Head
           ,
           much
           more
           a
           good
           Head
           of
           the
           Church
           ;
           the
           eminency
           ,
           transcendency
           and
           sublimity
           of
           that
           Prerogative
           belonging
           to
           Christ
           alone
           .
           Our
           Princes
           have
           used
           such
           a
           Title
           ;
           and
           in
           the
           sense
           of
           the
           Statute
           ,
           in
           a
           moderate
           way
           ,
           the
           people
           have
           ascribed
           it
           to
           them
           ,
           to
           wit
           ,
           a
           Spiritual
           Power
           ,
           Authority
           and
           Jurisdiction
           ,
           that
           ever
           have
           belonged
           to
           Kings
           and
           Princes
           ,
           which
           
             David
             ,
             Solomon
          
           ,
           the
           Kings
           of
           Iudah
           ,
           and
           Christian
           Emperours
           have
           ever
           exercised
           in
           their
           respective
           Dominions
           .
           This
           ,
           no
           doubt
           ,
           hath
           been
           the
           sense
           of
           well-meaning
           men
           ;
           and
           so
           Mr.
           Bedel
           doth
           expound
           it
           in
           the
           forementioned
           place
           ,
           and
           pag.
           56.
           
           But
           for
           my
           part
           ,
           being
           inlightned
           and
           better
           informed
           ,
           I
           pray
           God
           such
           Titles
           be
           no
           more
           used
           ;
           and
           let
           that
           passage
           ,
           
             Next
             under
             thee
             and
             thy
             Christ
             ,
             in
             all
             Causes
             Ecclesiastical
             ,
             in
             these
             His
             Majesties
             Dominions
             ,
             Supreme
             Head
             and
             Governour
          
           ;
           Let
           the
           exuberancy
           of
           such
           a
           Title
           ,
           pass
           among
           the
           iniquity
           of
           our
           holy
           things
           .
           Our
           godly
           Friends
           have
           been
           offended
           at
           it
           ;
           our
           Enemies
           have
           insulted
           ;
           Experience
           hath
           shewed
           much
           danger
           in
           the
           use
           of
           it
           ;
           and
           the
           present
           Treatise
           ,
           I
           doubt
           not
           ,
           will
           shew
           what
           an
           evil
           thing
           it
           is
           ,
           to
           take
           away
           the
           Prerogative
           of
           Christ
           ,
           and
           to
           make
           other
           Heads
           of
           the
           Church
           in
           his
           room
           .
           Of
           all
           men
           living
           ,
           the
           Erastians
           have
           greatest
           cause
           to
           look
           to
           this
           :
           For
           let
           Princes
           be
           once
           told
           ,
           That
           there
           is
           no
           Church-Government
           in
           the
           Word
           of
           God
           ,
           and
           that
           they
           themselves
           are
           the
           sole
           Fountains
           of
           Church-Power
           ;
           By
           this
           means
           it
           will
           be
           effected
           ,
           That
           the
           Name
           and
           Power
           of
           Christ
           over
           his
           own
           Church
           will
           be
           plucked
           down
           ,
           and
           the
           Name
           and
           Headship
           of
           Princes
           will
           be
           onely
           set
           up
           .
           In
           matters
           of
           this
           nature
           ,
           if
           you
           give
           an
           Inch
           ,
           men
           will
           take
           an
           Ell.
           Rather
           for
           acts
           past
           ,
           we
           should
           often
           think
           upon
           that
           expression
           of
           the
           Prophet
           ,
           
             I
             will
             pour
             upon
             the
             House
             of
             David
             ,
             and
             the
             inhabitants
             of
             Ierusalem
             ,
             the
             Spirit
             of
             grace
             and
             supplication
             ;
             and
             they
             shall
             look
             to
             him
             whom
             they
             have
             pierced
             ,
          
           Zach.
           12.
           10.
           
           Christ
           is
           not
           onely
           pierced
           in
           a
           literal
           sense
           ,
           when
           his
           body
           is
           run
           thorow
           with
           a
           Spear
           ;
           but
           he
           is
           pierced
           also
           ,
           when
           his
           Name
           
           and
           Headship
           is
           taken
           away
           from
           him
           ,
           and
           given
           to
           another
           .
           So
           far
           as
           a
           whole
           Nation
           have
           been
           mediately
           or
           immediately
           ,
           directly
           or
           indirectly
           implicated
           and
           involved
           in
           such
           a
           sin
           ;
           so
           far
           I
           believe
           they
           ought
           to
           mourn
           .
           If
           this
           be
           not
           done
           ,
           God
           perhaps
           may
           rebuke
           us
           ,
           when
           our
           Armies
           go
           forth
           against
           those
           that
           Worship
           the
           Beast
           ,
           and
           uphold
           his
           Name
           and
           Headship
           ,
           in
           enmity
           to
           the
           Government
           of
           Christ.
           Though
           not
           in
           the
           favour
           of
           the
           enemy
           ,
           yet
           we
           may
           be
           chastised
           for
           our
           own
           faults
           ,
           and
           the
           Lord
           may
           be
           provoked
           to
           appear
           against
           us
           .
           When
           the
           Lamb
           went
           forth
           on
           his
           white
           Horse
           against
           the
           Beast
           and
           his
           Armies
           ,
           the
           Armies
           that
           followed
           ,
           
             were
             upon
             white
             Horses
             cloathed
             in
             fine
             linen
             ,
             white
             and
             clean
             ,
             Rev.
          
           19.
           14.
           
        
         
           Further
           also
           ,
           by
           the
           process
           of
           this
           Discourse
           ,
           information
           may
           be
           given
           to
           certain
           in
           these
           Times
           ,
           who
           being
           led
           by
           the
           meer
           shew
           and
           colour
           of
           some
           passages
           in
           the
           Prophesies
           ,
           do
           think
           it
           a
           part
           of
           their
           duty
           ,
           to
           level
           Magistracy
           ,
           abolish
           Laws
           ,
           and
           to
           turn
           all
           things
           up-side
           down
           ,
           in
           Church
           and
           Common-wealth
           .
           Of
           such
           I
           may
           say
           ,
           That
           they
           mingle
           the
           precious
           Truths
           of
           God
           ,
           with
           Fables
           of
           their
           own
           commenting
           .
           In
           the
           Metamorphosis
           of
           Ovid
           ,
           we
           reade
           of
           the
           Beginning
           of
           the
           World
           ,
           of
           the
           Chaos
           ,
           of
           the
           Giants
           heaping
           of
           Pelion
           upon
           Ossa
           ,
           of
           Deucalions
           Flood
           ,
           of
           the
           Four
           Ages
           ,
           of
           the
           Golden
           ,
           the
           Silver
           ,
           the
           Brazen
           ,
           and
           the
           Iron
           Age.
           These
           things
           are
           not
           all
           Fictions
           ,
           because
           they
           have
           some
           ground
           of
           truth
           in
           the
           Scripture
           ;
           neither
           are
           they
           all
           truths
           ,
           because
           they
           are
           mingled
           with
           Fictions
           of
           the
           invention
           of
           man.
           Of
           the
           same
           kinde
           are
           some
           Authors
           ,
           who
           are
           for
           the
           Fifth
           Monarchy
           ;
           they
           think
           ,
           that
           the
           setting
           up
           of
           the
           Kingdome
           of
           Christ
           ,
           will
           be
           the
           Dissolution
           of
           all
           Earthly
           Kingdomes
           .
           But
           by
           the
           purport
           and
           whole
           drift
           of
           the
           present
           Discourse
           ,
           they
           may
           understand
           ,
           That
           the
           Kingdome
           of
           Christ
           is
           not
           contrary
           to
           Governments
           ,
           Powers
           and
           Authorities
           ,
           purely
           as
           such
           ;
           but
           onely
           to
           Governments
           as
           Idolatrous
           ,
           as
           Tyrannical
           ,
           as
           contrary
           to
           the
           Laws
           of
           Christ
           ,
           and
           of
           his
           Church
           .
           In
           the
           Prophecy
           of
           Daniel
           ,
           the
           Empire
           of
           Babel
           is
           resembled
           to
           a
           Lyon
           ;
           of
           Persia
           ,
           to
           a
           Bear
           ;
           of
           Greece
           ,
           to
           a
           Leopard
           ;
           
           of
           Rome
           ,
           to
           a
           Beast
           of
           divers
           shapes
           .
           All
           these
           Monarchies
           erected
           and
           set
           up
           on
           the
           ruines
           of
           the
           Davidical
           Kingdome
           ,
           are
           parallell'd
           to
           so
           many
           Beasts
           .
           Bu●…
           to
           what
           Beast
           shall
           we
           resemble
           (
           in
           its
           right
           constitution
           )
           the
           Davidical
           Kingdome
           it self
           ?
           In
           the
           Book
           of
           the
           Revelation
           ,
           the
           Angel
           doth
           expresly
           say
           ,
           That
           there
           were
           
             eight
             Kings
             ;
             and
             yet
             the
             Beast
             had
             but
             seven
             Heads
             ,
          
           Chap.
           17.
           
           How
           can
           this
           be
           ?
           I
           have
           fully
           proved
           ,
           That
           the
           Dynasty
           ,
           Race
           and
           Succession
           of
           the
           Christian
           Caesars
           ,
           do
           make
           the
           seventh
           Roman
           King
           ,
           but
           no
           Head
           of
           the
           Beast
           .
           Therefore
           the
           Mediatori●…n
           Kingdom
           of
           Christ
           is
           not
           contrary
           to
           Governments
           ,
           as
           such
           ;
           neither
           is
           nor
           ever
           shall
           be
           built
           upon
           the
           ruines
           of
           Governments
           ,
           as
           Governments
           ,
           but
           upon
           the
           ruines
           of
           Governments
           onely
           as
           Tyrannical
           ,
           and
           opposite
           to
           the
           Laws
           of
           the
           Gospel
           .
           There
           is
           no
           such
           cause
           then
           ,
           why
           solid
           and
           judicious
           men
           in
           these
           dayes
           ,
           should
           set
           aside
           this
           kinde
           of
           Learning
           ,
           which
           is
           so
           much
           for
           the
           Credit
           &
           Authority
           of
           the
           Christian
           Magistrate
           .
           And
           for
           the
           Government
           of
           the
           Church
           in
           some
           Points
           (
           if
           I
           am
           not
           mistaken
           )
           there
           is
           in
           this
           Prophecy
           as
           strong
           ,
           if
           not
           stronger
           proof
           then
           in
           any
           other
           Book
           of
           the
           New
           Testament
           .
           As
           for
           Example
           :
           Though
           Bishops
           are
           put
           down
           ,
           the
           Service-Book
           taken
           away
           ,
           the
           Ordination
           of
           Ministers
           brought
           neerer
           the
           Rule
           ;
           all
           this
           being
           done
           ,
           men
           are
           not
           pleased
           .
           What
           is
           the
           cause
           of
           the
           Difference
           ?
           The
           difficulty
           lies
           in
           the
           Church-state
           .
           Robinson
           and
           others
           of
           that
           way
           ,
           do
           plead
           ,
           That
           we
           have
           no
           Example
           for
           a
           National
           Church
           in
           the
           New
           Testament
           ;
           and
           the
           bringing
           in
           of
           whole
           Nations
           by
           the
           power
           of
           the
           Magistrate
           ,
           this
           is
           the
           principal
           Rock
           of
           Offence
           .
           I
           confess
           it
           is
           true
           ,
           that
           we
           have
           no
           Example
           of
           a
           National
           Church
           in
           the
           Apostles
           time
           .
           For
           how
           could
           all
           Nations
           come
           in
           at
           that
           particular
           instant
           ,
           when
           the
           greater
           part
           of
           them
           did
           still
           remain
           in
           their
           Idolatries
           ,
           and
           the
           Emperors
           themselves
           were
           the
           greatest
           Enemies
           of
           the
           Church
           ?
           Now
           if
           we
           apply
           our selves
           to
           the
           Book
           of
           the
           Revelation
           ,
           we
           shall
           plainly
           see
           ,
           how
           the
           Spirit
           doth
           foretel
           ,
           That
           after
           the
           Preaching
           of
           the
           Gospel
           ,
           the
           Church
           should
           fall
           under
           grievous
           Persecutions
           ,
           in
           all
           the
           times
           of
           the
           Pagan
           Caesars
           :
           when
           that
           time
           is
           ended
           ,
           
           the
           Empire
           it self
           shall
           become
           Christian.
           What
           else
           should
           be
           the
           meaning
           of
           that
           expression
           ?
           
             Now
             is
             come
             Salvation
             and
             Strength
             ,
             and
             the
             Kingdome
             of
             our
             God
             ,
             and
             the
             Power
             of
             his
             Christ
             ,
          
           Rev.
           12.
           10.
           
           This
           doth
           note
           no
           other
           ,
           but
           the
           setting
           up
           of
           the
           Gospel
           in
           the
           Throne
           ,
           in
           the
           times
           of
           Constantine
           the
           Great
           .
           After
           these
           things
           ,
           he
           sheweth
           the
           fall
           of
           the
           Empire
           ,
           and
           the
           rising
           of
           the
           Ten
           Kings
           ,
           by
           the
           Emblem
           of
           a
           Beast
           with
           ten
           Horns
           ,
           that
           came
           up
           out
           of
           the
           Sea
           ,
           Chap.
           13.
           ver
           .
           1.
           
           This
           Beast
           doth
           signifie
           the
           Roman
           Tyranny
           in
           the
           last
           and
           the
           Antichristian
           Edition
           .
           And
           he
           further
           addeth
           ,
           in
           the
           latter
           times
           of
           this
           Kingdome
           ,
           that
           the
           
             Eternal
             Gospel
             shall
             be
             preached
             to
             every
             Kindred
             ,
             Tongue
             and
             Nation
             ,
          
           Chap.
           14.
           ver
           .
           6.
           
           &
           7.
           
           Then
           also
           ,
           the
           deceived
           Kings
           shall
           be
           undeceived
           ;
           and
           ,
           
             The
             Kingdomes
             of
             this
             world
             ,
             shall
             become
             the
             Kingdomes
             of
             our
             Lord
             ,
             and
             of
             his
             Christ
             ,
          
           Chap.
           11.
           15.
           
           That
           is
           ,
           those
           Kingdomes
           which
           formerly
           were
           the
           Kingdomes
           of
           the
           Beast
           ,
           shall
           become
           subject
           to
           the
           Laws
           of
           Christ
           ,
           and
           of
           his
           Gospel
           .
           Here
           is
           a
           plain
           Example
           (
           though
           not
           in
           the
           Age
           of
           the
           Apostles
           )
           of
           whole
           Christian
           Nations
           in
           the
           times
           of
           the
           Gospel
           .
           I
           willingly
           yield
           ,
           That
           the
           preaching
           of
           the
           Gospel
           is
           that
           by
           and
           through
           which
           ,
           primarily
           ,
           and
           immediately
           ,
           Churches
           are
           gathered
           :
           yet
           by
           the
           Authority
           of
           the
           Magistrate
           ,
           the
           same
           Gospel
           also
           is
           countenanced
           ,
           Laws
           are
           made
           ,
           Parishes
           are
           divided
           ,
           Ministers
           maintained
           ,
           and
           the
           Body
           of
           the
           Nation
           brought
           to
           attend
           to
           that
           which
           is
           ,
           or
           at
           least
           may
           be
           ,
           the
           mean
           of
           their
           Salvation
           .
           I
           cannot
           think
           ,
           but
           with
           great
           horrour
           ,
           what
           would
           ensue
           ,
           if
           the
           Designs
           of
           some
           men
           should
           take
           place
           :
           It
           would
           be
           the
           very
           Abaddon
           and
           Apollyon
           to
           the
           Church
           of
           God.
           But
           let
           us
           look
           what
           is
           spoken
           of
           the
           Kings
           of
           
             Europe
             ,
             They
             shall
             hate
             the
             Whore
             ,
             and
             make
             her
             desolate
             and
             naked
             ,
             and
             shall
             burn
             her
             flesh
             with
             fire
             ,
          
           Chap.
           17.
           
           If
           they
           shall
           hate
           the
           Whore
           ,
           then
           they
           shall
           destroy
           the
           Idolatries
           and
           Superstitions
           of
           that
           Church
           ,
           which
           they
           did
           formerly
           so
           love
           and
           admire
           :
           and
           on
           the
           contrary
           part
           ,
           they
           shall
           countenance
           the
           Gospel
           ,
           bring
           in
           their
           People
           ,
           and
           do
           as
           much
           for
           the
           Church
           of
           Christ
           ,
           which
           they
           did
           formerly
           persecute
           and
           hate
           .
           Of
           the
           
             New
             Ierusalem
          
           it
           is
           said
           ,
           The
           
           
             Kings
             of
             the
             Earth
             shall
             bring
             their
             glory
             to
             her
             ,
          
           Chap
           21.
           
           But
           lest
           any
           should
           think
           ,
           That
           this
           is
           meant
           onely
           of
           the
           Glory
           of
           the
           Church
           in
           Heaven
           ;
           Let
           sundry
           passages
           of
           the
           Prophet
           Esay
           be
           considered
           :
           The
           scope
           of
           all
           whi●…h
           is
           to
           shew
           ,
           That
           the
           Kings
           of
           the
           Earth
           shall
           bring
           their
           Glory
           unto
           the
           Church
           .
           There
           is
           much
           spoken
           also
           of
           the
           coming
           in
           of
           whole
           Nations
           ,
           of
           the
           Conversion
           of
           Kings
           ,
           and
           the
           adorning
           of
           the
           Church
           by
           the
           bounty
           of
           Kings
           :
           Reade
           Chap.
           60.
           
             per
             totum
          
           ,
           with
           many
           other
           places
           .
        
         
           If
           these
           things
           were
           rightly
           considered
           ,
           men
           would
           not
           have
           such
           prejudices
           against
           a
           National
           Constitution
           ,
           and
           setting
           up
           of
           the
           Gospel
           ,
           by
           the
           Authority
           ,
           Power
           and
           Command
           of
           Kings
           and
           Princes
           .
           What
           shall
           we
           make
           of
           the
           Reign
           of
           Christ
           upon
           the
           Earth
           ?
           Is
           it
           not
           directly
           and
           diametrally
           opposite
           to
           the
           Reign
           of
           the
           Beast
           ?
           And
           the
           Reign
           of
           the
           Beast
           ,
           let
           the
           Angel
           himself
           ,
           together
           with
           our
           own
           experience
           ,
           shew
           ,
           wherein
           the
           formality
           and
           the
           being
           thereof
           doth
           consist
           .
           So
           he
           speaketh
           :
           
             The
             Horns
             which
             thou
             sawest
             are
             ten
             Kings
             ,
             which
             have
             received
             no
             Kingdome
             as
             yet
             ;
             but
             receive
             power
             as
             Kings
             one
             hour
             with
             the
             Beast
             :
             These
             have
             one
             minde
             ,
             and
             shall
             give
             their
             power
             and
             strength
             unto
             the
             Beast
             :
             These
             shall
             make
             war
             with
             the
             Lamb
             ,
             but
             the
             Lamb
             shall
             overcome
             them
             ;
             for
             he
             is
             the
             Lord
             of
             lords
             ,
             and
             King
             of
             kings
             ,
          
           Rev.
           17.
           ver
           .
           12
           ,
           13
           ,
           14.
           
           The
           effence
           of
           the
           Kingdome
           of
           the
           Beast
           lyeth
           in
           the
           Confederacy
           of
           Kings
           ,
           and
           in
           their
           yielding
           themselves
           to
           the
           Name
           and
           Headship
           of
           the
           Bishop
           of
           Rome
           .
           This
           is
           the
           Reign
           of
           the
           Beast
           upon
           the
           Earth
           .
           So
           by
           the
           Rule
           of
           Proportion
           ,
           the
           Reign
           of
           Christ
           and
           of
           the
           Lamb
           shall
           be
           in
           the
           holy
           association
           and
           concurrence
           of
           Christian
           Princes
           ,
           to
           set
           up
           the
           Gospel
           of
           Christ
           ,
           his
           Name
           and
           Headship
           ,
           as
           the
           Regent-Law
           among
           the
           Nations
           .
           From
           all
           that
           hath
           been
           said
           ,
           it
           is
           cleer
           ,
           That
           this
           Doctrine
           is
           not
           contrary
           to
           the
           Authority
           of
           Magistrates
           ;
           nay
           ,
           it
           is
           most
           forcible
           and
           effectual
           to
           establish
           the
           Laws
           and
           Government
           of
           the
           Church
           .
        
         
           Upon
           the
           same
           grounds
           I
           do
           here
           desire
           to
           speak
           a
           word
           or
           two
           ;
           and
           Oh
           that
           I
           could
           speak
           it
           with
           tears
           !
           The
           Reformation
           in
           Germany
           ,
           and
           now
           lately
           in
           England
           ,
           hath
           been
           ,
           
           and
           yet
           is
           much
           deformed
           ,
           by
           abalienation
           of
           the
           Churches
           Revenue
           ,
           and
           in
           passing
           away
           that
           which
           former
           Ages
           have
           bestowed
           (
           I
           may
           speak
           of
           a
           great
           part
           at
           least
           )
           upon
           the
           preaching
           of
           the
           Gospel
           .
           These
           are
           Scandals
           to
           the
           Enemy
           .
           Let
           our
           Consciences
           in
           the
           mean
           while
           judge
           ,
           Whether
           this
           be
           not
           a
           Scandal
           given
           ,
           rather
           then
           a
           Scandal
           taken
           :
           Whether
           we
           do
           not
           open
           the
           mouthes
           of
           the
           Enemies
           of
           the
           Lord
           to
           speak
           evil
           of
           the
           Reformation
           :
           And
           whether
           we
           are
           not
           faulty
           in
           this
           Point
           .
           Moses
           went
           in
           Gods
           way
           ,
           and
           by
           his
           Command
           ,
           and
           it
           was
           a
           glorious
           work
           to
           deliver
           Israel
           from
           the
           Bondage
           of
           Egypt
           :
           yet
           withall
           ,
           when
           he
           was
           in
           the
           discharge
           of
           so
           excellent
           a
           work
           ,
           
             then
             the
             Lord
             stood
             in
             the
             Way
             to
             kill
             him
             ,
          
           Exod.
           4.
           24.
           
           Our
           Armies
           are
           going
           forth
           against
           the
           Enemies
           ,
           and
           the
           Prote●…ant
           Armies
           are
           like
           to
           go
           forth
           more
           and
           more
           :
           These
           are
           the
           times
           ,
           or
           at
           least
           do
           border
           upon
           the
           times
           of
           
             the
             Su●…per
             of
             the
             Fowls
          
           ,
           of
           
             the
             great
             Vintage
          
           ,
           of
           
             th●…
             Bat●…el
             of
             Armageddon
          
           .
           There
           are
           like
           to
           be
           great
           Commotions
           of
           State
           ,
           Army
           against
           Army
           ,
           in
           the
           times
           of
           the
           end
           of
           the
           Beasts
           Kingdome
           .
           And
           therefore
           by
           collation
           of
           all
           Circumstances
           ,
           we
           cannot
           be
           fat
           off
           from
           the
           performance
           of
           all
           that
           hath
           been
           foretold
           .
           It
           is
           meet
           for
           us
           to
           see
           our
           own
           sins
           ,
           and
           specially
           that
           which
           I
           have
           hinted
           ,
           before
           we
           go
           on
           in
           the
           Lords
           work
           .
        
         
           These
           things
           I
           have
           thought
           good
           to
           annex
           by
           way
           of
           Appendi●…
           .
           My
           purpose
           is
           not
           to
           speak
           any
           thing
           to
           please
           ,
           or
           di●…please
           any
           Party
           :
           Neither
           can
           I
           tell
           ,
           how
           any
           Party
           will
           be
           pleased
           with
           me
           :
           it
           may
           be
           I
           may
           displease
           all
           .
           However
           ,
           I
           do
           desire
           to
           please
           mine
           own
           Conscience
           ,
           in
           delivering
           that
           which
           I
           conceive
           to
           be
           a
           Truth
           of
           God.
           
        
         
           There
           is
           one
           thing
           whi●…h
           I
           think
           meet
           more
           ●…ully
           to
           explain
           my self
           in
           .
           I
           have
           ,
           in
           the
           preceding
           Treatise
           ,
           made
           it
           a
           good
           part
           of
           my
           work
           ,
           to
           prove
           the
           Roman
           to
           be
           the
           Fourth
           ,
           and
           the
           last
           Metal
           Kingdome
           ;
           and
           that
           the
           Roman
           doth
           begin
           in
           the
           consideration
           and
           notion
           of
           such
           a
           Kingdome
           ,
           when
           the
           Church
           ,
           and
           the
           Con●…inent
           of
           the
           Church
           ,
           came
           under
           the
           Dominion
           and
           Soveraignty
           of
           the
           People
           of
           Rome
           .
           This
           I
           know
           the
           followers
           of
           Iunius
           will
           not
           away
           with
           ;
           and
           
           many
           learned
           men
           in
           these
           times
           do
           follow
           this
           way
           of
           Interpretation
           .
           But
           because
           we
           will
           not
           unnecessarily
           controvert
           ,
           and
           make
           our selves
           more
           enemies
           then
           needs
           ;
           we
           will
           be
           content
           to
           say
           ,
           That
           the
           Roman
           doth
           begin
           at
           the
           end
           or
           ending
           of
           all
           four
           Metal-Kingdomes
           ;
           and
           where
           they
           end
           ,
           in
           the
           method
           ,
           order
           ,
           and
           way
           of
           account
           ,
           the
           Roman
           doth
           begin
           .
           And
           whereas
           we
           have
           endeavored
           ,
           Chap.
           6.
           pag.
           116.
           to
           prove
           the
           beginning
           of
           the
           Roman
           as
           
             The
             fourth
             Metal-Kingdome
          
           ,
           to
           be
           at
           that
           instant
           of
           time
           ,
           when
           the
           Church
           came
           under
           the
           Dominion
           of
           that
           People
           ;
           the
           same
           Arguments
           (
           
             mutatis
             mutandis
          
           )
           will
           prove
           the
           beginning
           of
           the
           Roman
           ,
           at
           the
           end
           of
           all
           four
           Metal-Kingdomes
           .
           And
           so
           the
           followers
           of
           Iunius
           and
           we
           shall
           agree
           in
           the
           substance
           of
           the
           Interpretation
           .
           Let
           us
           compute
           the
           Name
           or
           Universal
           Headship
           of
           the
           Bishop
           of
           Rome
           ,
           (
           as
           Decreed
           and
           Enacted
           under
           the
           Emperor
           Phocas
           )
           and
           in
           that
           series
           and
           way
           of
           account
           ,
           it
           will
           be
           666
           years
           from
           the
           beginning
           of
           the
           Roman
           ,
           as
           that
           great
           Empire
           doth
           succeed
           ,
           at
           the
           end
           of
           the
           four
           Metal-Kingdomes
           .
           Here
           is
           the
           Name
           of
           the
           Beast
           ,
           and
           the
           Calculation
           according
           to
           the
           Number
           of
           a
           Man
           ,
           according
           to
           the
           Divisions
           and
           Parts
           of
           the
           Body
           of
           Man
           in
           Daniels
           Image
           .
           If
           we
           go
           either
           way
           ,
           the
           Account
           will
           be
           made
           good
           .
        
         
           FINIS
           .
        
      
       
         Notes, typically marginal, from the original text
         
           Notes for div A61453-e170
           
             
               Hier.
               in
               Levit.
            
             Quot
             verba
             ,
             tot
             mysteria
             ;
             quot
             syllaba
             ,
             tot
             sacramenta
             .
          
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             
          
           
             Iren.
             lib.
             2.
             c.
             39.
             l.
             3.
             c.
             3.
             ●…us
             .
             l.
             3.
             c.
             23.
             
             Epiph.
             Haeres
             .
             51.
             
          
           
             Rev.
             16.
             
          
           
             Acts
             1.
             7.
             
          
        
         
           Notes for div A61453-e8010
           
             *
             In
             his
             Treatise
             concerning
             the
             Kingdom
             of
             Christ
             upon
             the
             Earth
             .
          
           
             Note
             .
          
           
             Note
             .
          
           
             Note
             .
          
           
             Note
             .
          
        
         
           Notes for div A61453-e20030
           
             *
             And
             besides
             the
             Testimonies
             of
             
               Josephus
               ,
               Dio
            
             the
             Historian
             〈◊〉
             .
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             Iews
             〈◊〉
             Tax●…d
             by
             Gabinius
             ,
             〈◊〉
             .
             3●…
             .
          
           
             Note
             .